PP3 C878e3

SERVICE MANUAL
DIGITAL MINILAB
FRONTIER
350/370
Third Edition
PP3-C878E3
INTRODUCTION
This Servicing Manual outlines the maintenance and servicing procedures for the system software Version 7.0 or
earlier of the Fujifilm Digital Minilab FRONTIER 350/370 SP1500/SP2000 and LP1500SC/LP2000SC.
This manual is a professional publication provided for qualified service personnel or persons fully trained in
equipment service procedures. All other personnel and operators are restricted from servicing the SP1500/
SP2000 and LP1500SC/LP2000SC. When maintenance service is needed, be sure to contact qualified service
personnel.
Precautions Generally Applying to All Servicing Operations

! WARNING
When servicing internal machine parts, make sure the power switch and the main power supply on the power distribution
board are both set to the OFF position.
If the main power is left ON, electricity will flow as far as the power switch and power supply section, and this can cause
electric shocks and/or short-circuiting.
If the power is left on, there is also the possibility for the machine to maybe accidentally activated causing damage to the
machine and/or bodily injury.
! CAUTION
The light source section and dryer will be hot to the touch. Wait 15 minutes after turning off the power before commencing
with servicing procedures.
• Wear gloves when handling the optical system parts to keep the parts free from fingerprints.
• When mounting machine parts, take care not to sandwich any of the wires.
• Each of the connectors is provided with a symbol indicating what it is to be connected to. Make sure the connectors are
connected to the connectors, harness ends or parts bearing the corresponding symbols.
• The plastic connectors have a locking catch on the plug (male) end. To disconnect one of these connectors, loosen the
catch first; to connect, make sure the catch engages (locks).
Service Manual Appropriations
1. All rights are reserved by the Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. (FUJIFILM).
2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service

personnel.
3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore

proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited.
4. FUJIFILM’s prior consent is required in regard to the following.
K Manual copying in whole or in part.

K Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel.
K Manual uses for purposes other than technical service.
1. SAFETY 1
2. MAIN SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE INFORMATION 2
3. MENU TABLE 3
4. OUTLINE 4
5. OPERATION SEQUENCES 5
6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS 6
7. MESSAGES 7
8. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 8
9. MAINTENANCE MENU 9
10. I/O CHECK 10
11. OPERATION SECTION 11
12. LIGHT SOURCE SECTION 12
13. SCANNER SECTION 13
14. SCANNER ELECTRICAL SECTION 14
15. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION 15
16. EXPOSURE SECTION 16
17. DISTRIBUTION SECTION 17
18. PRINTER CONTROL SECTION 18
19. PROCESSOR SECTION 19
20. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM 20
21. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM 21
22. DRYER SECTION 22
23. PRINT EXIT SECTION/SORTER 23
24. PROCESSOR ELECTRICAL SECTION 24
25. INDEX 25
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY ................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1 Laser Radiation Safety ................................................................................................................ 1-2

1.1.1 Laser Radiation Safety ....................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Laser Warning Label ......................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Safety Indication ........................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 Caution Label Locations on Scanner/Image Processor .................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 Caution Label Locations on Printer/Paper Processor ......................................................... 1-5
1.2.3 Laser Caution Label Locations on Printer .......................................................................... 1-7
1.3 Processing Chemical (CP-48S) Handling Precautions ................................................................ 1-8
1.4 Certification and Identification Labels .......................................................................................... 1-9
1.4.1 Certification and Identification Label Locations on Scanner/Image Processor ................... 1-9
1.4.2 Certification and Identification Label Locations on Printer/Paper Processor ...................... 1-10
2. MAIN SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE INFORMATION .................................................... 2-1
2.1 Input Unit (Scanner and Image Processor SP1500/SP2000) ...................................................... 2-2
2.2 Output Unit (Laser Printer/Paper Processor LP1500SC/LP2000SC) .......................................... 2-3
2.3 Processing Solution Preparation .................................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.1 Handling Precautions ......................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.2 Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure ......................................................................... 2-4
2.3.3 Required Chemicals (CP-48S) When Replacing Solutions ............................................... 2-4
2.3.4 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) for LP1500SC .................................................. 2-5
2.3.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) for LP2000SC .................................................. 2-6
2.4 Adjustment Jig .............................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.5 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement .......................................................................... 2-9
2.5.1 Operation Section ............................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.2 Light Source Section ......................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.3 Scanner Section ................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.5.4 Scanner Electrical Section .................................................................................................. 2-10
2.5.5 Paper Supply Section ......................................................................................................... 2-10
2.5.6 Exposure Section ............................................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.7 Distribution Section ............................................................................................................. 2-11
2.5.8 Printer Control Section ....................................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.9 Processing Solution Replenishment System ...................................................................... 2-11
2.5.10 Print Exit Section/Sorter .................................................................................................... 2-12
3. MENU TABLE ..................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Menu Table .................................................................................................................................. 3-2

3.2 Printer/Processor Operation Panel Menu Table .......................................................................... 3-6
3.3 Operation Panel Menu Flow ......................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.1 0 [MENU] Item .................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.2 1 [LANGUAGE] Item ........................................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.3 2 [CHECK] Item .................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.3.4 3 [SELECT FUNC.] Item .................................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.5 4 [PRINT COND.] Item ....................................................................................................... 3-11
4
CONTENTS
3.3.6 5 [SPECIAL PRINT] Item .................................................................................................... 3-12

3.3.7 6 [SYSTEM] Item ................................................................................................................ 3-16
3.3.8 7 [INSTALLATION] Item .................................................................................................... 3-19
4. OUTLINE .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Scanner (SP1500/SP2000) ......................................................................................................... 4-3

4.1.1 Light Source/Scanner Section Configurations .................................................................... 4-3
4.1.2 Optical and Filter Configurations ........................................................................................ 4-4
4.1.3 Auto Film Carrier NC135Y Configuration ........................................................................... 4-5
4.1.4 Auto Film Carrier NC240Y Configuration ........................................................................... 4-7
4.1.5 Auto Film Carrier Speed Control Clutch Functions ............................................................. 4-9
4.1.6 Electrical Equipment Configurations .................................................................................. 4-10
4.1.7 Circuit Board Configurations and Functions ...................................................................... 4-11
4.1.8 Electrical Equipment Block Diagram .................................................................................. 4-12
4.1.9 Image Data Transfer ........................................................................................................... 4-13
4.1.10 CTB20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................................... 4-15
4.1.11 CCD20 Circuit Board (CCD Unit) ....................................................................................... 4-17
4.1.12 CDS20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-18
4.1.13 GMB20/GMC20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................... 4-19
4.1.14 GFM20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-20
4.1.15 GIP20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................................... 4-21
4.1.16 GLO20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-22
4.1.17 GIS20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................................... 4-23
4.1.18 CYB20 Circuit Board (NC135Y) ......................................................................................... 4-24
4.1.19 CYC20 Circuit Board (NC240Y) ......................................................................................... 4-25
4.2 Printer Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ...................................................................................... 4-26
4.2.1 Paper Supply Section Configuration .................................................................................. 4-26
4.2.2 Paper Supply Section Feed Roller Configuration ............................................................... 4-27
4.3 Exposure Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) .................................................................................. 4-28
4.3.1 Exposure Section Configuration ......................................................................................... 4-28
4.3.2 Laser Unit Configuration .................................................................................................... 4-29
4.4 Distribution Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ............................................................................... 4-30
4.4.1 Distribution Section ............................................................................................................. 4-30
4.4.2 Processor Entrance Unit .................................................................................................... 4-31
4.5 Printer Electrical Equipment Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) .................................................... 4-32
4.5.1 Electrical Equipment Section Configurations ...................................................................... 4-32
4.5.2 Circuit Board Main Functions ............................................................................................. 4-32
4.5.3 Printer Electrical Equipment Block Diagram ...................................................................... 4-33
4.5.4 CTL20 Circuit Board Block Diagram .................................................................................. 4-34
4.5.5 Power Source System Diagram ......................................................................................... 4-35
4.5.6 CTL20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................................... 4-36
4.5.7 PDC20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-38
4.5.8 FMA20 Circuit Board (1394 Communication Circuit Board) ............................................... 4-40
4.5.9 FMB20 Circuit Board (Memory Circuit Board) .................................................................... 4-41
4.5.10 FMC20 Circuit Board (Memory Control Circuit Board) ...................................................... 4-42
4.5.11 LDD20 Circuit board ........................................................................................................... 4-43
5
CONTENTS
4.6 Processor Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ................................................................................. 4-46

4.6.1 Processing Section Configuration ...................................................................................... 4-46
4.6.2 Piping Diagram for Solution Circulation System ................................................................. 4-47
4.6.3 Replenishment/Auto-washing Piping System .................................................................... 4-49
4.6.4 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Mechanism ...................................................................... 4-50
4.6.5 Dryer Section Configuration ............................................................................................... 4-51
4.6.6 Print Feeding Section/Sorter Configurations ...................................................................... 4-52
4.6.7 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Configuration ...................................................... 4-53
4.6.8 Input Power Supply Section Parts and Circuit Functions ................................................... 4-54
4.6.9 Circuit Board Main Functions ............................................................................................. 4-55
4.6.10 Processor Electrical Equipment Block Diagram ................................................................. 4-55
4.6.11 CTP20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................................... 4-56
4.6.12 PAC20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................................... 4-58
5. OPERATION SEQUENCES ........................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Auto Film Carrier ......................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.1.1 NC240Y Initialization ......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2 NC240Y Cartridge Processing ........................................................................................... 5-6
5.1.3 NC240 Strip Film Processing ............................................................................................. 5-14
5.1.4 NC135Y Initialization ......................................................................................................... 5-20
5.1.5 NC135Y Scanning Operation ............................................................................................. 5-22
5.1.6 Monitoring Start Timing ...................................................................................................... 5-28
5.2 Paper Feed .................................................................................................................................. 5-29
5.2.1 Initialization ......................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.2 Shut-down Process ........................................................................................................... 5-35
5.2.3 Cutter Sequence ................................................................................................................ 5-36
5.2.4 Width Guide Position Setting .............................................................................................. 5-38
5.2.5 Auto Loading ...................................................................................................................... 5-39
5.2.6 Auto Rewinding .................................................................................................................. 5-42
5.2.7 Paper Drawing .................................................................................................................... 5-43
5.2.8 Back Printing ...................................................................................................................... 5-44
5.2.9 Speed Adjustment .............................................................................................................. 5-45
5.2.10 Soft Nip ............................................................................................................................... 5-46
5.2.11 Distribution ......................................................................................................................... 5-47
5.2.12 Splice .................................................................................................................................. 5-50
5.2.13 Paper End Process ............................................................................................................. 5-50
5.3 Exposure Section ......................................................................................................................... 5-51
5.3.1 Start-up Initialization ........................................................................................................... 5-51
5.3.2 End Process ....................................................................................................................... 5-52
5.3.3 Feed Start ........................................................................................................................... 5-52
5.3.4 Exposure Preparation ......................................................................................................... 5-53
5.3.5 Exposure Completion/RLD Exposure Stop ........................................................................ 5-54
5.3.6 Feed Completion ................................................................................................................ 5-54
5.4 Processor ..................................................................................................................................... 5-55
5.4.1 Heat-up Operation .............................................................................................................. 5-55
5.4.2 Normal Warm-up Operation ............................................................................................... 5-56
6
CONTENTS
5.4.3 Pre-heat Operation ............................................................................................................. 5-57

5.4.4 Cool-down Operation ......................................................................................................... 5-57
5.4.5 Heater Cooling Fan ........................................................................................................... 5-58
5.4.6 Monitoring Processing Solution Level ................................................................................ 5-58
5.4.7 Normal Operation Drive Control ......................................................................................... 5-59
5.4.8 Auto Intermittent Operation Control .................................................................................... 5-59
5.4.9 Auto Cleaning Control ........................................................................................................ 5-60
5.4.10 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement .................................................................................. 5-61
5.4.11 Replenishment Pump Control ............................................................................................. 5-62
5.4.12 Replenishment Initialization Control .................................................................................. 5-62
5.4.13 P1-R Replenishment Control .............................................................................................. 5-63
5.4.14 P2-RA/P2-RB Replenishment Control ................................................................................ 5-66
5.4.15 Auto Opening Control ......................................................................................................... 5-69
5.4.16 Replenisher Level Adjustment ........................................................................................... 5-71
5.4.17 Cleaning/Dilution ................................................................................................................ 5-72
5.4.18 Replenisher Cartridge Cap Cleaning Control .................................................................... 5-74
5.4.19 Power Supply Restore Control ........................................................................................... 5-75
5.4.20 Error Display Control ......................................................................................................... 5-76
5.4.21 Error Restore Control ......................................................................................................... 5-77
5.4.22 Pump Output Measurement ............................................................................................... 5-77
5.4.23 Auto Replenishment Control(at installation) ...................................................................... 5-78
5.4.24 Intermittent Process ........................................................................................................... 5-79
5.4.25 Waste Solution Process .................................................................................................... 5-80
5.4.26 Dryer Section Heat-up Control ........................................................................................... 5-80
5.4.27 Dryer Section Temperature Adjustment ............................................................................. 5-81
5.4.28 Dryer Section Pre-heat Control .......................................................................................... 5-81
5.4.29 Dryer Section Pre-heat Drive Temperature Adjustment .................................................... 5-82
5.4.30 Dryer Section Cool-down Control ....................................................................................... 5-82
5.5 Densitometer ................................................................................................................................ 5-83
5.5.1 Densitometer AD100 ......................................................................................................... 5-83
5.5.2 Densitometer AD200 ......................................................................................................... 5-87
6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS ........................................................................................ 6-1
6.1 Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................................................ 6-2

6.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table ................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Maintenance and Inspection Procedures .................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.1 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning ............................................................. 6-4
6.3.2 Zoom Lens and ND Filter Cleaning .................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.3 Mouse Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.4 R, G and B Coaxial Cable Inspection ................................................................................. 6-6
6.3.5 Auto Film Carrier Inspection ............................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.6 Paper Magazine Cleaning .................................................................................................. 6-7
6.3.7 Paper Magazine Table Slider Lubrication ........................................................................... 6-7
6.3.8 Cutter Inspection ................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.3.9 Paper Feed Section Roller Cleaning .................................................................................. 6-8
6.3.10 Paper Feed Section Idler Gear Lubrication ........................................................................ 6-9
7
CONTENTS
6.3.11 Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement ....................................................................................... 6-9

6.3.12 Distribution Section Suction Cup Inspection ...................................................................... 6-9
6.3.13 Distribution Section Slide Shaft Lubrication ........................................................................ 6-9
6.3.14 P1 and P2 Solution Level Sensor Cleaning ........................................................................ 6-10
6.3.15 Processor Roller Inspection ................................................................................................ 6-10
6.3.16 Dryer Rack Cleaning ......................................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.17 Heater Cooling Fan (F710 to F713) Cleaning .................................................................... 6-11
6.3.18 Replenisher Pump Valves/PS-R Pump Bellows Replacement ........................................... 6-11
6.3.19 Processor Drive Chain and Sprocket Lubrication ............................................................... 6-13
6.3.20 Processing Rack Helical Gear Lubrication ......................................................................... 6-13
6.3.21 Dryer Entrance Rack Drive Gear Lubrication .................................................................... 6-13
6.3.22 Dryer Section Drive Gear Lubrication ................................................................................. 6-14
6.3.23 Dryer Exit Unit Roller and Guide Cleaning ......................................................................... 6-14
6.3.24 Large Size Print Exit Unit Belt and Roller Cleaning ............................................................ 6-15
6.3.25 Print Exit Unit Belt Cleaning ............................................................................................... 6-15
6.3.26 Solution Hose and Clamp Inspection ................................................................................. 6-15
6.3.27 PS Tank Solution Replacement .......................................................................................... 6-16
6.3.28 Film Cooling Air Filter Replacement .................................................................................. 6-17
6.3.29 Floppy Disk Drive Inspection .............................................................................................. 6-17
6.3.30 CD-ROM Drive Inspection .................................................................................................. 6-18
6.3.31 Printing Function Inspection ............................................................................................... 6-18
6.3.32 Processing Rack Entrance Side Lower Turn Roller Replacement ..................................... 6-19
7. MESSAGES ......................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Error Indication Rule .................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.1.1 Message Number ............................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Message Icon ..................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.3 X-#### Actions .................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2 Messages ..................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3 Trouble Shooting ......................................................................................................................... 7-62
7.3.1 Light Source Section Cover Interlock Switch ...................................................................... 7-62
7.3.2 Film Carrier ......................................................................................................................... 7-63
7.3.3 CCD Unit(E-1130/E-1131) .................................................................................................. 7-64
7.3.4 CTB20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................................... 7-65
7.3.5 Jamming in Distribution Section ......................................................................................... 7-67
7.3.6 Cutter Abnormality .............................................................................................................. 7-70
7.3.7 Upper Side Door Section Nip Abnormality ......................................................................... 7-72
7.3.8 Scanner Section Nip Abnormality ....................................................................................... 7-73
7.3.9 Paper Width Guide Abnormality ......................................................................................... 7-74
7.3.10 Positioning Fork Abnormality .............................................................................................. 7-75
7.3.11 Distribution Up/Down Operation Abnormality .................................................................... 7-76
7.3.12 Distribution Operation Abnormality .................................................................................... 7-77
7.3.13 Paper Jamming in Processor ............................................................................................. 7-78
7.3.14 Replenishment Cartridge Box Malfunction ......................................................................... 7-80
7.3.15 Processing Solution Temperature Abnormality .................................................................. 7-82
7.3.16 Dryer Temperature Abnormality ......................................................................................... 7-86
8
CONTENTS
7.3.17 Processing Solution Tank Level Lowering .......................................................................... 7-89

7.3.18 Replenishment Pump Diagnostics ...................................................................................... 7-90
7.3.19 Rack Auto Cleaning System Diagnostics ........................................................................... 7-91
7.3.20 P1-R Stirring Valve/Replenishment Cartridge Washing Valve Diagnostics ........................ 7-92
7.3.21 Replenishment Level Sensor Diagnostics .......................................................................... 7-93
7.3.22 Return Action after Replenishment System Error ............................................................... 7-93
7.3.23 Replenishment Cartridge Opening Malfunction .................................................................. 7-94
7.3.24 Dryer Exit Unit Diagnostics ................................................................................................. 7-95
8. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Simple Upgrade ........................................................................................................................... 8-2

8.2 Update ......................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.3 Reinstallation ................................................................................................................................ 8-7
8.4 New Installation ............................................................................................................................ 8-10
8.5 Reversion ..................................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.6 Procedure following the Replacement of the Main Control Unit ................................................... 8-15
9. MAINTENANCE MENU .................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1 Operational Procedure ................................................................................................................ 9-3

9.1.1 User Identification ............................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2 System Operation Setup and Check (41) .................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.1 Clear Error Log (41E) ......................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.2 Installation Information Setup (41F) .................................................................................. 9-4
9.2.3 Shipping Information Reference (41G) ............................................................................... 9-5
9.2.4 DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I) ............................................................................. 9-5
9.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (42) .......................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.1 Image Correction Setup (42C) ........................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.2 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (42D) ................................................................. 9-6
9.3.3 Paper Condition Setup (42J) .............................................................................................. 9-6
9.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (43) ........................................................................................ 9-7
9.4.1 I/O Check (43A) .................................................................................................................. 9-7
9.4.2 ND Dust Check (43B) ......................................................................................................... 9-7
9.4.3 Carrier Focus Position Adjustment (43C) ........................................................................... 9-7
9.4.4 Carrier Inclination Display (43D) ......................................................................................... 9-9
9.4.5 CCD Data Display (43E) .................................................................................................... 9-9
9.4.6 Working Information (43F) .................................................................................................. 9-11
9.4.7 Lens Registration (43G) .................................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.8 Optical Axis Adjustment (43H) ........................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.9 Optical Magnification Calibration (43J) ............................................................................... 9-12
9.4.10 Focus Calibration (43K) ...................................................................................................... 9-13
9.4.11 ND Filter Density Measurement (43N) ............................................................................... 9-13
9.4.12 Spectral Calibration (43P) .................................................................................................. 9-14
9.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (44) .......................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.1 NC135Y Sensor Calibration (44A) ...................................................................................... 9-16
9.5.2 NC240Y Sensor Calibration (44B) ...................................................................................... 9-16
9
CONTENTS
9.5.3 Installation Information Display (44C) ................................................................................. 9-17

9.5.4 Installation Information Setup (44D) .................................................................................. 9-17
9.5.5 NC135Y I/O Check (44E) .................................................................................................. 9-18
9.5.6 NC240Y I/O Check (44F) .................................................................................................. 9-18
9.5.7 MFC10Y I/O Check (44G) .................................................................................................. 9-19
9.5.8 NC135Y Working Information (44J) .................................................................................... 9-19
9.5.9 NC240Y Working Information (44K) .................................................................................. 9-20
9.5.10 MFC10Y Working Information (44L) .................................................................................. 9-21
9.5.11 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (44P) .................................................................................... 9-22
9.5.12 NC135Y Machine Data Setup (44Q) .................................................................................. 9-23
9.5.13 NC240Y Machine Data Setup (44R) .................................................................................. 9-24
9.5.14 MFC10Y Machine Data Setup (44S) .................................................................................. 9-24
9.6 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (45) ........................................................................................... 9-25
9.6.1 Test Pattern Printing (453) ................................................................................................. 9-25
9.6.2 Printer I/O Check (45A) ...................................................................................................... 9-26
9.6.3 Printer Function Select (45B) ............................................................................................. 9-26
9.6.4 Laser Exposure Check (45C) ............................................................................................. 9-27
9.6.5 R Laser(R-LD) Data (45D) .................................................................................................. 9-27
9.6.6 G Laser(G-SHG) Data (45E) .............................................................................................. 9-27
9.6.7 B Laser(B-SHG) Data (45F) ............................................................................................... 9-28
9.6.8 Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup (45G) ............................... 9-28
9.6.9 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (45H) ............ 9-28
9.6.10 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (45J) .................................................................. 9-29
9.6.11 Laser History Display (45K) ................................................................................................ 9-30
9.6.12 Paper Condition Setup Table(LUT) Copy (45L) ................................................................. 9-31
9.6.13 Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment (45M) ........................................................................ 9-31
9.6.14 Back Printer Test (45N) ...................................................................................................... 9-32
9.6.15 Printer Operation Data Display (45P) ................................................................................. 9-33
9.6.16 Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (45Q) ................................................................ 9-33
9.6.17 Clearing All Operation Data (45R) ...................................................................................... 9-33
9.6.18 Data Saving (45T) .............................................................................................................. 9-34
9.6.19 Data Download (45U) ......................................................................................................... 9-34
9.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenence (46) .................................................................................... 9-35
9.7.1 Processor I/O Check (46A) ................................................................................................. 9-35
9.7.2 Processor Operating Condition Setup (46B) ...................................................................... 9-35
9.7.3 Processor Operation Data Display (46C) ........................................................................... 9-36
9.7.4 Clearing Selected Operation Data (46D) ........................................................................... 9-36
9.7.5 Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E) ........................................................................ 9-36
9.8 Optional Adjustment (47) ............................................................................................................. 9-37
9.8.1 COM Port Setting (47A) ...................................................................................................... 9-37
9.9 Special Operations (48) ............................................................................................................... 9-38
9.9.1 Paint (48A) ......................................................................................................................... 9-38
9.9.2 Explorer (48B) .................................................................................................................... 9-38
9.9.3 Command (48C) ................................................................................................................ 9-38
10
CONTENTS
10. I/O CHECK ......................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 I/O Parts Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 10-2

10.1.1 Scanner(SP1500/SP2000) ................................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.2 Film Carrier NC135Y ......................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.3 Film Carrier NC240Y ......................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.4 Printer Section .................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.1.5 Processor Section .............................................................................................................. 10-9
11. OPERATION SECTION .................................................................................................................. 11-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 11-3

11.1 Monitor and Keyboard .................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.1.1 Monitor Replacement ......................................................................................................... 11-4
11.1.2 Table Left Cover Removal/Re-installation .......................................................................... 11-4
11.1.3 Operation Keyboard/KYA20 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................... 11-4
11.1.4 Full Keyboard Replacement ............................................................................................... 11-5
11.1.5 Mouse Replacement ........................................................................................................... 11-5
11.1.6 Plug-in Connector for Film Carrier Replacement ................................................................ 11-5
11.1.7 Film Carrier Ball Catch Replacement ................................................................................. 11-6
11.1.8 15-inch Monitor Color Adjustment ...................................................................................... 11-7
11.1.9 17-inch Monitor Color Adjustment ...................................................................................... 11-7
11.2 Auto Film Carrier NC135Y ........................................................................................................... 11-8
11.2.1 Upper Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................................................................ 11-8
11.2.2 Film Leading End Sensor LED (D400) Replacement ......................................................... 11-8
11.2.3 Scan Timing/Check Tape Sensor LED (D402/D410) Replacement ................................... 11-8
11.2.4 Film Mask Home Position Sensor (D409) Replacement .................................................... 11-8
11.2.5 Variable Film Mask Timing Inspection ................................................................................ 11-8
11.2.6 Variable Film Mask Removal/Re-installation ...................................................................... 11-8
11.2.7 Film Mask Drive Motor (M403) Replacement .................................................................... 11-9
11.2.8 Perforation Sensor LED (D404) Replacement ................................................................... 11-9
11.2.9 Film Nip Roller Replacement .............................................................................................. 11-9
11.2.10 Film Retainer Replacement ................................................................................................ 11-9
11.2.11 Dust Removal Roller Replacement .................................................................................... 11-9
11.2.12 Film Entrance Roller Replacement .................................................................................... 11-10
11.2.13 Drive Section Cover Removal/Re-installation .................................................................... 11-10
11.2.14 Pressure Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................................................................... 11-10
11.2.15 Film Mask Diffusion Plate Replacement ............................................................................. 11-11
11.2.16 Bottom Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................................................................... 11-11
11.2.17 Nip Home Position Sensor (D407) Replacement ............................................................... 11-11
11.2.18 Perforation Sensor (D405) Replacement ........................................................................... 11-11
11.2.19 CYB20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 11-12
11.2.20 Film Leading End Sensor (D401) Replacement ................................................................. 11-12
11.2.21 Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor (D406) Replacement ............................................... 11-12
11.2.22 Lower Dust Removal Roller Replacement .......................................................................... 11-12
11.2.23 Check Tape Sensor (D411) Replacement .......................................................................... 11-13
11.2.24 Scan Timing Sensor (D403) Replacement ......................................................................... 11-13
11
CONTENTS
11.2.25 Soft Nip Drive Belt Replacement ........................................................................................ 11-13

11.2.26 Soft Nip Drive Motor (M401) Replacement ......................................................................... 11-13
11.2.27 Soft Nip Drive Section Removal/Re-installation ................................................................. 11-14
11.2.28 Soft Nip Cam Drive Belt Replacement ............................................................................... 11-14
11.2.29 Film Feed Roller/Drive Belt Replacement .......................................................................... 11-14
11.2.30 Pressure Cover Hook Replacement .................................................................................. 11-15
11.2.31 Display LED (L400) Replacement ...................................................................................... 11-15
11.2.32 Film Feed Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ........................................................... 11-15
11.2.33 Film Feed Motor (M400) Replacement ............................................................................... 11-16
11.2.34 Reduction Pulley Shaft 1 Replacement ............................................................................. 11-16
11.2.37 Reduction Belt Replacement .............................................................................................. 11-19
11.2.38 Plug-in Connector Replacement ......................................................................................... 11-19
11.2.39 Upper Guide (Pressure Cover)/Nip Roller Adjustment ...................................................... 11-19
A. Confirmation .................................................................................................................. 11-19
B. Upper Guide (Pressure Cover) Adjustment ................................................................... 11-19
C. Nip Roller Adjustment .................................................................................................... 11-21
11.2.40 Carrier Pitch Correction ...................................................................................................... 11-22
11.3 Auto Film Carrier NC240Y ........................................................................................................... 11-24
11.3.1 Upper Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................................................................ 11-24
11.3.2 MTP Sensor 1 LED (D447)/TAP Sensor LED (D448) Replacement .................................. 11-24
11.3.3 Upper Guide Roller Replacement ....................................................................................... 11-24
11.3.4 Film Retainer Replacement ................................................................................................ 11-24
11.3.5 Write Head (MWH01) Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................. 11-25
11.3.6 Read Head (MRH90) Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................. 11-25
11.3.7 MTP Sensor 2 LED (D457) Replacement .......................................................................... 11-25
11.3.8 Upper Dust Removal Roller Replacement .......................................................................... 11-25
11.3.9 Dummy Head Replacement ............................................................................................... 11-26
11.3.10 Magnetic Head Replacement ............................................................................................. 11-26
11.3.11 Winding Upper Nip Roller Replacement ............................................................................. 11-27
11.3.12 Bottom Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................................................................... 11-27
11.3.13 MTP Sensor 1 (D454)/TAP Sensor (D455) Replacement .................................................. 11-27
11.3.14 IPI Sensor (D445) Replacement ......................................................................................... 11-27
11.3.15 Display LED (L440) Replacement ...................................................................................... 11-27
11.3.16 CYC20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 11-28
11.3.17 Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor (D446) Replacement ............................................... 11-28
11.3.18 Film Feed Roller/Belt Replacement .................................................................................... 11-28
11.3.19 Lower Dust Removal Roller/Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement ........................ 11-29
11.3.20 Film Feed Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ........................................................... 11-29
11.3.21 Film Mask Diffusion Plate Replacement ............................................................................. 11-30
11.3.22 Feed Stop Sensor (D444) Replacement ........................................................................... 11-30
11.3.23 Film Winding Unit Removal/Re-installation ........................................................................ 11-30
11.3.24 Film Winding Unit Disassembly/Re-assembly .................................................................... 11-31
11.3.25 MTP Sensor 2 (D453) Replacement .................................................................................. 11-31
11.3.26 Nest Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ...................................................................... 11-31
11.3.27 Cartridge Sensor (D456) Replacement ............................................................................. 11-31
12
CONTENTS
11.3.28 Door Open/Close Sensor (D441) Replacement ................................................................. 11-32

11.3.29 VEI/Chucking Sensor (D442/D443) Replacement ............................................................. 11-32
11.3.30 Nest Section Unit Replacement .......................................................................................... 11-32
11.3.31 Cartridge Motor (M444) Replacement ................................................................................ 11-32
11.3.32 Spool Motor (M442) Replacement ...................................................................................... 11-32
11.3.33 Torque Limiter Replacement .............................................................................................. 11-33
11.3.34 Cartridge Holder Locking Release Method ......................................................................... 11-33
11.3.35 Drive Section Cover Removal/Re-installation .................................................................... 11-33
11.3.36 Film Feed Motor (M440) Replacement ............................................................................... 11-34
11.3.37 Pulley Shaft 1 Replacement ............................................................................................... 11-34
11.3.40 Reduction Belt Replacement .............................................................................................. 11-36
12. LIGHT SOURCE SECTION ........................................................................................................... 12-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 12-2

12.1 Scanning Lamp Section ............................................................................................................... 12-3
12.1.1 Scanning Lamp Unit Removal/Re-installation .................................................................... 12-3
12.1.2 Lamp Socket Replacement ................................................................................................ 12-3
12.1.3 First IR Filter Replacement ................................................................................................. 12-4
12.1.4 Safety Thermostat (ST201) Replacement .......................................................................... 12-4
12.1.5 Light Source Section Detecting Interlock Switch (D301) Replacement .............................. 12-4
12.1.6 Light Source Section Suction Fan (F302) Replacement .................................................... 12-5
12.1.7 Light Source Section Exhaust Fan (F303) Replacement ................................................... 12-5
12.2 Light Source Filter Section ........................................................................................................... 12-6
12.2.1 Filter Unit Removal/Re-installation .................................................................................... 12-6
12.2.2 Balance Filter Bracket Removal/Re-installation ................................................................. 12-6
12.2.3 Balance Filter Home Position Sensor (D202) Replacement ............................................... 12-6
12.2.4 Balance Filter Drive Motor (M202) Replacement ............................................................... 12-6
12.2.5 Balance Filter/Drive Gear Replacement ............................................................................. 12-6
12.2.6 Filter Replacement ............................................................................................................. 12-7
12.2.7 Light Source Aperture Home Position/Standby Sensor (D201/D203) Replacement .......... 12-7
12.2.8 Light Source Aperture Motor (M201) Replacement ............................................................ 12-8
12.2.9 Light Source Aperture Belt Replacement ........................................................................... 12-8
12.2.10 135/120 Mirror Box Sensor (D204/D205) Replacement .................................................... 12-9
13. SCANNER SECTION ...................................................................................................................... 13-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 13-2

13.1 Scanner Section ........................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.1 Scanner Section Top Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................................................ 13-3
13.1.2 CCD Cooling Fan Bracket Removal/Re-installation ........................................................... 13-3
13.1.3 Scanner Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................................................ 13-3
13.1.4 Conjugate Length Variable Belt Replacement .................................................................... 13-3
13.1.5 Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M101) Replacement .................................................... 13-4
13
CONTENTS
13.1.6 CCD Unit Removal/Re-installation .................................................................................... 13-4

13.1.7 Shutter Home Position Sensor (D107) Replacement ......................................................... 13-5
13.1.8 Ball Screw Replacement .................................................................................................... 13-5
13.1.9 CCD Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement ............................................................................. 13-6
13.1.10 Table Right Cover (Scanner Section Rear Cover) Removal/Re-installation ...................... 13-6
13.1.11 Conjugate Length Variable Home Position (D102)/Upper Position (D103)/
Lower Position (D104) Sensor Replacement ............................................................. 13-6
13.1.12 Cooling Air Flow Sensor (D351) Replacement ................................................................... 13-7
13.1.13 Air Flow Sensor Filter Replacement (SP2000: #2903036 and after) .................................. 13-7
13.1.14 CCD Unit Shatter/Gear Replacement ................................................................................. 13-8
13.2 Lens Section ................................................................................................................................ 13-9
13.2.1 Lens Temperature Sensor (D106) Replacement ................................................................ 13-9
13.2.2 Variable Aperture Lens Bracket Removal/Re-installation ................................................... 13-9
13.2.3 Lens Home Position Sensor (D105) Replacement ............................................................. 13-9
13.2.4 Lens Drive Motor (M102) Replacement ............................................................................. 13-10
13.2.5 Lens Unit Replacement ...................................................................................................... 13-10
13.2.6 Film Cooling Air Nozzle Replacement ................................................................................ 13-11
14. SCANNER ELECTRICAL SECTION ......................................................................................... 14-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 14-2

14.1 Power Supply Section .................................................................................................................. 14-3
14.1.1 Main Control Unit Section Cover and Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Re-installation ........ 14-3
14.1.2 Input Power Supply Unit Removal/Re-installation ............................................................. 14-3
14.1.3 Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement ................................................................................. 14-4
14.1.4 Noise Filter (NF1) Replacement ......................................................................................... 14-4
14.1.5 Transformer Replacement .................................................................................................. 14-4
14.1.6 Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP16) Replacement ................................................................. 14-5
14.1.7 PWR20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................. 14-5
14.1.8 Relay (K1/K2)/SSR1 Replacement .................................................................................... 14-5
14.1.9 DC24V Power Supply Replacement .................................................................................. 14-6
14.1.10 DC24V Voltage Adjustment ................................................................................................ 14-6
14.1.11 Lamp Power Supply Replacement .................................................................................... 14-6
14.1.12 Lamp Voltage Adjustment .................................................................................................. 14-7
14.1.13 DC Power Supply Replacement ......................................................................................... 14-7
14.2 Electrical Equipment/Control Section ........................................................................................... 14-8
14.2.1 Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan (F306/F307) Replacement .............................. 14-8
14.2.2 Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan Bracket Removal/Re-installation .................... 14-8
14.2.3 CTB20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 14-8
14.2.4 Image Processing Circuit Board Box Cooling Fan (F304/F305) Replacement ................. 14-8
14.2.5 Image Processing Circuit Board CDS20/GFM20/GIP20/GLO20/GIS20/GMB20 (GMC20)
Replacement ............................................................................................................... 14-8
14.2.6 Image Processing Circuit Board Box Removal/Re-installation ........................................... 14-9
14.2.7 Film Cooling Air Compressor Unit Removal/Re-installation ............................................... 14-10
14.2.8 Film Cooling Air Tank Replacement .................................................................................. 14-11
14.2.9 Film Cooling Air Compressor (PU351) /Vibration Isolation Rubber Replacement .............. 14-11
14.2.10 Main Control Unit Replacement .......................................................................................... 14-11
14
CONTENTS
14.2.11 Noise Filter Replacement .................................................................................................. 14-12

14.2.12 Start Switch Replacement .................................................................................................. 14-12
15. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ......................................................................................................... 15-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 15-3

15.1 Paper Supply Section .................................................................................................................. 15-4
15.1.1 Magazine Section Door Sensor Interlock Switch (D580) Replacement ............................. 15-4
15.1.2 Magazine Setting Lever Assembly Removal/Re-installation ............................................. 15-4
15.1.3 Magazine Setting Lever/Gear Replacement ...................................................................... 15-4
15.1.4 Magazine Table Sliding Gear Replacement ...................................................................... 15-5
15.1.5 Upper or Lower Paper End Sensor (D505 or D525) Replacement .................................... 15-6
15.1.6 Upper or Lower Magazine ID Sensor Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................... 15-6
15.1.7 Upper or Lower Magazine ID Sensor (D500 to D504 or D520 to D524) Replacement ...... 15-6
15.1.8 Upper or Lower Paper Supply Motor (M501 or M521)/Belt Replacement .......................... 15-6
15.1.9 Upper or Lower Cutter Home Position Sensor (Close)(D508 or D528) Replacement ........ 15-7
15.1.10 Upper or Lower Cutter Home Position Sensor (Open)(D507 or D527) Replacement ........ 15-8
15.1.11 Cutter Unit Replacement .................................................................................................... 15-8
15.1.12 Upper or Lower Cutter Motor (M500 or M520) Replacement ............................................. 15-9
15.1.13 Upper or Lower Paper Splice Sensor (D506 or D526) Replacement ................................. 15-9
15.1.14 Cutter Top and Bottom Dead Center Adjustment ............................................................... 15-9
15.1.15 Cutter Angle Adjustment .................................................................................................... 15-10
15.1.16 Paper Magazine Angle Adjustment .................................................................................... 15-10
15.1.17 Paper Magazine Section Cooling Fan (F594) Replacement ............................................. 15-10
15.1.18 Magazine Paper End Sensor Shading Plate Replacement ............................................... 15-10
15.1.19 Paper Magazine Nip Roller Replacement .......................................................................... 15-11
15.1.20 Paper Magazine Table Ball Catch Replacement ................................................................ 15-12
15.2 Paper Feed Section ..................................................................................................................... 15-13
15.2.1 Paper Feed Section Front Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................................. 15-13
15.2.2 Printer Side Cover Removal/Re-installation ...................................................................... 15-13
15.2.3 Printer Upper Side Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................................................ 15-13
15.2.4 Lower or Middle Side Door Sensor Interlock Switch (D581A/D581B or D582A/D582B)
Replacement ............................................................................................................... 15-13
15.2.5 Upper Side Door Sensor Interlock Switch (D583A/D583B) Replacement ........................ 15-14
15.2.6 Shading Plate Removal/Re-installation ............................................................................. 15-14
15.2.7 Upper or Lower Feed Entrance Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation ............................... 15-14
15.2.8 Upper or Lower Feed Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation ............................................... 15-15
15.2.9 Middle or Lower Side Door Section Paper Sensor (D541 or D552) Replacement ............. 15-15
15.2.10 Ambient Temperature Sensor (THA20) Replacement ........................................................ 15-16
15.2.11 Middle Side Door Turn, Middle Side Door, Lower Side Door Turn or Lower
Side Door Section Feed Motor (M540, M541, M550 or M551) Replacement ............. 15-16
15.2.12 Feed Roller Replacement .................................................................................................. 15-16
15.2.13 Back Printing Section Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation ............................................... 15-17
15.3 Speed Adjustment Section ........................................................................................................... 15-18
15.3.1 Upper Side Door Section Nip Release Motor (M545) or Upper Side Door Section
Feed Motor (M542) Replacement ............................................................................... 15-18
15.3.2 Upper Side Door Section Nip Release Sensor (D547) Replacement ................................. 15-18
15
CONTENTS
15.3.3 Speed Adjustment Section Nip Roller Replacement .......................................................... 15-18

15.3.4 Speed Adjustment Section Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation ...................................... 15-19
15.4 Back Printing Section .................................................................................................................. 15-20
15.4.1 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment .......................................................................... 15-20
15.4.2 Back Printer Head or JNE20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................. 15-20
15.4.3 Back Printer Sensor (D544) Replacement ......................................................................... 15-21
15.4.4 Back Printer Unit Removal/Re-installation .......................................................................... 15-22
15.4.5 Back Printer Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement ................................................................... 15-22
15.5 Border Adjustment ....................................................................................................................... 15-24
15.5.1 Small Size Print Border Adjustment Procedure .................................................................. 15-24
15.5.2 Large Size Print Border Adjustment Procedure .................................................................. 15-25
15.5.3 Other Size Print Border Adjustment Procedure .................................................................. 15-26
15.5.4 Cutter Position Adjustment ................................................................................................. 15-27
15.5.5 Magazine Table Stainless Plate Position Adjustment ........................................................ 15-28
15.5.6 Magazine ID Sensor Position Adjustment .......................................................................... 15-28
15.5.7 Feed Entrance Guide Plate Height Adjustment .................................................................. 15-29
16. EXPOSURE SECTION .................................................................................................................. 16-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 16-2

16.1 Printer Top Cover/Exposure Section Cooling Fans .................................................................... 16-3
16.1.1 Printer Top Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................................................................ 16-3
16.1.2 Printer Top Inner Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................................................... 16-3
16.1.3 Exposure Section Front Cover Removal/Re-installation .................................................... 16-3
16.1.4 Exposure Section Front Inner Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................................... 16-3
16.1.5 Exposure Section Front Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D585A and D585B)
Replacement ............................................................................................................... 16-4
16.1.6 Exposure Section Cooling Fan (F585 and F586) Replacement ........................................ 16-4
16.1.7 Exposure Section Exhaust Fan (F596) Replacement ........................................................ 16-5
16.1.8 Operating Panel Replacement ........................................................................................... 16-5
16.2 Laser Unit ..................................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.2.1 Air Duct Removal/Re-installation ........................................................................................ 16-6
16.2.2 Exposure Section Anti-dust Pressure Fan 1, 2 or 3 (F620, F621 or F622)
Replacement ............................................................................................................... 16-6
16.2.3 Air Filter Replacement ........................................................................................................ 16-6
16.2.4 Laser Unit Removal/Re-installation .................................................................................... 16-6
16.3 Exposure Section Feed Unit ........................................................................................................ 16-8
16.3.1 Sub-scanning Belt Replacement ........................................................................................ 16-8
16.3.2 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor (D561P) Replacement .................................... 16-8
16.3.3 Pre-exposure Paper Sensor (D562P) Replacement .......................................................... 16-9
16.3.4 Exposure Section Feed Unit Paper Sensor (D560) Replacement ...................................... 16-9
16.3.5 Exposure Section Entrance or Pre-Exposure Paper Sensor LED (D561L or D562L)
Replacement ............................................................................................................... 16-9
16.3.6 Exposure Section Nip Release Sensor (D566) Replacement ............................................ 16-9
16.3.7 Ambient Temperature Sensor (THA1-2) Replacement ...................................................... 16-10
16.3.8 Exposure Section Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F565) Replacement ........................................ 16-10
16.3.9 Exposure Section Feed Unit Removal/Re-installation ........................................................ 16-10
16
CONTENTS
16.3.10 Paper Width Guide Motor (M563) Replacement ................................................................ 16-11

16.3.11 Paper Width Guide Motor Bracket Removal/Re-installation ............................................... 16-11
16.3.12 Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor (D563) Replacement ...................................... 16-11
16.3.13 Paper Width Guide Drive Belt Replacement ...................................................................... 16-12
16.3.14 Leading End Positioning Fork Position Sensor (D564) Replacement ............................... 16-12
16.3.15 Pre-exposure Feed Motor (M560) Replacement ................................................................ 16-12
16.3.16 Sub-scanning Motor (M561) Driver Circuit Board Replacement ........................................ 16-13
16.3.17 Sub-scanning Motor (M561) Replacement ......................................................................... 16-13
16.3.18 Exposure Section Nip Motor (M565) Replacement ............................................................ 16-13
16.3.19 Exposure Section Drive Pulley Bracket Removal/Re-installation ...................................... 16-14
16.3.20 Exposure Section Drive Steel Belt Replacement ............................................................... 16-14
16.3.21 Exposure Section Cam Replacement ................................................................................. 16-15
16.3.22 Exposure Roller/Guide Replacement ................................................................................. 16-16
16.3.23 Entrance Nip Roller Replacement ...................................................................................... 16-17
16.3.24 Entrance Roller Replacement ............................................................................................. 16-17
16.3.25 Paper Width Guide Adjustment .......................................................................................... 16-18
17. DISTRIBUTION SECTION ............................................................................................................. 17-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 17-2

17.1 Distribution Unit ............................................................................................................................ 17-3
17.1.1 Suction Cup Replacement .................................................................................................. 17-3
17.1.2 Anti-static Brush Replacement ........................................................................................... 17-3
17.1.3 Paper Release Roller Replacement .................................................................................. 17-3
17.1.4 Suction Unit Removal/Re-installation ................................................................................. 17-3
17.1.5 Slider Lower Cover Removal/Re-installation ...................................................................... 17-4
17.1.6 Lowering Home Position Sensor (D575) Replacement ...................................................... 17-4
17.1.7 Distribution Motor (M571) Replacement ............................................................................. 17-5
17.1.8 Distribution Home Position Sensor (D574) Replacement ................................................... 17-5
17.1.9 Solenoid Valve (S570 and S571) Replacement ................................................................. 17-5
17.1.10 Distribution Up/Down Motor (M572) Replacement ............................................................. 17-6
17.1.11 Up/Down Drive Belt/Timing Belt Replacement ................................................................... 17-6
17.1.12 Distribution Section Door Removal/Re-installation ............................................................. 17-7
17.1.13 Distribution Section Door Sensor Interlock Switch (D584A and D584B) Replacement ...... 17-7
17.1.14 Distribution Sucker Air Pump (PU570)/Vibration Isolation Rubber Replacement ............... 17-8
17.1.15 SSR Replacement .............................................................................................................. 17-8
17.1.16 Distribution Unit Replacement ........................................................................................... 17-8
17.2 Distribution Feed Section ............................................................................................................. 17-10
17.2.1 Distribution Section Feed Motor (M570) Replacement ...................................................... 17-10
17.2.2 Processor Entrance 1, 2 and 3 Sensor (D571P, D572P and D573P) Replacement .......... 17-10
17.2.3 Processor Entrance 1, 2 and 3 Sensor LED (D571L, D572L and D573L) Replacement ... 17-10
17.2.4 Feed Motor Bracket Removal/Re-installation .................................................................... 17-11
17.2.5 Front Up/Down Section Removal/Re-installation ............................................................... 17-11
17.2.6 Front Up/Down Section Height Adjustment ........................................................................ 17-12
17.2.7 Upper Feed Belt and Holding Belt Replacement ................................................................ 17-12
17.2.8 Feed Belt Replacement ...................................................................................................... 17-13
17.2.9 Processor Entry Unit Removal/Re-installation .................................................................... 17-14
17
CONTENTS
17.2.10 Processor Entry Feed Belt Replacement ........................................................................... 17-15

17.2.11 Processor Entry Unit Gearbox Removal/Re-installation .................................................... 17-15
17.2.12 Processor Entry Unit Gearbox Disassembly/Re-assembly ............................................... 17-16
18. PRINTER CONTROL SECTION .................................................................................................. 18-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 18-2

18.1 Printer Control Section ................................................................................................................ 18-3
18.1.1 Printer Control Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ...................................................... 18-3
18.1.2 Power Switch Replacement ................................................................................................ 18-3
18.1.3 Printer Control Section Cooling Suction Fan (F587 and F588) Replacement .................... 18-3
18.1.4 Control Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing ................................................................. 18-3
18.1.5 AOM Driver (AOM-R, AOM-G and AOM-B) Replacement ................................................. 18-4
18.1.6 AOM Driver Cooling Fan (F591, F592 and F593) Replacement ........................................ 18-4
18.1.7 LDD20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-5
18.1.8 FMC20 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/Re-installation ...................................................... 18-5
18.1.9 FMB20 Circuit Board Extension ......................................................................................... 18-5
18.1.10 FMB20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-5
18.1.11 FMA20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-5
18.1.12 FMC20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-6
18.1.13 DC Power Supply Unit Exhaust Fan (F595) Replacement ................................................. 18-6
18.1.14 DC Power Supply Unit Replacement .................................................................................. 18-6
18.1.15 Printer Control Section Cooling Exhaust Fan (F582, F583 and F584) Replacement ........ 18-7
18.1.16 PDC20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-7
18.1.17 CTL20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 18-8
19. PROCESSOR SECTION ................................................................................................................ 19-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 19-2

19.1 Crossover Racks/Processing Racks ........................................................................................... 19-4
19.1.1 Crossover Rack Disassembly/Re-assembly ...................................................................... 19-4
19.1.2 Processing Rack Upper Guide Disassembly/Re-assembly ............................................... 19-4
19.1.3 Processing Rack Roller Replacement ................................................................................ 19-5
19.1.4 Processing Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Re-installation ...................................................... 19-6
19.1.5 Processing Rack Middle Guide Replacement .................................................................... 19-7
19.1.6 Dryer Entrance Rack Disassembly/Re-assembly ............................................................... 19-7
19.1.7 Dryer Entrance Rack Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D791) Replacement ................... 19-8
19.1.8 Processor Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D790) Replacement .................................... 19-8
19.2 Processor Drive System ............................................................................................................... 19-9
19.2.1 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................................................. 19-9
19.2.2 Processor Drive Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ................................................. 19-9
19.2.3 Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Re-installation .................................................... 19-9
19.2.4 Processor Drive Motor (M700) Replacement .................................................................... 19-10
19.2.5 Drive Chain Replacement .................................................................................................. 19-10
19.2.6 Processor Drive Gear Replacement .................................................................................. 19-10
19.2.7 Processor Exhaust Fan 1 and 2 (F790 and F791) Replacement ...................................... 19-11
19.2.8 Dryer Entrance Rack Drive Gear Replacement .................................................................. 19-11
19.2.9 Sprocket Bracket Assembly Replacement ......................................................................... 19-12
18
CONTENTS
20. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM ......................................................... 20-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 20-2

20.1 Sub-tanks ..................................................................................................................................... 20-4
20.1.1 Input Check of Processing Solution Level Sensor (FS700 to FS705) ............................... 20-4
20.1.2 Processing Solution Level Sensor (FS700 to FS705) Replacement .................................. 20-4
20.1.3 Processing Solution Temperature Sensor (TS700 to TS703) Replacement ...................... 20-4
20.2 Processing Solution Heater/Circulation Pump Section ................................................................ 20-5
20.2.1 Processor Front Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................................................ 20-5
20.2.2 Input Check of Processing Solution Heater Safety Thermostat (D710 to D713) ............... 20-5
20.2.3 Hose Connection ................................................................................................................ 20-5
20.2.4 Heater Cooling Fan (F710 to F713) Replacement ............................................................. 20-5
20.2.5 Processing Solution Heater Safety Thermostat (D710 to D713) Replacement ................. 20-6
20.2.6 Processing Solution Heater (H710 to H713) Replacement ............................................... 20-6
20.2.7 Circulation Pump (PU710 to PU715) Replacement ............................................................ 20-7
20.3 Waste Solution System ................................................................................................................ 20-8
20.3.1 Waste Solution Hose Replacement .................................................................................... 20-8
20.3.2 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS749) Replacement ......................................................... 20-8
20.3.3 Waste Solution Tank Replacement .................................................................................... 20-8
21. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM .................................................. 21-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 21-2

21.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section .................................................................................................... 21-3
21.1.1 Replenishing Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................................................ 21-3
21.1.2 Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D744) Replacement ................................... 21-3
21.1.3 Hose Connection ................................................................................................................ 21-3
21.1.4 Replenisher Cartridge Setting Section Upper/Lower Sensor (D742/D743)
Replacement ............................................................................................................... 21-4
21.1.5 Replenisher Cartridge Section Removal/Re-installation .................................................... 21-4
21.1.6 Replenisher Cartridge Setting Sensor (D741) Replacement ............................................. 21-5
21.1.7 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Motor (M740) Replacement ............................................. 21-5
21.1.8 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement ........................................................... 21-5
21.1.9 Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing .................................................................. 21-6
21.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System ............................................................................... 21-7
21.2.1 Replenisher Tank Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................................. 21-7
21.2.2 Replenisher Filter Inspection/Replacement ........................................................................ 21-7
21.2.3 Replenisher Pump (PU741 to PU744) Replacement ......................................................... 21-7
21.2.4 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement ............................................................................. 21-8
21.2.5 Replenisher Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS740 to FS743/FS745 to FS748)
Replacement ............................................................................................................... 21-8
21.2.6 P2-RA and P2-RB Tank Replacement ............................................................................... 21-8
21.2.7 PS-R Tank Replacement .................................................................................................... 21-9
21.2.8 P1-R Tank Replacement .................................................................................................... 21-10
21.3 Auto Washing and P1-R Stirring System .................................................................................... 21-11
21.3.1 Auto Washing Pump (PU740) Replacement ...................................................................... 21-11
21.3.2 P1 to PS4 Front Side Rack Auto Washing Valve
(S720/S722/S724/S726) Replacement ...................................................................... 21-11
19
CONTENTS
21.3.3 P1 to PS4 Rear Side Rack Auto Washing Valve

(S721/S723/S725/S727) Replacement ...................................................................... 21-12
21.3.4 P1-R, P2-RA and P2-RB Cartridge Washing Valve
(S740 to S742)/P1-R Stirring Valve (S743) Replacement ........................................... 21-12
21.3.5 P1-R Stirring One-way Valve Replacement ...................................................................... 21-12
22. DRYER SECTION ............................................................................................................................ 22-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 22-2

22.1 Dryer Rack Section ...................................................................................................................... 22-3
22.1.1 Dryer Section Front Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................................................... 22-3
22.1.2 Dryer Rack Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................................................................ 22-3
22.1.3 Dryer Section Temperature Sensor (TS760) Replacement ............................................... 22-3
22.1.4 Dryer Rack Removal/Re-installation .................................................................................. 22-3
22.1.5 Dryer Belt/Roller Replacement ........................................................................................... 22-4
22.1.6 Dryer Section Front Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D781) Replacement ..................... 22-5
22.1.7 Dryer Rack Section Duct Removal/Re-installation ............................................................. 22-6
22.1.8 Dryer Rack Exit Nip Roller Replacement ........................................................................... 22-6
22.1.9 Dryer Duct Wing Plate Removal/Re-installation ................................................................. 22-6
22.2 Dryer Heater/Dryer Fan ................................................................................................................ 22-7
22.2.1 Dryer Side Cover Removal/Re-installation ......................................................................... 22-7
22.2.2 Dryer Rear Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................................................................ 22-7
22.2.3 Dryer Heater (H760)/Dryer Heater Safety Thermostat ...................................................... 22-7
22.2.4 Dryer Fan (F760) Replacement .......................................................................................... 22-8
22.2.5 Dryer Fan Duct Removal/Re-installation ........................................................................... 22-8
22.2.6 Dryer Section Bottom Plate Removal/Re-installation ......................................................... 22-8
23. PRINT EXIT SECTION/SORTER ................................................................................................ 23-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 23-3

23.1 Dryer Exit Unit .............................................................................................................................. 23-4
23.1.1 Dryer Exit Unit Removal/Re-installation ............................................................................. 23-4
23.1.2 Dryer Section Exit Front-line, Middle-line and Rear-line Paper Sensor (D771 to D773)
Replacement ............................................................................................................... 23-4
23.1.3 Feeding Path Switching Solenoid (S770) Replacement .................................................... 23-4
23.1.4 Entry Feed Belt Replacement ............................................................................................. 23-5
23.1.5 Entry Feed Belt Tension Adjustment .................................................................................. 23-5
23.1.6 Large Size Side Feed Belt Replacement ........................................................................... 23-5
23.1.7 Large Size Side Feed Belt Tension Adjustment ................................................................. 23-5
23.1.8 Upper Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation ...................................................................... 23-5
23.1.9 Entry Roller Replacement .................................................................................................. 23-6
23.1.10 Large Size Side Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation ...................................................... 23-7
23.1.11 Large Size Side Feed Roller Replacement ........................................................................ 23-7
23.1.12 High-speed Roller Replacement ......................................................................................... 23-8
23.2 Large Size Print Exit Unit ............................................................................................................. 23-9
23.2.1 Print Exit Lower Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................................................. 23-9
23.2.2 Large Size Print Exit Cover Removal/Re-installation ......................................................... 23-9
20
CONTENTS
23.2.3 Large Size Print Exit Unit Removal/Re-installation ............................................................. 23-9

23.2.4 Large Size Exit Roller /Belt Replacement ........................................................................... 23-9
23.2.5 Large Size Exit Gear Replacement .................................................................................... 23-10
23.3 Dryer Section Drive Unit ............................................................................................................... 23-11
23.3.1 Dryer Section Top Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................................................. 23-11
23.3.2 Dryer Section Drive Unit Removal/Re-installation ............................................................. 23-11
23.3.3 Dryer Section Drive Motor (M770) /Gear Replacement ...................................................... 23-11
23.3.4 Dryer Section Drive Gear Replacement ............................................................................. 23-12
23.4 Print Exit Unit ............................................................................................................................... 23-13
23.4.1 Print Exit Unit Removal/Re-installation ............................................................................... 23-13
23.4.2 Print Exit Upper Belt/Roller Replacement ........................................................................... 23-13
23.4.3 Print Exit Belt Tension Adjustment .................................................................................... 23-14
23.5 Sorter SU1100Y ........................................................................................................................... 23-15
23.5.1 Sorter SU1100Y Removal/Re-installation .......................................................................... 23-15
23.5.2 Sorter Circuit Board Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................................. 23-15
23.5.3 Sorter Drive Motor Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................................... 23-15
23.5.4 Tray Stop Position Sensor (D774) Replacement ................................................................ 23-16
23.5.5 Sorter Tray Stop Position Adjustment ................................................................................ 23-16
23.5.6 SWA20 Circuit Board (D776) Replacement ...................................................................... 23-16
23.5.7 Sorter Drive Motor (M771) Replacement ........................................................................... 23-17
23.5.8 Full (Before Last 2 Order) (D775A)/Full (Complete)(D775B) Sensor Replacement ........... 23-17
23.5.9 Tray Replacement .............................................................................................................. 23-17
23.5.10 Sorter Chain Tension Adjustment ....................................................................................... 23-18
24. PROCESSOR ELECTRICAL SECTION .................................................................................. 24-1
Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 24-2

24.1 Processor Control Section ........................................................................................................... 24-3
24.1.1 Processor Control Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................................... 24-3
24.1.2 PAC20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 24-3
24.1.3 Processor Control Section Cooling Fan (F792) Replacement ............................................ 24-3
24.1.4 CTP20 Circuit Board Replacement .................................................................................... 24-3
24.1.5 Circuit Protector (CB15) Replacement ............................................................................... 24-4
24.1.6 Transformer Replacement .................................................................................................. 24-4
24.2 Processor Electrical Section ........................................................................................................ 24-5
24.2.1 Processor Electrical Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................................. 24-5
24.2.2 Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement ................................................................................. 24-5
24.2.3 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement ............................................................... 24-5
24.2.4 Relay (K1, K2 and K3) Replacement .................................................................................. 24-5
24.2.5 SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement .................................................................................. 24-6
24.2.6 Electrical Box Disassembly/Re-assembly .......................................................................... 24-6
24.2.7 Circuit Protector (CB1 to CB14) Replacement ................................................................... 24-6
24.2.8 Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3) Replacement ............................................................................. 24-7
25. INDEX ................................................................................................................................................... 25-1
21
1. SAFETY
1
1.1 Laser Radiation Safety .................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 Laser Radiation Safety ...................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Laser Warning Label ......................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Safety Indication ................................................................................................ 1-3

1.2.1 Caution Label Locations on Scanner/Image Processor .................................... 1-3
1.2.2 Caution Label Locations on Printer/Paper Processor ....................................... 1-5
1.2.3 Laser Caution Label Locations on Printer ......................................................... 1-7
1.3 Processing Chemical (CP-48S) Handling Precautions .......................... 1-8
1.4 Certification and Identification Labels .........................................................

1-9
1.4.1 Certification and Identification Label Locations on Scanner/Image Processor ... 1-9
1.4.2 Certification and Identification Label Locations on Printer/Paper Processor .... 1-10
1-1
1.1 Laser Radiation Safety
1.1.1 Laser Radiation Safety

1
This product is a Class 1 laser device for which biological hazards have not been established.
1.1.1 Follow all warnings on the device label and in the Users Manual.
1.1.2
Laser Radiation Specification

R G B
Class IIIB
Laser Semi-conductor Solid-state Laser
Wavelength 685 nm 532 nm 473 nm
Output Max. 10mW 7mW 300µw
! WARNING • Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
• The exposure section front cover and upper side door of this device are provided with safety interlocks, which work
to stop laser radiation being emitted when the covers are opened. Do not press the safety interlocks, when they
are opened. Otherwise, laser emissions may occur, resulting in serious hazards.
1.1.2 Laser Warning Label
Protective Housing Label and its position required by the Section J of Chapter 1 of 21 CFR, issued by the U.S.FDA are shown in the
subsections 1.2.3 and 1.4.1.
REFERENCE
FDA (Food and Drug Administration) is the U.S. government agency which retains authority over major high energy-radiating product safety.
1-2
1.2 Safety Indication
On the machine, each location shown below is provided with a caution label concerning safety. In the case of operation or maintenance of
the machine, take good care when doing work so that burns or other personal injury may be avoided. 1
1.2.1
1.2.1 Caution Label Locations on Scanner/Image Processor
1-3
1
1.2.1
1-4
1.2.2 Caution Label Locations on Printer/Paper Processor

1
1.2.2
1-5
1
1.2.2
1-6
1.2.3 Laser Caution Label Locations on Printer

1
1.2.3
CAUTION
Visible laser radiation when open
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
1-7
1.3 Processing Chemical (CP-48S) Handling Precautions
Processing chemicals should be handled in accordance with the precautions indicated on the boxes and labels of the
1 respective chemicals.
! CAUTION
Protective Gloves Safety Goggles
● Always wear protective gloves and safety goggles when handling chemicals with the above
indications. This is recommended even for chemicals without these indications. For greater
protection, the use of a protective mask and apron is also recommended.
● Wash hands thoroughly after handling processing chemicals or solutions.
● Any spilled chemicals should be wiped up immediately.

● Use caution when mixing chemicals as certain mixtures may produce toxic gases.
● If you get any chemical on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the affected part with a great
amount of water.
● If you swallow any chemical or get any in your eyes, seek medical attention immediately and show
the physician the information printed on the box or label of the chemical(s) involved.
● In some countries, chemicals carrying a poison label are required by law to be stored under lock and
key. You are responsible for ascertaining and complying with the regulations concerning the handling
of poisonous substances that apply in your country.
● Store chemicals in a safe place out of reach of children.
● Waste solutions should be disposed of in accordance with the ordinances governing the handling of
industrial waste products in your locale. The P1-R chemical in the CP-48S replenisher cartridge and
the Component A of the P1 start-up chemical fall into the category of industrial waste. Should you
have any questions concerning these chemicals, consult your service representative.
Special note should be taken regarding the following properties of the CP-48S chemicals.
! CAUTION ● The P1-R chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component A of the P1 Start-up Chemical
These components contain P-phenylenediamine and may thus cause skin and eye irritation if
improperly handled. They may be injurious to the health if swallowed.
● The P2-RA Chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component A of the P2 Start-up
Chemical
These components cause oxidation in metals. They may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed with
a chlorine-based bleach (hypochlorite) or an alkaline (P1-R or N1-RA).
● The P2-RB Chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component B of the P2 Start-up
Chemical
These components may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed with a chlorine-based bleach
(hypochlorite) or an alkaline (P1-R or N1-RA). They may also produce harmful sulfur trioxide gas
when mixed with an acid.
● FSC100 (Fuji Super Conditioner)
This component contains dichloroisocyanurate and may thus produce harmful chlorine gas if mixed
with an acid. It could be injurious to the health if swallowed.
1-8
1.4 Certification and Identification Labels
1.4.1 Certification and Identification Label Locations on Scanner/Image Processor

1
1.4.1
1-9
1.4 Certification and Identification Labels
1.4.2 Certification and Identification Label Locations on Printer/Paper Processor

1
1.4.2
1-10
2. MAIN SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE INFORMATION
2.1 Input Unit (Scanner and Image Processor SP1500/SP2000) .............. 2-2 2
2.2 Output Unit (Laser Printer/Paper Processor LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ...... 2-3
2.3 Processing Solution Preparation .................................................................. 2-4

2.3.1 Handling Precautions ........................................................................................ 2-4
2.3.2 Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure ....................................................... 2-4
2.3.3 Required Chemicals (CP-48S) When Replacing Solutions .............................. 2-4
2.3.4 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) for LP1500SC ................................ 2-5
2.3.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) for LP2000SC ................................ 2-6
2.4 Adjustment Jig .................................................................................................... 2-7
2.5 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement ........................................ 2-9

2.5.1 Operation Section ............................................................................................. 2-9
2.5.2 Light Source Section ......................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.3 Scanner Section ............................................................................................... 2-10
2.5.4 Scanner Electrical Section ................................................................................ 2-10
2.5.5 Paper Supply Section ....................................................................................... 2-10
2.5.6 Exposure Section .............................................................................................. 2-11
2.5.7 Distribution Section ........................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.8 Printer Control Section ...................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.9 Processing Solution Replenishment System .................................................... 2-11
2.5.10 Print Exit Section/Sorter .................................................................................... 2-12
2-1
2.1 Input Unit (Scanner and Image Processor SP1500/SP2000)
Item Specifications
Type Floor-type, normal-light operation (laser printer, processor, cutter, sorter in one unit).
2 Scanning section 3-line CCD (5000 pixel × 3 colors)
Lens system Auto variable aperture system lens, Conjugate length variable system
Light source 400W halogen lamp with light amount adjustment system, Line-type mirror box
1) 135 automatic negative carrier NC135Y (standard); 135F/P/Hv, 135H, strips/piece

2) Automatic negative carrier NC240Y for Advanced Photo System (IX240) film (standard); Advanced
Photo System (IX240) C/H/P color negative cartridge/piece
Film carrier
3) Multi-film carrier MFC10Y (Optional); IX240, 135F, 135H, 135P, 120, 110, 126 (Reversal and
Negative)
4) Reversal mount auto carrier SC135Y (Optional: 135F, 135H and IX240 reversal mount
Operation Operation keyboard, Mouse, and Full keyboard (standard)
Optimal color reproduction processing, hyper-tone processing, soft focus, facial expression
Image processing enhancement, monotone finishing, RP-tone correction processing, and others.
Veriety print (optional): red-eye correction processing and Mounted print
15-inch/17-inch CRT color display

Display
6-frame display (1-frame display for multi-film carrier MFC10Y)
SP1500 135: Approx.1300 Prints/hr (3R), Advanced Photo System (IX240): 36 rolls/hr
Processing/transportation capacity
SP2000 135: Approx.1550 Prints/hr (3R), Advanced Photo System (IX240): 44 rolls/hr
Power requirements AC200-240V (50/60Hz) 10A, 2.4KVA
Dimensions 936(W) × 815(D) × 1,238(H)mm/36.85(W) × 32.09(D) × 48.74(H)in.
Weight Approx. 146kg/322lbs
Installation space Approx. 0.70m2/0.84sq.yd.
2-2
2.2 Output Unit (Laser Printer/Paper Processor LP1500SC/LP2000SC)
Item Specifications
Type Floor-type, normal-light operation (laser printer, processor, cutter, sorter in one unit).
Scanning exposure system using RGB lasers (solid-state G and B lasers). 2

Exposure system
Pixel density: 300dpi, Sub-scanning luster density: 600dpi
Scanning speed Sub-scanning speed: 80mm/sec.
Paper transport system Full-auto sheet paper transport system
Two switchable paper magazine

Magazine
Paper width: 8.9 to 15.2cm, length: 180m Paper width: 16.5 to 25.4cm, length: 90m
Paper width 8.9, 10.2, 11.7, 12.7, 15.2, 16.5, 20.3, 21.0, 25.4cm
Paper FUJICOLOR paper (silver-halide).
Print size 82.5 × 117mm to 254 × 381mm
Two 40-character lines in Backside print of information from Advanced Photo System cartridge film;
Back printing
One 40-character line for 135 and other film sizes
Time and date of photograph in black characters in lower-right corner on prints from Advanced Photo
Front printing
System (IX240) cartridge film.
Color index print and normal prints can be printed from Advanced Photo System/135 (negative, positive,
Index print
black and white) film in one pass.
Print condition setup Semi-automatic calibration by AC10Y calibrator
Operation panel 16 X 2 lines, LCD display with 8 keys
Counter Software controlled counting system
Processing system Multi-line sheet transport system
LP1500SC 1221mm/min.
Processing speed
LP2000SC 1652mm/min.
Processing time Dry to dry: 4 min.
LP1500SC Approx. 1,300 prints/hr. (3R)

Processor capacity
LP2000SC Approx. 1,550 prints/hr. (3R)
Processing chemicals New chemical system CP-48S (NC replenisher system)
Rack washing Auto-washing (removable)
Waste solution tank 12L × 1
Sorter SU1100Y; sorting capacity: 11 orders of C/H/P-mixed format prints (optiional 25 sorter also available)
Power requirements AC200-240V (50/60Hz) Single-phase 25A, Three-phase three-wire and four-wire, 16A approx.6KVA.
Dimensions 1,708(W) × 830(D) × 1,850(H) mm/67.24(W) × 32.68(D) × 72.83(H) in.
LP1500SC Approx.470kg/1,036lbs (530kg/1,168lbs during actual operation)

Weight
LP2000SC Approx.480kg/1,058lbs (550kg/1,213lbs during actual operation)
Installation space Approx. 1.40m2/1.65sq.yd.
2-3
2.3 Processing Solution Preparation
2.3.1 Handling Precautions • Store chemicals in a safe place out of reach of

children.
* Processing chemicals should be handled in accordance with the • Waste solutions should be disposed of in
accordance with the ordinances governing the
2 precautions indicated on the boxes and labels of the respective
chemicals. handling of industrial waste products in your
locale. The P1-R chemical in the CP-48S
2.3.1 replenisher cartridge and the Component A of the
! CAUTION
2.3.2 P1 start-up chemical fall into the category of
2.3.3 industrial waste. Should you have any questions
concerning these chemicals, consult your service
Protective Gloves Safety Goggles
representative.
• Always wear protective gloves and safety * Special note should be taken regarding the following properties of
goggles when handling chemicals with the above the CP-48S chemicals.
indications. This is recommended even for
chemicals without these indications. For greater ! CAUTION • The P1-R chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge
protection, the use of a protective mask and PC and Component A of the P1 Start-up
apron is also recommended. Chemical
• Wash hands thoroughly after handling processing These components contain P-phenylenediamine
chemicals or solutions. and may thus cause skin and eye irritation if
improperly handled. They may be injurious to the
health if swallowed.
• The P2-RA Chemical of the Replenisher
Cartridge PC and Component A of the P2 Start-
up Chemical
These components cause oxidation in metals.
• Any spilled chemicals should be wiped up They may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed
immediately. with a chlorine-based bleach (hypochlorite) or an
• Use caution when mixing chemicals as certain alkaline (P1-R or N1-RA).
mixtures may produce toxic gases. • The P2-RB Chemical of the Replenisher
• If you get any chemical on your skin or in your Cartridge PC and Component B of the P2 Start-
eyes, immediately flush the affected part with a up Chemical
great amount of water. These components may produce harmful
• If you swallow any chemical or get any in your ammonia gas if mixed with a chlorine-based
eyes, seek medical attention immediately and bleach (hypochlorite) or an alkaline (P1-R or N1-
show the physician the information printed on the RA). They may also produce harmful sulfur
box or label of the chemical(s) involved. trioxide gas if mixed with an acid.
• In some countries, chemicals carrying a poison • FSC100 (Fuji Super Conditioner)
label are required by law to be stored under lock This component contains dichloroisocyanurate
and key. You are responsible for ascertaining and and may thus produce harmful chlorine gas if
complying with the regulations concerning the mixed with an acid. It could be injurious to the
handling of poisonous substances that apply in health if swallowed.
your country.
2.3.2 Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure 2.3.3 Required Chemicals (CP-48S) When
Replacing Solutions
Tools Preparation Procedure Q’ty
Name Code Packing Units Components
LP1500SC LP2000SC
• Measuring Cup (5L) 1. Drain the processing tank (properly
dispose of the drained solution). Color Developer A×3 A×4
P1 To make 4.2 L A+B
2. Remove the processing rack. Startup Chemicals B×3 B×4
3. Clean the processing tank and rack with Bleach-fix Startup A×3 A×4
running water (preferably warm water) P2 To make 4.2 L A+B
Chemicals B×3 B×4
and a sponge or soft cloth. Do not use
any abrasive material such as a scrub Super Rinse
To make
brush. Replenisher FSC100 Tablets 1
5 L×100
4. Install the processing rack into the tank. (Fuji Super Conditioner)
EZ1129 5. Prepare the solution in accordance with P1-R
Replenisher 2 Cartridge
• level Gauge the “5.3 Preparing Processing Solutions PC P2-RA 1
Cartridge (PC × 2)
(CP-48S)”. P2-RB
6. Thoroughly clean the solution prepara-
tion tools with water. Ensure that they are NOTE: Paper area processed by a replenisher cartridge :
PS1,2,3,4
free of processing solution incrustations 111 sq.m (Approximately 10,000 sheets of 3R-size)
so as to avoid problems with the ensuing
P1, P2
solution preparation.
IMPORTANT
EZ1072 Use the dedicated measuring cup for P1
solution preparation. If the measuring cup
• Fuji Rinse Saving System has contained other solutions, thoroughly
FRSS10 clean it before P1 solution preparation.
2-4
2.3.4 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) for LP1500SC
* Prepare the processing solutions by following the numerical order shown. If these steps are not followed, abnormality of solutions may
result.
2
P1 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 12.7 liters) 2.3.4
1. Water 3 liters (15 to 40 ˚C) 2. Water 2 liters and three 3. Water 2 liters and three 4. Water (approximately 2.7 liters)
bottles of P1A bottles of P1B up to P1 line on gauge.
P1A
P1B
A
B
P1
P1
Circulation Filter
A B
P1 P1
P1 Line on
Gauge
Water 2 liters Water 2 liters
Water
Water 3 liters Water+(P1A X 3) Water+(P1B X 3) (Approximately
Sub Tank 2.7 liters)
P2 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 12.7 liters)

1. Water 3 liters (15 to 40 ˚C) 2. Water 2 liters and three 3. Water 2 liters and three 4. Water (approximately 1.3 liters)
P2A
P2B
A
B
P2
P2
Circulation Filter A
P2 B
P2
P2 Line on
Gauge
Water
PS Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 26.8 liters)

1. PS4 Tank 2. PS3 Tank 3. PS2 Tank 4. PS1 Tank
1) One tablet of FSC100 1) One tablet of FSC100 1) One tablet of FSC100 1) One tablet of FSC100
2) Water (approximately 2) Water (approximately 2) Water (approximately 2) Water (approximately
6.7 liters) up to PS line 6.7 liters) up to PS line 6.7 liters) up to PS line 6.7 liters) up to PS line
on gauge on gauge on gauge on gauge
1) FSC100 Lift PS4 rack. FSC100 Lift PS3 rack Lift PS2 rack. FSC100 Lift PS1 rack. FSC100
PS4 Tank PS3 Tank PS2 Tank PS1 Tank

2)
PS Line on PS Line on PS Line on PS Line on

Gauge Gauge Gauge Gauge
Water Water Water Water

Sub (Approximately (Approximately (Approximately (Approximately
Tank 6.7 liters) 6.7 liters) 6.7 liters) 6.7 liters)
2-5
2.3.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) for LP2000SC
* Prepare the processing solutions by following the numerical order shown. If these steps are not followed, abnormality of solutions may
2 result.
2.3.5 P1 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 16.5 liters)

1. Water 6 liters (15 to 40 ˚C) 2. Water 2 liters and four 3. Water 2 liters and four 4. Water (approximately 2.6 liters)
P1B
P1A
P1A
P1B
A
B
P1
P1
Circulation Filter
A B
P1 P1
P1 Line on
Gauge
Water
P2 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 16.5 liters)

1. Water 6 liters (15 to 40 ˚C) 2. Water 1 liters and four 3. Water 1 liters and four 4. Water (approximately 2.7 liters)
P2A
P2B
P2A
P2B
A
B
P2
P2
Circulation Filter
A B
P2 P2
P2 Line on
Gauge
Water
PS Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 34 liters)

1. PS4 Tank 2. PS3 Tank 3. PS2 Tank 4. PS1 Tank
1) One tablet of FSC100 1) One tablet of FSC100 1) One tablet of FSC100 1) One tablet of FSC100
2) Water (approximately 2) Water (approximately 2) Water (approximately 2) Water (approximately
8.5 liters) up to PS line 8.5 liters) up to PS line 8.5 liters) up to PS line 8.5 liters) up to PS line
on gauge on gauge on gauge on gauge
1) FSC100 Lift PS4 rack. FSC100 Lift PS3 rack Lift PS2 rack. FSC100 Lift PS1 rack. FSC100
PS4 Tank PS3 Tank PS2 Tank PS1 Tank

2)
PS Line on PS Line on PS Line on PS Line on

Gauge Gauge Gauge Gauge
Water Water Water Water

Sub (Approximately (Approximately (Approximately (Approximately
Tank 8.5 liters) 8.5 liters) 8.5 liters) 8.5 liters)
2-6
2.4 Adjustment Jig
2.4 Adjustment Jig
No. Name and Shape Part Number Purpose See section
1 NC135Y/NC135SG
Nip Roller Adjustment Tools
347C896569A Upper guide (pressure cover)
adjustment
11.2.39
2
NC135Y nip roller adjustment 11.2.39
EZ2046
2 Carrier Extension Cable 111A8993590 Connect between the carrier and the 9.5.5
scanner to enable input, output and 9.5.6
operation checks. 9.5.7
EZ1810
3 Focusing Chart Jig 96A21423A00 Optical axis adjustment (Menu 43H) 9.4.8
Optical magnification calibration 9.4.9

(Menu 43J)
Focus calibration (Menu 43K) 9.4.10
EZ1811
4 Reference Mirror Box 96A21424A00 Use to create reference data for dust 9.4.5
check on the “CCD Data Display (Menu
43E)” screen.
EZ1812
5 Height Adjustment Jig 41A9384530 Front up/down section height 17.2.6

adjustment
10.4mm
12.4mm
11.4mm 8mm Upper feed belt height adjustment 17.2.7

9.5mm
11mm
EZ1813
2-7
2.4 Adjustment Jig
No. Name and Shape Part Number Purpose See section
2 6 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjusting Jig 340A8894950 Back printer head clearance adjustment 15.4.1
EZ1814
7 Spectral Calibration Chart 610C895788 Spectral calibration (Menu 43P) 9.4.12
EZ1815
2-8
2.5 Required Adjustments afterAdjustments
2.5 Required Parts Replacement
after Parts Replacement
2.5.1 Operation Section
Adjustment
No. Replacement Parts Ref.
Item Menu Ref. 2
1 Monitor 11.1.1 (1) Monitor Color Adjustment 11.1.8/
2.5.1
11.1.9
2.5.2
(2) Monitor Adjustment 426 Applied
2 NC135Y Auto Film Carrier (1) Carrier Focus Position Adjustment 43C 9.4.3
(2) Carrier Inclination Display 43D 9.4.4
(3) Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete 44P 9.5.11
3 Film Leading End Sensor (D401)/LED (D400) 11.2.20/ NC135Y Sensor Calibration 44A 9.5.1
11.2.2
4 Scan Timing Sensor (D402)/Check Tape Sensor LED 11.2.3
(D410)
5 Check Tape Sensor (D411) 11.2.23
6 Perforation Sensor (D405) 11.2.18
7 Perforation Sensor LED (D404) 11.2.8
8 Scan Timing Sensor (D403) 11.2.24
9 CYB20 Circuit Board 11.2.19 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (Download) 44P 9.5.11
10 NC240Y Carrier (1) Carrier Focus Position Adjustment 43C 9.4.3
(2) Carrier Inclination Display 43D 9.4.4
(3) Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete 44P 9.5.11
11 MTP Sensor 1 (D454)/TAP Sensor (D455) 11.3.13 NC240Y Sensor Calibration 44B 9.5.2
12 MTP Sensor 1 LED (D447)/TAP Sensor LED (D448) 11.3.2
13 MTP Sensor 2 (D453) 11.3.25
14 MTP Sensor 2 LED (D457) 11.3.7
15 CYC20 Circuit Board 11.3.16 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (Download) 44P 9.5.11
2.5.2 Light Source Section
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 135 Mirror Box (1) Lamp Position Adjustment 432 Applied
(2) 135 Light Source Aperture Table 433 Applied
2 120 Mirror Box (1) Lamp Position Adjustment 432 Applied
(2) 120 Light Source Aperture Table 434 MFC10Y
3 Scanner Lamp/Reflector (1) Lamp Position Adjustment 432 Applied
(2) 135 Light Source Aperture Table 433 Applied
(3) 120 Light Source Aperture Table 434 MFC10Y
(4) Scanner Correction/Print Condition 13/16 Basic
Upkeep
4 Lamp Socket 12.1.2
5 First IR Filter (Replacement/Cleaning) 12.1.3
6 Safety Thermostat (ST201) 12.1.4
7 Balance Filter (Replacement/Cleaning) 12.2.2/ (1) 135 Light Source Aperture Table 433 Applied
12.2.5 (2) 120 Light Source Aperture Table 434 MFC10Y
8 Heat-absorbing Filter/Second IR Filter 12.2.6 (3) Scanner Correction/Print Condition 13/16 Basic
(Replacement/Cleaning) Upkeep
9 Light Source Aperture Home Position Sensor (D201)/ 12.2.7
Standby Sensor (D203)
10 Light Source Aperture Belt 12.2.9
NOTE: Basic: Basic Operating Instructions

Applied: Applied Operating Instructions
MFC10Y: MFC10Y Operating Instructions
2-9
2.5 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement
2.5.3 Scanner Section
Adjustment
2 Item Menu Ref.
1 ND Filter (Replacement/Cleaning) 6.3.2 (1) ND Filter Density Measurement 43N 9.4.11
2.5.3
(2) ND Filter Dust Check 43B 9.4.2
2.5.4
2 Conjugate Length Variable Belt 13.1.4 (1) Optical Magnification Calibration 43J 9.4.9
2.5.5
(2) Focus Calibration 43K 9.4.10
(3) Carrier Focus Position Adjustment 43C 9.4.3
3 Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M101) 13.1.5
4 Ball Screw 13.1.8
5 Conjugate Length Variable Upper Position (D103)/ 13.1.11
Home Position (D102)/Lower Position (D104)
Sensors
6 CCD Unit 13.1.6 (1) CCD Data Display (Dark Correction) 43E 9.4.5
(2) Optical Axis Adjustment 43H 9.4.8
(3) Optical Magnification Calibration 43J 9.4.9
(6) ND Filter Density Measurement 43N 9.4.11
(7) ND Filter Dust Check 43B 9.4.2
(8) CCD Data Display (Reference Data 43E 9.4.5
Creation)
(9) Spectral Calibration 43P 9.4.12
7 Lens Temperature Sensor (D106) 13.2.1 (1) Optical Magnification Calibration 43J 9.4.9
8 Lens Home Position Sensor (D105) 13.2.3
9 Lens Motor (M102) 13.2.4
10 Lens Unit 13.2.5 (1) Lens Registration 43G 9.4.7
(2) CCD Data Display (Dark Correction) 43E 9.4.5
(3) Optical Axis Adjustment 43H 9.4.8
(4) Optical Magnification Calibration 43J 9.4.9
11 Film Cooling Air Nozzle 13.2.6 Nozzle Position Adjustment 13.2.6
2.5.4 Scanner Electrical Section
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 DC24V Power Supply 14.1.9 DC24V Voltage Adjustment (+24V±0.3V) 14.1.10
2 Lamp Power Supply 14.1.11 Lamp Voltage Adjustment (+29V±0.3V) 14.1.12
3 Main Control Unit 14.2.10 (1) Input Voltage Change Switch (230V 14.2.10
Side)
(2) System Software Installation 8.3
2.5.5 Paper Supply Section
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 Cutter Unit 15.1.11 (1) Cutter Angle Adjustment 15.1.15
(2) Paper Magazine Angle Adjustment 15.1.16
(3) Cutter Position Adjustment 15.5.4
2 Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board 15.4.2 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment 15.4.1
2-10
2.5.6 Exposure Section
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref. 2
1 Operating Panel 16.1.8 Brightness Adjustment 16.1.8
2.5.6
2 Laser Unit 16.2.4 (1) Main Scanning Position Adjustment/ 45H 9.6.9
2.5.7
Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment
2.5.8
(2) Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment 45J 9.6.10
2.5.9
Print
(3) G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal 454 Applied
Temperature Setup
(4) Print Condition Upkeep 16 Basic
3 Sub-scanning Belt 16.3.1 Belt Alignment Adjustment 16.3.1
4 Paper Width Guide Drive Belt 16.3.13 Paper Width Guide Adjustment 16.3.25
5 Exposure Section Drive Steel Belt 16.3.20 Steel Belt Adjustment 16.3.20
2.5.7 Distribution Section
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 Up/Down Drive Belt/Timing Belt 17.1.11 Timing Adjustment 17.1.11
2 Distribution Unit 17.1.16 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment 45M 17.1.16
3 Front Up/Down Section 17.2.5 Front Up/Down Section Height 17.2.6
Adjustment
4 Feed Belt 17.2.7/ Upper Feed Belt Height Adjustment 17.2.7
17.2.8
2.5.8 Printer Control Section
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 CTL20 Circuit Board 18.1.17 (1) JP2: Shorted 2-3 Pin 18.1.17
(2) JP4: Shorted 1-2 Pin
(7) System Software Update 8.2
2.5.9 Processing Solution Replenishment System
Adjustment
Item Menu Ref.
1 PS-R Replenisher Filter 21.2.2 (1) PS-R Pump Output Measurement/ 461 Applied
Setting
(2) Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/ 462 Applied
Setting
2 PS-R Replenisher Pump (PU744) 21.2.3 PS-R Pump Output Measurement/Setting 461 Applied
3 PS-R Replenisher Pump Valve 21.2.4
4 Auto Washing Pump (PU740) 21.3.1 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/ 462 Applied
Setting
5 P1 to PS4 Front Side Rack Auto Washing Valves 21.3.2
(S720/S722/S724/S726)
6 P1 to PS4 Rear Side Rack Auto Washing Valves 21.3.2
(S721/S723/S725/S727)
NOTE: Basic: Basic Operating Instructions

Applied: Applied Operating Instructions
2-11
2.5.10 Print Exit Section/Sorter
Adjustment
2 Item Menu Ref.
1 Feeding Path Switching Solenoid (S770) 23.1.3 Feed Path Switching Guide Adjustment 23.1.3
2.5.10
2 Tray Stop Position Sensor (D774) 23.5.4 Sorter Tray Stop Position Adjustment 23.5.5
2-12
3. MENU TABLE
3.1 Menu Table .......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Printer/Processor Operation Panel Menu Table ....................................... 3-6 3

3.3 Operation Panel Menu Flow .......................................................................... 3-7
3.3.1 0 [MENU] Item .................................................................................................. 3-7
3.3.2 1 [LANGUAGE] Item ......................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.3 2 [CHECK] Item ................................................................................................ 3-9
3.3.4 3 [SELECT FUNC.] Item ................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.5 4 [PRINT COND.] Item ..................................................................................... 3-11
3.3.6 5 [SPECIAL PRINT] Item .................................................................................. 3-12
3.3.7 6 [SYSTEM] Item .............................................................................................. 3-16
3.3.8 7 [INSTALLATION] Item .................................................................................... 3-19
3-1
3.1 Menu
3.1 Menu Table Table
Classification User (Password)

Laboratory
Operator SE1 SE2
No. Screen No. Display Menu No. Pull-down Menu Sub Menu Manager
– 0000 6666 7777
0 Main Menu
3 1 Pre-operational 12 Check Item Display
Check
13 Scanner Correction
14 Processor
Temperature Check
15 Control Strip
Processing
16 Print Condition
Upkeep
2 (1) Quit
(2) Printing (1) Index Print 135
IX240
(2) Back Print 135/120
IX240
Back Print of Custom
Setting (Display)
(3) Front Print
(4) P.SET Initial Setting
(5) Special Film CH Select
(6) Print Mode Selection Normal Print
Mounted Print
Frame/Charact Print
Red-eye/Soft/Cross
Digital Image Import
(sRGB)
Digital Image Inport
(No convert)
Digital Image Export
(7) Cropping Center Cropping
Free Cropping
(8) Preview
(9) Exp. Cond. Retrieve
(3) Scanner Op. (1) Original Select
(2) →Re-order ⇔ →1st Print
(3) P.Size in Mixed Process
(4) Frame Display Switch
6→1⇔1→6
(5) Sort Data Display/Setting
(6) Scanner Mode Set
(4) Image Correction (1) Tone Adjustment
(2) Sharpness
(3) Monotone Correction
(4) RP-tone Correction
(5) Auto Correction ON/OFF
(6) Custom Setting No. Select
(5) Printer Op. (1) Magazine Upper → Lower ⇔
Lower → Upper
(2) Processor Start
3 Post-operational 31 Check Item Display
Check
411 Product Information 1
35 Next Timer ON Date/
Time Confirmation
3-2
3.1 Menu Table

Laboratory
Operator SE1 SE2
– 0000 6666 7777
4 Setup and 41 System Operation 411 Production Information 1
Maintenance Setup and Check
412 Production Information 2 3
414 Timer Setup
415 Error Information Check Log Information
Accumulated Information
416 Installation Information Reference
417 Data Backup
41E Clear Error Log
41F Installation Information Setup
41G Shipping Information Reference
41I DI Manager Administrative Setting
42 Print Condition 421 Paper Condition Setup
Setup and Check
422 Processor Temperature Check
423 Control Strip Processing
424 Print Size Setup
426 Monitor Adjustment
42C Image Correction Setup
42D Fine Adjustment of the Print
Mag. Setting
42E Special Film Channel Setting
42F Film Type Setting
42G Monotone Correction Setting
42J Paper Condition Method Setup
42K Shop Logo Regist/Delete
42L Template Regist/Delete
42M Custom Setting Regist/Delete
42N Holiday File Register/Delete
43 Scanner Adjustment/ 431 Lamp/Reflector Replacement
Maintenance
432 Lamp Position Adjustment
433 135 Light Source Aperture Table
434 120 Light Source Aperture Table
435 Input Check
436 Dust Check for Film Carrier Area
43A I/O Check
43B ND Filter Dust Check
43C Carrier Focus Position
Adjustment
43D Carrier Inclination Display NC135Y Film Carrier
NC240Y Film Carrier
43E CCD Data Display Status Change
S/N Inspection
43F Working Information
43G Lens Registration
43H Optical Axis Adjustment
43J Optical Magnification Calibration
43K Focus Calibration
43N ND Filter Density Measurement
43P Spectral Calibration
3-3
3.1 Menu Table

Laboratory
Operator SE1 SE2
– 0000 6666 7777
44 Carrier Adjustment/ 441 NC135Y Input Check
3 Maintenance
442 NC240Y Input Check
443 MFC10Y Input Check
44A NC135Y Sensor Calibration
44B NC240Y Sensor Calibration
44C Installation Information Display
44D Installation Information Setup
44E NC135Y I/O Check
44F NC240Y I/O Check
44G MFC10Y I/O Check
44H MFC10Y Monitor Image
Position Adjustment
44J NC135Y Working Information
44K NC240Y Working Information
44L MFC10Y Working Information
44P Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete
44Q NC135Y Machine Data Setup
44R NC240Y Machine Data Setup
44S MFC10Y Machine Data Setup
45 Printer Adjustment/ 451 Paper Magazine Registration
Maintenance
452 Paper Feed Length Adjustment
453 Test Pattern Printing
454 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal
Temperature Setup
455 Paper Feed
456 Printer Temperature Display
457 Printer Input Check
458 Image Position Fine
Adjustment
45A Printer I/O Check
45B Printer Function Select
45C Laser Exposure Check
45D R Laser (R-LD) Data
45E G Laser (G-SHG) Data
45F B Laser (B-SHG) Data
45G Scanning Position/Scanning
Home Position Parameter
Setup
45H Main Scanning Position
Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync.
Rough Adjustment
45J Laser Beam Sync. Fine
Adjustment Print
45K Laser History Display
45L Paper Condition Setup Table
(LUT) Copy
45M Printer Mechanism Fine
Adjustment
45N Back Printer Test
45P Printer Operation Data Display
45Q Clearing Selected Printer
Operation Data
3-4
3.1 Menu Table

Laboratory
Operator SE1 SE2
– 0000 6666 7777
45R Clearing All Operation Data
45T Data Saving 3
45U Data Download
45V Precut Length Setting
46 Processor 461 Pump Output Measurement/
Adjustment/ Setting
Maintenance
462 Auto Cleaning Output
Measurement/Setting
463 Processing Temperature
Setting
464 Replenisher Rate Setting
465 Evaporation Correction Rate
Setting
466 Low Volume Setup
467 Processor Temperature
Calibration
468 Processor Input Check
46A Processor I/O Check
46B Processor Operating Condition
Setup
46C Processor Operation Data
Display
46D Clearing Selected Processor
Operation Data
46E Processor Operation Data
Display 2
47 Option Adjustment/ 47A COM Port Setting
Maintenance
49 Special Operations 49A Paint
49B Explorer
49C Command
3-5
3.2 Printer/Processor
3.1 Menu Table Operation Panel Menu Table
Classification User
Laboratory SE
No. Main Menu No. Sub Menu Description
Manager
1 LANGUAGE 11 SET LANG. Language change
12 ORG. LANG NO. Required data version
3 13 ADD LANG NO. Loaded data version
2 CHECK 21 PROC TEMP Processor temperature indication
22 FMB CAPACITY FMB20 circuit board capacity
3 SELECT FUNC. 31 PROC DRIVE Processor drive
32 POWER OFF Power supply OFF
4 PRINT COND. 41 CALIBRATION Condition upkeep printing
42 MEASURE DENS Density measurement
43 CTRL STRIPS Control strip processing
5 SPEC. PRINT 51 BACK PRINT Back printing test
52 FEED PAPER Paper feeding
53 PAT. PRINT Pattern printing
6 SYSTEM 61 PROC. TYPE Processor type selection
62 PROC. METHOD Processing method selection
63 SORTER TYPE Sorter type selection
64 WASTE TANK Waste tank type selection
65 NIGHT ALARM Night Alarm ON - OFF
7 INSTALLATION 71 FREQ. SETTING Frequency setting
72 PSR AIR EXTRA. PSR line air bleeding
73 MIX REPLENISH. Replenisher preparation
74 PUMP AIR EXTRA. Replenishment line air bleeding
Key Operation for Menu

User Key Operation
Laboratory Manager MENU MENU MENU and ENTER
, ,
SE MENU MENU MENU MENU MENU and ENTER
, , , ,
3-6
3.3 Operation 3.3
Panel Menu
Operation Flow
Panel Menu Flow
3.3.1 0 [MENU] Item
MENU MENU MENU

3
MENU
3.3.1
MENU
ENTER
STAND BY $✻ 0 [MENU] 1 [LANGUAGE]
1 LANGUAGE 1 SET LANG. ?
(See subsection 3.3.2)
0 [MENU] 2 [CHECK]
2 CHECK 1 PROC. TEMP. ?
INITIALIZE $✻
0 [MENU] 3 [SELECT FUNC.]
3 SELECT FUNC. 1 PROC. DRIVE ?
0 [MENU] 4 [PRINT COND.]
4 PRINT COND. 1 CALIBRATION ?
MENU (See subsection 3.3.5)
0 [MENU] 5 [SPECIAL PRINT]
5 SPECIAL PRINT 1 BACK PRINT ?
0 [MENU] 6 [SYSTEM]
6 SYSTEM 1 PROC. TYPE ?
0 [MENU] 7 [INSTALLATION]
7 INSTALLATION 1 FREQ. SETTING ?
3-7
3.3 Operation Panel Menu Flow
3.3.2 1 [LANGUAGE] Item
ENTER ENTER
3 0 [MENU] 1 [LANGUAGE] 11 <SET LANG.>
1 LANGUAGE 1 SET LANG. ? [English] ?

3.3.2
ENTER
11 <SET LANG.>
[Japanese] ?
ENTER
1 [LANGUAGE] 12 <ORG. LANG No.>
2 ORG. LANG NO. ? 000001
ENTER
1 [LANGUAGE] 13 <ADD. LANG No.>
3 ADD. LANG NO. ? NO LANG LOADED
3-8
3.3.3 2 [CHECK] Item
ENTER
0 [MENU] 2 [CHECK] 21 <PROC TEMP.>
3
2 CHECK 1 PROC TEMP. ? P1 38.5 $
3.3.3
21 <PROC TEMP.>
P2 38.0 $
21 <PROC TEMP.>
PS1, 2 38.0 $
21 <PROC TEMP.>
PS3, 4 38.0 $
21 <PROC TEMP.>
DRY 31.6 $
ENTER
2 [CHECK] 22 <FMB CAPACITY>
2 FMB CAPACITY ? 96MB
3-9
3.3.4 3 [SELECT FUNC.] Item
3 ENTER ENTER
0 [MENU] 3 [SELECT FUNC.] 31 <PROC DRIVE>
3.3.4
3 SELECT FUNC. 1 PROC DRIVE ? START ?
ENTER
3 [SELECT FUNC.] 32 <POWER OFF>
2 POWER OFF ? START ?
ENTER
#M0003
#POWER OFF [YES] ? ENTER
POWER OFF
ENTER
#M0003
#POWER OFF [NO] ?
3-10
3.3.5 4 [PRINT COND.] Item
0 [MENU]
4 PRINT COND.
3
3.3.5
ENTER
4 [PRINT COND.] 41 <CALIBRATION>
1 CALIBRATION ? MAG. [UPPER]

ENTER
41 <CALIBRATION>
START ?
41 <CALIBRATION>
ENTER
MAG. [LOWER]
41 <CALIBRATION>
PRINTING ✻
ENTER
41 <CALIBRATION>
COMPLETED ?
ENTER ENTER
4 [PRINT COND.] 42 <MEASURE DENS> 42 <MEASURE DENS>
2 MEASURE DENS ? START ? MEASURING $
ENTER
42 <MEASURE DENS>
LUT UPDATE OK ?
ENTER
ENTER
4 [PRINT COND.] 43 <CTRL STRIPS> # Set Holder
3 CTRL STRIPS ? START ? # DRIVE [YES] ?
ENTER
# Set Holder
ENTER
# Drive [NO] ?
ENTER
4 [PRINT COND.] 4 <DENSITOMETER>

43 <CTRL STRIPS>
4 DENSITOMETER ? [AD100]
ENTER
PROCESSING ✻
4 <DENSITOMETER>
[AD200]
ENTER
3-11
3.3.6 5 [SPECIAL PRINT] Item
3 0 [MENU] 5 [SPEC. PRINT]

(See 51 [BACK PRINT].)
5 SPEC. PRINT 1 BACK PRINT ?
3.3.6
5 [SPEC. PRINT]
(See 52 [FEED PAPER].)
2 FEED PAPER ?
5 [SPEC. PRINT]
(See 53 [PATTERN PRINT].)
3 PAT. PRINT ?
3-12
51 [BACK PRINT]
ENTER
5 [SPEC. PRINT] 51 [BACK PRINT] 3
1 BACK PRINT ? MAG. [UPPER]
3.3.6
51 [BACK PRINT]
MAG. [LOWER]
51 <BACK PRINT>
LENGTH [82.5]
51 <BACK PRINT>
START ?
51 <BACK PRINT>
ENTER
LENGTH [89.0]
51 <BACK PRINT>
PRINTING ✻
51 <BACK PRINT>
LENGTH [127.0]
ENTER
51 <BACK PRINT>
COMPLETED ?
51 <BACK PRINT>
LENGTH [254.0]
51 <BACK PRINT>
LENGTH [381.0]
3-13
52 [FEED PAPER]
ENTER
3 5 [SPEC. PRINT] 52 [FEED PAPER]
2 FEED PAPER ? MAG. [UPPER]

3.3.6
52 [FEED PAPER]
MAG. [LOWER]
52 <FEED PAPER>
LENGTH [82.5]
52 <FEED PAPER>
START ?
52 <FEED PAPER>
ENTER
LENGTH [89.0]
52 <FEED PAPER>
PRINTING ✻
52 <FEED PAPER>
LENGTH [127.0]
ENTER
52 <FEED PAPER>
COMPLETED ?
52 <FEED PAPER>
LENGTH [254.0]
52 <FEED PAPER>
LENGTH [381.0]
3-14
53 [PATTERN PRINT]
5 [SPEC. PRINT]
ENTER
53 <PAT. PRINT> 3
3 PAT. PRINT ? MAG. [UPPER]
3.3.6
53 <PAT. PRINT>
MAG. [LOWER]
53 <PAT. PRINT>
LENGTH [82.5]
53 <PAT. PRINT>
TYPE [BL Plas]
53 <PAT. PRINT>
LENTGH [89.0]
53 <PAT. PRINT> 53 <PAT. PRINT>
TYPE [BD Plas] START ?
53 <PAT. PRINT>
ENTER
LENGTH [127.0]
53 <PAT. PRINT> 53 <PAT. PRINT>
TYPE [GRID] PRINTING ✻
53 <PAT. PRINT>
LENGTH [254.0]
ENTER
53 <PAT. PRINT>
COMPLETED ?
53 <PAT. PRINT>
LENGTH [381.0]
3-15
3.3.7 6 [SYSTEM] Item
NOTE: Restart the system other changing the “SYSTEM” item.
3
0 [MENU] 6 [SYSTEM]
3.3.7 (See 61 [PROC.TYPE].)
6 SYSTEM 1 PROC. TYPE ?
6 [SYSTEM]
(See 62 [PROC. METHOD].)
2 PROC. METHOD ?
6 [SYSTEM]
(See 63 [SORTER TYPE].)
3 SORTER TYPE ?
6 [SYSTEM]
(See 64 [WASTE TANK].)
4 WASTE TANK ?
6 [SYSTEM]
(See 65 [NIGHT ALARM].)
5 NIGHT ALARM ?
61 [PROC. TYPE]
ENTER
61 <PROC. TYPE>
[NO PROC.] ?
ENTER ENTER
6 [SYSTEM] 61 <PROC. TYPE>
1 PROC. TYPE ? [LP1500] ?
ENTER
61 <PROC. TYPE>
[LP2000] ?
3-16
62 [PROC. METHOD]
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[FACTORY TEST] ?
3
3.3.7
ENTER ENTER
6 [SYSTEM] 62 <PROC.>
2 PROC.METHOD ? [CP-48S/RI] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-48S/RO] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-47L/RI] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-47L/RO] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-43FA/RI] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-43FA/RO] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-40FA/RI] ?
ENTER
62 <PROC.>
[CP-40SP] ?
3-17
63 [SORTER TYPE]
ENTER
63 <SORTER TYPE>
[NONE] ?
3
3.3.7
ENTER ENTER
6 [SYSTEM] 63 <SORTER TYPE>
3 SORTER TYPE ? [SU1100Y] ?
ENTER
63 <SORTER TYPE>
[SU2500Y] ?
64 [WASTE TANK]
ENTER ENTER
6 [SYSTEM] 64 <WASTE TANK>
4 WASTE TANK ? EXT. TANK [NO] ?
ENTER
64 <WASTE TANK>
EXT. TANK [EX] ?
65 [NIGHT ALARM]
ENTER ENTER
6 [SYSTEM] 65 <NIGHT ALARM>
5 NIGHT ALARM ? [OFF] ?
ENTER
65 <NIGHT ALARM>
[ON] ?
3-18
3.3.8 7 [INSTALLATION] Item
0 [MENU]
7 INSTALLATION
3
3.3.8
ENTER
7 [INSTALLATION] 71 <FREQ. SETTING>
1 FREQ. SETTING ? [50Hz] ?
ENTER
71 <FREQ. SETTING>
[60Hz] ?
ENTER ENTER
7 [INSTALLATION] 72 <PSR AIR EXTRA.> 72 <PSR AIR EXTRA.>
2 PSR AIR EXTRA. ? START ? EXTRACTING AIR ✻
ENTER
ENTER
7 [INSTALLATION] 73 <MIX REPLENISH.> 73 <MIX REPLENISH.>
3 MIX REPLENISH. ? START ? PREPARING ✻
ENTER
ENTER
7 [INSTALLATION] 74 <PUMP AIR EXTRA.> 74 <PUMP AIR EXTRA.>
4 PUMP AIR EXTRA. ? START ? EXTRACTING AIR ✻
3-19
4. OUTLINE
4.1 Scanner (SP1500/SP2000) ............................................................................ 4-3

4.1.1 Light Source/Scanner Section Configurations .................................................. 4-3
4.1.2 Optical and Filter Configurations ...................................................................... 4-4
4.1.3 Auto Film Carrier NC135Y Configuration .......................................................... 4-5
4.1.4 Auto Film Carrier NC240Y Configuration .......................................................... 4-7 4
4.1.5 Auto Film Carrier Speed Control Clutch Functions ........................................... 4-9
4.1.6 Electrical Equipment Configurations ................................................................. 4-10
4.1.7 Circuit Board Configurations and Functions ..................................................... 4-11
4.1.8 Electrical Equipment Block Diagram ................................................................. 4-12
4.1.9 Image Data Transfer ......................................................................................... 4-13
4.1.10 CTB20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................... 4-15
4.1.11 CCD20 Circuit Board (CCD Unit) ...................................................................... 4-17
4.1.12 CDS20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 4-18
4.1.13 GMB20/GMC20 Circuit Board .......................................................................... 4-19
4.1.14 GFM20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 4-20
4.1.15 GIP20 Circuit Board .......................................................................................... 4-21
4.1.16 GLO20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 4-22
4.1.17 GIS20 Circuit Board .......................................................................................... 4-23
4.1.18 CYB20 Circuit Board (NC135Y) ........................................................................ 4-24
4.1.19 CYC20 Circuit Board (NC240Y) ....................................................................... 4-25
4.2 Printer Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ..................................................... 4-26

4.2.1 Paper Supply Section Configuration ................................................................. 4-26
4.2.2 Paper Supply Section Feed Roller Configuration ............................................. 4-27
4.3 Exposure Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ............................................... 4-28

4.3.1 Exposure Section Configuration ....................................................................... 4-28
4.3.2 Laser Unit Configuration ................................................................................... 4-29
4.4 Distribution Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ............................................ 4-30

4.4.1 Distribution Section ........................................................................................... 4-30
4.4.2 Processor Entrance Unit ................................................................................... 4-31
4.5 Printer Electrical Equipment Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ............ 4-32

4.5.1 Electrical Equipment Section Configurations .................................................... 4-32
4.5.2 Circuit Board Main Functions ............................................................................ 4-32
4.5.3 Printer Electrical Equipment Block Diagram ..................................................... 4-33
4.5.4 CTL20 Circuit Board Block Diagram ................................................................. 4-34
4.5.5 Power Source System Diagram ........................................................................ 4-35
4.5.6 CTL20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................... 4-36
4.5.7 PDC20 Circuit Board ........................................................................................ 4-38
4.5.8 FMA20 Circuit Board (1394 Communication Circuit Board) ............................. 4-40
4.5.9 FMB20 Circuit Board (Memory Circuit Board) .................................................. 4-41
4.5.10 FMC20 Circuit Board (Memory Control Circuit Board) ..................................... 4-42
4.5.11 LDD20 Circuit board ......................................................................................... 4-43
4-1
4.6 Processor Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) .............................................. 4-46
4.6.1 Processing Section Configuration ..................................................................... 4-46
4.6.2 Piping Diagram for Solution Circulation System ............................................... 4-47
4.6.3 Replenishment/Auto-washing Piping System ................................................... 4-49
4 4.6.4 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Mechanism ..................................................... 4-50
4.6.5 Dryer Section Configuration .............................................................................. 4-51
4.6.6 Print Feeding Section/Sorter Configurations .................................................... 4-52
4.6.7 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Configuration .................................... 4-53
4.6.8 Input Power Supply Section Parts and Circuit Functions ................................. 4-54
4.6.9 Circuit Board Main Functions ............................................................................ 4-55
4.6.10 Processor Electrical Equipment Block Diagram ............................................... 4-55
4.6.11 CTP20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................... 4-56
4.6.12 PAC20 Circuit Board ......................................................................................... 4-58
4-2
4.1 Scanner (SP1500/SP2000)
4.1.1 Light Source/Scanner Section Configurations
CCD Cooling Fan (F301)
ND Filter
CCD Unit (D101)
Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M101) 4
4.1.1
Lens Unit
Lens Driving Motor (M102)
Auto Film Carrier Film Cooling Nozzle
Light Source Section

Mirror Box
Suction Fan (F302)
Balance Filter
Motor (M202)
Air Filter
Light Source
Filter Unit
Light Source Aperture Motor

(M201)

Exhaust Fan (F303)
Scanning Lamp Unit
EZ1171
4-3
4.1.2 Optical and Filter Configurations
4
4.1.2
Lens Unit
Auto Film Carrier

(NC135Y/NC240Y)
Mirror Box
Balance Filter
(For Reversal)
(For Negative)
Light Source Aperture
Second IR Filter
Heat-absorbing Filter
First IR Filter
Reflector
Scanning Lamp
EZ606
4-4
4.1.3 Auto Film Carrier NC135Y Configuration
Top View
Reduction Clutch 3 (S402) Reduction Clutch 2 (S401)

Plug-in Connector 4
Reduction Clutch 1 (S400) Pressure Cover
Film Feed
4.1.3
Motor (M400)
Check Tape Sensor

LED (D410)
Winding
Section
Film Leading End

Sensor (D400)
Film Mask
Film Mask Home Position Scan Timing Sensor
Drive Motor (M403)
Sensor (D409) Variable Film Mask LED (D402)
Bottom View of Pressure Cover
Film Nip Roller Film Mask/Diffusion Plate

Dust Removal Roller Perforation Sensor LED (D404)
EZ1028A
4-5
Bottom View
Check Tape Sensor (D411) Perforation Sensor (D405)
4
4.1.3
CYB20
Circuit Board
Indicator Lamp
(L400)
Scan Timing Sensor (D402) Nip Home Position Sensor Film Feed Motor Driver
(D407) Circuit Board
Soft Nip Drive Motor
(M401)
Pressure Cover Open/Close

Sensor (D406)
Film Leading End

Sensor (D401)
Lower Dust Removal Roller
EZ1028B
4-6
4.1.4 Auto Film Carrier NC240Y Configuration
Top View
Reduction Clutch 2 (S441)

Reduction Clutch 1 (S440) Door Open/Close Sensor (D441) 4
Reduction Clutch 3 (S442) Plug-in Door Open/Close Motor (M441)
Connector 4.1.4
Spool Motor (M442)
Film Feed Motor
(M440)
Chucking Sensor
(D443)/VEI Sensor
(D442)
MTP Sensor 1
LED (D447)
Write Head
(MWH01)
Circuit Board
Release Knob
C
Cartridge Sensor
C P (D456)
MTP Sensor 2 Cartridge Motor

LED (D457) (M444)
Read Head Circuit Board TAP Sensor LED (D448) Lower Dust
Removal Roller
Film Winding Unit
P-side Write Magnetic P-side Read Magnetic Head (D450)
Head (D452)
Upper Dust
Removal Roller
C-side Write Magnetic

Head (D451) C-side Read Magnetic Film Mask/
Head (D449) Diffusion Plate
Bottom View of Pressure Cover
EZ1027A
4-7
Bottom View
MTP Sensor 1 (D454)
4
4.1.4
Film Feed
Motor Driver
Circuit Board
TAP Sensor
(D455)
IPI Sensor (D445) Indicator Lamp

CYC20 Circuit Board
Feed Stop
Sensor (D444)
MTP Sensor 2 (D453) Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor (D446)
EZ1027B
4-8
4.1.5 Auto Film Carrier Speed Control Clutch Functions
S402
4
S401
4.1.5
Pre-scanning and skipping
Fine-scanning
(Medium speed)
S400
Fine-scanning
(Low speed)
S401
S400
EZ1210
4-9
4.1.6 Electrical Equipment Configurations
4 Monitor
DC24V Power Supply
Transformer
4.1.6 PWR20 Circuit Board
Image Processing Circuit
Board Box Noise Filter (NF1)
Relays (K1, K2)
Circuit
DC Power Supply Unit Breaker (NFB1)
Electrical Equipment
Section Exhaust Fan
(F306/F307)
CTB20 Circuit Board
Lamp Power
Supply
Input Terminal
Block
Circuit Protectors (CP11 ~ CP16)
Noise Filter Terminal Block (J1)
START Switch
Input Power Supply Unit Air Tank

Main Control Unit
Film Cooling Air Compressor (PU351)
UPS (Uninterruptive Power Supply) Connector
EZ913
4-10
4.1.7 Circuit Board Configurations and Functions
CCD20 Circuit Board

CTB20 Circuit Board
4
4.1.7
KYA20 Circuit Board
CDS20 Circuit Board
GFM20 Circuit Board
GIP20 Circuit Board
GLO20 Circuit Board
GIS20 Circuit Board
GMB20/GMC20 Circuit Board
PWR20 Circuit Board
EZ912
Circuit Board Functions
CCD20 Scanner section imaging circuit board (CCD and CCD output amplifier).
CTB20 CPU circuit board for mechanical control.
CDS20 Scanner section CCD signal AD conversion and correction circuit board.
GMB20/GMC20 Image processing section CPU circuit board.
GFM20 Input image data correcting circuit board.
GIP20 Main image processing circuit board.
GLO20 Output image correcting and printer interface circuit board.
GIS20 Main control unit interface circuit board.
PWR20 Power supply system control circuit board.
KYA20 Operation keyboard circuit board.
4-11
4
4.1.8
4.1.8
4-12
CCD20 R/B/G_Video
Circuit Board Image Processing Circuit Board Box

I/O
CDS20 GFM20 GIP20 GLO20 GFM20 GIP20 GLO20 GIS20

Scanner I/O CTB20

Circuit Board
Film Carrier
Compressor
GIF20
RS422 Serial
Electrical Equipment Block Diagram
VDEN
Light Source I/O
EXTVD
Lamp
AC100V_PWR DC. Lamp_PWR

GMB20/GMC20 SCSI
Cable
Lamp Power I/O
DC_PWR
START Switch
AC200V_PWR I/O
DC_main Power Source Section Full Keyboard

DC_PWR
SSR
Monitor
On Operation
K2 Control AC200V_PWR Keyboard
On DC_PWR
Transformer data
On
K1 Timer Card
AC200V_PWR
AC200V_input Main Control Unit START Switch
OR AC200V_PWR
Power Control Section SCSI
UPS Inlet 100BaseTX
4.1.9 Image Data Transfer
1. Pre-scanning
FMB20
CDS20 GFM20 GIP20 GLO20

4
Coaxial Coaxial Coaxial
Cable 1394 Cable Cable 4.1.9
CCD Unit
FMA20 FMC20 AOM Driver Laser Unit
SCSI
GMB20/GMC20 GIS20 Main Control Unit
2. Fine-scanning
FMB20

Cable 1394 Cable Cable
CCD Unit
SCSI
3. Index Printing
FMB20

CCD Unit
SCSI
4-13
4. Calibration Printing (421 Paper Condition Setup) 5. Test Pattern Printing (453)
FMB20
FMB20
4 Coaxial Coaxial
Coaxial
Cable
Coaxial
Cable
Cable Cable
4.1.9
FMC20 AOM Driver Laser Unit
FMC20 AOM Driver Laser Unit
CTL20
CTL20
6. DI Writing
FMB20

CCD Unit
SCSI
GMB20/GMC20 GIS20 Main Control Unit HUB DI Controller
7. DI Print
FMB20

CCD Unit
SCSI
GMB20/GMC20 GIS20 Main Control Unit HUB DI Controller
4-14
4.1.10 CTB20 Circuit Board
Power Supply and Check Points
Power Supply System Supply Connector Circuit Protector Protected Circuit Check Points
+5V: TP34
CN1 CP6 Whole digital circuit
DGND: TP21
+5V Digital circuit +5V: 2 pin
GND: 1 pin CP7 (NOTE) Circuit board output, sensors, etc.
+5V2: TP23 4
DGND: TP18
4.1.10
Power circuit CN16
+24V1: TP15
+24V1 (Without +24V: 5 pin CP5 Lens motor (M102)
PGND: TP13
interlock) GND: 2 pin
Light source aperture motor (M201) and +24V2: TP14

CP1
Power circuit CN13 balance filter motor (M202) PGND: TP16
+24V2 (Lamp interlock +24V: 3 and 4 pins
CN12
system) GND: 1 and 2 pins
CP2 Fans, and etc. +24V: 2 pin
GND: 1 pin
+24V3: TP11
CP3 Conjugate length variable motor (M101)
Power circuit CN16 PGND: TP10
+24V3 (Without +24V: 4 pin
CN17
interlock) GND: 1 pin Light source section cooling fans, and
CP4 +24V: 2 pin
etc.
GND: 1 pin
NOTE: The CP7 is connected in series after the CP6. Therefore, the power supply to the CP7 is opened if the CP6 trips.
Indicator LED
Condition
LED System
During power On to downloading After completion of downloading
D1 Operation of U18X and SH2 Lights (NOTE 1) Blinks (NOTE 2)
D2 Operation of U19 and H8 Lights (NOTE 1) Blinks (NOTE 2)
NOTE 1: Indicates that the CPU has been started up and condition is able to download. If the LED does not light, malfunction of power
supply, reset switch or CPU is considered as the cause.
NOTE 2: Indicates that the CPU is operating. Blinking will stop during the motor is operating. If the LED does not blink when the motor is not
operating, the CPU is hung-up condition.
4-15
4
4.1.10
EZ1715
4-16
4.1.11 CCD20 Circuit Board (CCD Unit)
Power Supply Check Points
+5V TP12(+5V) to TP26(AGND)
–5V TP22(–5V) to TP26(AGND)
+5V TP24(D5V) to TP30(DGND) 4

4.1.11
EZ1716
4-17
4.1.12 CDS20 Circuit Board
4 –12V TP45(–12V) to TP25(AGND)
4.1.12 +5V TP36(+D5V) to TP40(DGND)
EZ1717
4-18
4.1.13 GMB20/GMC20 Circuit Board
4
4.1.13
EZ1722
4-19
4.1.14 GFM20 Circuit Board
4
4.1.14
EZ1718
4-20
4.1.15 GIP20 Circuit Board
4
4.1.15
EZ1719
4-21
4.1.16 GLO20 Circuit Board
4
4.1.16
EZ1720
4-22
4.1.17 GIS20 Circuit Board
4
4.1.17
EZ1721
4-23
4.1.18 CYB20 Circuit Board (NC135Y)
+5V TP1(+5V) to TP3(DGND)

4
4.1.18
EZ1724
4-24
4.1.19 CYC20 Circuit Board (NC240Y)
+5V TP5(+5V) to TP2(DGND)
+24V TP8(+24V) to TP6(AGND) 4

4.1.19
EZ1725
4-25
4.2 Printer Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC)
4.2.1 Paper Supply Section Configuration
Upper Side Door Section Feed Motor (M542)
4 Upper Side Door Section

Nip Release Motor (M545)
4.2.1
Back Printer
Upper Paper
Supply Motor (M501)
Middle Side Door Section Upper Paper

Feed Motor (M541) Magazine
Middle Side Door Turn Section

Feed Motor (M540)
Upper Magazine
Table
Upper Cutter
Lower Paper
Magazine
Upper Cutter Motor (M500)
Lower Side Door Section

Feed Motor (M551) Lower Magazine
Table
Lower Side Door Turn Section

Feed Motor (M550)
Lower Cutter
Lower Cutter Motor (M520)

EZ189
4-26
4.2 Printer Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC)
4.2.2 Paper Supply Section Feed Roller Configuration
Back Printer Ribbon Drive Gear

Upper Side Door Section
Feed Motor (M542)
4
Nip Release Motor (M545) 4.2.2
Middle Side Door Section

Feed Motor (M541)
Middle Side Door Turn Section

Feed Motor (M540)

Feed Motor (M551)
Lower Side Door Turn

Feed Motor (M550)
: One-way Gear
EZ1040
4-27
4.3 Exposure Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC)
4.3.1 Exposure Section Configuration
Sub-scanning Motor (M561)

4 Laser Unit Exposure Section Anti-dust Pressure Fans
1, 2 and 3 (F620 to F622)
4.3.1 Pre-exposure Feed
Motor (M560)
Exposure Section Nip Motor (M565)
Paper Width Guide Motor (M563) Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F565)
Sub-scanning Belt
EZ190
4-28
4.3 Exposure Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC)
4.3.2 Laser Unit Configuration
Laser beams pass through the polygon scanner mirror, lens and mirror, and reach the paper. The polygonal scanner mirror rotates at a
constant speed, and always turn the reflecting light in the main scanning direction. The sub-scanning motor (M561) feeds the paper at the
speed of 80mm/s (equivalent to 600dpi).
Polygonal Scanner Mirror B-SHG G-SHG R Laser 4

AOM
4.3.2
Lenses
Paper Sheet
Mirrors
EZ1170
AOM Red Laser

R-LD
AOM SHG Infrared Laser
G-SHG
AOM SHG Infrared Laser
B-SHG
Output level is changed in Green/blue lasers are

accordance with the digitized generated by the mudulation
color level. of infrared laser.
Red laser (Semiconductor laser): Laser diode is used as light source. Blue/green lasers are generated based on the infrared laser.
SHG (Second Harmonic Generator): Blue/green lasers are generated based on the infrared laser.
AOM (Acousto-Optic Modulator): Each laser has one AOM. The laser's output level is changed in accordance with the digitalized color
level of the image.
4-29
4.4 Distribution Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC)
4.4.1 Distribution Section
Distribution Unit Distribution UP/DOWN Motor (M572)
UP/DOWN Timing Belt Distribution Pump

4
4.4.1
Distribution Section
Solenoid Valves A/B
Retaining Belt (S570/S571)
Distribution Motor
(M571)
Distribution Section
Feed Motor (M570)
Lower Feed Belt
Paper Release Roller Upper Feed Belt

Suction Cup
Tension Roller
EZ191
4-30
4.4 Distribution Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC)
4.4.2 Processor Entrance Unit
Gear Box
4
4.4.2
Pulley Shaft
Processor Entrance Feed Belts (12) Processor Drive Chain
EZ1172
4-31
4.5 Printer Electrical Equipment Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC)
4.5.1 Electrical Equipment Section Configurations
AOM Drivers (AOM20 Circuit Board) LDD20 Circuit Board
AOM Driver Cooling Fans (F591 to F593) AOM-R AOM-G AOM-B
Electrical Equipment Section

4 Exhaust Fans Sub-scanning
(F582 to F584) Motor Drive
4.5.1 Circuit Board
4.5.2
Control Circuit Board
Bracket
Printer Control Section

Cooling Fans 1/2
(F587/F588)
PDC20 Circuit Board
FMC20 Circuit Board FMB20 Circuit Board

FMA20 Cirucuit Board
CTL20 Circuit Board DC Power Supply Exhaust
Fan (CF595) DC Power Supply Unit
EZ1035
4.5.2 Circuit Board Main Functions
CTL20 Printer main control circuit board
FMA20 Circuit board interfacing to scanner (receives inputted image data)
FMB20 Frame memory circuit board (stores inputted image data)
FMC20 Frame memory control circuit board (performs the tone-processing on inputted image data, and output to a correct position)
PDC20 Printer load (motor, solenoid, fan) drive circuit board
LDD20 Laser drive circuit board
AOM20 AOM drive circuit board
4-32
4.5.3
JMB20 SHG (B) AOM (B)
THA20 THA20 JMG20 SHG (G) AOM (G) Laser Unit
JMR20 LD (R) DTA20 AOM (R)

LDD20
Polygon
Paper Feed Section
AOM20
JND20 JND20
Motor/Fan/
Solenoid
PDC20 CTL20 To Processor CTP20
Printer Electrical Equipment Block Diagram
Circuit Board
RS422
SSR Operator
Panel
JEM20 JEM20
Air Pump (PU570) Densitometer
(AC100V)
Back Printing
Scanner FMA20
(IEEE1394) FMC20
Image (Memory Controller/
LUT/DA)
Communication
FMB20 (Standard)
FMB20 (Addition)
FMB20 (Addition)
4-33
4
4.5.3
4
4.5.4
4.5.4
4-34
Feeding Feeding Feeding Distribution Operator Laser
Speed Adjust Back PRT Densitometer Processor Power SW
Path System Guide I/F System Section Panel Unit FMC20 I/F
CLOCK Gen. Peripheral LSI I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F
I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F I/F
(28MHz Dividing) System
CONT.FLEX
RESET Gen. 3 pcs 2 pcs EXP_TRG
MB3771 Each Device
Debug I/F Debug I/F
Battery Back up PPI TIOCA[2:0]
Discreet Circuit SVP1 SVP2 EXP_CLK
SRAM/ RTC /S1_INT /S2_INT TIOCA[1:0] Each COUNT.ENB
SUB-CPU_A SUB-CPU_B Status PPI INT.CLR/SEL PTC

6 pcs 4 pcs
H8S/2355 H8S/2355 PL121 uPD71054
DIP SA_CLK(19.6MHz) SB_CLK(19.6MHz) SUBCPU_PRST
SW SA_IRO SA_INT SB_IRO SB_INT EXP_STA
MAIN-CPU
INT(IRO[3:1]) SH7043 EXP_CLK
FMC20 Exposure Start Signal
CTL20 Circuit Board Block Diagram
1394 RAMC BZR_ON

SH2 SRAM SRAM
H8S/2355 x 2 (32KB+32KB) (32KB+32KB)
System : 28MHz
SVP x 2
PLL_CLK(7MHz)
MTU
DMAC SCI
M561_CLK(10KHz~26KHz)
CLOCK(28MHz) FLX_CLK
TXD TXD CS[2:0] EPROM FPROM SRAM RTC

RXD RXD DC5/24V_ON System (512KB) (2MB) (0.5MB) RF5C15
/AS/DS/RW/GATE
CONTROL
BZR_CLK *For backup data
FLEXdevice Config. RTC_CLK(32.7KHz)
Prom
SUB-CPU_C Each Device Selection
PLL_CLK(4.9MHz) MC68HC711 Peripheral Control DRAM
(2MB)
SCLK
MOSI CS[3:0] *For data

MISO
FMC20 LDD20 For Debug Exposure Unit FMC20

1394 I/F Serial I/F
I/F I/F DRAM I/F
4.5.5 Power Source System Diagram
4
D+5V CTL20 4.5.5
FMA20 D+5
D+3.3V FMC20
DTA
D±5V
AOM20
A±12V
B System
LDD20
A+6V
P+5V
PDC20
B System
D+24V2
D+12V
A+24V
+24V1
+24V0
A System
CTP20
+24V3
D+5
PAC20
+24V4 Each load
Processor
Interlock
Note : • Dashed lines show circuit protectors.

• A and B systems show printer interlock systems.
4-35
4.5.6 CTL20 Circuit Board
Power Supply System Circuit Protector Protected Circuit Check Points
+5V: TP1
DGND: TP2 to
4 TP6 or TP10
D561P input: TP13

4.5.6
DGND: TP2 to TP6 or
+5V Digital circuit CP1 Power supply for sensors.
TP10
D562P input: TP14

DGND: TP2 to TP6 or
TP10
Power supply for polygon and A+24V: TP9

+24V Analog circuit CP2 densitometer DGND: TP2 to TP6 or
TP10
Indicator LED
LED System Condition
LED3 Digital +5V indication Lights when +5V is supplied.
Jumper Pin
Jumper Pin System Condition
JP2 Battery backup 2-3 pin short: “Backup” setting
JP4 D561P current 1-2 pin short: “High sensitivity” setting
JP5 D562P current 1-2 pin short: “High sensitivity” setting
JP8 D506L current 2-3 pin short: “2mA” setting
JP20 D526L current 2-3 pin short: “2mA” setting
JP21 Digital +5V LED indication 1-2 pin short: “Lighting” setting
4-36
4
4.5.6
EZ1731
4-37
4.5.7 PDC20 Circuit Board
Power Supply System Check Points
P+5V: TP5, TP9, TP12, TP14, TP16 and TP18

+5V Power circuit
PGND: TP1 to TP3, TP7, TP11, TP13, TP15 or TP17
4 +24V0 (Without interlock): TP6

+24V1 (A-interlock system): TP4
4.5.7 +24V Power circuit
+24V2 (B-interlock system): TP8
PGND: TP1 to TP3, TP7, TP11, TP13, TP15, or TP17
Indication LED
Condition
LED System
Lighting Lighting OFF
D11 Power +5V ON OFF
D12 Power +24V (Without interlock) ON OFF
D13 Power +24V (A-interlock system) ON OFF
D14 Power +24V (B-interlock system) ON OFF
Jumper Pin
JP2 Power +5V and +24V 1-2 pin short: LED “Light” setting
Circuit Protector
Circuit Protector Power Supply Protected Circuit
F1 +24V M551 and M561 motors
F2 +24V S620 of laser unit
F3 +24V M563, M565, M570 and M571 motors
F4 +24V S570 and S571 solenoid valves, M572 motor, F620 to F622 fans
F5 +24V F585 to F590 fans, and first line back printer head
F6 +24V M545, M550, and M560 motors
F7 +24V M540 to M542 motors
F9 +24V M501 and M521 motors
F10 +24V F591 to F593 fans, and second line back printer head
NOTE: If the circuit protector senses over current, it opens and white button on it pops out. Turn the power supply OFF, determine and
correct the cause, then push in the button to reset the circuit protector.
4-38
Posister
If the posister senses over current for the M500 and M520 DC motor drivers, the internal resistance increases to open the current flow. If
current reduces to normal level, the posister recovers automatically.
4
4.5.7
EZ1726
4-39
4.5.8 FMA20 Circuit Board (1394 Communication Circuit Board)
Power Supply System Circuit Protector Protected Circuit Check Points
D+5V: TP9
+5V Digital circuit - DGND: TP11, TP12,
TP17 or TP18
D3.3V: TP10
4 +3.3V Digital circuit - DGND: TP11, TP12,
TP17 or TP18
4.5.8
A3.3V: TP13
+3.3V Analog circuit -
AGND: TP14
A+12V: TP15
+12V Analog circuit CP1 1394PHY chip power supply
AGND: TP14
Indication LED
LED1 For asynchronous communication flag Lights during CPU communication.
LED2 For isochronous communication flag Lights during image transfer.
LED3 For 12V power supply flag Lights during +12V power supply.
EZ1727
4-40
4.5.9 FMB20 Circuit Board (Memory Circuit Board)
+3.3V: TP1
+3.3V Digital circuit
GND: TP2, TP3, TP5, TP26 or TP27
4
4.5.9
EZ1728
4-41
4.5.10 FMC20 Circuit Board (Memory Control Circuit Board)
Power Supply System Circuit Protector Check Points
+3.3V: TP28
+3.3V Digital circuit
GND: TP3, TP4, TP6, TP8 or TP10
4 +5V Digital circuit

CP1 (DTA circuit board power supply +5V: TP2
line) GND: TP3, TP4, TP6, TP8 or TP10
4.5.10
A-12V: TP33
–12V Analog circuit
AGND: TP34
A+12V: TP37
+12V Analog circuit
AGND: TP34
Indication LED
LED1 5V energizing flag Lights during 5V energizing.
LED2 SOS signal receiving flag Lights during receiving signal.
LED3 Frame memory (FM) input operation flag Lights during memory input operation.
LED4 FM output operation flag Lights during memory output operation
EZ1729
4-42
4.5.11 LDD20 Circuit board
Test Pins
Test Pin Name Function Voltage Range Range (conversion) Remarks
TP1 AGND Analog system ground - -
TP2 RLDC R-ch LD current 0.0V to 8.192V 100mA/V
TP3 RPDC R-ch PD current 0.0V to 8.192V Approx. 25µA/V

4
4.5.11
TP4 RLDL R-ch Limit current 0.0V to 1.28V 100mA/V
TP102 GLDC G-ch LD current 0.0V to 8.192V 100mA/V
TP103 GPDC G-ch PD current 0.0V to 8.192V Approx. 25µA/V
TP104 GLDL G-ch Limit current 0.0V to 6.144V 100mA/V
TP202 BLDC B-ch LD current 0.0V to 8.192V 100mA/V
TP203 BPDC B-ch PD current 0.0V to 8.192V Approx. 25µA/V
TP204 BLDL B-ch Limit current 0.0V to 6.144V 100mA/V
TP302 RT R-ch temperature monitor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
TP303 RTDIF R-ch temperature difference Approx. ±10V (Max.) ±0.1V/°C
TP304 RTEO R-ch temperature control signal Approx. ±10V (Max.) -
TP402 GT G-ch temperature monitor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
TP403 GTDIF G-ch temperature difference Approx. ±10V (Max.) ±0.1V/°C
TP404 GTEO G-ch temperature control signal Approx. ±2.9V (Max.) -
TP405 GPC G-ch Peltier current Approx. ±2.9V (Max.) 1A/V Voltage on the basis of GPREF
TP406 GPREF G-ch Peltier drive circuit reference voltage 1/2 × (A + 6V) -
TP502 BT B-ch temperature monitor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
TP503 BTDIF B-ch temperature difference Approx. ±10V (Max.) ±0.1V/°C
TP504 BTEO B-ch temperature control signal Approx. ±2.9V (Max.) -
TP505 BPC B-ch Peltier current Approx. ±2.9V (Max.) 1A/V Voltage on the basis of BPREF
TP506 BPREF B-ch Peltier drive circuit reference voltage 1/2 × (A + 6V) -
TP602 RPDC R-ch PD current 0.0V to 8.192V Approx. 25µA/V
TP603 GPDC G-ch PD current 0.0V to 8.192V Approx. 25µA/V
TP604 BPDC B-ch PD current 0.0V to 8.192V Approx. 25µA/V
TP605 RLDC R-ch LD current 0.0V to 8.192V 100mA/V
TP606 GLDC G-ch LD current 0.0V to 8.192V 100mA/V
TP607 BLDC B-ch LD current 0.0V to 8.192V 100mA/V
TP608 THA1 Exposure section temperature sensor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
4-43
Test Pin Name Function Voltage Range Range (conversion) Remarks
TP609 THA2 Feed section temperature sensor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
TP610 RT R-ch temperature monitor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
TP611 GT G-ch temperature monitor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
TP612 BT B-ch temperature monitor 0.0V to 5.12V 0.1V/°C
4 TP613 GTDA G-ch temperature setting A/D output voltage 0.0V to approx. 10.0V -
4.5.11 TP614 BTDA B-ch temperature setting A/D output voltage 0.0V to approx. 10.0V -
TP615 RLDA R-ch LD/PD current setting D/A output voltage 0.0V to approx. 10.0V -
TP616 GLDA G-ch LD/PD current setting D/A output voltage 0.0V to approx. 10.0V -
TP617 BLDA B-ch LD/PD current setting D/A output voltage 0.0V to approx. 10.0V -
TP618 ADIN A/D input voltage - -
TP619 AD+5V +5V power supply for A/D - -
TP701 DGND Digital system ground - -
TP702 D+5V +5V for digital system - -
TP802 A+12V +12V for analog system - -
TP803 A–12V –12V for analog system - -
TP804 L+12V +12V for laser system (B-interlock system) - -
TP805 A+6V +6V for Peltier - -
TP806 L+8V +8V for laser system (internally generated - -

from +12V for laser system)
TP807 PR+5V +5V for protective circuit - -
Circuit Protectors or Fuses
Code Name Function Connected to Connector
CP801 P+6VG G-ch Peltier protection G-ch Peltier element for temperature control LDD8
CP802 P+6VB B-ch Peltier protection B-ch Peltier element for temperature control LDD11
CP803 A+12VTHA Analog +12V system protection Exposure/Feed section temperature sensors and LDD7, LDD10, LDD12
G/B-ch laser light sources
CP804 A–12VTHA Analog –12V system protection Exposure/Feed section temperature sensors and LDD5, LDD7, LDD10,
G/B-ch laser light sources LDD12
CP805 A+5VTHA Analog +5V system protection\ Exposure/Feed section temperature sensors and LDD4, LDD5, LDD6,
R/G/B-ch laser light sources LDD9, LDD12
4-44
4
4.5.11
EZ1730
4-45
4.6 Processor Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC)
4.6.1 Processing Section Configuration
No. 1 Crossover Rack Dryer Entrance Rack

4
4.6.1
No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 No.6
Processor Drive
Motor (M700)
PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4
Processing Rack
P1 P2
Chan Tensioner
EZ1468
4-46
4.6.2 Piping Diagram for Solution Circulation System
LP1500SC
Processing Tanks
4
Overflow Hoses
Processing Solution Temperature 4.6.2
Sensors (TS700 to TS703)
P1
Processing Solution Level P2
Sensors (FS700 to FS705) PS1
PS2
Circulation Filters PS3

PS4
Subtanks
Processing Solution Heaters

(H710 to H713)
Waste Solution
Level Sensor
Circulation Pumps
(FS749)
(PU710 to PU715)
Overflow
Waste Solution Tank
P1
P2
PS1
PS2
PS3
Drain Valves PS4
Waste Solution Hose
EZ241
4-47
LP2000SC
Processing Tanks
Overflow Hoses
PS1 to PS4 Processing
Solution Temperature sensors
4 (TS700 to TS703)
4.6.2 P1 to PS4 Processing P1
Solution Level Sensors P2
(FS700 to FS705) PS1
PS2
PS3
Sub-tanks
P1 to PS4 Processing
Solution Heaters
(H710 to H713)
Waste Solution
P1 to PS4 Circulation Pumps Level Sensor
(PU710 to PU715) (FS749)
Waste Solution Tank
P1
P2
PS1 Waste Solution Hose
PS2
PS3
PS4
Drain Valves
EZ1465
4-48
4.6.3 Replenishment/Auto-washing Piping System
P1 to PS4 Rear Side Rack

Auto Washing Valves
(S721/S723/S725/S727)
4
4.6.3
Replenisher Cartridge
P1-R, P2-RA and P2-RB

P1 to PS4 Front Side Rack Cartridge Washing Valves
Auto Washing Valves (S740 to S742)
(S720/S722/S724/S726) P1-R Stirring Valves (S743)
Auto-washing Pump (PU740)
P1-R Stirring
One-way Valve
P1-R to PS-R
Upper Level
Sensors
Replenisher Pumps (FS740 to FS743)
(PU741 to PU744)
P1-R to PS-R
Lower Level
Replenisher Filters Sensors
(FS745 to FS748)
P2-RA Replenisher Tank

P1-R
P2-RA
P2-RB
P2-RB Replenisher Tank PS-R
Drain Valves
PS-R Replenisher Tank P1-R Replenisher Tank
EZ327
4-49
4.6.4 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Mechanism
Replenisher Box Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D744)
Replenisher Box Door Lock Lever

4 Cartridge Opening Motor (M740)
4.6.4
Cartridge Setting Sensor
(D741)
Cartridge Box
Upper Sensor (D742)
Cartridge Box
Lower Sensor (D743)
P1-R
P2-RA
P2-RB
Cartridge Washing Water Hoses Opening Nozzles
EZ1173
4-50
4.6.5 Dryer Section Configuration
Drying Rack
4
4.6.5
Dryer Belt
Dryer Heater (H760)
Dryer Fan (F760)
Dryer Air Filter
EZ1038
4-51
4.6.6 Print Feeding Section/Sorter Configurations
Dryer Section Drive Motor (M770)
Dryer Section Drive Unit

4 Path Switch Solenoid (S770)
4.6.6 Print Exit Unit Dryer Exit Unit
Large-size Exit Unit Sorter Drive Motor

(M771)
SWA20 Circuit Board
Large-size Tray
Sorter Chain
Sorter SU1100Y
EZ1039
4-52
4.6.7 Processor Electrical Equipment Section Configuration
Processor Drive Motor Driver Circuit Board
Processor Exhaust Fans 1/2 (F790/F791) 4

4.6.7
SSR1 to SSR3
Relays (K1 to K3)
Noize Filters
(NF1 tp NF3)
Terminal Block
(TB2)
Circui Breaker
(NFB1)
Processor Control Section

Cooling Fan
(F792)
CTP20 Circuit Board
Terminal Block (TB1) Circuit Protector (CB15)

Leakage Breakers PAC20 Circuit Board Transformer (T1)
(NFB2 to NFB4)
Circuit Protectors
(CB1 tp CB4)
EZ1036
4-53
4.6.8 Input Power Supply Section Parts and Circuit Functions
Parts Symbol Rating Circuit
Breaker NFB1 30A
NFB2 Processing Solution Heaters (H710, H711), Dryer Heater A-1
Leakage Breaker NFB3 Processing Solution Heaters (H712, H713), Dryer Heater A-2, Printer DC Power Supply
4
NFB4 Dryer Heater B-1/B-2, AC100V System Load
4.6.8
NF1 Processing Solution Heaters (H710, H711), Dryer Heater A-1
Noise Filter NF2 Processing Solution Heaters (H712, H713), Dryer Heater A-2, Printer DC Power
Supply
NF3 Dryer Heater B-1/B-2, AC100V System Load
CB1 10A Dryer Heater A-1
CB3 6A Processing Solution Heaters (H710, H711)
CB5 10A Printer DC Power Supply
CB6 10A Printer DC Power Supply
Circuit Protector CB8 6A Processing Solution Heaters (H712, H713)
CB11 15A Dryer Heater B-1, B-2
CB12 15A Dryer Heater B-1, B-2
CB13 10A AC100V System Load
K1 Dryer Heater A-1
Relay K2 Dryer Heater A-2
K3 Dryer Heater B-1, B-2
SSR1 Dryer Heater A-1
SSR SSR2 Dryer Heater A-2
SSR3 Dryer Heater B-1, B-2
4-54
4.6.9 Circuit Board Main Functions
CTP20 Processor Main Control Circuit Board, DC Load (motor, solenoid, fan) Drive Circuit Board
PAC20 Processor AC Load (heater, motor) and DC Load (dryer section drive motor, processor drive motor)
Drive Circuit Board
4
4.6.9
4.6.10 Processor Electrical Equipment Block Diagram
4.6.10
Processor Section
Solution Heaters
From Printer CTL20 CTP20 PAC20
Circuit Board Pumps
Fans
Temperature Sensor
Solution Level Sensors
Position Sensors
Electrical Equipment
Sorter Sensors
Section
Breaker SW Dryer Heater
Transformer
AC200 V
Power Supply DC3.3/5/6/±12/24V
4-55
4.6.11 CTP20 Circuit Board
+5V Digital circuit D+5V: TP8 to DGND: TP9
+5V Analog circuit A+5V: TP10 to AGND: TP11

4 +5V Power circuit P+5V: TP6 to DGND: TP7
4.6.11
+24V Power circuit P+24V: TP3 to PGND: TP4
Indication LED
D1(PWR) +5V power supply Lights when +5V energizing.
D2(RE) Processing tank solution levels and CPU program Lights when all solutions are existing and program is operating.
D3(H1) Dryer heater Lights when heater is ON.
D4(PSB) PS1/3 heater Lights when heater is ON.
D5(PSB) Processor drive motor (M700) Lights when motor is ON.
D6(PSB) P1 heater Lights when heater is ON.
D7(PSB) P2 heater Lights when heater is ON.
D8(PSB) PS3/4 heater Lights when heater is ON.
The D2 to D8 light when the CPU is operating.
DIP Switch
DIP Switch System Switch Setting
1: ON
SW1 LP1500SC/LP2000SC
2: OFF
Jumper Pin
JP2 Battery backup BACK UP side
4-56
CTP20 Circuit Board Circuit Protector System
Digital + 5V System Power +24V System
D+5V(CTP5-1) P+24V(CTP5-3)
F12 F10
CP1(2A) D+5V power supply for PAC20 circuit board CP4(3.15A) TA8428K Sorter drive motors
(CTP21 and CTP22) (M771/M820/M821)(CTP11)
4
SSR power supply for dryer heater (CTP23) Path switching solenoid (S770)(CTP12)
4.6.11
CP2(2A) Power supply for sorter sensors CP5(3.15A) Rack rear side washing valves
(D744/D745/D820/D821/D822/D824)(CTP14) (S721/S723/S725/S727)(CTP8)
Power supply for dryer exit unit sensors Rack front side washing valves
(D771/D772/D773)(CTP15) (S720/S722/S724/S726)/
Auto washing pump (PU740)(CTP9)
Power supply for cartridge setting section sensors
(D741/D742/D743)(CTP17) Cartridge washing valves/P1-R stirring valve
(S740/S741/S742/S743)(CTP10)
Power supply for RC50D flow meter
(RO830)(CTP18) CP6(3.15A) Processor control section cooling fan (F792)(CTP6)
Heater cooling fans (F710/F711/F713)/

processor exhaust fans (F790/F791)(CTP12)
EZ1733
4-57
4.6.12 PAC20 Circuit Board
+5V Power circuit P+5V: TP1 to PGND: TP3
+5V Digital circuit D+5V: TP4 to DGND: TP5

4 +24V Power circuit +24V: TP2 to PGND: TP3
4.6.12
Circuit Protector
Circuit Protector Power Supply Protected Circuit
CP1 AC100V AC100V in(PAC7)
CP2 AC100V Printer
CP3 +24V Photo-coupler and relay coils
CP4 AC100V Circulation pumps (PU710 to PU715)
CP5 AC100V Replenisher pumps (PU741 to PU744)/auto washing pump (PU740)
CP6 AC100V RC50 pump and fan
CP8 AC200V P1 processing solution heater (H710)
CP9 AC200V P2 processing solution heater (H711)
CP10 AC200V PS1/2 processing solution heater (H712)
CP11 AC200V PS3/4 processing solution heater (H713)
CP12 +24V Dryer section drive motor (M770)
CP13 +24V Cartridge opening motor (M740)
4-58
4
4.6.12
EZ1734
4-59
5. OPERATION SEQUENCES
5.1 Auto Film Carrier ............................................................................................... 5-3

5.1.1 NC240Y Initialization ........................................................................................ 5-3
5.1.2 NC240Y Cartridge Processing .......................................................................... 5-6
5.1.3 NC240 Strip Film Processing ............................................................................ 5-14
5.1.4 NC135Y Initialization ........................................................................................ 5-20
5.1.5 NC135Y Scanning Operation ........................................................................... 5-22
5
5.1.6 Monitoring Start Timing ..................................................................................... 5-28
5.2 Paper Feed ......................................................................................................... 5-29

5.2.1 Initialization ....................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.2 Shut-down Process ........................................................................................... 5-35
5.2.3 Cutter Sequence ............................................................................................... 5-36
5.2.4 Width Guide Position Setting ............................................................................ 5-38
5.2.5 Auto Loading ..................................................................................................... 5-39
5.2.6 Auto Rewinding ................................................................................................. 5-42
5.2.7 Paper Drawing .................................................................................................. 5-43
5.2.8 Back Printing ..................................................................................................... 5-44
5.2.9 Speed Adjustment ............................................................................................. 5-45
5.2.10 Soft Nip ............................................................................................................. 5-46
5.2.11 Distribution ........................................................................................................ 5-47
5.2.12 Splice ................................................................................................................ 5-50
5.2.13 Paper End Process ........................................................................................... 5-50
5.3 Exposure Section .............................................................................................. 5-51

5.3.1 Start-up Initialization ......................................................................................... 5-51
5.3.2 End Process ..................................................................................................... 5-52
5.3.3 Feed Start ......................................................................................................... 5-52
5.3.4 Exposure Preparation ....................................................................................... 5-53
5.3.5 Exposure Completion/RLD Exposure Stop ....................................................... 5-54
5.3.6 Feed Completion .............................................................................................. 5-54
5.4 Processor ............................................................................................................ 5-55

5.4.1 Heat-up Operation ............................................................................................ 5-55
5.4.2 Normal Warm-up Operation .............................................................................. 5-56
5.4.3 Pre-heat Operation ........................................................................................... 5-57
5.4.4 Cool-down Operation ........................................................................................ 5-57
5.4.5 Heater Cooling Fan ........................................................................................... 5-58
5.4.6 Monitoring Processing Solution Level ............................................................... 5-58
5.4.7 Normal Operation Drive Control ....................................................................... 5-59
5.4.8 Auto Intermittent Operation Control .................................................................. 5-59
5.4.9 Auto Cleaning Control ....................................................................................... 5-60
5.4.10 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement ................................................................ 5-61
5.4.11 Replenishment Pump Control ........................................................................... 5-62
5.4.12 Replenishment Initialization Control ................................................................. 5-62
5.4.13 P1-R Replenishment Control ............................................................................ 5-63
5-1
5.4.14 P2-RA/P2-RB Replenishment Control .............................................................. 5-66
5.4.15 Auto Opening Control ....................................................................................... 5-69
5.4.16 Replenisher Level Adjustment .......................................................................... 5-71
5.4.17 Cleaning/Dilution ............................................................................................... 5-72
5.4.18 Replenisher Cartridge Cap Cleaning Control ................................................... 5-74
5.4.19 Power Supply Restore Control ......................................................................... 5-75
5
5.4.20 Error Display Control ........................................................................................ 5-76
5.4.21 Error Restore Control ........................................................................................ 5-77
5.4.22 Pump Output Measurement .............................................................................. 5-77
5.4.23 Auto Replenishment Control(at installation) ..................................................... 5-78
5.4.24 Intermittent Process .......................................................................................... 5-79
5.4.25 Waste Solution Process .................................................................................... 5-80
5.4.26 Dryer Section Heat-up Control .......................................................................... 5-80
5.4.27 Dryer Section Temperature Adjustment ............................................................ 5-81
5.4.28 Dryer Section Pre-heat Control ......................................................................... 5-81
5.4.29 Dryer Section Pre-heat Drive Temperature Adjustment .................................... 5-82
5.4.30 Dryer Section Cool-down Control ..................................................................... 5-82
5.5 Densitometer ...................................................................................................... 5-83

5.5.1 Densitometer AD100 ......................................................................................... 5-83
5.5.2 Densitometer AD200 ......................................................................................... 5-87
5-2
5.1 Auto Film
5.1 AutoCarrier
Film Carrier
5.1.1 NC240Y Initialization
Turn ON Power Switch

(SP-1500)
Is carrier installed? No
(Check on SP-1500)
Yes
5
No 5.1.1
NC240Y? To NC135Y or manual
operation sequence
Yes
L440: lights red, then green

after 100ms.
Ver.ID is transferred to SP-1500.
Mechanical data is loaded.
Optical sensors are initialized.

(D441,D447,D448,D453,D454,D455)
Is pressure cover closed? No

L440: Error LED blinks red.
D446
Yes
Is cartridge “open” detected? No

D456
Yes
Is strip film inserted? No

D444
Yes
Is there a film? Yes

D455
No
To next page
5-3
5.1 Auto Film Carrier
From previous page
VEI home position
Is VEI “close” detected? No

D442
Yes Spool motor M442 rotates
CCW 2964pps
Spool motor M442 rotates
5 CW 2000pps Timer 1: ON 1s
5.1.1
Timer 2 ON for 100ms
Is VEI “open” detected? No

D442
Yes No No
Is timer 1 time-up? Is timer 2 time-up?
Spool motor M442 is turned Yes Yes

OFF just after stopped.
L440 error LED blinks red. L440 error LED blinks red.
Door open position
Is door “open” detected? No

D441
Yes Door motor M441 rotates
CW 500pps 40-pulse drive
Door motor M441 rotates
CCW 500pps Timer 3: ON 1s
Is door “open” detected? No Yes

Is door “close” detected?
D441
Yes No No
Is timer 3 time-up?
Door motor M441 rotates Yes L440 error LED blinks red
CCW 500pps 21-pulse drive
L440 error LED blinks red.
Door motor M441 is turned

Wait 200ms.
L440 LED is turned OFF.
To next page
5-4
From previous page

Feed-in

D446
Yes
L440 error LED is turned OFF. 5

5.1.1
Is strip film inserted? Yes

D453
No No
Check 3 times with 40ms
interval? D453
No Is cartridge detected? Yes
D456
Yes No
Is holder detected?
D444
No Check 3 times with 40ms Yes Is pressure cover closed? No
interval? D444
D446
Yes
L440 error LED blinks red. Yes

D446 L440 LED blinks green
Yes
L440 LED blinks green

Wait 200ms.
Wait 200ms. To strip processing

To cartridge processing
5-5
5.1.2 NC240Y Cartridge Processing
Cartridge processing
To loading end
detection
Is cartridge detected? No
D456
5 Yes
5.1.2
Wait 200ms.
Cartridge motor M444 rotates

CW 2500rpm
Set timer A.
Is chucking OK? No
D443 1st time 2nd time
CW 2964pps 130 pulse (28.5°)
Wait 200ms.

CCW 2964pps 260 pulse (57°) * Reduction gear ratio of spool motor:
1/4.1
Is IPI broken? No
D445
CW 2964pps 130 pulse (28.5°)

CCW 500pps. 80 pulse
Wait 200ms.

D441
Yes
To next page
5-6
From previous page
From loading end to

perforation leading end
Feed motor M440 rotates CCW 12620pps.

Timer 6 is ON for 450mm. 450mm=2.8s=35831pulse

CCW 2964pps.
5
5.1.2
Is leading end detected? No
D455
Yes No
Is timer 6 time-up?
Spool motor M442 is turned Yes

Feed motor M440 is turned OFF just after stopped.

Spool motor M442 is turned OFF just after stopped.
Timer 7: ON 200mm.
200mm=1.3s=15920pulse L440 error LED blinks red.
Is there magnetic IX data? No

D449, D450
Yes
No magnetic frame No. data.
Magnetic IX data is read.

D449, D450 (magnetic frame No. data)
Is “n”th frame’s ATP detected? No

D454
*ATP=Anticipation Perforation
Yes No
Is time 7 time-up?
Is magnetic frame No. data No Yes

detected? D449, D450
Yes Optical frame No. data is received Feed motor M440 is turned
from SP-1500. OFF just after stopped.
Frame No.=Magnetic frame
No. data
Is magnetic frame No. data No

Yes
Frame No.=Optical frame

No. data
To next page
5-7
From previous page
Pre-scanning
Set “n=1”.
5 Timer 8: ON 8mm
5.1.2
Is “n”th frame’s MTP detected? No

D454
Yes * MTP=Metering No
Perforation Is timer 8 time-up?
Timer 9: ON 30mm. Yes
Feed motor L440 is turned

Is “n”th frame’s magnetic IX data

Is “n+1”th frame’s ATP detected? No

D454
Yes No
Is timer 9 time-up?
Yes Is magnetic frame data read? Yes

D449, D450
Feed motor M440 is turned No
Is magnetic frame data read? No

D449, D450
Yes Magnetic reading error is sent to
SP-1500.
To next page From next page
5-8
From previous page To previous page
No
Is frame data detected?
* TAP=Turn-around Perforation
Yes Is TAP detected? No
D455
No
Is “n” last frame? Yes 5
Yes Feed motor M440 is turned OFF after specified pulse driving. 5.1.2
Specified pulse driving feed motor
M440 is turned OFF just after stopped.
Frame No. input request is sent to

SP-1500.
Is TAP detected? No
D455
Yes
Set “n=n+1”
Feed motor M440 is turned OFF just after

Fine scanning stopped. L440 error LED blinks red.
Is START key pressed on No

SP-1500?
Yes
Speed pattern
Speed pattern is received from q20mm/s w14mm/s e10mm/s r6mm/s
SP-1500 t4.5mm/s y4mm/s u3mm/s i2mm/s
Yes
Is speed pattern q received? Clutch S440 is turned ON.
No
Spool motor M442 is set to Feed motor M440 is set to

2000pps. 15920pps.
Yes
Is speed pattern w received? Clutch S440 is turned ON.
No

2000pps. 11150pps.
From next page To next page To next page
5-9
To previous page From previous page From previous page
Yes
Is speed pattern e received? Clutch S440 is turned ON.
No

5 2000pps. 7960pps.
5.1.2
Yes
Is speed pattern r received? Clutch S440 is turned ON.
No

2000pps. 4780pps.
Yes
Is speed pattern t received? Clutch S441 is turned ON.
No

2000pps. 17910pps.
Yes
Is speed pattern y received? Clutch S441 is turned ON.
No

2000pps. 15920pps.
Yes
Is speed pattern u received? Clutch S441 is turned ON.
No

2000pps. 11940pps.
No
Is speed pattern i received?
Yes
To next page To next page
5-10
From Previous page From Previous page
Clutch S441 is turned ON.
Spool motor M442 is set to

2000pps. 5
5.1.2
Feed motor M440 is set to

7960pps.
Wait 200ms.
Spool motor M442 rotates CW.
Feed motor M440 rotates CW.

Timer 10: ON.
No
Is “n+1”th frame’s ATP detected? End of Roll Perf.
D454
Yes No
A Is timer 10 time-up?
A
Timer 11: ON 30mm Yes

Spool motor M442 is turned OFF just after stopped. L440 error LED blinks red.
S440, S441: OFF
“n”th frame’s magnetic IX data is
written. D451, D452
5-11
From Previous page To Previous page
Is “n”th frame’s MTP detected? No No

Is timer 11 time-up?
D454
Yes Yes

5 Spool motor M442 is turned OFF just after stopped. L440 error LED blinks red.
S440, S441: OFF
5.1.2
Leading frame? Yes

Timer 12: ON 8mm
D454
No
Is “n-1”th frame’s ATP detected? Yes

Set “n=n-1”
D454
No
No
Yes

S440, S441: OFF
Timer 13: ON 200mm
Is film fed out? No

D455
Yes No
Feed motor M440 is turned Yes

OFF after specified pulse driving.
S440, S441: OFF
S440, S441: OFF
Wait specified sec. L440 error LED blinks red.
Timer 14: ON
To next page
5-12
From previous page
Is VEI “ON” detected? No

D442
Yes No
Spool motor M442 is turned

Yes
5
Spool motor M442 is turned OFF just 5.1.2
after stopped. L440 error LED blinks red.
Timer 15: ON 200mm

CCW 500pps.

D441
Yes No
Door motor M441 is turned Yes

OFF after 21-pulse drive.
Door motor M441 is turned OFF just

after stopped. L440 error LED blinks red.
Is chucking “open” detected? No
D443
Yes
Is cartridge “open” detected? No

D450
Yes
5-13
5.1.3 NC240 Strip Film Processing
Strip
Processing
Strip Processing
To loading end
detection
Feed motor M440 rotates CCW

12420pps. Timer 6 is ON for 450mm. 450mm=2.8s=35831pulse
5
5.1.3
Is leading end detected? No
D455
From loading end to Yes No

Is timer 6 time-up?
perforation leading end
Yes
Timer 7 is ON for 200mm.
Feed motor M440 is turned OFF.
200mm=1.3s= Wait 200ms.
15674pulse
No
3 times for time-up?
Yes
Feed motor M440 is turned

Is there magnetic IX data? No

D449, D450
Yes
Magnetic IX data is read.

D449, D450 (magnetic frame No. data)
Is “n”th frame’s ATP detected? No

D454
Yes *ATP=Anticipation Perforation No
Is time 7 time-up?
Yes
To next page To next page
5-14
From previous page From previous page
Is magnetic frame No. data No Feed motor M440 is turned

detected? D449, D450 OFF just after stopped.
Yes Optical frame No. data is received
from SP-1500.
No. data
L440 error LED blinks red. 5
Is magnetic frame No. data No 5.1.3
Yes

No. data
Pre-scanning
Set “n=1”
Timer 8: ON 8mm
Is “n”th frame’s MTP detected? No

D454
Yes *MTP=Metering No
Perforation Is timer 8 time-up?
Timer 9: ON 30mm. Yes

5-15
From previous page To previous page
Is “n”th frame’s magnetic IX data

No
5 Is “n+1”th frame’s ATP detected?
D454
5.1.3 Yes No
Is timer 9 time-up?
Yes Is magnetic frame data read? Yes

D449, D450
Feed motor M440 is turned No
Is magnetic frame data read? No

D449, D450
Yes Magnetic reading error is sent to
SP-1500.
No *TAP=Turnaround Perforation
Is frame data detected?
Yes Is TAP detected? No

D455
No Yes
Is “n” last frame?
Yes Feed motor M440 is turned

Frame No. input request is sent to

SP-1500.
Is TAP detected? No
D455
Yes
Set “n=n+1”
Feed motor M440 is turned OFF just after

stopped. L440 error LED blinks red.
To next page
5-16
From previous page
Fine scanning
No
Is START key pressed?
Yes
Speed pattern
Speed pattern is received from
q20mm/s w14mm/s e10mm/s r6mm/s
SP-1500
t4.5mm/s y4mm/s u3mm/s i2mm/s
5
5.1.3
Yes Feed motor M440 is set to

14730pps.
No

10310pps.
No

7370pps.
No

4420pps.
No

15940pps.
No

14170pps.
No

Is speed pattern u received? Clutch S441 is turned ON.
10630pps.
No
No
Is speed pattern i received?
Yes

7090pps.
Wait 200ms.
To next page
5-17
From previous page

Timer 10: ON.
End of Roll Perf.

Is “n+1”th frame’s ATP detected? No
5 D454
5.1.3 Yes No
A Is timer 10 time-up? A
Timer 11: ON 30mm Yes

“n”th frame’s magnetic IX data is
written. D451, D452
S440, S441: OFF L440 error LED blinks red.
Is “n”th frame’s MTP detected? No No

D454
Yes Yes

S440, S441: OFF L440 error LED blinks red.
Leading frame? Yes

Timer 12: ON 8mm
D454
No
Is “n-1”th frame’s ATP detected? Yes

Set “n=n-1”
D454
No
No
Yes

S440, S441: OFF

To next page
5-18
From previous page
Timer 13: ON 200mm
No
Is film fed out?
D455
5
Yes No 5.1.3
Yes
S440, S441: OFF
L440 error LED blinks green.
S440, S441: OFF

Is strip film fed out? No

D453
Yes
5-19
5.1.4 NC135Y Initialization
Turn ON Power Switch

(SP1500)
No
Is carrier installed?
Yes
5
5.1.4 No To NC240Y or manual
NC135Y?
operation sequence
Yes
L440: lights red, then green after

100ms.
Ver.ID is transferred to SP-1500.
Mechanical data is loaded.
Optical sensors are initialized.

(D400,D401,D402,D403,D404,D405,D410,D411)

D406
Yes
Is there a film? No
D401
Yes
Is there a film? No
D403
Yes
Is there a film? No
D405
Yes
Is there a film? No
D411
Yes
To next page
5-20
From previous page
Film mask initialization
Is film mask home position “ON” detected? No

D409
Yes Film mask drive motor M403 rotates
CCW 960pps.
5
Is LHP home position “ON” detected? No 5.1.4
D409
Yes
M403 stops for 6-pulse drive after

D409 is turned ON. 0.94mm+ (tolerance)
M403 is turned OFF just

after stopped.
Soft nip initialization
Is soft nip initialization “ON” detected? No

D407
Yes Soft nip motor M401 rotates
ON when floodlight is CW 480pps.
not interrupted
Is soft nip initialization “ON” detected? No

D407
Yes
M401 stops just after D407 is

turned ON, then turned OFF.
L400 is turned OFF.

D406
Yes
To scanning
5-21
5.1.5 NC135Y Scanning Operation
START
Pre-scanning
Is there film? No
D401
Yes
5
L440 blinks green.
5.1.5
Soft nip motor M401 rotates

CCW 480pps 76 pulse (180°)

after stopped.
Is soft nip home position “OFF” No

detected? D407
Yes
LHP motor M403 rotates

CW 960pps.
Is LHP home position “OFF” No

detected? D409
Yes
Feed motor M400 rotates

CCW 14910pps + (tolerance).
At 60mm after the leading

Is leading end detected within No
end detection by D401
60mm=0.316s=4688 pulses 60mm? D403
Yes
At 96mm after the leading No
Is leading end detected within
end detection by D403
96mm? D405
96mm=0.505s=7500 pulses
Yes
Check tape is detected by D411.
5 perforations are detected No

within 28.5mm. D405
28.5mm=0.15s=2226 pulses Yes

To next page
5-22
From previous page
M400 is stopped at 50mm after the

trailing end detection by D403. 50mm=0.263s=3960 pulse

after stopped.
Fine scanning
5
5.1.5
CW 480pps 36 pulse (90°)

after stopped.
Is [Start] key pressed on No

SP-1500?
Yes
Speed pattern is received from

SP-1500
Speed pattern
Screen size is received from q32.5mm/s t7.00mm/s
SP-1500 w24.7mm/s y5.50mm/s
e15.0mm/s u2.50mm/s
r10.0mm/s

23940pps + (machine data).
No

No

No

No

No

No
From next page To next page To next page
5-23
To previous page From previous page From previous page
No
Is speed pattern u received?
Yes

5
5.1.5
Wait 200ms. Electromagnetic clutch’s statically determinate time
LHP motor M403 rotates CW 960pps.

2.45mm 16 pulse
M403 is turned OFF just AF time by reading chart

after stopped.
Wait.

CCW 960pps.
Is film mask “ON” detected? No

D409
Yes
M403 stops at 6 pulse after

D409 is turned ON. 0.94mm + (machine data)

after stopped.

CW 480pps 36 pulses (90°)

after stopped.
To next page
5-24
From previous page
*1
5 perforations are detected within No
28.5mm. D405 5
Yes 5.1.5
*2
Is leading end detected within No
60mm? D403
Yes
M401 is driven at 5mm after the

leading end detection by D403. S400: ON
5mm=3676 pulses
S401
5mm=17730 pulses
*1 M400: ON
Soft nip motor M401 rotates 28.5mm=101063 pulses
CCW 480pps 36 pulses (90°) M401: ON
28.5mm=20956 pulses
*2 M400: ON
M401 is turned OFF just 60mm=212766 pulses
after stopped. M401: ON
60mm=44118 pulses
LHP switch
Yes
Is “n”th frame “P” size?
No LHP motor M403 rotates

CCW 960pps. 5.3mm 34 pulses
No
Is “n”th frame “H” size?
Yes M403 is turned OFF just

after stopped.
CCW 960pps. 1.95mm 12 pulses
M400: ON
36mm=127660 pulses Wait 36mm.
M401: ON
M403 is turned OFF just 36mm=26471 pulses
after stopped.
Yes
Is “n+1”th frame “H” size?
Wait 36mm. No
LHP motor M403 rotates LHP motor M403 rotates

CW 960pps. 3.35mm 22 pulses CCW 960pps. 5.3mm 34 pulses
To next page To next page To next page To next page
5-25
From Previous page From Previous page From Previous page From Previous page
M403 is turned OFF just M403 is turned OFF just

after stopped. after stopped.
No
Is “n+1”th frame “P” size?
5 Yes Wait 36mm.
5.1.5
LHP motor M403 rotates LHP motor M403 rotates

CW 960pps. 3.35mm 21 pulse CW 960pps. 1.95mm 12 pulses
M403 is turned OFF just M403 is turned OFF just

after stopped. after stopped.
Wait 36mm.

CW 960pps. 5.3mm 34 pulses

after stopped.

CW 960pps. 1.95mm 12 pulses

after stopped.
To next page
5-26
From previous page
Is trailing end detected? No

D405
Yes
M401 is driven at 5mm after the

leading end detection by D405. S400: ON 5mm 3676 pulses 5
S401: ON 5mm 17730 pulses
5.1.5

CCW 960pps 36 pulses (90°)

after stopped.
M400: ON
80mm=283688 pulses
Is trailing end detected within No
M401: ON
80mm=58824 pulses 80mm? D403
At 80mm after the trailing Yes
end detection by D405 L400: Error LED blinks red
M400 is stopped at 50mm after the

trailing end detection by D402. M400: ON
50mm=36765 pulses
M401: ON
50mm=177305 pulses

after stopped.

CW 480pps 72 pulses (180°)
Is soft nip home position “ON” No

detected? D407
Yes
Is there film? No
D401
Yes
END
5-27
5.1.6 Monitoring Start Timing
Film loading
Pre-scanning
6 12 18 24 frames
No.24 to 19 No.18 to 13 No.12 to 7 No.6 to 1

6-frame monitoring
5 All frames are scanned after 6-frame
monitoring is completed.
5.1.6
Fine scanning
5-28
5.2 Paper Feed
5.2 Paper Feed
5.2.1 Initialization
NOTE: Before starting the initialization, make sure that all covers are firmly closed and the powers are not cut by the interlock switches.
1. Sensor initialization
Turns OFF the following sensors except upper/lower splice sensors (D506, D526)
• Exposure section entrance paper sensor (D561)
• Pre-exposure paper sensor (D562)
• Processor entrance 1 sensor (D571)
2. Feed motor initialization

5
Turns OFF the following motors
• Upper paper feed motor (M501) 5.2.1
• Lower paper feed motor (M521)
Turns ON the following motors

• Lower side door turn section feed motor (M550)
• Lower side door section feed motor (M551)
• Middle side door turn section feed motor (M540)
• Middle side door section feed motor (M541)
• Upper side door section feed motor (M542)
• Pre-exposure feed motor (M560)
• Sub-scanning motor (M561)
• Distribution section feed motor (M570)
3. Cutter initialization
Moves the upper cutter, then lower cutter to their close positions.
START
Yes Is close position detected?

D508/D528
No
Starts cutter drive.

M500/M520
No
Is cutter driven 600ms?
Yes
Yes
Error occurred?
No
Error message
End process
END
5-29
5.2 Paper Feed
4. Width guide initialization
START
Yes Is home position detected?

D563
5 No
5.2.1
Moves to the home position.
M563
Is home position detected? No

D563
Yes
Time-out No
Stops move.
Is pulse drive completed?
Yes
Waits 500ms. Stops move.
Moves 1 pulse to clear

home position.

D563
Yes
Drives specified pulses. No

Does M563 move 50 pulses?
M563
Yes
Malfunction
END
5-30
5.2 Paper Feed
5. Nip initialization
q Speed adjustment section nip
It detects the home position, then moves to the nip position.
START
5
D547 5.2.1
No

M545

D547
Yes
No
Stops move. Does nip turns 1.5 times?
Yes

home position.
Is home position cleared? No

D547
Yes
No
Moves specified pulses. Does M545 move 50 pulses?
Yes
Moves 708 pulses.

Error message
(nip ON position)
END
5-31
5.2 Paper Feed
w Soft nip
It detects the home position, then moves to the nip start (1st nip: ON, 2nd nip: OFF) position.
START

5 D566
5.2.1 No

M565

D566
Yes
Has motor driven No

Stops move.
time-out pulses?
Yes

home position.

D566
Yes
No
Moves specified pulses. Does M566 move 50 pulses?
Yes
Moves 386 pulses (CCW). Error message

(1st:ON, 2nd:OFF)
END
5-32
5.2 Paper Feed
6. Distribution section initialization
It is initialized vertically first, then horizontally.
q Vertical initialization
It detects the vertical home (lower limit) position, then moves to the waiting position.
START
5
5.2.1
No Is home position detected?
D575
Yes
Moves 50 pulse to clear home position.

M572
Is home position detected? Yes

D575
No
Waits 500ms.
Moves 1 pulse.
M572

D575
Yes
Has motor driven No

Moves specified pulses. time-out pulses?
Yes
Moves 80 pulses.
Error message
(waiting position)
END
5-33
5.2 Paper Feed
w Horizontal initialization
It detects the horizontal home position, then moves to the waiting position.
START
No Is home position detected?

5 D575
5.2.1 Yes
Moves 50 pulse CW.

M572
Is home position detected? Yes

D575
No
Waits 500ms.
Moves 1 pulse to home position (CCW).

M572

D575
Yes
No
Moves specified pulses. Has motor driven time-out pulses ?
Yes
Moves 80 pulses CW.

Error message
(rear-line position)
END
5-34
5.2 Paper Feed
7. Fork position initialization
It detects the home position, then moves to the fork position.
START

D564
5
No 5.2.2
Moves to home position.

M560

D564
Yes
Stops move. No
Has motor driven time-out pulses ?
M560
Yes
Moves 1 pulse.
M560

D564
Yes
No
Moves specified pulses. Has motor driven time-out pulses ?
Yes
Moves to fork position.

Error message
M560
END
8. Auto loading
Draws the paper from magazine and sets its leading end to the cutter position.
5.2.2 Shut-down Process
At the system shut-down, the paper is rewound if it remains in the printer.
5-35
5.2 Paper Feed
5.2.3 Cutter Sequence
1. Set the cutter to the open (home) position. 2. Set the cutter to the close position.
The cutter blades move to the open (home) position. The cutter blades move to the close position.
START START
5
Yes Is “open” position detected? Yes Is “close” position detected?
5.2.3 D507/D527 D508/D528
No No
Start cutter drive Start cutter drive

M500/M520 M500/M520
No No
Is cutter driven 600ms? Is cutter driven 600ms?
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Error occurred? Error occurred?
No No
Error message Error message
End process End process
END END
5-36
5.2 Paper Feed
3. Cut
The cutter blades are moved to “open”, “close” and “open” position in that order with the cutter motor drive, and the paper is cut.
START
No Is “open” position detected?

D507/D527 5
Yes
5.2.3
Start cutter drive

M500/M520
No
Is cutter driven 600ms?
Yes
Malfunction
Yes
Error occurred?
No
Error message
End process
END
5-37
5.2 Paper Feed
5.2.4 Width Guide Position Setting
Sets the exposure section paper guide to the paper width to be used.
START
Yes Current position = Set position?

5 D563
No
5.2.4
Calculates move pulses.

Decides turn direction
Move pulses <

= Accelerated/ No
reduced pulses?
Yes
Moves to set position with Moves to set position with accelerated/

constant speed. D563 reduced speed. M563
END
5-38
5.2 Paper Feed
5.2.5 Auto Loading
The auto loading draws the paper from magazine and sets its leading end to the cutter position. It has two steps: drawing and pre-cutting.
The paper leading end is fed to the cutter (drawing), then is cut and fed until it reaches the processor entrance (pre-cutting).
Splice detection
(D506/D526)
5
(25)
Cutter (8) 5.2.5
End detection
37 (D505/D525)
45
69 62 17
5-39
5.2 Paper Feed
q Drawing
START
Is paper end detected? Yes

No paper error
D505/D525
No
5
5.2.5 Yes
Is there paper? Paper exist error
No
No
Is back printer set? Back printer set error
Yes
Is cutter home position detected? Yes

D507/D527
No
Sets to cutter home (open)

position.
Does splice sensor detects Yes

“paper exists”? D506/D526
No Paper feed motor rewinds 25mm.
M501/M521
Drives paper feed motor.
No Does splice sensor detects

Is paper end detected? Yes Yes
D505/D525
No
Paper feed motor rewinds 20mm.
M501/M521
No Does splice sensor detects
Yes
Jamming error
No Is jammed paper process Stops paper feed motor.

completed? M501/M521
Yes
Jamming error Paper leading end is fed to cutter

position. M501/M521
To next page To next page To next page To next page
5-40
5.2 Paper Feed
From previous page From previous page From previous page From previous page
Is paper end detected?

Paper end process
D505/D525 Yes
No
Is splice detected? Yes

Splice
D506/D526
No 5
No 5.2.5
Is feeding completed?
Yes
END
w Pre-cutting
START
Starts paper feed motor.

M501/M521

Paper end process
D505/D525
No
Is splice detected? Yes

Splice
D506/D526
No
No
Is feeding completed?
Yes
Cut
Feeds sheet’s leading end
END
5-41
5.2 Paper Feed
5.2.6 Auto Rewinding
Rewinds the unexposed paper from the cutter position into the magazine.
START
No
5 Is magazine set? No magazine error
Yes
5.2.6
Is paper end detected? No

No paper error
D505/D525
Yes
Does splice sensor detects No

No paper error
Yes
Feed motor rewinds.

M501/M521
Does splice sensor detects No

Jamming error
Yes
Sets cutter to close position.
Feed motor rewinds.

M501/M521
END
5-42
5.2 Paper Feed
5.2.7 Paper Drawing
Draws the paper to the cutter position and cuts its end.
The paper drawing of the upper magazine is as follows:
START
5
No
> 225mm?
Drawn paper length =
5.2.7
Yes
Sets the stop positions for M501, Sets the stop positions for M501
M540 and M541 motors, and M540 motors, and starts drive.
and starts drive.

D505
No
End process
Yes Is splice detected?
D506
No
Splice
No
Does motor stop?
Yes
Cut
Starts driving motors except

M501.
END
5-43
5.2 Paper Feed
5.2.8 Back Printing
Prints on back surface of the paper with the dot-printer.
START
Is paper’s leading end detected? No

5 D541
Yes
5.2.8
Starts driving ink ribbon of back printer

M542
Has specified period of No

time passed?
Yes
Starts back printing
Has specified period of No Is paper’s leading end detected? Yes

time passed? D541
Yes
No
Stop driving ink ribbon
M542
END
* In case of the papers with more than 273mm of feed length, the back printing is started
within a time after the paper loading is complete.
5-44
5.2 Paper Feed
5.2.9 Speed Adjustment
The paper is fed to the exposure section, reducing the feed speed from 100mm/sec to 78.8mm/sec.
START
Is paper’s leading end detected? No

D560 5
Yes
5.2.9
Reduces feed speed to 78.8mm/sec.

M542
Is it paper with more than Yes

152mm of feed length?
No 2000ms passed after paper leading
end detection? D560 No
Yes
Nip release
M545
No Specified period of time passed

* Paper’s length (mm)÷78.8mm/sec+0.1sec
after reduction is complete?
Yes
Restores feed speed to 100mm/sec.

M542
No
Nip released?
Yes
Nip ON
M545
END
5-45
5.2 Paper Feed
5.2.10 Soft Nip
Nips the papers passing through the exposure section.
START
Is paper leading end detected? No

5 D562
Yes
5.2.10
Waits 190ms.
2nd nip ON
Is paper trailing end detected? No

D561
Yes
Waits 310ms.
1st nip OFF
Is paper leading end detected? No

D562
Yes
Waits 80ms.
1st nip ON
2nd nip OFF
END
5-46
5.2 Paper Feed
5.2.11 Distribution
Distributes the papers.
q Sheet’s leading end detection
START
5
No Is paper’s leading end detected?
D562 5.2.11
Yes
Waits specified period of time.
Goes down from waiting position

to distribution position. M572
Distribution left/right movement

M571
END
w Sheet’s trailing end detection
START
No Is paper’s trailing end detected?

D562
Yes
Waits specified period of time. Waits specified period of time.
Stops feed. Goes down to distribution position.

M570 M572
To next page From next page To next page
5-47
5.2 Paper Feed
From previous page To previous page From previous page
Switches bulb to go down Left/right movement

suction position. M572 M571

5
5.2.11
Switches bulb. Stops feed
(S570/S571) M570
Starts going up to suction section Switches bulb to go down

waiting position. M572 suction position. M572
Yes Specified period of time

passed after going-up is started?
Drives feed motor. No
M570
Switches bulb.
(S570/S571)
No
Going-up is complete?
Yes
No Feeding.
M570
Yes Starts going up to suction section
Yes waiting position. M571
Continue release working?
No Yes Specified period of time

passed after going-up is started?
Starts driving feed motor No
M570
No
Going-up is complete?
Yes
No Feeding.
M570
Yes
END
5-48
5.2 Paper Feed
Distribution Line and Position
• Line
The following 5 distribution line types are used differently depending on the sheet’s width and length.
q Single line
Sheet is not distributed.
Condition: L > 254mm or W > 152mm
w 2-line high speed distribution

Absorption and release are performed alternately on the 2 lines (2nd low).
Condition: L < < <
= 102mm and 102mm = W = 152mm
5
e 2-line low speed distribution
Release is performed after absorption and distribution. 5.2.11
Condition: 102mm < L and 102mm < <
= W = 152mm
r 2-line special distribution

2-line high speed distribution. Absorption and release are performed alternately on the 2 lines (3rd low).
Condition: L <
= 152mm and W = 102mm
t 3-line distribution
Condition: 82.5mm < < <
= L = 254mm and W = 89mm
Distribution Position
• Distribution position: 3-line front, 2-line front, center, 2-line rear and 3-line rear.
Relation between distribution lines and positions is as follows:
Center
2nd row front 2nd row rear
3rd row front 3rd row rear
Feed direction
• Single line The sheets are placed on the center line position.
• 2-line high speed

• 2-line low speed The sheets are distributed on the 2nd row front
and 2nd row rear positions alternately.
• 2-line special The sheets are distributed on the 3rd row front
and 3rd row rear positions alternately.
• 3-line The sheets are distributed on the 3rd row front,

3rd row rear and center positions in that order.
(If the sheets are distributed in the reverse
order, they cannot be aligned). In case of the
sheet with 254mm length, it is always placed
on the front position.
5-49
5.2 Paper Feed
5.2.12 Splice
If the splice sensors (D506/D526) detect the splice hole, the paper is cut at 193mm from the leading end of the hole and is outputted onto the
large-size tray.
Splice
Splice Hole
5
5.2.12
5.2.13
Cut Position
193mm
5.2.13 Paper End Process
If the paper end sensors (D505/D525) detect the paper end, the trailing paper length is detected by the splice sensors(D506/D526) and
paper end sensors (D505/D525), and the system performs as follows:
Trailing paper length Process

Less than 130mm Stops feeding and displays the paper end processing messages (W-2421/W-2422).
More than 130mm Displays the paper end processing messages (W-2421/W-2422) and draws the trailing paper, then outputs it onto the
large-size tray.
Splice Sensors
(D506/D526)
Paper End Sensors

(D505/D525)
Cutter
5-50
5.3 Exposure Section
5.3.1 Start-up Initialization
Machine initialization → Warming-up initialization in the normal operation
START
Initialize serial connection.

5
5.3.1
Read parameters from
EEPROM.
Polygon initialization
Mechanism Fan initialization

control
Shutter initialization
Start warming-up?
→ Warming-up start
Warming-up
control
AOM temperature G-SHG temperature
warming-up warming-up R-LD warming-up B-SHG warming-up
R-LD exposure
initialization
SOS check
LD exposure
control
G-SHG exposure
initialization
B-SHG exposure
initialization
END
5-51
5.3.2 End Process 5.3.3 Feed Start
START START
Light source deterioration

Stop temperature monitor
detection
5
5.3.2 Read total exposure time B-SHG exposure
5.3.3
END G-SHG exposure
Environment method calibration
END
5-52
5.3.4 Exposure Preparation
START
Yes
Sensor status error?
No
5
Initializing SHG?
No
5.3.4
Yes
SHG initialization check
No at feed start
Within specified current?
Yes
Yes
Exposing R-LD?
No
R-LD exposure
No
Normally completed?
Yes
SOS detect check
No
Normally completed?
Yes
Yes
Exposing?
No
Stop exposure. Set size/position info.
Set counter sub-scanning Same as Exposure

start position. Completion
Exposure OK
Abnormally completed. Waiting exposure

Normally completed.
completion.
5-53
5.3.5 Exposure Completion/RLD Exposure Stop
START
No
Waiting exposure completion?
Yes
Timer Start-up
5 Set size/position info.
5.3.5
5.3.6
Set counter sub-scanning Same as Exposure
start position. Preparation
No
Count up? Exposure OK
Yes
Turn OFF R-LD.
Normally completed.
5.3.6 Feed Completion
START
Stop R-LD turn-OFF timer.
Turn OFF R-LD.
Turn OFF B-SHG.
Turn OFF G-SHG.
Exposure OK
END
5-54
5.4 Processor
5.4 Processor
5.4.1 Heat-up Operation
Heat-up Start
Solution levels of each tank No

normal?
Yes
All heaters OFF
Yes 5
Heater OFF? To “No warm-up operation”
5.4.1
To error processing
No
Yes Current temperature No

30 minutes passed?
< Former temperature +1°C
Yes
Former temperature is updated to

To error processing
current temperature.
No
Current temperature Temperature Yes

setting + Controlled range Error set
No
Current temperature < No

Temperature setting
Yes
Heater ON Heater OFF
Yes Current temperature <

Temperature setting
No
Set temperature adjustment

completion.
No Heat-up of all processing tank

solutions completed.
Yes
No
Error occurred?
Yes
To error processing
END To normal operation
5-55
5.4 Processor
5.4.2 Normal Warm-up Operation
Normal warm-up
Solution levels of processing No

tanks normal?
Yes
5 Current temperature is No
within controlled range?
5.4.2
Yes

Temperature setting
Yes
Heater OFF
Heater ON
Error processing
No Temperature adjustment of all processing
tank solutions completed?
Yes
END
5-56
5.4 Processor
5.4.3 Pre-heat Operation
The pre-heat operation is designed to keep each solution temperature above a prescribed level when it might otherwise fall below freezing
point. The pre-heat operation time can be set twice in units of less than two hours between 23:00 and 4:00.
Heat-up

tanks normal? 5
Yes
5.4.3
5.4.4
Circulation pump ON
Drive motor of processing tank ON
Solution temperatures of all processing No

tanks are less than 30°C.
Yes
>
Current temperature = Yes
Set heater OFF.
Control temperature
No

Control temperature
Yes
Set heater ON Error processing
END
5.4.4 Cool-down Operation
The temperature control of the processing tanks is stopped when the power or heater is turned OFF.
START
All heater OFF
Circulation pump OFF
END
5-57
5.4 Processor
5.4.5 Heater Cooling Fan
START
No Heater cooling fans

(F710~F13) are ON?
Yes
5 No Current temperature => >

Current temperature = Yes
Temperature setting + offset Temperature setting
5.4.5
Yes No
5.4.6
Turn ON solution heater cooling Turn OFF solution heater cooling

fans of processing tanks. fans of processing tanks.
No No
Are heater cooling fans ON? Are heater cooling fans OFF?
Yes Yes
Heater cooling fans ON output Heater cooling fans OFF output
END
5.4.6 Monitoring Processing Solution Level
START
Solution levels of processing Yes

tanks normal?
No To heat-up operation
“Normal solution level” is notified.
tanks abnormal?
Yes
To “No warm-up operation”

“Processor entry inhibition” is notified.
“Processor tank levels lowered”

is notified.
No
Is there heater stop operation?
Yes
END
5-58
5.4 Processor
5.4.7 Normal Operation Drive Control
START
Processor drive motor ON No

requested?
Yes Processor drive motor No
M700 OFF requested?
No
5
Processor cover/Dryer entrance rack Yes
cover/Dryer front cover closed? 5.4.7
Yes 5.4.8
Drive motor OFF
Drive motor(M700) ON Dryer heater OFF
END
5.4.8 Auto Intermittent Operation Control
Turn ON the drive motor(M700) to operate the circulation pump during the specified time, so that dust cannot collect on the processing rack
rollers.
START
Processor drive motor control No

requested?
Yes
Drive motor (M700) ON
Circulation pump ON
Yes
Specified period of time passed?
No
No
Is there power ON operation?
Yes
Drive motor OFF
END
5-59
5.4 Processor
5.4.9 Auto Cleaning Control
Supply the PS-R replenisher solution to perform the auto cleaning of the processing racks at the post-operational check.
START
Drive processor.
(Rotate 70s CW)
5
5.4.9
Drive processor CW(10s).
Start rear side auto cleaning.

Drive continuously 19s CW.
Start front side auto cleaning.
Stop processor.
Stop processor.
Wait 1s.
Wait 1s.
Drive processor CCW(10s).
Drive processor CCW(10s).
Start front side auto cleaning.

Start rear side auto cleaning.
Stop processor.
Stop processor.
Wait 1s.
Wait 1s.
No
2 sets completed?
Drive processor CW(10s) Yes
END
5-60
5.4 Processor
5.4.10 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement
START
Wait 10s.
5
Cleaning pump(PU740) ON.
5.4.10
Water pressure adjustment(1.0s)
“Open” front side auto cleaning valves

(S720~S723) during a specified time.
“Close” front side auto cleaning valves

(S720~S723).
Wait 1s.
“Open” rear side auto cleaning valves

(S724~S727) during a specified time.
“Close” rear side auto cleaning valves

(S724~S727). Cleaning pump OFF.
No 4 sets completed?
Yes
END
5-61
5.4 Processor
5.4.11 Replenishment Pump Control
START
Does total P1-R replenisher Yes

value exceed print stop timing?
5 No
5.4.11 Cutting print cut permitted. Cutting print inhibited.

5.4.12
Does total P1-R replenisher value No

exceed 1-unit output amount?
Yes
Replenisher operation OK
in replenisher mode? No
Yes
1-unit replenisher pump operated.
Subtract 1-unit output amount from total

P1-R replenisher value.
END
5.4.12 Replenishment Initialization Control
START
Processing parameters received.
Yes
Status flag “error”? Replenishment section error END
No
No “Opening not completed normally.

Status flag “replenish”?
Wait!”
Yes
To Replenishment sequence
To Power Supply Restore sequence
END
5-62
5.4 Processor
5.4.13 P1-R Replenishment Control
START
Start P2-RA replenishment

sequence
5
Start P2-RB replenishment
sequence 5.4.13
P1-R replenishment operation flag

“OK“
Resume P1-R output amount

calculation
PS-R replenishment operation flag

“OK”
Replenisher upper level Yes

sensor (P1-R) “Empty“?
No
“P1R replenisher pump or
stirring valve abnormal.”
Does total P1-R output amount Yes
value exceed 1,998.0ml?
No
Set open time for replenisher
stirring valve (P1-R) to default.
No Replenisher upper level sensor
(P1-R) “Empty”
Yes To Error Display sequence
Clear total P1-R output amount

value to 0 and resume calculation.
To next page
5-63
5.4 Processor
From previous page
Replenisher lower level Yes

sensor (P1-R) “Empty”?
No
Does total P1-R output amount Yes

5 value exceed 4507.2ml?
5.4.13 No “Replenisher pump (P1-R)

abnormal”
No Replenisher lower level
sensor (P1-R) “Empty”?
Yes Set replenisher pump (P1-R)

output amount to default.
Is total P1-R output amount Yes
value less than 3004.8ml.
No To Error Display sequence
Save current total P1-R

output amount. → [C]
Correct output amount for

“Replenisher pump (P1-R)”,
“P1-R stirring valve”.
Clear total P1-R output amount

No Does total P1-R output

amount value exceed 240ml?
Yes
P1-R replenishment operation flag

“Not operated”.
P1-R, P2-R synchronization control

flag “Requested”.
To next page
5-64
5.4 Processor
To previous page
P2-RA replenishment No
sequence completed?
Yes
P2-RB replenishment No
sequence completed? 5
Yes
5.4.13
P1-R, P2-R synchronization control

flag “Not requested”.
PS-R replenishment operation

flag “Not operated”.
Clear total P2-RA/P2-RB

replenisher value to 0.
Status flag “Open”.
To Opening sequence
Condition: End request

END All replenishment operation flag
must be “Not operated”.
• ”Replenisher pump(P1-R)” output amount calculation

Next 1-unit output amount of replenisher pump(P1-R)
= Current 1-unit output amount × P1-R replenisher tank capacity[C]/Total P1-R output amount value[C]
= Current 1-unit output amount × 3756.0ml/Total P1-R output amount value[C]
• ”Stirring valve(P1-R)” output amount calculation

Next replenisher pump stirring valve(P1-R) opening time(fluctuation)
= Current replenisher pump stirring valve(P1-R) opening time(fluctuation) × P1-R replenisher tank capacity[B]/Total P1-R output amount
value[B]
= Current replenisher pump stirring valve(P1-R) opening time(fluctuation) × 999.0ml/Total P1-R output amount value[B]
NOTE: In case of “Total P1-R output amount value[B]”=0", set “Stirring valve(P1-R)” output amount to default.
B 999.0ml
Replenisher upper level sensor(P1-R)
C 3756.0ml
Replenisher lower level sensor(P1-R)

A 240.0ml
5-65
5.4 Processor
5.4.14 P2-RA/P2-RB Replenishment Control
START
P2-RA/P2-RB replenishment
operation flag “OK”
5
Resume P2-RA/P2-RB output
5.4.14 amount calculation.
Replenisher upper level Yes

sensor (P2-RA/P2-RB) “Empty”?
No
“P2-RA/P2-RB replenisher
Does total P2-RA output Yes pump or cartridge cleaning
amount value exceed 777.0ml? valve abnormal.”
No
Set open time for replenisher

stirring valve (P2-RA) to default.
No Replenisher upper level
sensor (P2-RA/P2-RB) “Empty”
Yes
To Error Display sequence
Clear total P2-RA/P2-RB output

amount value to 0 and resume calculation.
To next page
5-66
5.4 Processor
From previous page
Replenisher lower level Yes

sensors (P2-RA/P2-RB) “Empty”
No
Total P2-RA/P2-RB output amount Yes

value is less than 1753.2ml. 5
No
“P2-RA/P2-RB replenisher 5.4.14
pumps abnormal.”
No P1-R/P2-R synchronization
control flag “Requested”?
Yes
Set replenisher pump (P2-RA/P2-RB)
output amount to default.
Replenisher pump (P2-RA/P2-RB)
1-operation unit replenishment

No Replenisher lower level
sensor (P2-RA/P2-RB) “Empty”
Yes
Is total P2-RA output amount

value less than 1168.8ml. Yes
No
Save current total P2-RA

output amount. → [C]
Correct output amount for

“Replenisher pumps (P2-RA/P2-RB)”,
“Cartridge cleaning valves (P2-RA/P2-RB)”.
Clear total P2-RA/P2-RB replenisher

No P1-R/P2-R synchronization
control flag “Requested”.
Yes
Replenisher pump(P2-RA/P2-RB)
1-operation unit replenishment
No Does total P2-RA/P2-RB output

amount value exceed 93.0ml?
Yes
To next page
5-67
5.4 Processor
From previous page
P2-RA replenishment operation

flag “Not operated”.
Status flag “Open”.

5
5.4.14
Condition: End request
END All replenishment operation flag
must be “Not operated”.
• ”Replenisher pump(P2-RA/P2-RB)” output amount calculation

Next 1-unit output amount of replenisher pump(P2-RA/P2-RB)
= Current 1-unit output amount × P2-RA/P2-RB replenisher tank capacity[C]/Total P2-RA/P2-RB output amount value[C]
= Current 1-unit output amount × 1461.0ml/Total P2-RA/P2-RB output amount value[C]
• “Cartridge cleaning valve(P2-RA/P2-RB)” output amount calculation

Next cartridge cleaning valve(P2-RA/P2-RB)” open time(fluctuation)
= Current cartridge cleaning valve(P2-RA/P2-RB)” open time(fluctuation) × P2-RA/P2-RB replenisher tank capacity[B]/Total P2-RA/P2-
RB output amount value[B]
= Current cartridge cleaning valve(P2-RA/P2-RB)” open time(fluctuation) × 388.5ml/Total P2-RA/P2-RB output amount value[B]
NOTE: In case of “Total P2-RA/P2-RB output amount value[B]”=0", set “Cartridge cleaning valve(P2-RA/P2-RB)” output amount to default.
B 388.5ml
Replenisher upper level sensor(P2-RA/P2-RB)
C 1461.0ml
Replenisher lower level sensor(P2-RA/P2-RB)

A 93.0ml
5-68
5.4 Processor
5.4.15 Auto Opening Control
START
No
Replenisher cartridge loaded? “Load the cartridge.”
Yes
5
Replenisher cartridge box No
“Close replenisher cartridge box.” 5.4.15
closed?
Yes
Replenisher upper level No

“Replenish PS-R.”
sensor (PS-R) “solution exists”?
Yes
Rotate replenisher cartridge

opening drive motor CW.
Yes “Driving motor for opening

Time-out 13s passed?
replenisher cartridge abnormal.”
No
No Cartridge setting lower sensor

interrupted. To Error Display sequence
Yes
Wait motor stop 1.45s.

Opening motor starts detecting dog
position just from the start-up.
Stop replenisher cartridge

opening drive motor.
Wait 40s solution lowered.
To next page
5-69
5.4 Processor
From previous page
Replenisher lower level No Replenisher lower level No Replenisher lower level No

sensor (P1-R) “solution exists”? sensor (P2-RA) “solution exists”? sensor (P2-RB) “solution exists”?
Yes Yes Yes
Replenisher lower level No

5 sensor (P2-RA) “solution exists”?
Opening NC kit failed.
Yes
5.4.15
Replenisher lower level To Error Display sequence

sensor (P2-RB) “solution exists”? No
Yes
Set cleaning/dilution timer.

Status flag “cleaning/dilution” opening drive motor CW.
Yes “Driving motor for opening

To Cleaning/Dilution sequence Time-out 13s passed?
replenisher cartridge abnormal.”
No
END Cartridge setting upper sensor

No interrupted?
Yes

“This replenisher cartridge empty.

Load a new cartridge.”
Has the replenisher box door No

been opened and closed?
Yes
Go to “START” of
“Auto Opening Control”.
5-70
5.4 Processor
5.4.16 Replenisher Level Adjustment
Priority q Operation q
P1-R empty Operate until P2-RA/RB
Stop replenish. lower limit detected.
Priority e Operation w 5
Operate until P2-RB
Priority w P1-R empty
lower limit detected. 5.4.16
P2-RA empty To opening
All replenishers exist. Priority r cartridge
Continue with P1-R, P2-RB.
P2-RB empty Wait P1-R.
Priority e
Operate until P2-RA
Priority e P1-R empty
lower limit detected.
P2-RB empty
Continue with P1-R, P2-RA. Priority r
P2-RA empty Wait P1-R.
5-71
5.4 Processor
5.4.17 Cleaning/Dilution
START
Replenisher cartridge cleaning

Start-up auto cleaning pump.
valve(P2-RB) “open”
5
Subtraction count for replenisher
5.4.17 Wait 1s. cartridge cleaning valve (P2-RB)
open time(fixed).
Wait pressure risen.
Replenisher cartridge cleaning Subtraction count for replenisher

valve (P1-R) “open” cartridge cleaning valve (P2-RB)
open time(fluctuation).

cartridge cleaning valve (P1-R) No
open time. Remaining time=0?
Yes
No
Remaining time=0? Replenisher cartridge cleaning
valve (P2-RB) “close”
Yes

Replenisher stirring
valve (P1-R) “close”
valve (P1-R) “open”

valve (P2-RA) “open”
cartridge cleaning valve (P1-R)
open time(fixed).

cartridge cleaning valve (P2-RA) Subtraction count for replenisher
open time(fixed). cartridge cleaning valve (P1-R)
open time(fluctuation).

cartridge cleaning valve (P2-RA) No
open time(fluctuation). Remaining time=0?
Yes
No
Remaining time=0? Replenisher cartridge cleaning
valve (P1-R) “close”
Yes

valve (P2-RA) “close”
To next page
5-72
5.4 Processor
From previous page
Stop auto cleaning pump.
Replenisher upper level No “P1-R replenisher pump or stirring

sensor (P1-R) “solution exists”? valve abnormal.” 5
Yes
5.4.17
Replenisher upper level No “P2-RA replenisher cartridge

sensor (P2-RA) “solution exists”? cleaning valve abnormal.”
Yes
Replenisher upper level No “P2-RB replenisher cartridge

sensor (P2-RB) “solution exists”? cleaning valve abnormal.”
Yes

open drive motor. To Error Display sequence
Clear total P1-R/P2-RA/P2-RB output amount

Status flag “Cap cleaning”
To Cap Cleaning sequence
END
5-73
5.4 Processor
5.4.18 Replenisher Cartridge Cap Cleaning Control
START
q
Yes
opening drive motor CW. No
5 Cartridge setting
Yes to q No lower sensor interrupted?
5.4.18 Time-out 13s passed?
Yes
No

Cartridge setting upper
No sensor interrupted?
Yes
Wait 30s water drained.


Start-up auto cleaning pump.
Yes
valve (P1-R) “open”(0.5s) No
Cartridge setting
No upper sensor interrupted?
valve (P2-RA) “open”(0.5s) Yes “Driving motor for opening
replenisher cartridge abNormal.”

valve (P2-RB) “open”(0.5s)

Stop auto cleaning pump.
Stop replenisher cartridge opening drive motor.
Status flag “Replenish”

opening drive motor CCW.
To Replenishment sequence
END
5-74
5.4 Processor
5.4.19 Power Supply Restore Control
START
Yes
Status flag=“Replenish”? To Replenishment sequence
No
5
Yes
Status flag=“Opening”? To Opening sequence 5.4.19
No
Yes
Status flag=“Cleaning/Dilution”? To Cleaning/Dilution sequence
No
Yes
Status flag=“Cap cleaning”? Status flag=“Replenish” To Replenishment sequence
No
Status flag=“Error”
END
5-75
5.4 Processor
5.4.20 Error Display Control
START
Status flag=“Error”
5
5.4.20 P1-R/P2-RA/P2-RB/PS-R replenishment
status flag=“Not operated”
Error occurred in replenishment

section. About 380 sheets of
3R size printing still possible
without replenishment.
Cartridge box upper sensor Yes

interrupted?
No

Yes
No
No Cartridge box upper sensor

interrupted?
Yes

END
5-76
5.4 Processor
5.4.21 Error Restore Control
START
No
Status flag=“Error”?
Yes
5
Does replenisher level lower sensor Yes
(P1-R) (P2-RA) (P2-RB) Status flag=“Open” To Opening sequence 5.4.21
detect “empty”? 5.4.22
No
Does replenisher level upper sensor Yes Clear total P1-R/P2-RA/P2-RB

(P1-R) (P2-RA) (P2-RB) Status flag=“Replenish” output amount value to 0 and
detect “solution exists”? resume calculation.
No
END To Replenishment sequence
5.4.22 Pump Output Measurement
Measure the output amount of the processing tank replenisher pump.
• The following standard value is common to all processing method.
Replenisher pump P1-R P2-RA P2-RB PS-R

Standard value 50Hz 54.0 54.0 54.0 57.0
60Hz 64.8 64.8 64.8 68.4
* Measure the output amount for each unit operation.
START
Specified replenisher PU741, PU742,

pump 30s ON. PU743, PU744
END
5-77
5.4 Processor
5.4.23 Auto Replenishment Control(at installation)
START
Rack cleaning valve

Supply water.
front side (PS3,4) ON 10s.
5
Rack cleaning valve
5.4.23 Drive PS-R replenisher pump 60s.
rear side (PS3,4) ON 10s.
Drive cleaning pump. Stop cleaning pump.
Wait 1s. Drive PS-R replenisher pump 30s.
Rack cleaning valve

Drive cleaning pump.
Rack cleaning valve

Wait 1s.
Rack cleaning valve

Stop cleaning pump.
Rack cleaning valve

Drive PS-R replenisher pump 30s.
Drive cleaning pump. Stop cleaning pump.
Wait 1s. END
5-78
5.4 Processor
5.4.24 Intermittent Process
Prevent the performance deterioration of the processing solution when the paper processing amount does not reach the setting value.
Perform the intermittent process:

“when the paper processing amount of the previous day is less than the setting value.”
“when the paper processing amount of the last 7 days is less than the setting value.”
Minimum paper processing amount
Minimum paper processing amount of the previous day Minimum paper processing amount of the last 7 days
LP1500SC 6.8m 2
2
47.6m2 5
LP2000SC 9.6m 67.2m2
5.4.24
START
No Is processing amount
less than setting value?
Yes
Intermittent process amount

calculated?
No
PS-R exists?
Yes
Perform intermittent process. “No solution” error

PU744
END
5-79
5.4 Processor
5.4.25 Waste Solution Process
START
Has waste tank solution level Yes

changed to “No solution”? FS749
No Resume replenishment.
5 “No solution” is notified.
Yes Has waste tank solution level
5.4.25 changed to “Full”? FS749
5.4.26
Waste tank solution level No
changed to “No solution”?
More than 300ml replenished No
while “Full” detected?
Yes
Stop replenishment. Waste solution

“Completely full” is notified.
END
5.4.26 Dryer Section Heat-up Control
START
No Current temperature <

Setting temperature
Yes
Dryer heater ON Setting.
Dryer fan ON output
Set status change.
Current temperature > Yes

Upper limit temperature
No
Dryer heater OFF.
More than 1°C risen Yes

during 1 minute?
No END
Error processing
5-80
5.4 Processor
5.4.27 Dryer Section Temperature Adjustment 5.4.28 Dryer Section Pre-heat Control
START START
Does current temperature exceed No No

Pre-heat set?
the range±15°C? (TS760)
Yes Yes
Error processing 5
Set temperature to 40°C 5.4.27
No Current temperature < 5.4.28
Setting temperature
Yes
Heater (H760) ON Setting.
Dryer fan (F760) ON output.

Yes Current temperature >

Upper limit temperature
END
No
Has more than 1°C risen Yes

during 1 minute?
No
Error processing
Dryer heater OFF

Dryer fan OFF
Set status change.
END
5-81
5.4 Processor
5.4.29 Dryer Section Pre-heat Drive Temperature Adjustment
START
Does current temperature exceed No

the range±15°C? (TS760)
Yes
5 Error processing
No Current temperature <

5.4.29 Setting temperature
5.4.30
Yes
END
5.4.30 Dryer Section Cool-down Control
Stop the temperature control of the dryer section.
START
Dryer heater (H760) OFF.

Dryer fan (F760) OFF.
END
5-82
5.5 Densitometer
5.5 Densitometer
5.5.1 Densitometer AD100
RESET (Power ON)
Error ERROR LED lights.

ERROR SUM CHECK
(EEPROM parameter damaged.)
5
Initialization
(Density measurement head start point detection error) 5.5.1
(White board density measurement error (amplifier offset maladjusted,
or lamp burnt out))
Is the [START] button pressed?

No
Yes

Chart insertion
(Paper is not detected.)

Insertion direction check
(Patch P0 is not black, or the blank next to it is not white.)
Width (narrow or wide) check

(Patch P2 is read.)
Calibration (White board is read.)
Insertion direction image position

offset correction
Cyan density measurement (Patch C11 to C0)

Density measurement head is
moved to the measurement point.
Cyan density measurement

Density check
(Reversed density order of patches)
To magenta density measurement
5-83
5.5 Densitometer
From cyan density measurement
Magenta density measurement (Patch M11 to M0)

5 Magenta density measurement
5.5.1

Density check
Yellow density measurement (Patch Y11 to Y0)

Yellow density measurement

Density check
Magazine ID measurement
(Patch ID0 to ID5)

Ending processing
(Paper sonsor detects paper feed error more than ±3mm.)
Data sending
Normal completion
* Refer to the “Calibration Chart Dimensions” for patch number.
5-84
5.5 Densitometer
Calibration Chart Dimensions (Narrow width paper)
A B
Reference Point
5
C 5.5.1
Allowance value for calibration

D
1. A – B ±2mm
2. C = 63.5 + 2mm, –1.5mm
3. D = 59.7 ± 1.5mm
4. E = 167.6 ± 1.5mm
Paper
(in the case of 3.5 in. width)
White
5-85
5.5 Densitometer
Calibration Chart Dimensions (Wide width paper)
Reference Point
A B
5
5.5.1
White
Allowance value for calibration
1. A – B ±2mm
2. C = 76.2 + 2mm, –1.5mm
3. D = 121.9 ± 1.5mm
4. E = 82.5 ± 1.5mm
5-86
5.5 Densitometer
5.5.2 Densitometer AD200
RESET (Power ON)

EEPROM SUM CHECK (EEPROM parameter defective.)
5
ERROR LED lights.
Error
(Density measurement head start point detection error) 5.5.2
Initialization
(White board density measurement error (amplifier offset maladjusted,
or lamp burnt out))

Chart insertion
(Paper is not detected.)
Is the [START] button pressed?

No
Yes

Insertion direction check
(Patch is not black, or the blank next to it is not white.)
Width (narrow or wide) check
Calibration (White board is read.)
Insertion direction image position

offset correction
Density measurement
Density measurement

Density check
5-87
5.5 Densitometer
From density measurement
5 Magazine ID’s measurement
5 Ending processing
(Paper sensor detects paper feed error more than ±3mm.)
5.5.2
Data sending
Normal completion
Wait for [START]
5-88
5.5 Densitometer
Calibration Cart
8mm ± 2mm
5
5.5.2
5-89
6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS
6.1 Maintenance Schedule .................................................................................... 6-2
6.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table .............................................. 6-3
6.3 Maintenance and Inspection Procedures ................................................... 6-4

6.3.1 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning ............................................. 6-4
6.3.2 Zoom Lens and ND Filter Cleaning .................................................................. 6-4
6.3.3 Mouse Cleaning ................................................................................................ 6-5 6
6.3.4 R, G and B Coaxial Cable Inspection ............................................................... 6-6
6.3.5 Auto Film Carrier Inspection ............................................................................. 6-7
6.3.6 Paper Magazine Cleaning ................................................................................ 6-7
6.3.7 Paper Magazine Table Slider Lubrication ......................................................... 6-7
6.3.8 Cutter Inspection ............................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.9 Paper Feed Section Roller Cleaning ................................................................ 6-8
6.3.10 Paper Feed Section Idler Gear Lubrication ...................................................... 6-9
6.3.11 Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement ..................................................................... 6-9
6.3.12 Distribution Section Suction Cup Inspection ..................................................... 6-9
6.3.13 Distribution Section Slide Shaft Lubrication ...................................................... 6-9
6.3.14 P1 and P2 Solution Level Sensor Cleaning ...................................................... 6-10
6.3.15 Processor Roller Inspection .............................................................................. 6-10
6.3.16 Dryer Rack Cleaning ......................................................................................... 6-11
6.3.17 Heater Cooling Fan (F710 to F713) Cleaning ................................................... 6-11
6.3.18 Replenisher Pump Valves/PS-R Pump Bellows Replacement ......................... 6-11
6.3.19 Processor Drive Chain and Sprocket Lubrication ............................................. 6-13
6.3.20 Processing Rack Helical Gear Lubrication ....................................................... 6-13
6.3.21 Dryer Entrance Rack Drive Gear Lubrication ................................................... 6-13
6.3.22 Dryer Section Drive Gear Lubrication ............................................................... 6-14
6.3.23 Dryer Exit Unit Roller and Guide Cleaning ....................................................... 6-14
6.3.24 Large Size Print Exit Unit Belt and Roller Cleaning .......................................... 6-15
6.3.25 Print Exit Unit Belt Cleaning .............................................................................. 6-15
6.3.26 Solution Hose and Clamp Inspection ................................................................ 6-15
6.3.27 PS Tank Solution Replacement ........................................................................ 6-16
6.3.28 Film Cooling Air Filter Replacement ................................................................. 6-17
6.3.29 Floppy Disk Drive Inspection ............................................................................ 6-17
6.3.30 CD-ROM Drive Inspection ................................................................................ 6-18
6.3.31 Printing Function Inspection ............................................................................. 6-18
6.3.32 Processing Rack Entrance Side Lower Turn Roller Replacement .................... 6-19
6-1
6.1 Maintenance
6.3 Maintenance and Inspection Schedule
Procedures
Schedule Every Day

Every Week Every Month Every 3 Month Every year
Item Pre-operational check Post-operational check
Mirror Box Clean
Auto Film Carrier NC240Y Clean
Auto Film Carrier NC135Y Clean
Magnetic Heads of Auto Film Carrier NC240Y Clean
Light Source Section Air Filter Clean Clean Clean Clean
SP1500 Power Supply Section Air Filter Clean Clean Clean Clean
SP2000 Film Cooling Air Compressor Filter Clean Clean
Light Source Optical Filter Clean Clean
Auto Washing Nozzle Rubber Joints Replace
6 Paper Magazine Inside/Rollers Clean (At paper end) (See subsection 6.3.6.)
G and B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup Execute (At W-2532 message)
Reflector Replace
Control Strip Process/Check
Printer Section Air Filter Clean Clean Clean Clean
Printer Power Supply Section Air Filter Clean Clean Clean Clean
Processing Solution Heater Cooling Fan Filter Clean Clean Clean Clean
Dryer Air Filter Clean Clean Clean Clean
Crossover Racks Wash Wash Wash Wash
Auto-cleaning Nozzles Clean Clean Clean Clean
LP1500SC Dryer Entrance Rack Wash Wash Wash Wash

LP2000SC Circulation Filter Replace Replace Replace
Paper Feed Rollers (See subsection 6.3.9.) Clean Clean
Replenisher Pump Output Amount Measure/Set up Measure/Set up Measure/Set up
Auto-cleaning Pump Output Amount Measure/Set up Measure/Set up Measure/Set up
Processing Racks Wash Wash Wash
Dryer Rack Belt Clean Clean Clean
Exposure Section Cooling Air Filter Replace Replace
Densitometer White Board Clean Clean
6-2
6.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection
6.3 Maintenance Table
and Inspection Procedures
Implementation Period (Every)

6 months Year 2 Years 3 Years Refer to
Item
Scanner ND Filter Inspect Inspect Inspect Subsection 6.3.2
Mouse Clean Clean Clean Subsection 6.3.3
R, G and B Coaxial Cables Inspect Inspect Inspect Subsection 6.3.4
Auto Film Carriers Inspect Inspect Inspect Subsection 6.3.5
Paper Magazine Table Sliders Grease Grease Grease Subsection 6.3.7
SP1500
Light Souce Section Air Filter Replace Replace Replace Instruction Manual
SP2000
“Applied Operating Instructions”
Scanning Lamp Reflector Replace Replace Replace Instruction Manual
“Applied Operating Instructions”
Film Cooling Air Filter Replace Subsection 6.3.28 6
Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Clean Clean Clean Clean Subsection 6.3.1
G and B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup Execute Execute Execute Execute Instruction Manual
“Condition Setup and Maintenance”
Cutters Inspect Inspect Replace Inspect : Subsection 6.3.8
Replace: Subsection 15.1.11
Paper Feed Section Idler Gears Grease Grease Grease Subsection 6.3.10
Back Printing Inspect Inspect Inspect Inspect Subsection 9.6.14
Laser Unit Air Filter Replace Replace Replace Subsection 6.3.11
Distribution Section Suction Cups Replace Replace Replace Subsection 6.3.12
Distribution Section Slide Shafts Grease Grease Grease Subsection 6.3.13
P1 and P2 Solution Level Sensors Clean Clean Clean Subsection 6.3.14
Processor Rollers Inspect Inspect Inspect Subsection 6.3.15
Processor Solution Temperature Sensors Calibrate Calibrate Calibrate Instruction Manual
“Condition Setup and Maintenance”
Dryer Rack Clean Clean Clean Subsection 6.3.16
LP1500SC Processing Solution Heater Cooling Fans Clean Clean Clean Subsection 6.3.17
LP2000SC Replenisher Filters Inspect Inspect Inspect Subsection 21.2.2
Sub-scanning Belt Replace Subsection 16.3.1
Dryer Belt Replace Subsection 22.1.5
Replenisher Pump Valves/PS-R Pump Bellows Replace Subsection 6.3.18
Processor Drive Chain/Sprockets Grease Grease Grease Subsection 6.3.19
Processing Rack Helical Gears Grease Grease Grease Subsection 6.3.20
Dryer Entrance Rack Drive Gears Grease Grease Grease Subsection 6.3.21
Dryer Drive Gears Grease Grease Grease Subsection 6.3.22
Dryer Exit Unit Rollers/Guides Clean Clean Clean Subsection 6.3.23
Large Size Print Exit Unit Belts/Rollers Clean Clean Clean Subsection 6.3.24
Print Exit Unit Belts Clean Clean Clean Subsection 6.3.25
Solution Hoses/Clamps Inspect Inspect Inspect Inspect Subsection 6.3.26
PS Tank Solution Replace Replace Replace Subsection 6.3.27
Back Printer Head Replace Subsection 15.4.2
Floppy Disk Drive Inspect Inspect Inspect Inspect Subsection 6.3.29
CD-ROM Drive Inspect Inspect Inspect Inspect Subsection 6.3.30
Printing Functions Inspect Inspect Inspect Inspect Subsection 6.3.31
Processing Rack Entrance Side Lower Turn Rollers Replace Subsection 6.3.32
6-3
6.3 Maintenance
6.3 Maintenance and Inspection and Inspection Procedures
Procedures
6.3.1 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle 3. Blow off any dirt or dust adhering to the lens upper surface
Cleaning using the blower brash.
Lens Upper Surface

1. Open the replenisher box door and remove the replenisher
cartridge.
2. Clean the washing nozzles using a toothbrush.
Washing Nozzles
Toothbrush
6
6.3.1 Blower Brush
6.3.2 EZ2015
4. Remove the lens cover by turning it counterclockwise.
EZ758
3. Re-install the replenisher cartridge and close the replenisher

box door.
6.3.2 Zoom Lens and ND Filter Cleaning
1. Remove the CCD unit (see subsection 13.1.6).
2. Move the zoom lens to its top position by turning the ring Lens Cover
gear.
EZ2016
Ring Gear
5. Blow off any dirt or dust adhering to the lens cover upper
surface using the blower brash.
6. Wipe any dirt or dust off the lower surface of the lens cover
using a lens cleaning cloth.
Lens Cover Upper Surface
Zoom Lens
EZ2014
Lens Cover Lower Surface

EZ2017
6-4
6.3 Maintenance and Inspection Procedures
7. Remove the screw and then the ND filter. 9. Wipe any dirt or dust off the CCD slit section class using a
lens cleaning cloth.
ND Filter
Screw Lens Cleaning Cloth
6
EZ2093 6.3.3
CCD Slit Section Glass
8. Wipe any dirt or dust off the upper and lower surface of the
ND filter using a lens cleaning cloth. EZ2096
ND Filter Blow any dirt or dust off the CCD slit section glass using the
blower brush.
Lens Cleaning Cloth

EZ2094
CCD Slit Section Glass
EZ2097
Blow any dirt or dust off the ND filter using the blower brush.
10. Reinstall the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
ND Filter
NOTE: After reinstallation, perform menu 43N “ND Filter
Density Measurement (see subsection 9.4.11).
6.3.3 Mouse Cleaning
1. Turn the mouse ball cover counterclockwise and remove it

and ball.
Mouse Ball Cover
EZ2095
Mouse Ball Cover

Ball
EZ2000
6-5
2. Wipe dirt and dust off the ball using a cloth moistened with 2) Move the conjugate length variable unit to the bottom
water. position by turning the pulley using the flat blade
screwdriver.
3. Remove any dirt or dust adhering to the ball installation
section using tweezers.
Pulley
4. Remove any dirt or dust adhering to the rollers using a Screwdriver

cotton swab moistened with alcohol solution
(mixture of equal amount of alcohol and water).
Rollers
Ball
6
6.3.4
EZ549
3) Remove the front cable clamp and reposition it inside the

scanner as shown.
Cotton Swab 4) Remove slack of the cables by pushing them into the
rear side of the scanner frame and secure the clamps
EZ2001
using the screws.
5. Reinstall the ball and cover. Clamp (3) Screws (3)
6.3.4 R, G and B Coaxial Cable Inspection
1. Remove the scanner section cover (see subsection 13.1.3).
2. Check the R, G and B coaxial cables for frayed outer mesh

or damaged center cable..
<If outer mesh is frayed>
Perform the following steps to adjust the cable position so that

they do not interfere with the scanner section cover.
Cables
1) Remove the three screws securing the coaxial cable
clamps. EZ2281
Screws (3) 5) Reinstall the scanner section cover.
6) Move the conjugate length variable unit up and down to

make sure the cables do not interfere with the cover.
<If center cable is damaged>
1) Replace the coaxial cables with new ones.
NOTE: If the old cables have noise suppressors (three),

they should be removed and installed to the new
cables.
R, G and B Cables
2) Secure the cable clamps by following steps 1) through 6)
EZ1673 above so that they do not interfere with the scanner
section cover.
6-6
6.3.5 Auto Film Carrier Inspection 6.3.7 Paper Magazine Table Slider Lubrication
1. Make sure that the carrier maintenance operations are 1. Withdraw the upper magazine table.
executed correctly by the customer.
2. Apply recommended grease to the slider balls as shown.
2. Clean the sensors on the carrier and check them for scratch
or crack. Recommended Grease: Minilab Grease (P/N: 891G02003)
3. Clean the plug-in connector using the blower brush.
Blower Brush
6
6.3.5
3.6.6
6.3.7
Slider Balls 6.3.8
EZ2028
Plug-in Connector
EZ2013 3. Follow steps 1 and 2 above for the lower magazine table.
6.3.6 Paper Magazine Cleaning 6.3.8 Cutter Inspection
Always clean the paper magazine and its rollers at the time of 1. On the menu “453 Test Pattern Printing”, make grid pattern
paper end. prints with 254mm length for all paper width sizes to be
used.
1. Open the paper magazine and then vacuum dust off the
light-shielding cloth and inside of the magazine. 2. Check the edges of the prints. If they are rough, replace the
cutter with a new one (see subsection 15.1.11).
3. Open the menu “452 Paper Feed Length Adjustment”.
CD1143
2. Wipe dirt off the surfaces of the rubber rollers using a cloth
moistened with water.
4. Measure and record the lengths of all grid pattern prints.
5. Move the cursor to the “Set value (feed length)” and enter
“254.0mm”.
6. Move the cursor to the “ID” and select appropriate magazine

ID.
7. Move the cursor to the “Fine adjustment value” and enter the
adjustment value.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for all magazines.
CD1142 9. Choose the [OK] button and press the [Start/Enter] key.
6-7
6.3.9 Paper Feed Section Roller Cleaning 5. Wipe dirt off the feed rollers using a cloth moistened with
water.
1. Perform the post-operational checks to shut down the Rollers
system and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main
power supply.
2. Open the lower side door.
6
6.3.9
Lower Side Door

EZ1130
Rollers
3. Wipe dirt off the feed rollers using a cloth moistened with EZ2078
water.
6. Open the upper side door.
Rollers
Upper Side Door

EZ1136
Rollers
EZ2077
7. Wipe dirt off the feed rollers using a cloth moistened with
water.
4. Open the middle side door.
Rollers
Middle Side Door

EZ2079
EZ1133
6-8
6.3.10 Paper Feed Section Idler Gear 6.3.12 Distribution Section Suction Cup
Lubrication Inspection
1. Remove: 1. Open the distribution section.
• exposure section cooling fan bracket 2. Replace the suction cups every year or if they are
(see subsection 16.1.6). deteriorated or cracked.
• shading plate (see subsection 15.2.6). Suction Cup
2. If the idler gears are snap-lock type, apply grease to the

gears and shafts.
Recommended Grease: Minilab Grease (P/N: 891G02003)
Snap-lock Type 6
Idler Gears Gear Shaft
6.3.10
6.3.11
6.3.12
6.3.13
EZ828
3. Close the distribution section.
Snap-lock Type
Idler Gears
6.3.13 Distribution Section Slide Shaft
Lubrication
1. Open the distribution section and wipe grease off the slide
EZ2081
shafts.
3. Reinstall the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
2. Apply recommended grease to the slide shafts.

6.3.11 Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement
NOTE: If the air filter replacement is neglected, laser unit

replacement will be required due to fouling the inside of
the unit.
1. Remove the air duct from the laser unit

(see subsection 16.2.1).
2. Remove the three screws and the air filter.
NOTE: Take care not to apply excessive force to the

vibration isolation rubbers. Excessive force to the
rubbers may shorten their service life. Slide Shafts
Screws (3) EZ2019
Air Filter
EZ766
3. Install a new air filter.
4. Re-install the removed parts.
6-9
6.3.14 P1 and P2 Solution Level Sensor 6.3.15 Processor Roller Inspection

Cleaning
1. Wash the crossover and processing racks with warm water.
1. Remove the processor front cover (see subsection 20.2.1).
2. Check that the rollers are rotated smoothly by turning them
2. Remove the harness duct covers. by hand.
3. Check that the paper passes the rack smoothly without

deflection by turning the sprocket by hand.
4. Inspect the roller surfaces for damaged.
5. Check the coil springs on the racks for deterioration.
6 <LP1500SC>
6.3.14
6.3.15
Harness Duct Covers

EZ2090
3. Remove the tapping screw and then the P1 solution level

sensor.
Black Soft Roller (φ30)
Black Hard Roller (φ30)

Tranceparence Soft Roller (φ20)
Tapping Screw Yellow Soft Roller (φ20)
P1 Solution Level Sensor Brown Hard Roller (φ20)
EZ242 EZ236
4. Wipe dirt off the sensor using a dry cloth. <LP2000SC>

Sensor Black Soft Roller (φ20)
EZ2022 Black Soft Roller (φ20)

5. Reinstall the sensor.
6. Follow steps 3 through 5 for the P2 solution level sensor. Black Hard Roller (φ20)

NOTE: Always clean the P1 solution level sensor first. If the
Yellow Soft Roller (φ20)
P1 solution level sensor is cleaned after P2, P1
solution contamination may result. Brown Hard Roller (φ20)
7. Reinstall the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. EZ1471
6. If the black soft rollers on the PS1 to PS4 racks are slimy,
wipe clean them with a cloth moistened with warm water.
6-10
7. Replace the parts if necessary. 4. Re-install the fans and guards.
8. Re-install the processing and crossover racks. NOTE: Install the fans so that their arrows point the inside.
Fan Guard
6.3.16 Dryer Rack Cleaning
1. Remove the dryer rack (see subsection 22.1.4).
2. Wipe clean the dryer rack and belt with a cloth moistened
with warm water.
Dryer Belt
Screws (8) 6
EZ252
6.3.16
5. Re-install the processor front cover.
6.3.17
6.3.18
6.3.18 Replenisher Pump Valves/PS-R Pump

Bellows Replacement
Dryer Rack 1. Remove the replenisher section cover

EZ1326 (see subsection 21.1.1).
3.Re-install the dryer rack. 2. Remove the two screws, open the two clamps and withdraw
the replenisher pump bracket.
6.3.17 Heater Cooling Fan (F710 to F713) Clamps (2)

Cleaning
2. Remove the eight screws and the four fans and guards.
Fan (F710) Fan (F712)

Guard Fan (F711) Fan (F713)
Screws (2) Replenisher Pump Bracket
EZ2100
<PS-R Replenisher Pump Bellows Replacement>
1) Remove the two screws and then the PS-R replenisher

Screws (8)
pump.
EZ251
Screws (2)
3. Wipe clean the fans with a cloth moistened with warm water.
Fan
PS-R Replenisher Pump

EZ1328 EZ2007
6-11
2) Shut off the inlet and outlet hoses of the PS-R <Valve Replacement>
replenisher pump using the pinch cocks.
1) Shut off the inlet and outlet hoses of the P1-R
3) Remove the two screws and then the joint from the PS-R replenisher pump using the pinch cocks.
replenisher pump.
2) Loosen the two joint nuts.
Outlet Hose Pinch Cocks (2)
6
6.3.18
Joint Pinch Cocks (2)
Screws (2)
EZ2008
4) Remove the bellows by turning it 90 degrees. Joint Nuts (2) Inlet Hose
EZ285
NOTE: Be careful not to miss the O-ring between the
joint and the pump.
3) Remove the valves from the pump.
Bellows
Color Label
Valve
O-ring
Color Label
Valve
EZ286
Joint
EZ2009 4) Install new valves and two joint nuts.
5) Install a new bellows to the pump. NOTE: • Apply water between the valve body and the
diaphragm before installing the valves.
NOTE: Make sure the O-ring is installed on the joint.
Water
6) Reinstall the joint to the pump using the two screws.
7) Reinstall the pump to the bracket using the two screws.
8) Remove the two pinch cocks. Valve Body
Diaphragm
EZ2290
6-12
• Use new valves identified by the same color 6.3.20 Processing Rack Helical Gear
labels as the label on the pump body. Lubrication
Pump Color Label
1. Wipe grease off the helical gears of each rack.
P1-R No label
P2-RA/P2-RB Yellow 2. Apply recommended grease to the helical gears.
PS-R White Recommended Grease: Minilab Grease (P/N: 891G02003)
• Note the installation direction of the valves and

tighten the joint nuts securely.
Helical Gears
5) Follow steps 1) through 4) for the P2-RA, P2-RB and
PS-R pumps in this order.
6
3. Install the replenisher pump bracket and tighten the two
screws. 6.3.19
6.3.20
4. Secure the harnesses with the two clamps.
6.3.21
5. Reinstall the removed parts in the reverse order of removal. EZ225
NOTE: Measure PS-R pump output in menu 461 3. Reinstall the crossover racks.
“Replenisher Pump Output Measurement” after
starting up the system.
6.3.21 Dryer Entrance Rack Drive Gear

Lubrication
6.3.19 Processor Drive Chain and Sprocket
Lubrication 1. Remove the dryer entrance rack.
1. Remove all crossover racks.
Lock Release Lever
No.1 Crossover Rack

No.2 No.4 No.6
No.3 No.5
Dryer Entrance Rack

EZ697
EZ686 2. Wipe grease off the gears on the dryer entrance rack.
2. Wipe grease off the drive chain and sprockets.
3. Apply recommended grease to the gears.
3. Apply recommended grease enough to the drive chain.
Rack Drive Chain
EZ235
4. Reinstall the crossover racks.
EZ2021
4. Reinstall the dryer entrance rack.
6-13
6.3.22 Dryer Section Drive Gear Lubrication 5. Apply recommended grease to the gears.
1. Remove the dryer section front cover Recommended Grease: Minilab Grease (P/N: 891G02003)
6 Screws (3)
6.3.22
6.3.23
EZ2023
Dryer Section Front Cover
EZ789
6. Push in the dryer exit unit.
2. Withdraw the dryer exit unit. 7. Reinstall the dryer section top and front covers.
8. Return the sorter to its operation position.
6.3.23 Dryer Exit Unit Roller and Guide

Cleaning
1. Remove the dryer section front cover

2. Withdraw the dryer exit unit.
Dryer Exit Unit
EZ1147
3. Loosen the three screws, remove the other three screws and
then the dryer section top cover.
Screws (3)(Remove)
Dryer Section Top Cover
Dryer Exit Unit
EZ1147
Screws (3)(Loosen)
EZ799
4. Wipe grease off the dryer section drive gears.
6-14
3. Wipe dirt or dust off the rollers and guides of the dryer exit 6.3.25 Print Exit Unit Belt Cleaning
unit using a cloth moistened with water.
1. Remove the dryer section front cover (see subsection
22.1.1) and withdraw the dryer exit unit.
2. Loosen the three screws, remove the other three screws and
then the dryer section top cover.
Screws (3)(Remove)
Dryer Section Top Cover
EZ2024 6
6.3.24
6.3.25
6.3.26
Screws (3)(Loosen)
EZ799
3. Wipe dirt or dust off the print exit unit belts using a cloth
moistened with water.
EZ2025
4. Reinstall the dryer section front cover.
6.3.24 Large Size Print Exit Unit Belt and

Roller Cleaning

2. Withdraw the dryer exit unit and remove the large size print
tray.
3. Turn the rollers and wipe dirt or dust off the rollers and belts EZ2026
using a cloth moistened with water.
4. Reinstall the dryer section top and front covers.
5. Return the sorter to its operation position.
6.3.26 Solution Hose and Clamp Inspection
1. Remove the replenisher section cover

2. Check the processor bottom pan for sign of solution leaks.
EZ2027 3. Check the solution circulation system and replenisher

system for:
4. Push in the dryer exit unit and reinstall the removed parts.
1) Sign of solution leaks at each joint.
2) Loosen hose clamps.
3) Collapsed, bent or cracked hoses.
4. If necessary, repair or replace the parts.
5. Reinstall the replenisher section cover.
6-15
6.3.27 PS Tank Solution Replacement 8. Remove the PS4 circulation filter and insert the level gauge
into the hole as shown.
Level Gauge
2. Remove the processor cover, No.3 to No.6 crossover racks.
3. Connect a hose to the PS1 drain valve and drain the PS1
solution into the waste solution recovery tank.
PS1 Drain Valve
6
EZ2085
6.3.27
9. Pour water (30 to 40 °C) up to the “PS” line on the level
gauge.
Volume of WaterLP1500SC: Approximately 6.7 liters

LP2000SC: Approximately 8.5 liters
EZ2082
NOTE: Use warm water to reduce warming up period of
4. If the solution being drained off stops flowing, replace the time.
waste recovery tank with a lower container (such as tray)
Warm Water
which can bring the hose to a level lower than the valve, and
continue draining off the solution.
PS1 Drain Valve
Level Gauge
EZ2086
EZ2083
10. Reinstall the PS4 circulation filter.
5. Close the PS1 drain valve after all solution has been
drained. 11. Repeat step 7 through 10 for PS3, PS2 and PS1 in this
order.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to drain the PS2 to PS4 solutions.
12. Reinstall the following parts.
7. Lift the PS4 processing rack slightly and put a tablet of
FSC100 into the PS4 tank. • Processor front cover
• Sub-tank cover
PS4 Rack
• No.3 to No.6 crossover racks
• Processor cover
FSC100 (one tablet)

EZ2084
6-16
6.3.28 Film Cooling Air Filter Replacement 6.3.29 Floppy Disk Drive Inspection
1. Turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power 1. Perform the post-operational checks to shut down the
supply. system.
2. Remove the air filter section cover. 2. Insert a formatted floppy disk into the floppy disk drive.
Floppy Disk Drive
6
6.3.28
6.3.29
Air Filter Section Cover
EZ928
Formatted Floppy Disk
3. Remove the wing bolt and the air filter case.
EZ2036
3. Wait for approximately ten seconds and press the start

switch to start up the system.
Wing Bolt Air Filter Case

EZ929
Start Switch
4. Replace the air filter with a new one.
EZ1192
Air Filter
• The message “Non-System disk or disk error. Replace and
strike any key when ready.” appears.
NOTE: If the message above is not displayed, the floppy

disk drive may be abnormal.
4. Eject the floppy disk from the disk drive.
EZ930
5. Re-install the removed parts.
Floppy Disk
EZ2037
6-17
5. Press the “Reset” switch. 6.3.31 Printing Function Inspection

Reset Switch
1. Perform:
• scanner correction.
• print condition upkeep printing.
2. Set the paper magazine for the largest size print available by
the lab.
3. Proceed to menu 453 “Test Patter Printing”.
6 EZ2038
6.3.30 • The system starts up.

6.3.31
• The printer processor starts up.
6.3.30 CD-ROM Drive Inspection
1. Press the CD-ROM eject button.
• The CD-ROM tray is ejected.
CD-ROM Tray
4. Move the cursor to “Test pattern selection” and select “Grid”.
5. Move the cursor to “Feed length” and enter the feed length
for the largest size print.
6. Click the [Print] button.
CD-ROM Eject Button
EZ2039
2. Push the CD-ROM tray slightly.
• The CD-ROM tray returns.

• After about 5 minutes, the print is outputted to the large
size print tray.
7. Check that the color drift for the C, M and Y lines using a
magnifying lens (×20 to ×40).
If the color drift exceeds 1/3 of the color line, perform the
following maintenance operations.
• Menu 45H “Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser

Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment” (See subsection 9.6.9.)
• Menu 45J “Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print”

(See subsection 9.6.10.)
CD-ROM Tray
8. Proceed to the printing screen.
EZ2040
9. Perform test printing several times with known good
negatives and reversals and make sure all system functions
NOTE: If the CD-ROM tray does not operate properly with
are normal.
steps 1 and 2, the CD-ROM drive may be abnormal.
6-18
6.3.32 Processing Rack Entrance Side Lower 5. Shift the drive shaft bearing(s) from the rib(s) of the rack by
Turn Roller Replacement turning the sprocket clockwise.
Bearing (s)
Removal
1. Remove the entrance side lower guide. Sprocket
6
EZ2296 6.3.32
6. Move the drive shaft aside and remove the gear.

Entrance Side Lower Guide
Drive Shaft
EZ2293
2. Release the locking tab and remove the rear guide.
Rear Guide
Gear
EZ2297
Locking Tab 7. Remove the C-ring from the roller shaft.

EZ2294
8. Remove the coil spring
3. Remove the screw at the lower end of the drive shaft, then Coil Spring
the D-washer, poly-slider and bearing. C-ring
4. Remove the screw securing the gear then the D-washer and
poly-slider.
Screw
D-washer
Poly-slider
Bearing
EZ2298
Poly-slider
D-washer
Screw
EZ2295
6-19
9. Remove the two gears by releasing the locking tabs. 13. Remove the 13 rubber rollers from the roller shaft.
6 Gears Rubber Rollers (13)

EZ2299 EZ2302
6.3.32
10. Remove the C-ring and idler gear. NOTE: When cutting the rollers to remove them, take care
not to damage the roller shaft.
11. Remove the bearings together with the coil spring as shown.
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Apply “water” to the inside surface of the roller to ease

installation.
Idler Gear
C-ring
Bearings/Coil Spring
EZ2300
12. Remove the entrance side lower turn roller shaft.
Entrance Side Lower

Turn Roller Shaft
EZ2301
6-20
7. MESSAGES
7.1 Error Indication Rule ....................................................................................... 7-2

7.1.1 Message Number ........................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Message Icon ................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.3 X-#### Actions ................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2 Messages .......................................................................................................... 7-3
7.3 Trouble Shooting ............................................................................................. 7-62

7.3.1 Light Source Section Cover Interlock Switch .................................................. 7-62
7.3.2 Film Carrier ..................................................................................................... 7-63 7
7.3.3 CCD Unit(E-1130/E-1131) ............................................................................... 7-64
7.3.4 CTB20 Circuit Board ....................................................................................... 7-65
7.3.5 Jamming in Distribution Section ..................................................................... 7-67
7.3.6 Cutter Abnormality .......................................................................................... 7-70
7.3.7 Upper Side Door Section Nip Abnormality ...................................................... 7-72
7.3.8 Scanner Section Nip Abnormality ................................................................... 7-73
7.3.9 Paper Width Guide Abnormality ...................................................................... 7-74
7.3.10 Positioning Fork Abnormality .......................................................................... 7-75
7.3.11 Distribution Up/Down Operation Abnormality ................................................. 7-76
7.3.12 Distribution Operation Abnormality ................................................................. 7-77
7.3.13 Paper Jamming in Processor .......................................................................... 7-78
7.3.14 Replenishment Cartridge Box Malfunction ..................................................... 7-80
7.3.15 Processing Solution Temperature Abnormality ............................................... 7-82
7.3.16 Dryer Temperature Abnormality ...................................................................... 7-86
7.3.17 Processing Solution Tank Level Lowering ...................................................... 7-89
7.3.18 Replenishment Pump Diagnostics .................................................................. 7-90
7.3.19 Rack Auto Cleaning System Diagnostics ........................................................ 7-91
7.3.20 P1-R Stirring Valve/Replenishment Cartridge Washing Valve Diagnostics .... 7-92
7.3.21 Replenishment Level Sensor Diagnostics ...................................................... 7-93
7.3.22 Return Action after Replenishment System Error ........................................... 7-93
7.3.23 Replenishment Cartridge Opening Malfunction .............................................. 7-94
7.3.24 Dryer Exit Unit Diagnostics ............................................................................. 7-95
7-1
7.1 Error Indication Rule
7.2 Messages
7.1.1 Message Number
The messages are identified by the following four codes.
Symbol Error
E Trouble (Error requires action of the service representative.)
W Mismatching of condition (Error can be corrected by the
operator.)
I Information
X Software trouble
The first two digits indicate the location or operation of the error occurred.
7 No. Error Location

11XX Scanner
7.1.1 12XX CTB20 circuit board
7.1.2 13XX Scanner image processing
7.1.3
14XX Film carrier
15XX Operation
21XX Scanner to printer interface
22XX Printer operation
23XX Printer control
24XX Paper feed
25XX Laser printer
26XX Processor
7.1.2 Message Icon
Icon Error
Errors with code “E” (Take measures after turning OFF the
power supply.)
Errors with code “E” , “W” or “X” (Error can be recovered.)
For code “I” (Informations)
7.1.3 X-#### Actions
X-#### errors (software error)
Take the following actions.
1. Write down the error NO.

2. Restart the system.
3. Reinstall the software if the problem persists.
4. Create the report in the specified format.
7-2
7.2 Messages
7.2 Messages
No. Message Factor Actions

W-1101 Film or mask not installed. 1. NC135Y/NC240Y: “No film” detected in 1.
Install film or mask. pre-scanning.
1) Dust or debris collects on the surface 1) Clean the sensor cover glass.
of the sensor cover glass.
2) Sensor calibrated incorrectly. 2) Perform “Sensor Calibration(44A/
44B)”.
3) Sensor malfunction. 3) 

4) Connection error or disconnection of 4) 
 (See subsection 7.3.2)
any connector in carrier. 
5) CYB20/CYC20 circuit boards

5) 
malfunction.
2. MFC carrier: “Mask not installed” 2.
detected in pre-scanning.
1) Mask installed incorrectly 1) Check if dust or debris collects on the
surface of the original table, and set
the mask correctly.
2) Both 135M and 240M buttons set to 2) Remove the button not to be used. 7
the mount mask simultaneously.
3) Connection error or disconnection of 3) 

any harness in carrier. 

4) MSB20 circuit board malfunction 4)  (See subsection 7.3.2)

5) CYA20 circuit board malfunction. 5) 
W-1102 Light source cover is opened. Scanning was performed with the light
Close cover. source cover opened.
(Cause)
1. Light source section cover opened. 1. Close the light source section cover.
2. Interlock switch system error in light 2. (See subsection 7.3.1)
source section cover.
I-1103 Stabilizing lamp. Wait 10 minutes until the lamp is stabilized
—
Wait! (Max.10 min) at the start-up (OFF→ON).
W-1104 Scanner correction not performed. Scanning was performed before Perform the scanner correction at pre-
Perform scanner correction in “Pre- performing the scanner adjustment/ operational check or remove carrier and
operational Check”. maintenance. reinstall it while opening the printing
screen.
W-1105 Carrier not installed. Scanning was performed with no carrier
Install carrier. installed.
(Cause)
1. Carrier not installed. 1. Install carrier.
2. Carrier I/O or electric system 2. (See subsection 7.3.2)
malfunction.
3. Tripped CP601 on DC power supply 3. Repair short circuit and depress white
button on CP601.
W-1106 This film is not processed. Printing Scanning was performed with an
impossible. unprocessed cartridge installed in 240AFC.
Remove cartridge. (Cause)
1. Undeveloped film 1. Develop
2. IPI tab fold error 2. Fold IPI tab correctly.
3. EK cartridge with false VEI4 3. Set VEI4 to correct position.
malfunction.
W-1107 Carrier cover opened. Scanning was performed with the carrier
Close cover. cover opened.
(Cause)
1. Pressure cover opened. 1. Remove carrier and close pressure
cover.
2. Pressure cover malfunction. 2. Replace carrier.
3. Upper guide pin for open/close sensor 3. Replace carrier.
removed.
malfunction.
W-1108 Removing cartridge failed. Remove Error occurred in taking out cartridge from
cartridge referring to manual. 240AFC.
(Cause)
1. Hard disk malfunction Restart the system. → Reinstall the
2. Main control unit malfunction software. → Replace the main control unit.
7-3
7.2 Messages

W-1109 Scanner correction cannot be performed Scanner correction was performed with
because film or mask exists. Take out film film or mask installed.
or mask. (Cause)
1. NC135Y/NC240Y: Film installed. 1. Remove film.
2. MFC10Y: Mask installed. 2. Remove mask.
3. Carrier I/O or electric system malfunction. 3. (See subsection 7.3.2)
W-1110 Mirror box not installed. Scanning was performed with no mirror
Install mirror box. box installed.
(Cause)
1. Mirror box installed incorrectly. 1. Install mirror box correctly.
2. Mirror box slide glass malfunction. 2. Check slide guide movement, and
replace the parts if necessary.
3. Mirror box sensor bracket and guide 3. 

installed incorrectly.  Check the mirror box sensor state on
4. Mirror box sensor installation error. 4. 
 “Menu 43A I/O check”. (See

7 
 subsection 9.4.1)
5. Mirror box sensor malfunction. 5. 
E-1111 Focus calibration not performed. Scanning was performed before Perform “Focus Calibration(43K)”. (See
Call technical representative. performing the focus calibration. subsection 9.4.10)
(Cause)
1. Calibration not performed after the lens
is replaced.
2. Adjustment data files deleted due to
operation error.
E-1112 Focus position adjustment for each carrier Scanning was performed before
not performed. performing the focus position adjustment.
Consult technical representative. (Cause)
1. A brand new film carrier installed. 1.  Perform “Carrier Focus Position

2. Adjustment not performed after lens is 2.  Adjustment(43C)” (See subsection
replaced. 9.4.3)
3. Download not performed after the 3. Perform data download on “Film Carrier
circuit board replacement. ID Setup(44P)”.
W-1113 Density measurement for ND filter not Scanning was performed before Install NC135Y or NC240Y, and perform
performed. performing the density measurement for “ND Filter Density Measurement(43N)”
Do measurement in “Scanner Adjustment/ ND filter. (See subsection 9.4.11)
Maintenance” menu.
W-1114 Light source aperture table not created. Scanning was performed before creating Perform “135 Light Source Aperture
Create table through “Scanner the light source aperture table. Table(433)” or “120 Light Source Aperture
Adjustment/Maintenance” menu. Table(434)” (See “Instruction Manual”)
W-1115 Dark correction not performed. Scanning was performed before Perform “Scanner Correction” at the pre-
Perform scanner correction in “Pre- performing the dark correction. operational check.
operational Check”.
W-1116 Brightness correction not performed. Scanning was performed before Perform “Scanner Correction” at the pre-
Perform scanner correction in “Pre- performing the bright correction. operational check.
operational Check”.
E-1117 Lens registration not performed. Scanning was performed before Use “Lens Registration(43G)” to register.
Call technical representative. performing the lens registration. (See subsection 9.4.7)
E-1118 Magnification calibration not performed. Scanning was performed before Perform “Optical Magnification Calibration
Call technical representative. performing magnification calibration. (43J)”. (See subsection 9.4.9)
E-1119 Focus position adjustment for each carrier Scanning was performed before
not performed. performing the focus position adjustment.
1. A brand new film carrier installed. 1. Perform “Carrier Focus Position
Adjustment(43C)”. (See subsection
9.4.3)
2. Download not performed after the 2. Download data using “Film Carrier ID
replacement of carrier circuit board. Setup/Delete(44P)”. (See subsection
9.5.11)
7-4
7.2 Messages

W-1120 Incorrect combination of carrier and mirror Scanning was performed with an incorrect
box. Install carrier and mirror box in a combination of carrier and mirror box.
correct combination. (Cause)
1. Wrong combination of carrier and mirror 1. Install correct mirror box for the current
box. carrier.
2. Wrong mirror box type detected. 2. Check the operation using “I/O Check
(43A)”. (See subsection 9.4.1). Check
the movement of the slide guide, and
replace the parts if necessary.
3. Wrong carrier/mask type detected. 3. (See subsection 7.3.2)
W-1121 Carrier not installed. (See W-1105) (See W-1105)
Install carrier.
W-1122 Film is installed. At initialization, film is detected by sensors,
Remove film. “D401, D403, D405, D411(NC135Y)”, or
“D454, D455(NC240Y)”.
(Cause)
1. Dust or debris collect on the cover glass 1. Clean the cover glass.
7
of the film sensor.
2. Sensor calibrated incorrectly. 2. Perform “Sensor Calibration(44A/
44B)”.
3. Sensor malfunction. 3. 

4. Connector’s connection error or 4. 
harness disconnection. 

5. CYB20/CYC20 circuit board 5. 
malfunction.
W-1123 No film installed (See W-1101(NC135Y/NC240Y)) (See W-1101(NC135Y/NC240Y))
Install film.
W-1124 Film improperly installed. On “Carrier Focus Position
Remove film. Adjustment(43C)” (NC240Y)
(Cause)
1. Strip film inserted when “cartridge” is 1. Insert cartridge.
selected.
2. Cartridge inserted when “strip” is 2. Insert strip.
selected.
W-1125 Flow rate for film cooling air compressor Decrease of compressor’s flow rate is
lowered. Clean compressor’s air filter detected.
referring to manual. (Cause)
1. Air filter clogged. 1. Clean air filter.
2. RC50D harness disconnected or 2. Repair or replace the harness
connection error connecting CN8 to RC50D on CTB20
circuit board.
3. Air hose leakage or clogged. 3. Connect correctly or replace.
4. Harness of compressor power source 4. Repair or replace harness.
malfunction
5. Compressor or RC50D malfunction 5. Replace compressor or RC50D.
6. CTB20 circuit board malfunction 6. Replace CTB20 circuit board.
7. PWR20 circuit board malfunction 7. Replace PWR20 circuit board.
W-1126 Light source cover open. Scanning was performed with the light
Close cover. source cover opened.
(Cause)
1. Light source section cover opened. 1. Close light source section cover.
2. Interlock switch system in light source 2. (See subsection 7.3.1)
section abnormal.
3. Tripped CP104 on PWR20 circuit board 3. Repair short circuit and depress white
button on CP104.
4. Faulty CTB20 circuit board 4. (See subsection 7.3.2.)
W-1128 Dust adhesion to mirror box or carrier Dust is detected during the bright Clean and perform the pre-operational
detected during scanner correction. correction. check after error is solved.
Remove carrier, then clean mirror box and (Cause) If error occurs, check the state of CCD
carrier. 1. Dust or debris collect on the mask output by changing the magnification on
section of carrier, opening od pressure the menu 43E.
cover, diffusion plate, or mirror box. Clean carrier until there is no unevenness.
2. Reference data not created after CCD If problem persistes, install reference
unit is replaced. mirror box and create reference on the
menu 43E.
7-5
7.2 Messages

W-1129 Abnormal light amount pixels detected Abnormal light amount pixels are detected If light amount insufficient around the
during scanner correction. during the bright correction. center(Menu 43E), remove the object. If
(Cause) problem persists, check light source
1. Optical axis interrupted by an object. section and lens.
2. Light source abnormal If only one pixel lights abnormally, replace
3. CCD unit abnormal CCD.
4. Lens abnormal
E-1130 Auto light adjustment failed due to high CCD output too high (exceeds 18400)
CCD output. even if min. stored time(5µ sec) is for aim
Consult technical representative. output:18400 (80% of limit value: 23000).
(Cause)
1. Harness between CCD20 and CDS20 

circuit boards disconnected.  (See subsection 7.3.3)

2. CDS20 circuit board malfunction 

3. CCD20 circuit board malfunction 
7 E-1131 Offset cancellation failed.
Call technical representative.
Offset cancel does not converge.
(Cause)
1. Harness between CCD20 and CDS20 

circuit boards disconnected. 
2. CDS20 circuit board malfunction. 

3. CCD20 circuit board malfunction. 
W-1132 Auto focus failed. (Cause)
Check if the carrier and film mask are 1. All carrier: Focus position adjustment 1. Perform “Carrier Focus Position
correctly installed. data abnormal. Adjustment(43C)” for the current carrier/
mask.
2. MFC10Y: 1) Film not installed. 2. 1) Install film.
2) Transparent around the 2) Reinstall film correctly.
center (AF detecting area)
on reversal film
3) Mask installed incorrectly. 3) Install mask correctly.
3. NC135Y/NC240Y: AF chart for film 3. Replace film mask and perform “Carrier
mask failure Focus Position Adjustment(43C)”.
4. NC135Y: AF chart is hidden by mask 4. Check timing, and if abnormal, replace
due to incorrect position of AF chart variable film mask
variable film mask.
W-1133 Incorrect carrier ID. Adjustment/maintenance was performed
Install correct carrier. with an incorrect carrier.
(Cause)
1. Same type of carrier used by other 1. Install correct carrier.
machine installed.
2. Connector’s connection error in carrier 2. 

3. Plug-in connector’s connection error 3. 
4. Carrier circuit board malfunction 4. 

5. CTB20 circuit board malfunction 5. 
W-1134 Mirror box not installed. Adjustment/maintenance was performed
Install mirror box. with no mirror box installed.
(Cause)
1. Mirror box not installed or removed 1. Install mirror box correctly.
when installing carrier.
2. Slider of the mirror box guide 2. 

malfunction.  Replace spring or slide guide if slide
3. Mirror box sensor bracket and guide 3. 
 guide does not work.
installed incorrectly. 
4. Mirror box sensor installed incorrectly. 4. 
5. Mirror box sensor malfunction. 5. Check the parts using “I/O Check(43A)”
and repair or adjust the parts.
W-1135 Incorrect mirror box. Adjustment/maintenance was performed
Install correct mirror box. with an incorrect mirror box installed.
(Cause)
1. Wrong mirror box installed. 1. Install correct mirror box.
2. Slider of the mirror box guide 2. 
malfunction. 
 Replace spring or slide guide if slide
3. Mirror box sensor bracket and guide 3. 
installed incorrectly.  guide does not work.

4. Mirror box sensor installed incorrectly. 4. 
5. Mirror box sensor malfunction. 5. Check the parts using “I/O Check(43A)”
and repair or adjust the parts.
7-6
7.2 Messages

W-1136 Density measurement for ND filter failed. Density measurement failed.
Remove foreign matter on light axis, then (Cause)
perform measurement again. 1. Optical axis interrupted by an object. 1. Remove object.
2. Optical parts of the shutter section 2. Inspect or repair optical parts in shutter
malfunction. section.
W-1137 Carrier, mask or mirror box may be Carrier, mask or mirror box may be
removed. removed during the adjustment/
maintenance.
(Cause)
1. Carrier removed. 1. (See W-1105)
2. Mask removed. (MFC10Y) 2. (See W-1208)
W-1138 Lamp turned off. Scanning was performed when the lamp OK if the lamp is turned ON when
Perform the input check in “Scanner was turned off. selecting “Light On” on “I/O Check (43A)”,
Adjustment/Maintenance” menu. (Cause) if not, replace the lamp.
1. “I/O Check(43A)” completed while
“Light Off” is selected.
2. Lamp burned out.
7
W-1139 Mask improperly installed. Mask was not correctly installed during the
Reinstall mask. focus position adjustment.
(Cause) (See W-1208) (See W-1208)
W-1140 Mask not installed. Mask was not installed during the focus
Install mask. position adjustment.
(Cause) (See W-1208) (See W-1208)
I-1141 Stabilizing lamp. Adjustment/maintenance was performed
—
Wait! (Max.10 min) during the lamp’s stabilization.
I-1142 Performing darkness correction. Adjustment/maintenance was performed
—
Wait! during the dark correction.
W-1147 Fine-scanning not performed. Start from AF, carrier ID setup or fine-scan is tried
pre-scanning. without performing pre-scan.
(Cause)
1. Pre-scan not performed. 1. Remove carrier and install it, and
perform pre-scan.
2. Hard disk malfunction. 2. 1) Restart the system.
2) Reinstall system software.
3. PC malfunction. 3. Replace main control unit.
W-1190 Processing aborted due to error detected Error occurred during scanner correction. Perform scanner correction at pre-
during scanner correction. (Cause) operational check.
Perform scanner correction in pre- 1. Tripped CP604 on DC power supply 1. Repair short circuit and depress white
operational check. button on CP604.
W-1191 The scanner will be corrected. Remove Dust check not performed or failed.
the carrier momentarily, then reinsert it. (Cause)
1. Carrier installed while the screen other 1. Remove carrier and install it, and
than printing screen is displayed. perform scanner correction.
2. Anti-Dust check failed when installing 2. 1) (See error No. simultaneously
carrier. occurred)
2) Restart system.
W-1192 Processing has been aborted due to the Error is detected when dust checking.
detection of an error during scanner (Causes of error message)
correction. The scanner will be corrected. 1. Carrier has been removed. 1. 
 Remove and reinstall carrier. Perform
Remove the carrier momentarily, then 
 scanner correction in pre-operational
reinsert it. 
 check.
2. Light source section cover has been 2. 
opened.
3. Film is remained in carrier. 3. Remove film and perform scanner
correction in pre-operational check.
4. Faulty lens motor (M102). 4. (See subsection 7.3.4.)
7-7
7.2 Messages

W-1193 Light amount insufficient. Lamp may Auto light amount adjustment failed due to
malfunction.Check light source section. the malfunction of lamp. The adjustment is
converged too much.
(Cause)
1. Lamp burned out. 1. Replace lamp.
2. Eclipse created on the optical axis by 2. Remove object on optical axis.
an object.
3. NC135Y: Too narrow film mask opening 3. Open the mask by increasing +2 to
value in “Mask home correction pulse”
in menu 44Q “NC135Y Machine Data
Setup”.
4. MFC10Y: Mask installed incorrectly, or 4. Install mask correctly.
insufficient light amount because of
underexposed film.
5. CCD unit shutter abnormal. 5. Check shutter with “I/O Check(43A)”.
1) Replace home position sensor.
7 2) Replace shutter motor.
6. CCD G output abnormal. 6. (See subsection 7.3.3)
7. E-1231 Light source aperture 7. (See E-1231)
initialization error.
W-1194 Film mask not installed. Bright correction was performed without
Remove carrier and check film mask. film mask.
(Cause) (See W-1208) (See W-1208)
E-1196 Focus position adjustment not performed “Carrier Focus Position Adjustment(43C)” Perform “Carrier Focus Position
for this film. for IX240 film cartridge or strip film not Adjustment(43C)”.
Consult technical representative. performed.
W-1201 Perforation rupture exists. Frame position More than 24mm of perforation width
may not be correctly detected. detected after NC135Y pre-scan.
Remove film and correct rupture. (Cause)
1. Film rupture 1. Correct rupture or print with MFC10Y.
2. Feeding slip due to dust collection on 2. Clean feed roller.
the surface of the feed roller.
3. Driving slippage due to dust collection 3. Adjust belt tension or replace it.
on the surface of the belt, or belt
slackening.
W-1202 Pre-scan cancelled. CTB/AFC pre-scanning was not
Re-install film, then press [START/ completed normally by operator.
ENTER] again. (Cause)
1. Restart system. If W-1238 appears, 1. (See W-1238)
print lamp is abnormal.
2. System error 2. Install film and press [START/ENTER].
3) Replace main control unit.
4. Main control unit malfunction. 4. Replace main control unit.
W-1203 Carrier status changed. Incorrect carrier command received.
Re-install film. (Cause)
1. Carrier removed. 1. Remove carrier and perform pre-scan.
3) Replace main control unit.
button on CP604.
W-1208 Present film mask cannot be identified. Incorrect combination detected by
Replace mask. MFC10Y mask sensor (D480 to D484).
(Cause)
1. Mask installed incorrectly. 1. Install mask correctly.
2. Both 135M and 240M buttons set to the 2. Remove button of the type not to be
mount mask simultaneously. used.
3. Connection error or disconnection of 3. 


4. Sensor circuit board MSB20(D480 to 4. 
 (See subsection 7.3.2)
D484) failure 

5. CYA20 circuit board malfunction 5. 
W-1209 Light source cover opened. Processing (Cause)
cancelled. 1. Light source section cover opened. 1. Close light source section cover.
Close light source section cover. 2. Light source section cover interlock 2. (See subsection 7.3.1)
switch system failure.
7-8
7.2 Messages

W-1210 Feeding negative and scanning are (Cause)
canceled because carrier’s upper cover is 1. Pressure cover opened. 1. Remove carrier and close pressure
opened.Remove film, close cover, and cover.
insert film. 2. Pressure cover malfunction. 2. Replace carrier.
removed.
4. Carrier I/O or electric system failure. 4. (See subsection 7.3.2)
W-1211 Carrier not installed. (Cause)
Install carrier. 1. Carrier not installed. 1. Install carrier.
W-1212 Take out cartridge. Cartridge is detected by chucking
sensor(D443) or cartridge sensor(D456) at
start-up.
(Cause)
1. Cartridge inserted. 1. Remove cartridge.
2. Carrier I/O or electric system failure. 2. (See subsection 7.3.2) 7
W-1213 Negative exists in carrier. Film is detected by sensors D401, D403,
Remove carrier. D405, D411(NC135Y) or D454, D455
(NC240Y) at initialization.
(Cause)
1. Dust or debris collect on the sensor 1. Clean sensor cover glass.
cover glass.
2. Sensor calibrated incorrectly. 2. Perform “Sensor Calibration(44A/44B)”.
3. Sensor failure 3. 
harness disconnection in carrier 

5. CYB20/CYC20 circuit board 5. 

malfunction
button on CP603.
W-1214 Negative feeding failed. Feed out NC135Y: Feed-in not performed after film
negative. is detected by sensor(D401).
Remove carrier and clean it. NC240Y: Film is not detected by MTP
sensor1(D454) and TAP sensor(D455), or
DTP is not detected within 106.1mm after
TAP detection by TAP sensor.
(Cause)
2. Loose carrier reduction belt tension 2. Inspect belt tensioner spring for loose.
3. Sensor calibration performed while dust 3. Clean sensor, and perform “Sensor
or debris collect on sensor. Calibration(44A/44B)”.
4. Cartridge door malfunction. Film trailing 4. Wind film into intermediate cartridge or
end reattach malfunction. reattach it.
W-1215 Negative feeding error occurred. Jamming detected in feeding film.
Remove carrier and remove negative. (Cause)
2. Cartridge malfunction or incorrect 2. Wind film into intermediate cartridge or
reattach of film trailing end. reattach it.
3. Curly film or splice tape stuck to the 3. Correct curl or remove splice tape.
film.
W-1216 Non-standardized perforation type Film rupture, or perforation is interrupted Repair rupture, or stick tape correctly, or
detected. Feeding negative failed. by check tape, splice tape. use MFC10Y.
W-1218 This cartridge is not processed, so cannot “undeveloped” tab is detected by VEI
be used. sensor(D442) in chucking cartridge.
Fold IPI with unprocessed cartridge. (Cause)
1. Wrong fold of the tab indicating 1. Fold tab.
“undeveloped”
2. Mechanical failure in nest section. 2. Replace nest section.
7-9
7.2 Messages

W-1219 This cartridge is not processed, so cannot “undeveloped”(VEI4) is detected by VEI
be used. sensor(D442)
Check that cartridge mark is set to 4. (Cause)
1. Undeveloped film 1. Develop.
2. EK cartridge with false VEI4 2. Set VEI4 to correct position.
3. Carrier I/O error or electric system 3. (See subsection 7.3.2)
failure
W-1220 Cartridge’s door section malfunction. “Close” is detected by sensor (D441)
Check cartridge. when door is opened when installing
cartridge.
“Open” is detected by sensor(D441) when
door is closed when removing cartridge.
(Cause)
1. Connector’s connection error or 1. 

harness disconnection in carrier 

2.  (See subsection 7.3.2)
7 2. Door open/close sensor failure
3. Door open/close motor(M441) failure

3. 

4. CYC20 circuit board malfunction 4. 
5. Door open/close mechanism failure 5. Replace nest section.
W-1221 Unsupported splice tape detected. “ON-OFF” is detected more than 21 times
Replace or correct tape. by check tape sensor(D411) when pre-
scanning with NC135Y.
(Cause)
1. Check tape sensor calibrated 1. Clean sensor and perform “Sensor
incorrectly. Calibration(44A)”.
2. B/W film pre-scanned in the mode other 2. Perform pre-scan in the B/W mode.
than B/W mode.
3. I/O in carrier or electric system failure 3. (See subsection 7.3.2)
W-1223 Film too long. “No film” is not detected when film is
driven for 1700mm when pre-scanning
with NC135Y.
(Cause)
1. 135 cinefilm (more than 36 exp.) is 1. Use MFC10Y or cut film.
installed.
2. I/O in carrier or electric system failure 2. (See subsection 7.3.2)
W-1225 Carrier’s sensor incorrectly calibrated. Abnormal result after “Sensor Calibration
Remove carrier, clean it, then re-install it. (44A/44B)” is performed.
(Cause)
1. Sensor calibration is performed while 1. Remove film and perform sensor
film is installed. calibration.
2. Dust or debris collect on sensor. 2. Clean sensor and perform sensor
calibration.
E-1226 Lens control sensor (conjugate length Detected by conjugate length variable
upper limit) abnormality detected. section upper limit sensor(D103) after
Call technical representative. conjugate length variable motor(M101) is
driven.
(Cause)
1. Conjugate length variable section upper 

limit sensor failure 

2. Conjugate length variable section home 

position sensor(D102) failure 
3. Harness connection error or 

disconnection between CN9 and sensor 

on CTB20 circuit board 

4. CTB20 circuit board malfunction 
7-10
7.2 Messages

E-1227 Lens control sensor (conjugate length Detected by conjugate length variable
lower limit) abnormality detected. section lower limit sensor(D104) after
Call technical representative. conjugate length variable motor(M101) is
driven.
(Cause)
1. Conjugate length variable section upper 

limit sensor failure 

2. Conjugate length variable section home 

position sensor(D102) failure 
3. Harness connection error or 

disconnection between CN9 and sensor 

on CTB20 circuit board 

E-1228 Lens control sensor (conjugate home) Not detected by conjugate length variable
abnormality detected. Call technical section home position sensor(D102) when
representative. driven toward home position for
14000pulse.
7
(Cause)
1. Conjugate length variable section home 1. 

position sensor(D102) malfunction  (See subsection 7.3.4)

2. Conjugate length variable motor(M101) 2. 
malfunction
3. Conjugate length drive mechanism 3. Rotate pulley manually to check if drive
failure is smooth, if not, replace ball screw.
4. Harness malfunction 4. 

5. CTB20, PWR20 circuit board 5. 
malfunction 

6. Main power source failure 6. 
E-1229 Lens control sensor (lens home) Home position is not detected when driven
abnormality detected. toward home position for 3000pulse.
Call technical representative. (Cause)
1. Lens home position sensor(D105) 1. 

malfunction  (See subsection 7.3.4)

2. Lens motor(M102) malfunction 2. 
3. Lens, lens drive mechanism failure 3. Check if drive is smooth, if not, replace
lens or drive section. (See subsection
13.2.4, 13.2.5)

malfunction 

E-1230 Shutter control sensor (home) abnormality Shutter home position sensor does not
detected. work when driven for 1000pulse.
1. Shutter home position sensor(D107) 1. 

malfunction  (See subsection 7.3.4)

2. Shutter motor(M103) malfunction 2. 
3. Shutter unit mechanism failure 3. Remove shutter unit, and check if drive
is smooth, if not, replace CCD unit.

malfunction 

6. Main power source failure. 6. 
7-11
7.2 Messages

E-1231 Light source aperture control sensor Light source aperture home position
(home) abnormality detected. sensor(D201) and light source aperture
Call technical representative. sensor(D203) do not work, when driven
toward home position for 150pulse.
(Cause)
1. Light source aperture home position 1. 

sensor(D201) and light source aperture 
waiting sensor(D203) malfunction 

2. Light source aperture motor(M201) 2. 
malfunction
3. Filter unit mechanism failure 3. Check if aperture plate is smoothly
driven, if not, replace the parts. (See
section 12.2)

malfunction 
7 6. Main power source failure 6. 

E-1232 Balance filter control sensor (home) Balance filter home position sensor(D202)
abnormality detected. does not work when driven toward home
Call technical representative. position for 2000 pulse.
(Cause)
1. Balance filter home position 1. 

sensor(D202) malfunction  (See subsection 7.3.4)

2. Balance filter motor(M202) malfunction 2. 
3. Balance filter mechanism failure 3. Check if balance filter is smoothly
driven, if not, replace balance filter
bracket. (See subsection 12.2.2)

malfunction 

E-1233 Error occurred in slider control sensor Home position sensor(D485) does not
(home position). Call technical work when slide table of MFC10Y is
representative. driven.
(Cause)
1. Plug-in connector’s connection error 

2. Connector’s connection error or 

harness disconnection in carrier. 

3. Slide table home position sensor(D485) 

failure  (See subsection 7.3.2)

4. Slide table drive motor(M480), motor 

drive circuit board malfunction 

5. CYA20 circuit board malfunction 

E-1234 Film nip control sensor (home) Nip home position sensor(D407) is not
abnormality detected. turned ON when driven for 3144pulse
Call technical representative. when initializing NC135Y soft nip drive
motor(M401).
(Cause)
1. Plug-in connector’s connection error 1. 

2. Connector’s connection error harness 2. 
disconnection in carrier. 

3. Nip home position sensor(D407) failure 3. 
4. Rupture or loosened of drive belt 4. Replace belt, or adjust tension.
5. Soft nip drive motor malfunction due to 5. Apply grease to soft nip cam.
the load
6. Soft nip motor(M401) failure 6. 
8. CTB20 circuit board malfunction 8. (See subsection 7.3.4)
9. Tripped CP604 on DC power supply 9.Repair short circuit and depress white
button on CP604.
10.Tripped CP103 on PWR20 circuit 10.Repair short circuit and depress white
board button on CP103.
7-12
7.2 Messages

E-1235 Variable negative mask control sensor Home position sensor is not turned ON/
(home) abnormality detected. OFF when installing NC135Y carrier.
1. Film mask drive motor(M403) 1. Correct interference.
malfunction by interference.
2. Mask rack and pinion gear malfunction 2. 

 Replace variable film mask. (See
(See subsection 11.2.5)  subsection 11.2.6)

harness disconnection 
4. CYB20 circuit board malfunction 4. (See subsection 7.3.2)
E-1236 Cartridge door control sensor (home) Door open/close sensor(D441) remains
abnormality detected. “closed” when driven toward door “open”
Call technical representative. for 536pulse with NC240Y.
(Cause)
1. Door open/close motor(M441) screw(s) 1. Tighten screw(s).
loosened.
7

harness disconnection 

3. Door open/close sensor(D441) failure 3.  (See subsection 7.3.2).

4. Door open/close motor(M441) failure 4. 

6. Door open/close mechanism failure 6. Replace nest section unit. (See
subsection 11.3.30)
button on CP604.
E-1237 Spool control sensor (home) abnormality VEI sensor(D442) does not work when
detected. rotating spool motor(M442) two times.
1. Connector’s connection error or 


2. VEI sensor failure  (See subsection 7.3.2)

3. Chucking sensor(D443) failure 

4. CYC20 circuit board malfunction 
W-1238 Scanning lamp abnormality detected. Lamp power supply voltage fluctuation
Replace lamp. (Cause)
1. Lamp burned out 1. Replace lamp.
2. Incorrect lamp voltage adjustment 2. Adjust lamp voltage. (See subsection
14.1.12)
3. Lamp power source failure 3. Replace lamp power source. (See
subsection 14.1.11)
W-1239 Scanner section temperature too high. Light source section safety
Keep ambient temperature less than thermostat(ST201) burned out.
30°C. (Cause)
1. Air filter in light source section clogged. 1. Clean air filter.
2. light source section cooling air outlet 2. Move printer to reserve enough space
clogged. between the right side of the printer and
wall.
3. light source section suction/exhaust 3. Replace fan.
fan(F302/F303) malfunction
4. Safety thermostat(ST201) failure 4. Replace safety thermostat.
5. Tripped CP103 or CP104 on PWR20 5. Repair short circuit and depress white
circuit board button on CP103.
E-1240 Error occurred in slider drive axis stop Slide table stop sensor(D486) does not
sensor (home position). Call technical work when it is driven for 3mm on
representative. MFC10Y.
Error does not occur when performing I/O
check.
(Cause)
1. Screw(s) securing knob loosened. 1. Tighten screw(s).
2. Slide table stopped by interference. 2. Correct interference.


4. Slide table stop sensor(D486) failure 4.  (See subsection 7.3.2)

5. Slide table feed motor(M480) failure 5. 

button on CP604.
7-13
7.2 Messages

W-1241 Carrier removed. Carrier removed in fine-scanning.
Remove film and re-start from pre- (Cause)
scanning. 1. Carrier not installed. 1. Install carrier.
W-1243 Cartridge reshaped. “2-time installation of re-shaved film”
Process it with strip. detected because interval between TP
and DTP is less than 77.6mm.
(Cause)
1. Re-shaved film installed two times. 1. Process with strip.
2. TPA sensor(D455) failure 2. Carrier I/O or electric system failure.
W-1244 Magnetic verify error occurred. Any truck cannot be read, though data is
Clean magnetic head. written to all 4 trucks on trailer section.
(Cause)
1. Object stuck to magnetic head. 1. Clean magnetic head or replace it.
2. Screw(s) securing magnetic head 2. Tighten screw(s) securing magnetic
7 loosened.
3. Edge follow mechanism of magnetic
head.
3. Replace magnetic head.
head malfunction.
4. Harness disconnection 4. (See subsection 7.3.2)
button on CP601.
W-1245 Carrier cover opened. (Cause)
cover.
removed.
W-1246 Film is too short. Nip of both feed rollers is released. (CTB/
Cannot be scanned at correct frame 135)
position. (Causes of error message)
Remove carrier and remove film. 1. Film too short. 1. Use the MFC10Y carrier.
2. Fouled or faulty D401, D403 or D405 2. Clean or replace the sensor.
sensor.
3. Faulty CYB20 circuit board. 3. Replace the CYB20 circuit board or film
carrier.
E-1247 Carrier EEPROM data abnormal. CTB detects abnormal machine data
Consult technical representative. memorized in CYB20 circuit board.
(Cause)
1. Carrier is reset during machine data 1. Download data in menu 44P “Film
writing. Carrier ID Setup/Delete”.
2. Faulty CYB20 or CYC20 circuit board 2. Replace circuit board.
W-1248 Wrong carrier installed. NC135AG or NC240AG carrier has been Install NC135Y or NC240Y carrier.
installed.
W-1254 Initializing of carrier failed. Slider locking has been detected when
initializing the carrier.
(Cause)
1. Poor carrier connection 1. Remove the carrier and reinstall it.
2. Foreign matter on slider guide shaft 2. Remove foreign matter.
3. Open or short circuit between the CN1 3. Repair or replace the harness.
on the SNS circuit board and the CYD6
on the CYD20 circuit board
4. Faulty slider home position sensor 4. Replace the D423.
(D423)
5. Open or short circuit between the CYD8 5. Repair or replace the harness.
on the CYD20 circuit board and the
CN2 on the motor driver
6, Faulty slider feed motor (M421) 6. Replace the M421.
7. Faulty motor driver 7. Replace the motor driver.
8. Faulty CYD20 circuit board 8. Replace the CYD20 circuit board.
7-14
7.2 Messages

W-1255 Feeding motor or feeding drive clutch The mount loader has not moved from its
malfunctions. original position.
Remove carrier and then reinstall it. (Cause)
3. Faulty feed clutch home position sensor 3. Replace the D421.
CN12 of the feed drive clutch (S420)
5. Faulty feed drive clutch (S420) 5. Replace the S420.
CN11 of the feed motor (M420)
7. Faulty feed motor (M420) 7. Replace the M420.
8. Faulty CYD20 circuit board 8. ReplaceCYD20 circuit board. 7
W-1256 Mount feeding error occurred. The mount has jammed before it reaches
Remove carrier and then remove mount. the mount position sensor (D424).
(Cause)
1. Jammed mount 1. Remove the carrier and then the mount.
3. Faulty mount position sensor (D424) 3. Replace the D424.
6. Faulty CYD20 circuit board. 6. Replace the CYD20 circuit board.
7. Loose or broken feed drive belt 7. Replace the belt.
W-1257 Mount feeding error occurred. The mount has jammed while it passes
Remove carrier and then remove mount. the mount position sensor (D24).
(Cause)
1. Jammed mount 1. Jammed mount
2. Open or short circuit between the CN1 2. Open or short circuit between the CN1
on the SNS circuit board and the CYD6 on the SNS circuit board and the CYD6
on the CYD20 circuit board on the CYD20 circuit board
3. Faulty mount position sensor (D424) 3. Faulty mount position sensor (D424)
4. Open or short circuit between the CYD9 4. Open or short circuit between the CYD9
on the CYD20 circuit board and the on the CYD20 circuit board and the
CN11 of the feed motor (M420) CN1 of the feed motor (M420)
5. Faulty feed motor (M420) 5. Faulty feed motor (M420)
6. Faulty CYD20 circuit board. 6. Faulty CYD20 circuit board.
7. Loose or broken feed drive belt 7. Loose or broken feed drive belt
W-1260 Mount remains in carrier. When the mount left in the carrier is
Remove carrier and then remove mount. removed for initialization, it has jammed
before reaching the mount position sensor
(D424).
(Cause)
7-15
7.2 Messages

W-1262 Mount remains in carrier. When the mount left in the carrier is
Remove carrier and then remove mount. removed for initialization, it has jammed
while passing the mount position sensor
(D424).
(Cause)
7 W-1263 Mount exit error occurred. The mount has jammed in the exit guide.
Remove carrier and then remove mount. (Cause)
CN10 of the mount exit motor (M422)
5. Faulty mount exit motor (M422) 5. Replace the M422.
7. Loose or broken exit drive belt 7. Replace the belt.
W-1264 Slider driving motor abnormal. Slider drive motor locking has been
Remove carrier and then reinstall it. detected.
(Cause)
2. Foreign matter on slider guide shaft 2. Remove foreign matter.
4. Faulty slider home position sensor 4. Replace the D423.
(D423)
CN2 on the motor driver
6, Faulty slider feed motor (M421) 6. Replace the M421.
7. Faulty motor driver 7. Replace the motor driver.
W-1265 Mount remains in carrier. A sensor (feed sensor, mount position
Remove carrier and then remove mount. sensor, or mount exit sensor) detects a
mount remaining in the carrier when
initializing the carrier.
(Cause)
2. Dusty feed sensor (D422) 2. Clean the sensor.
4. Faulty feed sensor (D422) 4. Replace the D422.
6. Faulty mount exit sensor (D425) 6. Replace the D425.
7-16
7.2 Messages

W-1267 Feeding motor or feeding drive clutch The mount loader cannot be moved to its
malfunctions. original position.
Remove carrier and then reinstall it. (Cause)
1. The START key is pressed when the 1. Remove the carrier and reinstall it.
mount loader is not in the home
position.
4. Faulty feed clutch home position sensor 4. Replace the D421.
(D421)
CN12 on the feed drive clutch (S420)
6 Faulty feed drive clutch (S420) 6. Replace the S420.
7. Open or short circuit between the CYD9 7. Repair or replace the harness. 7
CN11 on the feed motor (M420)
W-1268 Mount(s) not found. No mounts are set when the [Enter] key is
Set mount(s). pressed to pre-scan a mount.
(Cause)
1. No mount 1. Set mounts.
2. Dusty feed sensor (D422) 2. Clean the D422.
4. Faulty feed sensor (D422) 4. Replace the D422.
CN11 on the feed motor (M420)
E-1304 Image processing section malfunction. Signal not activated within about 100µ
Consult technical GFM-MMU after image sending command is
representative. transferred to GFM20 circuit board.
(Cause)
1. Connection error or disconnection 1. Connect connector or harness correctly
between GFM20 and GMB20 circuit or check and repair or replace if
boards necessary.
2. GFM20 circuit board malfunction 2. Replace GFM20 circuit board.
3. GMB20 circuit board malfunction 3. Replace GMB20 circuit board.
E-1308 Image processing section malfunction. Signal not activated within about 100µ
Consult technical GIP-MMU after image sending command is
representative. transferred to GIP20 circuit board.
(Cause)
between GIP20 and GMB20 circuit or check and repair or replace if
boards necessary.
2. GIP20 circuit board malfunction 2. Replace GIP20 circuit board.
E-1318 Image processing section malfunction. Mode switching not completed within
Consult technical GLO-GIBrepresentative. about 50µ after the command to switch
memory mode is sent to overlay memory
controller on GLO20 circuit board.
(Cause)
between GLO20 and GMB20 circuit or check and repair or replace if
boards necessary.
2. GLO20 circuit board malfunction 2. Replace GLO20 circuit board.
NOTE: Check if the font print is properly
printed using the cartridge with date/
time data.
7-17
7.2 Messages

W-1404 Carrier not installed. (Cause)
Install carrier and perform pre-scan. 1. Carrier not installed. 1. Install carrier.
W-1405 MFC mask not installed. Mask not detected by mask sensor circuit
Install mask and perform pre-scan. board 1 to 5(D480 to D484) on MFC10Y.
(Cause)
1. Mask installed incorrectly. 1. Install mask correctly.
2. Both 135M and 240M buttons set to the 2. Remove button of the type not to be
mount mask simultaneously. used.


4. Sensor circuit board MSB20(D480 to 4. 
D484) failure 

W-1406 %MAGAZINE% not installed or paper end Magazine is not installed.
7 processing in progress. After green LED
lights on magazine section door, install
(Cause)
1. Magazine not installed. 1. Install magazine.
magazine and restart printing. 2. ID chip not installed. 2. Install ID chip.
3. Upper/lower magazine ID sensor(D500 3. Replace upper/lower magazine ID
to D504/D520 to D524) malfunction sensor(D500 to D504/D520 to D524).
4. Magazine abnormal 4. Replace magazine
W-1407 When selecting “Auto”, the magazine Printing size width and magazine paper
corresponding to the selected print size mismatch.
must be installed on the upper or lower (Cause)
magazine table. 1. Print size and magazine mismatched. 1. Install correct magazine, or change
Press [OK] to change magazine, or print size.
change print size. 2. Upper/lower magazine ID sensor(D500 2. Replace upper/lower magazine ID
W-1408 Back print cannot be performed with Back printing is specified with medium
specified paper. Press [Continue] to weight paper.
perform printing without back print. Magazine with postcard ID installed.
(Cause)
1. Wrong magazine installed or incorrect 1. Install correct magazine, change mode
print mode. to postcard print.
2. Upper/lower magazine ID sensor(D500 2. Replace upper/lower magazine
W-1410 Error occurred during the auto correction. Error occurred during auto setup.
Perform pre-scan again. (Cause)
1. Software failure 1. Restart system, and if problem persists,
reinstall system software.
2. Hard disk malfunction. 2. 
 Replace main control unit.
3. Main control unit malfunction. 3. 
W-1411 Error occurred during the auto correction. Error occurred during auto setup.
Perform pre-scan again. (Cause)
1. Software failure 1. Restart system, and if problem persists,
2. Faulty GIS20 circuit board 2. Replace GIS20 circuit board.
W-1413 Magnification too high. Printing magnification exceeds the
—
specified range.
I-1414 To obtain the best print quality, stabilize Specified time has not passed after
scanning lamp. Please wait. (Takes scanner lamp lights. —
max.10 min)
I-1415 Monitoring cancelled due to error. Error occurred in monitoring. Process
Printing may be cancelled with some cannot be continued any more.
—
frames.
Confirm print results.
I-1416 Scanner is being corrected. Performing scanner correction.
—
Please wait!
7-18
7.2 Messages

W-1417 Error occurred while creating monitoring Error occurred during auto setup.
images. (Cause)
Perform pre-scan again. 1. Software failure 1. Restart system, and if problem persists,
W-1418 %MAGAZINE% not installed or processing Magazine is not installed during the index
paper. After green LED lights on magazine format inconsistency check.
section door, install magazine and restart (Cause)
printing. 1. Magazine not installed. 1. Install magazine.
2. Magazine ID chip not installed. 2. Install ID chip.
to D504/D520 to D524) malfunction. sensor(D500 to D504/D520 to D524)
W-1419 Width of index format and paper width of Paper width mismatch occurred during the
magazine do not match. Press [OK] to
change magazine, or change index format
index format inconsistency check.
(Cause)
7
width. If you press [Continue], index print 1. Index format and magazine 1. Install correct magazine, or change
will not be properly printed. mismatched. index format.
to D504/D520 to D524) malfunction. sensor(D500 to D504/D520 to D524)
I-1420 Post-operational check has not started Post-operational check was started while
because printer is still processing another in printing in printer. —
job.
I-1421 Post-operation check has not started due NG is received from printer at the start-up
—
to error in printer. of the post-operational check.
W-1422 Connection with printer failed. “No response” is received from printer at
the start-up of the post-operational check.
(Cause)
1. Connection error or disconnection of 1. Connect cable correctly, or replace it.
1394(interface) cable or grounding wire.
2. FMA20 circuit board malfunction 2. Replace FMA20 circuit board.
3. GLO20 circuit board malfunction 3. Replace GLO20 circuit board.
4. CTL20 circuit board malfunction 4. Replace CTL20 circuit board.
E-1423 Downloading image processing section GMB downloading failed at the system
program failed. start-up.
Restart the system. (Cause)
1. GMB20 circuit board power failure 1. Inspect or repair electric system on
GMB20 circuit board.
2. SCSI cable connection error or 2. Connect SCSI cable correctly or
disconnection replace it.
3. System software failure 3. Reinstall system software.
4. GIS20 circuit board malfunction 4. Check connection and replace GIS20
circuit board.
5. GMB20 circuit board malfunction 5. Check connection and replace GMB20
circuit board.
6. Main control unit failure 6. Replace main control unit.
E-1424 Downloading carrier program failed. Downloading of GMB circuit board has
Restart the system. been failed during starting up.
(Cause)
1. Faulty power supply of GMB20 circuit 1. Inspect and repair power supply line on
board GMB20 circuit board.
2. Loose connection of SCSI cable 2. Connect SCSI cable correctly or
replace the cable.
3. Abnormal system software 3. Reinstall the system software.
4. Faulty GIS20 circuit board 4. Inspect GIS20 circuit board connection
or replace the circuit board.
5. Faulty GMB20 circuit board 5. Inspect GMB20 circuit board connection
7. Faulty main control unit 7. Replace main control unit.
7-19
7.2 Messages

E-1425 Printer initialization failed. (Cause)
Call technical representative. 1. Faulty power supply on GMB20 circuit 1. Inspect and repair power supply on
Press [End] to shut down the system. board GMB20 circuit board.
Press [S-alone] to perform scanner stand- 2. Poor connection of SCSI cable 2. Connect SCSI cable correctly or
alone operation at next start-up. replace the cable.
3. Abnormal system software 3. Reinstall system software.
4. Faulty GIS20 circuit board 4. Inspect GIS20 circuit board connection
5. Faulty GMB20 circuit board 5. Inspect GMB20 circuit board connection
6. Tripped F1 on GLO20 circuit board 6. 

7. Tripped CP1 on FMA20 circuit board 7. 
 Repair short circuit and depress white

 button on circuit protector..
8. Tripped CP1 on PAC20 circuit board 8. 

9. Tripped NFB3 or NFB4 on DC power 9. 
supply
7 10.Faulty main control unit 10.Replace main control unit
W-1426 Remote printer operation failed. Confirm Printer’s remote power ON failed at the
printer’s breaker is ON, and press [Retry]. system start-up.
(Cause)
1. Printer built-in breaker OFF 1. Turn ON printer built-in breaker.
2. 1394(interface cable) connection error 2. Connect 1394 cable correctly or replace
or disconnection it.
3. Disconnection between FMC20 circuit 3. Connect harness correctly or repair or
board and CTL20 circuit board replace.
4. FMC20 circuit board malfunction 4. Replace FMC20 circuit board.
W-1427 Connection with printer failed. After Error returned when the printer status
connection is established, click [Retry]. notice registering command is issued at
start-up.
(Cause)
1. Connection error or disconnection of 1. Connect 1394 cable correctly or replace
1394(interface) cable or grounding wire. it.
2. System software failure 2. Restart system, and if problem persists,
W-1428 Connection with printer failed. After Error returned when the magazine status
connection is established, click [Retry]. retrieving command is issued to printer at
start-up.
(Cause)
1. Connection error or disconnection of 1. Connect 1394 cable correctly or replace
1394(interface) cable or grounding wire. it.
W-1429 Carrier cover open. Carrier cover is opened.
Close cover and perform pre-scan. (Cause)
cover.
removed.
W-1430 Light source cover open. Light cover is opened.
Close cover and perform pre-scan. (Cause)
1. Light source section cover opened. 1. Close light source section cover.
2. light source section cover interlock 2. (See subsection 7.3.1)
switch abnormal
W-1431 Software error. NG occurred during the acquisition of the
Re-start scanner and printer. resource manager’s parameter set.
(Cause)
7-20
7.2 Messages

E-1432 Communication error occurred between SCSI error occurred in transferring image
main controller and image processor processing condition into GMB20 circuit
(Sending parameter failed). board.
1. SCSI cable connection error or 1. Connect cable correctly, or replace it.
disconnection
2. System software abnormal 2. Restart system, and if problem persists,
3. Connection error or malfunction of 3. Inspect connection of GIS20 circuit
GIS20 circuit board board or replace it.
4. Connection error or malfunction of 4. Inspect connection of GMB20 circuit
GMB20 circuit board board or replace it.
E-1433 Communication error occurred between SCSI communication error occurred in
main controller and image processor transferring image process start command
(Image processing control failed).
Call technical representative.
into GMB20 circuit board.
(Cause)
7
disconnection
4. Connection error or malfunction of 4. Check connection of each circuit board,
GFM20, GIP20, GLO20, CDS20, or or replace it.
GMB20 circuit board
E-1434 Communication error occurred between SCSI error occurred in receiving image
main controller and image processor process result command from GMB20
(Image processing circuit board circuit board.
malfunction). (Cause)
Call technical representative. 1. 1394(interface cable) connection error 1. 

or disconnection  Connect cable correctly, or replace it.

2. SCSI cable connection error or 2. 
disconnection
4. Connection error or malfunction of 4. 

GFM20, GIP20,GLO20,GIS20,or  Check connection of each circuit

GMB20 circuit board  board or replace it.

5. Connection error or malfunction of 5. 
FMA20 or FMC20 circuit board
E-1435 Error occurred in transferring image from Image receiving time-out noticed in
scanner to printer. transferring print status.
1. 1394(interface cable) connection error 1. Connect cable correctly, or replace it.
or disconnection
2. System software abnormal 2. 
 Restart system, and if problem

 persists, reinstall system software.
GIO20 circuit board
 Check connection of each circuit
FMA20 or FMC20 circuit board 
 board or replace it.
CTL20 circuit board
W-1436 Software error. Error occurred during index frame image
Re-start scanner and printer. editing.
(Cause)
7-21
7.2 Messages

W-1437 Magnification is too high. Scanning condition calculating NG
Remove film, set “Q’ty for index printing” (Cause)
to zero, and perform printing. 1. “Index ON” while high-magnification is 1. Set index to “0”.
selected.
2. Too high magnification is selected with 2. Change “Index ON” print size.
“Index ON”.
3. Dusty reflector 3. Clean reflector.
4. Deteriorated print lamp 4. Replace print lamp.
W-1438 Software error. NG occurred in acquiring HW parameter
Re-start scanner and printer. from SIP.
(Cause)
W-1439 Software error. SIP’s index print image creation NG
7 Re-start scanner and printer. (Cause)
W-1440 Software error. SIP’s index print image acquisition NG
Re-start scanner and printer. (Cause)
W-1441 Software error. NG occurred in acquiring parameter set
Re-start scanner and printer. from resource manager.
(Cause)
W-1442 Software error. Error occurred at the JOB list start-up
Re-start scanner and printer. (DoFineIp_xxx).
(Cause)
E-1443 Communication error occurred between SCSI error occurred in transferring image
main controller and image processor process condition and image process start
(Parameter setting error). commands into GMB20 circuit board
Call technical representative. during file print such as index print or DSC
print.
(Cause)
disconnection
W-1445 Normal pre-scanning was not performed. SCSI communication error occurred in
Re-try pre-scanning. transferring image process condition and
image process start commands into
GMB20 circuit board during pre-scan.
(Cause)
disconnection
7-22
7.2 Messages

W-1446 Error occurred while retrieving parameters Error occurred in acquiring scan
from image processing module. Press parameter from SIP during the
[Scan Cancel] and retry pre-scanning. consistency check.
(Cause)
W-1447 FID cannot be read. Press [Cancel] to FID reading error
rewind film. Check CID, and install film (Cause)
again. 1. Film fogged. 1. Print with MFC10Y.
2. CCD unit system abnormal 2. (See subsection 7.3.3)
W-1448 Back printer not installed. Back printer installed incorrectly.
Install back printer properly. (Cause)
1. Incorrect back print setting position 1. Install back printer correctly.
2. Connection error or disconnection 2. Repair harness or replace it.
between back print setting
sensor(D544) and PDC16 connector on
7
PDC20 circuit board.
3. Back print setting sensor(D544) failure 3. Replace sensor.
4. PDC20 circuit board malfunction 4. Replace PDC20 circuit board.
W-1449 No valid frame has been detected during Number of detected frame was zero
frame detection. during frame detection.
Re-try pre-scanning. (Cause)
1. Optical path interrupted during bright 1. Perform scanner correction at pre-
correction at pre-operational check operational check.
2. Lamp burned out. 2. Replace lamp.
3. CCD unit system abnormal 3. (See subsection 7.3.3)
W-1450 Error occurred while reading magnetic Magnetic information reading error
information. (Cause)
Clean magnetic head and perform pre- 1. Pressure cover not closed completely. 1. Close cover.
scan again. 2. Dust or debris collect on the magnetic 2. Clean or replace magnetic head.
head.

harness disconnection in carrier. 

4. MRH90(read head) circuit board 4.  (See subsection 7.3.2)

malfunction 

I-1451 Negative is inserted upside down. Take 135 film reverse insertion
—
out negative, and reinstall it correctly.
I-1453 Film bar-code cannot be read. 135 bar-code reading error
—
Continue processing.
I-1455 Abnormal magnetic information on film. Magnetic information contents error.
Perform printing without magnetic —
information.
W-1461 Reading digital image file failed. Filed print image cannot be obtained from 1. Check the image file and file format of
Digital image print cancelled. the Imaging Controller. the Imaging Controller.
2. Restart the Imaging Controller.
W-1462 Digital image processing error. There is contradiction in image file format 1. Restart the Imaging Controller.
Printing digital image cancelled. File of the Imaging Controller. 2. Replace the hard disk in the Imaging
format incorrect. Controller.
I-1466 Move slider to diffusion plate cleaning Diffusion plate is cleaned before scanner
position? correction of MFC10Y. —
Press [SKIP] to start scanner correction.
I-1467 Moving slider to diffusion plate cleaning Moving diffusion plate to cleaning position
position. is in progress. —
Do not touch slider.
W-1468 Mask type incorrectly detected. Mask type of MFC10Y is incorrect.
Re-install film mask. (Causes of error message)
1. Incorrect or improperly installed mask. 1. Install correct mask properly.
2. Faulty mask sensor. 2. Replace the sensor.
W-1471 Image file cannot be generated. Image file for digital image export cannot 1. Divide the Imaging Controller order and
External output cancelled. be created due to Frontier disk full, etc. retry.
2. Restart the Frontier.
7-23
7.2 Messages

E-1472 Communication error occurred between Printing status notification time-out occurs
scanner and printer. while “Image transfer OK” is received from
Call technical representative. GMC.
(Causes of error message)
1. (See E-2102.) 1. (See E-2102.)
2. W-2108 occurs concurrently. 2. (See W-2108.)
W-1473 Incorrect template. Composite format to the extended SIP
Consult technical representative. failed.
1. Frontier D-drive full. 1. Delete all templates and re-register
them.
2. Faulty Frontier hard disk. 2. Replace the main control unit.
W-1474 Magnification too high. Scanning condition calculation results in 1. Change the print size or pixel size.
Lower the magnification by changing print/ NG. 2. Decrease magnification using cropping
pixel size or cropping. function.
7 I-1476 Film with FTPM loaded. Film with FTPM is loaded.
—
Perform printing with FTPM.
I-1477 “Series Scene” film loaded. Film with Series Scene is loaded. —
W-1478 “Series Scene” magnetic information “Series Scene” magnetic information is
incorrect. incorrect. —
Process continued.
W-1479 Template image size does not match print Template and print sizes specified in
size. frame/character print do not match.
Confirm print size and template size. (Causes of error message)
1. Print size does not match template. 1. Change the print size or template.
2. Faulty magazine ID sensors (D500 to 2. Replace the sensor.
D504).
W-1480 Cannot be printed with this cropping. Specified cropping area is out of the
Re-crop within the image area. range.
1. Image becomes larger than the printing 1. Move or reduce the image.
frame when the image is rotated in free
cropping.
E-1481 Hard disk failure occurred during the data Hard disk error is detected in data copy
copy. process during post-operational check.
Copying data cancelled. Consult technical (Causes of error message)
representative. 1. Abnormal system software. 1. Restart the system. If the error recurs,
2. Faulty main control unit. 2. Replace the main control unit.
E-1482 Hard disk failure occurred. Hard disk fault is detected when file is
Consult technical representative. imported from or exported to the Imaging
Controller.
1. Faulty hard disk in main control unit. 1. Replace the main control unit.
E-1483 Index image data cannot be read. Image data file cannot be read out when
Consult technical representative. editing index print.
1. Faulty Frontier system software (A1). 1. Reinstall the software.
2. Faulty Frontier hard disk. 2. Replace the main control unit.
W-1484 Printer initialization failed. Printer initialization failed at system start-
Press [S-alone] to perform scanner stand- up.
alone operation at next start-up. (Causes of error message)
1. Printer processor did not start. 1. Start the printer processor.
2. Poor connection of 1394 2. Connect the 1394 cable correctly.
communication cable.
3. Tripped CP1 on FMC20 circuit board 3. 

4. Tripped F1, F3, F4 or F6 on PDC20 4.  Repair short circuit and depress

circuit board  white button on circuit protector.

5.Tripped CP1 on CTL20 circuit board 5. 
6. Poorly connected connector to CTP20 6. Connect the connector correctly.
circuit board.
7. Faulty CTP20 circuit board. 7. Replace the CTP20 circuit board.
W-1485 Couldn’t generate image file due to Image file for digital image export cannot 1. Divide the Imaging Controller order and
insufficient disk space. be created due to Frontier disk full, etc. retry.
2. Restart the Frontier.
7-24
7.2 Messages

W-1486 Writing image file failed. Network connection is down.
1. Loose or poorly connected 1. Connect the communication cable
communication cable. properly.
2. Faulty communication line. 2. Repair or replace the communication
line.
W-1487 Print size and magazine paper width do Print size is not match with paper in Replace magazine or change print size.
not match. magazine.
Press [OK] to change magazine, or
change print size.
Press [Output] to output forcibly.
W-1488 Template width and print width Template width does not match with paper Replace paper magazine.
mismatched. in magazine.
Press [OK] and replace magazine.
Press [Output] to output forcibly. 7
W-1489 Scanner correction not performed Scanner correction or diffusion plate
because the mask for MFC is installed. cleaning cannot be performed because
Remove the mask and press [OK]. the mask for MFC10Y is installed.
1. The mask for MFC10Y is installed. 1. Remove the mask.
2. Faulty film mask sensors (D480 to 2. Replace the sensor.
D484).
3. Short-circuited harness in the carrier. 3. Repair or replace the harness.
4. Faulty CYA20 circuit board. 4. Replace the CYA20 circuit board.
I-1490 Prepare for the diffusion plate cleaning. Clean the diffusion plate before the
Press [Clean] to move the slider to the scanner correction of MFC10Y.
cleaning position —
Press [Skip] to perform the scanner
correction.
I-1491 Clean the diffusion plate. Film slider on MFC10Y has reached the
—
Upon completion of cleaning, press [End]. diffusion plate cleaning position.
W-1492 Carrier not installed. Carrier is not installed.
Install carrier and press [OK]. (Causes of error message)
1. Carrier is not installed. 1. Install the carrier.
2. Faulty carrier I/O or electric system. 2. (See subsection 5.3.2)
I-1493 Setting up the correction table. Correction table setup is in progress
—
Wait for a moment. because the current table is different.
W-1494 An error occurred in calling the exposure An error occurred in calling the exposure Because the exposure condition retrieve
condition retrieve. condition retrieve. cannot be performed, determine the
Return to the state just after the pre-scan. exposure condition referring to the back
print.
W-1495 Auto is currently selected. Paper types (emulsion types or surface Replace magazine so that upper and
Match the paper types of the upper and types) different between upper and lower lower paper types are same.
lower magazines. magazines regardless of selecting “Auto”
Press [Output] to output forcibly. for “Switch magazine”.
E-1498 Error table item ( ) cannot be Item(s) required for error table not written.
omitted. (Cause)
E-1499 Error table items ( ) are Item(s) required for error table not written.
incorrect. (Cause)
I-1501 Selected function cannot be used. This message appears when selecting an
—
unsupported function.
I-1502 Insert FD. This message prompts you to insert FD
—
during the data backup.
W-1503 FD not inserted. This message appears when FD is not
inserted during the data backup.
(Cause)
1. Floppy disk not set. 1. Insert floppy disk into drive.
2. Floppy disk drive malfunction 2. Replace main control unit.
7-25
7.2 Messages

I-1504 Insert the next FD. This message prompts you to insert a next
—
FD during the data backup.
W-1505 Wrong FD inserted. This message appears when the inserted
Insert correct FD. FD is incorrect.
(Cause)
1. Floppy disk abnormal 1. Insert correct floppy disk into drive.
2. Floppy drive malfunction 2. Replace main control unit.
E-1506 Reading of control information file failed. This message appears when the files
Selected image cannot be displayed. required to display image cannot be read.
(Cause)
I-1507 Data backup completed abnormally. This message appears when data backup
—
fails.
7 I-1508 Cancel data backup. The data backup processing is cancelled
—
with operator’s instruction.
W-1509 Not enough free space on hard disk. This message appears when the free
Unnecessary files have been deleted. space on the hard disk(D:\) for application
—
becomes less than the specified
amount(100MB) at the start-up.
W-1510 Date value exceeds the limit. Set date value exceeds the limit.
(1998/01/01 00:00:00 - 2100/12/31 (Cause)
23:59:59) 1. Current date/time entry error 1. Enter correct date/time.
W-1511 Next timer-ON time exceeds the limit. Next timer-ON time exceeds the limit. Set
(1998/01/01 00:00:00 - 2100/12/31 time value must be changed.
23:59:59) (Cause)
Confirm the present time. 1. Current date/time entry error 1. Enter correct date/time.
W-1512 Insufficient FD free space. Inserted FD is full.
Insert correct FD. (Causes of error message)
1. Inserted floppy disk is full. 1. Insert a blank disk.
2. Faulty floppy disk drive. 2. Replace the main control unit.
W-1513 Unsorted print remains. Unsorted prints remain after printing. Press [Sort].
Perform sorting.
W-1521 PU800B is not turned ON or is Communication error occurred in
disconnected. downloading from PU800B.
Check the connection with PU800B. (Cause)
Press [Re-try] to re-try or [Cancel] to 1. PU800B turned OFF 1. Turn ON PU800B.
cancel. 2. Connection error or disconnection of 2. Connect cable correctly, or replace it.
PU800B communication cable
W-1522 PU800B is not turned ON or is Communication error occurred in
disconnected. uploading to PU800B.
Check the connection with PU800B. (Cause)
Press [Re-try] to re-try or [Cancel] to 1. PU800B turned OFF 1. Turn ON PU800B.
cancel. 2. Connection error or disconnection of 2. Connect cable correctly, or replace it.
PU800B communication cable
W-1523 Pricing unit is not turned ON or is Communication error occurred in sending
disconnected. PU800B bill.
Check the connection with PU800B. Press (Cause)
[Re-try] to re-try. 1. PU800B turned OFF 1. Turn ON PU800B.
Press [Cancel] to cancel or [Stop] to stop 2. Connection error or disconnection of 2. Connect cable correctly, or replace it.
printing invoices. PU800B communication cable
W-1524 Backup data for PU800B cannot be read. File reading error occurred in downloading
from PU800B.
(Cause)
7-26
7.2 Messages

W-1525 Backup data for PU800B cannot be File writing error occurred in uploading to
written. PU800B.
(Cause)
W-1527 Production information not written into file. Error occurred in writing production
information log file.
(Cause)
E-1530 F-DI device registration failed. Error in registering F-DIA logical output
Consult technical representative. devices (cannot be recovered)
1. Use of limited character
(^¥@[;:],./!"#$%&'()=~|`{+*}><?)
1. Remove limited characters. 7
in menu 41I “DI manager Administrative
Setting” or 424 “Print Size Setup”.
2. Faulty Imaging Controller software. 2. Restart the Imaging Controller. If the
trouble is not remedied, reinstall the
software.
W-1531 F-DI device registration failed. Error in registering F-DIA logical output
Check the network connections. Press devices. (can be recovered)
[Retry] to re-try or [Cancel] to cancel. (Causes of error message)
1. Imaging Controller did not start. 1. Start the Imaging Controller.
2. Poorly connected LAN cable. 2. Connect the LAN cable correctly.
3. Faulty Imaging Controller software. 3. Reinstall the software.
4. Faulty main control unit for Imaging 4. Replace the main control unit.
Controller.
W-1532 Registration to F-DI not performed. Error occurred when registering F-DIA Perform pre-operational check.
To complete registration, perform pre- logical output device.
operational check.
W-1533 Stopping the image file output. Printing of the Digital Image Import has Re-try Digital Image Import.
Resume printing by selecting “Digital failed.
Image” as “Input Device”.
W-1534 Order not unlocked. Communication from the Imaging
Check the network connections. Controller has been down when
processing the order with the Frontier.
2. Faulty Imaging Controller software. 2. Restart or reinstall the Imaging
Controller software.
W-1535 Cannot be serviced. Communication from the Imaging
E-1536 Cannot be serviced. Inappropriate status, no device authority.
Consult technical representative. (Causes of error message)
E-1537 Cannot be serviced. Other errors in F-DIA.
Consult technical representative. (Causes of error message)
W-1538 F-DI registration not performed. Pre-operational Check has not been Perform the pre-operational check.
To complete registration, perform the pre- performed.
operational check.
E-1539 Cannot be serviced. The order is already in the “Delete
Consult technical representative. Waiting” state.
7-27
7.2 Messages

I-1540 No order can be printed with the selected No order can be printed with the lab-in.
—
paper width.
W-1541 Print service not performed. Communication from the Imaging
W-1542 Print service not performed. Error caused by status change during
Check the network connections. normal printing.
7 W-1543 Print service not performed. Error caused by status change during
Check the network connections. abnormal printing.
W-1544 Print service not performed. Error caused by notice of the completion
Check the network connections. of 1-order printing.
W-1545 Print service not performed. Error at the time of order deletion.
Check the network connections. (Causes of error message)
W-1546 Print service not performed. Error caused by status change when no
Check the network connections. order is read.
W-1547 Print service not performed. Error caused by reading order.
Check the network connections. (Causes of error message)
W-1548 Printer not in standby. Error occurred while receiving image file
Press [Retry] to retry digital printing, or printing command.
press [Cancel] to cancel it. (Causes of error message)
1. The printer processor is not in 1. Turn printer to STANDBY and press
STANDBY condition when performing [Retry].
Digital Image Import.
E-1549 Cannot be serviced. Every order except for the one currently
Consult technical representative. being registered is deleted.
E-1551 Dialog cannot be displayed. The function for string resource
Message definition file not found or management returns error while
defective. generating a dialog.
1. Damaged message file. 1. Reinstall the Frontier system software.
2. Faulty hard disk. 2. Replace the main control unit.
7-28
7.2 Messages

E-1552 Cannot start Red-eye/Soft/Cross. Error has occurred when starting Red Eye/
Red-eye/Soft/Cross not found, or any Cross software.
file(s) may be corrupted. (Causes of error message)
2. Faulty Variety Print software (B1). 2. Reinstall the software.
E-1553 Cannot continue Red-eye/Soft/Cross Error has occurred when reading Red
process. Eye/Cross plug-in I/F file.
The files required for Red-eye/Soft/Cross (Causes of error message)
not found, or any file(s) may be corrupted. 1. Faulty Frontier system software (A1). 1. Reinstall the software.
E-1554 Cannot continue Red-eye/Soft/Cross Error has occurred when writing Red Eye/
process. Cross plug-in I/F file.
Cannot create the files required for Red- (Causes of error message)
eye/Soft/Cross. 1. Faulty Frontier system software (A1).
2. Faulty Variety Print software (B1).
1. Reinstall the software.
2. Reinstall the software.
7
E-1555 Cannot continue Red-eye/Soft/Cross Red Eye/Cross plug-in I/F file is incorrect.
process. (Causes of error message)
Data for Red-eye/Soft/Cross process is 1. Faulty Frontier system software (A1). 1. Reinstall the software.
wrong. 2. Faulty Variety Print software (B1). 2. Reinstall the software.
W-1556 This frame cannot be selected. Frame number of mounted print mismatch.
Frame No. to specify template not (Causes of error message)
matched. 1. Large index or template frame number 1. Enter the correct frame number for the
Select other frame. mismatch. template.
2. Frame number reading failed. 2. Reload the film.
I-1557 Characters can be entered in selected
template. — —
Enter characters?
I-1558 Printing the image being composed. — —
W-1560 Creating order failed. This message appears when an order
creation error is detected.
W-1561 Sending order failed. This message appears when an order
sending error is detected.
W-1562 Adding order failed. This message appears when an order
addition error is detected.
W-1563 Deleting order failed. This message appears when an order
deletion error is detected.
I-1564 Printing external file. Wait! Image file export is in progress. —
W-1565 Registering device into F-DI failed. F-DIA logical device registration error.
Press [Retry] to retry or [Cancel] to cancel. (Causes of error message)
W-1566 Pre-scan not performed, because image Pre-scanning is attempted when an image Wait until present processing completes.
file is being output. file is being exported.
Eject film.
7-29
7.2 Messages

W-1567 Digitizing cannot be performed with MFC. Digitizing is attempted with MFC10Y Replace MFC10Y with Auto Film Carrier.
Replace MFC with AFC. installed.
W-1568 Exceeds the available times of scanning. Scanning direction for one film exceeds
Press [Sort] key to feed out film, and then the available (99) times. —
insert film into carrier again.
E-1571 Message definition file not found or Error occurred when reading string
defective. resource for creating a dialog.
Check message definition file. (Causes of error message)
W-1572 Incorrect font size value. Font size is out of the specified range.
—
Specify 8 to 72 point as font size.
W-1573 Logo or title exceeds area. Input characters exceed character area.
Select smaller font size or reduce number —
of characters.
7 W-1574 Frame with selected No. already mounted. Frame is overwritten because the selected
—
Frame overwritten. frame was already mounted.
W-1575 Pre-scan not performed, because Pre-scan is attempted while setting up a
template is being set up. template. —
Eject film.
W-1580 Editing error log info failed. Error occurred when editing error log For Japan Only
information.
W-1581 Editing working information failed. Error occurred when editing working For Japan Only
information.
W-1582 Editing production information failed. Error occurred when editing production For Japan Only
information.
W-1583 Editing system information failed. Error occurred when editing system For Japan Only
information.
W-1584 Editing quality information failed. Error occurred when editing quality For Japan Only
information.
W-1585 Reading of sending Pre-Maintenance data Error occurred when reading sent data. For Japan Only
failed.
Stop sending Pre-Maintenance data.
W-1586 Service to be exported not selected. Pre-scanning is attempted while selecting Wait a while and reload the film.
Couldn’t perform pre-scan. Film ejected. service to be exported.
I-1587 Reading print mag. fine adjust data. Data loading from registry is in progress.
—
Wait.
I-1588 Saving print mag. fine adjust data. Data saving to registry is in progress.
—
Wait.
W-1589 Carrier/mask and composite type Pre-scanning is attempted when the
mismatch, so pre-scan not performed. carrier/mask and composite type do not
Film is fed out. match.
1. Incorrect film mask. 1. Install the correct mask.
2. Incorrect template. 2. Select the correct template.
W-1590 RC50D cannot be used with the present Printer process type does not correspond Select correct process type on printer
printer process type. to RC50D. operation panel.
Check printer process type.
W-1591 Frame specified on invoice not detected. Frame specified on invoice is not Check the film.
detected.
W-1592 Frame not detected. Frame is not detected when pre-scanning. Check the film.
I-1593 #### Template setup is in progress.
Wait. —
####
I-1594 Reading service name list. Wait. This message appears while reading the
service name list for image file export/ —
import.
I-1595 Connect to Imaging Controller for updating This message appears when registering
data. logical device. —
Press [OK] to start.
7-30
7.2 Messages

E-1596 Service info cannot be read. FDI error occurred while reading service
Check the network connections. name list.
W-1597 Pre-scan cannot be performed, because Pre-scanning for other than image file
service type is not selected. export is attempted when the scanner is
Feed out the film. doing stand-alone operation.
1. Digital Image Export has not been 1. Select the Digital Image Export.
selected.
I-1598 Processing Red-eye/Soft/Cross ###. Red-eye/Soft/Cross process is in
—
Wait. progress.
E-1599 An error occurred. Cannot continue Red- Error has occurred when starting Red Eye/
eye/Soft/Cross process. Cross plug-in I/F file. 7
Exit Red-eye/Soft/Cross. (Causes of error message)
W-1701 This is the last frame. When the film feed mode is “Manual”, Press [OK] to feed out film, or return to the
Press [OK] to feed out film. [START/ENTER] key is pressed at the previous frame by pressing the frame
final frame of the film. return key.
W-1702 Because the carrier or mask was The carrier or mask is removed while the Install the carrier or mask correctly and
removed, the custom setting information dialog related to the custom setting is then perform the custom setting again.
are not displayed correctly. The related displayed.
dialog(s) closed.
W-1703 The custom setting No. is invalid. Selected custom setting No. is invalid. Print with master settings, or select a
Changed to master settings. correct custom setting No.
W-1705 Because the exposure condition retrieve in A film is inserted while the exposure Re-load the film after the exposure
progress, pre-scan not performed. condition retrieve is in progress. condition retrieve is completed.
Feed out film.
E-1706 This function is not supported. Bordered print size has been selected for Select borderless print size.
mounted print or frame/character print.
E-1710 Templates are not available for the Bordered print size has been selected. Select borderless print size.
bordered print.
Select the borderless print size.
E-1730 Single Scan Digitizing kit is not available. Hardware has not be installed when single
Check hardware configuration. scan digitizing.
(Cause)
1. Improper DIP-switch setting on GMC20 1. Turn on 6 and 7 of SW1 and off the
circuit board. others.
W-1731 Cartridge is removed while Fine-Scan. Feed side cartridge has been removed
Check the output printing and digitizing during fine-scanning.
image. (Cause)
1. Removed feed side cartridge 1. Install the feed side cartridge.
of the cartridge sensor (D420) and the
CYD1 on the CYD20 circuit board
3. Faulty cartridge sensor (D420) 3. Replace the D420.
I-1732 Mount end. There are no mounts for next pre-scanning . Set the next mount if necessary.
I-1733 Optional software for SC135Y is not Pre-scanning has been performed with the Install the optional B6 software
installed. SC135Y carrier before installing the
Install the optional software. optional B6 software.
E-1802 Process is cancelled because an error An error is detected during the setup of Take action to deal with the previous error
occurred during the setup of the scanner the scanner correction table. message, and then perform the setup
correction table. again.
Consult your technical representative.
7-31
7.2 Messages

E-1803 Abnormal flow rate detected in flowmeter. Abnormal flow rate is detected in the
Call technical representative. flowmeter.
1. Faulty cooling fan air flow sensor 1. Replace the sensor.
(D351).
2. Clogged or disconnected air hoses. 2. Clean the air hoses and connect them
correctly.
3. Loose, poorly connected or broken 3. Connect the harness correctly, or repair
harness between CN8 on CTB20 circuit or replace it.
board and cooling fan air flow sensor
(D351), or between D351 and PWR9 on
PWR20 circuit board.
4. Faulty PWR20 circuit board. 4. Replace the PWR20 circuit board.
5. Faulty CTB20 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTB20 circuit board.
6. Faulty compressor (PU351). 6. Replace PU351.
7. Loose, poorly connected or broken 7. Connect the harness correctly, or repair
7 harness between PU351 and PU351 on or replace it.
power supply section.
W-1901 Storing the exposure condition failed. An error occurred while saving exposure
After this, storing the exposure condition condition data.
will not be performed. (Causes of error message)
1. Abnormal system software (A1). 1. Restart the system. If the error recurs,
W-1902 Cannot print because the printer memory Print request cannot be processed Wait until enough memory is reserved.
is full. because the frame memory on the printer
Retry printing when enough memory is is full.
reserved.
W-1903 Cannot output because the image data Frame memory is occupied by image data Wait until enough memory is reserved.
occupy large amounts of memory. because the output process to Imaging
Wait until enough memory is reserved and Controller cannot be performed.
retry again.
E-1904 Single Scan Digitizing kit is not available. Single scan digitize kit cannot be found at
Consult your technical representative. system starting up.
Press [OK] to start operation without (Cause)
Single Scan Digitizing Function. 1. With GMB20 circuit board 1. Replace GMB20 circuit board with
GMC20 circuit board.
2. B1 software malfunction 2. Reinstall B5 software.
I-1905 Mount is inserted incorrectly. 135 mount has been inserted in the Insert the mount correctly, then pre-scan
Insert it correctly and retry. incorrect feed position. it.
I-1906 Mount end. There are no mounts for next pre- Set the next mount if necessary.
scanning.
W-1930 %MAGAZINE% not installed or paper end Paper magazine is not installed. Install the paper magazine.
processing in progress.
After door LED in the magazine section
turns green, install magazine and restart
printing.
W-1931 ### not installed or paper end processing Paper magazine is not detected during the Install the magazine and restart printing.
in progress. index format inconsistency check.
After the door LED in the magazine
section turns green, install magazine and
restart printing.
W-1932 Print size and magazine paper width Print size and paper width do not match. Press [OK] and replace the magazine or
mismatched. select another print size. When [Output] is
Press [OK] to change magazine, or pressed, printing is performed forcibly.
change print size.
W-1933 Magazine paper width and print size of Paper width mismatch is detected during Press [OK] and then replace the magazine
index format mismatched. the index format inconsistency check. or select another index format. When
Press [OK] to replace magazine, or select [Output] is pressed, printing is performed
other index format. forcibly.
If you press [Output], an incorrect index
print will be outputted.
W-1934 Template width and magazine paper width Template size and paper width do not Press [OK] and replace magazine or
mismatched. match. select another template. When [Output] is
Press [OK] and replace magazine. pressed, printing is performed forcibly.
7-32
7.2 Messages

E-2102 Communication error occurred between No response within a specified time after
scanner and printer. (Command time-out) command is issued.

1394(interface) cable or grounding wire.  Connect cable correctly, or replace it.

GLO20 circuit board

FMA20 circuit board  Check connection of each circuit
 board or replace it.
CTL20 circuit board
W-2106 Performing printer maintenance. Setup Uncalibrated magazine is detected at the Quit “Setup and Maintenance” screen, and
printing conditions. printer’s maintenance. perform paper condition setup.
E-2107 Data files not opened. Data files cannot be opened in saving or
Call technical representative. loading.
(Cause)
1. File to save/load corrupted. 1. Reinstall system software.
7
W-2108 Communication error occurred between Sending to printer failed.
scanner and printer. (IEEE1394 (Cause)
communication error: Code No.=###) 1. Printer built-in breaker OFF 1. Turn ON breaker to restart.
Refer to manual for guidance. 2. Connection error or disconnection of 2. Connect cable correctly or replace.
3. Software abnormal 3. Restart system, and if problem persists,
4. FMA20, GLO20, or CTL20 circuit board 4. Replace FMA20, GLO20, or CTL20
malfunction circuit board in this order.
E-2109 Communication error occurred between Sending to printer failed.
scanner and printer. (SCSI communication (Cause)
error: Code No.=###) 1. GMB20 circuit board power failure 1. Inspect or repair electric system on
Consult technical representative. GMB20 circuit board.
2. SCSI cable connection error or 2. Connect SCSI cable correctly or
3. System software failure 3. Reinstall system software.
4. GIS20 circuit board malfunction 4. Check connection and replace GIS20
circuit board.
5. GMB20 circuit board malfunction 5. Check connection and replace GMB20
circuit board.
W-2110 Communication error occurred between Sending to printer failed.
scanner and printer. (communication error: (Cause)
Code No.=###) 1. Printer built-in breaker OFF 1. Turn ON breaker to restart.
Refer to manual for guidance. 2. Connection error or disconnection of 2. Connect cable correctly or replace.
3. Software abnormal 3. Restart system, and if problem persists,
4. Tripped F1 on GLO20 circuit board 4. 

5. Tripped CP1 on FMA20 circuit board 5. 

6. Tripped CP1 on FMC20 circuit board 6. 
 Repair short circuit and depress
7. Tripped NB3 or NB4 on DC power 7. 
 white button on circuit protector.
supply 

8. Tripped CP1 on PAC20 circuit board 8. 
9. FMA20, GLO20, or CTL20 circuit board 9. Replace FMA20, GLO20, or CTL20
malfunction circuit board in this order.
10.Main control unit failure 10.Replace main control unit.
W-2201 Printer switch turned to ON. Printer power switch turned ON at post-
Change switch to STANDBY. operational check.
(Cause)
1. Power switch turned ON 1. Turn power switch to STANDBY.
2. Connection error or disconnection 2. Connect harness correctly or replace it.
between power switch and CTL20 or
PAC20 circuit board
3. Power switch malfunction 3. Replace power switch.
4. PAC20 circuit board malfunction 4. Replace PAC20 circuit board.
7-33
7.2 Messages

E-2301 Request not accepted by printer. Request A printing command is sent from a client
rejected. when the printer is in off-line.
(Cause)
W-2302 Printer is off-line. Request rejected. A printing command is sent from a client
Change printer to online and perform when the printer is in off-line.
operation. (Cause)
1. “Setup and Maintenance” screen 1. Quit “Setup and Maintenance” for
opened. printer.
E-2305 Abnormal printer backup memory.Call SRAM information key is not found.
technical representative. (No problem (Cause)
even if this message appears at the 1. Memory contents are cleared because 1. Download data from floppy disk to
upgrade (reversion) of the printer the period between shipment and printer and recharge during 1 or 2 days.
7 software.) installation is too long.
2. Insufficient recharge of backup battery 2. Recharge during 1 to 2 days
3. Disconnection of JP2 (backup jumper 3. Set JP2 to “ON” position.
pin) on CTL20 circuit board
4. Backup battery failure 4. Replace CTL20 circuit board.
5. Backup circuit on CTL20 circuit board 5. Replace CTL20 circuit board.
malfunction
E-2306 Printer’s timer abnormal. Scanner time Error occurred in reading the time data
adopted. from timer IC at the start-up.
If problems persist, call technical (Cause)
representative. 1. System software failure 1. Restart system, and if problem persists,
2. Backup circuit malfunction 2. 

3. Timer IC failure 3.  Replace CTL20 circuit board.

4. Memory failure 4. 
I-2307 Laser temperature adjustment not Laser temperature adjustment is not
completed in exposure section. completed before printing.
Please wait. (Cause)
1. Warming up not completed. 1. Wait until warming up is completed.
2. Tripped CP801, CP802 or CP803 on 2. Repair short circuit and depress white
LDD20 circuit board button on circuit protector.
I-2308 Temperature in processing tanks is rising. Processing tanks’ temperature do not
—
Please wait. reach the specified values.
I-2309 Initializing printer. Printer is initialized at the post-operational
—
Please wait. check.
I-2310 Printer is processing. Printer is being driving at the post-
—
Please wait. operational check.
7-34
7.2 Messages

W-2401 Paper jam between upper cutter and D541 sensor does not detect paper tip
middle side door section (4). within a specific time after the paper has
Remove paper. been fed from 1st feeding section.
(Cause)
1. Jammed paper remains. 1. Remove paper.
2. Harness connection error or 2. Connect harness correctly, or repair or
1) Connection error or disconnection
between middle side door paper
sensor(D541) and CTL14 on CTL20
circuit board
2) Between upper paper supply
motor(M501) and PDC8 on PDC20
circuit board
3) Between middle side door feed
circuit board 7
4) Between middle side door turn feed
circuit board
3. Tripped F7 on PDC20 circuit board 3. Repair short circuit and depress white
button on circuit protector.
4. D541 malfunction 4. Replace D541.
5. M501, M541 or M540 malfunction 5. Replace M501, M541 or M540.
W-2402 Paper jam between lower cutter and lower D552 sensor does not detect paper tip
side door section (2). within a specific time after the paper has
Remove paper. been fed from 2nd feeding section.
(Cause)
circuit board
2) Between lower paper supply
circuit board
3) Between lower side door feed
circuit board
4) Between lower side door turn feed
circuit board
4. M521, M551 or M550 malfunction 4. Replace M521, M551 or M550
W-2403 Paper jam between lower middle and D541 sensor does not detect paper tip
middle side door sections (4). within a specific time after it is detected by
Remove paper. D552.
(Cause)
circuit board
2) Between middle side paper supply
circuit board
4. M541 malfunction 4. Replace M541.
7-35
7.2 Messages

W-2404 Paper jam between middle side and upper D560 sensor does not detect paper tip
side door sections (5). within a specific time after it is detected by
Remove paper. D541.
(Cause)
between exposure section feed unit
paper sensor(D560) and CTL10 on
CTL20 circuit board
2) Between upper side door speed
adjustment feed motor(M542) and
PDC5 on PDC20 circuit board
3) Between upper side door nip
release motor(M545) and PDC7 on
7 PDC20 circuit board
4. M542 or M545 malfunction 4. Replace M542 or M545.
W-2405 Paper jam between upper side door and D561 sensor does not detect paper tip
exposure section (5). within a specific time after it is detected by
Remove paper. D560.
(Cause)
between exposure section feed unit
CTL20 circuit board
between exposure entrance section
CTL20 circuit board
3) Between exposure section front feed
circuit board
3. D560 or D561 malfunction 3. Replace D560 or D561.
5. Speed adjustment nip drive malfunction 5. See E-2415 if error occurs at
initialization.
6. Pre-exposing nip roller off 6. Replace nip spring or roller unit.
7. Width guide drive malfunction 7. See E-2417 if error occurs at
initialization.
8. Positioning Fork position failure 8. See E-2418 if error occurs at
initialization.
10.CTL20 circuit board malfunction 10.Replace CTL20 circuit board.
7-36
7.2 Messages

W-2406 Paper jam between exposure and D57X sensor does not detect paper tip
distribution section (6). within a specific time after it is detected by
Remove paper. D561.
(Cause)
1. Paper Jamming 

2. No.1 crossover rack installation error 

3. Scanner feeding section abnormal 

4. Upper feed belt height adjustment 

malfunction 

5. Faulty exposure section entrance paper 

sensor (D561) or pre-exposure paper 

sensor (D652) system. 

6. Distribution feed motor(M570), 

processor entrance sensor(D571/D572/ 

D573) malfunction 

7. Distribution motor(M571), distribution  (See subsection 7.3.5)
home position sensor(D574)



7
malfunction 

8. Distribution up/down motor(M572), 

lowering home position sensor(D575) 

malfunction 

9. Sucker wearing 

10.Distribution suction pump(P570), 

distribution section solenoid(S570/ 

S571) malfunction 

11.Processor entrance unit malfunction 
W-2407 Auto-loading of upper magazine failed. End or splice sensor does not function even
Refer to manual for guidance. if paper is fed to the detecting position.
(Cause)
1. Paper leading end abnormal 1. Extract paper leading end for 0 to
10mm from magazine.
2. Magazine abnormal 2. Install another magazine, if auto-load is
normally done, replace magazine.
3. Connection error or disconnection 3. 

between upper paper end 

sensor(D505), upper paper splice  Connect harness correctly, or repair

sensor(D506) and CTL17 on CTL20  or replace it.

circuit board 

4. Connection error or disconnection 4. 
between upper paper feed motor(M501)
and PDC8 on PDC20 circuit board
7. Tripped F3 or F9 on PDC20 circuit 7. Repair short circuit and depress white
board button on circuit protector.
8. U81, U88CTL on 20 circuit board 8. 
 If more than 3.5V detected in “paper
malfunction 
 exists” and less than 0.5V detected

 in “no paper” between 2 and 18 pins

 of U82/U88 on CTL20 circuit board,

 replace PDC20 circuit board.
9. PDC20 circuit board malfunction 9. 
7-37
7.2 Messages

W-2408 Auto-loading of upper magazine failed. End or splice sensor does not function even
Refer to manual for guidance. if paper is fed to the detecting position.
(Cause)
1. Paper leading end abnormal 1. Extract paper leading end for 0 to
10mm from magazine.
2. Magazine abnormal 2. Install another magazine, if auto-load is
normally done, replace magazine.
3. Connection error or disconnection 3. 

between lower paper end 

sensor(D525), lower paper splice  Connect harness correctly, or repair

sensor(D526) and CTL17 on CTL20  or replace it.

circuit board 

4. Connection error or disconnection 4. 
between lower paper feed motor(M521)
7 button on circuit protector.
8. U84, U88 on CTL20 circuit board 8. 
 If more than 3.5V detected in “paper
malfunction 
 exists” and less than 0.5V detected

 in “no paper” between 2 and 18 pins

 of U8 on CTL20 circuit board,

 replace PDC20 circuit board.
9. PDC20 circuit board malfunction 9. 
W-2409 Auto-rewinding of upper magazine failed. End or splice sensor does not function
Refer to manual for guidance. even if paper is rewound.
(Cause)
1. Magazine abnormal 1. Load another magazine, and if auto-
load and rewind is normally done,
replace magazine.
2. Connection error or disconnection 2. Connect harness correctly, or repair or
between upper paper end replace it.
sensor(D505), upper paper splice
circuit board
between upper paper feed motor(M501) replace it.
W-2410 Auto-rewinding of lower magazine failed. End or splice sensor does not function
Refer to manual for guidance. even if paper is rewound.
(Cause)
1. Magazine abnormal 1. Load another magazine, and if auto-
load and rewind is normally done,
replace magazine.
between lower paper end replace it.
sensor(D525), lower paper splice
circuit board
between lower paper feed motor(M521) replace it.
7-38
7.2 Messages

W-2411 Paper remains in printer. 1. System is started up after the power
Remove paper. OFF failure occurred during the paper
processing.
2. System is not restored from paper
jamming at the last shut-off.
3. Paper is detected at sensor check after
the cover is closed.
(Cause)
between paper sensor(D552/D541/ replace it.
D560/D561/D562/D571/D572/D573)
and CTL20 circuit board
3. D552, D541, D560, D561, D562, D571, 3. Replace sensor.
D572, or D573 malfunction
4. Misdiagnosis due to noise caused 4. Replace harness.
sensor wiring short-circuit or wiring 7
malfunction
E-2412 Upper cutter abnormal. Home or close sensor does not function
Call technical representative. during the operation.
(Cause)
1. Cutter abnormal 

2. Upper cutter open/close home position 

sensor(D507/D508) malfunction 
3. Upper cutter motor(M500) malfunction 

4. PDC20 circuit board malfunction 

5. CTL20 circuit board malfunction 
E-2413 Lower cutter abnormal. Home or close sensor does not function
Call technical representative. during the operation.
(Cause)
1. Cutter abnormal 

2. Lower cutter open/close home position 

sensor(D527/D528) malfunction 
3. Lower cutter motor(M520) malfunction 


E-2414 Paper width guide abnormal. Paper width guide malfunction (SVP
Call technical representative. interruption did not occur within a specific
time).
(Cause)
E-2415 Nip initialization for upper side door failed. Speed adjustment nip home not detected
Call technical representative. (Sensor did not function even if pulses
were driven).
(Cause)
1. Upper middle door section nip release 

sensor(D547) malfunction 

2. Upper middle door section nip release 

motor(M545) malfunction 
3. Upper middle door section nip 

mechanism malfunction 


E-2416 Nip initialization for exposure section Exposure soft nip home not detected
failed. (Sensor did not function even if pulse
Call technical representative. drivings were done).
(Cause)
1. Scanner section nip release 


2. Scanner section nip release 

3. Scanner section nip release mechanism 

malfunction 


7-39
7.2 Messages

E-2417 Paper width guide initialization failed. Exposure section width guide home not
Call technical representative. detected (Sensor did not function even if
pulses were driven).
(Cause)
1. Paper width guide home position 


2. Paper width guide motor(M563) 

malfunction 
3. Paper width guide mechanism 

malfunction 


E-2418 Positioning fork initialization failed. Top registration home not detected
were driven).
7 (Cause)
1. Fork position sensor(D564) malfunction



2. Pre-scanning feed motor(M560) 

malfunction 
3. Fork position mechanism malfunction 


E-2419 Distribution UP/DOWN initialization failed. Distribution up/down home not detected
were driven).
(Cause)

1. Lowering home position sensor(D575) 

malfunction 

2. Distribution up/down motor(M572) 

malfunction 
3. Up/down drive and timing belt slippage 

4. Up/down drive and timing belt wearing 


E-2420 Distribution initialization failed. Distribution section home not detected
were driven).
(Cause)

1. Distribution home position 


2. Distribution motor(M571) malfunction 

3. Motor off by interference of hose and 
other parts. 

4. Spring off between paddles 

5. Suction base and slide axis malfunction 

W-2421 Paper end processing of upper magazine Paper end sensor detects paper end.
completed. Replace upper magazine. If (Cause)
not replaced, press [Print Stop] to cancel 1. Paper end 1. Load paper. If paper remains, perform 2
print instruction. to 4.
between paper end sensor(D505) and
CTL17 on CTL20 circuit board
3. Upper paper end sensor(D505) 3. Replace sensor(D505).
malfunction
W-2422 Paper end processing of lower magazine Paper end sensor detects paper end.
completed. Replace lower magazine. If not (Cause)
replaced, press [Print Stop] to cancel print 1. Paper end 1. Load paper. If paper remains, perform 2
instruction. to 4.
between lower paper end sensor(D525)
and CTL17 on CTL20 circuit board
3. Upper paper end sensor(D525) 3. Replace sensor(D525).
malfunction
7-40
7.2 Messages

W-2423 Unknown magazine ID is set. Different magazine ID from the last
Set correct magazine ID. magazine’s is used when replacing
magazine at paper end.
(Cause)
1. Paper replaced. 1. Change print size, or use original
magazine.
2. ID chip replaced. 2. Change magazine registration.
between magazine ID sensor(D500 to
D504/D520 to D524) and CTL16 on
CTL20 circuit board
4. Magazine ID sensor(D500 to D504/ 4. Magazine ID sensor(D500 to D504/
D520 to D524) malfunction D520 to D524) replacement
W-2424 Magazine ID not registered. Unregistered magazine ID is set.
Perform “Paper Magazine Registration” in
“Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” in
(Cause)
1. Unregistered magazine 1. Register magazine.
7
“Setup and Maintenance”. 2. Connection error or disconnection 2. Repair harness or replace it.
CTL20 circuit board
W-2425 ID is duplicated for upper and lower ID is duplicated for upper and lower
magazines. magazines.
Set another magazine ID. (Cause)
1. Same ID chip set to upper/lower 1. Replace ID chip for one magazine, and
magazine. register it again.
CTL20 circuit board
W-2426 Magazine not loaded. Magazine setting incorrect in a specific
place.
(Cause)
1. Magazine not installed. 1. Install magazine.
2. ID chip not installed. 2. Install ID chip and register it.
between ID sensor(D500 to D504/D520
to D524) and CTL16 on CTL20 circuit
board
E-2427 Communication error occurred in printer. Communication time-out occurred
(between main circuit board and paper between speed adjustment feeding
feeding system in upper side door section) section and speed adjustment CPU.
E-2428 Communication error occurred in printer. Communication time-out with distribution
(between main circuit board and paper CPU occurred.
feeding system in distribution section) (Cause)
Call technical representative. 1. System software failure 1. Restart system, and if problem persists,
7-41
7.2 Messages

W-2429 Magazine section door open. Close it. Magazine section’s door is opened during
Processing paper fogged. the paper processing.
(Cause)
1. Magazine section door opened. 1. Close door.
2. Interlock dog bent or broken. 2. Repair or replace.
3. Magnet removed or loosened. 3. Install properly.
4. Magazine section door detecting 4. Replace switch.
interlock switch(D580) malfunction
5. Connection error between switch(D580) 5. Repair harness or replace it.
and PWA10 on DC power supply unit
6. DC power unit malfunction 6. Replace DC power unit.
W-2430 Magazine section door open. Close it. Magazine section’s door is opened during
the paper processing.
(Cause)
1. Magazine section door opened. 1. Close door.
7 2. Interlock dog bent or broken.

3. Magnet removed or loosened.
2.
3.
Repair or replace.
Install properly.
4. Magazine section door detecting 4. Replace switch.
between switch(D580) and PWA10 on
DC power supply unit
W-2431 Printer section door open. Door open is detected in printer.
Remove paper in printer and close door. (Cause)
1. Printer section door opened. 1. Close door.
2. Interlock dog bent or broken. 2. Repair or replace.
3. Magnet removed or loosened. 3. Install properly.
4. Printer section door detecting interlock 4. Replace switch.
switch(D581/D582/D583/D584/D585)
malfunction
between switch and PWA10 on DC
power supply unit
W-2432 Back printer is not installed. Back printer unit is not installed.
Refer to manual for guidance. (Cause)
1. Back printer installed incorrectly. 1. Install properly.
2. Back printer set sensor(D544) 2. Replace sensor(D544).
malfunction
between back printer set sensor(D544) replace it.
and PDV16 on PDC20 circuit board
W-2433 Incorrect paper magazine is set. Replace Magazine installed oppositely.
magazine. (Cause)
1. Magazine installed oppositely. 1. Replace magazine.
2. ID chip replaced. 2. Use original ID chip or register it again.
CTL20 circuit board
5. CTL20 circuit board malfunction 5. Replace PDC20 circuit board.
I-2435 Magazine installed.
— —
Resume printing.
W-2436 Magazine with different paper width Magazine different from one at paper end Refer to W-2433.
installed. has been set.
Install magazine with correct paper. (Cause)
Refer to W-2433.
I-2437 Paper end process completed in upper
magazine. — —
Paper is to be fed from lower magazine.
I-2438 Paper end process completed in lower
magazine. — —
Paper is to be fed from upper magazine.
7-42
7.2 Messages

W-2439 Paper end detected in upper magazine.
— —
Install a new paper in magazine.
W-2440 Paper end detected in lower magazine.
— —
W-2441 Unknown magazine ID specified.
— —
Install magazine with ID=####.
W-2442 Incorrect paper width specified.
— —
Replace magazine.
W-2443 Paper end detected in magazine.
— —
E-2501 Anti-dust shutter abnormal. Call technical Open/close sensor(D620) does not work
representative. even if operating anti-dust shutter at
initialization.
(Cause)
between scanner section shutter open/ replace it.
7
close sensor(D620) and PDC13 on
PDC20 circuit board
between scanner section anti-dust replace it.
shutter solenoid(S620) and PDC13 on
PDC20 circuit board
3. Circuit protector F2 on PDC20 circuit 3. Correct trip(Cause).
board trip
4. Scanner section shutter open/close 4. Replace laser unit.
sensor(D620) malfunction
5. Scanner section anti-dust shutter 5. Replace laser unit.
solenoid(S620) malfunction
E-2502 Anti-dust fan malfunction. Optical mechanical fan did not function
Call technical representative. (Rotating sensor malfunction).
(Cause)
between anti-dust fan(F620/F621/F622) replace it.
2. Circuit protector F4 on PDC20 circuit 2. Correct trip(Cause).
board trip
3. Anti-dust fan(F620/F621/F622) 3. Anti-dust fan(F620/F621/F622)
malfunction replacement
E-2503 Polygon malfunction. Mechanical polygon abnormal (Rotating
Call technical representative. sensor malfunction).
(Cause)
between OPT1 on laser unit OPT1 and replace it.
CTL18 on CTL20 circuit board
2. CP2 on CTL20 circuit board trip 2. Correct trip(Cause).
3. Connection error of connector JND1-1 3. Connect properly.
on the buttom side of laser unit
4. Laser unit malfunction 4. Replace laser unit.
E-2504 AOM driver cooling fan malfunction. AOM fan malfunction (Rotating sensor
Call technical representative. malfunction).
(Cause)
between AOM driver cooling fan(F591/ replace it.
F592/F593) and PDC15 on PDC20
circuit board
2. PDC20 circuit board circuit protector 2. Correct trip(Cause).
F10 trip.
3. AOM driver cooling fan(F591/F592/ 3. AOM driver cooling fan(F591/F592/
F593) malfunction F593) replacement
7-43
7.2 Messages

E-2505 FM cooling fan malfunction. Frame memory fan malfunction (Rotating
Call technical representative. sensor malfunction).
(Cause)
between FMC20 circuit board cooling replace it.
fan(F589/F590) and PDC15 on PDC20
circuit board
2. FMC20 circuit board cooling fan(F589/ 2. FMC20 circuit board cooling fan(F589/
F590) malfunction F590) replacement
E-2506 Scanning lamp cooling fan malfunction. Exposure section fan malfunction
Call technical representative. (Rotating sensor malfunction).
(Cause)
7 between scanner section cooling

fan(F585/F586) and PDC15 on PDC20
replace it.
circuit board
2. Scanner section cooling fan(F585/F586) 2. Scanner section cooling fan(F585/
malfunction F586) replacement
button on circuit protector.
W-2507 Condition setup for present paper not Density measurement is not performed at
performed. the magazine’s setup.
Perform condition setup for paper. (Cause)
1. Condition setup not performed. 1. Perform paper condition setup.
2. ID chip replaced. 2. Change magazine registration.
CTL20 circuit board
E-2508 Communication error occurred in Connection error between LDD20 circuit
printer.(between main circuit board and board and CTL20 circuit board
LDD20 circuit board on laser unit) (Cause)
Call technical representative. 1. Connection error or disconnection 1. Connect harness correctly, or repair it.
between LDD2, LDD3 on LDD20 circuit
board and CTL8, CTL9 on CTL20 circuit
board
2. Connection error or disconnection 2. Connect harness correctly, or repair it.
between LDD1 on LDD20 circuit board
and PAW5 on DC power unit
3. LDD20 circuit board malfunction 3. Replace LDD20 circuit board.
E-2509 Abnormal R laser(R-LD) information. Abnormal data read from EEPROM in
Call technical representative. laser unit at start-up.
(Cause)
1. Abnormal data on “R Laser(R-LD) 1. On menu 45D, enter data written in
Data(45D)” parameter sheet stuck inside the
magazine door.
between laser unit and LDD4 on LDD20
circuit board
3. CP805 on LDD20 circuit board trip 3. Repair short-circuit of harness between
LDD12 and ambient temperature
sensor(THA20 circuit board), or replace
ambient temperature sensor.
Repair short-circuit of harness between
LDD4, LDD5, LDD6, and LDD9, or
replace laser unit.
7-44
7.2 Messages

E-2510 Abnormal G laser(G-SHG) information. Abnormal data read from EEPROM in
(Cause)
1. Abnormal data on “G Laser(G-SHG) 1. On menu 45E, enter data written in
Data(45E)” parameter sheet stuck inside the
magazine door.
circuit board
LDD4, LDD5, LDD6, or replace laser
unit.
4. LDD20 circuit board malfunction 4. Replace LDD20 circuit board. 7
E-2511 Abnormal B laser (B-SHG) information. Abnormal data read from EEPROM in
(Cause)
1. Abnormal data on “B Laser(B-SHG) 1. On menu 45F, enter data written in
Data(45F)” parameter sheet stuck inside the
magazine door.
circuit board
LDD4, LDD5, LDD6 and LDD9, or
replace laser unit.
E-2512 R laser(R-LD) temperature adjustment Laser temperature did not converge within
outside specified range. a specified range during the initialization.
circuit board
LDD5, LDD7 and LDD10, or replace
laser unit.
E-2513 G laser(G-SHG) temperature adjustment Laser temperature did not converge within
circuit board
2. CP801 on LDD20 circuit board trip 2. Repair short-circuit of harness of LDD8
harness, or replace laser unit.
7-45
7.2 Messages

E-2514 B laser(B-SHG) temperature adjustment Laser temperature did not converge within
between laser unit and LDD11 on
LDD20 circuit board
2. CP802 on LDD20 circuit board trip 2. Repair short-circuit of harness of
LDD11, or replace laser unit.
E-2515 Abnormal R laser(R-LD) temperature. 1. Laser temperature exceeds the range.
Call technical representative. 2. Thermistor error is detected.
(Cause)
Same as E-2512 Same as E-2512
E-2516 Abnormal G laser(G-SHG) temperature. 1. Laser temperature exceeds the range.
7 Call technical representative. 2. Thermistor error is detected.
(Cause)
E-2517 Abnormal B laser(B-SHG) temperature. 1. Laser temperature exceeds the range.
Call technical representative. 2. Thermistor error is detected.
(Cause)
W-2518 Abnormal temperature detected in printer. Ambient temperature exceeds the range.
1. Fan(F565/F582/F583/F584/F587/F588/ 1.
F594/F596) malfunction
1) Connection error or disconnection 1) Connect harness correctly, or repair
between scanner section nip motor or replace it.
cooling fan(F565) and PDC4 on
PDC20 circuit board
between printer control section or replace it.
cooling exhaust fan(F582/F583/
F584) and PDC14 on PDC20 circuit
board
between printer control section or replace it.
cooling exhaust fan(F587/F588),
magazine section cooling fan(F594),
scanner section cooling fan(F596)
4) F1, F3, F6 on PDC20 circuit board 4) Check harness short-circuit, or repair
trip or replace it.
5) PDC20 circuit board malfunction 5) Replace PDC20 circuit board.
2. Ambient temperature sensor(THA20 2.
circuit board) malfunction
between LDD12 on LDD20 circuit or replace it.
board and ambient temperature
sensor(THA20 circuit board)
2) CP803, CP804, CP805 on LDD20 2) Repair short-circuit of harness
circuit board trip between LDD12 and ambient
temperature sensor(THA20 circuit
board), or replace ambient
temperature sensor.
Repair short-circuit of harness
between LDD4, LDD5, LDD6, LDD7,
LDD9 and LDD10, or replace laser
unit.
3) Ambient temperature sensor(THA20 3) Ambient temperature sensor(THA20
circuit board) malfunction circuit board) replacement
4) LDD20 circuit board malfunction 4) Replace LDD20 circuit board.
7-46
7.2 Messages

E-2519 Abnormal AOM temperature. AOM temperature abnormality occurred at
Call technical representative. the pre-exposure check.
(Cause)
1. Ambient temperature out of 1. Check ambient temperature is 5 to 32°C.
specification
between AOM driver and FMC20 circuit replace it.
board
3. AOM driver malfunction 3. 1) Turn OFF printer.
2) Disconnect nylon connector from R-
AOM driver.
3) Restart and if E-2519 is not
displayed, replace R-AOM driver.
4) Perform 1) to 4) for G-AOM and B-
AOM in this order.
4. Tripped CP805 on LDD20 circuit board 4. Repair short circuit and depress white
button on CP805. 7
E-2520 R laser(R-LD) current exceeded. LD current value limiter detection.
magazine door.
circuit board
E-2521 G laser(G-SHG) current exceeded. LD current value limiter is detected.
magazine door.
circuit board
3. CP804 4LDD20 circuit board trip 3. Repair short-circuit of harness between
LDD5, LDD7 and LDD10, or replace
laser unit.
E-2522 B laser(B-SHG) current exceeded. LD current value limiter is detected.
magazine door.
LDD20 circuit board
3. CP805 4LDD20 circuit board trip 3. Repair short-circuit of harness between
LDD4, LDD5, LDD6 and LDD9 harness,
or replace laser unit.
E-2523 R laser(R-LD) current measurement value PD current value does not converge within
outside specified range. a specified range.
7-47
7.2 Messages

E-2524 G laser(G-SHG) current measurement PD current value does not converge within
value outside specified range. a specified range.
E-2525 B laser(B-SHG) current measurement PD current value does not converge within
value outside specified range. a specified range.
E-2526 R laser(R-LD) is about to its lifetime. Laser deterioration was detected at the
No problem for the moment, but consult last post-operational check.
technical representative. (Cause)
magazine door.
2. LD deteriorated. 2. Replace laser unit.
7 E-2527 G laser(G-SHG) is about to its lifetime. Laser deterioration was detected at the
magazine door.
E-2528 B laser(B-SHG) is about to its lifetime. Laser deterioration was detected at the
magazine door.
E-2529 SOS detection failed. SOS(Start of Scanning) not detected.
between OPT3 on laser unit and FMC4
on FMC20 circuit board
2. Connection error of connector OPT3J 2. Connect connector properly or replace
on the bottom side of laser unit laser unit.
3. R-AOM coaxial cable connection error 3. Connect cable correctly or replace it.
or disconnection
4. R-AOM driver malfunction 4. Replace R-AOM driver.
5. Connection error or disconnection 5. Connect cable correctly or replace it.
between FMC5 on FMC20 circuit board
and AOM driver
6. Abnormal data of optical parameter of 6. On menu 45G, check that “1465” is set
detecting interval and level to “interval” and “127” to “level”. If not,
download data on menu 45U. If data is
not corrected, replace CTL20 circuit
board.
7. Tripped CP1 on FMC20 circuit board 7. Repair short circuit and depress white
button on CP1.
E-2530 Electric power failure occurred in the Electric power failure occurred.
exposure and light source sections. (Cause)
If problems persist, call technical 1. Door opened. 1. Open and close magazine section door
representative. slowly, and wait 1 or 2 minutes. If
problem solved, it’s door open error.
between PWA5 on DC power supply replace it.
unit and LDD1 on LDD20 circuit board
between PWA4 on DC power supply replace it.
unit and AOM driver
between AOM driver and FMC5 on replace it.
FMC20 circuit board
5. AOM driver malfunction 5. Replace AOM driver.
7-48
7.2 Messages

E-2531 Abnormal frame memory. No frame memory.
1. Connection error between FMC20 and 1. Ensure to insert FMB20 circuit board.
FMB20 circuit boards
2. FMB20 circuit board malfunction 2. Replace FMB20 circuit board.
W-2532 G, B laser(SHG) optimal temperature It’s time to perform SHG stabilization. Perform “G, B Laser(SHG) Optimal
setting periods. Temperature Setup(454)”.
Set optimal temperature in “Printer
Adjustment/Maintenance” in “Setup and
Maintenance”.
W-2533 10 days passed since the last paper Paper magazine required paper condition Perform paper condition setup.
condition setup. We recommend paper setup is detected during magazine
condition setup. installation.
E-2534 R laser(R-LD) temperature sensor Laser thermistor detected.
abnormal. (Cause) 7
Consult technical representative. 1. Connection error or disconnection 1. Connect harness correctly, or repair it.
circuit board
E-2535 G laser(G-SHG) temperature sensor Laser thermistor detected.
abnormal. (Cause)
Consult technical representative. 1. Connection error, disconnection or 1. Connect harness correctly, or repair it.
short-circuit between Laser unit and
LDD7 on LDD20 circuit board
E-2536 B laser(B-SHG) temperature sensor Laser thermistor detected.
abnormal. (Cause)
Consult technical representative. 1. Connection error or disconnection 1. Connect harness correctly, or repair it.
LDD20 circuit board
W-2601 Paper jam in processor ((7),(8)). Paper is not discharged within a specific
Remove paper. time.
Check it ### sheets remain. (Cause)
1. Paper jammed. 

2. Connection error or disconnection 

between dryer section exit paper 

sensor(D771/D772/D773) and CTP15 

on CTP20 circuit board 

3. Processing rack, crossover rack setting  (See subsection 7.3.13)

malfunction 

4. Dryer rack malfunction, temperature 

control malfunction 

5. Dryer exit unit malfunction 

6. CTP20 circuit board malfunction 
W-2602 Paper remains in processor. Power is turned OFF while paper remains Check processor and dryer sections, and
Remove paper. in processor. dryer exit unit. If paper remains, remove it.
W-2603 Paper remains in dryer exit unit. Paper remains in high-speed feeding
Remove paper. section when processor is driven.
At start-up of processor, paper remains in
dryer exit unit.
(Cause)
1. Paper remains in dryer exit unit. 1. Remove paper.
2. Dryer exit unit installed incorrectly. 2. Install dryer exit unit correctly.
3. Dryer section exit paper sensor(D771/ 3. Replace sensor.
D772/D773) malfunction
between dryer section exit paper replace it.
sensor(D771/D772/D773) and CTP15
on CTP20 circuit board
5. Tripped CP2 on CTP20 circuit board 5. Repair short circuit and depress white
button on CP2.
6. CTP20 circuit board malfunction 6. Replace CTP20 circuit board.
7-49
7.2 Messages

W-2604 Sorter malfunction. Sorter malfunction.
1. Incorrect sorter setting. 1. Check sorter on “Installation Information
Setup(41F)”.
2. Tray stop position sensor(D774) 2. Replace sensor.
malfunction
between tray stop position replace it.
sensor(D774) and SWA3 on SWA20
circuit board
between sorter drive motor(M771) and replace it.
SWA2 on SWA20 circuit board
5. Sorter drive motor(M771) malfunction 5. Replace motor.
6. Connection error or disconnection of 6. Replace cable.
sorter cable(s)
7 7. Connection error or disconnection 7. Connect harness correctly, or repair or
between processor-side cable replace it.
connector SORT and CTP11 on CTP20
circuit board
8. Tray and chain setting position error. 8. Repair.
Loaded by interference.
W-2605 Sorter SU2500Y connection error. Check Sorter’s transport conveyor abnormal.
the connection with SU2500Y. (Cause)
1. Incorrect sorter setting. 1. Check sorter on “Installation Information
Setup(41F)”.
E-2606 Drive motor for opening replenisher Replenisher cartridge section malfunction.
cartridge abnormal. (Cause)
Call technical representative. 1. Connection error or disconnection 

About 380 3R-size sheets can still be between replenishment cartridge 

printed without replenishment. opening motor(M740) and PAC3 on 

PAC20 circuit board 

2. Replenishment cartridge opening 



between replenishment cartridge box 

upper/lower sensor(D742/D743) and 

CTP17 on CTP20 circuit board 

4. Replenishment cartridge box upper/  (See subsection 7.3.14)

lower sensor(D742/D743) malfunction 


between replenishment cartridge box 

door detecting interlock switch(D744) 

and PAC22 on PAC20 circuit board 

6. Replenishment cartridge box door 

detecting interlock switch(D744) 

malfunction 

7. PAC20 circuit board malfunction 

8. CTP20 circuit board malfunction 
W-2607 PSR replenisher solution level has fallen. PS-R lower limit sensor detects “solution
—
Printing a little further is possible. empty”.
E-2608 Communication error occurred in printer. Communication time-out with processor
(between main circuit board and processor occurred.
section) (Cause)
Call technical representative. 1. Connection error or disconnection 1. Connect harness correctly, or repair or
between CTL4 on CTL20 circuit board replace it.
and CTP1 on CTP20 circuit board
7-50
7.2 Messages

W-2609 Processor or dryer cover is open. Processing tank’s or accumulating
Processing stopped. section’s cover is opened during the paper
Remove paper and restart processing. processing.
(Cause)
1. Processor cover, dryer entrance rack 1. Install cover correctly. If processor
cover, or dryer section front cover cover cannot be installed, perform
installed incorrectly. leveling again.
between processor cover/dryer replace it.
entrance rack cover detecting interlock
switch(D790/D791) and PAC22 on
PAC20 circuit board
3. Processor cover/dryer entrance rack 3. Replace switch.
cover detecting interlock switch(D790/
D791) malfunction
between dryer section front cover replace it. 7
detecting interlock switch(D781) and
PAC23 on PAC20 circuit board
5. Dryer section front cover detecting 5. Replace switch.
W-2610 PSR completely empty. Replenishment PS-R lower limit sensor detects “solution
stopped. empty” during the replenishment.
Add 8 liters of PSR. (Cause)
1. PS-R empty. 1. Replenish 8R of PS-R with 2 pieces of
FSC100.
between PS-R lower level replace it.
sensor(FS748) and CTP16 on CTP20
circuit board
3. PS-R lower level sensor(FS748) 3. Replace sensor.
malfunction
W-2611 Processing tank or dryer section cover Processing tank’s or dryer section’s cover
open. is opened at the start-up.
Close cover. (Cause)
1. Processor cover, dryer entrance rack 1. Install cover correctly. If processor
cover, or dryer section front cover cover cannot be installed, perform
installed incorrectly. leveling again.
between processor cover/dryer replace it.
entrance rack cover detecting interlock
switch(D790/D791) and PAC22 on
PAC20 circuit board
3. Processor cover/dryer entrance rack 3. Replace switch.
cover detecting interlock switch(D790/
D791) malfunction
between dryer section front cover replace it.
detecting interlock switch(D781) and
PAC23 on PAC20 circuit board
5. Dryer section front cover detecting 5. Replace switch.
6. Tripped CP3 on PAC20 circuit board 6. Repair short circuit and depress white
button on CP3.
W-2612 PSR completely empty. Replenishment PSR lower limit sensor detects “solution
canceled. empty” during the replenishment. —
Replenish PSR.
E-2613 Processor program error. Program loading error occurred in
Call technical representative. processor.
(Cause)
1. Software abnormal. 1. Start printer, and if problem persists,
download program on menu 45U.
7-51
7.2 Messages

E-2614 P1 processing tank temperature not rising. Solution temperature does not rise more
Call technical representative. than 1°C within 30 minutes.
(Cause)
1. Heater system abnormal. 

2. Temperature sensor system abnormal.  (See subsection 7.3.15)

3. Circulation system abnormal. 
E-2615 P2 processing tank temperature not rising. Solution temperature does not rise more
Call technical representative. than 1°C within 30 minutes.
(Cause)


E-2616 PS1,2 processing tanks temperatures not Solution temperature does not rise more
rising. than 1°C within 30 minutes.
7 1. Heater system abnormal. 


E-2617 PS3,4 processing tanks temperatures not Solution temperature does not rise more
rising. than 1°C within 30 minutes.


W-2618 Dryer section temperature not rising. Dryer section temperature does not rise
Check dryer cover not opened. more than 1°C in a minute at the heat-up.
(Cause)
1. Cover around dryer section opened. 

2. Dryer heater system abnormal. 

3. Dryer temperature sensor system  (See subsection 7.3.16)

abnormal. 

4. Dryer fan system abnormal. 
E-2619 P1 processing tank abnormal. Heater P1 temperature abnormal.
turned off. (Cause)
Call technical representative. 1. Heater system abnormal. 


E-2620 P2 processing tank abnormal. Heater P2 temperature abnormal.
turned off. (Cause)


E-2621 PS1,2 processing tanks abnormal. PS1/2 temperature abnormal.
Heaters turned off. (Cause)


E-2622 PS3,4 processing tanks abnormal. PS3/4 temperature abnormal.
Heaters turned off. (Cause)


E-2623 Dryer section temperature abnormal. Dryer section temperature abnormal.
Heater turned off. (Cause)

Call technical representative. 1. Dryer heater system abnormal. 

2. Dryer temperature sensor system  (See subsection 7.3.16)

abnormal. 
3. Dryer fan system abnormal. 
E-2624 P1 safety thermostat activated. Heater Safety thermostat in P1 processing tank is
turned off. activated.


2. Temperature sensor system abnormal. 
3. Circulation system abnormal.  (See subsection 7.3.15)

4. Heater safety thermostat system 

abnormal. 
7-52
7.2 Messages

E-2625 P2 safety thermostat activated. Heater Safety thermostat in P2 processing tank is
turned off. activated.




abnormal. 
E-2626 PS1, 2 safety thermostats activated. Safety thermostat in PS1/2 processing
Heaters turned off. tanks is activated.





E-2627 PS3, 4 safety thermostats activated.
abnormal.
Safety thermostat in PS3/4 processing
7
Heaters turned off. tanks is activated.




abnormal. 
E-2628 Safety thermostat in dryer section Safety thermostat in dryer section is
activated. Heater turned off. activated.
1. Dryer heater system abnormal. 

2. Dryer temperature sensor system 

abnormal. 
3. Dryer fan system abnormal. 

4. Dryer heater safety thermostat system 

abnormal. 
W-2629 P1 solution level has fallen. Temperature Solution level in P1 processing tank is
adjustment stopped. lowered.
1. Leakage 

2. Processing solution level sensor 
abnormal. 

3. Replenisher system abnormal. 
W-2630 P2 solution level has fallen. Temperature Solution level in P2 processing tank is
1. Leakage 

abnormal. 

W-2631 PS1 solution level has fallen. Temperature Solution level in PS1 processing tank is
1. Leakage 

2. Processing solution level sensor  (See subsection 7.3.17)

abnormal. 

1. Leakage 

abnormal. 

1. Leakage 

abnormal. 

7-53
7.2 Messages

1. Leakage 

abnormal. 

W-2635 P1R replenisher solution level has fallen. P1-R lower limit sensor detects “solution
—
Printing can continue a little further. empty”.
W-2636 P2RA replenisher solution level has fallen. P2-RA lower limit sensor detects “solution
—
W-2637 P2RB replenisher solution level has fallen. P2-RB lower limit sensor detects “solution
—
W-2638 P1R replenisher empty. P1-R lower limit sensor detects “solution
—
Add replenisher. completely empty”.
7 W-2639 P2RA replenisher empty. P2-RA lower limit sensor detects “solution
—
Add replenisher. empty”.
W-2640 P2RB replenisher empty. P2-RB lower limit sensor detects “solution
—
Add replenisher. completely empty”.
W-2644 W2 waste solution tank nearly full. Enternal waste solution sensor detects
—
Collect waste solution. “Solution exists”.
W-2645 W2 waste solution tank full. Printing External waste solution sensor detects
—
stopped. Collect waste solution. “Solution full”.
W-2646 PSR replenisher empty. PS-R lower limit sensor detects “Solution On menu 468, check FS748 and actual
Add 8 liters of PSR. empty” during the replenishment. solution level.
(Cause)
1. PS-R empty. 1. Replenish 8R of PS-R.
circuit board
malfunction
W-2648 PSR solution level has fallen. PS-R upper limit sensor detects “solution On menu 468, check FS743 and actual
Add 4 liters of PSR. low”. solution level.
(Cause)
between PS-R upper level replace it.
circuit board
3. PS-R upper level sensor(FS743) 3. Replace sensor.
malfunction
W-2649 PSR empty. PS-R lower limit sensor detects “solution On menu 468, check FS748 and actual
Add 8 liters of PSR. low”. solution level.
(Cause)
circuit board
malfunction
7-54
7.2 Messages

W-2650 W1 waste solution tank nearly full. Internal waste solution sensor detects
Collect waste solution. “Solution exists”.
(Cause)
1. Internal waste solution tank full. 1. Collect waste solution.
between internal waste solution level replace it.
circuit board
3. Internal waste solution level 3. Replace sensor.
sensor(FS749) malfunction
W-2651 W1 waste solution tank full. Printing Internal waste solution sensor detects
stopped. Collect waste solution. “Solution full”.
(Cause)
1. Internal waste solution tank full. 1. Collect waste solution.
2. Connection error or disconnection
between internal waste solution level
2. Connect harness correctly, or repair or
replace it.
7
circuit board
3. Internal waste solution level 3. Replace sensor.
sensor(FS749) malfunction
E-2653 Remaining replenisher abnormal. Status of P1-R, P2-RA, or P2-RB level
Call technical representative. sensor changed during stand-by.
(Cause)
1. Replenishment tank leakage 1. Correct leakage.
2. Replenisher collected or supplied 2. Take appropriate corrective measures.
during stand-by. (See subsection 7.3.22)
between level sensor(FS740/FS741/ replace it.
FS742/FS745/FS746/FS747) and
CTP16 on CTP20 circuit board
4. Level sensor(FS740/FS741/FS742/ 4. Replace sensor.
FS745/FS746/FS747) malfunction
5. CTPP20 circuit board malfunction 5. Replace CTP20 circuit board.
After board replacement, discharge
replenisher and install replenishment
cartridge, then restart.
E-2657 P1R replenisher pump or stirring valve Added flow amount of solution to P1-R
abnormal. upper sensor exceeds the specified
Call technical representative. value(1498.5ml).
About 380 3R-size sheets can still be (Cause)
printed without replenishment. 1. P1-R replenishment pump(PU741) 1. (See subsection 7.3.18)
malfunction
2. P1-R replenishment stirring valve(S743) 2. (See subsection 7.3.20)
malfunction
3. P1-R cartridge washing valve(S740) 3. (See subsection 7.3.20)
malfunction
4. P1-R upper level sensor(FS740) 4. (See subsection 7.3.21)
malfunction Take appropriate corrective measures.
E-2658 P2RA replenisher pump or cartridge Added flow amount of solution to P2-RA
cleaning valve abnormal. upper sensor exceeds the specified
printed without replenishment. 1. P2-RA replenishment pump(PU742) 1. (See subsection 7.3.18)
malfunction
2. P2-RA cartridge washing valve(S741) 2. (See subsection 7.3.20)
malfunction
3. P2-RA upper level sensor(FS741) 3. (See subsection 7.3.21)
7-55
7.2 Messages

E-2659 P2RB replenisher pump or cartridge Added flow amount of solution to P2-RB
cleaning valve abnormal. upper sensor exceeds the specified
printed without replenishment. 1. P2-RB replenishment pump(PU743) 1. (See subsection 7.3.18)
malfunction
2. P2-RB cartridge washing valve(S742) 2. (See subsection 7.3.20)
malfunction
3. P2-RB upper level sensor(FS742) 3. (See subsection 7.3.21)
W-2660 PSR completely empty. PS-R lower limit sensor detects “solution
—
Prepare replenisher solution. empty”.
W-2661 PSR replenisher empty. “Solution empty” detected by PS-R lower
—
Prepare replenisher solution. limit sensor solved.
7 I-2662 Performing evaporation correction. Please Performing evaporation correction.
wait. (Max 25 min.) After replenishment, —
start temperature adjustment.
E-2663 P1R replenisher pump abnormal. Added flow amount of solution between
Call technical representative. P1-R upper and lower sensors exceeds
About 380 3R-size sheets can still be the specified value.
printed without replenishment. (Cause)
1. Power supply frequency set incorrectly. 1. Select correct frequency on
<FREQ.SETTING> from
[INSTALLATION] in
[PROC.INST.MODE].
2. P1-R replenishment pump(PU741) 2. (See subsection 7.3.18)
malfunction
3. P1-R lower level sensor(FS745) 3. (See subsection 7.3.21)
E-2664 P2RA replenisher pump abnormal. Added flow amount of solution between
Call technical representative. P2-RA upper and lower sensors exceeds
<FREQ.SETTING> from
[INSTALLATION] in
[PROC.INST.MODE].
2. P2-RA replenishment pump(PU742) 2. (See subsection 7.3.18)
malfunction
3. P2-RA lower level sensor(FS746) 3. (See subsection 7.3.21)
E-2665 P2RB replenisher pump abnormal. Added flow amount of solution between
Call technical representative. P2-RB upper and lower sensors exceeds
<FREQ.SETTING> from
[INSTALLATION] in
[PROC.INST.MODE].
2. P2-RB replenishment pump(PU743) 2. (See subsection 7.3.18)
malfunction
3. P2-RB lower level sensor(FS747) 3. (See subsection 7.3.21)
malfunction Take appropriate corrective
measures.(See subsection 7.3.22)
W-2666 P2R replenisher solution level has fallen. P2-R lower limit sensor detects “solution
—
Printing a little further is possible. empty”.
W-2667 P2R completely empty. P2-R lower limit sensor detects “solution
—
Prepare replenisher solution. completely empty”.
W-2668 P2R replenisher empty. “Solution empty” detected by P2-R lower
—
Prepare replenisher solution. limit sensor solved.
7-56
7.2 Messages

W-2670 Replenisher cartridge not loaded. Install Replenisher cartridge is not installed.
new replenisher cartridge. (Cause)
1. Replenishment cartridge not installed. 1. Install replenishment cartridge.
between replenishment cartridge set replace it.
sensor(D741) and CTP17 on CTP20
circuit board
3. Replenishment cartridge set 3. Replace replenishment cartridge set
sensor(D741) malfunction sensor(D741).
W-2671 Replenisher door open. Replenisher cartridge box door is opened.
Close it. (Cause)
1. Replenishment cartridge door opened. 1. Close replenishment cartridge box door.
between replenishment cartridge box replace it.
door detecting interlock switch(D744)
and PAC22 on PAC20 circuit board
7
3. Replenishment cartridge box door 3. Replace switch.
detecting interlock switch(D744)
malfunction
W-2672 PSR lowered. PS-R upper level sensor detects “solution
Add PSR until message disappears. empty”.
(Cause)
1. PS-R tank empty. 1. Replenish 4R of PS-R.
2. Replenisher level sensor abnormal. 2. (See subsection 7.3.21)
E-2673 Replenisher cartridge opening failed. Call Replenisher solution lower limit sensor
technical representative. does not detect “solution exists” in a tank
within a specific time after the cartridge is
opened.
(Cause)
1. Replenishment cartridge opening 1. 

malfunction 
2. Replenishment pipe(s) clogged. 2. 

3. Replenishment tank lower level sensor 3. 
abnormal.
W-2674 Replenisher cartridge empty. Insert a new Replenisher solution lower limit sensor
replenisher cartridge. detects “No solution in all tanks” within a
specific time after the cartridge is opened.
(Cause)
1. Empty replenishment cartridge 1. Install new replenishment cartridge.
installed.
2. Replenishment tank lower level sensor 2. (See subsection 7.3.21)
abnormal.
between replenishment cartridge set replace it.
sensor(D741) and CTP17 on CTP20
circuit board
4. Replenishment cartridge set 4. Replace replenishment cartridge set
sensor(D741) malfunction sensor(D741).
E-2675 P1R replenisher cartridge cleaning or P1-R upper level sensor detects “solution
dilution valve abnormal. empty”.
About 380 3R-size sheets can still be 1. P1-R replenishment pump(PU741) 1. (See subsection 7.3.18)
printed without replenishment. malfunction
2. P1-R replenishment stirring valve(S743) 2. (See subsection 7.3.20)
malfunction
3. P1-R cartridge washing valve(S740) 3. (See subsection 7.3.20)
malfunction
4. P1-R upper level sensor(FS740) 4. (See subsection 7.3.21)
7-57
7.2 Messages

E-2676 P2RA replenisher cartridge cleaning valve P2-RA upper level sensor detects “solution
abnormal. empty”.
About 380 3R-size sheets can still be 1. P2-RA replenishment pump(PU742) 1. (See subsection 7.3.18)
2. P2-RA cartridge washing valve(S741) 2. (See subsection 7.3.20)
malfunction
3. P2-RA upper level sensor(FS741) 3. (See subsection 7.3.21)
E-2677 P2RB replenisher cartridge cleaning valve P2-RB upper level sensor detects
abnormal. “solution empty”.
About 380 3R-size sheets can still be 1. P2-RB replenishment pump(PU743) 1. (See subsection 7.3.18)
7 2. P2-RB cartridge washing valve(S742)

malfunction
2. (See subsection 7.3.20)
3. P2-RB upper level sensor(FS742) 3. (See subsection 7.3.21)

W-2678 Sorter nearly full. “Sorter full” is detected.
Collect prints from sorter. (Cause)
1. Sorter full. 1. Remove print(s) from sorter.
between sorter full sensor(D775) and replace it.
3. Sorter full sensor(D775) malfunction 3. Replace sorter full sensor(D775).
4. SWA20 circuit board malfunction 4. Replace SWA20 circuit board.
W-2679 Sorter full. “Sorter completely full” is detected.
Collect prints from sorter. (Cause)
1. Sorter full. 1. Remove print(s) from sorter.
between sorter full sensor(D775B) and replace it.
3. Sorter full sensor(D775B) malfunction 3. Replace sorter full sensor(D775B).
4. SWA20 circuit board malfunction 4. Replace SWA20 circuit board.
W-2680 Number of prints exceeds limit. Stop Number of prints exceeds printing
printing. limit(error cleared).
(Cause)
1. Problem persists. 1. Solve error, and take a measurement
referring “7.3.22 Return Action after
Replenishment System Error”.
I-2681 Mixing replenisher. Processing is performed during a new
—
Please wait. replenisher’s mixing.
I-2682 Processor busy. Auto-washing of racks in Auto-washing for rack is performed.
process. —
Please wait.
I-2683 Performing evaporation correction. Output check is performed in processor
Please wait. during the evaporation/low-activity —
processing.
I-2684 Processing paper. Two sheets of paper feeding is detected.
—
Please wait.
E-2685 Error occurred in replenishment section. System was started up while the Check error on “Error Information
Call technical representative. replenishment section is failing. Check(415)” and solve it, then take a
measurement referring “7.3.22 Return
Action after Replenishment System Error”.
W-2686 Washing solution level has fallen. Lower limit sensor detects “solution
—
Replenish it. empty”.
7-58
7.2 Messages

W-2687 Paper jam in dryer exit unit. Sensor status does not change from
Remove paper. “Paper exists” to “No paper” within a
specific time.
At start-up of processor, paper remains in
dryer exit unit.
(Cause)
1. Paper jammed in dryer exit unit. 1. Remove paper.
2. Dryer exit unit installed incorrectly. 2. 

3. Dryer section exit paper sensor(D771/ 3. 

D772/D773) malfunction 

4. Dryer section drive motor(M770) 4. 
malfunction 

5. Paper pathway switch solenoid(S770) 5. 

malfunction 

6. Dryer exit unit mechanism malfunction 6. 
I-2689 Last replenishment solution prepared.
Replace replenisher cartridge.
Post-operational check was performed in
opening the cartridge.
— 7
I-2690 Processing paper. Control strip processing was performed
Please wait! Perform control strip during the paper processing. —
processing after paper processing.
I-2691 Solution remains in replenisher tank. Replenisher tank lower sensor detects
—
Call technical representative. “Solution exists”.
I-2692 Intermittent oparation. Auto-intermittent driving.
—
Please wait.
I-2693 Processor section now operating. 1. Auto-washing is attempted during paper
Please wait. processing
—
2. Auto-washing is attempted during
control strip processing.
W-2695 PSR empty. PSR lower limit sensor detects “Solution
—
Replsnish PSR. empty” during the replenishment.
I-2697 Opening not completed normally.Check System was started up before opening is
that replenisher cartridge is properly not completed. —
installed.Start processing.
W-4101 Incorrect order No. Order No. is not entered. Enter a correct order No.
Enter correct order No.
W-4102 Incorrect sort No. Sort No. is not entered. Enter a correct sort No.
Enter correct sort No.
W-4103 Incorrect CD-ID. Entered CD-ID is other than 12-digit Install a correct CD-ID.
To continue the operation without entering numerals, or is not entered.
the CD-ID, press [Run].
To re-entry the CD-ID, press [Re-entry].
W-4105 Image data exporting failed. An error occurred while registering image
Check the connection with the Imaging data into the Imaging Controller.
Controller. (Causes of error message)
1. Loose or poorly connected 1. Connect the cable correctly.
2. Abnormal software for Imaging 2. Restart the Imaging Controller. If the
Controller. error recurs, reinstall software for the
Imaging Controller.
3. Faulty hard disk on Imaging Controller 3. Replace the hard disk on the Imaging
Controller.
W-4106 Registering order failed. An error occurred while registering an
Check the connection with the Imaging order.
Imaging Controller.
Controller.
7-59
7.2 Messages

W-4107 Retrieving order list information failed. An error occurred while retrieving order
Check the connection with the Imaging information.
Imaging Controller.
Controller.
W-4108 This order No. already exists. The input order No. is already registered Enter a correct order No.
Re-enter another order No. to the Imaging Controller.
W-4109 This order already contains the specified When adding a sort No. to an order, the Quit this service, change the sort No., and
sort No. input sort No. is already exists in the order. then resume the operation.
Quit this service, change the sort No., and
7 then resume the operation.
W-4110 This order No. cannot be modified, The input order No. has not been Enter a correct order number.
because it is not registered. registered to the Imaging Controller.
Enter a correct order No.
W-4111 This sort No. does not exist in this order. When reprinting images in an order, the Enter a correct sort number.
Enter a correct sort No. input sort No. is not included in the order.
W-4112 The film mask is not supported with this The selected output device (image export Install a correct film carrier or mask.
image export service. service) does not support the film mask.
W-4113 Order currently created. The requested order cannot be created Wait.
Wait. because the image in the previous order is
being output.
W-4114 The service cannot be closed, because Wait.
there is an order currently processed. —
Wait.
W-4115 The sort No. cannot be changed during While creating or modifying an order, Press [OK] to continue the process.
this image export service. printing is attempted with a sort No. on the
The sort No. was restored to match the Order Condition Settings changed.
order condition.
W-4116 The number of image export become The number of scanning operation for one Press [SORT] and continue as a next
maximum. order exceeds the upper limit (200 order.
Press SORT and continue as a next order. images).
W-4117 Imaging Controller not recognised. The logical output device for the selected Perform pre-operational check.
Perform pre-operational check. image export service does not exist in the
Imaging Controller.
E-4118 Not enough free space to copy files. The hard disk on the Imaging Controller Delete the completed orders or wait.
does not have enough space.
W-4119 This order being used. The specified order is being used by Wait until the program ends its process.
another program.
W-4120 Order not found. The order is forcibly deleted. Cancel all the prints in the order and set
order conditions again.
W-4121 Creating order that already exists was When creating an order, input order No. is Input a correct order No.
tried. already registered to the Imaging
Controller.
W-4122 Correcting no-exist order tried. When modifying an order, the input order Create the order again with a different
No. is not registered to the Imaging order No.
Controller, or is deleted forcibly.
W-4123 Insufficient memory — Restart system software (A1).
W-4124 A wrong film mask installed in the selected The selected output device (image export Install a correct film carrier or mask.
printer. service) does not support the film mask.
W-4125 The sort No. cannot be changed during While creating an order, printing is Press [OK] to continue the process.
the image export service. attempted with a sort No. on the Order
The sort No. was restored to match the Condition Settings changed.
order condition.
7-60
7.2 Messages

W-4126 Entered order No. created in other service. The input order No. is already used in Change the order No.
Re-enter other order No. another service.
W-4127 Error occurred in the external I/O related F-DIA interface error
interface. (Causes of error message)
Imaging Controller.
Controller.
7-61
7.3 Trouble
7.3 Trouble Shooting Shooting
7.3.1 Light Source Section Cover Interlock Switch
Opened
Light source section cover opened?
Closed
Close
On “I/O Check (43A)”, Abnormal

check safety thermostat.
Normal?
Normal Inspect cause of high temperature in light source section.
• Air filter clogged
• Suction/exhaust fan malfunction
Not pressed
Close light source section cover.
Interlock switch pressed correctly?
7
Pressed
7.3.1 Adjust switch position.
Check harness between interlock switch Malfunction

and PWR20 circuit board.
Normal
Replace harness.
Solved
Replace interlock switch (D301).
Solved?
Not solved END
Check harness between PWR20 circuit Malfunction

board and CTB20 circuit board.
Normal
Replace harness.
Solved
Replace PWR20 circuit board.
Solved?
Not solved END
Replace CTB20 circuit board.
7-62
7.3 Trouble Shooting
7.3.2 Film Carrier
Install other carrier. Abnormal

Is there any abnormality?
Check if dust collects on pins of plug-in
Normal Solved
connector in scanner side, and clean it.
Check if there are connection error, breakage
or dust collection, and repair it, if necessary.
Not solved
END
(See 7.3.4 CTB20 Circuit Board)
Check if there are connection error, Solved
breakage or dust collection in carrier side,
and repair it, if necessary.
Not solved END
7
7.3.2
Normal
Use “I/O Check (44E to 44G)”
to check sensor.
Malfunction
Malfunction
Check sensor harness.
Normal
Repair or replace harness.
Replace sensor.
Normal
Check operation of motor or solenoid.
Malfunction Check if there is any mechanical failure and

repair if necessary.
• Wearing, loosening or coming-off of drive belt
Malfunction
Inspect motor or solenoid harness.
Normal
Normal
Replace motor or solenoid.
Malfunction
In case of feed system, Solved

replace drive circuit board.
Solved?
Not solved
END
Replace CYA20, CYB20 or

CYC20 circuit board.
7-63
7.3.3 CCD Unit(E-1130/E-1131)
E-1130 E-1131
With E-1130.Only E-1131 Only E-1131

Only E-1131?
Remove scanner section cover.

Remove scanner rear cover.
7 Use menu 43E to display CCD data.

Operate light source aperture,
7.3.3
check color not changed.
Change stored time of changed Not changed

(normal) color. Output changed?
Changed Repair connection error or disconnection

between connector between
CCD5/CCD4 and CDS4/CDS5.
In CCD output section, replace coaxial
cable of “Not changed” with that of “Changed”.
CAUTION: Make sure not to short-circuit cables Changed.
(See Figure1).
(See Figure1)
Color changed?
Replace CCD unit
Not changed
Replace it with original coaxial cable.
In input side of CDS20 circuit board,

replace coaxial cable of “Not changed” Not changed.
with that of “Changed”.
(See Figure2)
Color changed?
Replace CDS20 circuit board.
Changed
Replace coaxial cable. Figure1 Figure2
Press [Bright correct] on

“CCD Data Display (43E)”.
Check if error reoccurs.
EZ1164 EZ1165A
7-64
Come-off or
Sensor abnormal. Use “I/O Check (43A)” to check sensor abnormal sound
and motor. Motor driven?
Motor not driven.

Check mechanical operation,
(See subsection 14.1.1) CP button on CTB20
and repair or replace.
circuit board protruded?
Not
protruded Protruded
On “I/O Check (43A)”, other output Operated not at all
Only same CP system normally operated?
system not operated
Other operated
(+24V)
Turn off power supply, check short-circuit of
CP system and repair if necessary.
7
7.3.4
(See subsection 14.1.1) Check if there is Malfunction
connection error or disconnection harness
between CTB20 circuit board and sensor.
Normal
Press CP button and restart.
CAUTION: Before pressing CP button, make
sure that power is turned OFF.
If pressed while power is turned ON,
circuit board is damaged.
Replace motor. Solved

Solved?
Not solved
Restart system. END
Check if there is connection error or Malfunction

disconnection harness between CTB20
circuit board and sensor.
Normal
Replace sensor. Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
7-65
+24V

(See subsection 14.1.1) LOW
Is set 15 pin of CN3 connector on
CTB20 circuit board to LOW
(drive power-ON signal)?
HIGH
Check harness between Malfunction
CN3 on CTB20 circuit board and
PWR1 on PWR20 circuit board.
Normal
7
Check harness between CN16 on CTB20 Malfunction
7.3.4
circuit board and DC power supply.
Normal
Check harness between PWR6 on PWR20 Malfunction

circuit board and DC power supply.
Normal
Solved
Replace PWR20 circuit board.
Solved?
Not solved
END
Replace DC power supply.
CTB20 circuit protector and protected circuit board
Circuit Protector Protected Circuit Board Error message at tripping

CP1 Light source aperture motor(M201), Balance filter motor(M202) E-1231
CP2 Fan,etc. W-1239/W-1126
CP3 Conjugate variable motor(M101) E-1228
CP4 Light source cooling fan, etc. –
CP5 Lens motor(M102) E-1229
CP6 Digital processing E-1424
CP7 (Note) Output outside circuit board, sensor, etc. E-1226/E-1227/E-1231
NOTE: CP7 is connected to the rear side of CP6 in a series. Therefore, if CP6 is tripped, CP7 power supply is turned OFF.
7-66
7.3.5 Jamming in Distribution Section
Incorrect
No.1 crossover rack is correctly installed?
Correct
Install correctly.
Is there following symptoms?

1) Abnormal back print YES
2) Paper edge is damaged.
3) Unexposed paper is ejected.
4) Accordion-shpaped jamming near sucker
Scanner feed section malfunction.
NO See W-2405
Height of upper feed belt correct Malfunction 7

(11.4±1mm)?
(See subsection 17.2.7) 7.3.5
Normal
Adjust. (See subsection 17.2.7)
YES
Has CP2 on PAC20 circuit board tripped?
NO
Repair short circuit and
depress white button on CP2.
Exposure section entrance paper sensor (D561),
pre-exposure paper sensor (D652),
distribution feed motor (M570) and Abnormal
processor entrance rear/middle/
front sensor (D571/D572/D573) normal
Is there connection error or disconnection
on “I/O Check (45A)”?
in the following harnesses?
Normal 1) between D571/D572/D573 and CTL11 YES
on CTL20 circuit board
2) between M570 and PDC3 on PDC20
circuit board
NO
Replace D751/D752/D753, or M570
Turn ON interlock switch while

distribution section door is opened. Abnormal Connect harness correctly,
Distribution motor (M571) and distribution repair or replace it.
home position sensor (D574) normal
on “I/O Check (45A)”?
Normal YES
M571 come off?
NO
Change values in “Dist sect” on
“Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment (45M)”.
Solved?
Not solved Solved
END
Replace distribution unit
7-67
Is there connection error or

disconnection in the following harnesses?
1) between M571 and PDC2 on PDC20 YES
circuit board
2) between D574 and CTL10 on CTL20
circuit board
NO
Connect harness correctly,

repair or replace it.
Replace D574 or M571

7
7.3.5
distribution section door is opened. Abnormal
Distribution up/down motor (M572), lowering
home position sensor (D575)
normal on “I/O Check (45A)”?
Normal
Is there connection error or
disconnection in the following harnesses?
YES
1) between M572 and PDC2 on PDC20
circuit board
2) between D575 and CTL10 on CTL20
circuit board
NO

Replace D575 or M572
Deteriorated.
Sucker deteriorated?
Normal
Replace sucker

distribution section door is opened.
Abnormal
On “I/O Check (45A)”, turn ON and then OFF
distribution suction pump (P570), distribution
section solenoid A/B (S570/S571).
Normally sucked? When pump is not properly sucked:
1) Check hose disconnection or leakage,
Normal and repair it.
2) Check harness disconnection between
P570 and PDC11 on PDC20 circuit board,
and repair it.
3) Replace P570.
When suction does not stop:
1) Check connection error or disconnection
between S570, S571 and PDC10 on
PDC20 circuit board, and repair it.
2) Replace S570 or S571
7-68
Drive processor and open shutter. Stopped

Is processor entrance unit roller
normally rotated?
Rotated
Remove processor entrance unit,
and repair it.
Press roller with a finger. Not stopped

Easily stopped?
Stopped
END
Gear box engaging error.

Processor entrance unit torque
limiter malfunction. 7
7.3.5
7-69
7.3.6 Cutter Abnormality
Upper cutter operated on Operated

“I/O Check (45A)”?
Not operated
Rotate motor knob (green). Rotated

Rotate?
Not rotated END
YES
Paper piece adhered to cutter blade?
7 NO
7.3.6 Remove paper piece.
Replace cutter.
Sensor as shown normal on

Upper: Cutter open/close home position Normal
sensor (D507/D508),
Lower: Cutter open/close home position
sensor (D527/D528)
Abnormal
Check if there is connection error or
disconnection of the following harnesses
Upper: Harness between cutter motor (M500) Malfunction
Lower: Harness between cutter motor (M520)
Normal
Connect harness correctly, or replace it.
Replace cutter motor.

Upper: M500
Lower: M520

disconnection of the following harnesses
Upper: Harness between cutter open/close
home position sensor (D507/D508) Malfunction
Lower: Harness between cutter open/close
home position sensor (D527/D528)
Normal
7-70
Replace sensor.
Upper: D507/D508 Solved
Lower: D527/D528
Solved?
Not solved
END
Check if voltage is for pins on CTL20

circuit board as shown.
Upper: More than 3.5V in “open” between
4 and 16 pins on U82 and less than
Malfunction
0.5V in “close” between 6 and
14 pins on U82
Lower: More than 3.5V in “open” between
4 and 16 pins on U84 and less
than 0.5V in “close” between
7
6 and 14 pins on U84
7.3.6
Normal
Replace CTL20 circuit board. Solved

Solved?
Not solved
END
Replace PDC20 circuit board.
7-71
7.3.7 Upper Side Door Section Nip Abnormality
Close door to initialize again. NO

Problem persists?
YES END
On “I/O Check (45A)”, upper side door Operated

section nip release motor (M545)
operated?
Not operated Post-motor mechanism malfunction
1) Gear abnormally wearing or damaged ➝
Replace
2) Too much rotating load on cam axis ➝
Replace or apply grease
7 3) Nip spring damaged ➝ Replace
4) Drive plate operating malfunction ➝
Replace or apply grease
7.3.7
5) Sintered bearing damaged ➝ Replace
6) Cam axis idling ➝ Replace or apply grease
Sensor as shown normal on “I/O Check (45A)”? Normal
Upper side door section nip release
sensor (D547)
Abnormal
YES
Has F6 on PDC20 circuit board tripped?
NO
depress white button on F6.
disconnection of the following harnesses. Malfunction
Harness between upper side section nip
release motor (M545) and PDC6 on
PDC20 circuit board
Normal

Replace motor (M545)
or replace it.

disconnection in the following harnesses? Malfunction
Harness between upper side door section nip
release sensor (D547) and CTL14 on
CTL20 circuit board
Normal Connect harness correctly, or replace it.
Replace sensor (D547). Solved

Solved?
Not solved
END
Check voltage between the

following pins on CTL20 circuit board. Malfunction
More than 3.5V in “open” and less than 0.5V in
“close” between 11 and 9 pins on U82
Normal Not solved Replace CTL20 circuit board. Solved

Solved?
END
7-72
7.3.8 Scanner Section Nip Abnormality

Problem persists?
YES END
On “I/O Check (45A)”, Operated

scanner section nip motor (M565)
operated?
Replace
2) Cam abnormal ➝ Replace
3) Nip slider damaged ➝
Replace scanner section feed unit. 7
7.3.8
Sensor as shown normal on Normal

Scanner section nip release sensor (D566)
Abnormal
YES
Has F3 on PAC20 circuit board tripped?
NO

Harness between scanner section nip motor (M565)
Normal

Replace motor (M565). or replace it.

disconnection in the following harnesses. Malfunction
Scanner section nip release sensor (D566) to
CLT10 on CTL20 circuit board.
Replace motor (M566). Solved

Solved?
Not solved
END
Check voltage between the following

pins on CTL20 circuit board. Malfunction
More than 3.5V in “open” and less than 0.5V
in “close” between 8 and 12 pins on U90

Solved?
END
7-73
7.3.9 Paper Width Guide Abnormality

Problem persists?
YES
END
On “I/O Check (45A)”, Operated

paper width guide motor (M563)
operated?
Replace
2) Drive belt damaged ➝ Replace
3) Width guide adjustment malfunction ➝
7 Adjust (See subsection 16.3.25)
4) Positioning fork position malfunction ➝
7.3.9 See E-2418.
Sensor as shown normal on

“I/O Check (45A)”? Normal
Paper width guide home position
sensor (D563)
Abnormal YES
NO

harness between motor (M563) and
Normal


Harness between paper width guide home
position sensor (D563) and CTL10 on
CTL20 circuit board

Solved?
Not solved
END
Check voltage between pins on CTL20

circuit board as shown Malfunction
More than 3.5V in “open” and less than 0.5V in
“close” between 4 and 16 pins on U90

Solved?
END
7-74
7.3.10 Positioning Fork Abnormality

Problem persists?
YES
END
Pre-scanning feed motor operated on Operated


1) Gear malfunction (Feed roller rotated in
one side, and fork fixed in a specific
position. Normal if only fork rotated when
rotating it counterclockwise) ➝ Replace
2) One-way clutch malfunction ➝ 7
Replace one-way or plate spring.
7.3.10

Positioning fork position sensor (D564)
Abnormal
YES
NO

Harness between motor (M560) and PDC4
on PDC20 circuit board
Normal


Harness between positioning fork position sensor
(D564) and CTL10 on CTL20 circuit board
Normal

Solved?
Not solved
END

circuit board as shown. Malfunction

Solved?
END
7-75
7.3.11 Distribution Up/Down Operation Abnormality
Distribution section raised or lowered in YES

“Distribution up and down” motor (M572) on
NO Up/down drive and timing belt phase
adjustment error
(Adjustment ➝ subsection 17.1.10)
Rotated
Motor rotated?
Stopped
Up/down drive and timing belt damaged.
(Replace ➝ subsection 17.1.10)
7
7.3.11

Down home position sensor (D575)
Abnormal
YES
NO

Harness between motor (M572) and
Normal


Harness between down home position sensor
(D575) and CTL10 on CTL20 circuit board

Solved?
Not solved
END


Solved?
END
7-76
7.3.12 Distribution Operation Abnormality
Distribution motor (M571) operated on Operated


1) Motor come-off caused by interference of
hose and other parts ➝ Adjust hose position.
2) Spring between paddles removed,
or damaged ➝ Reinstall spring or replace it.
3) Sucker base and slide axis sliding malfunction ➝
Clean or apply grease to it.

Distribution home position sensor (D574)
7
Abnormal
YES 7.3.12
NO

Harness between motor (M571) and
Normal

Replace motor (M571).
or replace it.

Harness between distribution home
position sensor (D574) and CTL10 on
CTL20 circuit board

Solved?
Not solved
END


Solved?
END
7-77
7.3.13 Paper Jamming in Processor
Dryer section exit paper sensor Abnormal

(D771/D772/D773) normal on
“Processor I/O Check (46A)”?
Normal Connection error or disconnection of
harness between dryer section exit paper Abnormal
sensor (D771/D772/D773) and CTP15 on
CTP20 circuit board?
Normal

7 Replace dryer section exit paper sensor

(D771/D772/D773).
7.3.13 Remove paper.

Crossover rack, processing rack, Abnormal
dryer entrance rack, dryer rack,
dryer exit unit correctly installed?
Normal Install correctly.
Feed 20 sheets of paper while

processor cover detecting interlock
switch (D790) is ON. Measure time taken
from when paper trailing end passes to
when its leading end passes, while seeing
No.1 crossover rack entrance-side slit.
LP1500SC: 1.2sec/25mm Abnormal
LP2000SC: 1.0sec/27mm
89-width/3-line 2.0sec/54mm
Or check interval between shutter and
No.1crossover rack, and No.1 Check if there is any abnormality in printer,
crossover rack slit. If paper leading end and repair it.
can be seen just when paper trailing
end passes through the slit, it is
normally operated.
Normal
Turn ON dryer entrance rack cover

detecting interlock switch (D791), and
feed 20 sheets of paper.
Check interval from when paper trailing Abnormal
end passes to when its leading end
passes trough the squeeze rack.
If the interval is more than 15mm, Processing rack or crossover rack
it is normally operated. probably abnormal.
1. Remove crossover rack(s).
Normal 2. Rotate sprocket in processing rack to
check if all rollers rotate.
3. Check if soft rollers in PS racks slip.
7-78
Abnormal
Remove dryer rack, and check parts.
Normal
Repair dryer rack or replace it.
YES
NO
Check parts in dryer exit unit.

Abnormal 7
7.3.13
Normal
Repair dryer exit unit.
Replace CTP20 circuit board.
7-79
7.3.14 Replenishment Cartridge Box Malfunction
Replenishment cartridge section Opened

door opened?
Not opened Connection error or disconnection of

harness between replenisher cartridge box Abnormal
door detecting interlock switch (D744)
and PAC22 on PAC20 circuit board?
Normal
or repair or replace it.
Replace replenisher cartridge box door

7 detecting interlock switch (D744).
7.3.14
Open door by removing screws in replenisher Figure1
cartridge box upper side and pressing lock.
(See Figure1)
Opened
Replenishment cartridge opened?
Not opened
EZ1653
Solution levels of P1-R, P2-RA and P2-RB NO

are above the upper limit sensor?
YES
Connection error or disconnection of harness Abnormal
between replenisher cartridge box lower sensor
(D743) and CTP17 on CTP20 circuit board?
Normal
between replenisher cartridge box upper sensor
(D742) and CTP17 on CTP20 circuit board?
Normal

or repair or replace it.
Replace replenisher cartridge set Solved

lower sensor (D743).
Solved?
Not solved
Replace replenisher cartridge Not solved
set sensor (D742).
Solved?
Solved
1. Pour water so that all replenisher levels are

above the upper level sensor.
2. Close and open replenisher cartridge box door.
7-80
YES
NO


between replenisher cartridge opening motor
(M740) and PAC3 on PAC20 circuit board?
Normal

7
7.3.14
Replace replenisher cartridge Solved

opening motor (M740).
Solved?
Not solved
1. Install new replenisher cartridge.

2. Close replenisher cartridge box door.
• Cartridge opened and diluting starts.
7-81
7.3.15 Processing Solution Temperature Abnormality
Cool
Touch heater surface.
<Heater>
Warm
Has CP8 (P1), CP9 (P2), CP10 (PS1/2) or YES

CP11 (PS3/4) on PAC20 circuit board tripped?
NO
Repair short circuit and depress

white button on circuit protector.
To “Temperature sensor”,
“Processing solution circulation”,
7 “Safety thermostat”, “Heater cooling fan” Connection error or disconnection of harness
between heater and PAC20 circuit board?
P1: H710 to PAC12 Abnormal
7.3.15
P2: H711 to PAC12
PS1/2: H712 to PAC14
PS3/4: H713 to PAC14
Normal

Replace heater Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
Replace PAC20 circuit board.
7-82
<Temperature sensor>
Compare display values with measured Abnormal

values on “Processor Temperature
Calibration (467)”.
Normal
YES
Has CP1 or CP6 on CTP20 circuit board tripped?
NO

depress white button on circuit protector.
To “Processing solution circulation”,

“Safety thermostat”,
“Heater cooling fan” Connection error or disconnection of
harness between processing solution 7
temperature sensor and CTP20 circuit board? Abnormal
P1: TS700 to CTP3 7.3.15
P2: TS701 to CTP3
PS1/2: TS702 to CTP3
PS3/4: TS703 to CTP3
Normal

Replace processing solution Solved

temperature sensor.
Solved?
Not solved END
7-83
<Processing solution circulation>
Remove circulation filter from sub-tank. NO

Solution surface inside sub-tank swirled?
YES
YES
Has CP3 or CP4 on PAC20 circuit board tripped?
NO

depress white button on circuit board.
Connection error or disconnection of

7 harness between circulation pump and
PAC20 circuit board?
7.3.15 P1: PU710 to PAC15 Abnormal
P2: PU711 to PAC15
PS1: PU712 to PAC15
PS2: PU713 to PAC15
PS3: PU714 to PAC19
PS4: PU715 to PAC19
Normal

Replace circulation pump. Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
Replace circulation filter. Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
YES
Pipes or nozzles clogged?
NO
Correct clogging.
To “Safety thermostat”,
“Heater cooling fan”
7-84
<Safety thermostat>
Safety thermostat operated on

“Processor Input Check (468)”? Not operated
Operating temperature:64°C
Returned temperature:42°C
Operated To “Heater cooling fan”
NO
Return to below 42°C?
YES
harness between safety thermostat and
PAC20 circuit board? Abnormal
P1:
P2:
D710 to PAC4
D711 to PAC4
7
PS1/2: D712 to PAC4
7.3.15
PS3/4: D713 to PAC4
Normal
Determine the cause of high temperature. Connect harness correctly,

Replace safety thermostat. Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
<Heater cooling fan>
Heater cooling fan turned ON/OFF on Abnormal

Normal
harness between heater cooling fan and
CTP20 circuit board? Abnormal
P1: F710 to CTP7
P2: F711 to CTP7
PS1/2: F712 to CTP7
PS3/4: F713 to CTP7
Normal
Clean fan filter. Connect harness correctly,

Solved
Replace fan.
Solved?
Not solved END
7-85
7.3.16 Dryer Temperature Abnormality
Removed
Cover around dryer section removed?
Not removed
Install correctly.
To “Dryer heater”, “Dryer temperature sensor”,

“Dryer heater safety thermostat”, “Dryer fan”.
<Dryer heater>
7 Touch dryer section. Not risen

Temperature risen?
7.3.16
Risen
Protectors as shown normally
operated? Operated
Leakage breaker: NFB2, NFB3, NFB4
Circuit protector: CB1, CB2, CB9, CB10,
CB11, CB12
To “Dryer temperature sensor”, Not operated

“Dryer safety thermostat”,
“Dryer fan” Check short-circuit, repair it if necessary.
Connection error or disconnection of Abnormal

harness between dryer heater (H760) and SSR1,
SSR2 or SSR3, and relay K1, K2 or K3?
Normal


harness between SSR1, SSR2 or SSR3 and
CTP23 on CTP20 circuit board?
Normal

Replace dryer heater. Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
7-86
<Dryer temperature sensor>
Dryer temperature risen on Not risen

“Processor Temperature Calibration (467)”?
Risen
harness between dryer section temperature sensor
(TS760) and CTP4 on CTP20 circuit board?
Normal
To “Safety heater thermostat”,
“Dryer fan” Connect harness correctly,
Replace dryer section temperature

sensor (TS760).
Solved
7
Solved?
7.3.16
Not solved END
<Dryer heater safety thermostat>
Dryer heater safety thermostat Operated

(D760) operated on
“Processor Input Check (468)”?
Not operated
Safety thermostat reset when NO

temperature is lowered?
YES
To “Dryer fan” Connection error or disconnection of Abnormal

harness between safety thermostat (D760)
Normal
Determine the cause of high temperature. Connect harness correctly,

Replace safety thermostat (D760). Solved

Solved?
Not solved
END
7-87
<Dryer fan>
Dryer fan (F760) turned ON/OFF on Abnormal

Normal
harness between dryer fan (F760)
Normal

Clean dryer air filter.
7 Replace dryer fan.

Solved?
Solved
7.3.16
Not solved END
7-88
7.3.17 Processing Solution Tank Level Lowering
Remove circulation filter from sub-tank,

and measure solution level from Lowering
upper surface of sub-tank.
less than 65mm: Normal
more than 65mm: Lowering
Normal
Leakage
Leakage in processing solution system?
Normal
To “Processing solution level sensor diagnostics” Repair leakage.

Mix processing solution.
7
To “7.3.18 Replenishment Pump Diagnostics”
7.3.17
<Processing solution level sensor diagnostics>
Remove processing solution level sensor,

soak it into water container. Abnormal
Sensor turned ON/OFF on
“Processor Input Check (468)”?
Normal
harness between processing solution level
sensor and CTP13 on CTP20 circuit board?
P1: FS700 to CTP13 Abnormal
P2: FS701 to CTP13
PS1: FS702 to CTP13
PS2: FS703 to CTP13
PS3: FS704 to CTP13
PS4: FS705 to CTP13
Normal
To “7.3.18 Replenishment Pump Diagnostics”
7-89
7.3.18 Replenishment Pump Diagnostics
NO
“Evaporation Correction Rate Setting (465)”
performed correctly?
YES
Set correctly.
“Low Volume Setup (466)” NO

performed correctly?
YES
Set correctly.
Perform “Pump Output Measurement/ Abnormal

Setting(461)”.
7 Normal?
Normal
7.3.18
Hose clogged or folded in YES
replenishment system?
NO
To “7.3.19 Rack Auto Cleaning Systen Diagnostics”
Correct hose clogging or folded.
YES
NO


harness between replenisher pump and
PAC20 circuit board? Abnormal
P1-R: PU741 to PAC17
P2-RA: PU742 to PAC17
P2-RB: PU743 to PAC17
PS-R: PU744 to PAC17
Normal

Replace replenisher pump.
Perform “Pump Output Measurement/ Normal

Setting (461)”.
Normal?
Abnormal END
7-90
7.3.19 Rack Auto Cleaning System Diagnostics
Perform “Auto Cleaning Output Normal

Measurement/Setting (462)”.
Abnormal END

harness between auto washing pump PU740
and CTP9 on CTP20 circuit board?
Normal Connect harness correctly,
Replace auto washing pump (PU740). Normal
Perform “Auto Cleaning Output
Measurement/Setting (462)”. 7
Abnormal END
7.3.19

harness between front rack auto washing
valve and CTP20 circuit board? Abnormal
P1: S720 to CTP9
P2: S722 to CTP9
PS1/2: S724 to CTP9
PS3/4: S746 to CTP9 Connect harness correctly,
Normal

harness between rear rack auto washing
valve and CTP20 circuit board? Abnormal
P1: S721 to CTP8
P2: S723 to CTP8
PS1/2: S725 to CTP8
PS3/4: S747 to CTP8 Connect harness correctly,
Normal
Replace front side rack auto washing valve Normal

Abnormal END
Replace rear side rack auto washing valve. Normal

Abnormal END
7-91
7.3.20 P1-R Stirring Valve/Replenishment Cartridge Washing Valve Diagnostics
Operate valve on “Processor I/O

Check (46A)”? Operating sound heard?
P1-R cartridge washing valve: S740 Heard
P2-RA cartridge washing valve: S741
P2-RB cartridge washing valve: S742
P1-R stirring valve: S743
Not heard
Stirring, cartridge washing hose YES

clogged or folded?
NO
7 To “7.3.19 Rack Auto Cleaning Repair hose clogging and folding.

System Diagnostics”
7.3.20
harness between valves (S740/S741/S742/S743)
and CTP10 on CTP10 circuit board?
Normal

YES
Has CP5 on CTP20 circuit board tripped?
NO

Replace valve (S740/S741/S742/S743). Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
7-92
7.3.21 Replenishment Level Sensor Diagnostics
Check level sensor and actual level on Abnormal

“Processor I/O Check (46A)”.
Normal
harness between level sensor and
P1-R upper level sensor: FS740
P1-R lower level sensor: FS745 Abnormal
P2-RA upper level sensor: FS741
P2-RA lower level sensor: FS746
P2-RB upper level sensor: FS742
P2-RB lower level sensor: FS747
PS-R upper level sensor: FS743
PS-R lower level sensor: FS748 7
Normal
To “7.3.18 Replenishment Pump Diagnostics” 7.3.21
Connect harness correctly, 7.3.22
7.3.22 Return Action after Replenishment System Error
All solution levels of P1-R, P2-RA, YES

P2-RB tanks aligned around
upper level sensor?
NO Upper level sensors of all tanks ALL “YES”
indicates “YES” on
Drain all replenishers from P1-R, Not all "YES"
P2-RA and P2-RB tanks.
Pour small amount of water to

make indicator(s) of upper level sensor(s)
“YES”.
Install new replenisher cartridge.
Open and close replenisher

cartridge box door.
Perform “PROC.INST.MODE” -
“INSTALLATION” - “MIX REPLENISH”.
7-93
7.3.23 Replenishment Cartridge Opening Malfunction
Remove replenisher cartridge. YES

Solution remained in cartridge due to
opening malfunction?
NO
YES
Opening parts damaged or abnormal?
NO
Replace parts.
To “7.3.22 Return Action after
Replenishment System Error”
7 Any object remained in opening YES
nozzle hopper section?
7.3.23
NO
Remove object.
Hose between hopper section YES

and tank clogged?
NO
Correct clogging.
To “Replenishment Tank Lower Level Sensor To “7.3.22 Return Action after

Diagnostics (See subsection 7.3.21)” Replenishment System Error"”
7-94
7.3.24 Dryer Exit Unit Diagnostics
Abnormal
Dryer exit unit correctly installed?
Normal
Install correctly.
Dryer section exit paper sensor Abnormal

(D771/D772/D773) normal on
Normal
harness between dryer section exit paper Abnormal
sensor (D771/D772/D773) and
7
Normal
To “Dryer section drive
motor diagnostics” 7.3.24
Replace dryer section exit Solved

paper sensor (D771/D772/D773).
Solved?
Not solved END
<Dryer Section Drive Motor Diagnostics>
Dryer section drive motor (M770) Abnormal

normal on “Processor I/O Check (46A)”?
Normal
harness between dryer section drive motor
(M770) and PAC3 on PAC20 circuit board?
Normal
To “Paper pathway switching
solenoid diagnostics” Connect harness correctly,
Replace dryer section drive motor (M770). Solved

Solved?
Not solved END
7-95
<Paper pathway switching solenoid diagnostics>
Paper pathway switching solenoid (S770) Abnormal

normal on “Processor I/O Check (46A)”?
Normal
between paper pathway switching solenoid
(S770) and CTP12 on CTP20 circuit board?
Normal
To “Dryer exit unit mechanical
diagnostic” Connect harness correctly,
Replace paper pathway switch

7 solenoid (S770).
Solved
Solved?
7.3.24
Not solved
END
<Dryer exit unit mechanical diagnostics>
Rotate gear in dryer drive section to Abnormal

check if all gears rotate.
Normal
Replace parts.
Rotate roller with clutch in dryer exit unit Abnormal

to check if all rollers except
eject roller rotate.
Normal
Replace parts.
Rotate high-speed eject roller in dryer Abnormal

exit unit to check if it rotates smoothly.
Normal
Replace parts.
END
7-96
8. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
8.1 Simple Upgrade ................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2 Update .................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 Reinstallation ...................................................................................................... 8-7
8.4 New Installation ................................................................................................. 8-10
8.5 Reversion ............................................................................................................ 8-13
8.6 Procedure following the Replacement of the Main Control Unit .......... 8-15
8
8-1
8.1 Simple Upgrade
In the “Simple Upgrade”, you can upgrade the FRONTIER390 • The “Procedure Selection 1[C-001]” screen appears.
System software(A1) and Variety Print Software(B1) by following
the simple guidance messages in the screen.
Before the upgrade, make sure that:
1) The cables of the scanner and printer are firmly connected.

2) The power cables of the scanner and printer are not broken.
3) The power cable is plugged into a live outlet.
4) The printer power switch is turned to STANDBY.
5) The scanner is turned ON.
NOTE: For the “Simple Upgrade”, it is assumed that the former

version of “Variety Print(B1)” software is already installed.
If it is not installed, the “Simple Upgrade” screen does
not appear. In this case, use the normal installation
procedure.
NOTE: 1) Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive with its printed

surface facing up.
8 2) To open the tray of the CD-ROM drive, press the eject
6. Select “User version up” and click [Next>].
button.
• The “Starting Update[C-010]” dialog box appears.
1. Select “No” for “Auto Cleaning”. (See subsection 9.7.2.)
2. Insert the FRONTIER 350/370 System(A1) Disk into the CD-

ROM drive.
FRONTIER 350/370 System Disk(A1)
7. Click [Yes].
• System Disk (A1) Version 7.0: The “Paper Lut Selection

[C-012]” screen appears.
GD1621
3. Perform the post-operational checks.
4. Turn ON the scanner’s START switch.
• The installer is started and the “[L-001] Simple Upgrade”

screen appears.
5. Click [OK].
NOTE: If [Cancel] is clicked, the FRONTIER390 System(A1)

installation is skipped, and the “Variety Print Service
(B1)” installation screen appears.
8-2
8.1 Simple Upgrade
8. System Disk (A1) Version 7.0: Click [Next >]. 11. Click [OK].
• The updating process starts. • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is used, the “[L-
003] Simple Upgrade” for Variety Print Service screen
• Copying starts. appears.
• If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is not used, the

“Setup” dialog box appears.
• Upon completion of the upgrade, the “Update

Completion[C-080]” dialog box appears.
12. Click [Cancel].
NOTE: If upgrade of the Variety Print Service (B1) software

is necessary, refer to the Installation Manual for the
Variety Print Service (B1).
• The “SETUP” dialog box appears.
9. Remove the FRONTIER 350/370 System (A1) Disk from the

CD-ROM drive.
13. Click [OK].
• The system is restarted.
NOTE: When the message “E-2305 Abnormal printer

backup memory” appears at the time of the start-up,
click [OK] to clear it.
GD1622
10. Click [OK].
• The “Setup Completion [C-090]” dialog box appears.
14. Select “Yes” for “Auto Cleaning”. (See subsection 9.7.2.)
8-3
8.2 Update
In the “Update”, the FRONTIER 390 System Software(A1) is • The Procedure Selection 1 [C-001]” screen appears.
upgraded and the printer’s parameter data is reinstalled.
IMPORTANT:
It is not necessary to delete template data. But if more than
50MB of free space is not available in the hard disk, delete
the template data.

ROM drive.
8 6. Select “SE maintenance” and click [Next >].
• The “Procedure Selection 2[C-001]” screen appears.
7. Select “Update”, and click [Next>].
GD1621
4. Press the scanner’s START switch.
• The installer starts and the “[L-001] Simple Upgrade”

screen appears.
• The “Starting Update[C-010]” dialog box appears.
8. Click [Yes].
5. Click [OK].
NOTE: If [Cancel] is clicked, the FRONTIER 390 System

(A1) installation is skipped, and the “Variety Print
Service (B1)” installation screen appears.
8-4
8.2 Update
• System Disk (A1) Version 7.0: The “Paper Lut Selection 11. Select “Install from CD (scanner/printer software update)”,
[C-012]” screen appears. and click [Next>].
9. System Disk (A1) Version 7.0: Click [Next >]. NOTE: If downloading only the printer software, select
8
“Install from hard disk (only printer software)”.
• The message “Capturing the version information of the
printer” appears. • The “Confirmation[C-040]” dialog box appears.
• The free disk space for installation is checked.
NOTE: If enough free space is not available, the error

message “Insufficient disk space on drive D.
Installation not performed.” is displayed. In this case,
delete unnecessary files or template data files, then
start installation again.
12. Make sure that:
• The “File Copy[C-020]” screen appears.
1) The cables of the scanner and printer are firmly
connected.
2) The power cables of the scanner and printer are not

broken.
13. Click [OK].
• The control software is transferred to the printer.
• The former version is turned out.
• Copying starts.
10. Check version information, and click [Next>].
• The “Installation Media Selection[C-030]” screen appears.
8-5
8.2 Update
• The message “Turning out inheritable information” 17. Click [OK].

appears.
• If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is used, the “[L-
• The message “Registering information into registry.” 003] Simple Upgrade” for Variety Print Service screen
appears. appears.
• The “Inherited Data Transport Medium Selection[C-050]” • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is not used, the
screen appears. “Setup” dialog box appears.
14. Select “Inherit data from former version of application in HD”,

and click [Next>].
18. Click [Cancel].

• The message “Restoring inheritable information” appears. is necessary, refer to the Installation Manual for the
• After the end of the process, the “Update Completion [C-
080]” dialog box appears. • The “Setup” dialog box appears.
15. Remove the FRONTIER 350/370 System(A1) Disk from the

CD-ROM drive.
19. Click [OK].

backup memory” appears at the time of the start-up,
click [OK] to clear it.

GD1622
16. Click [OK].
• The “Setup Completion [C-090]” dialog box appears.
20. Select “Yes” for “Auto Cleaning” (See subsection 9.7.2)
8-6
8.3 Reinstallation
The reinstallation procedure is performed after the main control 5. In the “Run” screen, click “Browse”, and in the “Browse”
unit is replaced. screen, select the CD-ROM drive into which you inserted the
system disk, then click [Open].
NOTE: • Make sure the “Scanner’s Backup FD” and “Printer’s
Backup FD” are updated.
• Make sure that the printer’s (LP2500P) breaker is
turned ON and the power switch is turned to STANDBY.
• The Windows NT Desktop screen is displayed.
8
6. In the “Browse” screen, double-click “EZ171” folder, then
double-click “EZSetup”.
2. Execute “[Shift] Starting Up” and rename the “Fujifilm” folder

in the “D” drive such as “Fujifilm-1”, etc. except when the
main control unit has been replaced.

ROM drive.
7. Make sure that “N:\EZ171\Setup.exe” is displayed in the

“Open” box, then click [OK].
GD1621
4. Select “Run” from the “Start” menu.
8-7
8.3 Reinstallation
8. Click [OK]. 12. Click [Yes].
• The “Procedure Selection(A-001)” screen appears. • The control software is downloaded to the LP2500P.
NOTE: If you select “NO”, downloading of the control

software is skipped.
• The reinstallation is started.
8
9. Select “Re-installation” and click [Next].
• Upon completion of the reinstallation, the “FD
Confirmation” dialog box appears.
10. In the “Starting Re-installation” dialog box, click [Yes].
• The “Information(A-110)” dialog box appears.

13. Click [Yes].
14. Click [Yes].
11. Prepare the “Scanner’s Backup FD” and the “Printer’s

Backup FD”. Click [OK].
NOTE: The system checks the hard disk storage space. If

sufficient storage space is not available, an error
message appears. If the error message appears,
format the hard disk using a recovery CD.
• The LP2500P control software is checked. If the versions

of the software on the CD and LP2500P are different, the
“Download Confirmation” dialog box appears.
8-8
8.3 Reinstallation
15. Insert the “Scanner Backup” FD into the FD drive, and click 21. Click [OK].
[OK].
22. Select “Shut Down” from the “Start” menu.
16. Click [Yes].
8
• The “Shut Down Windows” dialog box appears.
17. Remove the “Scanner Backup” FD from the FD drive and
insert the “Printer Backup FD.
18. Click [OK].
• Upon completion of the printer and scanner data backup,

the “Re-installation Completion(A-140)” dialog box
appears.
23. Select “Restart the computer?” and click [Yes].
• The system restarted.

19. Remove the “Printer Backup” FD from the FD drive.
20. Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive, and click
[OK].
• The “Setup Completion(A-150)” dialog box appears.
8-9
8.4 New Installation
The new installation procedure is performed before the 4. In the “Run” screen, click “Browse”, and in the “Browse”
adjustment of the scanner at the factory. In the field, this screen, select the CD-ROM drive into which you inserted the
installation is performed only when the scanner’s backup FD is system disk, then click [Open].
not found when replacing the main control unit.
1. Turn ON the scanner's START switch.
• The Windows NT Desktop screen is displayed.
8
5. In the “Browse” screen, double-click “EZ171” folder, then
double-click “EZSetup”.

ROM drive.
6. Make sure that “N:\EZ171\Setup.exe” is displayed in the

“Open” box, then click [OK].
GD1621
3. Select “Run” from the “Start” menu.
8-10
7. Click [OK]. 10. Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.
• The “Procedure Selection(A-001)” screen appears.

GD1622
11. Click [OK].
• The “Setup Completion(A-030)” dialog box appears.
8
8. Select “New Installation” and click [Next].
12. Click [OK].
13. Select “Shut Down” from the “Start” menu.
9. In the “Starting New Installation” dialog box, click [Yes].
NOTE: The system checks the hard disk storage space. If

sufficient storage space is not available, an error
message appears.
• The installation is started.
• The “Shut Down Windows” dialog box appears.
• Upon completion of the installation, the “New Installation

Completion(A-020)” dialog box appears.
8-11
14. Select “Restart the computer?” and click [Yes]. 19. Perform the post-operational checks, then shut down the
system and restart it.
• The system is restarted and only “3 Post-operational
Check” and “4 Setup and Maintenance” are displayed in • The system is restarted.
the selection box in the Main Menu.
• The message “E-1119 Focus position adjustment for each

carrier not performed.” Appears.
15. Click [OK] to clear the message.
16. Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” - “1 System Operation

Setup and Check” - “F Installation Information Setup” using
the “SE2” mode.
17. In the “41F Installation Information Setup” screen, select

“ON” for “Printer” in the “Scanner” setting area.
• The “Printer” setting area is displayed in the right-hand

side area of the screen.
18. If necessary, set other information.
NOTE: For details on the settings, see “41F Installation

Information Setup” in the “9 Maintenance Menu”.
8-12
8.5 Reversion
This procedure reverts the system software to the previous 6. Select “SE maintenance” and click [Next >].
version.
• The “Procedure Selection 2[C-002]” screen appears.
NOTE: Prepare the Printer’s Backup FD, then perform the “Data
Backup(417)” to overwrite the FD with the backup data. 7. Select “Reversion to previous version”, and click [Next>].

ROM drive.
8
GD1621
8. In the “Starting Version Back [C-100]” dialog box, click [Yes].
• The installer starts and the “[L-001] Simple Upgrade”

screen appears.
NOTE: If enough free space is not available, the error

message “Insufficient disk space on drive D.
Installation not performed.” is displayed. In this case,
delete unnecessary files or template data files, then
start installation again.
• The “Confirmation[C-110]” message appears.
5. Click [OK].
9. Make sure that:
NOTE: If [Cancel] is clicked, the FRONTIER 390 System
(A1) installation is skipped, and the “Variety Print
1) The cables of the scanner and printer are firmly
Service (B1)” installation screen appears.
connected.
• The Procedure Selection 1 [C-001]” screen appears.
2) The power cables of the scanner and printer are not
broken.
10. Click [OK].
• The control software is transferred to the printer.
• Reversion starts.
• The message “Registering information into registry.”

appears.
8-13
8.5 Reversion
• The “Inserting Backup FD” screen appears. 17. Click [OK].
NOTE: If “There is no disk in the drive.” Dialog box appears,

click [Ignore] to clear the box.
• If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is used, the “[L-

003] Simple Upgrade” for Variety Print Service screen
appears.
• If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is not used, the

11. Click [YES].
“Setup” dialog box appears.
• The “Information” dialog box appears.
12. Insert the Printer Backup FD into the floppy disk drive.
13. Click [OK].
• The “Version Back Completion(C-120)” dialog box

appears.
18. Click [Cancel].

is necessary, refer to the Installation Manual for the
• The “Setup” dialog box appears.
14. Remove the FRONTIER 350/370 System(A1) Disk from the

CD-ROM drive.
19. Click [OK].

FRONTIER 350/370 System Disk(A1) backup memory” appears at the time of the start-up,
GD1622 click [OK] to clear it.
15. Remove the Printer Backup FD from the floppy disk drive.
16. Click [OK].
• The “Setup Completion (C-130)” dialog box appears.
20. Select “Yes” for “Auto Cleaning”. (See subsection 9.7.2.)
8-14
8.6 Procedure following the Replacement of the Main Control Unit
Perform the system software installation and the data download

after replacing the main control unit.
1. Prepare the following:
1) New main control unit
2) Scanner Backup FD
3) Printer Backup FD
4) Installer CD
2. Replace the main control unit.
3. Turn the printer power switch to “STANDBY”, and turn ON

the built-in circuit breaker of the printer.
4. Press the START switch of the scanner.
• The main control unit is started up and the Windows NT 8

screen appears.
5. Perform the reinstallation.(See section 8.3.)
6. Restart the system.
7. In response to the “E-2305 Abnormal printer backup

memory” message, click [OK].
• Data is downloaded from the scanner’s main control unit

to the printer.
NOTE: “Initializing printer.” is displayed for about 10 minutes

during the processor upgrade.
NOTE: If a communication error occurs during the

intialization of the printer, loading of the data will fail.
If this happens, perform the following steps.
1. Restart the scanner and printer.

2. Open the “45U Data Download”.
3. Select “All” for item, and click [OK].

All data files are downloaded to the printer.
8-15
9. MAINTENANCE MENU
9.1 Operational Procedure .................................................................................... 9-3

9.1.1 User Identification ............................................................................................. 9-3
9.2 System Operation Setup and Check (41) .................................................. 9-4

9.2.1 Clear Error Log (41E) ....................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.2 Installation Information Setup (41F) .................................................................. 9-4
9.2.3 Shipping Information Reference (41G) ............................................................. 9-5
9.2.4 DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I) ........................................................... 9-5
9.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (42) ........................................................ 9-6

9.3.1 Image Correction Setup (42C) .......................................................................... 9-6
9.3.2 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (42D) ............................................... 9-6
9.3.3 Paper Condition Setup (42J) ............................................................................ 9-6
9
9.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (43) ...................................................... 9-7
9.4.1 I/O Check (43A) ................................................................................................ 9-7
9.4.2 ND Dust Check (43B) ....................................................................................... 9-7
9.4.3 Carrier Focus Position Adjustment (43C) ......................................................... 9-7
9.4.4 Carrier Inclination Display (43D) ....................................................................... 9-9
9.4.5 CCD Data Display (43E) ................................................................................... 9-9
9.4.6 Working Information (43F) ................................................................................ 9-11
9.4.7 Lens Registration (43G) .................................................................................... 9-11
9.4.8 Optical Axis Adjustment (43H) .......................................................................... 9-11
9.4.9 Optical Magnification Calibration (43J) ............................................................. 9-12
9.4.10 Focus Calibration (43K) .................................................................................... 9-13
9.4.11 ND Filter Density Measurement (43N) .............................................................. 9-13
9.4.12 Spectral Calibration (43P) ................................................................................. 9-14
9.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (44) ......................................................... 9-16

9.5.1 NC135Y Sensor Calibration (44A) .................................................................... 9-16
9.5.2 NC240Y Sensor Calibration (44B) .................................................................... 9-16
9.5.3 Installation Information Display (44C) ............................................................... 9-17
9.5.4 Installation Information Setup (44D) ................................................................. 9-17
9.5.5 NC135Y I/O Check (44E) ................................................................................. 9-18
9.5.6 NC240Y I/O Check (44F) .................................................................................. 9-18
9.5.7 MFC10Y I/O Check (44G) ................................................................................ 9-19
9.5.8 NC135Y Working Information (44J) .................................................................. 9-19
9.5.9 NC240Y Working Information (44K) ................................................................. 9-20
9.5.10 MFC10Y Working Information (44L) ................................................................. 9-21
9.5.11 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (44P) ................................................................... 9-22
9.5.12 NC135Y Machine Data Setup (44Q) ................................................................ 9-23
9.5.13 NC240Y Machine Data Setup (44R) ................................................................. 9-24
9.5.14 MFC10Y Machine Data Setup (44S) ................................................................ 9-24
9-1
9.6 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (45) .......................................................... 9-25
9.6.1 Test Pattern Printing (453) ................................................................................ 9-25
9.6.2 Printer I/O Check (45A) .................................................................................... 9-26
9.6.3 Printer Function Select (45B) ............................................................................ 9-26
9.6.4 Laser Exposure Check (45C) ........................................................................... 9-27
9.6.5 R Laser(R-LD) Data (45D) ................................................................................ 9-27
9.6.6 G Laser(G-SHG) Data (45E) ............................................................................ 9-27
9.6.7 B Laser(B-SHG) Data (45F) ............................................................................. 9-28
9.6.8 Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup (45G) .............. 9-28
9.6.9 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (45H) ... 9-28
9.6.10 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (45J) ................................................ 9-29
9.6.11 Laser History Display (45K) .............................................................................. 9-30
9.6.12 Paper Condition Setup Table(LUT) Copy (45L) ................................................ 9-31
9 9.6.13 Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment (45M) ....................................................... 9-31
9.6.14 Back Printer Test (45N) ..................................................................................... 9-32
9.6.15 Printer Operation Data Display (45P) ............................................................... 9-33
9.6.16 Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (45Q) .............................................. 9-33
9.6.17 Clearing All Operation Data (45R) .................................................................... 9-33
9.6.18 Data Saving (45T) ............................................................................................. 9-34
9.6.19 Data Download (45U) ....................................................................................... 9-34
9.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenence (46) ................................................... 9-35

9.7.1 Processor I/O Check (46A) ............................................................................... 9-35
9.7.2 Processor Operating Condition Setup (46B) .................................................... 9-35
9.7.3 Processor Operation Data Display (46C) ......................................................... 9-36
9.7.4 Clearing Selected Operation Data (46D) .......................................................... 9-36
9.7.5 Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E) ....................................................... 9-36
9.8 Optional Adjustment (47) ................................................................................ 9-37

9.8.1 COM Port Setting (47A) .................................................................................... 9-37
9.9 Special Operations (48) ................................................................................... 9-38

9.9.1 Paint (48A) ........................................................................................................ 9-38
9.9.2 Explorer (48B) ................................................................................................... 9-38
9.9.3 Command (48C) ............................................................................................... 9-38
9-2
9.1 Operational Procedure
9.1.1 User Identification 3. Select the desired item from the item list and press its [+]
button.
NOTE: For mouse operations, see the instruction manual “Basic
Operations”. • The sub-item list appears
1. Select “Setup and Maintenance” from the main menu.
4. Move the cursor to the desired item and press the [START]
button.
9
2. Select “SE2” for the user name and enter “7777” for the 9.1.1
password, and press the [OK] button. • Each screen appears.
NOTE: • “SE1” user name is prepared for the user who 5. Perform the operation by following the instructions on the
manages printing quality. The password is “6666”. screen.
• “SE2” user name is prepared for the service
engineer. 6. Upon completion of the setup and maintenance operations,
press the [OK] button to perform processing or [Cancel] to
quit the screen.
• Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
7. Press the [END] menu.
8. Operation returns to the main menu.
• The “Setup and Maintenance” screen appears.
9-3
9.2 System Operation Setup and Check (41)
9.2.1 Clear Error Log (41E) 1. Set the delivery date, startup date, lab ID and type for the
scanner.
[Selection]
2. Select “ON” for “Printer” and set the delivery date and startup
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“41 System Operation date for the printer.
Setup and Check”-“41E Clear Error Log”.
3. Choose the [Option] button.
[Procedure]
Clear the system error and printer error information.
9 4. Select “YES” or “NO” for the “External File I/O”.
5. Choose the [OK] button.

9.2.1
9.2.2 • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
1. Select the item to be cleared and press the [Clear] button. 6. Choose the [OK] button.
• The selected information is cleared. • The message appears.
2. Press the [OK] button.
9.2.2 Installation Information Setup (41F)
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“41 System Operation

Setup and Check”-“41F Installation Information Setup”. 7. Press the [OK] button.
[Procedure] • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
Set the installation information for scanner and printer.
9-4
9.2 System Operation Setup and Check (41)
9.2.3 Shipping Information Reference (41G) 9.2.4 DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I)
[Selection] This menu is used when connecting the optional DI controller.
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“41 System Operation [Selection]

Setup and Check”-“41G Shipping Information Reference”.
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“41 System Operation
[Procedure] and Check”-“41I Manager Administrative Setting”.
Refer to the shipping information.
1. Refer to the model, serial No. and shipping date.
9
9.2.3
9.2.4
“Delete Waiting Time”: Sets up the time until the order
processed on the DI controller is deleted.
“Order Identifier”: Enter “a” for 1st SP-1500 and “b” for 2nd
2. Press the [OK] button. one when two machines are connected to one DI controller.
In this case, the “Device Name” for the 2nd SP-1500 should
• Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen. be changed.
<Example>
Logical Device Name
1st SP-1500 2nd SP-1500
Scanner SP1500input SP1500input-b
Printer (sRGB) SP1500sRGB SP1500sRGB-b
Printer
SP1500PD SP1500PD-b
(F-COLOR/PD)
9-5
9.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (42)
9.3.1 Image Correction Setup (42C) 1. Select the carrier, mask and film types.
This menu is used to enable image correction condition setting 2. Select the print size.
by selecting “Yes” for each item.
3. Select “Rate”
[Selection]
NOTE: Enter “100” % normally. If “98” % or less is entered,
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“42 Print Condition Setup black border on the print may result.
and Check”-“42C Image Correction Setup”.
[Procedure]
Set the image correction type for each input device and input
type.
9.3.3 Paper Condition Setup (42J)
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“42 Print Condition Setup

and Check”-“42J Paper Condition Setup”.
[Procedure]
9
Set the paper condition setup type.
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
1. Set the ten item in the Hyper ACCSS frame.
9.3.2 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting

(42D)
1. Select “YES” for the ambient variable correction.
[Selection]
2. Select “YES” for the master magazine registration.
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“42 Print Condition Setup
and Check”-“42D Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting”.
If “YES” is selected for step “2”, set the ID, width, paper and
type for the master magazine.
[Procedure]
3. Select “AD100” or “AD200” to be used for “Densitometer
Set the fine adjustment values of the print magnification for
selection”.
the film size and print size.
9-6
9.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (43)
9.4.1 I/O Check (43A) 1. Choose the [OK] button.
[Selection] • The dust check is started.
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“43 Scanner Adjustment/ • The messages appear depending on whether the dust is
Maintenance”-“43A I/O Check”. found or not.
[Procedure]
Check the operation of the motors and solenoids, and status

of the sensors.
2. Clean the ND filter if dust is found (see subsection 6.3.2).
9.4.3 Carrier Focus Position Adjustment (43C) 9

[Selection] 9.4.1
9.4.2
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“43 Scanner Adjustment/
9.4.3
Maintenance”-“43C Carrier Focus Position Adjustment”.
• The status of each parts are displayed in real-time.
[Procedure]
1. Press any buttons of the operation commands.
Adjust the carrier focus position of the carrier already
registered.
• The selected operation is driven.
1. Install the NC135Y auto film carrier and select the “Carrier
Focus Position Adjustment” screen.
9.4.2 ND Dust Check (43B)
[Selection]

Maintenance”-“43B ND Dust Check”.
[Procedure]
Scan the ND filter and check the dusts on it.
9-7
2. Choose the [Run] button. 8. Insert the negative cartridge into the carrier.
3. Insert a piece negative with four to six frames into the carrier.
• The focus position adjustment starts.
9. Select the “Carrier Focus Position Adjustment” screen.
9
9.4.3
4. Choose the [Regist] button.
5. Install the NC240Y auto film carrier.
6. Select the “Carrier Focus Position Adjustment” screen.
10. Choose the [Run] button of the “Strips”.
11. Insert the negative strip into the carrier.
7. Choose the [Run] button of the “Cartridge”.
12. Choose the [Regist] button.
9-8
9.4.4 Carrier Inclination Display (43D) • The auto focus is started and the focus pulse positions in
the fornt and rear sides of the carrier are displayed.
[Selection]

Maintenance”-“43D Carrier Inclination Display”.
[Procedure]
Check the status of the carrier inclination.
3. Install the NC240Y film carrier.
4. Press the [AF] buttton.

9
• The auto focus is started and the focus pulse positions in
the fornt and rear sides of the carrier are displayed. 9.4.4
9.4.5
2. Press the [AF] buttton.
9.4.5 CCD Data Display (43E) [Selection]
Use this mode to confirm the CCD settings when there is a CCD- Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“43 Scanner Adjustment/
related imegularity or when lines appear in prints due to dust or Maintenance”-“43E CCD Data Display”.
dirt on the CCD.
[Procedure]
Read the CCD data and display the values in real-time.
Display time setting boxes

Brightness correction
button
Brightness correction ON
Graph display switches switch
Graph stop button Darkness correction button
Real time graph display buttons Darkness correction ON
Cursor position button button
Cursor position setting box Reference data creation
Switch to move the cursor to the button
center Dust check button
Display scaling buttons S/N value display button
Y-axis display range setting box Save button
Lens magnification setting box End button
Auto focus button Window open button
All screen display button Number of signal/noise samples setting box
NOTE: Data become effective when the cursor Screen right/left moving buttons Quantity of light setting box (same as the light
is moved to another field after entering. source aperture)
9-9
1. Click [ ]. 3. To check the S/N inspection result, click [S/N value disp.].
4. To perform the brightness correction, click [Bright correct].

Select the “Bright cor. ON” to display the brightness
correction data.
5. To perform the darkness correction, click [Dark correct].

Select the “Dark cor. ON” to display the darkness correction
2. When changing the pulse position of the motor, click [Status
data.
change] to open the “Status Change” dialogue box.
6. Click [Reference create] to obtain reference data for
9 NOTE: The pulse position of the motor should not be
changed except when there is a special instruction
checking for dust.
9.4.5 from FUJI FILM.

1) Remove the film carrier.
2) Replace the mirror box with the standard mirror box (P/N
96A21424A00).
Mirror Box
Item Function Reference Mirror Box (P/N 96A21424A00)

EZ1816
Light source aperture Sets the pulse position of the light
source aperture motor. (0 to 130) 3) With the film carrier removed, click [Reference create].
Balance filter Sets the positions (negative or
positive) of the balance filter motor.
Shutter Sets the pulse position of the
shutter motor.
Conjugate length Sets the pulse position of the
conjugate length motor.
(0 to 11,000)
Lens Sets the pulse position of the lens
motor. (0 to 800)
NOTE: Click [Home shift] to shift the motor to the home

position.
9-10
4) Click [OK]. 9.4.7 Lens Registration (43G)
[Selection]

Maintenance”-“43G Lens Registration”.
[Procedure]
Set the lens ID to be used and its focal length.
5) Click [OK].
7. Click [Dust Check] to check dust on the carrier mask.
NOTE: Install the film carrier when performing the dust

9
check.
9.4.6
8. Click [END]. 9.4.7
9.4.8
• Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen. • The current status is displayed.
1. Enter the lens ID number and the lens focal distance

indicated on the label attached to the lens unit.
9.4.6 Working Information (43F)
[Selection]
Maintenance”-“43F Working Information”.
[Procedure] 9.4.8 Optical Axis Adjustment (43H)
Display the working information of the scanner. [Selection]

Maintenance”-“43H Optical Axis Adjustment”.
[Procedure]
Adjust the optical axis of the image by moving the film carrier
base.
1. To clear the working information, press the [clear data]

button.
• The magnification setting is 0.6 when the screen is

opened.
9-11
1. Install the dedicated chart jig to the carrier base. 6. Click [1.3].
• The projection magnification is changed to 1.3.
7. Click [AF].
• The calculated value of 1.3 magnification is displayed in

the “Axis Def.” column in real time.
8. Fine adjust the carrier base so that “Front/Rear” and “Right/

Left” deflections fall within the range (OK).
9. If the optical axis deflection and image rotation values are

within the specified ranges for both magnifications, tighten
the hexagonal socket head bolts securely.
Jig with Chart
EZ1460 10. Click [OK].
2. Loosen the four hexagonal socket head bolts securing the • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
carrier base.
9.4.9 Optical Magnification Calibration (43J)

9
[Selection]
9.4.9
Maintenance”-“43J Optical Magnification Calibration”.
[Procedure]
Perform the optical magnification calibration.
Focusing Chart Jig

(P/N 96A21423A00)
Hexagonal Socket Head Bolts(4)

EZ1829
3. Click [AF].
• The calculated values of 0.6 magnification are displayed in

the “Axis Def.” and “Image rotation” columns in real time.
4. Adjust the carrier base position so that the three sets of three
lines appear on the right and left on the screen as shown.
• The current status is displayed.
1. Set the dedicated chart jig to the carrier base.
5. If the data is out of range (NG = more than 20), move the
base together with the jig so that “Axis deflection” and
“Image rotation” fall within the range (OK), while making sure Jig with Chart
the three sets of three lines appear on the screen.
EZ1460
9-12
2. Press the [Run] button. 9.4.11 ND Filter Density Measurement (43N)

• The optical magnification calibration is performed. [Selection]
• The result is displayed. Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” - “43 Scanner Adjustment/
Maintenance” - “43N ND Filter Density Measurement”.
[Procedure]
Measure the density of the ND filter.
9.4.10 Focus Calibration (43K)
[Selection]

Maintenance”-“43K Focus Calibration”.
[Procedure]
Perform the focus calibration.
9
9.4.10
9.4.11
1. Install the carrier and choose the [OK] button.
• Density measurement starts.
1. Set the dedicated chart jig to the carrier base.

• The message window disappears.
Jig with Chart

EZ1460
2. Press the [Create table] button.
• The focus calibration is performed.
• The result is displayed.
9-13
9.4.12 Spectral Calibration (43P) 5. Install the 135M mask and insert the chart No. 10010023 into
the mask.
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” - “43 Scanner Adjustment/
Maintenance” - “43P Spectral Calibration”. • The scanner reads the image of the chart.
[Procedure]
Perform the spectral calibration using the following tools.
Tools: - IT-8 charts/Floppy disk set

- MFC10Y multi-film carrier
- 135M mask
9
NOTE: If the image on the screen is abnormal, choose the
9.4.12 [Read again] button to read the image again.
7. Correct the position of the blocks into the center of the

patches by using the arrow keys.
1. Install the MFC10Y without the mask.
2. Insert the floppy disk into the main control unit.
• The main control unit reads the floppy disk.
• The bright correction starts.
9. Replace the chart with No. 10020023.
9-14
• The scanner reads the image of the chart.
NOTE: If the image on the screen is abnormal, choose the

[Read again] button to read the image again.
9
11. Correct the position of the blocks into the center of the
patches by using the arrow keys. 9.4.12
13. Repeat steps 9 to 12 for chart No. 10030023, No. 10040023,

No. 10050023, No. 10060023 and No. 10070023 by following
the indications on the screen.
15. Remove the floppy disk from the main control unit.
9-15
9.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (44)
9.5.1 NC135Y Sensor Calibration (44A) 9.5.2 NC240Y Sensor Calibration (44B)
[Selection] [Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“44 Carrier Adjustment/ Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“44 Carrier Adjustment/
Maintenance”-“44A NC135Y Sensor Calibration”. Maintenance”-“44B NC240Y Sensor Calibration”.
[Procedure] [Procedure]
Perform the calibration of the optical sensor. Perform the calibration of the optical sensor.
1. Check that no film is installed in the carrier. 1. Check that no film is installed in the carrier.
9
9.5.1
9.5.2
2. Choose the [OK] button. 2. Choose the [OK] button.
• The message appears. • The message appears.

• The calibration results are displayed.
• The calibration results are displayed.
4. Choose the [Cancel] button.

4. Choose the [Cancel] button.
9-16
9.5.3 Installation Information Display (44C) 9.5.4 Installation Information Setup (44D)
Maintenance”-“44C Installation Information Display”. Maintenance”-“44D Installation Information Setup”.
Check the serial No. and hard revision No. Set the serial No. and hard revision No.
1. Install the NC135Y film carrier. 1. Install the NC135Y film carrier.
2. Open the “Installation Information Display” menu.
9
9.5.3
9.5.4
2. Set the serial No.
3. Press the [OK] button. 3. Set the hardware revision.
• Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen. 4. Choose the [OK] button.
4. Install the NC240Y film carrier. • The values are registered into the carrier.
5. Open the “Installation Information Display” menu. 5. Install the NC240Y film carrier.
6. Press the [OK] button. 6. Perform the steps 2 to 4.
• Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen. • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
9-17
9.5.5 NC135Y I/O Check (44E) 4. Click [OK].
[Selection] • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“44 Carrier Adjustment/

Maintenance”-“44E NC135Y I/O Check”. 9.5.6 NC240Y I/O Check (44F)
[Procedure] [Selection]
Check the operation of the motors and solenoids, and the
status of the sensors.
Maintenance”-“44F NC240Y I/O Check”.
[Procedure]
Check the operation of the motors and solenoids, and the

status of the sensors.
9
9.5.5
9.5.6
1. Connect the NC135Y carrier to the plug-in connector of the

scanner with the carrier extension cable (P/N 111A8993590).
1. Connect the NC240Y carrier to the plug-in connector of the

scanner with the carrier extension cable (P/N 111A8993590).
Carrier Extension Cable

(P/N 111A8993590)
EZ1827
2. Open the “44E NC135Y I/O Check” screen.

3. Click the operation command buttons and check if each part (P/N 111A8993590)
is operating normally.
EZ1827
L400: [ON] → LED ON

2. Open the “44F NC240Y I/O Check” screen.
M401: [OFF] → Motor stop
[Right] → Rear pawl rise
3. Click the operation command buttons and check if each part
[Both] → Both pawls rise
is normally operated.
[Left] → Front pawl rise
M403: [P] → Panorama size
D441: [Open] → Door open
[HV] → HV size
[Close] → Door close
[F] → Full size
L440: [ON] → LED ON
[Pre] → Pre-scanning position
M442: [Drive] → Spool motor drive
[Focus] → Focus position
M444: [Drive] → Cartridge motor drive
S400 ~ S402: [OFF] → Reduction clutch OFF
S440 ~ S442: [OFF] → Reduction clutch OFF
[1: ON] → Reduction clutch 1 ON
M400: [Pre] → Pre-scanning
[Pre] → Pre-scanning
[Fine] → Fine-scanning
[Fine] → Fine-scanning
9-18
4. Click [OK]. 9.5.8 NC135Y Working Information (44J)

• Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen. [Selection]

9.5.7 MFC10Y I/O Check (44G) Maintenance”-“44J NC135Y Working Information”.
[Selection] [Procedure]
Check the NC135Y working information. If required, save the

working information to the memory in the carrier or to a
Maintenance”-“44G MFC10Y I/O Check”
floppy disk.
[Procedure]
This procedure displays the status of the motors, solenoids

and sensors.
9
9.5.7
9.5.8
1. Click [Write Working Info.].
• The “Select destination for write.” box appears.
NOTE: Refer to the MFC10Y Service Manual for input and

output parts location.
1. Connect the multi-film carrier MFC10Y to the plug-in

connector on the scanner using the carrier extension cable
as shown.
2. Select “Carrier EEPROM” or “FD”.
3. If “FD” is selected, insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk

drive.
4. Click [Start].
• The following message appears.

EZ1828
2. Proceed to menu 44G.
3. Press the button of the output command and check if each

part operates normally.
4. Click [OK].
9-19
5. Click [OK]. 9.5.9 NC240Y Working Information (44K)

• Data saving starts. [Selection]
• After the completion of saving, the following message Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“44 Carrier Adjustment/
appears. Maintenance”-“44K NC240Y Working Information”.
[Procedure]
Check the NC240Y working information. If required, save the

working information to the memory in the carrier or to a
floppy disk.
6. Click [OK].
• The message disappears.
7. Click [All Clear] when clearing the data.
9 • The following message appears.
9.5.9
1. Click [Write Working Info.].
• The “Select destination for write.” box appears.
8. Click [OK] to clear the data.
9. Click [OK].
2. Select “Carrier EEPROM” or “FD”.
3. If “FD” is selected, insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk

drive.
4. Click [Start].
9-20
5. Click [OK]. 9.5.10 MFC10Y Working Information (44L)

• Data saving starts. [Selection]
• After completion of saving, the following message Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“44 Carrier Adjustment/
appears. Maintenance”-“44L MFC10Y Working Information”
[Procedure]
Confirm the MFC10Y working information. The working

information can be written to the EEPROM of the carrier or
floppy disk before returning the carrier to the factory.
6. Click [OK].
7. Click [All Clear] when clearing the data.
• The following message appears. 9

9.5.10
1. Select the “Mask Type”.
Mask Type: 135F

135 Mount
8. Click [OK] to clear the data. 135P
135HV
• The message disappears. 135H
240
9. Click [OK]. 240 Mount
6 × 4.5
• Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen. 6×6
6×7
6×8
6×9
110
126
2. Click [Write Working Info].
• The dialog below appears.
3. Select the “Carrier EEPROM” or “FD”.
4. Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive of the main control
unit.
9-21
5. Click [Start]. 4) All data are cleared and message disappears.
• The dialog box below appears.
6. Click [OK].
• Writing starts.
• When writing is completed, the dialog box below appears.

8. Click [OK].

9
9.5.11 9.5.11 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (44P)
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” - “44 Carrier Adjustment/

7. Click [OK]. Maintenance” - “44P Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete”.
• The dialog box disappears. [Procedure]

NOTE: To clear the data, follow the steps below. Backup: The carrier mechanical data memorized in the
memory on the film carrier are stored in the hard
1) Click [Clear] to clear each data. disk on the main control unit when initial
installation of the machine, etc.
• The data are cleared.
Download: The carrier mechanical data stored in the hard
2) Click [All Clear] to clear all data. disk are downloaded to the memory on the film
carrier after replacing the carrier circuit board.
Delete: The carrier mechanical data stored in the hard
disk are deleted.
3) Click [OK].
9-22
1. Install the film carrier. 9.5.12 NC135Y Machine Data Setup (44Q)
• The carrier ID and type are displayed in the “Installed [Selection]
carrier” box.
• If the carrier data is already saved, the carrier ID and type Maintenance”-“44Q NC135Y Machine Data Setup”.
are displayed in the “Backup completion carrier” box.
[Procedure]
• If the data for two or more same type carriers are saved,
all carrier ID and types are listed in the “Backup Set the machine data of the NC135Y film carrier.
completion carrier” box.
2. Backup:
2. Open the “NC135Y Machine Data Setup” screen.
1) Choose the [Backup] button.
• The data is saved from the installed carrier to the hard

disk.
• After completion of saving, the carrier ID and type are
listed in the “Backup completion carrier” box.
3. Download:
1) Select the carrier ID and type to be downloaded from the 9

“Backup completion carrier” box.
9.5.12
2) Choose the [Download] button.
• The data saved are downloaded from the hard disk to

the carrier circuit board.
4. Delete:
3. Check the values.
1) Select the carrier ID and type to be deleted from the
“Backup completion carrier” box. NOTE: The values should not be changed except when
there is a special instruction from FUJI FILM.
2) Choose the [Delete] button.
• The data are deleted from the hard disk.
5. Press the [Close] button.
9-23
9.5.13 NC240Y Machine Data Setup (44R) 9.5.14 MFC10Y Machine Data Setup (44S)
Maintenance”-“44R NC240Y Machine Data Setup”. Maintenance”-“44S MFC10Y Machine Data Setup”
Set the machine data of the NC240Y film carrier. This procedure displays the machine data of the MFC10Y.
1. Install the NC240Y film carrier. 1. Install the MFC10Y.
2. Open the “NC240Y Machine Data Setup” screen. 2. Open the “MFC10Y Machine Data Setup” screen.
9
9.5.13
9.5.14

NOTE: The values should not be changed except when
there is a special instruction from FUJI FILM. NOTE: The values should not be changed except when
there is a special instruction from FUJIFILM.
4. Click [OK].
9-24
9.6 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (45)
9.6.1 Test Pattern Printing (453) Bordered contact
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“45 Printer Adjustment/

Maintenance”-“453 Test Pattern Printing”.
[Procedure]
Create the test pattern prints.
Gradation Step wedge
9
9.6.1
1. Move the cursor to the “Test pattern selection”, and select

“Grid”, “Border-less contact”, “Bordered contact”, “Gradation”
or “Step wedge”.
Grid
Border-less contact
2. Move the cursor to the “Feed length” and enter “254” (mm).
3. Press the [Print] button.
• The message “Printing the test pattern print” appears.
• After about 5 minutes, the print is outputted to the large

size tray.
9-25
4. Move the cursor to the “Magazine”, select another magazine

and press the [Print] button.
NOTE: Perform the test pattern print for all the magazines to
be used.
5. Use the magnifying lens (X25) to check that the vertical line
for the color drift is within 1/8 pixel width, and the horizontal
line within 1/4 pixel width.
REFERENCE:
1 pixel width = 0.08mm
6. Press the [End] button.
1. Press any buttons of the operation commands.

9.6.2 Printer I/O Check (45A) • The selected operation is driven.
[Selection] 2. Press the [Cancel] button.
9 Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“45 Printer Adjustment/ • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
Maintenance”-“45A Printer I/O Check”.
9.6.2
9.6.3 [Procedure]
9.6.3 Printer Function Select (45B)
Check the operation of the motors and solenoids, and status
of the sensors. [Selection]

Maintenance”-“45B Printer Function Select”.
[Procedure]
Set the distribution and back-printing functions.
1. Normally select “U/L” for “Magazine”. When the upper or

lower magazine is not used, select “No U” or “No L”.
2. Select “YES” or “NO” for the distribution.
3. Select “No” for “Leading end positioning fork” when the fork
is eliminated for modification.
NOTE: The distribution section moves to the following • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
position by choosing the button.
[Waiting] : Waiting position
[Rise] : Distribution position
[Decent] : Adsorption position
9-26
9.6.4 Laser Exposure Check (45C) Reference:

Deterioration detecting current: Current value (120% of
[Selection] actuary measured value at factory) memorized in ROM at
the factory. If LD current measurement value (displayed on
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“45 Printer Adjustment/ menu 45C screen) exceeds this value, the error message
Maintenance”-“45C Laser Exposure Check”. E-2509 will be displayed.
[Procedure] 1. Press the [OK] button.
Perform the RGB test exposure and check the operation. • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
9.6.6 G Laser(G-SHG) Data (45E)
[Selection]

Maintenance”-“45E G Laser(G-SHG) Data”.
[Procedure]
Display the G laser(G-SHG) data on the EEPROM.

9
9.6.4
9.6.5
9.6.6
Reference:
LD current measurement value: Actuary measured current
value displayed on menu 45K “Laser History Display”
screen.
9.6.5 R Laser(R-LD) Data (45D)
[Selection] Reference:
Deterioration detecting current: Current value (Actuary
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“45 Printer Adjustment/ measured value at factory + 40mA) memorized in ROM at
Maintenance”-“45D R Laser(R-LD) Data”. the factory. If LD current measurement value (displayed on
menu 45C screen) exceeds this value, the error message
[Procedure] E-2510 will be displayed.
Display the R laser(R-LD) data on the EEPROM. 1. Press the [OK] button.
9-27
9.6.7 B Laser(B-SHG) Data (45F) 9.6.9 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/

Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment
[Selection] (45H)
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“45 Printer Adjustment/ [Selection]
Maintenance”-“45F B Laser(B-SHG) Data”.
[Procedure] Maintenance”-“45H Main Scanning Position Adjustment/
Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment”.
Display the B laser(B-SHG) data on the EEPROM.
[Procedure]
Perform the scanning adjustment and laser beam

synchronization rough adjustment.
9
9.6.7
9.6.8
9.6.9
Reference:
Deterioration detecting current: Current value (Actuary
measured value at factory + 40mA) memorized in ROM at
the factory. If LD current measurement value (displayed on
menu 45C screen) exceeds this value, the error message 1. Press the [Print] button.
E-2511 will be displayed.
9.6.8 Scanning Position/Scanning Home

Position Parameter Setup (45G)
[Selection]

Maintenance”-“45G Scanning Position/Scanning Home
Position Parameter Setup”.
[Procedure]
Display the parameters for exposure positions.
9-28
• After about 5 minutes, the print is outputted to the large 12. Press the [Enter] button of the “Coordinate with least amount
size tray. of color drift”.
13. Choose the [End] button.
C • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
A B 9.6.10 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print

(45J)
Sub-scanning
(Horizontal) Line
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintence”-“45 Printer Adjustment/

Maintenance”-“45J Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment
Print”.
[Procedure]
Perform the fine adjustment of the laser beam

Main Scanning synchronization.
(Vertical) Line
9
9.6.10
Laser Beam Synchronizing Adjustment Block
2. Measure A, B and C shown on the screen and record each

value.
Accuracy: ±0.5mm
1. Move the cursor to the “Order of drifted colors for main
3. Move the cursor to the “A: Left measured value” and enter scanning” and enter the measured X value measured in
“A” value. “Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync.
Rough Adjustment (Menu 45H)”.
4. Move the cursor to the “B: Right measured value” and enter
“B” value. 2. Move the cursor to the “Order of drifted colors for sub-
scanning” and enter the measured Y value measured in
5. Press the [Enter] button. “Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync.
Rough Adjustment (Menu 45H)”.
6. Move the cursor to the “C: Top measured value” and enter
“C” value. 3. Choose the [Print] button.
7. Press the [Enter] button.
8. Find the best X coordinate which has the most little color
skew on the output print for the vertical lines using the
magnifier (x20-40), and enter the coordinate value and the
drifted color(CMY) order from left.
9. Find the best Y coordinate which has the most little color
skew on the output print for the horizontal lines using the
magnifier (x20-40), and enter the coordinate value and
drifted color(CMY) order from top.
10. Move the cursor to the “X(Width)” and enter the measured X
value
11. Move the cursor to the “Y(Width)” and enter the measured Y
value.
9-29
• The print is outputted to the large-size tray. 9.6.11 Laser History Display (45K)
[Selection]

Maintenance”-“45K Laser History Display”.
[Procedure]
LD current measurement values displayed on the menu 45C

“Laser Exposure Check” screen are recorded.
Display the exposure time and current value of R-LD, G-

SHG and B-SHG.
9
9.6.11
4. Find the best XY coordinate which has the most little color
This abnormal kinked line is recorded when the system is shut
skew on the output print for the horizontal lines using the downed forcibly at printer (laser) initialization while starting up
magnifier (x20-40), and enter its number. the system.
5. Move the cursor to the “Best main scanning position” and 1. Press the [Switch display] to switch between the graph and
enter its number. numeric displays.
6. Move the cursor to the “Best sub-scanning position” and

enter its number.
9-30
9.6.12 Paper Condition Setup Table(LUT) Copy <Input Unit>

(45L) Width Guide : mm
Bottom : pulse
2-line rear : pulse
[Selection] 2-line front : pulse
Top : pulse : pulse
3-line rear : pulse
Maintenance”-“45L Paper Condition Setup Table(LUT)
3-line front : pulse
Copy”.
Stop waiting time : ms
Subscan Motor Speed : 0.1%
[Procedure]
1. Refer to the “Paper Width Guide Adjustment” for “Width
Copy the LUT (Look-up Table) between magazines.
guide” (see subsection 16.3.25 of the second edtion).
2. Enter the adjustment values indicated on the labels attached

to the distribution unit for the “Distribution section” boxes.
2-line Front
3-line Front 3-line Rear 3-line Rear
9
9.6.12
9.6.13
1. Specify the ID of the source magazine.
2. Specify the ID of the destination magazine. Bottom

EZ1599
NOTE: Enter the “Front Up/Down Section Adjustment” value
• The copy is performed and operation returns to the “Setup
in the “Top” box (see subsection 17.2.6 of the second
and Maintenance” screen.
edition).
3. Adjust the “Stop waiting time” by following the procedure

9.6.13 Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment below.
(45M)
1) Open the distribution section door, and turn on the
interlock switch by inserting a paper, etc.
[Selection]
2) Keep the distribution section door open.
Opening: approximately 4cm
Maintenance”-“45M Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment”.
Interlock Switch
[Procedure]
Perform the fine adjustment of the width guide, distribution

section and the sub-scanning motor speed.
Approximately
4cm
EZ1830
3) On the “Paper Feed Length Adjustment (452)” screen

(see section 5.10), feed 10 sheets of paper with the
following conditions.
Paper width: 152mm or less
Set value (feed length): 82.5mm
9-31
4) When the sheets are output to the large-size print tray, 9.6.14 Back Printer Test (45N)
measure the position of the sucker cups. The outer
circumference of the sucker cups must be positioned at [Selection]
a distance of more than 1.2 mm from the leading and
trailing ends of the paper. Select “4 Setup and Maintence”-“45 Printer Adjustment/
Maintenance”-“45N Back Printer Test”.
Feed [Procedure]
Direction
Perform the test print of the back printer.
m
1.2m.
min
m
1.2m.
min
EZ1831
5) If necessary, adjust the value of “Stop waiting time”.

9 • Increase the value to move the sucker cups toward
the leading end of the paper.
9.6.14
• Decrease the value to move the sucker cups toward
the trailing end of the paper.
1. Set the “Q’ty” and “Feed length”.
• An increment/decrement of 5 moves the sucker cups
0.4mm. 2. Select the magazine to be used.
6) Remove the inserted paper to turn off the interlock • The test print is outputted to the large-size tray.
switch, and close the distribution section door.
4. Adjust the “Subscan motor speed” by following the

procedure below.
1) With the “Test Pattern Printing (453)” screen, print the

“Grid” test pattern.
2) When the sheets are output to the large-size print tray,

check if the printed grids are square.
3) If necessary, adjust the value (%) of the corresponding

paper width.
• Increase the value to make the length of the paper

feed direction longer.
• Decrease the value to make the length of the paper

feed direction shorter. 3. Press the [Cancel] button.
5. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
9-32
9.6.15 Printer Operation Data Display (45P) 9.6.17 Clearing All Operation Data (45R)
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” - “45 Printer Adjustment/ Select “4 Setup and Maintence”-“45 Printer Adjustment/
Maintenance” - “45P Printer Operation Data Display”. Maintenance”-“45R Clearing All Operation Data”.
Check printer operation data. Clear all operation data of the printer and processor.
9
9.6.15
9.6.16
9.6.17
1. Press the [OK] button. NOTE: All sorting times and all numbers of prints are not
cleared.
• All operating data is cleared.

9.6.16 Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data
(45Q) 2. choose the [Cancel] button.
[Selection] • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” - “45 Printer Adjustment/

Maintenance” - “45Q Clearing Selected Printer Operation
Data”.
[Procedure]
Each printer operation data can be cleared.
1. Select the item to be cleared.
• The selected data are cleared.
9-33
9.6.18 Data Saving (45T) 9.6.19 Data Download (45U)
Select “4 Setup and Maintence”-“45 Printer Adjustment/ Select “4 Setup and Maintence”-“45 Printer Adjustment/
Maintenance”-“45T Data Saving”. Maintenance”-“45U Data Download”.
Store the printer data into the harddisk of the main control Load the printer data into the printer.
unit.
9
9.6.18
9.6.19
1. Select item to be downloaded.

1. Select item to be saved.
• Data is downloaded.
• Data is saved.
9-34
9.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenence (46)
9.7.1 Processor I/O Check (46A) 1. Press any buttons of the operation commands.
[Selection] • The selected operation is driven.
Select “4 Setup and Maintence”-“46 Processor Adjustment/ 2. Press the [OK] button.
Maintenence”-“46A Processor I/O Check”.
[Procedure]
Check the operation of the motors and solenoids, and status 9.7.2 Processor Operating Condition Setup
of the sensors. (46B)
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintence”-“46 Processor Adjustment/

Maintenence”-“46B Processor Operating Condition Setup”.
[Procedure]
Set the processor’s operating conditions.
9
9.7.1
9.7.2
1. Select “YES” or “NO” for the dryer section preheat.
2. Select “YES” or “NO” for the Rack auto cleaning.
3. Select “YES” or “NO” for the auto intermittent driving.
NOTE: “Auto intermittent driving” is to prevent rollers from

fouling when processing is not performed at night.
4. Select “YES” or “NO” for the paper feed-out switch.
5. Select “Yes” or “NO” for the Ps rack cleaning.
NOTE: “Ps rack cleaning” is to wash the PS crossover racks

before processing. 2 mm pitch reddish streak marks
caused by peeling emulsion layer or black image on
leading end occur on prints may be reduced by
selecting “YES”.
6. Enter the “Sorter Max. No. of Sheets”.
7. Click [OK].

• The status of each parts are displayed in real-time.
9-35
9.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenence (46)
9.7.3 Processor Operation Data Display (46C) 1. Select the item to be cleared.
[Selection] 2. Choose the [OK] button.
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” - “46 Processor • The data of the selected item is cleared.
Adjustment/Maintenance” - “46C Processor Operation Data
Display”. 3. Choose the [Cancel] button.
[Procedure] • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
The processor operation data are displayed. The data can

be cleared on menu 46D (see subsection 9.7.4). 9.7.5 Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E)
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” - “46 Processor

Adjustment/Maintenance” - “46E Processor Operation Data
Display 2”.
[Procedure]
The processor operation data are displayed. The data can be

9 cleared on menu 46D (see subsection 9.7.4).
9.7.3
9.7.4
9.7.5
9.7.4 Clearing Selected Operation Data (46D)
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” - “46 Processor

Adjustment/Maintenance” - “46D Clearing Selected
Operation Data”.
[Procedure]
The processor operation data (displayed on menu 46C and

46E) can be cleared.
9-36
9.8 Optional Adjustment (47)
9.8.1 COM Port Setting (47A)
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintenance”-“47 Option Adjustment/

Maintenance”-“47A COM Port Setting”.
[Procedure]
Select the COM port for the PU800BA and the bar-code
reader.
9
9.8.1
1. Select the COM port for the PU800BA from among “COM1”
through “COM6”.
2. Select the COM port for the bar-code reader from among
“COM1” through “COM6”.
3. Click [OK].
4. Click [OK].
NOTE: The selection will be useful after restarting the

system.
9-37
9.9 Special Operations (48)
9.9.1 Paint (48A) 1. Press the [X] button on the upper side of the screen.
[Selection] NOTE: Be sure not press the emergency button.
Select “4 Setup and Maintence”-“48 Special Operations”- • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.
“48A Paint”.
[Procedure] 9.9.3 Command (48C)

Use the “Paint”.
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintence”-“48 Special Operations”-

“48C Command”.
[Procedure]
Perform the MS-DOS command operations.
9
9.9.1
9.9.2
9.9.3
NOTE: For operations of the “Paint”, see the Windows NT(R)
manual.
1. Press the [X] button on the upper side of the screen.

NOTE: For operations of the “Command”, see the MS-
DOS(TM) manual.
NOTE: Be sure not press the emergency button.
1. Press the [X] button on the upper side of the screen.
9.9.2 Explorer (48B)
[Selection]
Select “4 Setup and Maintence”-“48 Special Operations”-

“48B Explorer”.
[Procedure]
Use the “Explorer”.
NOTE: For operations of the “Explorer”, see the Windows

NT(R) manual.
9-38
10. I/O CHECK
10.1 I/O Parts Diagram ............................................................................................. 10-2

10.1.1 Scanner(SP1500/SP2000) ............................................................................. 10-2
10.1.2 Film Carrier NC135Y ...................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.3 Film Carrier NC240Y ...................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.4 Printer Section ................................................................................................ 10-6
10.1.5 Processor Section ........................................................................................... 10-9
10
10-1
10.1 I/ODiagram
10.1 I/O Parts Parts Diagram
10.1.1 Scanner(SP1500/SP2000)
10
10.1.1
Micro Switch
Motor
Temperature Sensor
Safety Thermostat
Photo-interrupter
Fan
Lamp
EZ1194
10-2
10.1 I/O Parts Diagram
■ Light Source Section
Symbol Name Remark
D201 Light Source Aperture Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter

D202 Balance Filter Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D203 Light Source Aperture Standby Sensor Photo Interrupter
D204 135 Mirror Box Sensor(1) Micro Switch
D205 120 Mirror Box Sensor(2) Micro Switch
D301 Light Source Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch Micro Switch
F302 Light Source Section Suction Fan
F303 Light Source Section Exhaust Fan
L201 Scanning Lamp Halogen Lamp
M201 Light Source Aperture Motor Pulse Motor
M202 Balance Filter Drive Motor Pulse Motor
ST201 Safety Thermostat To monitor the abnormality of the light source section temperature
■ Scanner Section
Symbol Name Remark
D101 CCD20 10
D102 Conjugate Length Variable Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
10.1.1
D103 Conjugate Length Variable Upper Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D104 Conjugate Length Variable Lower Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D105 Lens Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D106 Lens Temperature Sensor IC
D107 Shutter Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D351 Cooling Air Volume Sensor
F301 CCD Cooling Fan
M101 Conjugate Length Variable Motor Pulse Motor
M102 Lens Drive Motor Pulse Motor
M103 Shutter Motor Pulse Motor
■ Electrical Equipment Section
Symbol Name Remark
F304 Image Processing Circuit Board Box Cooling Fan

F305 Image Processing Circuit Board Box Cooling Fan
F306 Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan(L)
F307 Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan(R)
PU351 Compressor
10-3
10.1.2 Film Carrier NC135Y
10
10.1.2
Micro Switch
Light Source Switch
Motor
Solenoid
Photo-interrupter
Display LED
EZ1195
Symbol Name Remark
D400 Film Leading Tip Sensor LED Flood, LED(Green)

D401 Film Leading Tip Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor
D402 Scan Timing Sensor LED Flood, LED(Green)
D403 Scan Timing Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor
D404 Perforation Sensor LED Flood, LED(Green)
D405 Perforation Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor
D406 Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor Micro Switch
D407 Nip Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D409 Film Mask Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D410 Check Tape Sensor LED Flood, LED(Infrared)
D411 Check Tape Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor
L400 Display LED 2-color LED(Red, Green)
M400 Film Feeding Motor Pulse Motor
M401 Soft Nip Drive Motor Pulse Motor
M403 Film Mask Drive Motor Pulse Motor
S400 Reduction Clutch 1 Solenoid Clutch
10-4
10.1.3 Film Carrier NC240Y
Micro Switch
Light Source Switch
Motor 10
Solenoid 10.1.3
Photo-interrupter
Display LED
EZ1196
Symbol Name Remark
D441 Door Open/Close Sensor Photo Interrupter

D442 VEI(Status Mark) Sensor Photo Interrupter
D443 Chucking Sensor Photo Interrupter
D444 Feeding Stop Sensor Photo Interrupter
D445 IPI(Unexposed Tab) Sensor Photo Interrupter
D446 Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor Micro Switch
D447 MTP(Positioning Perforation) Sensor 1 LED Flood, LED(Green)
D448 TAP(Turn-around Perforation) Sensor LED Flood, LED(Green)
D449 C-side Read Magnetic Head
D450 P-side Read Magnetic Head
D451 C-side Write Magnetic Head
D452 P-side Write Magnetic Head
D453 MTP(Positioning Perforation) Sensor 2 Photo, Photo-transistor
D454 MTP(Positioning Perforation) Sensor 1 Photo, Photo-transistor
D455 TAP(Turn-around Perforation) Sensor Photo, Photo-transistor
D456 Cartridge Sensor Photo Interrupter
D457 MTP(Positioning Perforation) Sensor 2 LED Flood, LED(Green)
L440 Display LED 2-color LED(Red, Green)
M440 Film Feeding Motor Pulse Motor
M441 Door Open/Close Motor Pulse Motor
M442 Spool Motor Pulse Motor
M444 Cartridge Motor DC Motor
10-5
10.1.4 Printer Section
10
10.1.4
Micro Switch
Light Source Switch
Motor
Solenoid
Temperature Sensor
Photo-interrupter
Fan EZ1197
10-6
■ Paper Feeding Section
Symbol Name Remark
D500~D504 Upper Magazine ID Sensor Photo Interrupter

D505 Upper Paper End Sensor Photo Interrupter
D506 Upper Splice Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D507 Upper Cutter Home Position Sensor(Open) Photo Interrupter
D508 Upper Cutter Home Position Sensor(Close) Photo Interrupter
D520~D524 Lower Magazine ID Sensor Photo Interrupter
D525 Lower Paper End Sensor Photo Interrupter
D526 Lower Splice Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D527 Lower Cutter Home Position Sensor(Open) Photo Interrupter
D528 Lower Cutter Home Position Sensor(Close) Photo Interrupter
D541 Middle Side Door Section Paper Sensor Photo Interrupter
D544 Back Printer Sensor Micro Switch
D547 Upper Side Door Section Nip Release Sensor Photo Interrupter
D552 Lower Side Door Section Paper Sensor Photo Interrupter
D580 Magazine Section Door Sensor Interlock Switch Micro Switch
D581A/B Lower Side Door Sensor Interlock Switch Micro Switch
D582A/B Middle Side Door Sensor Interlock Switch Micro Switch 10
D583A/B Upper Side Door Sensor Interlock Switch Micro Switch
10.1.4
F594 Magazine Section Cooling Fan
M500 Upper Cutter Motor DC Motor
M501 Upper Paper Supply Motor Pulse Motor
M520 Lower Cutter Motor DC Motor
M521 Lower Side Paper Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M540 Middle Side Door Turn Section Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M541 Middle Side Door Section Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M542 Upper Side Door Section Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M545 Upper Side Door Section Nip Release Motor Pulse Motor
M550 Lower Side Door Turn Section Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M551 Lower Side Door Section Feed Motor Pulse Motor
THA20 Ambient Temperature Sensor IC
■ Exposure Section
Symbol Name Remark
D560 Exposure Section Feed Unit Paper Sensor Photo Interrupter

D561 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D562 Pre-exposure Paper Sensor Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D563 Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D564 Fork Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D566 Exposure Section Nip Release Sensor Photo Interrupter
D585A/B Exposure Section Front Cover Detecting Interlock Switch Micro Switch
F565 Exposure Section Nip Motor Cooling Fan
F585 Exposure Section Cooling Fan
F620 Exposure Section Anti-dust Pressure Fan 1
10-7
Symbol Name Remark
M560 Pre-exposure Feed Motor Pulse Motor

M561 Sub-scanning Motor Pulse Motor
M563 Paper Width Guide Motor Pulse Motor
M565 Exposure Section Nip Motor Pulse Motor
THA1-2 Ambient Temperature Sensor IC
■ Distribution Section
Symbol Name Remark
D571 Processor Entrance 1 Sensor(Rear) Flood LED, Photo-transistor

D572 Processor Entrance 2 Sensor(Middle) Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D573 Processor Entrance 3 Sensor(Front) Flood LED, Photo-transistor
D574 Distribution Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D575 Lowering Home Position Sensor Photo Interrupter
D584A/B Distribution Section Door Sensor Interlock Switch Micro Switch
M570 Distribution Section Feed Motor Pulse Motor
M571 Distribution Motor Pulse Motor
10 M572 Distribution Up/Down Motor Pulse Motor
S570 Distribution Section Solenoid Valve A
10.1.4
S571 Distribution Section Solenoid Valve B
■ Printer Electrical Equipment Section
Symbol Name Remark
F582 Printer Control Section Cooling Exhaust Fan 1

F587 Printer Control Section Cooling Suction Fan 1
F588 Printer Control Section Cooling Suction Fan 2
F589 FMC20Circuit Board Cooling Fan 1 Fan 1 has been eliminated.
F590 FMC20Circuit Board Cooling Fan 2 Fan 2 has been eliminated.
F591 AOM Driver Cooling Fan 1
F595 DC Power Supply Unit Exhaust Fan
10-8
10.1.5 Processor Section
10
10.1.5
T T T T
Micro Switch
Motor
Solenoid
Temperature Sensor
Safety Thermostat
Heater
Solution Lebel Sensor
Pump
Switch
Photo-interrupter
Fan
EZ1198
10-9
■ Processor Section
Symbol Name Remark
D790 Processor Cover Detecting Interlock Switch Micro Switch

D791 Dryer Entrance Rack Cover Detecting Interlock Switch Micro Switch
F790 Processor Exhaust Fan 1
F791 Processor Exhaust Fan 2
F792 Processor Control Section Cooling Fan
M700 Processor Drive Motor DC Motor
■ Processing Solution Circulation System
Symbol Name Remark
D710 Safety Thermostat(P1) To monitor the abnormality of the heater temperature

D711 Safety Thermostat(P2) To monitor the abnormality of the heater temperature
D712 Safety Thermostat(PS1/PS2) To monitor the abnormality of the heater temperature
D713 Safety Thermostat(PS3/PS4) To monitor the abnormality of the heater temperature
F710 Heater Cooling Fan(P1)
F711 Heater Cooling Fan(P2)
10 F712 Heater Cooling Fan(PS1/PS2)
F713 Heater Cooling Fan(PS3/PS4)
10.1.5
FS700 Processing Solution Level Sensor(P1)
FS701 Processing Solution Level Sensor(P2)
FS702 Processing Solution Level Sensor(PS1)
H710 Processing Solution Heater(P1)
H711 Processing Solution Heater(P2)
H712 Processing Solution Heater(PS1/PS2)
H713 Processing Solution Heater(PS3/PS4)
PU710 Circulation Pump(P1)
PU711 Circulation Pump(P2)
PU712 Circulation Pump(PS1)
TS700 Processing Solution Temperature Sensor(P1)
TS701 Processing Solution Temperature Sensor(P2)
TS702 Processing Solution Temperature Sensor(PS1, PS2)
TS703 Processing Solution Temperature Sensor(PS3, PS4)
10-10
■ Processing Solution Replenisher/Auto Washing System
Symbol Name Remark
D741 Cartridge Setting Sensor Photo Interrupter

D742 Cartridge Box Upper Sensor Photo Interrupter
D743 Cartridge Box Lower Sensor Photo Interrupter
D744 Replenisher Port Door Detecting Interlock SW Micro Switch
FS740 P1-R Upper Level Sensor
FS741 P2-RA Upper Level Sensor
FS742 P2-RB Upper Level Sensor
FS743 PS-R Upper Level Sensor
FS745 P1-R Lower Level Sensor
FS746 P2-RA Lower Level Sensor
FS747 P2-RB Lower Level Sensor
FS748 PS-R Lower Level Sensor
FS749 Internal Waste Solution Level Sensor
M740 Cartridge Opening Motor Pulse Motor
PU740 Auto Washing Pump
PU741 P1-R Replenisher Pump
PU742 P2-RA Replenisher Pump 10
PU743 P2-RB Replenisher Pump
10.1.5
PU744 PS-R Replenisher Pump
S720 Rack Front Side Washing Valve(P1)
S721 Rack Rear Side Washing Valve(P1)
S722 Rack Front Side Washing Valve(P2)
S723 Rack Rear Side Washing Valve(P2)
S724 Rack Front Side Washing Valve(PS1/PS2)
S725 Rack Rear Side Washing Valve(PS1/PS2)
S726 Rack Front Side Washing Valve(PS3/PS4)
S727 Rack Rear Side Washing Valve(PS3/PS4)
S740 Cartridge Washing Valve(P1-R)
S741 Cartridge Washing Valve(P2-RA)
S742 Cartridge Washing Valve(P2-RB)
S743 P1-R Stirring Valve
■ Dryer Section
Symbol Name Remark
D760 Safety Thermostat To monitor the dryer heater abnormality

D781 Dryer Section Front Cover Detecting Interlock Switch Micro Switch
F760 Dryer Fan
H760 Dryer Heater
TS760 Dryer Temperature Sensor Thermistor
10-11
■ Print Exit Section
Symbol Name Remark
D771 Paper Front-line Sensor Photo Interrupter

D772 Paper Middle-line Sensor Photo Interrupter
D773 Paper Rear-line Sensor Photo Interrupter
M770 Dryer Section Drive Motor Pulse Motor
S770 Path Switching Solenoid
■ Sorter SU1100Y
Symbol Name Remark
D774 Tray Stop Position Sensor Photo Interrupter

D775A Full(last 2) Sensor Photo Interrupter
D775B Full(complete) Sensor Photo Interrupter
M771 Sorter Drive Motor DC Motor
SWA20 1-order Feeding Switch
10
10.1.5
10-12
11. OPERATION SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................ 11-3
11.1 Monitor and Keyboard ................................................................................. 11-4

11.1.1 Monitor Replacement .................................................................................... 11-4
11.1.2 Table Left Cover Removal/Re-installation ..................................................... 11-4
11.1.3 Operation Keyboard/KYA20 Circuit Board Replacement .............................. 11-4
11.1.4 Full Keyboard Replacement ......................................................................... 11-5
11.1.5 Mouse Replacement ..................................................................................... 11-5
11.1.6 Plug-in Connector for Film Carrier Replacement .......................................... 11-5
11.1.7 Film Carrier Ball Catch Replacement ........................................................... 11-6
11.1.8 15-inch Monitor Color Adjustment ................................................................. 11-7
11.1.9 17-inch Monitor Color Adjustment ................................................................. 11-7
11.2 Auto Film Carrier NC135Y .......................................................................... 11-8

11.2.1 Upper Cover Removal/Re-installation .......................................................... 11-8
11.2.2 Film Leading End Sensor LED (D400) Replacement ................................... 11-8
11.2.3 Scan Timing/Check Tape Sensor LED (D402/D410) Replacement .............. 11-8
11.2.4 Film Mask Home Position Sensor (D409) Replacement .............................. 11-8
11.2.5 Variable Film Mask Timing Inspection .......................................................... 11-8 11
11.2.6 Variable Film Mask Removal/Re-installation ................................................ 11-8
11.2.7 Film Mask Drive Motor (M403) Replacement ............................................... 11-9
11.2.8 Perforation Sensor LED (D404) Replacement .............................................. 11-9
11.2.9 Film Nip Roller Replacement ........................................................................ 11-9
11.2.10 Film Retainer Replacement .......................................................................... 11-9
11.2.11 Dust Removal Roller Replacement ............................................................... 11-9
11.2.12 Film Entrance Roller Replacement ............................................................... 11-10
11.2.13 Drive Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................................... 11-10
11.2.14 Pressure Cover Removal/Re-installation ...................................................... 11-10
11.2.15 Film Mask Diffusion Plate Replacement ....................................................... 11-11
11.2.16 Bottom Cover Removal/Re-installation ......................................................... 11-11
11.2.17 Nip Home Position Sensor (D407) Replacement ......................................... 11-11
11.2.18 Perforation Sensor (D405) Replacement ...................................................... 11-11
11.2.19 CYB20 Circuit Board Replacement .............................................................. 11-12
11.2.20 Film Leading End Sensor (D401) Replacement ........................................... 11-12
11.2.21 Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor (D406) Replacement .......................... 11-12
11.2.22 Lower Dust Removal Roller Replacement .................................................... 11-12
11.2.23 Check Tape Sensor (D411) Replacement..................................................... 11-13
11.2.24 Scan Timing Sensor (D403) Replacement ................................................... 11-13
11.2.25 Soft Nip Drive Belt Replacement .................................................................. 11-13
11.2.26 Soft Nip Drive Motor (M401) Replacement ................................................... 11-13
11.2.27 Soft Nip Drive Section Removal/Re-installation ............................................ 11-14
11.2.28 Soft Nip Cam Drive Belt Replacement .......................................................... 11-14
11.2.29 Film Feed Roller/Drive Belt Replacement ..................................................... 11-14
11.2.30 Pressure Cover Hook Replacement ............................................................. 11-15
11.2.31 Display LED (L400) Replacement ................................................................ 11-15
11.2.32 Film Feed Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ..................................... 11-15
11.2.33 Film Feed Motor (M400) Replacement ......................................................... 11-16
11.2.34 Reduction Pulley Shaft 1 Replacement ........................................................ 11-16
11-1
11.2.37 Reduction Belt Replacement ........................................................................ 11-19
11.2.38 Plug-in Connector Replacement ................................................................... 11-19
11.2.39 Upper Guide (Pressure Cover)/Nip Roller Adjustment ................................. 11-19
A. Confirmation ............................................................................................ 11-19
B. Upper Guide (Pressure Cover) Adjustment ............................................. 11-19
C. Nip Roller Adjustment .............................................................................. 11-21
11.2.40 Carrier Pitch Correction ................................................................................ 11-22
11.3 Auto Film Carrier NC240Y .......................................................................... 11-24

11.3.1 Upper Cover Removal/Re-installation .......................................................... 11-24
11.3.2 MTP Sensor 1 LED (D447)/TAP Sensor LED (D448) Replacement ............. 11-24
11.3.3 Upper Guide Roller Replacement ................................................................. 11-24
11.3.4 Film Retainer Replacement .......................................................................... 11-24
11.3.5 Write Head (MWH01) Circuit Board Replacement ....................................... 11-25
11.3.6 Read Head (MRH90) Circuit Board Replacement ........................................ 11-25
11.3.7 MTP Sensor 2 LED (D457) Replacement ..................................................... 11-25
11.3.8 Upper Dust Removal Roller Replacement .................................................... 11-25
11.3.9 Dummy Head Replacement .......................................................................... 11-26
11 11.3.10 Magnetic Head Replacement ....................................................................... 11-26
11.3.11 Winding Upper Nip Roller Replacement ....................................................... 11-27
11.3.12 Bottom Cover Removal/Re-installation ......................................................... 11-27
11.3.13 MTP Sensor 1 (D454)/TAP Sensor (D455) Replacement ............................. 11-27
11.3.14 IPI Sensor (D445) Replacement ................................................................... 11-27
11.3.15 Display LED (L440) Replacement ................................................................ 11-27
11.3.16 CYC20 Circuit Board Replacement .............................................................. 11-28
11.3.17 Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor (D446) Replacement .......................... 11-28
11.3.18 Film Feed Roller/Belt Replacement .............................................................. 11-28
11.3.19 Lower Dust Removal Roller/Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement ... 11-29
11.3.20 Film Feed Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ..................................... 11-29
11.3.21 Film Mask Diffusion Plate Replacement ....................................................... 11-30
11.3.22 Feed Stop Sensor (D444) Replacement ....................................................... 11-30
11.3.23 Film Winding Unit Removal/Re-installation ................................................... 11-30
11.3.24 Film Winding Unit Disassembly/Re-assembly .............................................. 11-31
11.3.25 MTP Sensor 2 (D453) Replacement ............................................................. 11-31
11.3.26 Nest Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................................ 11-31
11.3.27 Cartridge Sensor (D456) Replacement ........................................................ 11-31
11.3.28 Door Open/Close Sensor (D441) Replacement ........................................... 11-32
11.3.29 VEI/Chucking Sensor (D442/D443) Replacement ........................................ 11-32
11.3.30 Nest Section Unit Replacement .................................................................... 11-32
11.3.31 Cartridge Motor (M444) Replacement .......................................................... 11-32
11.3.32 Spool Motor (M442) Replacement ................................................................ 11-32
11.3.33 Torque Limiter Replacement ......................................................................... 11-33
11.3.34 Cartridge Holder Locking Release Method ................................................... 11-33
11.3.35 Drive Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................................... 11-33
11.3.36 Film Feed Motor (M440) Replacement ......................................................... 11-34
11.3.37 Pulley Shaft 1 Replacement ......................................................................... 11-34
11.3.40 Reduction Belt Replacement ........................................................................ 11-36
11-2
Parts Location
Monitor Auto Film Carrier NC240Y
Operation Keyboard 11
Full Keyboard
Mouse Auto Film Carrier NC135Y
EZ916
11-3
11.1 Monitor and Keyboard
11.1.1 Monitor Replacement Installation 11.1.3 Operation Keyboard/

KYA20 Circuit Board
Removal Install the monitor in the reverse order of
removal.
Replacement
1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see After installation, perform the “Monitor
Color Adjustment” (see subsection 11.1.8/ Removal
subsection 14.1.1).
11.1.9), and menu 462 “Monitor
Adjustment” (see Instruction Manual 1. Turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker
2. Disconnect the power cable from the and main power supply.
monitor. “Condition Setup and Maintenance”).
Monitor 2. Remove the table left cover (see

subsection 11.1.2)
11.1.2 Table Left Cover
Removal/Re-installation 3. Remove the four screws and the two
collars and keyboard bracket.
Removal
4. Disconnect the two cables from the
1. Move the monitor from the monitor keyboard.
table.
2. Remove the monitor table by Screws (4)

removing the four screws.
Monitor Table
Power Cable
EZ917
3. Open the seven clamps and remove

11 the monitor cable.
11.1.1
11.1.2 Keyboard Bracket Collars (2) Cables
11.1.3 EZ921
5. Remove the KYA20 circuit board by

Screws (4) removing the three screws.
EZ919
Screws (3)
3. Remove the twelve screws and the
table left cover.
Monitor Cable Clamp (7)
Screws (12)
EZ1186
4. Disconnect the monitor cable from the

main control unit.
Main Control Unit KYA20 Circuit Board

EZ922
6. Release the lock of the connector and

disconnect the flat print cable from the
Table Left Cover circuit board.
EZ920 Lock Connector
Re-installation
Re-installation is essentially in the reverse

order of removal.
Monitor Cable
EZ1081
Flat Print Cable

EZ923
11-4
7. Remove the keyboard by removing 11.1.5 Mouse Replacement 4. Open the clamp and remove the
the four screws. screw securing the clamp.
Removal
Screws (4)
1. Disconnect the mouse cable from the
connector.
Screw/Clamp
Mouse
Clamp
Keyboard
EZ924
EZ1234
Installation
5. Remove the screw securing the
Cable grounding wire.
Install the keyboard in the reverse order of
removal. EZ926
6. Remove the two screws and the plug-
Installation in connector.
11.1.4 Full Keyboard Install the mouse in the reverse order of Screw/Grounding Wire
Replacement removal.
Removal
11
11.1.6 Plug-in Connector for
1. Open the cable clamp.
Film Carrier 11.1.4
2. Disconnect the cable from the Replacement 11.1.5
connector. 11.1.6
Removal
1. Remove:
Plug-in Connector Screws (2)
• Table right cover (see subsection
EZ1235
13.1.10).
Installation
• Scanner rear cover (see subsection
14.1.1).
Cable Install the plug-in connector in the revers
order of removal.
2. Disconnect the CN1 connector from
the CTB20 circuit board.
Full Keyboard
3. Disconnect the CCN01 connector.
EZ925
CCN01 Connector
Installation
Install the full keyboard in the reverse

order of removal.
CN1
CTB20 Circuit Board
EZ1231
11-5
11.1.7 Film Carrier Ball Catch 4. Disconnect the mirror box sensor 8. Remove the two screws and then the
Replacement connectors. ball catch.
Sensors
Removal Ball Catch
1. Remove the three screws and then

the scanner section lower cover.
2. Remove the two special screws

securing the plug-in connector.
Screws (3)
Connectors
EZ1990 Screws (2)
5. Remove the two screws and then the EZ1993

plug-in connector bracket.
Installation
Screws (2)
Scanner Section Install the ball catch in the reverse order
Lower Cover of removal.
After installation, perform the following
adjustment.
Special Screws (2) Plug-in Connector
11 EZ1988
• Menu 43H “Optical Axis Adjustment”
11.1.7 3. Remove the four hexagonal socket
• Menu 43C “Carrier Focus Position
head (4mm) bolts and then the carrier
Adjustment” (see subsection 9.4.3).
base.
NOTE: Note the shims under the Plug-in Connector Bracket

carrier base tightening holes EZ1991
so that they can be returned
their original position when 6. Screw in the special screw for the
reinstallation. plug-in connetor into the carrier
release lever pin and remove the pin.
7. Remove the carrier release lever, two

collar, release rod and spring.
Carrier Release Lever Spring Pin

Release Rod Pin
Carrier Base
Hexagonal Socket Head Bolts (4)
EZ1989
Collars (2)
Pin
Special Screw
EZ1992
11-6
11.1.8 15-inch Monitor Color 11.1.9 17-inch Monitor Color

Adjustment Adjustment
1. Press the [MENU] switch on the 1. Adjust the monitor color as shown
bottom of the monitor. table below.
Display Setting Menu Brightness 40

H–Size/Posi
V–Size/Posi Contrast 100
PIN/P-Bal. A
KRY/K-Bal. Color temperature 50
Tilt/Color
OSD B Tilt/Color 5000K/9300K
Degauss
Cancel
Initialize NOTE: If the 15-inch monitor is
MENU:Save/Go
replaced with the 17-inch
FH:37.8KHz/FV: 60.2Hz
monitor, always perform
2. Press the [SELECT] switch 4 times to
vertical and horizontal size
and position adjustment.
select “Tilt/Color”.
Display Setting Menu

H–Size/Posi
V–Size/Posi
PIN/P-Bal. A
KRY/K-Bal.
Tilt/Color 5500K 9300K
OSD B
Degauss 11
Cancel
Initialize 11.1.8
MENU:Save/Go
FH:37.8KHz/FV: 60.2Hz 11.1.9
3. Make sure the number of the lower

bar graph is 10. If not adjust it using
the [ ] or [ ] switch of “B”.
4. Press the [MENU] switch.
• The display setting menu

disappears.
5. Adjust the brightness using the [ ] or

[ ] switch of “A”.
6. Adjust the contrast using the [ ] or

[ ] switch of “B”.
Standard: Brightness: 14 bars

(half the bar)
Contrast: All bars
Bright
Cont
11-7
11.2 Auto Film Carrier NC135Y
11.2.1 Upper Cover Removal/ 11.2.3 Scan Timing/Check Tape Installation

Re-installation Sensor LED (D402/D410)
Install the sensor in the reverse order of
Replacement removal.
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the two screws and the
upper cover. 1. Remove the upper cover (see 11.2.5 Variable Film Mask
Upper Cover
subsection 11.2.1). Timing Inspection
2. Disconnect the connector from the 1. Remove the upper cover (see
sensor LED. subsection 11.2.1).
3. Remove the sensor LED by removing 2. Open the mask fully.

the screw.
3. Make sure the dot marks on the gear
Connector align with the “K” marks on the racks
as shown.
“•” Marks
on Gear
Screws (2)
EZ440
Installation
11 Screw Scan Timing/Check Tape “ ” Marks
Install the cover in the reverse order of Sensor LED (D402/D410) on Racks
11.2.1 removal. EZ442
11.2.2 EZ1596
11.2.3 Installation
4. If the marks are not aligned, replace
11.2.4 11.2.2 Film Leading End
Install the sensor LED in the reverse order the variable film mask (see subsection
11.2.5 Sensor LED (D400) of removal. 11.2.6).
11.2.6 Replacement After installation, perform the menu 44A
“NC135Y Sensor Calibration”.
Removal
11.2.6 Variable Film Mask
1. Remove the upper cover (see Removal/Re-installation
subsection 11.2.1).
11.2.4 Film Mask Home
Position Sensor (D409) Removal
2. Disconnect the connector from the Replacement
sensor LED. 1. Remove the upper cover (see
Removal subsection 11.2.1).
3. Remove the sensor LED by removing
the screw. 1. Remove the upper cover (see 2. Disconnect the two connectors (D409
subsection 11.2.1). and M403).
Connector
2. Disconnect the connector from the 3. Remove the variable film mask by
sensor. removing the two screws.
3. Remove the sensor by removing the D409 M403

screw.
Connector Screw
File Leading End

Screw
Sensor LED (D400)
EZ441
Installation Screws Variable Film Mask

Install the sensor LED in the reverse order EZ1294
of removal.
After installation, perform the menu 44A Film Mask Home Position Sensor (D409)
“NC135Y Sensor Calibration” (see EZ1296
subsection 9.5.1).
11-8
Installation Installation 11.2.10 Film Retainer

Replacement
Install the mask in the reverse order of Install the sensor LED in the reverse order
removal. of removal.
After installation, perform the menu 44A
Removal
1. Remove the variable film mask (see
11.2.7 Film Mask Drive Motor subsection 11.2.6).
(M403) Replacement
11.2.9 Film Nip Roller 2. Remove the four screws and the leaf
Replacement springs and the film retainers.
Removal
1. Remove the variable film mask (see Removal Leaf Springs (2)
Screws (2)
subsection 11.2.6).
2. Remove the motor by removing the subsection 11.2.6).
two screws.
2. Remove the two belts.
Film Mask Drive Motor (M403)
Film Retainers (2)

EZ450
Installation 11
Screw Belts (2) Install the film retainer in the reverse order 11.2.7
of removal. 11.2.8
EZ448
EZ1295 11.2.9
3. Unscrew the eight screws and remove 11.2.10
Installation 11.2.11 Dust Removal Roller
the two rollers. 11.2.11
Replacement
Install the motor in the reverse order of Rollers (2)
removal.
Removal
1. Remove the upper cover (see

11.2.8 Perforation Sensor LED subsection 11.2.1).
(D404) Replacement
2. Loosen the two screws and remove
the dust removal roller and two coil
Removal
springs.
subsection 11.2.6). Dust Removal Roller Screws (2)
2. Disconnect the connector from the Screws (8)

sensor LED.
EZ449
3. Remove the sensor LED by removing

Installation
the screw.
Install the rollers in the reverse order of
Connector removal.
Screw
Coil Springs (2)

EZ451
Perforation Sensor LED (D404)

EZ447
11-9
Installation Installation 3. Disconnect the three connectors

(M403, CYB1-1 and CYB1-2).
Installation is essentially in the reverse Install the rollers in the reverse order of
order of removal. removal.
NOTE: Screw in the two screws until they

bottom lightly, then back them 2.5
turns counterclockwise.
11.2.13 Drive Section Cover
Removal/Re-
2.5 Turns Screws (2) installation
Removal
1. Open the pressure cover.

Connectors (3)
2. Remove the drive section cover by
removing the two screws. EZ455
Drive Section Cover

4. Remove the pressure cover by
removing the two screws.
EZ452
11.2.12 Film Entrance Roller

Replacement
11
Removal
11.2.12
Screws (2)
11.2.13 1. Remove the upper cover (see
11.2.14 subsection 11.2.1). EZ444
Screws (2) Pressure Cover
2. Remove the screw and the roller Installation

Install the cover in the reverse order of EZ456
retaining plate and two coil springs.
removal.
Roller Retaining Screw Coil Springs (2)
Re-installation
Plate
11.2.14 Pressure Cover order of removal.
Removal/Re-
installation NOTE: Lightly tighten the two mounting
screws and close and open the
Removal pressure cover several times.
Close the cover, push it against
1. Remove: the right side and tighten the
screws.
• upper cover
EZ453 • drive section cover
3. Remove the two rollers, roller shaft
and two poly-sliders. 2. Remove the harness cover by
removing the screw.
Poly-sliders (2)
Roller Shaft Harness Cover
Pressure Cover Screws (2)
EZ457
Rollers (2)
Screw
EZ454 EZ1329
11-10
11.2.15 Film Mask Diffusion 11.2.16 Bottom Cover 11.2.17 Nip Home Position
Plate Replacement Removal/Re- Sensor (D407)
installation Replacement
Removal
Removal Removal
1. Place the auto film carrier NC135Y up 1. Remove the bottom cover (see
2. Remove the film mask. side down. subsection 11.2.16).
2. Remove the three white screws and 2. Disconnect the connector from the
the bottom cover. sensor.
White Screws (3) Bottom Cover 3. Remove the sensor by removing the
screw.
Screw Nip Home Position

Sensor (D407)
Film Mask
EZ1297

diffusion plate. EZ460
Screws (2) Diffusion Plate

Re-installation 11
Connector
EZ462 11.2.15
order of removal.
11.2.16
Installation 11.2.17
NOTE: Insert the tab on the bottom cover
into the slot in the carrier as 11.2.18
shown.
removal.
Tab
11.2.18 Perforation Sensor

White Screws (3) (D405) Replacement
EZ1300
Removal
Installation
1. Remove the bottom cover (see
Installation is essentially in the reverse Slot subsection 11.2.16).
order of removal.
2. Disconnect the connector from the
sensor.
EZ461
3. Remove the sensor by removing the
screw.
Connector Screw
Perforation Sensor (D405)

EZ463
11-11
Installation Installation 11.2.21 Pressure Cover Open/

Close Sensor (D406)
Install the sensor in the reverse order of Installation is essentially in the reverse
removal. order of removal.
Replacement
“NC135Y Sensor Calibration”. NOTE: Press the guide rail against the NOTE: The D406 sensor is discontinued
locating shoulders and tighten the on and after carrier No. 9060374.
two white screws.
Removal
11.2.19 CYB20 Circuit Board White Screws (2)
Replacement 1. Remove the CYB20 circuit board (see
subsection 11.2.19).
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see sensor.
2. Remove the guide rail by removing screw.
the two white screws.
Connector Screw
White Screws (2)
Guide Rail
Guide Rail
EZ473
After installation, on the menu 44P “Film

Carrier ID Setup/Delete”, download the
machine data from the hard disk into the
11 memory on the CYB20 circuit board (see
subsection 9.5.11).
11.2.19
11.2.20 Sensor (D406)
11.2.21 EZ464
11.2.20 Film Leading End EZ467
11.2.22
3. Disconnect all connectors from the Sensor (D401)
Installation
circuit board. Replacement
4. Remove the three screws and the Removal removal.
circuit board.
1. Remove the CYB20 circuit board (see
Screws (3) subsection 11.2.19).
CYB20 Circuit Board 11.2.22 Lower Dust Removal
2. Disconnect the connector from the Roller Replacement
sensor.
Removal
screw. 1. Remove the CYB20 circuit board (see
Connector Screw
2. Remove the roller by removing the
two screws.
EZ465 Screws (2) Dust Removal Roller
Film Leading End Sensor (D401)

EZ466
Installation
EZ468
removal. Installation
“NC135Y Sensor Calibration” (see Install the roller in the reverse order of
subsection 9.5.1). removal.
11-12
11.2.23 Check Tape Sensor Installation 11.2.26 Soft Nip Drive Motor
(D411) Replacement (M401) Replacement
removal.
Removal After installation, perform the menu 44A
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see 1. Remove the bottom cover (see
subsection 11.2.16). subsection 11.2.16).
2. Disconnect the connector from the 11.2.25 Soft Nip Drive Belt 2. Disconnect the motor connector.
sensor. Replacement
3. Remove the sensor by removing the motor bracket.
Removal
screw.
1. Remove the bottom cover (see Motor Bracket Connector
Check Tape Sensor (D411)
2. Loosen the two screws securing the

soft nip drive motor bracket.
3. Remove the belt.
Soft Nip Drive Motor
Screws (2)
Connector Screw
EZ469
EZ474 11
4. Remove the motor from the bracket 11.2.23
Installation
by removing the two screws. 11.2.24
Install the sensor in the reverse order of 11.2.25
Motor (M401)
removal. 11.2.26
“NC135Y Sensor Calibration” (see Belt Screws (2)(Loosen)
subsection 9.5.1).
EZ471
Installation
11.2.24 Scan Timing Sensor
(D403) Replacement Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
Removal NOTE: Loosen the two motor bracket
mounting screws. Adjust the belt Bracket Screws (2)
to the specified tension by moving
subsection 11.2.16). EZ475
the motor. Tighten the two screws.
Specified belt tension:10–20g/mm
sensor.
3. Remove the sensor by removing the Belt Tension Gauge

screw.
Screw Connector
Screws (2) Motor

EZ472
Pre-scan Start Sensor (D403)

EZ470
11-13
Installation Frames Align Sensing Plate

Notches
Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
NOTE: After installation, adjust belt

tension (see subsection 11.2.25).
11.2.27 Soft Nip Drive Section

Belt
Removal/Re- Outlet Side Arms
installation
EZ478 Align Align
Pulley Pulley
Notches Notches
Removal
EZ546
1. Remove the soft nip drive belt (see 11.2.28 Soft Nip Cam Drive
subsection 11.2.25). Belt Replacement 4. Press the tensioner pulley with the
specified force using the tension
2. Disconnect the connector (D407) gauge and tighten the screw.
Removal
3. Cut the cord tie, unscrew the four Specified Force: 200 to 240g/mm
1. Remove the soft nip drive section (see
screws and remove the soft nip drive subsection 11.2.27).
section. Tensioner Pulley Screw
2. Loosen the screw securing the
Soft Nip Drive Section tension pulley and remove the belt.
11 Belt
Screw
11.2.27
11.2.28
11.2.29
Tension Gauge
EZ480
Screws (4) Cord Tie Connector (D407)
EZ476 5. Align the notch in the sensing plate
Tension Pulley
with the notches in the frames and
Re-installation make sure the notches in the pulleys
EZ479 align with the notches in the frame.
order of removal. Installation
NOTE: Align the inlet side arms with the Installation is essentially in the reverse
11.2.29 Film Feed Roller/Drive
roller of the upper guide, then the order of removal. Belt Replacement
outlet side arms with the roller as Perform the phase adjustment below.
shown. Removal
Roller <Phase Adjustment>
1. Remove:
1. Align the notch in the sensing plate
with the notches in the frames. • CYB20 circuit board
2. Align the notches in the pulleys with • soft nip drive section
the notches in the frame as shown. (see subsection 11.2.27).
3. Install the belt 2. Loosen the three screws securing the

belt tensioner arms using the 5.5mm
open-end wrench.
3. Move the belt tensioner arms to their

loosening side and tighten the screws.
Inlet Side Arms
EZ477
11-14
pressure cover hook.

Roller Holder
Screws (2) Pressure Cover Hook
Screws (3)
Belt Tensioners (3) EZ487

EZ483
EZ481
Installation
• Loosen the three screws
4. Remove the six screws and the roller securing the tensioner arms,
Install the hook in the reverse order of
holders, rollers and belt. then re-tighten them.
removal.
Screws (6)
11.2.30 Pressure Cover Hook

11.2.31 Display LED (L400)
Replacement
Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see 11
11.2.30
2. Remove the hook release lever by
2. Disconnect the connector from the 11.2.31
removing the screw.
display LED. 11.2.32
Screw 3. Remove the display LED by removing

Roller Holders Rollers Belt
the screw.
EZ482
Screw
Installation Connector

order of removal.
NOTE: • Face the glossy surface of the

belt out.
• Tighten the screws while
pressing the roller holders to the
inside. EZ485
3. Remove the release plate by

removing the guide screw. Display LED
Hook Release Lever EZ488
Installation
Install the LED in the reverse order of

removal.
11.2.32 Film Feed Motor Driver

Circuit Board
Replacement
Release Plate Guide Screw
EZ486 Removal
11-15
try to turn them. loosening side and secure it with the

1. Remove the bottom cover (see • Tighten the two guide rail screw.
subsection 11.2.16). mounting white screws while
pressing the guide rail against 5. Remove the belt tensioner by
2. Remove the guide rail by removing the locating shoulders. removing the screw.
the two white screws.
White Screws (2) Screw Tensioner Arm
White Screws (2)
Belt Tensioner
Guide Rail
EZ491 Belt Tensioner Arm Screw
Guide Rail
EZ1016
EZ489
3. Disconnect all connectors from the

11.2.33 Film Feed Motor (M400) 6. Remove the motor by removing the
Replacement two screws.
driver circuit board.
Film Feed Motor (M400)
4. Remove the motor driver circuit board Removal
by removing the two screws.
11 1. Remove:
Screws (2)
Connectors (3)
11.2.33 • drive section cover (see subsection
11.2.13).
11.2.34
• bottom cover (see subsection
11.2.16).
2. Cut the cord tie and disconnect the

motor connector (M400).
Cord Tie Connector (M400)

Screws (2)
EZ1017
Motor Driver Circuit Board
EZ490 Installation
Installation Install the motor in the reverse order of

removal.
order of removal.
NOTE: • The VR1 and VR2 have been

11.2.34 Reduction Pulley Shaft
adjusted at the factory. Do not EZ1015 1 Replacement
3. Loosen the screw securing the belt Removal

tensioner arm.
1. Remove:
4. Move the tensioner arm to the
• drive section cover (see subsection
11-16
11.2.13). EZ994 against the winding section and

• bottom cover (see subsection the locating shoulders.
11.2.16). 7. Remove the crown pulley from the
• film winding section. clutch plate by removing the three Bearing Holders (2)
screws.
2. Cut the cord tie and disconnect the Screws (2)
clutch connector (S402). Bearing Holder
Bearing
Collar Crown
Cord Tie Bearings Pulley
Pulley Shaft 1
Clutch Plate EZ997
Screws (3) • The rear tensioner is higher than

the others.
Spacer
• The spring of the motor side
Connector (S402) Bearing
Holder Bearing tensioner has paint mark
EZ1018
EZ995
3. Loosen the four screws securing the

belt tensioner arms.
Installation 11.2.35 Reduction Pulley Shaft
2 Replacement
4. Move the four tensioner arms to the
order of removal.
loosening side and secure them with Removal
the screws.
NOTE: • Align the groove in the clutch 11
1. Remove:
with the stop tab as shown.
5. Remove the four belt tensioners by 11.2.35
removing the screws. • drive section cover (see subsection
Clutch
11.2.13).
Tensioner Rear Tensioner • bottom cover (see subsection
Arms (4) Groove 11.2.16).
Screws (4) Rear • winding section.
Tensioner (1)
connector (S400).
Cord Tie
Stop Tab
Front
Tensioner (4) Tensioners (3)
EZ996
Spring With Tensioner Arm
Paint Mark Securing Screws (4) • Tighten the two screws while
pressing the bearing holders
EZ993
6. Remove the two screws and the two

bearing holders, collar, pulley shaft 1,
clutch plate, spacer and four bearings. Connector (S400)
EZ1023
Bearing Holders (2)
3. Loosen the three screws securing the
Screws (2)
Pulley Shaft 1
11-17
tensioner arms. • Tighten the two screws while loosening side and secure them by
4. Move the three tensioner arms to the pressing the bearing holders the screws.
loosening side and secure them by against the winding section and
the screws. the locating shoulders. 5. Remove the two tensioners by
5. Remove the three tensioners by removing the two screws.
removing the three screws. Screws (2)
Screws (2) Tensioner
Screws (3)
Tensioner Arms (2)
Clutch
Bearing Holders (2)
Stop Tab
Tensioner Groove Tensioner Arm
Tensioners (3)
Arms (3) Tensioner Arm Securing Screws (2)
Securing Screws (3) EZ1002
EZ1340
EZ1338
6. Loosen the screw securing the arm of

6. Remove the two screws, pulley shaft 11.2.36 Reduction Pulley Shaft the bottom tensioner.
2, bearing holder, three bearings, 3 Replacement
spacer, crown pulley and collar.
7. Remove the tensioner by removing
Removal the two screws.
11 Screws (2)
1. Remove: Tensioner Arm
Screws (2)
11.2.36 Securing Screw
• drive section cover
• bottom cover
• winding section.
2. Disconnect the clutch connector

(S401).
Bearing Holder Pulley Shaft 2

EZ1339
Tensioner
7. Remove the crown pulley from the
EZ1031
clutch plate by removing the three
screws.
bearing holders, two bearings and
Spacer pulley shaft 3.
Clutch Plate
Crown Pulley
Bearings Connector (S401)

Collar EZ1028
Screws (3)
tensioner arms.
Bearing
Bearing 4. Move the two tensioner arms to the
Holder
Pulley Shaft 2
EZ1001
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: • Align the groove in the clutch

11-18
• reduction pulley shaft 2

Screws (2)
2. Remove the reduction belts.
Reduction Belts
Bearing
Holders (2) Connectors (3)
Pulley Shaft 3
EZ1030 EZ455
Bearing Holder 4. Disconnect the three connectors

(CYB2, CYB3 and CYB4) from the
Bearing
CYB20 circuit board.
Pulley Shaft 3 Pulley Shaft 1
Pulley Shaft 2 5. Remove the screw securing the
Pulley Shaft 3 grounding wire.
EZ1341
CYB4 CYB3 CYB2
Installation

order of removal.
Bearing 11
NOTE: Face the glossy surface of the belt
Bearing Holder
out. 11.2.37
EZ1032
11.2.38
11.2.38 Plug-in Connector
Installation is essentially in the reverse Replacement
order of removal.
Screw/Grounding Wire
Removal
NOTE: • Align the groove in the clutch EZ1333
with the stop tab as shown. 1. Remove the bottom cover (see
• Tighten the two screws while subsection 11.2.16). 6. Remove the plug-in connector by
pressing the bearing holders removing the two screws.
against the winding section and 2. Remove the harness cover by
the locating shoulders. removing the screw.
Screws Harness Cover
Bearing Holder
Clutch
Screws (2)
Plug-in Connector
Bearing Holder
EZ1334
Screw
Groove Stop Tab
EZ1329
11.2.39 Upper Guide (Pressure
EZ1033 Cover)/Nip Roller
3. Disconnect the three connectors Adjustment
(M403, CYB1-1 and CYB1-2).
11.2.37 Reduction Belt A. Confirmation
Replacement
Move the nip rollers to nip position by
Removal
1. Remove:

11-19
following the steps below.

6. Disconnect the D409 and M403
Upper Guide Adjustment Tool
1. Install the carrier to the scanner. connectors.
2. Proceed to the menu 44E “NC135Y I/ D409 M403

O Check” or “NC135AG I/O Check”
screen.
Pressure Cover
EZ2056
Screws (2) Variable Film Mask
EZ1294 10. Pull the pressure cover to the right
3. Click the [Both] button for “M401 Slow side fully by holding the boss for cover
nip motor”. 7. Remove the two screws and then the while pressing it against the tool.
drive section cover.
• The nip rollers move in the nip Upper Guide Adjustment Tool
position. Drive Section Cover
Boss for Cover
4. Remove the carrier. Screws (2)
11 B. Upper Guide (Pressure Cover)
Adjustment
11.2.39
2. Open the pressure cover and remove

the winding section.
3. Remove the two screws and then the

upper cover. EZ2054
4. Make sure the two rubber belts are 8. Close the pressure cover and loosen Pressure Cover
installed correctly. the two hinge screws (red painted)
EZ2121
one turn.
Upper Cover
11. Depress the cover lock bracket once
while pressing the pressure cover
against the tool.
Screws (Loosen 1 turn)

EZ2055
9. Open the pressure cover. While

Rubber pressing the upper guide adjustment
Bellts tool against the wall of the film feed
guide, close the pressure cover.
Screws (2)
EZ440
5. Close the pressure cover and remove

the two screws and then the variable
film mask.
11-20
lightly, readjust pressure cover

position. Pressure Cover
Cover Lock Bracket
EZ2122
Upper Guide Adjustment Tool Lock Release Lever
12. While pressing the pressure cover EZ2061
against the tool, tighten the pressure EZ2059
cover hinge screws by following the C. Nip Roller Adjustment
steps below. 14. Open the pressure cover while
holding it by hand and remove the 1. Loosen the eight screws securing the
1) Tighten the rear screw 3/4 turns. tool. nip roller guides one turn.
2) Tighten the front screw 3/4 turns. NOTE: If the pressure cover is Screws (8) (Loosen 1 turn)
opened suddenly, the hinge
3) Tighten the rear screw securely. may shift and readjustment
will be required.
4) Tighten the front screw securely. 11
Upper Guide Adjustment Tool
Upper Guide Adjustment Tool 11.2.39
Pressure Cover
Guides (4)
EZ2047
2. Install the two reference jigs so that

their tabs are inserted in the left side
(optical axis side) of the right
Pressure Cover (entrance side) roller shaft.
Screws (2)
EZ2060
EZ2058
15. Open and close the pressure cover

13. Make sure the tool moves up and four to five times while holding it by
down lightly without play. hand and make sure it is moved
smoothly and locked.
NOTE: If the tool does not move
11-21
tighten the left screw securely.

Reference Jigs (2) Reference Jigs (2)
Tab
Tab
Roller Shaft
EZ2123 Roller Shaft
Front Guide
EZ2127
3. Insert the two fixing jigs into the EZ2125
square holes in the reference jigs with 8. Insert the two fixing jigs into the holes
their round surfaces toward the roller 5. Tighten the rear guide screws by in the reference jigs with their round
shaft (optical axis) side and depress following the steps below. surfaces toward the roller shaft
them lightly. (optical axis) side and depress them
1) Depress the rear guide and lightly.
NOTE: Make sure there is no play in tighten the left screw 3/4 turns.
the jigs. NOTE: Make sure there is no play in
2) While depressing the rear guide, the jigs.
tighten the right screw 3/4 turns.
3) While depressing the rear guide,

11 tighten the left screw securely.
11.2.40 4) While depressing the rear guide,

tighten the right screw securely.
Fixing Jigs (2) Fixing Jigs (2)

Round Surface
Round Surface
EZ2124
EZ2128
4. Tighten the front guide screws by

9. Tighten the front guide screws by
1) Depress the front guide and
1) Depress the front guide and
tighten the right screw 3/4 turns. Rear Guide
EZ2126
2) While depressing the front guide,
tighten the left screw 3/4 turns.
6. Remove the fixing and reference jigs. tighten the left screw 3/4 turns.
7. Install the two reference jigs so that 3) While depressing the front guide,
their tabs are inserted in the right tighten the right screw securely.
(optical axis) side of the left (exit) side
roller shaft. 4) While depressing the front guide,
tighten the left screw securely.
11-22
11.2.40 Carrier Pitch Correction
1. Print the chart negative with the

following condition.
• Bordered
• Paper normally used
• Normal size
2. Check average drift in feed direction

for No. 11 to No. 30 prints (20 prints)
and record it.
Front Guide
EZ2129
10. Tighten the rear guide screws by

1) Depress the rear guide and

tighten the left screw 3/4 turns.

EZ2065
tighten the left screw securely. 3. Calculate center drifted value using
the formula below.
| Left graduations – Right graduations | ÷ 2
11
= Center drifted value 11.2.40
<Example>
Rear Guide | 4–1| ÷ 2 = 1.5
EZ2130
4. If the center drifted value exceeds
range of 0 to 2 graduations to the left,
11. Remove the fixing and reference jigs. calculate correction value with the
formula below.
12. Connect the D409 and M403
connectors and reinstall the variable Center drifted value × 10 = Correction
film mask using the two screws. value
13. Open the pressure cover and reinstall To move the image to the right-hand:
the upper cover using the two screws. reduce correction value.
To move the image to the lift-hand:
14. Reinstall the drive section cover with add correction value.
the two screws.
<Example>
1.5 × 10 = 15
To move the image to the left,

correction value is “+15”.
5. Proceed to the menu 44Q “NC135Y

Machine Data Setup” or “NC135AG
Machine Data Setup” screen.
11-23
11.3.1 Upper Cover Removal/ Installation 11.3.4 Film Retainer

Re-installation Replacement
Install the sensor LED in the reverse order
of removal.
Removal After installation, perform the menu 44B
Removal
1. Open the pressure cover. 1. Remove the upper cover (see
subsection 11.3.1).
2. Remove the two white screws and the
upper cover. 11.3.3 Upper Guide Roller 2. Remove the two screws and the
Replacement spring retaining plate.
Upper Cover
Removal Screws (2) Spring Retaining Plate
1. Remove the sensor LED (D447/D448)

2. Remove the four screws and the two

spring retaining plates.
EZ521
White Screws (2) 3. Remove the leaf spring and remove

11 EZ1152
the two film retainers.
Leaf Spring
11.3.1 Re-installation Holes (2)
Screws (4)
11.3.2 Spring Retaining Plates
11.3.3
order of removal. EZ519
11.3.4 Locating
Pins (2)
3. Remove the six white coil springs, six
rollers, three roller shafts and six poly-
11.3.2 MTP Sensor 1 LED sliders.
(D447)/TAP Sensor LED
(D448) Replacement
White Coil
Removal Springs (6)
1. Remove the upper cover (see Film Retainers (2)

2. Disconnect the connector from the Installation

sensor LED.
3. Remove the sensor LED and spacer order of removal.
NOTE: Align the holes in the leaf spring
Screws (2) Connector Sensor LED with the two locating pins as
(D447/D448) shown.
Poly-sliders (6)
Rollers (6) Roller Shafts (3)
EZ520
Installation

removal.
Spacer
EZ518
11-24
11.3.5 Write Head (MWH01) 3. Disconnect the FPC (Flat Printed 11.3.8 Upper Dust Removal
Circuit Board Circuit) from the circuit board by Roller Replacement
following q to e in the figure below.
Replacement
Removal
Removal circuit board.
1. Remove the upper cover (see subsection 11.3.1).
subsection 11.3.1). circuit board.
2. Disconnect the FPC (Flat Printed two screws.
P Read Head Circuit Board
Circuit) from the circuit board by
following q to e in the figure below. Screws (2) Screws (2)

circuit board.
4. Remove the screw and the circuit

board.
FPC
C Write Head Circuit C Read Head

Board (MWH01) Circuit Board
Sensor
FPC
EZ1270
EZ525
Installation
the dust removal roller and two coil
11
springs.
Install the circuit board in the reverse 11.3.5
order of removal. Dust Removal Roller 11.3.6
Screws (2) 11.3.7
11.3.8
P Write Head Circuit Connector
Board (MWH01) 11.3.7 MTP Sensor 2 LED
(D457) Replacement
EZ523
Installation Removal
Install the circuit board in the reverse 1. Remove the upper cover (see
order of removal. subsection 11.3.1).
2. Disconnect the connector (LEG1)

from the sensor LED. Coil Springs (2)
11.3.6 Read Head (MRH90)
EZ529
Circuit Board 3. Remove the sensor LED and spacer
Replacement by removing the screw.
Installation
Sensor 2 LED (D457)
Removal Screw Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
subsection 11.3.1). NOTE: Screw in the two screws until they
bottom lightly, then back them 2.5
2. Remove the two white screws and the turns counterclockwise.
circuit board cover.
Screws (2) 2.5 Turns
White Screws (2) Circuit Board Cover
Spacer Connector (LEG1)

EZ1305
Installation
Install the sensor LED in the reverse order

of removal.
After installation, perform the menu 44B Screw in Until Bottoms Lightly.
EZ524
“NC240Y Sensor Calibration”. EZ530
11-25
11.3.9 Dummy Head 11.3.10 Magnetic Head 5. Remove the two E-rings and the
Replacement Replacement magnetic head
Removal Removal
1. Remove the upper dust removal roller 1. Remove the upper cover (see
(see subsection 11.3.8). subsection 11.3.1).
2. Remove the two E-rings and move the 2. Remove the circuit board cover by
pressure cover hook link. removing the two screws.
Link E-rings (2) Circuit Board Cover

Screws (2)
E-rings (2) Magnetic Head

EZ533
Installation

order of removal.
Follow the steps below when tightening
EZ1271 EZ524 the magnetic head.
3. Remove the dummy head by 3. Disconnect the four FPC (Flat Printed 1. Close the pressure cover.
removing the screw. Circuit) from each circuit board.
2. Remove the stop by removing the
11 Screw Dummy Head Write Head Circuit Boards screw.
11.3.9 Stop
11.3.10
EZ1272
FPC (4)
Installation Read Head Circuit Boards
Screw
EZ531
EZ1374
Install the dummy head in the reverse
order of removal. 4. Remove the two screws securing the
3. Tighten the two screws while pressing
magnetic head.
the magnetic heads to the inside as
shown.
4. Install the stop and tighten the screw.
Screws (2)
Screws (2)
EZ532
Press Heads to Inside.

EZ534
11-26
11.3.11 Winding Upper Nip 11.3.12 Bottom Cover 11.3.14 IPI Sensor (D445)
Roller Replacement Removal/ Replacement
Re-installation
Removal
Removal Removal
subsection 11.3.1). 1. Place the auto film carrier NC240Y up 1. Remove the bottom cover (see
side down. subsection 11.3.12).
2. Remove the circuit board by removing
the screw. 2. Remove the two screw and the 2. Disconnect the connector from the
bottom cover. sensor.
Screws Circuit Board
Bottom Cover 3. Remove the sensor by removing the
two screws.
IPI Sensor (D445)
EZ1273 Screws (2)

EZ492
3. Remove the two screws securing the
upper nip roller and the nip roller unit. Re-installation Connector Screws (2)
EZ494
11
Screws (2) Re-install the cover in the reverse order of
removal.
11.3.12
Install the sensor in the reverse order of 11.3.13
removal. 11.3.14
11.3.13 MTP Sensor 1 (D454)/
11.3.15
TAP Sensor (D455)
Replacement 11.3.15 Display LED (L440)
Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see Removal

Nip Roller Unit subsection 11.3.12).
EZ1274
2. Disconnect the connector from the subsection 11.3.12).
sensor.
4. Remove the two rollers and roller 2. Disconnect the connector from the
shaft. 3. Remove the sensor by removing the display LED.
two screws.
3. Remove the display LED by removing
Connector Screws (2) the screw.
Display LED (L440)
Roller Shaft
Rollers (2)
EZ1275
Installation MTP1/TAP Sensors (D454/D455)

EZ493
removal. Connector Screw
Installation
EZ495

After installation, perform the menu 44B
Install the LED in the reverse order of
removal.
11-27
11.3.16 CYC20 Circuit Board 11.3.17 Pressure Cover Open/ 3. Remove the screw and the tensioner
Replacement Close Sensor (D446) section cover.
Replacement
Screw
Removal
Removal
subsection 11.3.12). 1. Remove the CYC20 circuit board (see
2. Disconnect all connector from the
CYC20 circuit board. 2. Disconnect the connector from the
sensor.
the five screws. 3. Remove the sensor by removing the
screw.
Screws (5) Tensioner Section Cover
Connector
EZ1304

tensioner arms, move the arms to the
loosening side and secure with the
screws.
Tensioner Arms (3)
CYC20 Circuit Board

11 EZ496 Screw Sensor
EZ497
11.3.16 Installation
11.3.18 Install the circuit board in the reverse
order of removal. Install the sensor in the reverse order of
After installation, on the menu 44P “Film removal. Screws (3)
Carrier Information Setup”, download the
EZ499
machine data from the hard disk into the
memory on the CYC20 circuit board (see
11.3.18 Film Feed Roller/Belt 5. Remove the harness guide by
subsection 9.5.11).
Replacement removing the two screws.
6. Remove the perforation /TAP sensor

Removal
1. Remove:
7. Remove the IPI sensor by removing
the two screws.
• CYC20 circuit board (see
• film winding unit (see subsection Screws (2)
Harness Guide
11.3.23).

tensioner arm at the bottom of the
carrier, move the arm to the loosening
side and secure with the screw.
Screws (2)
Screws (2)
Perforation/TAP
Sensors
IPI Sensor
Screws (2)
EZ500
EZ498
11-28
8. Remove the six screws and the roller 11.3.19 Lower Dust Removal 11.3.20 Film Feed Motor Driver
holders, three roller and belts. Roller/Dummy Head Circuit Board
Opposite Roller Replacement
Roller Holder Screws (6) Rollers (3)
Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the bottom cover (see subsection 11.3.12).
2. Remove the guide rail by removing
2. Disconnect the three connectors the two white screws.
(CYC1, CYC4 and CYC5) from the
CYC20 circuit board. Guide Rail
White Screws (2)
3. Remove the harness guide by
Belts
EZ501 CYC20 Circuit Board
Installation
CYC1
Installation is essentially in the reverse CYC4
order of removal. CYC5
EZ506
NOTE: • Face the glossy surface of the

belt out. 3. Disconnect all connectors from the
• Tighten the screws while driver circuit board.
pressing the roller holders
4. Remove the driver circuit board by
11
against the inside as shown. Harness Guide Screws (2)
EZ503 11.3.19
11.3.20
4. Remove the lower dust removal roller
Lower Dust Removal Roller

Screws (2)
Roller Holder
Screws (2) Driver Circuit Board
EZ502 EZ507
• After installation, loosen the Installation

three screws securing the
tension arm, then re-tighten EZ504 Installation is essentially in the reverse
them. order of removal.
5. Remove the four springs, two rollers,
two roller shafts and four collars. NOTE: • Do not try to turn the VR1 and
VR2. They have been adjusted
Springs (4) Collars (4) at the factory.
• Tighten the two white screws
while pressing the guide rail
against the locating shoulders
as shown.
VR
White Screws (2)
Rollers (2) Roller Shafts (2)

EZ505
Installation
Install the rollers in the reverse order of Guide Rail

removal. EZ508
11-29
11.3.21 Film Mask Diffusion 11.3.22 Feed Stop Sensor 4. Disconnect the two connectors (D444
Plate Replacement (D444) Replacement and D453).
Removal Removal D444
1. Open the pressure cover. 1. Remove the CYC20 circuit board (see
2. Remove the film mask.
screw.

sensor.
Connector
Screw
D453
EZ1306
5. Remove the film winding unit by

Film Mask removing the screw.
EZ1301
Screw
diffusion plate.
Diffusion Plate Feed Stop Sensor (D444)

11 EZ1153
11.3.22
11.3.23 Install the sensor in the reverse order of
removal.
Film Winding Unit
11.3.23 Film Winding Unit EZ512
Removal/Re-installation
Re-installation
Screws (2)
Removal Re-install the unit in the reverse order of
EZ1303
removal.
1. Remove:
Installation
• CYC20 circuit board
order of removal.
NOTE: Face the glossy surface of the
diffusion plate down.
tensioner arm, move the arm to the
loosening side and re-tighten the
screw.

the two screws.
Tensioner
Screws (2)
Arm Securing Screw

EZ511
11-30
11.3.24 Film Winding Unit Re-assembly 11.3.26 Nest Section Cover

Disassembly/Re- Removal/Re-
Re-assembly is essentially in the reverse
assembly order of disassembly.
installation
Disassembly NOTE: Hold the sensing plate on the gear Removal

shaft and make sure the gear
1. Remove the film winding unit (see turns only the arrow direction. 1. Open the pressure cover.
2. Remove the nest section cover by
2. Remove the two E-rings, gears, Sensing Plate removing the screw.
bearings, drive shaft and poly-slider in
this order.
Screw
Drive Shaft
Poly-slider
Gears (2)
EZ517
Nest Section Cover

11.3.25 MTP Sensor 2 (D453) EZ1154
Bearings (2) Replacement

E-rings (2) Installation
EZ513 Removal
Install the cover in the reverse order of
11
1. Remove the film winding unit (see removal.
3. Remove MTP sensor 2 (see 11.3.24
subsection 11.3.25). subsection 11.3.23).
11.3.25
2. Remove the cover by removing the 11.3.26
4. Remove the two springs, four E-rings, 11.3.27 Cartridge Sensor
two screws. 11.3.27
shaft and nip roller. (D456) Replacement
Springs (2) Removal
E-rings (4)
screws.
Nip Roller
Cover
1. Remove the nest section cover (see

sensor.

Shaft screw.
Connector Screw
EZ515
5. Remove the two E-rings, gear,

winding roller, shaft, two bearings and Screws (2) Screw
poly-slider. MTP Sensor 2 (D453)
EZ1307
E-rings (2) Winding Roller
Installation

removal.
After installation, perform the menu 44B Cartridge Sensor (D456)
“NC240Y Sensor Calibration”. EZ536
Installation
Poly-slider Install the sensor in the reverse order of
Shaft removal.
Bearings (2)
Gear
EZ516
11-31
11.3.28 Door Open/Close 11.3.30 Nest Section Unit 11.3.31 Cartridge Motor (M444)
Sensor (D441) Replacement Replacement
Replacement
NOTE: Replace the door open/close Removal
Removal motor (M441) together with the
nest section unit. 1. Remove the nest section unit (see
1. Remove the drive section cover (see subsection 11.3.30).
subsection 11.3.35). Removal
2. Remove the motor by removing the
2. Disconnect the connector from the 1. Remove: two screws.
sensor.
• nest section cover (see subsection Screws (2)
3. Remove the sensor by removing the 11.3.26).
screw. • drive section cover (see subsection
11.3.35).
Door Open/Close Sensor (D441)
five connectors (M444, D456, CYC2A,
M441 and M442).
M442
Cord Tie
Cartridge Motor (M444)
D456 EZ541
Connector Screw Installation

11 EZ537 Install the motor in the reverse order of
M441 removal.
11.3.29
11.3.30 Install the sensor in the reverse order of
CYC2A
removal. M444 11.3.32 Spool Motor (M442)
11.3.31
EZ539 Replacement
11.3.32
11.3.29 VEI/Chucking Sensor 3. Remove the nest section unit by Removal

removing the three screws.
(D442/D443)
1. Remove the nest section unit (see
Replacement subsection 11.3.30).
Nest Section Unit
Removal 2. Remove the motor bracket by

1. Remove the drive section cover (see

sensor.

two screws.
Connector VEI/Chucking Sensors

Screws (3)
(D442/D443)
EZ540
Screws (2)
Motor Bracket
Re-installation
EZ543
Re-install the unit in the reverse order of

removal.
Screws (2)
EZ538
Installation

removal.
11-32
3. Remove the motor by removing the 11.3.34 Cartridge Holder 3. Turn the release knob to release
two screws. Locking Release cartridge holder.
Method Release Knob
Screws (2)
1. Remove:

11.3.35).
• nest section cover (see subsection
11.3.26).
2. While pushing in the rack, press the

pin down and push in the rack fully to
release locking.
EZ1268
Spool Motor (M442) 4. Insert the cartridge into the holder and
set the holder by turning the gear.
EZ544
5. Make sure the cartridge is released by

Installation
turning the release knob.
Install the motor in the reverse order of
removal.
11.3.33 Torque Limiter Rack

Replacement
EZ1265
11
Removal 11.3.33
Cartridge 11.3.34
1. Remove:
11.3.35
• VEI/Chucking Sensor (D442/D443) Gear
EZ1269
• spool motor bracket (see
6. Re-install the removed covers.
2. Remove the two E-rings, bearings,
torque limiter and shaft.
11.3.35 Drive Section Cover
E-rings (2) Pin
Removal/Re-
Bearings (2) Shaft installation
EZ1266
Torque Limiter
Removal
Push in Rack Fully.
2. Remove the drive section cover by

Screws (3)
Drive Section Cover
EZ545
EZ1267
Installation
Install the torque limiter in the reverse

order of removal.
EZ1155
Re-installation
Re-install the cover in the reverse order of

removal.
11-33
11.3.36 Film Feed Motor (M440) 6. Remove the motor by removing the 3. Loosen the four screws securing the
Replacement two screws. belt tensioner arms.
Film Feed Motor (M440) 4. Move the four tensioner arms to the
Removal loosening side and secure them with
Screws (2)
the screws.
1. Remove:
5. Remove the four belt tensioners by
11.3.12).
• drive section cover (see subsection Tensioner Rear Tensioner
11.3.35). Arms (4)
Screws (4) Rear
2. Cut the cord tie and disconnect the Tensioner (1)
connector (M440).
Cord Tie Connector (M440) EZ991
Installation
Install the motor in the reverse order of Front

Tensioner (4) Tensioners (3)
removal.
Spring With Tensioner Arm
Paint Mark Securing Screws (4)
11.3.37 Pulley Shaft 1 EZ993
Replacement
6. Remove the cover bracket by
EZ989
removing the screw.
11 Removal
3. Loosen the screw securing the belt
11.3.36 tensioner arm. 1. Remove:
bearing holders, collar, pulley shaft 1,
11.3.37 clutch plate, spacer and four bearings.
4. Move the tensioner arm to the • bottom cover
loosening side and secure it with the (see subsection 11.3.12). Bearing Holders (2)
screw. • drive section cover
5. Remove the belt tensioner by
removing the screw. 2. Cut the cord tie and disconnect the
clutch connector (S442).
Tensioner Arm
Cord Tie Connector (S442)
Screws (2)
Pulley Shaft 1
EZ994
8. Remove the crown pulley from the

screws.
Screw EZ992
Belt Tensioner
Belt Tensioner Arm Screw Bearing Holder
Bearing
EZ990 Collar Crown
Bearings Pulley
Pulley Shaft 1
Clutch Plate
Screws (3)
Spacer
Bearing
Holder Bearing
EZ995
11-34
Installation 11.3.38 Pulley Shaft 2 6. Remove the two screws, pulley shaft
Replacement 2, bearing holder, three bearings,
Installation is essentially in the reverse spacer, crown pulley and collar.
order of removal.
Removal
Screws (2)
NOTE: • Align the groove in the clutch
1. Remove:
Clutch
11.3.12).
Groove 11.3.35).

(S440).
Bearing Holder Pulley Shaft 2

EZ1000
Stop Tab 7. Remove the crown pulley from the

EZ996 screws.
• Tighten the two screws while Spacer

pressing the bearing holders Clutch Plate
against the winding section and Crown Pulley
the locating shoulders.
Connector (S440) Bearings
Bearing Holders (2) EZ998 Collar 11

Screws (3)
Screws (2) 3. Loosen the three screws securing the 11.3.38
tensioner arms.
Bearing
4. Move the three tensioner arms to the Bearing
Holder
loosening side and secure them by Pulley Shaft 2
the screws.
EZ1001
5. Remove the three tensioners by

Installation
EZ997 Screws (3) Tensioner Arms (3) order of removal.
• The rear tensioner is higher than NOTE: • Align the groove in the clutch
the others. with the stop tab as shown.
• The spring of the motor side • Tighten the two screws while
tensioner has paint mark pressing the bearing holders
against the winding section and
the locating shoulders.
Screws (2)
Arm Securing Screw

Tensioners (3)
EZ999 Clutch
Bearing Holders (2)
Stop Tab
Groove
EZ1002
11-35
11.3.39 Pulley Shaft 3 5. Loosen the two screws securing the Installation
Replacement tensioner arms.
6. Move the two tensioner arms to the order of removal.
Removal loosening side and secure them by
the screws. NOTE: • Align the groove in the clutch
1. Remove:
7. Remove the two tensioners by • Tighten the two screws while
• bottom cover
removing the two screws. pressing the bearing holders
against the winding section and
Screws (2) Tensioner (2) the locating shoulders.
Tensioner Arms (2) Screws (2)
(S441).
Bearing
Holder (2)
Clutch
Tension Arm Securing Screws (2)

Groove Stop Tab
EZ1005
EZ1008
8. Unscrew the two screws and remove
Connector (S441)
the two bearing holders, two bearings
11 EZ1003 and pulley shaft 3.
11.3.40 Reduction Belt
11.3.39 3. Loosen the screw securing the arm of Screws (2) Replacement
11.3.40 the bottom tensioner.
Removal
the two screws. 1. Remove:
Tensioner Arm Securing Screw • reduction pulley shaft 1

Bearing Holders (2) Pulley Shaft 3 • film feed rollers/belts
2. Remove the reduction belts.

Bearing
Reduction Belts
Tensioner Screws (2) Pulley Shaft 3
EZ1004
Bearing Holder
Bearing
Bearing Holder
EZ1007 Pulley Shaft 1

Pulley Shaft 2 Pulley Shaft 3
EZ1009
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Face the glossy surface of the belt

out.
11-36
11.3.41 Plug-in Connector

Replacement
Removal
1. Remove:
• bottom cover
2. Disconnect the connector (CYC6)

from the CYC20 circuit board.
3. Disconnect the two connectors

(CYC4A and CYC5A).
CYC20 Circuit Board
11
11.3.41
CYC6 CYC5A CYC4A

EZ1331
4. Cut the five cord ties.

grounding wire.
6. Remove the plug-in connector and

bracket by removing the two screws.
Grounding Wire
Screw
Bracket
Screws (2)
Plug-in Connector
EZ1332
Installation
Install the plug-in connector in the reverse

order of removal.
11-37
12. LIGHT SOURCE SECTION
Parts Location .................................................................................................. 12-2
12.1 Scanning Lamp Section ................................................................................ 12-3

12.1.1 Scanning Lamp Unit Removal/Re-installation ................................................. 12-3
12.1.2 Lamp Socket Replacement ............................................................................. 12-3
12.1.3 First IR Filter Replacement ............................................................................. 12-4
12.1.4 Safety Thermostat (ST201) Replacement ...................................................... 12-4
12.1.5 Light Source Section Detecting Interlock Switch (D301) Replacement .......... 12-4
12.1.6 Light Source Section Suction Fan (F302) Replacement ................................. 12-5
12.1.7 Light Source Section Exhaust Fan (F303) Replacement ................................ 12-5
12.2 Light Source Filter Section ........................................................................... 12-6

12.2.1 Filter Unit Removal/Re-installation .................................................................. 12-6
12.2.2 Balance Filter Bracket Removal/Re-installation .............................................. 12-6
12.2.3 Balance Filter Home Position Sensor (D202) Replacement ........................... 12-6
12.2.4 Balance Filter Drive Motor (M202) Replacement ............................................ 12-6
12.2.5 Balance Filter/Drive Gear Replacement ......................................................... 12-6
12.2.6 Filter Replacement .......................................................................................... 12-7
12.2.7 Light Source Aperture Home Position/Standby Sensor (D201/D203) 12
Replacement ............................................................................................. 12-7
12.2.8 Light Source Aperture Motor (M201) Replacement ........................................ 12-8
12.2.9 Light Source Aperture Belt Replacement ....................................................... 12-8
12.2.10 135/120 Mirror Box Sensor (D204/D205) Replacement ................................. 12-9
12-1
Parts Location
Mirror Box

Suction Fan (F302)
Light Source Filter Unit

Exhaust Fan (F303)
12

Air Filter
Light Source Aperture

Motor (M201)
Scanning Lamp Unit
EZ914
12-2
12.1 Scanning Lamp Section
12.1.1 Scanning Lamp Unit 4. Hold the bottom of the lamp unit and 12.1.2 Lamp Socket
Removal/Re-installation remove the unit by pulling it slightly. Replacement
Lamp Unit
Removal IMPORTANT:
Wear clean gloves to prevent leaving
1. Release the latch and open the light fingerprints.
source section cover.
Removal
1. Remove the lamp unit (see subsection

12.1.1).
2. Remove the screw and the first IR

filter bracket.
EZ874
First IR Filter Bracket
Re-installation
1. Align the two cutouts in the lamp unit

with the pins on the filter unit.
Light Source Section Cover
Filter Unit
EZ870
2. Release the locking tabs and

disconnect the lamp and safety
thermostat connectors. EZ587
Safety Thermostat Connector 3. Remove the screw and the reflector.

Pins (2)
4. Remove the scanning lamp.
12
Cutouts (2) Scanning Lamp Reflector
12.1.1
Lamp Unit 12.1.2
EZ875
2. Secure the lamp unit by tightening the

two screws.
Lamp Connector
EZ872
3. Remove the two screws securing the Screw

lamp unit.
EZ580
5. Remove the lamp socket by removing

the two screw.
Screws (2)
Screws (2)
EZ876
3. Connect the two connectors.
Connectors
Screws (2)
EZ873
Lamp Socket
EZ583
Installation
Install the lamp socket in the reverse

order of removal.
After installation, perform the menu 432
EZ877 “Lamp Position Adjustment”, menu 433
“135 Light Source Aperture Table”,
4. Close the light source section cover. scanner correction and upkeep printing.
12-3
12.1.3 First IR Filter After installation, perform the menu 433 3. Disconnect the connector from the
Replacement “135 Light Source Aperture Table”, switch.
scanner correction and upkeep printing.
IMPORTANT:
Wear clean gloves to prevent leaving
fingerprints. 12.1.4 Safety Thermostat
(ST201) Replacement
Removal
Removal
12.1.1).
12.1.1).
2. Remove the two screws and the first Connector (D301)
IR filter.
2. Disconnect the two wires and unscrew EZ881
the two screws and remove the safety
Screws (2)
First IR Filter thermostat. 4. Remove the switch bracket by
Safety Thermostat (ST201) Screws (2)
Switch Cover Screws (2)
EZ584
12 Installation
Wires
12.1.3 Installation is essentially in the reverse
EZ591 EZ882
order of removal.
12.1.4
12.1.5 Installation 5. Remove the spring, E-ring, shaft and
NOTE: • Face the coating surface of the the switch.
filter down.
Install the safety thermostat in the reverse
order of removal. E-ring
Filter
12.1.5 Light Source Section

Detecting Interlock
Switch (D301)
Replacement
Removal
Switch
1. Open the light source section cover.
EZ585 Spring Shaft
EZ883
2. Remove the switch cover by removing
• While push the filter against the the two screws.
two locating pins, secure the Installation
filter with the two retaining plates
and tighten the two screws. Screws (2) Install the switch in the reverse order of
Switch Cover removal.
Locating Pins (2)
EZ880
Retaining
Plates (2) Screws (2) Filter
EZ586
12-4
12.1.6 Light Source Section 12.1.7 Light Source Section

Suction Fan (F302) Exhaust Fan (F303)
Replacement Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Open the light source section cover. 1. Open the light source section cover.
2. Remove the light source section air 2. Disconnect the connector (F303).
filter.
3. Disconnect the connector (F302).
Connector (F303)
EZ887
Connector (F302)
EZ884 3. Remove the fan bracket by removing
the four screws.
4. Remove the two screws, lift the
bracket slightly and remove it. Fan Bracket
12
12.1.6
12.1.7
Screws (2) Bracket Screws (4)

EZ888
EZ885
4. Remove the four screws and the two

5. Remove the fan from the bracket by
bracket from the fan.
Screws (4)
Screws (2)
Arrow
Fan (F303)
Outside
Fan (F302) Bracket (2)
Arrow
EZ886
EZ889
Installation
Installation
order of removal. Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow
points the scanning lamp side. NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow
points the outside.
12-5
12.2 Light Source Filter Section
12.2.1 Filter Unit Removal/Re- 3. Disconnect the two connectors (M202 12.2.4 Balance Filter Drive
installation and D202). Motor (M202)
Replacement
Connector (M202)
Removal
Connector (D202)
Removal
1. Disconnect the motor connector.
1. Remove the filter bracket (see
2. Remove the two screws securing the subsection 12.2.2).
filter unit.
2. Remove the harness from the two
3. Remove the filter unit by pulling it clamps.
toward the front.
3. Remove the motor and bracket by
Filter Unit removing the two screws.
EZ597
Re-installation
Re-install the filter bracket in the reverse

order of removal.
12.2.3 Balance Filter Home

Screws (2)
Position Sensor (D202)
Bracket Screws (2) Motor (M202)
Motor Connector Replacement
EZ600
EZ879
Removal
Installation
12 Re-installation
1. Remove the filter bracket (see
Re-installation is essentially in the reverse subsection 12.2.2).
12.2.1 order of removal.
order of removal.
12.2.2 2. Remove the sensor bracket by
NOTE: Note the direction of the bracket
12.2.3 NOTE: After installation, perform the removing the two screws.
and the harness routing.
12.2.4 Scanner Correction and Upkeep
Printing. Screws (2)
12.2.5
12.2.5 Balance Filter/Drive

12.2.2 Balance Filter Bracket Gear Replacement
Removal
Removal 1. Remove the filter bracket (see
subsection 12.2.2).
1. Remove the filter unit (see subsection
12.2.1).
2. Remove the filter and shaft by
removing the screw.
2. Remove the two screws and the filter EZ598
bracket.
3. Release the locking tab and remove Screw
Screws (2) the sensor from the bracket.
Filter Bracket
Bracket
Locking Tab
Sensor (D202)
EZ599
EZ596 Shaft Filter
Installation
EZ601

removal.
12-6
3. Remove the drive gear and two poly- 4. Remove the two screws and the filter 12.2.7 Light Source Aperture
sliders. holder and the heat-absorbing filter. Home Position/Standby
Drive Gear Sensor (D201/D203)
Filter Holder
Replacement
Screws (2)
Poly-sliders (2)
Removal
1. Remove the filter unit (see subsection

12.2.1).
2. Remove the sensor bracket by

removing the screw.
Sensor Bracket
EZ602 Heat-absorbing Filter

EZ604
Installation
Installation
Install the filter and gear in the reverse
order of removal.
After installation, perform the menu 433
order of removal.
“135 Light Source Aperture Table”.
NOTE: Face the coating (painted) surface
of the second IR filter down.
Screw
12.2.6 Filter Replacement
Second IR Filter EZ1228
Removal
1. Remove the filter unit (see subsection sensor. 12
12.2.1).
4. Remove the sensor from the bracket
12.2.6
2. Remove the screw and the filter by removing the screw.
12.2.7
bracket.
Sensor (D201)
Screw
Heat-absorbing Coating
Filter Surface
EZ605
Connector
Screws (2)
Sensor (D203)
Filter Bracket EZ607
EZ593
Installation
3. Remove the screw and the retaining
plate and second IR filter. Install the sensor in the reverse order of
removal.
Second IR Filter
Screw
Retaining Plate
EZ603
12-7
12.2.8 Light Source Aperture <Belt Tension Adjustment> 3. Remove the two screws and the
Motor (M201) aperture plate guide.
1. Loosen the two motor mounting
Replacement screws. 4. Remove the four screws and the two
belt holders and leaf springs.
Removal 2. Adjust the belt tension by moving the
motor. Aperture Plate Guide
1. Remove the balance filter bracket Screws (2) Screws (4)
(see subsection 12.2.2). Specified Tension: 250 to 300g/3mm
2. Remove the bracket by removing the 3. Tighten the two motor mounting
two screws. screws.
Screws (2) Motor Belt
Belt Holders (2)

Leaf Springs (2)
EZ611
Bracket 5. Loosen the two screws securing the

motor and remove the belt from the
Tension Gauge
Screws (2) pulleys.
EZ608
EZ610
Screws (2)
motor. Belt
12.2.9 Light Source Aperture
12 Screws (2)
Belt Replacement
12.2.8
12.2.9 Removal
1. Remove the balance filter bracket
2. Remove the two screws securing the Pulley

bracket. EZ612
Screws (2)
6. Remove the belt.
Motor (M201)
EZ609
Installation

order of removal.
After installation, adjust belt tension by
Bracket
EZ608
Belt
EZ1665
12-8
Installation 5. Install the two leaf springs and belt 3. Disconnect the connector (D204 or
holders and tighten the four screws. D205).
1. Install the belt and adjust its tension
(see subsection 12.2.8). Screws (4) Belt Holders (2) 4. Remove the sensor and holder plate
2. Install the aperture plate guide so that
its groove aligns with the aperture 120 Sensor Sensor
plates and tighten the two screws. (D205) Holder Plate
135 Sensor
Screws (2) (D204)
Aperture
Plate Guide
EZ614 Screws (2)
6. Re-install the removed parts in the

reverse order of removal. Connector (D204) Connector (D205)
EZ616
Aperture Plates
12.2.10 135/120 Mirror Box
EZ1666
Sensor (D204/D205) Installation
3. Install the leaf spring over the two Replacement

bushings and slider. removal.
Removal
Leaf Springs (2) 1. Remove the scanner section cover

12
2. Remove the four screws and the
mirror box guide. 12.2.10
Screws (4)
Slider Bushings (2)
EZ1667
4. Position the aperture plates to the fully

open position and engage the belt
teeth with the teeth on the sliders.
Screws (2)
Belt Holder
Mirror Box Guide
EZ615
Slider
Belt
EZ613
12-9
13. SCANNER SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................ 13-2
13.1 Scanner Section ............................................................................................ 13-3

13.1.1 Scanner Section Top Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................... 13-3
13.1.2 CCD Cooling Fan Bracket Removal/Re-installation ..................................... 13-3
13.1.3 Scanner Section Cover Removal/Re-installation .......................................... 13-3
13.1.4 Conjugate Length Variable Belt Replacement .............................................. 13-3
13.1.5 Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M101) Replacement ............................... 13-4
13.1.6 CCD Unit Removal/Re-installation ................................................................ 13-4
13.1.7 Shutter Home Position Sensor (D107) Replacement ................................... 13-5
13.1.8 Ball Screw Replacement ............................................................................... 13-5
13.1.9 CCD Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement ........................................................ 13-6
13.1.10 Table Right Cover (Scanner Section Rear Cover)
Removal/Re-installation ........................................................................... 13-6
13.1.11 Conjugate Length Variable Home Position (D102)/Upper Position
(D103)/Lower Position (D104) Sensor Replacement .............................. 13-6
13.1.12 Cooling Air Flow Sensor (D351) Replacement ............................................. 13-7
13.1.13 Air Flow Sensor Filter Replacement (SP2000: #2903036 and after) ............ 13-7
13.1.14 CCD Unit Shatter/Gear Replacement ........................................................... 13-8
13.2 Lens Section .................................................................................................. 13-9 13

13.2.1 Lens Temperature Sensor (D106) Replacement .......................................... 13-9
13.2.2 Variable Aperture Lens Bracket Removal/Re-installation ............................. 13-9
13.2.3 Lens Home Position Sensor (D105) Replacement ....................................... 13-9
13.2.4 Lens Drive Motor (M102) Replacement ........................................................ 13-10
13.2.5 Lens Unit Replacement ................................................................................ 13-10
13.2.6 Film Cooling Air Nozzle Replacement .......................................................... 13-11
13-1
Parts Location
CCD Cooling Fan (F301)
Conjugate Length
Variable Motor (M101)
CCD20 Unit
ND Filter
Lens Unit
Film Cooling
Air Nozzle
13
EZ915
13-2
13.1 Scanner Section
13.1.1 Scanner Section Top 13.1.3 Scanner Section Cover 13.1.4 Conjugate Length
Cover Removal/Re- Removal/Re-installation Variable Belt
installation Replacement
Removal
Removal Removal
1. Remove the film carrier.
1. Turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker 1. Remove the scanner section cover
and main power supply. 2. Remove the CCD cooling fan bracket (see subsection 13.1.3).
2. Remove the screw securing the 2. Loose the two screws securing the
scanner section top cover, and the 3. Move the conjugate length variable belt tensioner.
cover. unit to the top position by turning the
pulley clockwise using the standard 3. Remove the belt from the pulleys.
Scanner Section (–) screwdriver.
Screw
Top Cover Belt
Pulley
Standard (–)
Screwdriver
EZ547 Screws (2)

EZ549 EZ551
Re-installation
4. Remove the scanner section cover by Installation
Re-install the cover in the reverse order of lifting it up and turning its top toward
removal. the front as shown. Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
After installation, adjust the belt tension by 13
13.1.2 CCD Cooling Fan 13.1.1
Bracket Removal/Re- <Belt Tension Adjustment> 13.1.2
installation 13.1.3
13.1.4
Removal belt tensioner.
1. Remove the scanner section top cover 2. Rotate the pulley several turns and
(see subsection 13.1.1). secure the belt tensioner by tightening
the two screws.
2. Disconnect the fan connector (F301). Scanner Section Cover
Rotate Pulley Several Turns.
EZ550
3. Remove the eight screws and the fan
bracket.
Re-installation
Fan Bracket
removal.
Screws (2) Belt Tensioner

EZ552
Connector (F301)
Screws (8) After installation, perform the following

adjustments.
EZ548
• Menu 43J “Optical Magnification

Re-installation Calibration” (see subsection 9.4.9)
• Menu 43K “Focus Calibration” (see
Re-install the fan bracket in the reverse subsection 9.4.10)
order of removal. • Menu 43C “Carrier Focus Position
Adjustment” (see subsection 9.4.3)
13-3
13.1.5 Conjugate Length 13.1.6 CCD Unit Removal/Re- 5. Remove the screw securing the
Variable Motor (M101) installation grounding wires (FG1 and FG2).
Replacement 6. Open the clamp and disconnect the
Removal three connectors (CCD, CN4 and
Removal CN5) from the CCD unit.
1. Remove the scanner section cover
1. Remove the conjugate length variable (see subsection 13.1.3). Clamp
belt (see subsection 13.1.4).
2. Disconnect the motor connector. grounding wires.
3. Remove the motor by removing the 3. Cut the two cord ties securing the
two screws. noise suppressors.
Scanner with coaxial cables without
noise suppressor:
Remove the two screws and then the
cable clamp.
CCD
4. Open the clamp and disconnect the R, Screw/Grounding CN5
Wires (2) CN4
G and B cables from the CCD20 unit.
EZ561
Cord Ties (2) Clamp

<Coaxial cables without noise suppressor>
Screws (2) Clamp

Connector
Motor (M101)
EZ553
Noise
Installation
Suppressors
(2)
removal.
13 After installation, perform the following
Screws/
Grounding
adjustments. R Cable G Cable B Cable Wires (2) Screw/Grounding CCD
13.1.5 CN4
EZ560 Wire
13.1.6 • Menu 43J “Optical Magnification CN5
Calibration” (see subsection 9.4.9) EZ2092
<Coaxial cables without noise suppressor>
subsection 9.4.10) 7. Remove the two dust-proof covers by
• Menu 43C “Carrier Focus Position Cable Clamp removing the four screws.
Adjustment” (see subsection 9.4.3) Clamp
Dust-proof Covers
B Cable
G Cable
R Cable Screws/
Screws (2) Grounding
Wires (2) Screws (2) Screws (2)
EZ2091 EZ1229
13-4
8. Open the three clamps and 13.1.7 Shutter Home Position 5. Remove the four screws securing the
disconnect the two connectors (M103 Sensor (D107) ball screw shaft bracket.
and D107).
Replacement Ball Screw Shaft Bracket
Clamps (3)
Connector (M103) Connector (D107) Removal
1. Remove the CCD unit (see subsection

13.1.6).

sensor.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove

the sensor.
Connector Screws (4)

EZ562 EZ1670
9. Remove the three screws and the 6. Remove the bracket, bearing and
CCD unit. collar.
CCD Unit
Shutter Home Position Sensor (D107)

EZ564
Installation
Collar
Bearing 13
Screws (3) removal.
EZ563 Bracket 13.1.7

13.1.8
Re-installation 13.1.8 Ball Screw Replacement EZ1671
7. Remove the ball screw by removing

Installation is essentially in the reverse Removal
order of removal. the three special screws and springs.
1. Remove the conjugate length variable
NOTE: The clamp bracket and cable NOTE: Do not try to turn the ball
clamp can not be installed to the screw shaft. The balls come
scanner with coaxial cables with out of the screw when the
2. Remove the three screws securing
noise suppressor. Remove the thread section of the shaft is
the clamps.
clamp and bracket from the new out of the nut.
CCD unit. 3. Remove the screw securing the
Ball Screw
grounding wire.
adjustments. 4. Remove the bearing and bracket by
• “Dark Correction” in menu 43E “CCD
Data Display” (see subsection 9.4.5). Screw/Grounding Wire
• Menu 43H “Optical Axis Adjustment” Screws/Clamps (3)
(see subsection 9.4.8)
Calibration” (see subsection 9.4.9)
subsection 9.4.10)
Springs (3)
Adjustment” (see subsection 9.4.3) Special Screws (3)
• Menu 43N “ND Filter Density EZ1672
Measurement” (see subsection 9.4.11)
• Menu 43B “ND Dust Check” (see
subsection 9.4.2)
• Reference creation in menu 43E “CCD Screws (3) Bearing
Bracket
Data Display” (see subsection 9.4.5).
EZ1669
13-5
Installation Installation 5. Remove the fourteen screws and the

table right cover (scanner section rear
Install the ball screw in the reverse order Installation is essentially in the reverse cover).
of removal. order of removal.
NOTE: Make sure the R, G and B cables NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow
Screws
are not stretched when the points down. (14)
scanner is moved up and down by
turning the belt by hand. Duct Screws (2)
Belt
Fan
Table Right
Cover
EZ572
Arrow Bracket
Re-installation
EZ571
R, G and B Cables
EZ1673 Re-install the cover in the reverse order of
removal.
After installation, perform the following 13.1.10 Table Right Cover
adjustments. (Scanner Section Rear
Cover) Removal/Re- 13.1.11 Conjugate Length
installation Variable Home Position
• Menu 43K “Focus Calibration” (see (D102)/Upper Position
subsection 9.4.10) Removal (D103)/Lower Position
• Menu 43C “Carrier Focus Position (D104) Sensor
13 Adjustment” (see subsection 9.4.3) 1. Remove the scanner section cover
Replacement
13.1.9
2. Remove the mat from the table. Removal
13.1.10
13.1.9 CCD Cooling Fan (F301)
13.1.11
Replacement 3. Remove the two screws securing the 1. Remove the table right cover (scanner
grounding wires. section rear cover) (see subsection
Removal 13.1.10).
2. Disconnect the sensor relay

1. Remove the cooling fan bracket (see
subsection 13.1.2). connector.

2. Remove the fan connector from the
bracket. removing the two screws.
Sensor Bracket
3. Remove the duct and fan by removing
the two screws. D103 Screws (2)
Relay Connector
Duct
Screws/Grounding Wires (2)
Screws (2)
EZ1668
4. Remove the three screws and then

the scanner section lower cover.
Scanner Section Lower Cover
Fan Relay Connector D104 D102

Fan Connector EZ573
EZ570
Screws (3)
EZ2288
13-6
4. Disconnect the connector from the <New Type> 13.1.13 Air Flow Sensor Filter
sensor. Replacement (SP2000:
Hose
5. Release the locking tab and remove
#2903036 and after)
Connector
the sensor from the bracket. Hose Joint
Removal
Sensor Connector
1. Remove the air flow sensor (see
2. Remove the four screws and then the

Locking Tab entrance joint flange.
Screws (4)
Entrance
Joint Flange
Hose Joint Hose
EZ574
EZ2283
Installation
Install the sensor in the reverse order of two screws.
removal.
After installation, perform the following Air Flow Sensor (D531) Screws (2)
adjustments.

subsection 9.4.10) EZ2285
Adjustment” (see subsection 9.4.3) 3. Remove the large and small O-rings
and filter.
13
13.1.12 Cooling Air Flow Arrow Large O-ring
13.1.12
Sensor (D351) EZ576
13.1.13
Replacement Small O-ring
<New Type>
Removal Filter
Screws (2)
Air Flow Sensor (D531)
1. Remove the table right cover (scanner
section rear cover) (see subsection
13.1.10).

sensor.
3. Push the hose joints against the

sensor and disconnect the two hoses.
Hose EZ2286
Connector Hose Joint
4. Remove the small O-ring and filter.
Arrow
Small O-ring
EZ2284
Filter
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Install the sensor so that its arrow

Hose Joint Hose points up.
EZ575
EZ2287
13-7
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Align the mesh of both new filters.
13.1.14 CCD Unit Shatter/Gear

Replacement
Removal

13.1.6).
2. Remove the shaft, poly-slider and

then the shutter.
3. Remove the shaft and then the shutter

drive gear.
Shaft
Poly-slider
Shaft
Shutter
13
13.1.14
Shutter Drive Gear

EZ1946
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of

removal.
13-8
13.2 Lens Section
13.2.1 Lens Temperature Sensor 3. Remove the four screws securing the 13.2.3 Lens Home Position
(D106) Replacement bracket. Sensor (D105)
Bracket Replacement
Removal
Removal
(see subsection 13.1.3). 1. Remove the variable aperture lens
bracket (see subsection 13.2.2).
sensor. 2. Cut the three cord ties.
3. Remove the sensor by removing the 3. Remove the connector from the
two screws. bracket.
Screws (4) Connector

EZ891
Screws (2) 4. Align the cutout in the bracket with the

sensor plate and remove the bracket.
Sensor Plate
Connector
Cord Ties (3)
Lens Temperature Sensor (D106) EZ893
EZ556
Installation two screws.
Screws (2)
removal.
adjustments.
13
13.2.1
Calibration” (see subsection 9.4.9) Cutout Bracket 13.2.2
• Menu 43K “Focus Calibration” (see EZ892 13.2.3
subsection 9.4.10)
• Menu 43C “Carrier Focus Position Re-installation
Lens Home Position Sensor (D105)
Re-install the bracket in the reverse order
of removal. EZ894
13.2.2 Variable Aperture Lens Installation

Bracket Removal/Re-
installation Install the sensor in the reverse order of
removal.
Removal
adjustments.
2. Disconnect the three connectors
subsection 9.4.10)
(D105, D106 and M102).
D106
D105 M102
EZ890
13-9
13.2 Lens Section
13.2.4 Lens Drive Motor (M102) Installation 4. Remove the three screws securing
Replacement the lens unit, lift the lens unit to clear it
Install the motor and gear in the reverse from the locating pins and remove it
order of removal. by turning 60 degrees
Removal After installation, perform the following counterclockwise.
adjustments.
1. Remove the variable aperture lens
NOTE: Do not loosen the other
• Menu 43J “Optical Magnification screws.
2. Cut the three cord ties.
• Menu 43K “Focus Calibration” (see Lens Unit
subsection 9.4.10)
3. Remove the connector from the 60°
bracket.
Connector
13.2.5 Lens Unit Replacement
Removal

13.1.6). Screws (3)
EZ568
2. Disconnect the connectors (D105,
D106 and M102). 5. Remove the lens from the bracket by
Cord Ties (3)
D106
EZ895
Lens
4. Remove the clamp from the motor
bracket.
5. Remove the motor bracket by

13
13.2.4
13.2.5 Screws (4)
D105 M102 Lens Bracket

EZ566 EZ569
3. Remove the lens cover by removing Re-installation

the three screws.
Re-install the lens unit in the reverse order
Lens Cover of removal.
Motor Bracket Clamp After installation, perform the following
Screws (3) adjustments.
EZ896
• Menu 43G “Lens Registration” (see
subsection 9.4.7).
6. Remove the motor from the bracket
• “Dark Correction” in menu 43E “CCD
by removing the four screws.
Data Display” (see subsection 9.4.5).
• Menu 43H”Optical Axis Adjustment”
(see subsection 9.4.8)
Screws (4) Screws (3)
Bracket • Menu 43K “Focus Calibration” (see
EZ567 subsection 9.4.10)
EZ559
Motor (M102)
13-10
13.2 Lens Section
13.2.6 Film Cooling Air Nozzle 4 ) Tighten the two hex. socket head
Replacement bolts securely.
Mirror Box Hex. Socket Head Bolts (2)

Removal

2. Remove the two hex. socket head

bolts and the nozzle and two plain
washers.
3. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the

hose from the nozzle. Rod with OD Less
Than 5mm
Clamp Hose Nozzle
EZ578
Nozzle Hex. Socket

Head Bolts (2)
EZ577
Installation
Installation is essentially in the reverse 13

order of removal.
13.2.6
NOTE: After installation, adjust the nozzle
position by following the steps
below.
<Nozzle Position Adjustment>
1) Loosen the two hex. socket head

bolts.
2) Insert a rod with OD less than

5mm (such as a straw) into the
nozzle.
NOTE: Take care not to damage

the mirror box.
3) Adjust the nozzle position so that

the rod points the center of the left
edge on the mirror box as shown.
13-11
14. SCANNER ELECTRICAL SECTION
Parts Location .................................................................................................. 14-2
14.1 Power Supply Section .................................................................................... 14-3

14.1.1 Main Control Unit Section Cover and Scanner Rear Cover Removal/
Re-installation ............................................................................................ 14-3
14.1.2 Input Power Supply Unit Removal/Re-installation .......................................... 14-3
14.1.3 Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement ............................................................. 14-4
14.1.4 Noise Filter (NF1) Replacement ..................................................................... 14-4
14.1.5 Transformer Replacement .............................................................................. 14-4
14.1.6 Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP16) Replacement .............................................. 14-5
14.1.7 PWR20 Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................... 14-5
14.1.8 Relay (K1/K2)/SSR1 Replacement ................................................................. 14-5
14.1.9 DC24V Power Supply Replacement ............................................................... 14-6
14.1.10 DC24V Voltage Adjustment ............................................................................ 14-6
14.1.11 Lamp Power Supply Replacement ................................................................. 14-6
14.1.12 Lamp Voltage Adjustment ............................................................................... 14-7
14.1.13 DC Power Supply Replacement ..................................................................... 14-7
14.2 Electrical Equipment/Control Section ........................................................ 14-8

14.2.1 Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan (F306/F307)
Replacement ............................................................................................. 14-8
14.2.2 Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan Bracket Removal/
Re-installation ............................................................................................ 14-8
14
14.2.3 CTB20 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................. 14-8
14.2.4 Image Processing Circuit Board Box Cooling Fan (F304/F305)
Replacement ............................................................................................. 14-8
14.2.5 Image Processing Circuit Board CDS20/GFM20/GIP20/GLO20
/GIS20/GMB20 (GMC20) Replacement .................................................... 14-8
14.2.6 Image Processing Circuit Board Box Removal/Re-installation ....................... 14-9
14.2.7 Film Cooling Air Compressor Unit Removal/Re-installation ............................ 14-10
14.2.8 Film Cooling Air Tank Replacement ................................................................ 14-11
14.2.9 Film Cooling Air Compressor (PU351) /
Vibration Isolation Rubber Replacement ................................................... 14-11
14.2.10 Main Control Unit Replacement ...................................................................... 14-11
14.2.11 Noise Filter Replacement ............................................................................... 14-12
14.2.12 Start Switch Replacement .............................................................................. 14-12
14-1
Parts Location
Image Processing Circuit DC24V

Image Processing Board Box Cooling Fans Power Supply Noise Filter (NF1)
Circuit Board Box (F304/F305)
Transformer
Electrical Equipment Section PWR20 Circuit Board Circuit Breaker
Exhaust Fans (F306/F307) (NFB1)
Input Terminal
Lamp Power Supply Block (J1)
Circuit Protectors
(CP11 to CP16)
Relay (K2)
Relay (K1)
Start Switch
14
CTB20 Circuit Board Input Power Supply Unit
Main Control Unit DC Power Supply Film Cooling Air Compressor

(PU351)
EZ913
14-2
14.1 Power Supply Section
14.1.1 Main Control Unit 4. Remove the scanner rear cover by 4. Open the three clamps securing the
Section Cover and loosening the four screws and harness to the PWR20 circuit board.
removing the fifteen screws.
Scanner Rear Cover 5. Disconnect the three connectors.
Removal/Re-installation Screws (15)(Remove)
6. Remove the two screws and pull out
Removal the power supply unit.
1. Turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker

and main power supply.
! WARNING
The main power supply must be

switched OFF.
Even if the built-in circuit breaker is
turned OFF, electricity will still be
supplied, so the power supply area
Scanner Rear Cover
can cause electric shocks and short-
circuiting. Screws (4)(Loosen) Clamps (3)
Screws (2)
EZ900
2. Remove the six screws and the main Connectors (3)
control unit section cover. Re-installation EZ953
Main Control Unit Section Cover Re-install the covers in the reverse order 7. Disconnect the four connectors
of removal. (PER1, PER5, PER8 and PER9).
14.1.2 Input Power Supply Unit

Removal
1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see

subsection 14.1.1).
Screws (6)
EZ899 2. Disconnect the input power cable from 14
the terminal block (J1).
3. Remove the cable cover by removing Connectors (4)
14.1.1
the two screws. 3. Remove the nut and the power cable EZ954
14.1.2
guide.
8. Disconnect the two connectors (CNO1
Power Cable Guide and CNO2) and open the two clamps.
Connectors
(2)
Screws (2) Cable Cover
EZ1190 Clamps (2)
Nut
EZ952
EZ955
Re-installation

removal.
14-3
14.1.3 Circuit Breaker (NFB1) 14.1.4 Noise Filter (NF1) 14.1.5 Transformer
Replacement Replacement Replacement
Removal Removal Removal
1. Remove the input power supply unit 1. Remove the input power supply unit 1. Remove the input power supply unit
(see subsection 14.1.2). (see subsection 14.1.2). (see subsection 14.1.2).
2. Remove the four screws and the 2. Remove the noise filter by removing 2. Disconnect the input connector.
circuit breaker. the two screws.
3. Disconnect the grounding wire by
Circuit Breaker
removing the screw.
4. Disconnect the output connector.

clamp.
Screw Output Connector

Input Connector
Screws (2)
Noise Filter
Screws (4) EZ958
EZ956
3. Disconnect the wires from the noise

3. Disconnect the four wires from the filter by removing the five terminal
circuit breaker by removing the four nuts.
terminal screws.
Noise Filter (NF1) Grounding Wire
Wires (4) Clamp Screw
EZ960
6. Remove the transformer by removing

14 the four screws.
14.1.3 Transformer
14.1.4
14.1.5
Screws (4) Nuts (5)

EZ959
EZ957
Installation Installation
Install the circuit breaker in the reverse Install the noise filter in the reverse order
of removal.
order of removal.
Screws (4)
EZ961
Installation
Install the transformer in the reverse order

of removal.
14-4
14.1.6 Circuit Protector (CP11 Installation 4. Disconnect all connectors from the
to CP16) Replacement relay.
Install the circuit board in the reverse
order of removal. 5. Remove the relay from the bracket by
Removal removing the two screws.
1. Remove the input power supply unit Screws (2) Relay
(see subsection 14.1.2). 14.1.8 Relay (K1/K2)/SSR1
Replacement
2. Disconnect the wires from the circuit
protector.
Removal
1. Remove the input power supply unit
the circuit protector from the bracket.
Circuit Protector
2. Remove the PWR20 circuit board
Locking Tabs
bracket by removing the three screws.
Connectors (6)
EZ966
6. Disconnect the four wires from the

SSR1.
7. Remove the SSR1 from the bracket

Wires PWR20 Circuit Board Bracket Screws (2) SSR1
EZ962 Screws (3)
EZ964
Installation
Install the circuit protector in the reverse
relay bracket.
order of removal.
14
14.1.7 PWR20 Circuit Board 14.1.6
Replacement 14.1.7
14.1.8
Removal
Wires (4)
1. Remove the input power supply unit
EZ967
Installation
circuit board. Relay Bracket Screws (2) Install the SSR1 in the reverse order of
EZ965 removal.
3. Release the locking tabs of the
spacers and remove the circuit board.
Connectors (3) Spacers (5)
PWR20 Circuit Board

EZ963
14-5
14.1.9 DC24V Power Supply 14.1.10 DC24V Voltage 14.1.11 Lamp Power Supply
Replacement Adjustment Replacement
Removal 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see Removal

subsection 14.1.1).
1. Remove the input power supply unit 1. Remove the CTB20 circuit board (see
(see subsection 14.1.2). 2. Turn ON the main power supply and subsection 14.2.3).
built-in circuit breaker.
2. Disconnect four wires from the 2. Disconnect the connector (LCN1)
terminal block by removing the four ! WARNING from the lamp power supply.
screws. The next steps are performed with the
power ON.
3. Disconnect the connector (CN5). Take care to avoid short-circuiting and
electric shocks.
CN5
Terminal Block 3. Measure the voltage between the
TP11 (+24V) and the TP10 (GND) on
the CTB20 circuit board.
Specified Voltage: +24V ± 0.3V
LCN1
EZ940
Screws (4) Wires (4)

3. Remove the lamp power supply by
RZ968
loosening the screw and removing the
three screws.
4. Remove the DC24V power supply by
removing the four screws. CTB20 Circuit Board
NOTE: The two clamps are tightened
EZ970 together with the two right
DC24V Power Supply
screws.
4. If necessary, adjust the voltage by
14 turning the VR51 on the DC24V 4. Disconnect the two connectors (LCN4
power supply. and LCN10).
14.1.9
14.1.10 Screw (Loosen)
14.1.11 VR51
LCN4
Screws (4)
EZ969
Installation
Screws (3)(Remove)
EZ971
Install the DC24V power supply in the LCN10
reverse order of removal.
5. Re-install the scanner rear cover. EZ941
14-6
5. Remove the output terminal block 6. With menu “43A I/O Check”, turn ON 3. Disconnect the output wires (5V,
cover and disconnect the two wires the scanner lamp. GND5, 3.3V and GND3) by removing
(TB1-1 and TB1-2) by removing the the four terminal screws.
screws. 7. Turn the adjusting knob “OUT ADJ” on
the lamp power supply so that the
Cover GND5 3.3V
voltage at the lamp connector is 29V.
5V GND3
! WARNING
The following steps are performed
with the power ON.
Take care to avoid short-circuiting and
electrical shocks.
Lamp Power Supply
Connectors (7)
EZ950
TB1-2 TB1-1
Lamp Power Supply 4. Remove the four harness clamps by
releasing their locking tabs.
EZ942

Installation
clamps.
EZ1838
6. Remove the three mounting screws
order of removal. 8. Leave everything as is for about three and the DC power supply.
minutes until the lamp brightness
NOTE: After installation, adjust the lamp downs.
voltage (see subsection 14.1.12).
9. Turn the “DOWN ADJ” adjusting knob
on the lamp power supply so that the
14.1.12 Lamp Voltage voltage at the lamp connector is 20V.
Adjustment
Lamp Power Supply
1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see 14

subsection 14.1.1).
14.1.12
2. Turn ON the main power supply and
Screws (2) 14.1.13
built-in circuit breaker.
Clamps (2)(Remove) Clamps (4)(Remove)
! WARNING EZ951
The next steps are performed with the
power ON. Installation
Take care to avoid short-circuiting and
electric shocks. EZ1839 Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
3. Start the system by pressing the 10. Turn ON the lamp and readjust “OUT
START switch. ADJ” so that the voltage is 29V. NOTE: Reconnect the input voltage
change wire on the DC power
4. Open the light source section cover 11. Remove the voltmeter and reinstall supply to the appropriate input
and connect the DC voltmeter to the the scanner rear cover. voltage terminal.
lamp connector.
Lamp Connector
14.1.13 DC Power Supply
Replacement
Removal

subsection 14.1.1).

DC power supply. Input Voltage Change Wire
EZ1078
EZ1837
5. Close the light source section cover.
14-7
14.2 Electrical Equipment/Control Section
14.2.1 Electrical Equipment 3. Disconnect the fan connectors. 14.2.4 Image Processing
Section Exhaust Fan Circuit Board Box
Fan Connectors (2)
(F306/F307) Replacement Cooling Fan (F304/F305)
Replacement
Removal
Removal
subsection 14.1.1). 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see
subsection 14.1.1).
2. Disconnect the fan connector and
remove it from the bracket. 2. Disconnect the fan connector and
remove it from the bracket.
3. Remove the fan guard and fan by
removing the two screws. 3. Remove the fan guard and fan by
EZ938
Fan (F306) Connectors
Fan (F304) Fan (F305)
Re-installation
Re-install the fan bracket in the reverse

Arrow
order of removal.

Replacement Outside
Screws (2) Removal

Guard Outside Inside
1. Remove the electrical equipment Connectors
Fan (F307) Inside
section exhaust fan bracket (see
EZ936 subsection 14.2.2). Arrow
EZ944
Installation 2. Disconnect all connectors from the
circuit board. Installation
14 order of removal. 3. Remove the circuit board from the Installation is essentially in the reverse
nine circuit board spacers. order of removal.
14.2.1 NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow
points the outside. NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow
14.2.2
points the outside.
14.2.3
14.2.4
14.2.5
14.2.2 Electrical Equipment
Section Exhaust Fan 14.2.5 Image Processing
Bracket Removal/Re- Circuit Board CDS20/
installation GFM20/GIP20/GLO20/
GIS20/GMB20 (GMC20)
Removal Replacement
1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see Removal
subsection 14.1.1).
CTB20 Circuit Board
Circuit Board Spacers (9) 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see
2. Remove the fan bracket by loosening subsection 14.1.1).
the screw and remove the other screw. EZ939
2. Disconnect the connectors (CDS4,

Screw (Loosen) Fan Bracket Installation
CDS5 and CDS2) and R, G and B
cables from the CDS20 circuit board.
order of removal.
3. Remove the screw and the clamp.
4. Disconnect the grounding wires (FG3

and FG4) by removing the screw.
5. Disconnect the connector (GLO) from

the GLO20 circuit board.
6. Disconnect the fan connectors (F304

and F305) and remove the harness
Screw (Remove) from the two clamps.
EZ937
14-8
7. Disconnect the interface cable and 10. Remove the holding plate and 14.2.6 Image Processing
cable to the main control unit. connector box from the GIS20 circuit Circuit Board Box
board by removing the six screws.
Interface Cable
Cable to Main Screws (6)
CDS2
B Control Unit Removal
R G
1. Remove:
• scanner rear cover (see subsection
14.1.1).
• table left cover (see subsection
11.1.2).
2. Open the six clamps on the image

processing circuit board box.
Holding Plate
Connector Box
F305 EZ949
F304 GLO
FG3/FG4 CDS5/CDS4
11. Disconnect the connector (GMB) from
Screw/Clamp
the GMB20 (GMC20) circuit board.
EZ945
12. Disconnect the wires from the

8. Remove the circuit board box cover terminal block by removing the four
by removing the eighteen screws. screws.
Circuit Board Box Cover 13. Remove the GMB20 (GMC20) circuit
board by removing the thirteen
screws.
Screws (4)/Wires Screws (13)
Clamps (6)
EZ972
3. Disconnect the wires from the terminal

block on the DC power supply by 14
removing the four terminal screws.
Screws (18)
14.2.6
EZ946
9. Remove the CDS20, GFM20, GIP20,

GLO20 and GIS20 circuit boards.
GMB GMB20 (GMC20) Circuit Board
GLO20
EZ948
GIP20 Circuit Board
Circuit Board GIS20
Circuit Board Installation
Installation is essencially in the reverse

order of removal. Screws (4)/Wires
EZ973
NOTE: Make sure the DIP switches on
the circuit board are set as shown
table below. 4. Disconnect the two connectors (F304
and F305) and open the six clamps.
Circuit Board 5. Disconnect the three connectors

GMB20 GMC20
DIP Switch (CDS2, CDS4 and CDS5).
1 ON ON
6. Open the four clamps and disconnect
CDS20 GFM20 2 OFF OFF
Circuit Board Circuit Board
the R, G and B cables.
3 OFF OFF
EZ947
4 OFF OFF 7. Remove the four screws and the
clamps.
5 OFF OFF
6 OFF ON 8. Disconnect the two grounding wires
7 OFF OFF
(FG3 and FG4) by removing the
screw.
8 ON ON
14-9
9. Disconnect the interface cable and 13. Remove the circuit board box. 4. Remove the wing bolt and the air filter
cable to main control unit. case.
Circuit Board Box
CDS2 Cable to Main
R Cable Control Unit
G Cable F304
EZ977
Wing Bolt Air Filter Case
F305 EZ929
B Cable CDS4/CDS5
Screw/Clamps(4)
Re-installation
5. Disconnect the hose from the outlet
FG3/FG4
Re-install the circuit board box in the joint.
EZ974 reverse order of removal.
6. Disconnect the connector.
circuit board box. Hose
14.2.7 Film Cooling Air
Compressor Unit
Removal/Re-installation Connector
Removal

Outlet Joint
2. Remove the air compressor section
cover by removing the ten screws.
14 Screws (2) Air Compressor Section Cover

EZ980
EZ975
14.2.7 7. Remove the three screws securing the
11. Remove the keyboard cable from the bracket and remove the compressor
clamp. unit.

circuit board box.
Screws (2)
Screws (10)
EZ979
Screws (3)
3. Remove the air filter section cover.
Compressor Bracket
EZ981
Re-installation
Clamp Keyboard Cable Re-install the unit in the reverse order of

EZ976 removal.
Air Filter Section Cover

EZ928
14-10
14.2.8 Film Cooling Air Tank 14.2.9 Film Cooling Air 5. Remove the bracket from the air
Replacement Compressor (PU351) / compressor by removing the four
screws.
Vibration Isolation
Removal Rubber Replacement Screws (4) Bracket
1. Remove the air compressor unit (see Removal

subsection 14.2.7).
1. Remove the air compressor unit (see
2. Disconnect the hose from the hose subsection 14.2.7).
joint.
Hose
removing the screw.
3. Disconnect the hose from the hose

joint.
Hose Hose Joint EZ987
6. Hold the lower metal of the rubbers

and remove the four nuts. Remove the
lock washers and vibration isolation
rubbers.
Hose Joint Bracket Nuts/Lock Washers (4)

EZ983
3. Remove the air tank from the bracket

EZ985
4. Hold the upper metal of the vibration

isolation rubbers with the 21mm open-
end wrench and remove the four nuts
and lock washers. Remove the air Vibration Isolation
compressor. 21mm Open-end Rubbers (4) 14
Wrench
NOTE: Take care not to apply EZ988 14.2.8
excessive stress to the
14.2.9
Air Tank Screws (4) rubbers. Excessive stress may Installation
shorten the service life of the 14.2.10
EZ984
rubbers. Installation is essentially in the reverse
Installation order of removal.
Install the tank in the reverse order of
removal. NOTE: Take care not to apply excessive
Nuts (4) stress to the rubbers. Excessive
stress may shorten the service life
of the rubbers.
Air Compressor 14.2.10 Main Control Unit

Replacement
Vibration Isolation Rubber Removal

21mm Open-end Wrench
1. Remove the main control unit section
EZ986
cover (see subsection 14.1.1).
2. Remove the front main control unit

section cover.
14-11
3. Loosen the two screws securing the Installation 14.2.12 Start Switch
main control unit holder. Lift the holder Replacement
and tighten the two screws. Install the unit in the reverse order of
removal.
Screws (2) Main Control Unit Holder Removal
NOTE: M/L Type: Make sure the input
voltage change switch is in “230”.
<M/L Type>
2. Remove the start switch bracket by
Start Switch Bracket
Input Voltage
Change Switch
GD1368
4. Disconnect all cables from the main

control unit.
<M/L Type>
EZ1075
Screws (2)
Monitor Cable After installation, perform the following
operation. EZ1219
• Software Installation in Replacing the 3. Disconnect the switch connector.

Main Control Unit (see section 8.5)
the start switch from the bracket.
14.2.11 Noise Filter Connector

Replacement
Removal
14 Power Cable Start Switch
SCSI Cable Cable 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see
14.2.11 EZ1077 subsection 14.1.1).
14.2.12 <G/XL Type>
2. Disconnect the power cable from the
main control unit.
Start Switch Cable
3. Disconnect the power cable from the
noise filter.
4. Remove the noise filter by removing

the two screws. Start Switch
EZ978
Screws (2)
Installation
SCSI Cable
Install the switch in the reverse order of
Power Cable Monitor Cable removal.
Main Control Unit
GD1365
5. Remove the main control unit.
Noise Filter
GD1371
Installation
Install the noise filter in the reverse order

Main Control Unit of removal.
GD1369
14-12
15. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................ 15-3
15.1 Paper Supply Section .................................................................................. 15-4

15.1.1 Magazine Section Door Sensor Interlock Switch (D580) Replacement ........ 15-4
15.1.2 Magazine Setting Lever Assembly Removal/Re-installation ......................... 15-4
15.1.3 Magazine Setting Lever/Gear Replacement ................................................. 15-4
15.1.4 Magazine Table Sliding Gear Replacement .................................................. 15-5
15.1.5 Upper or Lower Paper End Sensor (D505 or D525) Replacement ............... 15-6
15.1.6 Upper or Lower Magazine ID Sensor Cover Removal/Re-installation .......... 15-6
15.1.7 Upper or Lower Magazine ID Sensor (D500 to D504 or D520 to D524)
Replacement ........................................................................................... 15-6
15.1.8 Upper or Lower Paper Supply Motor (M501 or M521)/Belt Replacement .... 15-6
15.1.9 Upper or Lower Cutter Home Position Sensor (Close)(D508 or D528)
Replacement ........................................................................................... 15-7
15.1.10 Upper or Lower Cutter Home Position Sensor (Open)(D507 or D527)
Replacement ........................................................................................... 15-8
15.1.11 Cutter Unit Replacement .............................................................................. 15-8
15.1.12 Upper or Lower Cutter Motor (M500 or M520) Replacement ....................... 15-9
15.1.13 Upper or Lower Paper Splice Sensor (D506 or D526) Replacement ........... 15-9
15.1.14 Cutter Top and Bottom Dead Center Adjustment .......................................... 15-9
15.1.15 Cutter Angle Adjustment ............................................................................... 15-10
15.1.16 Paper Magazine Angle Adjustment ............................................................... 15-10
15.1.17 Paper Magazine Section Cooling Fan (F594) Replacement ........................ 15-10
15.1.18 Magazine Paper End Sensor Shading Plate Replacement .......................... 15-10
15
15.1.19 Paper Magazine Nip Roller Replacement ..................................................... 15-11
15.1.20 Paper Magazine Table Ball Catch Replacement .......................................... 15-12
15.2 Paper Feed Section ...................................................................................... 15-13

15.2.1 Paper Feed Section Front Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................... 15-13
15.2.2 Printer Side Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................................. 15-13
15.2.3 Printer Upper Side Cover Removal/Re-installation ....................................... 15-13
15.2.4 Lower or Middle Side Door Sensor Interlock Switch
(D581A/D581B or D582A/D582B) Replacement ..................................... 15-13
15.2.5 Upper Side Door Sensor Interlock Switch (D583A/D583B)
Replacement ........................................................................................... 15-14
15.2.6 Shading Plate Removal/Re-installation ........................................................ 15-14
15.2.7 Upper or Lower Feed Entrance Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation .......... 15-14
15.2.8 Upper or Lower Feed Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation ......................... 15-15
15.2.9 Middle or Lower Side Door Section Paper Sensor (D541 or D552)
Replacement ........................................................................................... 15-15
15.2.10 Ambient Temperature Sensor (THA20) Replacement .................................. 15-16
15.2.11 Middle Side Door Turn, Middle Side Door, Lower Side Door
Turn or Lower Side Door Section Feed Motor
(M540, M541, M550 or M551) Replacement ........................................... 15-16
15-1
15.2.12 Feed Roller Replacement ............................................................................. 15-16
15.2.13 Back Printing Section Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation ......................... 15-17
15.3 Speed Adjustment Section ......................................................................... 15-18

15.3.1 Upper Side Door Section Nip Release Motor (M545) or
Upper Side Door Section Feed Motor (M542) Replacement ................... 15-18
15.3.2 Upper Side Door Section Nip Release Sensor (D547) Replacement ........... 15-18
15.3.3 Speed Adjustment Section Nip Roller Replacement ..................................... 15-18
15.3.4 Speed Adjustment Section Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation ................. 15-19
15.4 Back Printing Section ................................................................................... 15-20

15.4.1 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment .................................................... 15-20
15.4.2 Back Printer Head or JNE20 Circuit Board Replacement ............................. 15-20
15.4.3 Back Printer Sensor (D544) Replacement .................................................... 15-21
15.4.4 Back Printer Unit Removal/Re-installation .................................................... 15-22
15.4.5 Back Printer Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement ............................................. 15-22
15.5 Border Adjustment ........................................................................................ 15-24

15.5.1 Small Size Print Border Adjustment Procedure ............................................ 15-24
15.5.2 Large Size Print Border Adjustment Procedure ............................................ 15-25
15.5.3 Other Size Print Border Adjustment Procedure ............................................ 15-26
15.5.4 Cutter Position Adjustment ........................................................................... 15-27
15.5.5 Magazine Table Stainless Plate Position Adjustment ................................... 15-28
15.5.6 Magazine ID Sensor Position Adjustment ..................................................... 15-28
15
15.5.7 Feed Entrance Guide Plate Height Adjustment ............................................ 15-29
15-2
Parts Location

Feed Motor (M542)
Upper Side Door Section Nip

Release Motor (M545)
Back Printer
Upper Paper Supply

Motor (M501)
Middle Side Door Section

Feed Motor (M541) Upper Paper
Magazine
Middle Side Door Turn
Section Feed Motor (M540)
Upper Paper
Magazine Table
Upper Cutter
Lower Paper
Upper Cutter Motor
Magazine 15
(M500)
Lower Paper Supply

Motor (M521)

Feed Motor (M551) Lower Paper
Magazine Table
Lower Side Door Turn Section

Feed Motor (M550)
Lower Cutter
Lower Cutter Motor (M520)
EZ189
15-3
15.1 Paper Supply Section
15.1.1 Magazine Section Door Installation Re-installation

Sensor Interlock Switch
Install the switch in the reverse order of Re-installation is essentially in the reverse
(D580) Replacement removal. order of removal.
Removal NOTE: Move the magazine table all the

way to the processor side and
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 15.1.2 Magazine Setting Lever engage the gears so that the lever
and the built-in circuit breaker and the Assembly Removal/Re- is parallel with the table.
main power supply OFF. installation
Magazine
2. Open the magazine section Door. Gears Setting Lever
Removal
3. Remove the switch cover by removing
1. Remove the paper magazine.
the two screws.
2. Remove the four screws and the lever
cover by turning it 90 degrees.
Screws (4)
Parallel
Move to Processor Side.
Switch Cover EZ030
Screws (2)
EZ773
15.1.3 Magazine Setting Lever/
4. Remove the switch bracket by Gear Replacement
removing the two screws. Lever Cover
EZ028 Removal
3. Remove the magazine setting lever by 1. Remove the magazine setting lever
removing the two screws. assembly (see subsection 15.1.2).
Magazine Setting Lever
2. Remove the three screws, the setting
lever, shaft and miter gear.
15 Screws (3)
Miter Gear
15.1.1
15.1.2
Shaft
15.1.3
Screws (2)
Switch Bracket
EZ774
Screws (2)
5. Remove the spring, E-ring and shaft. EZ029
6. Disconnect the connector from the Setting Lever

switch and remove the switch. EZ031
E-ring Shaft Connector
Switch
(D580)
Spring
EZ775
15-4
3. Remove the two screws, the shaft 15.1.4 Magazine Table Sliding 5. Remove the gear holding plate by
bracket and bevel gear/spur gear. Gear Replacement removing the four screws.
Shaft Bracket Screws (4)

Removal
Screws (2) 1. Remove the magazine setting lever

assembly (see subsection 15.1.2).
2. Remove the stainless steel plate by

removing the eight screws.
Bevel Gear/
Spur Gear
Screws (8) Stainless Steel Plate
Gear Holding Plate

EZ036
6. Remove the three gears and sliding

arm.
EZ032
Sliding Arm
Installation

EZ033
order of removal.
NOTE: • Install the miter gear to the
rollers and remove the sliding plate.
setting lever and engage the
miter gear with the bevel gear by
aligning their paint marks. Sliding Plate
• If there are no paint marks, align
the “ ” marks on the miter and
bevel gears. Gears (3)
EZ037
“ ” Marks
7. Remove the screw, the shaft, bearing
and rubber roller from the arm.
8. Remove the gear from the arm by 15

15.1.4
Screw
Screws (2)
Gear Rubber Roller
EZ034
Screws (2)
4. Remove the guide plate by removing
Bevel Gear Miter Gear the six screws.
EZ1351
Screws (6)
IMPORTANT: Guide Plate
Apply grease to new gears after
replacement.
Bearing
Shaft
EZ038
EZ035
15-5
Installation 15.1.6 Upper or Lower 15.1.7 Upper or Lower

Magazine ID Sensor Magazine ID Sensor
order of removal.
Cover Removal/Re- (D500 to D504 or D520
installation to D524) Replacement
NOTE: Press the two rollers on the sliding
plate lightly to the arrow direction Removal Removal
to remove play and tighten the two
screws. 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 1. Remove the magazine ID sensor
and the built-in circuit breaker and the cover (see subsection 15.1.6).
main power supply OFF.
Rollers
2. Disconnect the connector (MGS) from
2. Remove the paper magazine. the sensor.
3. Remove the two screws and the 3. Remove the sensor by removing the
magazine ID sensor cover. two screws.
Screws (2)
Press Lightly.
EZ1352
15.1.5 Upper or Lower Paper

End Sensor (D505 or Magazine ID Sensor Screws (2)
D525) Replacement Connector (MGS)
Magazine ID Sensor Cover EZ008
Removal EZ002
Installation
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, Re-installation
and the built-in circuit breaker and the Install the sensor in the reverse order of
main power supply OFF. Re-installation is essentially in the reverse removal.
order of removal.
NOTE: Align the tabs on the cover with
15 3. Disconnect the connector (D505 or the slots in the wall.
15.1.8 Upper or Lower Paper
D525).
Supply Motor (M501 or
15.1.5 Screws (2) M521)/Belt Replacement
15.1.6 4. Release the locking tabs and remove
15.1.7 the sensor from the bracket. Removal
15.1.8
Connector 1. Remove the magazine ID sensor
Slots (2)
2. Open the clamp and disconnect

the connector (M501 or M521).
3. Remove the magazine drive bracket

Magazine ID
Sensor Cover by removing the eight screws.
Tabs (2)
EZ025 Magazine Drive Bracket
Clamp
Sensor (D505/D525)
EZ001
Installation

removal.
Screws (8)
Connector (M501/M521)
EZ009
15-6
4. Remove the motor from the bracket Installation 15.1.9 Upper or Lower Cutter
by removing the three screws. Home Position Sensor
order of removal.
(Close)(D508 or D528)
Motor (M501/M521)
Screws (3) Replacement
NOTE: • Install the pulleys a shown.
Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY,

and the built-in circuit breaker and the
3. Disconnect the connector (D508 or

D528) from the sensor.
EZ010
5. Unhook the spring and remove the removing the screw at the center of
belt tensioner. Pulleys (3) Belt Tensioner the bracket.
EZ014
NOTE: Do not loosen the screws on
• Engage the pulley on the motor both sides of the bracket.
with the belt and install the
magazine drive bracket. Connector (D508/D528) Screw
Belt
Spring
Belt Tensioner
EZ011
6. Remove the screw, the pulley and belt

from the belt tensioner.
Sensor Bracket
Belt Motor Pulley
EZ015
EZ013 15
• Make sure that the belt does not the sensor from the bracket. 15.1.9
over ride the flange of the motor
pulley. Locking Tabs Bracket
Screw
Pulley
Sensor (D508/D528)
EZ012
EZ016
Installation

removal.
15-7
15.1.10 Upper or Lower Cutter 15.1.11 Cutter Unit 5. Remove the cutter paper guide by
Home Position Sensor Replacement removing the four screws.
(Open)(D507 or D527) 6. Remove the harness from the six
Replacement Removal clamps.
1. Remove the magazine ID sensor Screws (4) Clamps (6)
cover (see subsection 15.1.6). Harness
Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 2. Open the two clamps and disconnect
the two connectors (Upper: MG13 and
main power supply OFF. M500, Lower: MG23 and M520)

D527) from the sensor.

removing the screw at the center of Cutter Paper Guide
the bracket. EZ005
NOTE: Do not loosen the screws on 7. Remove the cutter bracket by

both sides of the bracket. removing the three screws.
Connectors (2) Clamps (2)
Sensor Bracket Cutter Bracket
Connector (D507/D527) EZ003
3. Remove the three screws securing

the cutter unit and the unit.
NOTE: Do not loosen the screws

securing the stop.
Screws (3)
Screws (3)
EZ006
Screw
15 EZ017 Installation
15.1.10
5. Release the locking tabs and remove Installation is essentially in the reverse
15.1.11 the sensor from the bracket. order of removal.
Locking Tabs Bracket NOTE: • Route the harnesses as shown

in the figure below.
Stop Cutter Unit
EZ004
4. Remove:
• cutter motor (see subsection

15.1.12).
Sensor (D507/D527) • cutter home position sensor (open)
• cutter home position sensor (close)
Installation (see subsection 15.1.9).
• paper end sensor (see subsection
Install the sensor in the reverse order of 15.1.5).
removal. EZ007
15-8
• Tighten the cutter mounting 15.1.13 Upper or Lower Paper 15.1.14 Cutter Top and Bottom
screws while pressing the cutter Splice Sensor (D506 or Dead Center
against the stop as shown.
D526) Replacement Adjustment
Removal 1. Remove the cutter unit (see

Stop 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY,
and the built-in circuit breaker and the 2. Remove the four screws and the
main power supply OFF. cutter shading cover.
2. Remove the paper magazine and pull Cutter Shading Cover Screws (4)
out the magazine table.
3. Remove the cutter paper guide by

EZ1353 Cutter Paper Guide
• After installation, perform cutter

adjustment.
EZ021
15.1.12 Upper or Lower Cutter
Motor (M500 or M520) 3. Connect the connector (MG13) to the
Replacement harness.
Removal
Screws (4)
1. Remove the cutter unit (see
EZ019
2. Disconnect the connector (M500 or
sensor.
M520).
5. Remove the sensor or sensor LED by
removing the screw.
two screws.
Screws (2)
Connector
Sensor LED (D506L/D526L) Connector (MG13) 15
EZ022
Motor (M500/M520)
Screw 15.1.12
4. Turn ON the main power supply, built-
15.1.13
in circuit breaker and power switch.
15.1.14
5. Open the menu “45A Printer I/O
Check” screen.
6. Turn the motor knob and position the

cutter to its T.D.C. (Top Dead Center).
Screw 7. Loosen the two screws and adjust the

Connector
Connector (M500/M520) Sensor (D506/D526) bracket position so that the cutter
home position sensor (D507 or D527)
EZ018 EZ020
is “Detect”. Tighten the two screws.
Installation Installation
Sensor Bracket
Motor Knob
Installation is essentially in the reverse Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal. order of removal.
NOTE: Move the motor to the gear so NOTE: Take care not to exchange the
that there is minimum backlash sensor and LED. The harness and
and tighten the two motor connector are different.
mounting screws.
Screws (2)
EZ023
15-9
8. Turn the motor knob and position the 15.1.16 Paper Magazine Angle 15.1.18 Magazine Paper End
cutter to its B.D.C. (Bottom Dead Adjustment Sensor Shading Plate
Center).
9. Loosen the two screws and adjust the
Replacement
1. Release the latches and open the
bracket position so that the cutter
paper magazine. 1. Remove the three screws securing
close position sensor (D508 or D528)
is “Detect”. Tighten the two screws. the magazine bezel.
2. Hold the reference boss with the
Screws (2)
standard screwdriver and loosen the NOTE: Do not try to loosen the red
nut from the inside. marked screws securing the
bracket.
3. Adjust angle by turning the reference
boss and tighten the nut. Do not loosen.
Rotating the reference boss one turn
changes 0.5 mm.
Magazine Bezel
Motor Knob
Sensor Bracket
EZ024
10. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, Nut

and the built-in circuit breaker and the Screws (3)
main power supply OFF. EZ1840
Reference Boss
11. Re-install the cutter shading cover EZ1378 2. Remove the magazine bezel by puling
with the four screws, it arrow direction as shown.
12. Re-install the cutter unit (see

subsection 15.1.11). 15.1.17 Paper Magazine
Section Cooling Fan
(F594) Replacement
15.1.15 Cutter Angle
Removal
Adjustment
1. Remove the distribution section feed
15 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY,
main power supply OFF. 2. Disconnect the fan connector.

15.1.15
15.1.16 2. Remove the paper magazine. 3. Remove the fan and guard by Magazine Bezel
15.1.17 removing the two screws. EZ1841
15.1.18 3. Remove the boss using the standard
screwdriver and adjust angle by Connector 3. Replace the paper end sensor
increasing or decreasing the spacers. shading plate with new one.
Guard
Spacers (T = 0.25 and 0.5 mm) NOTE: Align the screw and steel
plate guide with the holes in
the shading plate as shown.
Screws
Steel Plate Guide

Fan (F594)
Arrow
EZ1239
Installation
Boss
EZ027 Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.

points up.
Shading Plate
EZ1842
15-10
4. Insert the latch release pin into the NOTE: If the shading plate extruding 3. Remove the paper exit cover.
hole in the magazine bezel. is less than 10.5mm, replace
the magazine assembly with a
5. Install the magazine bezel while new one.
aligning its hole with the shading
plate. More Than 10.5mm
Latch Releasing Pin Shading Plate
Paper Exit Cover

EZ1904
4. Remove the nip roller assembly.
Shading Plate
Magazine Bezel
EZ1845
EZ1843
6. Tighten the three screws while

pressing the magazine bezel against 15.1.19 Paper Magazine Nip
the magazine. Roller Replacement
7. Make sure there is no clearance
Removal
between the magazine bezel and the
magazine.
1. Place the paper magazine as shown Nip Roller Assembly
and remove the six screws secsuring
NOTE: If there is clearance, it may EZ1905
the nip roller assembly.
cause paper fogging.
Screws (3) stainless guide plate.
NOTE: Take care not to distort the

stainless guide plate.
15
15.1.19
Screws (6)
EZ1902
Magazine Bezel
2. Release the latches and open the
EZ1844 paper magazine gently while holding
the paper exit cover Stainless Guide Plate
8. Make sure the shading plate moves
Screws (4)
and returns smoothly by pushing and
releasing it.
EZ1906
9. Place the magazine normal position

and make sure the shading plate
extrudes more than 10.5 mm from the
magazine as shown.
Paper Exit Cover

EZ1903
15-11
6. Remove the four nip springs. Installation 15.1.20 Paper Magazine Table
Ball Catch
NOTE: Mark the outer roller springs Installation is essentially in the reverse
because their tension is order of removal.
Replacement
weaker than the inner ones.
NOTE: • Install the rollers and guide so
Spring (Strong) that the hole marks on the 1. Withdraw the paper magazine table.
guides face the direction as
shown. 2. Remove the two screws and then the
Spring (Strong)
ball catch.
Roller Shafts Ball Catch

Screws (2)
Spring (Weak)
Spring (Weak) Bearings (4)

EZ1907
7. Remove the four bearings and two Holes Marks of Guides

roller shafts. EZ1911
Nip Roller Shafts • Position the spring arms on the EZ2002

bearing flanges as shown and
install the nip springs to the proper 3. Install a new ball catch with the two
position because the outer roller screws.
springs are weaker than the inner
ones.
Spring Arms
15 Bearings (4)
EZ2289
15.1.20
8. Remove the four outer E-rings, four
rollers and two guides. Spring (Weak)
Rollers (4)
Spring (Strong)
Spring Arms
EZ1912
E-rings (4) • Align the rollers on the nip roller

assembly with the rollers on the
magazine.
Nip Roller Assembly

Guides (2)
EZ1910
EZ1913
15-12
15.2 Paper Feed Section
15.2.1 Paper Feed Section Re-installation 15.2.4 Lower or Middle Side

Front Cover Removal/ Door Sensor Interlock
Re-installation removal.
Switch (D581A/D581B or
D582A/D582B)
Removal Replacement
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 15.2.3 Printer Upper Side
Removal
and the built-in circuit breaker and the Cover Removal/Re-
main power supply OFF. installation 1. Remove the printer side cover (see
subsection 15.2.2).
2. Remove the exposure section front
Removal
cover (see subsection 16.1.3). 2. Disconnect the connector from the
1. Remove: switch.
paper feed section front cover. 3. Remove the switch bracket by
• printer side cover (see subsection
Screws (4) 15.2.2). removing the two screws.
• printer control section cover (see
subsection 18.1.1). Switch Bracket
2. Open the upper side door.
3. Remove the screw securing the door

stop.
4. Remove the printer upper side cover

Upper Side Cover

Paper Feed Section Front Cover
Connector Screws (2)
EZ776
EZ779
Re-installation
4. Remove the spring, E-ring, Shaft and
Re-install the cover in the reverse order of the switch from the bracket.
removal.
EZ778 E-ring
15.2.2 Printer Side Cover Screws (4)

15
Removal/Re-installation Upper Side Door
EZ778 15.2.1
15.2.2
Removal Re-installation 15.2.3
1. Remove the paper feed section front 15.2.4
Re-install the cover in the reverse order of Spring
removal. Switch
Shaft
2. Open the middle and lower side EZ068
covers.
Installation
door stops. Install the switch in the reverse order of
removal.
4. Remove the six screws and the printer
side cover.
Side Cover Screws (2)
Door Stops (2)

Middle
Side Door Screws (6)
Lower Side Door
EZ777
15-13
15.2.5 Upper Side Door Sensor Installation 4. Remove the harness from the four
Interlock Switch (D583A/ clamps.
D583B) Replacement removal. 5. Remove the three screws, then
remove the shading plate while
Removal removing the harness from the clamp
on the plate.
1. Remove the printer upper side cover 15.2.6 Shading Plate Removal/
(see subsection 15.2.3). Re-installation
2. Disconnect the connectors from the Removal

switches.
1. Remove the printer control section
2. Remove the two screws and the right Clamps (4) Clamp
air duct from the printer DC power
supply unit.
Screws (2)
Shading
Plate
Screws (3)
EZ1354
Connectors (2)
Re-installation
EZ066
Re-install the plate in the reverse order of

3. Remove the switch bracket by removal.
removing the two screws. Right Air Duct
EZ1284
Switch Bracket Screws (2)
3. Disconnect the interface cable.
15.2.7 Upper or Lower Feed
Entrance Guide Plate
15 Removal
15.2.5 NOTE: The figures show the lower feed

15.2.6 entrance guide plate.
15.2.7
1. Remove:
• paper feed section front cover

Interface Cable • printer side cover
EZ067 EZ1283 • shading plate
4. Remove the spring, E-ring, Shaft and
the switch from the bracket.
2. Loosen the fulcrum screw and remove
E-ring the feed entrance outer guide plate.
Fulcrum
Spring Screw
Shaft Switch
EZ068 Feed Entrance Outer Guide Plate
EZ039
15-14
3. Remove the two springs. 6. Loosen the two stop screws, remove 3. Remove the four screws and the side
the four screws securing the guide feed guide plate.
plate, then remove the entrance inner
guide plate.
Screws (4) Entrance Inner

Guide Plate
Springs (2)
Side Feed Guide Plate Screws (4)
EZ040
EZ045
4. Loosen the fulcrum screw and remove
the entrance guide section door. Stop Screws (2) Re-installation
EZ043 Re-install the guide plate in the reverse

roder of removal.
Re-installation
Re-install the guide plate in the reverse

order of removal.
15.2.9 Middle or Lower Side
Door Section Paper
Sensor (D541 or D552)
15.2.8 Upper or Lower Feed Replacement
Entrance Guide Guide Plate Removal/
Section Door Removal
Re-installation
1. Remove the upper or lower feed guide
Fulcrum Screw (Loosen) Removal plate (see subsection 15.2.8).
EZ041 1. Remove: 2. Disconnect the connector from the
sensor.
5. Remove the E-ring and the gear. • paper feed section front cover
• printer side cover
the sensor from the bracket.
15
• shading plate 15.2.8
(see subsection 15.2.6). 15.2.9

D552) and remove it from the wall.
Connector (D541)
Gear E-ring
EZ042 Connector
Sensor (D541/D552)
EZ046
Installation

removal.
Connector (D552)
EZ044
15-15
15.2.10 Ambient Temperature 15.2.11 Middle Side Door Turn, 15.2.12 Feed Roller
Sensor (THA20) Middle Side Door, Replacement
Replacement Lower Side Door Turn
or Lower Side Door Removal
Removal Section Feed Motor
1. Remove:
(M540, M541, M550 or
1. Remove the upper or lower feed guide
plate (see subsection 15.2.8).
M551) Replacement • upper or lower feed entrance guide
plate (see subsection 15.2.7).
2. Remove the sensor bracket by Removal • upper or lower feed guide plate
removing the two screws. (see subsection 15.2.8).
1. Remove the upper or lower feed guide • back printing section guide plate
Screws (2) plate (see subsection 15.2.8). (see subsection 15.2.13).
• speed adjustment section guide
2. Remove the shading plate bracket by plate (see subsection 15.3.4).
2. Remove the E-rings, collars/bearings
Screws (3) and the rollers.
Sensor Bracket
EZ047
3. Remove the sensor from the bracket


Roller E-ring
sensor.
Shading Plate Collar/Bearing
Screws (2) Bracket
EZ050
EZ1687
3. Remove the E-ring, or release the

3. Disconnect the motor connector.
locking tabs and remove the gear from
the roller shaft.
15 4. Remove the motor by removing the
two screws.
4. Remove the E-ring and remove the
15.2.10 collar and Bearing from the roller
15.2.11 Connector (M541/M551) shaft.
Screws (2)
15.2.12
Feed Motor
(M541/M551) Locking
Connector Tabs Gear
Sensor (THA20)
EZ048
Installation

removal.
Connector Feed Motor E-ring

Screws (2)
(M540/M550) (M540/M550) Bearing
EZ049 Collar
E-ring
Installation
EZ051

removal.
15-16
5. Remove the two springs, E-rings, 15.2.13 Back Printing Section

bearings and the back printing section Guide Plate Removal/
nip roller.
Re-installation
Springs (2)
E-rings (2) Removal

2. Remove the four screws and the pack

printing section guide plate.
Bearings (2)
Back Printing Section Nip Roller

EZ053
6. Remove the two springs, E-rings,

bearing and the side door section nip
roller.
Springs (2) Side Door Section

Screws (4) Back Printing
Nip Roller Section Guide Plate
EZ052
Re-installation

order of removal.
Bearing
E-rings (2)
EZ054
15
Installation
15.2.13
Install the rollers in the reverse order of removal.
<Roller Arrangement>
One-way Gears
One-way Gears
One-way Gears
One-way Gears
: One-way Gear
EZ1040
15-17
15.3 Speed Adjustment Section
15.3.1 Upper Side Door Installation 3. Remove the locknut from the rear
Section Nip Release side.
Motor (M545) or Upper removal. 4. Loosen the arm fulcrum special screw
Side Door Section Feed and shift the arm.
Motor (M542)
Replacement NOTE: Take care not to lose the
15.3.2 Upper Side Door washer between the arm and
Section Nip Release the side plate.
Removal
Sensor (D547)
Replacement Locknut
1. Remove the shading plate (see
subsection 15.2.6).
Removal Arm
2. Disconnect the connectors (M545,
M542 and D547). 1. Remove the motor bracket (see
subsection 15.3.1).
3. Remove the harness from the three
clamps on the motor bracket. 2. Release the locking tabs and remove
Connector (M542)
Sensor (D547)
Washer
Special Screw
EZ2209
5. Remove the locknut from the front

side.
Connector
6. Loosen the arm fulcrum special screw,
(M545)
shift the arm and remove the loop
Clamps (3) Motor Bracket guide plate assembly.
Connector (D547)
EZ058
EZ055
NOTE: Take care not to lose the
Installation washer between the arm and
4. Loosen the three screws and remove
the motor bracket. the side plate.
Screws (3) (Loosen) removal. Locknut
15
15.3.1 15.3.3 Speed Adjustment Arm
15.3.2 Section Nip Roller Washer
15.3.3 Replacement
Removal

Motor Bracket Loop Guide Plate
EZ056 2. Remove the two coil springs. Assembly
Special Screw
5. Remove the connector from the EZ2210
bracket.

Screws (2)
Coil Springs (2)

EZ2208
Connector
EZ057
15-18
15.3 Speed Adjustment Section
7. Remove the two E-rings, disassemble 4. Remove the four screws and the
the loop guide plate and remove the speed adjustment section guide plate.
roller.
NOTE: Use a screwdriver with a long
Ball Bearing shank.
Washers (4)
Loop Guide Plate E-rings (2) Screws (4)
Arm
Washers (2)
Arm Bearings (2)

Speed Speed Adjustment Section Guide Plate
Locknuts (2)
Adjustment Special EZ069
Front Roller Screws (2) Re-installation
EZ2211
Install the roller in the reverse order of

removal.
15.3.4 Speed Adjustment

Section Guide Plate
Removal
1. Remove:
• exposure section cooling fan

bracket (see subsection 16.1.6). 15
• upper side door detecting interlock
switch (D583) bracket 15.3.4
• speed adjustment section nip roller
2. Disconnect the connector (D560) and

remove the sensor connector from the
printer frame.
3. Release the lock tabs and remove the

cord tie from the frame.
Connector (D560)
Cord Tie
EZ065
15-19
15.4 Back Printing Section
15.4.1 Back Printer Head 7. Tighten the three screws, 15.4.2 Back Printer Head or
Clearance Adjustment Screws (3)
JNE20 Circuit Board
Replacement
1. Remove the speed adjustment section
guide plate (see subsection 15.3.4). Feeler Gauge Removal
2. Remove the ink ribbon cassettes. 1. Remove the back printing section
guide plate (see subsection 15.2.13).
3. Align the jig with the platen and screw
in its screw fully, and then loosen it 2. Remove the ink ribbon cassette.
one turn.
3. Remove the circuit board cover by
NOTE: The screw should be removing the two screws.
loosened one turn, or correct
clearance cannot be obtained. Cam Screws (2)
EZ1821
Platen
front head slightly.
9. Turn the cam clockwise to increase

clearance.
10. Insert the feeler gauge between the

front head and the platen.
Circuit Board Cover
Jig 11. Adjust the clearance by turning the EZ806
cam.
1. Screw in fully. 4. Remove the front head by removing
Specified Clearance: 0.50 to 0.59mm the screw.
2. Loosen one turn.
EZ1819
12. Tighten the two screws. Front Head
4. Loosen the three screws slightly.

Screws (2)
Cam
5. Turn the cam clockwise to the
increase head clearance.
15 Cam Screws (3)
15.4.1
15.4.2
Screw
Feeler Gauge
EZ073
EZ1822 5. Remove the front head bracket by

13. Recheck the clearances.
Front Head Bracket
14. Remove the jig and reinstall the Screws (2)
EZ1820 removed parts.
6. Insert the feeler gauge between the

rear head and the platen and adjust
the head clearance by turning the
cam.
Specified Clearance: 0.50 to 0.59mm
EZ074
15-20
6. Remove the rear head by removing 10. Remove the JNE20 circuit board from 3. Remove the circuit board cover by
the screw. the bracket by removing the two removing the two screws.
Rear Head
screws.
Screws (2)
JNE20 Circuit Board
Screws (2)
Circuit Board Cover

Screw EZ806
EZ075 EZ079
4. Remove the JNE20 circuit board
7. Remove the JNE20 circuit board Installation bracket by removing the screw.
bracket by removing the screw.
order of removal. After installation, adjust
printer head clearance (see subsection
15.4.1).
15.4.3 Back Printer Sensor

(D544) Replacement
Removal
Screw
JNE20 Circuit Board Bracket
Screw 1. Remove:
EZ081
EZ076 • back printing section guide plate
(see subsection 15.2.13). 5. Disconnect the connectors form the
8. Disconnect the connector (JNE1U and • upper feed guide plate (see sensor.
JNE1D) from the JNE20 circuit board. subsection 15.2.8).
JNE1U 2. Loosen the two screws and remove two screws. 15
the sensor cover.
Screws (2)
15.4.3
Screws (2)
JNE1D
EZ077
Sensor (D544)
Connectors (2)
9. Disconnect the print harness from the Sensor Cover EZ082
circuit board. EZ080
Installation
Print Harness (2)
removal.
EZ078
15-21
15.4.4 Back Printer Unit 5. Disconnect the two connectors (JNE1) Re-installation
Removal/Re-installation from the circuit board.
6. Remove the harness clamp from the order of removal.
Removal back printer unit.
NOTE: Place the poly-sliders at the
1. Remove: Connectors (JNE1)
fulcrum, guide and fixing screws
under the unit as shown.
• ink ribbon cassette.
• exposure section front inner cover Poly-sliders (3)
• printer control section cover
• back printing section guide plate
2. Remove the E-ring securing the back

printing section lower feed roller and
the roller. Harness Clamp JNE20 Circuit Board
EZ810
Back Printing Section
Lower Feed Roller
7. Remove the back printer setting Back Printer Unit
sensor harness from the clamp. EZ821
8. Remove the fulcrum screw and plain

washer.
15.4.5 Back Printer Ribbon
Fulcrum Screw Drive Gear Replacement
Plain Sensor Harness
Washer
Removal
1. Remove the back printer unit (see

E-ring subsection 15.4.4).
EZ807
2. Remove the cover by removing the
four screws.
3. Remove the circuit board cover by
Screws (4)
Cover
15 Clamp
EZ811
15.4.4
15.4.5 9. Remove the unit fixing and guide
screws, then remove the back printer
unit and plain washer.
Guide Screw
Fixing Screw Plain Washer
EZ813
Screws (2) Circuit Board Cover
EZ808
the gear.
4. Remove the JNE20 circuit board
bracket by removing the screw.
Back Printer Unit

EZ812
Locking Tab Gear
EZ814
Screw
EZ809
15-22
4. Remove the spring. 9. Release the locking tab and remove

the drive gear from the drive shaft.
5. Remove the two E-rings, bearings and
gear shaft. Drive Gear
Locking Tab
EZ818
E-rings (2) Spring
Bearings (2)
10. Remove the four screws securing the
EZ815 gear bracket, then remove the drive
shaft.
6. Withdraw the shaft and remove the
gear and four bearings. Gear Bracket

the gear.
Gears
Screws (4) Drive Shaft

EZ819
11. Remove the E-ring, bearing, collar,

one-way drive gear, poly-slider and 15
bearing from the drive shaft.
Shaft Bearings (4) 15.4.5
EZ816 Poly-slider
Bearing One-way
8. Remove the E-ring, one-way gear, ink Drive Gear
ribbon drive shaft, two bearings and
two spacers in this order.
Ink Ribbon Cassette
Bearings (2)
Spacer Collar
Bearing
Spacer
E-ring
EZ820
Installation
Install the gears in the reverse order of

removal.
E-ring One-way Gear
EZ817
15-23
15.5 Border Adjustment
15.5.1 Small Size Print Border Adjustment Procedure
Make some 127 × 89.0 size border prints using the 127 width paper magazine in the upper and lower magazine compartments. If there is no
127 size, make 152 × 102.0 size border prints.
● Inclination
Are there inclination on both Yes Cutter Position Adjustment

prints from the upper and lower
(see subsection 15.5.4.)
magazine compartments?
No
Is there difference between the back Yes (0.5mm or more) Cutter Position Adjustment
printing positions of the upper magazine Adjust back printing position so that
prints and the lower ones? the upper and lower prints are the same.
No (0.5mm or less)
Go to “Uneven Right and Left Borders”.
● Uneven Right and Left Borders
15
15.5.1
Yes No Adjust scanning start position on

Are there inclination on both
menu 45H “Main Scanning Position
prints from the upper and lower Is the left border 5mm?
Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough
magazine compartments? Adjustment” (see subsection 9.6.9).
No Yes
No
Adjust right border width on
Is the right border is 5mm?
menu 424 “Print Size Setup”.
Yes
Go to “Uneven Leading and Trailing Borders”
Is there difference between the Yes (0.5mm or more)

Cutter Position Adjustment
back printing positions of the upper
magazine prints and the lower ones?
No
(0.5mm or less)
Go to “Uneven Leading and Trailing Borders”.
15-24
● Uneven Leading and Trailing Borders
Adjust scanning start position on menu 45H

No “Main Scanning Position Adjustment/
Is the leading border 5mm?
Laser Beam Sync.
Rough Adjustment” (see subsection 9.6.9).
Yes
No Measure the paper feed length. No Adjust the paper feed length on
Is the trailing border 5mm? menu 452
Is it correct?
“Paper Feed Length Adjustment”.
Yes Yes
Adjust the lower border on

Go to subsection 15.5.2
15.5.2 Large Size Print Border Adjustment Procedure
Make some 254 × 381.0 size prints using the 254 width paper magazine. If there is no 254 size, make longitudinal prints using the widest 15
paper available.
15.5.2
● Inclination
Yes Feed Entrance Guide Plate

Is the back printing inclined Height Adjustment
more than 0.2mm? (see subsection 15.5.7.)
No
Go to “Uneven Right and Left Borders”.
15-25
● Uneven Right and Left Borders
Adjust the right and left borders on menu 424 "Print Size Setup".
NOTE: Do not try to adjust main scanning position for large
size prints. Adjustment may impair the borders of
small size prints.
● Uneven Leading and Trailing Borders
15
15.5.3
No No Adjust the paper feed length on

Is the trailing border 5mm? Measure the paper feed length.
menu 452 “Paper Feed Length
Is it correct?
Adjustment”.
Yes Yes
Adjust the lower border on

Go to subsection 15.5.3.
15.5.3 Other Size Print Border Adjustment Procedure
Follow the procedure of the subsection 15.5.2 if necessary.
15-26
15.5.4 Cutter Position ● Moving the Cutter to the Rear 4. Remove the spacer.
Adjustment
1. Measure and record distance C from 5. Measure distance C and make sure it
the front wall to the cutter as shown. is C recorded plus spacer.
● Adjustment Direction
Determination C + Spacer
1. Measure the back print position “A” as

shown.
Front Side Rear Side
EZ1477
EZ1474 6. Loosen the two screws securing the

stop plate and re-tighten them while
2. Loosen the three screws securing the pressing the stop plate against the
cutter unit and move the cutter to the cutter unit.
rear.
Screws (2) Cutter Unit
Screws (3)
EZ1473
2. Calculate the standard value of A’

using the formula below.
A’ = (B – 34.7) / 2
B = Paper width Cutter Unit Stop Plate
<Example>
EZ1475 EZ1478
B = 89 mm
A’ = (88.7 – 34.7) / 2 = 27
3. Insert the spacer with thickness as 7. If cutter movement is more than the 15
difference between A’ and A between specified values, perform following
3. Calculate difference between A’ and
the cutter unit and the stop plate, push adjustment. 15.5.4
A.
the cutter unit against the front and
Tolerance: (A’ – 0.5) to A’
tighten the three screws. • If cutter movement is more than
(26.5 to 27.0 if B = 89)
0.5mm, adjust magazine table
Screws (3) stainless plate position (see
If A’ > A, move the cutter to the rear.
subsection 15.5.5).
<Example>
• If cutter movement is more than
B = 89 and A = 25.5,
1mm, adjust magazine ID sensor
27 > 25.5
position (see subsection 15.5.6).
If A’ < A, move the cutter to the front.
8. Make several bordered prints and
<Example>
make sure the result.
B = 89 and A = 28.0,
27 < 28.0
Standard Values of B and Calculated

Value of A’ Spacer
EZ1476
Nominal B A’ Tolerance of A’
89 88.7 27.0 26.5 to 27.0
127 126.6 45.95 45.45 to 45.95
254 253.6 109.45 108.95 to 109.45
15-27
● Moving the Cutter to the Front 6. Loosen the three screws securing the 3. Loosen the four screws securing the
cutter unit and re-tighten them while stainless plate and move the plate to
1. Measure and record distance D from pressing the cutter unit against the the front or rear same distance as the
the front wall to the cutter unit as stop plate. cutter unit movement.
shown.
Stop Plate 4. Re-tighten the four screws.
Screws (3)
Stainless Plate
Cutter Unit
EZ1482
EZ1479
7. If cutter movement is more than the Screws (4)
2. Loosen the two screws securing the specified values, perform following EZ1484
stop plate and move the plate to the adjustment.
front side.
• If cutter movement is more than
Screws (2) 0.5mm, adjust magazine table
15.5.6 Magazine ID Sensor
stainless plate position (see Position Adjustment
subsection 15.5.5).
• If cutter movement is more than 1. Close the system and turn the power
1mm, adjust magazine ID sensor switch to STANDBY and the built-in
position (see subsection 15.5.6). circuit breaker and main power supply
to OFF.
8. Make several bordered prints and
make sure the result. 2. Remove the paper magazine.
3. Remove the magazine ID sensor

cover by removing the two screws.
Stop Plate 15.5.5 Magazine Table
EZ1480 Stainless Plate Position Screws (2)
15 Adjustment
3. Insert the spacer with thickness as
15.5.5 difference between A and A’ between 1. Remove the paper magazine.
15.5.6 the cutter unit and the stop plate, push
the stop plate against the cutter unit 2. Measure the clearance between the
and tighten the two screws. hole in the stainless plate and the
slide plate as shown.
4. Remove the spacer.
Stainless Plate
5. Measure distance D and make sure it
is D recorded minus spacer.
D – Spacer Screws (2) Magazine ID Sensor Cover
Spacer
EZ002
Slide Plate
EZ1483
Stop Plate
EZ1481
15-28
4. Loosen the two screws securing the 2. Open the middle or lower side-door
ID sensor. according to the position to be
adjusted.
5. Move the sensor to the front or rear
same distance as the cutter unit 3. Loosen the two screws securing the
movement. Re-tighten the two screws. feed entrance guide plate and adjust
the guide plate position in response to
ID Sensor border inclination.
Advance Refard
NOTE: For lower magazine
compartment, use an open Feed
end wrench (5.5mm) to Derection
loosen the left guide plate
screw.
To advance paper passing, move the

guide plate up.
To retard paper passing, move the
guide plate down.
Screws (2) NOTE: Inclination of 0.15mm against

EZ1485 90mm of back print length can
be corrected by adjusting the
6. Re-install the magazine ID sensor guide plate. Therefore EZ1790-1
cover. inclination of 0.60mm can be
corrected for 381mm of feed 4. Re-tighten the two screws.
length.
5. Close the side-door.
15.5.7 Feed Entrance Guide
Screws (2) Feed Entry Guide
Plate Height Adjustment 6. Make several large size bordered
prints to make sure the result.
1. Determine print inclination by
measuring the back print position.
Advance Refard
Feed
Derection
15
Feed
Direction 15.5.7
EZ1791
EZ1790
15-29
16. EXPOSURE SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................. 16-2
16.1 Printer Top Cover/Exposure Section Cooling Fans .............................. 16-3

16.1.1 Printer Top Cover Removal/Re-installation .................................................... 16-3
16.1.2 Printer Top Inner Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................................... 16-3
16.1.3 Exposure Section Front Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................ 16-3
16.1.4 Exposure Section Front Inner Cover Removal/Re-installation ....................... 16-3
16.1.5 Exposure Section Front Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D585A and D585B)
Replacement ............................................................................................ 16-4
16.1.6 Exposure Section Cooling Fan (F585 and F586) Replacement .................... 16-4
16.1.7 Exposure Section Exhaust Fan (F596) Replacement .................................... 16-5
16.1.8 Operating Panel Replacement ....................................................................... 16-5
16.2 Laser Unit ......................................................................................................... 16-6

16.2.1 Air Duct Removal/Re-installation ................................................................... 16-6
16.2.2 Exposure Section Anti-dust Pressure Fan 1, 2 or 3
(F620, F621 or F622) Replacement ......................................................... 16-6
16.2.3 Air Filter Replacement ................................................................................... 16-6
16.2.4 Laser Unit Removal/Re-installation ................................................................ 16-6
16.3 Exposure Section Feed Unit ....................................................................... 16-8

16.3.1 Sub-scanning Belt Replacement ................................................................... 16-8
16.3.2 Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor (D561P) Replacement ................ 16-8
16.3.3 Pre-exposure Paper Sensor (D562P) Replacement ...................................... 16-9
16.3.4 Exposure Section Feed Unit Paper Sensor (D560) Replacement ................. 16-9
16.3.5 Exposure Section Entrance or Pre-Exposure Paper Sensor LED
(D561L or D562L) Replacement ............................................................... 16-9 16
16.3.6 Exposure Section Nip Release Sensor (D566) Replacement ....................... 16-9
16.3.7 Ambient Temperature Sensor (THA1-2) Replacement .................................. 16-10
16.3.8 Exposure Section Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F565) Replacement .................... 16-10
16.3.9 Exposure Section Feed Unit Removal/Re-installation ................................... 16-10
16.3.10 Paper Width Guide Motor (M563) Replacement ............................................ 16-11
16.3.11 Paper Width Guide Motor Bracket Removal/Re-installation ........................... 16-11
16.3.12 Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor (D563) Replacement .................. 16-11
16.3.13 Paper Width Guide Drive Belt Replacement .................................................. 16-12
16.3.14 Leading End Positioning Fork Position Sensor (D564) Replacement ............ 16-12
16.3.15 Pre-exposure Feed Motor (M560) Replacement ........................................... 16-12
16.3.16 Sub-scanning Motor (M561) Driver Circuit Board Replacement .................... 16-13
16.3.17 Sub-scanning Motor (M561) Replacement .................................................... 16-13
16.3.18 Exposure Section Nip Motor (M565) Replacement ....................................... 16-13
16.3.19 Exposure Section Drive Pulley Bracket Removal/Re-installation ................... 16-14
16.3.20 Exposure Section Drive Steel Belt Replacement ........................................... 16-14
16.3.21 Exposure Section Cam Replacement ............................................................ 16-15
16.3.22 Exposure Roller/Guide Replacement ............................................................ 16-16
16.3.23 Entrance Nip Roller Replacement ................................................................. 16-17
16.3.24 Entrance Roller Replacement ........................................................................ 16-17
16.3.25 Paper Width Guide Adjustment ...................................................................... 16-18
16-1
Parts Location
Exposure Section Anti-dust Pressure

Laser Unit Fans 1, 2 and 3 (F620, F621 and F622)
Sub-scanning Motor
(M561)
Pre-exposure
Feed Motor
(M560)
Paper Width
Guide Motor
(M563)
Sub-scanning
Belt
Exposure Section Nip Motor (M565)
Exposure Section Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F565)
16
EZ190
16-2
16.1 Printer Top Cover/Exposure Section Cooling Fans
16.1.1 Printer Top Cover 16.1.2 Printer Top Inner Cover 16.1.3 Exposure Section Front
Removal/Re-installation Removal/Re-installation Cover Removal/Re-
installation
Removal Removal
Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 1. Remove the printer top cover (see
and the built-in circuit breaker and the subsection 16.1.1). 1. Open the paper magazine section
main power supply OFF. door.
2. Disconnect the flat harness connector
2. Remove the densitometer. from the operating panel. 2. Remove the exposure section front
cover while pulling it.
Densitometer 3. Disconnect the fan connector.
Operating Panel
EZ755
3. Open the distribution section door. Flat Harness Connector Exposure Section Front Cover
EZ753
printer top cover. Fan Connector Re-installation
EZ716
Screws (4)
4. Remove the ten screws securing the removal.
printer top inner cover and the cover
while pulling off the harness through
the hole in the cover. 16.1.4 Exposure Section Front
Printer Top Inner Cover Inner Cover Removal/
Screws (10) Re-installation
Removal

16
Printer Top Cover main power supply OFF.
16.1.1
EZ756
2. Remove the exposure section front 16.1.2
cover (see subsection 16.1.3). 16.1.3
Re-installation
16.1.4
EZ717 3. Remove the screw and the knob.
removal. Knob
Re-installation

removal.
Screw
EZ1042
16-3
4. Remove the exposure section front 4. Remove the spring, E-ring and Shaft 3. Disconnect the connectors (F585 and
inner cover by removing the four from the switch bracket. F586).
screws.
5. Disconnect the connectors from the
switches and remove the switches.
Shaft E-ring Connectors

Switches
(D585A and
D585B)
Exposure Section Screws (4) Connector (F586) Connector (F585)

Front Inner Cover
EZ059
EZ1041
Spring 4. Remove the fan cover by removing

Re-installation the four screws.
EZ772
Re-install the cover in the reverse order of Screws (4)

removal. Installation Fan Cover
Install the switches in the reverse order of

removal.
16.1.5 Exposure Section Front
Cover Detecting
Interlock Switch (D585A 16.1.6 Exposure Section
and D585B) Cooling Fan (F585 and
Replacement F586) Replacement
Removal Removal
EZ061
1. Remove:
and the built-in circuit breaker and the 5. Remove the connectors from the
main power supply OFF. • printer upper side cover bracket, and the harness from the
(see subsection 15.2.3). three clamps as shown.
2. Remove the printer top cover (see • printer control section cover
subsection 16.1.1). Connectors
Harness Clamps (3)
• sub-scanning motor driver circuit
3. Remove the switch bracket by
16 removing the two screws.
board (see subsection 16.3.16).
2. Remove the fan bracket by removing

16.1.5 Screws (2)
the two screws, and loosening the
16.1.6 other two screws.
Screws (2)
(Remove)
EZ062
6. Remove the fans by removing the six

screws.
Fan (F586) Fan (F585)
Switch Bracket
EZ771
Screws (2) Fan Bracket

(Loosen)
EZ060
Screws (6)
EZ063
16-4
Installation 3. Remove the five screws and the

KEY20 circuit board from the
Install the fans in the reverse order of operating panel.
removal.
Screws (5)

Exhaust Fan (F596)
Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the printer top inner cover

2. Remove the fan connector from the Operating Panel

printer top inner cover. KEY20
Circuit Board
3. Remove the fan by removing the two
EZ1337
screws.
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Before re-installing the printer top

panel, turn ON the main power
supply, the built-in circuit breaker
Connector and the power switch and adjust
brightness of the display by
turning the adjuster.
Screws (2) Fan (F596)

EZ1356
Installation

order of removal.

16
points the outside.
16.1.7
Adjuster
16.1.8
EZ1335
16.1.8 Operating Panel
Replacement
Removal

2. Remove the operating panel from the

printer top inner cover by removing
the two screws.
Screws (2)
EZ1336
16-5
16.2 Laser Unit
16.2.1 Air Duct Removal/Re- 3. Remove the fan connectors from the 16.2.4 Laser Unit Removal/Re-
installation bracket. installation
Removal removing the two screws while
Removal
holding the fan.
1. Remove the printer top inner cover 1. Remove the air duct (see subsection
(see subsection 16.1.2). Connector Fan 16.2.1).
Screws (2)
2. Remove the air duct from the laser 2. Hold the fan and disconnect the three
unit by removing the four screws. fan connectors (F620, F621 and
F622).
Screws (4)
Air Duct
NOTE: Take care not to apply
excessive force to the
vibration isolation rubbers.
Excessive force may shorten
the rubber’s service life.
3. Disconnect the four connectors

EZ764 (OPT1, S620, OPT3 and D620).
Installation Fan Connectors (3)
EZ730 Install the fan in the reverse order of

removal.
Re-installation
Re-install the air duct in the reverse roder 16.2.3 Air Filter Replacement
of removal.
Removal
16.2.2 Exposure Section Anti- 1. Remove the air duct (see subsection
dust Pressure Fan 1, 2 16.2.1). Connectors (4)
or 3 (F620, F621 or F622) EZ1250
2. Remove the three screws and the air
Replacement filter. 4. Remove the harness bracket by
removing the screw and move it to the
Removal NOTE: Take care not to apply side.
excessive force to the
1. Remove the air duct (see subsection vibration isolation rubbers. Harness Bracket
16 16.2.1). Excessive force may shorten
2. Hold the fan and disconnect the fan
16.2.1
connector. Screws (3)
16.2.2
16.2.3 NOTE: Take care not to apply
16.2.4 excessive force to the
vibration isolation rubbers.
Excessive force may shorten
Connector Fan
Screw
EZ085
Air Filter
EZ766
Installation
Install the air filter in the reverse order of

removal.
EZ763
16-6
16.2 Laser Unit
5. Open the distribution unit. 9. Open the three clamps and 14. Grasp the handles on the laser unit
disconnect the eight connectors and remove the unit.
6. Remove the pump section cover by (LDD4 to LDD11) from the LDD20
removing the two screws. circuit board. NOTE: Do not grasp the fan bracket
when removing the unit.
NOTE: When disconnecting or
connecting the LDD20 circuit Laser Unit
board connectors, always
wear the grounding wrist
band.
Clamps (3)
Pump Section Cover Screws (2)

EZ084
Handle
7. Disconnect the R, G and B cables EZ087
from the AOM drivers.
LDD8 LDD7 NOTE: • Do not try to remove any
LDD11 LDD9 LDD6 LDD4 covers from the laser unit to
LDD20 avoid dust entering into the
LDD10 Circuit Board LDD5
unit.
EZ826 • Do not place the laser unit
directly on the floor without
10. Remove the three short connectors anything under it.
from the clamp on the laser unit and
connect them to the connectors Re-installation
(LDD5, LDD7 and LDD10) of the
harness as shown. Re-installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
LDD10 LDD7 LDD5
B Cable
NOTE: • Make sure there is no foreign
G Cable R Cable
matter on the unit mounting
EZ1355 surfaces.
• Tighten the four unit mounting
8. Wear the grounding wrist band to the screws in the criss-cross pattern
left wrist and connect it’s the other in two to three steps.
end to the exposure section frame as
shown.
16
adjustments. 16.2.4
Exposure Section Frame
• Menu 45H “Main Scanning Position
Adjustment/Laser Beam Synchronous
Short Connectors Rough Adjustment” (see subsection
EZ827
9.6.9).
• Menu 45J “Laser Beam Synchronous
11. Remove the harness from the clamps. Fine Adjustment Print” (see subsection
9.6.10).
• Menu 454 “G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal
12. Remove the grounding wrist band.
Temperature Setup” (see Instruction
13. Remove the four screws mounting the Manual “Condition Setup and
Maintenance”).
laser unit.
Wrist Band • Pre-operational check “Print Calibration
EZ724 Screws (4) Laser Unit Upkeep” (see Instruction Manual “Basic
Operating Instructions”).
EZ086
16-7
16.3 Exposure Section Feed Unit
16.3.1 Sub-scanning Belt NOTE: After installation, perform the belt 3) Loosen the screw securing the
Replacement alignment adjustment by following adjusting bracket.
the steps below.
4) Adjust by turning the adjusting
Removal <Belt Alignment Adjustment> screw.
1. Rotate the pulley 30 turns or more Clockwise:
inner cover (see subsection 16.1.4).
and make sure the belt is center the Belt moves to the outside.
pulley as shown. Counterclockwise:
2. Loosen the screw securing the belt
Belt moves to the inside.
tensioner and remove the belt. Pulley
Belt Screw
NOTE: Wear clean gloves when
handling the belt and pulleys.
Fingerprints to the belt and
pulleys may cause corrosion
of the belt.
Belt Belt
Pulley
EZ1380 Adjusting Screw
EZ1381
2. If the belt is not in the center of the
pulley, adjust by following the steps 5) Secure the bracket by tightening
below. the screw.
Tensioner Screw
EZ088 1) Remove the exposure section top 6) Rotate the pulley more than 30
inner cover (see subsection turns and make sure the belt is in
Installation 16.1.2). the center of the pulley. If
necessary, re-adjust belt position.
Installation is essentially in the reverse 2) Remove the four screws and the
order of removal. exposure feed section cover. 7) Re-install the exposure feed
section and exposure section top
NOTE: • Tighten the tensioner securing Exposure Feed Section Cover
inner covers.
screw after installing the belt
and rotating the pulleys several
turns.
• Take care not to bent or damage 16.3.2 Exposure Section
the belt. Bent or damaged belt Entrance Paper Sensor
16 may shorten its service life. (D561P) Replacement
16.3.1 Tensioner Belt
16.3.2 Removal
1. Remove the laser unit (see subsection

16.2.4).

Screws (4) sensor, remove the screw and the
EZ1382 cover, sensor and spacer.
Sensor (D561P) Cover Screw
EZ089
Connector Spacer
EZ090
16-8
Installation Installation 5. Remove the screw, the sensor LED

and spacer from the bracket.
Install the sensor in the reverse order of Install the sensor in the reverse order of
removal. removal. Sensor LED (D562L) Screw
Spacer
16.3.3 Pre-exposure Paper 16.3.5 Exposure Section
Sensor (D562P) Entrance or Pre-
Replacement Exposure Paper Sensor
LED (D561L or D562L)
Removal Replacement
Removal
16.2.4).
sensor, remove the screw and the
cover, sensor and spacer. 2. Remove the two screws and the
Screw Cover Sensor (D562P) exposure section lower cover. Sensor LED (D561L)
EZ094
Installation

removal.
16.3.6 Exposure Section Nip

Release Sensor (D566)
Replacement
Spacer Connector Screws (2) Exposure Section
Lower Cover Removal
EZ091
EZ092
Installation
16.2.4).
Install the sensor in the reverse order of (D561L and D562L).
2. Disconnect the connector (D566) from
removal.
the sensor.
4. Remove the sensor LED bracket by
removing the screw.
16
16.3.4 Exposure Section Feed Sensor LED
the sensor. 16.3.3
Unit Paper Sensor Bracket 16.3.4
(D560) Replacement 16.3.5
16.3.6
Removal
1. Remove the speed adjustment section

guide plate (see subsection 15.3.4).

sensor.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove Connector Connector

the sensor from the guide plate. (D561L) (D562L) Connector Sensor (D566)
EZ093 EZ095
Installation

removal.
Sensor (D560)
Connector
EZ070
16-9
16.3.7 Ambient Temperature 4. Remove the fan and guard from the 3. Remove the exposure feed section
Sensor (THA1-2) bracket by removing the two screws. cover by removing the three screws.
Replacement Guard Exposure Feed Section Cover
Screws (2)
Removal

16.2.4).
Arrow
2. Disconnect the connector (THA1-2)
from the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor from the two

circuit board spacers. Fan (F565)
Screws (3)
Sensor (THA1-2) Bracket EZ1348
EZ1043
4. Disconnect the four connectors (SSC1
to SSC4).
Installation
SSC4 SSC2
Installation is essentially in the reverse SSC3
order of removal.

points the motor.
Connector
16.3.9 Exposure Section Feed
Circuit Board
Spacers (2) Unit Removal/Re-
EZ096
installation
SSC1
Installation Removal EZ098
Install the sensor in the reverse order of 1. Remove: 5. Remove the screw securing the
removal. grounding wire.
• exposure section front inner cover
(see subsection 16.1.4). 6. Remove the four screws mounting the
• laser unit (see subsection 16.2.4). exposure frame.
16.3.8. Exposure Section Nip
Motor Cooling Fan
16 (F565) Replacement
2. Remove the connector cover by
16.3.7
Connector Cover
16.3.8
Removal
16.3.9 1. Remove the laser unit (see subsection
16.2.4).
2. Disconnect the connector (F565).

the two screws.
Clamp Exposure Frame Mounting Screws (4)

Connector (F565)
EZ100
Screws (3)
EZ1347
Screws (2)
Fan Bracket
EZ097
16-10
7. Remove the feed unit while taking 16.3.10 Paper Width Guide 3. Remove the paper width guide motor
care not to damage the drive roller Motor (M563) bracket by removing the two screws.
shafts and sub-scanning belt.
Replacement NOTE: Take care not to damage the
Exposure Section Feed Unit sub-scanning (steel) belt.
Removal
1. Remove the exposure section feed

unit (see subsection 16.3.9).
2. Disconnect the connector (M563).

two screws.
Motor (M563)
EZ101
Screws (2) Bracket

Re-installation
EZ104

order of removal. Re-installation
NOTE: • Insert the two Phillips Re-install the bracket in the reverse order
screwdrivers with 6.3 mm or 6.0 of removal.
mm OD into the two locating
holes. Lift the frame slightly so
that the screwdrivers fall into the 16.3.12 Paper Width Guide
locating holes and tightens the Connector (M563) Screws (2) Home Position Sensor
four mounting screws.
• Do not use a screwdriver with
EZ102 (D563) Replacement
burrs on its shank.
Installation Removal
Screwdriver with
Mounting Install the motor in the reverse order of
6.3 mm OD 1. Remove the paper width guide motor
Screws (4) removal.
2. Disconnect the connector (D563).

16.3.11 Paper Width Guide
Motor Bracket 3. Release the locking tabs and remove
Removal/Re- 16
installation
16.3.10
Removal 16.3.11
16.3.12
Hole for 6.3 mm OD unit (see subsection 16.3.9).
Hole for 6.0 mm OD
2. Remove the paper width guide drive
EZ119 belt.
Connector (D563) Sensor (D563)

EZ105
Installation

removal.
Paper Width Guide Drive Belt

EZ103
16-11
16.3.13 Paper Width Guide 16.3.14 Leading End 16.3.15 Pre-exposure Feed
Drive Belt Replacement Positioning Fork Motor (M560)
Position Sensor (D564) Replacement
Removal Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the paper width guide motor Removal
bracket (see subsection 16.3.11). 1. Remove the exposure section feed
1. Remove the exposure section feed unit (see subsection 16.3.9).
2. Remove the two screws securing the unit (see subsection 16.3.9).
paper width guide to the belt. 2. Disconnect the connector (M560) .
2. Disconnect the connector (D564) from
the sensor. Connector (M560)
Screws (2)
EZ106
EZ116
3. Remove the E-ring, bearing and the
gear shaft from the motor bracket. Connector (D564) 3. Remove the motor by removing the
Remove the belt.
EZ109 two screws.
Belt
3. Remove the sensor bracket by Motor (M560)
Screws (2)
removing the screw.

Gear Shaft
16 Motor Bracket Bearing E-ring EZ117
EZ107
16.3.13 4. Remove the damper rubber from the
16.3.14 Installation motor by removing the two screws.
16.3.15
Bracket Screw
Installation is essentially in the reverse Screws (2)
Sensor (D564)
order of removal.
EZ110
NOTE: Tighten the two screws while
pressing the belt holding plates Installation
against the paper width guides as
shown. Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the sub-

scanning (steel) belt.
Damber Rubber Motor

EZ1674
Installation

order of removal.
Belt Holding Plate
NOTE: Move the motor to the gear so
EZ108
that there is minimum gear
backlash and tighten the two
After installation, adjust paper width guide
motor mounting screws.
16-12
16.3.16 Sub-scanning Motor 16.3.17 Sub-scanning Motor 16.3.18 Exposure Section Nip
(M561) Driver Circuit (M561) Replacement Motor (M565)
Board Replacement Replacement
Removal
Removal Removal
1. Remove:
1. Remove the printer control section 1. Remove the exposure section feed
cover (see subsection 18.1.1). • exposure section feed unit (see unit (see subsection 16.3.9).
subsection 16.3.9).
2. Disconnect the two connectors (CN1 • sub-scanning belt (see subsection 2. Open the clamp and disconnect the
and CN2) from the circuit board. 16.3.1). connector (M565).
3. Remove the circuit board by removing 2. Disconnect the connector (M561). Clamp
the two screws.
Connector (CN1)
Connector (CN2)
Screws (2)
Connector (M561) Connector (M565)

Driver Circuit Board
EZ111 EZ113
DIP Switch 3. Remove the motor by removing the 3. Loosen the screw securing the sub-
EZ083
two nuts. scanning belt tensioner. Loosen the
belt tensioner and re-tighten the
Installation Motor (M561) screw.
Installation is essentially in the reverse 4. Remove the motor by removing the

order of removal. two screws.
NOTE: • Do not turn the variable Motor (M565)

resistance (VR) on the circuit
board because it has been
adjusted at the factory.
• Make sure DIP switch 1 is ON 16
and DIP switch 2 is OFF.
16.3.16
16.3.17
16.3.18
Nuts (2)
EZ112
Installation Screws (2)
Install the motor in the reverse order of Belt Tensioner Screw

removal.
EZ114
5. Remove the damper rubber from the

motor by removing the two screws.
Screws (2)
Damber Rubber Motor

EZ1674
16-13
Installation 3. Disconnect the connector (M561). • Align the two hex. socket head
set screws with the flat surfaces
Installation is essentially in the reverse on the pulley shaft.
order of removal. • Align the end surface of the
pulley boss with the shoulder of
NOTE: • Move the motor to the gear so the shaft as shown.
that there is minimum gear
backlash and tighten the two
screws.
Motor (M565)
Connector (M561)
EZ111
4. Remove the pulley bracket by

removing the five screws. Shaft Hex. Socket Head Set Screws (2)
Pulley Boss
Pulley Bracket
EZ1051
Screws (2) Gear

EZ115
Drive Steel Belt
Replacement
• Adjust the sub-scanning belt
tension (see subsection 16.3.1). Removal

unit (see subsection 16.3.9).
Drive Pulley Bracket Screws (5) 2. Loosen the three screws securing the
Removal/Re- EZ1050
belt tensioner.
installation
Re-installation 3. Loosen the hex. socket head adjusting
Removal screw two turns.
Screws (3)
1. Remove: order of removal.
16 • exposure section feed unit NOTE: • Tighten the bracket mounting

(see subsection 16.3.9). five screws in the order as
16.3.19 • sub-scanning belt shown after temporarily
16.3.20 (see subsection 16.3.1). installing them.
2. Loosen the two hex. socket head set

screws and remove the pulley.
Hex. Socket Head Adjusting Screw

EZ1675
EZ1687
Hex. Socket Head Set Screws (2)

Pulley
EZ1049
16-14
4. Turn the tensioner clockwise and 3. Tighten the three screws in the order <If the belt is inside>
tighten the screw. as shown.
1) Loosen the three screws securing
5. Remove the steel belt from the 4. Screw in the hex socket head the belt tensioner and the hex.
pulleys. adjusting screw until it bottoms. socket head adjusting screw.
Belt Tensioner Screw 2) Remove and re-install the belt.
7. Turn the lower left pulley by hand and

make sure the belt does not slip on
the pulleys.
8. Re-adjust if the belt slips on the

pulleys.
Steel Belt
Screws (3)
Hex. Socket Head Adjusting Screw

EZ1679
Steel Belt 5. Turn the exposure section drive pulley

EZ1676 approximately 30 turns.
Installation 6. Make sure the belt is center of the

pulley. If necessary, adjust the belt
Installation is essentially in the reverse position by following the steps below.
order of removal. After installation, adjust
the belt position by following the steps <If the belt is outside> Lower Left Pulley
below. EZ1681
1) Loosen the lower screw securing
Steel Belt Adjustment the belt tensioner.
1. Loosen the screws securing the belt 2) Screw in the hex socket head
16.3.21 Exposure Section Cam
tensioner. adjusting screw. Replacement
Screw
3) Turn the exposure section drive Removal
pulley approximately 30 turns.
1. Remove the exposure section drive
4) Check the belt position. pulley bracket (see subsection
16.3.19).
5) If necessary, repeat steps 1)
through 4). 2. Remove the cam arm assemblies
16
from both sides by removing the
Steel Belt screws. 16.3.21
Cam Arm Assembly Screw
1.5 to
2mm
Belt Tensioner
EZ1677
2. Turn the exposure section drive pulley

several turns by hand.
Exposure Section Drive Pulley

Lower Screw Hex. Socket Head
Adjusting Screw
EZ1046
EZ1680
EZ1678
EZ1047
16-15
3. Release the locking tabs and remove 16.3.22 Exposure Roller/Guide 4. Remove the bracket by removing the
the idler gear. Replacement two screws.
4. Remove the camshaft gear by

removing the E-ring.
Removal
Idler Gear Camshaft Gear 1. Remove:

E-ring
• exposure section cams
• exposure section drive steel belts
2. Remove the tensioner spring, three

screws, fulcrum screw and the belt
tensioner.
Screws (2) Bracket
Belt Tensioner Tensioner Spring
EZ1054
Locking Tab 5. Remove the four springs, bearings

EZ1052 and ball bearings. Remove the nip
rollers.
5. Remove the gear drive pin.
Spring (4)
Bearings (4)
6. Remove the two E-rings, bearings and
the camshaft.
Camshaft Fulcrum
Bearings (2) Screw
Screws (3)
EZ1682 Ball Bearings (4)
3. Remove the two bearing holding Nip Rollers (2)

plates by removing the four screws.
EZ1044
Bearing Holding Plates 6. Remove the two bearings and paper

E-rings (2) Gear Drive pin holding guide by removing the two
16 EZ1053
special screws.
Install the cams in the reverse order of

removal.
Bearings (2)
Screws (4) Paper Holding Guide
EZ1683
Special Screws (2)
EZ1045
16-16
7. Loosen the two screws securing the • Temporarily install the bearing 16.3.24 Entrance Roller
rear bearing holding plate. holding plate, insert the 0.02mm Replacement
feeler gauge between the plate
8. Remove the five screws securing the and the bearing and tighten the
guide plate, and the plate. screws while pressing the plate
Removal
against the bearing. Remove the
Guide Plate Screws (5) 1. Remove:
feeler gauge and make sure the
bearing is moved smoothly.
• paper width guide motor bracket
Bearing Holding Plate 0.02mm
• exposure section drive pulley
Feeler Gauge
• pre-exposure section feed motor
2. Remove the two springs from the nip

roller guide plate.
Rear Bearing
Screws (2) (Loosen) Bearing
Holding Plate
EZ1048
Spring (Red)
Installation
Spring (No Color)
Installation is essentially in the reverse EZ1686
order of removal.
• The inlet and outlet springs are
NOTE: • Install the guide plate so that its different.
resin guide is up, then tighten
the two upper screws first. Inlet side springs: Springs (2)
No color (1800g) EZ1057
Screws (2) Outlet side springs:
Red (1500g) 3. Remove the connector bracket by
removing the screw.
Resin 4. Remove the screw securing the guide

Guide
16.3.23 Entrance Nip Roller
Replacement plate.
Connector Bracket Screw

Removal

16
16.2.4).
16.3.23
2. Remove the two nip roller assemblies 16.3.24
EZ1684 by removing the four screws.
• Hold the paper pressure guide Nip Roller Assemblies

with a screwdriver and tighten
the two screws to prevent it from
distortion. Guide Plate Screw
EZ1058
Screws (4)
EZ1056
Screws (2)
Installation
Paper Pressure
Screwdriver Guide
EZ1685 removal.
16-17
5. Remove the screw securing the 9. Remove the E-ring securing the gear, Installation
grounding wire. and the gear.
6. Remove the screw securing the guide 10. Remove the two screws securing the order of removal.
plate and remove the nip roller guide guide plate.
plate. NOTE: Tighten the paper width guide
Gear mounting screws while pressing
Guide Plate Screw the guides and bases against the
Nip Roller Guide Plate side plates as shown.
Paper Width Guide
E-ring
Guide Plate Screws (2)

Screw EZ1062
Grounding Wire
EZ1059 11. Remove the two E-rings, gears,
collars and bearings in this order.
7. Remove the four screws securing the Side Plate Screws
paper width guides. Base
EZ1350
Paper Width Guides
16.3.25 Paper Width Guide

Adjustment
1. On the menu “45A Printer I/O Check”,

Bearings (2) move the paper width guide motor
E-rings (2) Collars (2) (M563) to position the guides to 89
mm position.
Gears (2)
EZ1063 2. Open the upper side door and open
the guide plate. Measure the inside
12. Remove the two E-rings and bearings width of the paper width guides as
from the opposite side. Remove the
16 Screws (4)
two rollers.
shown.
EZ1060
Standard:
16.3.25 E-rings (2)
Paper = 89 mm
8. Remove the two screws securing the Guide Width = 89.5 mm
guide plate.
Guide Inside Width = 74.5 mm
Paper Width Guides
74.5mm
Bearings (2)
Rollers (2)
EZ1064
Guide Plate Screws (2)
EZ1379
EZ1061
16-18
3. If necessary, adjust by following the

steps below.
1) On the menu “45M Printer

Mechanism Fine Adjustment”,
enter “0.00mm” for fine adjustment
value of the paper width guide.
2) On the menu “45T Data Saving”,

select and save “Parameter”.
3) Open and close the upper side

door to reset system.
4) On the menu “45A Printer I/O

Check”, move the paper width
guide motor (M563) to position the
guides to 89 mm position.
5) Open the upper side door and

open the guide plate. Measure the
inside width of the paper width
guides as shown.
Paper Width Guides
74.5mm
EZ1379
6) Calculate fine adjustment value by

using the formula below.
89.5 – (Inside Width + 15) = Fine

Adjustment Value
16
<Example> If the inside width is
75.5 mm, 16.3.25
89.5 – (75.5 + 15) = –1
7) On the menu “45M Printer

Mechanism Fine Adjustment”,
enter the calculated fine
adjustment value for the paper
width guide
(example = –1.00mm).
8) On the menu “45T Data Saving”,

select and save “Parameter”.
9) Open and close the upper side

door to reset system.
16-19
17. DISTRIBUTION SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................ 17-2
17.1 Distribution Unit ............................................................................................. 17-3

17.1.1 Suction Cup Replacement ............................................................................ 17-3
17.1.2 Anti-static Brush Replacement ..................................................................... 17-3
17.1.3 Paper Release Roller Replacement ............................................................. 17-3
17.1.4 Suction Unit Removal/Re-installation ........................................................... 17-3
17.1.5 Slider Lower Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................................ 17-4
17.1.6 Lowering Home Position Sensor (D575) Replacement ................................ 17-4
17.1.7 Distribution Motor (M571) Replacement ....................................................... 17-5
17.1.8 Distribution Home Position Sensor (D574) Replacement ............................. 17-5
17.1.9 Solenoid Valve (S570 and S571) Replacement ............................................ 17-5
17.1.10 Distribution Up/Down Motor (M572) Replacement ....................................... 17-6
17.1.11 Up/Down Drive Belt/Timing Belt Replacement ............................................. 17-6
17.1.12 Distribution Section Door Removal/Re-installation ....................................... 17-7
17.1.13 Distribution Section Door Sensor Interlock Switch
(D584A and D584B) Replacement .......................................................... 17-7
17.1.14 Distribution Sucker Air Pump (PU570)/
Vibration Isolation Rubber Replacement ................................................. 17-8
17.1.15 SSR Replacement ........................................................................................ 17-8
17.1.16 Distribution Unit Replacement ...................................................................... 17-8
17.2 Distribution Feed Section ............................................................................ 17-10

17.2.1 Distribution Section Feed Motor (M570) Replacement ................................. 17-10
17.2.2 Processor Entrance 1, 2 and 3 Sensor (D571P, D572P and D573P)
Replacement ........................................................................................... 17-10
17.2.3 Processor Entrance 1, 2 and 3 Sensor LED (D571L, D572L and D573L)
Replacement ........................................................................................... 17-10 17
17.2.4 Feed Motor Bracket Removal/Re-installation ............................................... 17-11
17.2.5 Front Up/Down Section Removal/Re-installation .......................................... 17-11
17.2.6 Front Up/Down Section Height Adjustment .................................................. 17-12
17.2.7 Upper Feed Belt and Holding Belt Replacement .......................................... 17-12
17.2.8 Feed Belt Replacement ................................................................................ 17-13
17.2.9 Processor Entry Unit Removal/Re-installation .............................................. 17-14
17.2.10 Processor Entry Feed Belt Replacement ...................................................... 17-15
17.2.11 Processor Entry Unit Gearbox Removal/Re-installation ............................... 17-15
17.2.12 Processor Entry Unit Gearbox Disassembly/Re-assembly ........................... 17-16
17-1
Parts Location
Up/Down Timing Belt Distribution Unit Distribution Up/Down Motor (M572) Distribution Sucker Air Pump
Solenoid Valves
A and B
(S570 and S571)
Distribution Motor
Pressure Belt (M571)
Distribution
Section Feed
Motor (M570)
17
Lower Feed Belt
Suction Cup
Paper Release Roller Tension Roller Upper Feed Belt Processor Entry Feed Belt
EZ191
17-2
17.1 Distribution Unit
17.1.1 Suction Cup 17.1.3 Paper Release Roller 4. Remove the two springs.
Replacement Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Open the distribution unit. 1. Open the distribution unit.
2. Remove the four suction cups. 2. Remove the screw and the roller.
Suction Cups (4) Screw
Springs
EZ831
5. Cut the cord ties and disconnect the

two hoses from the distribution guide.

sensor connector (D574).
EZ828
Roller
EZ829
Installation
Connector
Installation (D574)
Install the suction cups in the reverse
order of removal. Install the roller in the reverse order of
removal.
17.1.2 Anti-static Brush

Replacement 17.1.4 Suction Unit Removal/
Re-installation
Removal Hoses
Removal Cord Tie
1. Open the distribution unit.
EZ832
2. Remove the anti-static brush by and the built-in circuit breaker and the
7. Disconnect the distribution motor
removing the four screws. main power supply OFF.
connector.
Anti-static Brush Screws (4) 2. Open the distribution unit.

8. Disconnect the grounding spring by
removing the screw.
3. Remove the two clips from the up/
down guide pins. 17
Up/Down Guide Pins 17.1.1
17.1.2
17.1.3
17.1.4
EZ1598 Motor Connector
Installation Screw Grounding Spring

Clips (2) EZ833
Install the brush in the reverse order of
removal. EZ830
17-3
9. Withdraw the up/down guide pins and • Twist the hoses inside 180 17.1.6 Lowering Home Position
remove the suction unit. degrees and connect them to Sensor (D575)
the base. Secure them using the
cord ties.
Replacement
Suction Unit
Removal
1. Remove the slider lower cover (see

subsection 17.1.5).

removing the screw.
Hoses
EZ1245
Up/Down Guide Pins
EZ834
Re-installation
17.1.5 Slider Lower Cover
Re-installation is essentially in the reverse Screw
order of removal. Removal
Sensor Bracket
NOTE: • Align the rails on the suction unit 1. Remove the suction unit (see
with the rollers on the cam subsection 17.1.4). EZ835
pulleys.
2. Remove the four screws, cut the cord 3. Disconnect the connector from the
tie and remove the slider lower cover. sensor.
Suction Unit

Cam Pulley Screws (4) Slider Lower Cover Cord Tie
Sensor (D575)
Connector
Rail Roller
17 EZ850
EZ163
17.1.5 Re-installation Locking Tabs

• Align the D-cut of the up/down
guide pin with the D-hole and EZ836
17.1.6
insert the pin.
Up/Down Guide Pins
removal.
D-cut
EZ851
17-4
17.1.7 Distribution Motor 17.1.9 Solenoid Valve (S570 4. Open the distribution unit.
(M571) Replacement and S571) Replacement
5. Remove the slider lower cover (see
subsection 17.1.5).
Removal Removal
1. Remove the suction unit (see 1. Remove the slider cover by loosening
solenoid bracket.
subsection 17.1.4). the two screws and unscrewing the
two screws.
Screws (2)
2. Remove the motor connector from the
bracket. Screws (2)(Remove) Slider Cover

motor from the bracket.
Screws (4) Motor (M571)
EZ1243
Screws (2)(Loosen) 7. Remove the solenoid valve by

EZ153
Motor Bracket 8. Cut the two cord ties and disconnect

Motor Connecor 2. Open the clamps and disconnect the
the two hoses from the solenoid valve.
connector (S570 or S571). Remove
EZ837
the solenoid connector from the Solenoid Valve
bracket.
Installation

removal.
17.1.8 Distribution Home

Position Sensor (D574)
Replacement
Removal
Connector (S570) Connector (S571) Screws (2) Hoses (2)
1. Remove the suction unit (see
subsection 17.1.4). EZ162 EZ840 17
2. Remove the sensor bracket by 3. Remove the screw securing the Installation 17.1.7
removing the screw. solenoid bracket.
17.1.8
Install the solenoid valve in the reverse
order of removal. 17.1.9
Locking Tabs Screw
Screws (2)
EZ1242
Bracket
Sensor (D574)
EZ839
Installation

removal.
17-5
17.1.10 Distribution Up/Down 5. Disengage the drive belt from the 17.1.11 Up/Down Drive Belt/
Motor (M572) pulleys and remove the motor bracket. Timing Belt
Replacement Drive Belt Motor Bracket
Replacement
Removal Removal
1. Remove the slide lower cover (see 1. Remove the distribution up/down
subsection 17.1.5). motor (see subsection 17.1.10).
2. Loosen the four screws securing the 2. Remove the front and rear belt
solenoid brackets. tensioners and springs by removing
the two screws for each.
Screws (2)
Screws (2)
EZ842
6. Remove the bracket from the motor

Bracket
Press Boss to Bracket.
EZ1243
Belt Tensioner Spring

EZ844
3. Remove each E-ring and bearing from

Screws (2) front and rear of the drive shaft.
E-ring Bearing Drive Shaft
Motor (M572)
EZ843
Installation

Screws (2) order of removal.
EZ1242
NOTE: Tighten the motor mounting
17 3. Disconnect the connector (M572). screws while pressing the motor
boss against the bracket as show
17.1.10 4. Remove the two screws securing the in the figure above. E-ring
17.1.11 motor bracket. EZ845
Motor Bracket Screws (2) 4. Remove the E-ring securing the rear
drive pulley. Remove the drive shaft,
drive belt and timing belt.
Rear Drive Pulley
Connector (M572)
EZ841
E-ring
EZ1244
17-6
Installation 5) Put the timing belt on the 17.1.12 Distribution Section

tensioner pulley. Door Removal/Re-
Installation is essentially in the reverse 6) Install the spring and tighten the
order of removal. tensioner screw.
installation
<Timing Adjustment> Timing Belt Removal
1. Install the timing belt. 1. Remove the four screws securing the
Tensioner Pulley
distribution section door.
2. Install the lowering home position
sensor (D575). 2. Open and remove the door.
Distribution Section Door

3. Secure the front drive pulley to the
side plate using the 3 mm diameter
pin.
NOTE: Make sure the sensing plate

aligns with the lowering home
position sensor.
Spring Screw
3 mm Diameter Pin EZ848
5. Adjust the rear timing belt by following

the same procedure of step 4.
Screws (4)
Inlet Side Cam Pulley
EZ757
Tensioner Pulley
Drive Pulley Re-installation
Re-install the door in the reverse order of

removal.
Sensing Plate
Front Drive Lowering Home Position

Pulley Sensor (D575) 17.1.13 Distribution Section
EZ846 Door Sensor Interlock
Outlet Side
Switch (D584A and
4. Adjust the front timing belt by following
Cam Pulley D584B) Replacement
the steps below.
1) Put the timing belt on the outlet Removal

side cam pulley while pulling it to
the opposite direction of rotation. Timing Belt 1. Remove the printer top inner cover
2) Secure the outlet side cam pulley EZ849
to the side plate using the 3 mm
diameter pin. 2. Remove the switch cover by removing
17
3) Put the timing belt on the inlet the screw.
17.1.12
side cam pulley while pulling it to
3. Remove the switch bracket by 17.1.13
the opposite direction of rotation.
4) Secure the inlet side cam pulley to removing the screw.
the side plate using the 3 mm
Screw Screw
diameter pin.
Inlet Side Cam Outlet Side Cam

Pulley Pulley
3 mm Pin
Switch Cover
Switch Bracket
EZ769
Timing Belt
Drive Pulley
EZ847
17-7
4. Remove the spring, E-rings and shaft. 6. Hold the upper metal of the vibration 17.1.15 SSR Replacement
isolation rubber using the 11 mm open
5. Disconnect the connector from the end wrench and remove the four nuts, Removal
switch. lock and plain washers.
E-ring Shaft 1. Remove the printer top inner cover

NOTE: Take care not to apply twisting (see subsection 16.1.2).
force to the rubbers. Twisting
force may shorten their 2. Open the distribution unit.
service life.
3. Remove the four screws and
7. Disconnect the four hoses from the disconnect the wires from the SSR.
pump.
Connector
Nuts (4) 4. Remove the SSR by removing the two
Spring screws.
EZ770 Lock Washers (4)
Plain SSR Screws (4)

Installation Washers (4) Wires (4)
Install the switch in the reverse order of Screws (2)

removal.
17.1.14 Distribution Sucker Air Hoses (4)

Pump (PU570)/
Vibration Isolation Vibration
11 mm Open Isolation
Rubber Replacement
End Wrench Rubbers (4)
EZ760
Removal
EZ762
8. Remove the vibration isolation rubbers
using the 11 mm open end wrench. Installation
Vibration Isolation Rubbers (4) Install the SSR in the reverse roder of
2. Remove the pump section cover by
removal.
17.1.16 Distribution Unit

Replacement
Removal

17 (see subsection 16.1.2).
11 mm Open End Wrench 2. Open the distributor unit.

17.1.14 Screws (2) Pump Section Cover
17.1.15 EZ722
EZ761
17.1.16 (SEL01 and SEL02).
3. Cut the five cord ties.
Installation
Connector (SEL01)
4. Disconnect the connector (SCC7) and Install the rubbers and pump in the
remove the pump connector from the
bracket.
5. Remove the two screws and

disconnect the two wires (SSR1 and
SSR2) from the SSR.
SSR Connector (SCC7)
Connector (SEL02)
EZ1106
Screws (2)
Cord Ties (5) Wires
EZ759
17-8
4. Disconnect the two hoses. 7. Close the distribution unit.
Hoses
8. Disconnect the grounding wire from
the distribution unit by removing the
screw.
9. Remove the eight screws and the

distribution unit.
Screw/Grounding wire Distribution Unit
EZ1107
5. Remove the two pin brackets by

Screws (4)
Screws (8)
EZ1110
Installation

removal.
After installation, enter the distribution unit
adjustment data by following the steps
Pin Brackets (2)
below.
EZ1108
1. Open the menu 45M “Printer
6. Remove the two E-rings and move the Mechanism Fine Adjustment” screen.
collars and springs to the center so
that the spring hooks are aligned with
the grooves.
17
17.1.16
2. Enter the data indicated on the labels

attached to the unit into the boxes on
the screen.
E-rings (2) Collars (2) Springs (2)
EZ1109 2-line Front 3-line Rear
3-line Front 2-line Rear
Bottom
EZ1599
3. Adjust front up/down section height

17-9
17.2 Distribution
17.2 Distribution Feed Section Feed Section
17.2.1 Distribution Section 17.2.2 Processor Entrance 1, 2 7. Disconnect the harness connector
Feed Motor (M570) and 3 Sensor (D571P, and remove the sensor connector
from the bracket.
Replacement D572P and D573P)
Replacement 8. Remove the sensor from the bracket
Removal by removing the flat countersunk head
Removal screw.
inner cover (see subsection 16.1.4). Sensor Connector
Sensor 3
2. Disconnect the connector (M570) and
(D573P)
remove the motor connector from the 2. Open the distribution unit.
bracket.
3. Lower the upper feed belt bracket.
Motor Bracket Screws (2) Flat Countersunk

Head Screw
Sensor 2
(D572P)
Sensor 1 (D571P)
EZ125
Installation

Upper Feed Belt Bracket
removal.
EZ123
4. Remove the screw securing the link to

Connector (M570)
the frame.
17.2.3 Processor Entrance 1, 2
EZ852 and 3 Sensor LED
Screw (D571L, D572L and
4. Remove the motor bracket from the D573L) Replacement
motor by removing the two screws.
Screws (2) Motor Bracket

Removal

3. Disconnect the connector (D571L/

17 D572L/D573L).
Link
17.2.1
EZ1308
17.2.2
17.2.3 5. Disconnect the connector (SEL2P).
Motor (M570) 6. Remove the two screws and the

EZ853 sensor bracket.
Sensor Bracket
Installation

removal.
Connector (D571L/D572L/D573L)
EZ126
Screws (2)
Connector (SEL2P)
EZ124
17-10
17.2 Distribution Feed Section
4. Remove the tension roller. 7. Disconnect the connector and remove 3. Disconnect the motor connector.
the sensor connector from the
bracket. 4. Remove the four screws and the
motor bracket.
8. Remove the sensor LED from the
bracket by removing the screw. Feed Motor Bracket
Sensor 2 LED (D572L)
Sensor 1 LED Sensor 3 LED

(D571L) (D573L)
Screw
Tension Roller
EZ127
5. Remove the screw and the holding

plate.
Sensor LED Screws (4) Motor Connector

Connector EZ1315
EZ130
Re-installation
Installation
Re-install the motor bracket in the reverse
Install the sensor LED in the reverse order order of removal.
of removal.
17.2.5 Front Up/Down Section

17.2.4 Feed Motor Bracket Removal/Re-installation
Holding Plate Screw
Removal
EZ128 Removal
1. Remove:
6. Remove the two screws and the 1. Remove:
sensor LED bracket. • printer top inner cover
• printer top inner cover (see subsection 16.1.2).
(see subsection 16.1.2). • exposure section front inner cover
• exposure section front inner cover (see subsection 16.1.4).
2. Remove the four screws securing the
magazine section door shading cover,
then remove the cover.
3. Remove the screw securing the rear
of the front up/down section.
17
Screw 17.2.4
17.2.5
Screws (2)
Sensor LED Bracket

EZ129
Screws (4) Magazine Section Door

Shading Cover
Front Up/Down Section
EZ1010
EZ1316
17-11
4. Remove the two screws securing the 5. Make sure the suction cups are higher 3) Make sure the holding belt is
front of the front up/down section. than the lower run of the holding belt lower than the suction cups. If not
as shown. so, decrease value in the “Top”
Screws (2) box one pulse and recheck. In this
Front Up/Down case the clearance may be less
Section Suction Cups than 11mm.
17.2.7 Upper Feed Belt and

Holding Belt
Replacement
Removal
EZ1317 Holding Belt 1. Remove:
EZ1957 • feed motor bracket

the roller bracket and auxiliary roller (see subsection 17.2.4).
6. If the suction cups are lower than the • front up/down section
bracket.
holding belt, adjust by following the (see subsection 17.2.5).
steps below.
Roller Bracket
1) Open the menu 45M “Printer links.
Mechanism Fine Adjustment”
Screws (2)
screen.
Screws (2) Auxiliary Roller Bracket

EZ1318
Re-installation
2) Insert the jig between the belts at Links
the front up/down section roller EZ1314
Re-install the front up/down section in the
through the opening in the
distribution unit and change the 3. Release the locking tabs and remove
After re-installation, adjust front up/down
value in “Top” box in the screen so the gear.
section height (see subsection 17.2.6).
17 that the clearance between the
belts is 11mm. 4. Remove the two screws and the
17.2.6 bearing holder. Remove the upper
17.2.6 Front Up/Down Section Specified Height: 11mm feed belt pulley shaft.
17.2.7
Height Adjustment
Jig Bearing Holder Screws (2)
1. Remove the exposure section inner

2. Turn ON the exposure section front

cover detecting interlock switch
(D585).
3. Turn ON the main power supply, built-

in circuit breaker and power switch
and start up the system.
4. Open the menu 45A “Printer I/O 11mm Belts

Check” screen, press the [Rise] button Upper Feed Belt Pulley Shaft Gear
EZ1600
of the “M572 Distribution up and EZ1313
down”.
To increase height of the roller,
increase the number of pulse.
• The distribution unit moves to the
To reduce height of the roller,
distribution position.
decrease the number of pulse.
17-12
5. Remove the two screws securing the 2. Loosen the lock nut and adjust by 5. Remove the tension roller.
bracket. turning the adjusting bolt if necessary.
Bracket Adjusting Bolt
Tension Roller
Screws (2) EZ127A
EZ1319 Lock Nut
EZ1358 6. Remove the screw and the holding
6. Remove the holding belt and two plate.
upper feed belts. 3. Re-tighten the lock nut securely.
Upper Feed Belt

17.2.8 Feed Belt Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the motor bracket (see

subsection 17.2.4).
2. Open the distribution section.
3. Remove the screw securing the rear

of the front up/down section. Holding Plate Screw
Upper Feed Belt Holding Belt
EZ128
EZ1320 Screw
7. Remove the screw and the exposure
Installation side holding plate.

order of removal.
<Height Adjustment>
1. Make sure the “Go” side of the

adjusting jig is inserted under the
17
upper feed belt and the “Not Go” side 17.2.8
is not inserted.
Front Up/Down Section
Specified Height: 11.5mm±1.0mm EZ1316 Screw Exposure Side Holding Plate
Upper Feed Belt 4. Remove the two screws securing the EZ131
front of the front up/down section.

8. Remove the clip securing the
Front Up/Down Section exposure side pulley shaft and the
“Go-side”
Screws (2) shaft.
Exposure Side Pulley Shaft

Clip
“Not-go” Side
Adjusting Jig
EZ1357
EZ1317 EZ2035
17-13
9. Release the locking tabs and remove Installation 4. Release the locking tabs and remove
the two gears. the gear.
order of removal. 5. Remove the two screws and the
bearing holder. Remove the lower
NOTE: Install the tension roller so that it feed belt pulley shaft.
rests on the lower run of the feed
belts as shown. Bearing Holder
Screws (2)
Tension Roller
Gears
EZ2010
10. Remove the two screws, then the

bearing holder and bearing.
Gear
Lower Feed Belt Pulley Shaft
EZ1312
Feed Belts
6. Disconnect the connector (SEL2P).
EZ2101

rear of the unit.
17.2.9 Processor Entry Unit Connector (SEL2P)
Bearing Removal
Bearing Holder Screws (2) 1. Remove the feed motor bracket (see
EZ2011 subsection 17.2.4).
11. Remove the pulley shaft and then the 2. Release the locking tabs and remove
feed belts. the gear.
Pulley Shaft 3. Remove the two screws and the

bearing holder. Remove the upper
feed belt pulley shaft.
Bearing Holder Screws (2)

17
Screws (2)
17.2.9
EZ1309

front of the processor entry unit, then
remove the unit.
Screws (2)
Feed Belts
EZ2012
Upper Feed Belt Pulley Shaft Gear

EZ1313
Processor Entry Unit

EZ1310
17-14
Re-installation 3. On the rear side, remove the E-ring, 9. Remove the E-ring securing the guide
thrust washer, gear and collar. roller shaft and the shaft.
order of removal. 4. Remove the spring. E-ring
NOTE: Tighten the four unit mounting 5. Remove the two E-rings and thrust
screws while pressing the unit washers.
against the exposure side.
SEL2P
E-rings (2)
Exposure Gear
Spring
Side E-ring Guide Roller Shaft
Thrust Washer
EZ1311
Collar
Thrust Washer
Installation
EZ148 Installation is essentially in the reverse

Screws (4) order of removal.
6. Remove the two E-rings, thrust
EZ1359
washers and bearings. NOTE: • Face the glossy surfaces of the
belts inside.
Bearings (2) E-rings (2) • Make sure the belts clear the
17.2.10 Processor Entry Feed rubber rollers.
Belt Replacement
Removal 17.2.11 Processor Entry Unit

Gearbox Removal/Re-
1. Remove the processor entry unit (see
installation
subsection 17.2.9).
2. On the front side, remove the spring, Removal

stop plate, two E-rings, thrust
washers, six bearings and two collars. 1. Remove:
Thrust Washers (2)
EZ149 • AOM-R driver
Collars (2)
7. Remove the two exposure side pulley • AOM driver cooling fan
Thrust Washers (2) shafts from the front side. (see subsection 18.1.6).
Spring
2. Loosen the three screws, unscrew the 17
screw, and move the circuit board
bracket to the right side. 17.2.10
17.2.11
Circuit Board Bracket
Screws (3) (Loosen) Screw
(Remove)
Bearings (2)
Stop Plate
E-rings (2) Bearings (4)
Exposure Side Pulley Shafts
EZ147
EZ150
8. Remove the two processor side pulley

shafts and remove the twelve belts.
Belts (12)
Pulley Shafts
EZ856
EZ151
17-15
3. Remove the two screws and the 17.2.12 Processor Entry Unit 6. Remove the E-ring securing the gear.
gearbox cover. Gearbox Disassembly/
Gearbox Cover Re-assembly
Disassembly
1. Remove the processor entry unit

gearbox (see subsection 17.2.11).
2. Remove the two coil springs,

bearings, drive shaft and gear/bearing E-ring
from the gearbox. Gear
EZ862
Bearings (2) Drive Shaft
Gear/Bearing
7. Remove the E-ring, bearing, metal
gear, collar, bearing and idler shaft in
this order.
Idler Shaft Metal Gear
Screws (2)
EZ857
4. Loosen the three screws and nut and

remove the gearbox.
Gearbox Springs (2)

Nut
EZ861 E-ring
Bearing
3. Remove the E-ring, bearing and
reduction gear shaft. Bearing Collar
EZ863
8. Release the lock tabs and remove the

gear.
9. Remove the E-ring, gear and two

bearings from the idler shaft.
Idler Shaft
Gear
Reduction
Screws (3)(Loosen) Gear Shaft
EZ858 E-ring
17 Bearing
Re-installation EZ865
17.2.12
Re-install the gearbox in the reverse order 4. Remove the E-ring securing the large
of removal. gear and the large gear.
E-ring
5. Remove the E-ring, bearing, E-ring E-ring Gear
Bearing
and small gear from the reduction
gear shaft. EZ864
Bearing 10. Remove the E-ring and gear shaft.

E-ring
11. Remove the E-ring and gear shaft.
Gear Shaft
E-ring
Small Gear
Reduction Gear Shaft
E-rings Large Gear
EZ866
Gear Shaft E-rings
EZ867
17-16
12. Disassemble the gear shafts.
E-ring
Bearing
Gear
E-ring
Bearing
E-ring
Bearing
Gear Shaft
Gear
Bearing E-ring
EZ869
Re-assembly
Re-assemble the gearbox in the reverse

order of removal.
17
17.2.12
17-17
18. PRINTER CONTROL SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................ 18-2
18.1 Printer Control Section ................................................................................ 18-3

18.1.1 Printer Control Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ................................ 18-3
18.1.2 Power Switch Replacement .......................................................................... 18-3
18.1.3 Printer Control Section Cooling Suction Fan
(F587 and F588) Replacement ................................................................ 18-3
18.1.4 Control Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing ............................................ 18-3
18.1.5 AOM Driver (AOM-R, AOM-G and AOM-B) Replacement ............................ 18-4
18.1.6 AOM Driver Cooling Fan (F591, F592 and F593) Replacement .................. 18-4
18.1.7 LDD20 Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................... 18-5
18.1.8 FMC20 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/Re-installation ................................ 18-5
18.1.9 FMB20 Circuit Board Extension .................................................................... 18-5
18.1.10 FMB20 Circuit Board Replacement .............................................................. 18-5
18.1.11 FMA20 Circuit Board Replacement .............................................................. 18-5
18.1.12 FMC20 Circuit Board Replacement .............................................................. 18-6
18.1.13 DC Power Supply Unit Exhaust Fan (F595) Replacement ........................... 18-6
18.1.14 DC Power Supply Unit Replacement ............................................................ 18-6
18.1.15 Printer Control Section Cooling Exhaust Fan (F582, F583 and F584)
Replacement ........................................................................................... 18-7
18.1.16 PDC20 Circuit Board Replacement .............................................................. 18-7
18.1.17 CTL20 Circuit Board Replacement ............................................................... 18-8
18
18-1
Parts Location
18.1 Printer Control Section
AOM Driver Cooling Fans 1, 2 and 3 (F591 to F593)
AOM-R Driver AOM-B Driver

AOM-G Driver
Control Circuit Board Bracket
LDD20 Circuit Board
PDC20 Circuit Board
FMC20 Circuit Board

Cooling Suction Fan 1
(F587)

Cooling Suction Fan 2
(F588)
FMA20 Circuit Board
CTL20 Circuit Board
18
DC Power Supply Unit DC Power Supply Unit

Exhaust Fan (F595) FMB20 Circuit Boards
(One board for LP1500SC as standard)
(Two board for LP2000SC as standard)
EZ1469
18-2
18.1.1 Printer Control Section 18.1.2 Power Switch 4. Remove the four screws, the fan
Cover Removal/Re- Replacement bracket, guards and fans.
installation Connector (F588)
Removal
Fan (F588) Connector (F587)
Removal
1. Remove:
and the built-in circuit breaker and the • printer side cover
main power supply OFF. (see subsection 15.2.2).
• shading plate
2. Disconnect the densitometer cable. (see subsection 15.2.6).
Densitometer Cable 2. Remove the harness duct cover.
3. Disconnect the two connectors (PSW-

1 and PSW-2) from the power switch.
4. Disconnect the connector (PSW2)

from the harness.
5. Remove the power switch by releasing Screws (4) Clamps (3)

Fan (F587)
its lock tabs.
EZ782 EZ168
Connector (PSW-1) Power Switch
3. Remove the 14 screws and the printer Installation
control section cover.
Install the fans in the reverse order of
Screws (14) removal.
18.1.4 Control Circuit Board

Bracket Opening/
Closing

Connector (PSW2) Connector (PSW-2)
EZ120 2. Remove the five screws and open the
bracket.
Installation
Install the power switch in the reverse

Printer Control Section Cover
order of removal.
EZ783

removing the screw. 18.1.3 Printer Control Section 18
Cooling Suction Fan
Screw Toothed Washer 18.1.1
(F587 and F588)
18.1.2
Replacement
18.1.3
Removal 18.1.4

Control Circuit Screws (5)
Board Bracket
2. Remove the connectors (F587 and
F588) from the connector bracket. EZ177
3. Open the three clamps and remove 3. Close the bracket and tighten the five
Grounding Wire the harness from them. screws.
EZ1346
4. Re-install the printer control section
cover.
Re-installation

removal.
18-3
18.1.5 AOM Driver (AOM-R, 6. Disconnect the connector (AOM-R, 18.1.6 AOM Driver Cooling Fan
AOM-G and AOM-B) AOM-G or AOM-B) from the driver. (F591, F592 and F593)
Replacement 7. Disconnect the R, G, or B cable from
Replacement
the driver.
Removal Removal
AOM-R Driver AOM-B Driver
1. Remove: 1. Remove the printer top inner cover
AOM-G Driver (see subsection 16.1.2).
• printer control section cover
(see subsection 18.1.1). 2. Open the control circuit board bracket
• printer top inner cover (see subsection 18.1.4).
3. Disconnect the three connectors
2. Open the control circuit board bracket (F591, F592 and F593).
(18.1.4).
3. Open the distributor section. the two screws.
R Cable G Cable B Cable
4. Remove the two screws and the pump Connector Connector Connector Screws (2) Connector (F592)
section cover. (AOM-R) (AOM-G) (AOM-B)
EZ172
8. Disconnect the R, G, or B cable from

the top of the driver.
9. Remove the AOM driver by removing

the four screws.
Screws (4)
R Cable
Connector (F591) Connector (F593)

Pump Section Cover Screws (2) EZ174
EZ084
5. Remove the connectors from the
5. Remove the three screws and move bracket.
the pump bracket.
Screws
Screws (3) removing the two screws.
(4)
G Cable Connector Fan (F593)
B Cable Screws (4)

EZ173
18 Installation
Install the AOM driver in the reverse order Screws (2)

18.1.5
of removal.
18.1.6 Screws (2)
Fan (F592)
Pump Bracket Screws (2)
EZ171 Fan (F591)
EZ175
Installation
Install the fans in the reverse order of

removal.
18-4
18.1.7 LDD20 Circuit Board 18.1.9 FMB20 Circuit Board Installation

Replacement Extension
order of removal.
Removal NOTE: Standard Specifications:
Two FMB20 circuit boards for
1. Remove the AOM driver cooling fan LP2000SC
bracket (see subsection 18.1.6). One FMB20 circuit board for 18.1.11 FMA20 Circuit Board
LP1500SC Replacement
2. Disconnect all connectors from the FMB20 Circuit Board Capacity:
circuit board. 96 MB
Removal
3. Remove the circuit board from the 1. Remove the circuit board bracket (see
1. Remove the circuit board bracket (see
nine circuit board spacers. subsection 18.1.8).
subsection 18.1.8).
LDD20 Circuit Board 2. Insert a new FMB20 circuit board into

the extension slots.
circuit board.
NOTE: Insert the extension circuit 3. Remove the four screws and the
boards from the left slots to
circuit board.
the right in sequence.
Screws (4)
FMB20 Circuit Boards FMC20 Circuit Board
Circuit Board Spacers (9)

EZ176
Installation

order of removal. FMA20 Circuit Board
FMB20 Circuit Board for Extension EZ194
EZ1470
18.1.8 FMC20 Circuit Board Installation
Bracket Removal/Re- 3. Re-install the removed parts.
installation order of removal.
Removal 18.1.10 FMB20 Circuit Board

Replacement
1. Open the control circuit board bracket
Removal
1. Remove the circuit board bracket (see
18
circuit board bracket.
subsection 18.1.8).
18.1.7
2. Release the locking tab and remove 18.1.8
the FMB20 circuit board. 18.1.9
18.1.10
Locking Tab
18.1.11
Circuit Board Screws (4)

Bracket
EZ1900-1
Installation
FMB20 Circuit Board
Install the cover in the reverse order of
EZ183
removal.
18-5
18.1.12 FMC20 Circuit Board 18.1.13 DC Power Supply Unit 18.1.14 DC Power Supply Unit
Replacement Exhaust Fan (F595) Replacement
Replacement
Removal Removal
Removal
1. Remove: 1. Open the control circuit board bracket
1. Open the control circuit board bracket (see subsection 18.1.4).
• FMA20 circuit board (see (see subsection 18.1.4).
subsection 18.1.11). 2. Disconnect the fan connector, remove
• FMB20 circuit board (see 2. Disconnect the fan connector. the two screws and the left air duct.
3. Loosen the two screws and remove Fan Connector Screws (2)
2. Disconnect all connectors from the the fan bracket.
FMC20 circuit board.
Fan Connector Screws (2)
3. Remove the seven screws, four
hexagonal spacers and then the
FMC20 circuit board.
IMPORTANT:
Hold the circuit board to prevent it from
shifting while removing it. The parts on the
circuit board may damage if they interfere
with the mount spacers.
FMC20 Circuit Board
Left Air Duct

EZ1175
3. Open the seven clamps and

Fan Bracket disconnect the ten connectors.
EZ1360
Connectors (10) Clamps (7)
4. Remove the connector from the
bracket.
5. Remove the two screws and the fan

Hex. Spacers (4)
Screws (7) from the bracket.
EZ1898-1
Fan (F595)
Screws (2)
Installation
Install the parts in the reverse order of

removal.
18 IMPORTANT:
EZ1176
Hold the circuit board to prevent it from

4. Disconnect the connector (PWA1)
18.1.12 shifting while installing the screws. The
from the unit.
18.1.13 parts on the circuit board may damage if
18.1.14 they interfere with the mount spacers.
Connector
Arrow
EZ1361
Installation

order of removal.

points the outside. Connector (PWA1)
EZ1177
18-6
5. Remove the four screws and the DC 18.1.15 Printer Control Section Installation
power supply unit by shifting it to the Cooling Exhaust Fan
left side. Installation is essentially in the reverse
(F582, F583 and F584) order of removal.
Replacement
NOTE: Tighten the screws while pressing
Removal each louver to the left side as
shown.
(see subsection 18.1.4). Screws (6)
2. Disconnect the connectors (F582,

F583 and F584).

Toothed Washer the four screws.
Screws (4) DC Power Supply Unit
Fan Bracket Screws (4)
EZ1178
6. Remove the five screws and the two

brackets.
EZ188
7. Remove the two screws and the right

air duct.
18.1.16 PDC20 Circuit Board
Brackets (2) Replacement
Screws (5)
Removal
Connector Connector Connector
(F582) (F583) (F584) 1. Open the control circuit board bracket
4. Remove the six screws and the three 2. Disconnect all connectors from the
louvers. circuit board.
5. Remove the connector from the 3. Remove the nine screws and the
bracket. circuit board by pulling it up in parallel
Screws (2) Right Air Duct to the bracket.
6. Remove the fan from the bracket.
EZ1179
Screws (9)
Installation
Louver (3)
Install the unit in the reverse order of
removal. Screws (6)
18
18.1.15
18.1.16
PDC20 Circuit Board

EZ193
Installation
Fans (3) Connectors (3)
EZ186 Install the circuit board in the reverse
order of removal.
18-7
18.1.17 CTL20 Circuit Board

Replacement
NOTE: • Replace the CTL20 circuit board

as an assembly.
• Return the old CTL20 circuit
board replaced to the factory of
FUJIFILM.
Removal


circuit board.
3. Remove the eight screws and the

circuit board by pulling down it in
parallel to the bracket.
Screws (8)
CTL20 Circuit Board

EZ195
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: • After installation, make sure the

jumper plug (JP2) is ON (2 - 3
side).
18
18.1.17
EZ196
• Make sure the following jumper

plugs are installed as shown.
JP4: 1-2 pin side

JP5: 1-2 pin side
JP8: 2-3 pin side
JP20: 2-3 pin side
JP21: 1-2 pin side
After installation, perform the “Update” of

the “Software Installation-Update” (see
section 8.3).
18-8
19. PROCESSOR SECTION
Parts Location ................................................................................................ 19-2
19.1 Crossover Racks/Processing Racks ....................................................... 19-4

19.1.1 Crossover Rack Disassembly/Re-assembly ................................................. 19-4
19.1.2 Processing Rack Upper Guide Disassembly/Re-assembly .......................... 19-4
19.1.3 Processing Rack Roller Replacement .......................................................... 19-5
19.1.4 Processing Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Re-installation ................................. 19-6
19.1.5 Processing Rack Middle Guide Replacement .............................................. 19-7
19.1.6 Dryer Entrance Rack Disassembly/Re-assembly ......................................... 19-7
19.1.7 Dryer Entrance Rack Cover Detecting Interlock Switch
(D791) Replacement ............................................................................... 19-8
19.1.8 Processor Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D790) Replacement .............. 19-8
19.2 Processor Drive System .............................................................................. 19-9

19.2.1 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................................... 19-9
19.2.2 Processor Drive Motor Driver Circuit Board Replacement ........................... 19-9
19.2.3 Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Re-installation .............................. 19-9
19.2.4 Processor Drive Motor (M700) Replacement ............................................... 19-10
19.2.5 Drive Chain Replacement ............................................................................. 19-10
19.2.6 Processor Drive Gear Replacement ............................................................. 19-10
19.2.7 Processor Exhaust Fan 1 and 2 (F790 and F791) Replacement ................. 19-11
19.2.8 Dryer Entrance Rack Drive Gear Replacement ............................................ 19-11
19.2.9 Sprocket Bracket Assembly Replacement .................................................... 19-12
19
19-1
Parts Location
Dryer Entrance Rack

No. 1 Crossover Rack
No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 No.6
Processor Drive Motor (M700)

PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4
Processing Rack
P1 P2
Chain Tensioner
EZ1468
19
19-2
Parts Location
Roller and Guide Arrangement (LP1500SC)
A E A A E A C E D C E D C E D C E D
B E B B E B F F F F
E E
A
C E D C E D
Black Soft Roller ( 30)
F F Black Hard Roller ( 30) B

Black Hard Roller ( 20) C
White Soft Roller ( 20)
D
Black Hard Roller ( 20)
White Soft Roller ( 20)
Yellow Soft Roller ( 20) E
Brown Hard Roller ( 20) F
EZ236
Roller and Guide Arrangement (LP2000SC)
A E A A E A A E A A E A A E A A E A
B E B B E B C E D C E D C E D C E D
E E F F F F
19
B E B B E B
A
E E
Black Soft Roller (ø30)
C E D C E D Black Hard Roller (ø30) B

Black soft Roller (ø20)
F F
Black Soft Roller (ø20)
Black Soft Roller (ø20) C
Tranceparence Soft Roller (ø20)
Black Hard Roller (ø20)
Tranceparence Soft Roller (ø20) D
Yellow Soft Roller (ø20)
Brown Soft Roller (ø20) E
F
EZ1471
19-3
19.1 Crossover Racks/Processing Racks
19.1.1 Crossover Rack 5. Remove the two coil springs, four C- 19.1.2 Processing Rack Upper
Disassembly/Re- rings and bearings from the rear side Guide Disassembly/Re-
of the crossover rack.
assembly assembly
6. Remove the four rollers.
Disassembly Disassembly
Rollers (4)
1. Remove the crossover rack. 1. Remove the screw, washer, poly-
C-rings (4)
slider, two bearings, gear, pin,
2. Remove the silicon blade from the sprocket, pin, poly-slider and shaft in
No.1 crossover rack. this order.
Pin Sprocket Bearing
Silicon Blade
Poly-slider Pin
Gear
Bearing
Bearings (4)
Coil Springs (2) Shaft
EZ199
No.1 Crossover Rack Re-assembly

EZ1661
Re-assembly is essentially in the reverse
3. Remove the auto washing nozzles order of disassembly.
Poly-slider
from the both sides.
NOTE: • The auto washing nozzles of the Washer
No. 1 crossover rack have only Screw
one washing jet on the exit side EZ201
as shown.
• The joint tubes on the rear side 2. Remove the screw, the gear, poly-
nozzles are longer than those on slider and bearing.
the front side.
Screw Gear
No.1
Poly-slider
Bearing
Rear
Nozzles Exit
Auto Washing Nozzle Entry Side
Side
EZ197 No.2
4. Remove the two coil springs, four C-

Exit Side Entry Side
rings, gears and bearings from the
front side of the crossover rack.
Front Nozzles
19 Bearings (4) EZ200
19.1.1 Gears (4)

• The roller shafts of the No.2 and
19.1.2 No. 3 crossover racks are of
titanium and have 3 mm inside EZ202
diameter holes their both ends.

Take care not to interchange
them with the other shafts.
No. 2 and No. 3 Crossover Rack
C-rings (4)
Coil Springs (2)
EZ198
Titanium Roller Shaft

EZ208
19-4
3. Remove the two tapping screws and 6. Remove the four tapping screws and 3. Release the locking tabs and remove
the drive shaft bearing holder. the upper guide/handle from the rack. the three gears from the roller shafts.
Drive Shaft Bearing Holder Upper Guide/Handle Gears (3)
Tapping Screws (2)
EZ203 Tapping Screws (4) EZ210

EZ207
4. Remove the E-ring, poly-slider and 4. Remove the coil spring, from the front
bearing from the crossover rack drive Re-assembly side of the roller shafts.
shaft.
Re-assemble the processing rack in the
19.1.3 Processing Rack Roller

Replacement
Removal

the inlet and outlet side guides from Coil Spring
the rack.
Bearing E-ring EZ211
Poly-slider Guides
EZ204
the gear from the rear side of the
roller shaft.
5. Slightly withdraw the shaft and
remove the gear drive pin. Remove
Gear
the shaft, two gears, poly-sliders and
bearings.
Poly-slider
Gears (2) Bearings (2)
Gear Drive Pin
Shaft
Locking Tabs 19
EZ213
EZ212 19.1.3
6. Push the roller shafts from the rear
the front and rear guides.
side and remove the φ30 roller from
the front side.
Guide (2)
Gear
Roller
EZ205
Locking Tabs
EZ209
EZ1662
19-5
7. Remove the φ20 rollers through the PS1 to PS4: 19.1.4 Processing Rack Drive
φ30 roller hole. Remove the four C-rings from the rear Shaft Removal/Re-
side of the roller shafts.
Roller
installation
<PS1 to PS4>
Removal
C-rings (4)
the guide from the rear side of the
rack.
Rear Side Guide
EZ1663
8. Remove the four gears and two

covers with the coil spring and EZ216
bearings.
10. Remove the rollers from the front side EZ220
Gears (4) of the rack.
Cover (2) 2. Remove the screw and the crossover
Installation rack drive gear and bearing (see
subsection 19.1.2, steps 1 through 5).
order of removal. Drive Gear
NOTE: Install the shorter coil springs to

the inlet side of the lower turn
rollers and longer ones to the
outlet side. Wrong installation
results in paper jamming.
EZ214 Screw Bearing

EZ218
9. P1 and P2:
Remove the C-rings from the rear side 3. Remove the screw, washer, poly-
of the roller shafts. slider and bearing from the lower end
Inlet Outlet of the drive shaft.
<P1 and P2> Side Side
Shorter Coil Longer Coil

Springs (2) Springs (2)
19 EZ217
19.1.4
Bearing
C-rings (2)
Poly-slider
EZ215 Screw Washer
EZ219
19-6
4. P1 and P2: 3. Remove the screws, washers, poly- 19.1.6 Dryer Entrance Rack
Remove the two E-rings securing the sliders and the drive gears. Disassembly/Re-
middle bearings.
assembly
5. Shift the middle bearings and remove Drive Gears
the rack drive shaft from the lower Disassembly
end.
1. Remove the dryer entrance rack.
Bearings 2. Remove the two E-rings and the two

idler gears.
Rack Drive
E-ring Idler Gears E-ring
Shaft
Screws/Washers/Poly-sliders
EZ222
4. Remove the two screws and each

guide from the rack.
P1 and P2: E-rings
EZ221 Screws (2)
Re-installation
Re-install the shaft in the reverse order of EZ238
removal.
3. Remove the six E-rings and the six
gears.
19.1.5 Processing Rack Middle 4. Remove the three coil springs and six
Guide Replacement bearings.
Guide Coil Springs (3) Gears (6)

Removal
EZ223 E-rings (6)
1. Remove the rack drive shaft (see
subsection 19.1.4). Installation
2. Remove the inlet and outlet side Installation is essentially in the reverse
guides by releasing their locking tabs. order of removal.
Guides
NOTE: Align the lower grooves in the
guide with the pins on the rack
and turn the guide to the inlet side
to install it.
Lower Grooves (2)
Bearings (6)
Guide
EZ239
5. Withdraw the six roller shafts and

remove the rollers form the rack. 19
Roller Shafts (6) 19.1.5
19.1.6
Pins (2)
Locking Tabs
EZ213
EZ224
Rollers (6)
EZ240
Re-assembly
Re-assemble the dryer entrance rack in

the reverse order of removal.
19-7
19.1.7 Dryer Entrance Rack 4. Disconnect the connector (D791). 3. Remove the screw and the switch
Cover Detecting bracket from the cover.
5. Remove the spring and E-ring and the
Interlock Switch (D791) switch from the bracket. Screw
Replacement
Switch Bracket
E-ring
Removal
1. Remove:
• processor rear cover

• processor cover.
• dryer entrance rack cover.

switch cover. Switch Bracket Switch Cover
EZ1364
Screws (2)
Spring 4. Disconnect the connector (D790).
Connector (D791)
EZ264
5. Remove the spring and E-ring and the
switch from the bracket.
Installation
Bracket E-ring
Install the switch in the reverse order of Switch (D790)
removal.
19.1.8 Processor Cover

Switch Cover
Detecting Interlock
Switch (D790)
EZ263
Replacement
3. Remove the screw and the switch
bracket from the cover. Removal
Switch Bracket Screw 1. Remove: Spring Connector

EZ266
(see subsection 19.2.1). Installation
• processor cover.
2. Remove the two screws and the removal.
switch cover.
Screws (2)
19 Switch Cover
EZ1362
19.1.7
19.1.8
Switch Cover
EZ1363
19-8
19.2 Processor Drive System
19.2.1 Processor Rear Cover 3. Remove the harness from the clamp 19.2.3 Processor Drive Motor
Removal/Re-installation and disconnect the two connectors Bracket Removal/Re-
from the motor driver circuit board.
installation
Removal 4. Remove the two screws and the driver
circuit board bracket. Removal
and the built-in circuit breaker and the Driver Circuit Board Bracket 1. Remove:
main power supply OFF. Clamp
2. Loosen the five screws and remove (see subsection 19.2.1).
the processor rear cover. • motor shield cover
Processor Rear Cover
2. Disengage the drive chain from the
chain tensioner.
Drive Chain
Screws (2) Connectors (2)

EZ226
5. Remove the three screws and the

Screws (5) driver circuit board from the bracket.
EZ800
Driver Circuit Board
Re-installation
Chain Tensioner
Re-install the cover in the reverse order of EZ227
removal.
3. Disconnect the connector (PWP).
19.2.2 Processor Drive Motor 4. Remove the motor bracket by

loosening the two screws and by
Driver Circuit Board removing the four screws.
Replacement
Connector (PWP) Screws (2)(Loosen)
Removal Screws (3)
Bracket
1. Remove the processor rear cover EZ1065
Installation
motor shield cover. Install the driver circuit board in the
NOTE: Make sure the DIP switch is set as

shown. 19
LP1500SC LP2000SC 19.2.1
Screws (4)(Remove) Motor Bracket
19.2.2
EZ228
19.2.3
Re-installation
DIP Switch Re-install the motor bracket in the reverse

order of removal.
Motor Shield Cover Screws (2)
EZ1365
Motor Driver Circuit Board

EZ1472
19-9
19.2.4 Processor Drive Motor 19.2.5 Drive Chain 19.2.6 Processor Drive Gear
(M700) Replacement Replacement Replacement
Removal 1. Remove the processor drive motor Removal

1. Remove the processor drive motor 1. Remove the processor drive motor
bracket (see subsection 19.2.3). 2. Remove the chain clip and master link bracket (see subsection 19.2 3).
from the drive chain.
2. Loosen the two hex. socket head set 2. Remove the two screws and the gear
screws and remove the gear from the Chain Clip Master Link bracket.
motor shaft.
Gear
Screws (2)
EZ231
Gear Bracket
Hex. Socket
3. Connect a new chain to the end of the EZ233
Head Set
Screws (2)
old chain by using the master link and
clip. Pull the old chain as a guide to 3. Remove the E-ring securing the gear
LOCK Flat Surfaces route the new chain. shaft.
EZ229
4. Withdraw the gear shaft and remove
3. Disconnect the motor connector from the gear, two collars and bearings.
the driver circuit board.
E-ring
Motor (M700) Screws (4)
Old Chain New Chain

EZ232
EZ234
4. Remove the clip, master link and old
chain. Connect the ends of the new E-ring Collar
chain with the master link and clip.
Bearing
NOTE: Face the closed end of the

19 Motor Connector master link clip to the rotating
EZ230 direction.
19.2.4
19.2.5 Installation 5. Re-install the removed parts in the
19.2.6
order of removal.
Gear
NOTE: • Apply thread locking agent to
the hex. socket head setscrews. Bearing
Gear Shaft Collar
Thread Locking Agent:
LOCTITE 425 or equivalent EZ1066
• Align the hex. socket head set
screws with the flat surfaces on Installation
the motor shaft.
• Flush the end surface of the Install the drive gear in the reverse order
gear with the end of the motor of removal.
shaft.
19-10
19.2.7 Processor Exhaust Fan 19.2.8 Dryer Entrance Rack 5. Remove the E-ring, bearing and rack
1 and 2 (F790 and F791) Drive Gear Replacement drive gear shaft from the bracket.
Replacement Bearing Rack Drive Gear Shaft
Removal
Removal
1. Remove:
1. Remove the processor rear cover
(see subsection 19.2.1). • dryer bottom plate
2. Remove the fan harness from the two • processor drive motor bracket
clamps. (see subsection 19.2.3).
3. Disconnect the connectors (F790 and 2. Remove the two screws and the
F791). sprocket shaft.
4. Remove the fans and guards by E-ring

removing the four screws. EZ362
Guards (2) Screws (2) 6. Remove the two E-rings, two gears
Fans (2)
and bearings from the bracket.
Gear E-ring
Clamps (2)
Screws (2)
Sprocket Shaft
EZ359
Gear
3. Remove the gear bracket by removing
the four screws.
EZ267
Installation

order of removal.
E-ring Bearings (2)
NOTE: • Install the spacer between the EZ363
left fan (F791) and the bracket.
• Install the fans so that their 7. Remove the E-ring and the idler gear
arrow marks point the outside. from the bracket.
• Position the harness outlets of
the fans to the right side lower
as shown. Screws (4) Gear Bracket
Spacer EZ360
4. Remove the E-ring, two bearings and 19

sprocket from the shaft.
19.2.7
E-ring 19.2.8
Bearings (2)
Sprocket
E-ring Idler Gear
Shaft EZ364
Harness Outlet
Installation
Arrow Mark
EZ268 Install the gears in the reverse order of
removal.
E-ring
EZ361
19-11
19.2.9 Sprocket Bracket 5. Remove the chain clip and master link 10. Remove the two screws and then
Assembly Replacement to disconnect the chain. remove the F792 fan/guard.
NOTE: Be careful not to fall the chain 11. Open the 11 harness clamps.
Removal into the inside of the machine.
12. Disconnect the CTP1 and CTP5
1. Remove: Master Link connectors from the CTP20 circuit
board.
• Upper and lower paper magazines
• Processor rear cover
13. Disconnect the PAC5 and PAC24
connectors from the PAC20 circuit
• Processor control section cover
board.
F792 Fan/Guard
2. Turn the drive chain by hand until the PAC24
chain master link appears at the Screws (2) Clamps (11)
printer side as shown.
Chain Clip
EZ2250
6. Engage the lower end of the chain to

the idler sprocket to prevent it from
falling into the inside of the machine.
Chain Master Link Chain Lower End

PAC5 CTP1 CTP5
EZ2247 EZ253
3. Loosen the chain tensioner and 14. Remove the six hex. socket heard
disengage the chain from the bolts from the printer side.
tensioner sprocket.
Hex. Socket Head Bolts (6)
Chain
Idler Sprocket
EZ2251
7. Remove the screw to disconnect the

grounding wire from the frame.
8. Open the six harness clamps.
9. Disconnect the PAC6, PAC8 and

19 Chain Tensioner
PAC9 connectors from the PAC20
EZ2248
circuit board.
19.2.9
4. Disengage the chain from the idler EZ2254
sprocket. PAC8
PAC9 PAC6
Chain
Idler Sprocket Clamps (6) Screw

Grounding Wire
EZ2249
EZ2252
19-12
15. Slowly separate the printer from the Installation

processor until the sprocket bracket
can be removed by using the Installation is essentially in the reverse
screwdriver. Two or three persons order of removal.
may be required for this operation.
NOTE: Combine the printer with the
NOTE: • Take care not to damage the processor gently while pulling the
harnesses in the processor harnesses into the processor and
when separating. aligning the hole in the printer wall
• Place a block with with the locating pin on the
approximately 10cm height processor.
(such as a paper-roll core,
etc.) under the printer to Processor
prevent it from falling over. Printer
Sprocket Bracket
Processor Printer
Pin on Processor Hole in Printer Wall

EZ2257
Block (Approximately 10cm Height)

EZ2255
16. Remove the four screws and then

remove the sprocket bracket
assembly.
Sprocket Bracket Assembly
19
Screws (4) 19.2.9
EZ2256
19-13
20. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM
Parts Location .................................................................................................. 20-2
20.1 Sub-tanks .......................................................................................................... 20-4

20.1.1 Input Check of Processing Solution Level Sensor (FS700 to FS705) ............ 20-4
20.1.2 Processing Solution Level Sensor (FS700 to FS705) Replacement .............. 20-4
20.1.3 Processing Solution Temperature Sensor (TS700 to TS703) Replacement ... 20-4
20.2 Processing Solution Heater/Circulation Pump Section ........................ 20-5

20.2.1 Processor Front Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................................. 20-5
20.2.2 Input Check of Processing Solution Heater Safety Thermostat
(D710 to D713) .......................................................................................... 20-5
20.2.3 Hose Connection ............................................................................................ 20-5
20.2.4 Heater Cooling Fan (F710 to F713) Replacement .......................................... 20-5
20.2.5 Processing Solution Heater Safety Thermostat
(D710 to D713) Replacement .................................................................... 20-6
20.2.6 Processing Solution Heater (H710 to H713) Replacement ............................ 20-6
20.2.7 Circulation Pump (PU710 to PU715) Replacement ........................................ 20-7
20.3 Waste Solution System ................................................................................. 20-8

20.3.1 Waste Solution Hose Replacement ................................................................ 20-8
20.3.2 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS749) Replacement ...................................... 20-8
20.3.3 Waste Solution Tank Replacement ................................................................. 20-8
20
20-1
Parts Location
LP1500SC
Overflow Hoses
Processing Tanks

(TS700 to TS703) P1
P2
P1 to PS4 Processing PS1
Solution Level Sensors PS2
(FS700 to FS705)
PS3
Sub-tanks
Solution Heaters
(H710 to H713)
P1 to PS4 Circulation Pumps

(PU710 to PU715) Waste Solution
Level Sensor
(FS749)
Waste Solution Tank
P1
Waste Solution Hose
20 Drain Valves P2
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
EZ241
20-2
Parts Location
LP2000SC
Processing Tanks
Overflow Hoses
(TS700 to TS703)
P1 to PS4 Processing P1
Solution Level Sensors P2
(FS700 to FS705) PS1
PS2
PS3
Sub-tanks
Solution Heaters
(H710 to H713)
Waste Solution
P1 to PS4 Circulation Pumps Level Sensor
(PU710 to PU715) (FS749)
Waste Solution Tank
20
P1
P2
PS1 Waste Solution Hose
PS2
PS3
PS4
Drain Valves
EZ1465
20-3
20.1 Sub-tanks
20.1.1 Input Check of 20.1.2 Processing Solution 20.1.3 Processing Solution

Processing Solution Level Sensor (FS700 to Temperature Sensor
Level Sensor (FS700 to FS705) Replacement (TS700 to TS703)
FS705) Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Open the menu 46A “Processor I/O 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY,
Check” screen (see subsection 9.7.1). and built-in circuit breaker and the 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY,
main power supply OFF. and built-in circuit breaker and the
2. Remove the sub-tank cover. main power supply OFF.
2. Remove:
3. Remove the tapping screw and the 2. Remove:
level sensor. • sub-tank cover.
• processor front cover (see • sub-tank cover.
subsection 20.2.1). • processor front cover (see
subsection 20.2.1).
3. Remove the harness duct cover and
disconnect the connector (FS700 to 3. Remove the harness duct cover and
FS705). disconnect the connector (TS700 to
TS703).
Connector (TS700 to TS703)

Connector
(FS700 to FS705)
Tapping Screw
Level Sensor (FS700 to FS705)
EZ242
4. Immerse the tip of the sensor in water

and move it up and down. The sensor
is normal if it matches the screen
display. Harness Duct Cover
Harness Duct Cover
EZ244
EZ245
Sensor 4. Remove the tapping screw and the

sensor. 4. Remove the tapping screw and the
sensor.
Sensor (TS700 to TS703)

Tapping Screw
Water
EZ243
Tapping Screw
20 5. Re-install the level sensor and sub- Level Sensor (FS700 to FS705)
tank cover. EZ242 EZ246
20.1.1
20.1.2 Installation
Installation
20.1.3
Install the sensor in the reverse order of Install the sensor in the reverse order of
removal. removal.
20-4
20.2 Processing Solution Heater/Circulation Pump Section
20.2.1 Processor Front Cover 4. Remove the harness duct cover and 3. Install each hose clamp with its inside
Removal/Re-installation disconnect the safety thermostat edge towards the end of the
connector. connector as shown.
Removal Connector (D710 to D713)
Connector
and built-in circuit breaker and the
2. Loosen the four screws and remove

the processor front cover.
Screws (4)
Harness Duct Cover 5S074
EZ247
4. Check that the hose clamps are not
5. Check for continuity between the twisted when they are installed. Hold
connector terminals. each end of the clamp with a pair of
pliers and squeeze the ends together
NOTE: There is no continuity if the securely.
safety thermostat is turned
OFF.
Processor Front Cover

EZ785
Re-installation

removal. Hose Clamp
0680
5. After operating the machine for 30

20.2.2 Input Check of
minutes, check that no solution
Processing Solution Connector leaking from the hose connections.
Heater Safety EZ248
Thermostat (D710 to
D713) 6. Determine the cause of heater 20.2.4 Heater Cooling Fan
overheat.
(F710 to F713)
1. Open the menu 46A “Processor I/O
7. Re-install the removed parts. Replacement
Check” screen (see subsection 9.7.1).
2. Remove the processor front cover Removal

(see subsection 20.2.1). 20.2.3 Hose Connection 1. Remove the processor front cover
3. On the I/O check screen, find the (see subsection 20.2.1).
safety thermostat with OFF. 1. Connect the hoses securely so that
they extend as far as the base of the 2. Remove the harness duct cover and
Safety Thermostat (D710 to D713) connection openings. disconnect the fan connector (F710 to 20
F713).
2. Inspect the hose clamps, and replace 20.2.1
them if the docking portion is Fan Connector (F710 to F713)
20.2.2
damaged.
20.2.3
Docking 20.2.4
EZ249
Harness Duct Cover

Hose Clamp EZ250
0681
20-5
3. Remove the two screws and the fan 20.2.5 Processing Solution 20.2.6 Processing Solution
and guard. Heater Safety Heater (H710 to H713)
Fan (F710) Fan (F712) Thermostat (D710 to Replacement
Guard Fan (F711) Fan (F713) D713) Replacement
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the heater cooling fan (see
1. Remove the heater cooling fan (see subsection 20.2.4).
subsection 20.2.4).
2. Drain the processing solution from the
2. Remove the safety thermostat cover. tank that its heater is replaced.
3. Disconnect the two wires from the IMPORTANT:

safety thermostat. Drain the solution into a clean
container and return it into the tank
4. Remove the two screws and the immediately after replacing the heater.
Screws (2) safety thermostat from the heater.
EZ251 3. Remove the harness duct cover and
disconnect the connector (H710 to
Installation H713).
Safety
Installation is essentially in the reverse Thermostat
order of removal.

mark points the heater. Connector
(H710 to H713)
Fan Guard
Cover
Screws (2)
Wires (2)
EZ254
Heater Side
Harness
Duct Cover
Installation
EZ255
Install the safety thermostat in the reverse
order of removal. 4. Remove the two screws securing the
Screws (2) heater.
EZ252
safety thermostat from the heater.
6. Loose the two hose clamps and

disconnect the two hoses from the
heater.
Heater Mounting Hose Clamps (2)
Screws (2)
20
20.2.5
20.2.6
Safety
Thermostat
Screws (2) Heater (H710 to H713)
EZ256
20-6
Installation 5. Remove the two pump mounting

screws and the pump.
order of removal. P1 (PU710) PS1 (PU712)
P2 (PU711) PS3 (PU714)
NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see
subsection 20.2.3).
Hoses (2)
20.2.7 Circulation Pump
(PU710 to PU715)
Replacement
PS2 (PU713)
Removal PS4 (PU715)
1. Remove the replenishing section

cover (see subsection 21.1.1). Clamps (2) Screws (2)
Pump (PU710 to PU715)

2. Drain the processing solution from the
tank that its pump is replaced. EZ261
IMPORTANT: Installation
Drain the solution into a clean
container and return it into the tank Installation is essentially in the reverse
immediately after replacing the heater. order of removal.
3. Remove the harness duct cover and NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see
disconnect the connector (PU710 to subsection 20.2.3).
PU715).
Connector (PU710 to PU715)
Harness Duct Cover

EZ260
4. Loosen the two hose clamps and

disconnect the hoses from the pump.
20
20.2.7
20-7
20.3 Waste Solution System
20.3.1 Waste Solution Hose 20.3.3 Waste Solution Tank 4. Remove the two screws from the sub-
Replacement Replacement tank side and the waste solution tank
bracket.
Removal Removal
1. Loosen the clamp and disconnect the 1. Remove:

hose from the waste solution valve.
• processor front cover
Clamp Waste Solution Valve (see subsection 20.2.1).
• waste solution level sensor
• waste solution hose
Screws (2) Waste Solution Tank Bracket
2. Loosen the two clamps and
EZ278
disconnect the P1 and P2 overflow
hoses from the waste solution tank.
disconnect the waste solution and
P2 Overflow Hose
Waste Solution Hose overflow hoses from the tank.
P1 Overflow Hose
EZ2029 Clamp
Waste Solution Tank
Installation

order of removal.
Clamp
NOTE: Connect the hose securely (see
subsection 20.2.3).
20.3.2 Waste Solution Level Clamps (2) Overflow Hose

Sensor (FS749) EZ277
Waste Solution Tank
Replacement Bracket
Waste Solution Hose
Removal waste solution tank bracket. EZ279
1. Remove the processor rear cover (see Screws (2) Installation

subsection 19.2.1).
2. Remove the harness duct cover and order of removal.
disconnect the sensor connector.
3. Remove the screw and the waste subsection 20.2.3).
solution level sensor.
Waste Solution
Harness Duct Level Sensor
Cover Screw (FS749)
20
Waste Solution Tank Bracket
20.3.1 EZ276
20.3.2
20.3.3
Connector
EZ271
Installation

removal.
20-8
21. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM
Parts Location ................................................................................................ 21-2
21.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section .................................................................. 21-3

21.1.1 Replenishing Section Cover Removal/Re-installation .................................. 21-3
21.1.2 Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D744) Replacement ............. 21-3
21.1.3 Hose Connection .......................................................................................... 21-3
21.1.4 Replenisher Cartridge Setting Section Upper/Lower Sensor (D742/D743)
Replacement ........................................................................................... 21-4
21.1.5 Replenisher Cartridge Section Removal/Re-installation ............................... 21-4
21.1.6 Replenisher Cartridge Setting Sensor (D741) Replacement ........................ 21-5
21.1.7 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Motor (M740) Replacement ....................... 21-5
21.1.8 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement ..................................... 21-5
21.1.9 Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing ............................................ 21-6
21.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System ........................................ 21-7

21.2.1 Replenisher Tank Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................... 21-7
21.2.2 Replenisher Filter Inspection/Replacement .................................................. 21-7
21.2.3 Replenisher Pump (PU741 to PU744) Replacement .................................... 21-7
21.2.4 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement ........................................................ 21-8
21.2.5 Replenisher Upper/Lower Level Sensor
(FS740 to FS743/FS745 to FS748)Replacement .................................... 21-8
21.2.6 P2-RA and P2-RB Tank Replacement .......................................................... 21-8
21.2.7 PS-R Tank Replacement .............................................................................. 21-9
21.2.8 P1-R Tank Replacement ............................................................................... 21-10
21.3 Auto Washing and P1-R Stirring System ............................................... 21-11

21.3.1 Auto Washing Pump (PU740) Replacement ................................................. 21-11
21.3.2 P1 to PS4 Front Side Rack Auto Washing Valve
(S720/S722/S724/S726) Replacement ................................................... 21-11
21.3.3 P1 to PS4 Rear Side Rack Auto Washing Valve
(S721/S723/S725/S727) Replacement ................................................... 21-12
21.3.4 P1-R, P2-RA and P2-RB Cartridge Washing Valve
(S740 to S742)/P1-R Stirring Valve (S743) Replacement ....................... 21-12
21.3.5 P1-R Stirring One-way Valve Replacement .................................................. 21-12
21
21-1
Parts Location
Replenishment Nozzles
(P1-R/P2-RA/P2-RB/PS-R) P1 to PS4 Rear Side Rack
Auto Washing Valves
(S721/S723/S725/S727)
P1-R, P2-RA and P2-RB

Cartridge Washing Valves
P1 to PS4 Front Side Rack
(S740 to A742)
Auto Washing Valves
P1-R Stirring Valves
(S720/S722/S724/S726)
(S743)
Auto Washing Pump (PU740)
P1-R Stirring
One-way Valve
P1-R to PS-R
Upper Level
Sensors
Replenisher Pumps (FS740 to FS743)
(PU741 to PU744)
P1-R to PS-R
Lower Level
Sensors
Replenisher Filters (FS745 to FS748)
21
P2-RA Replenisher Tank
P1-R
P2-RA
P2-RB
P2-RB Replenisher Tank PS-R
Drain Valves
PS-R Replenisher Tank P1-R Replenisher Tank
EZ327
21-2
21.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section
21.1.1 Replenishing Section 21.1.2 Replenisher Door 21.1.3 Hose Connection

Cover Removal/Re- Detecting Interlock
installation Switch (D744) 1. Connect the hoses securely so that
Replacement they extend as far as the base of the
Removal connection openings.
Removal 2. Inspect the hose clamps, and replace
1. Remove the processor front cover
(see subsection 20.2.1). them if the docking portion is
1. Remove the replenishing section damaged.
2. Remove the six screws securing the Docking Portion
replenishing section cover, then 2. Remove the connector cover by
remove the cover. removing the screw.
Screws (6)
3. Remove the switch bracket by
loosening the one screw and
removing the one screw.
Screw Screw (Loosen)
Hose Clamp
0681
3. Install the hose clamp so that the

edge along the inside surface faces
Replenishing Section Cover the end of the connection as shown.
EZ786
Screw (Remove) Switch Bracket Connector

Re-installation
Connector Cover
Re-install the cover in the reverse order of EZ325
removal.
switch.
5. Remove the spring, E-ring and the

switch from the bracket.
E-ring
Switch Connector
5S074
4. Check that the hose clamps are not

twisted when they are installed. Hold
each end of the clamp with a pair of
pliers and squeeze the ends together
securely.
Spring
EZ326
21
Installation 21.1.1
21.1.2
Install the switch in the reverse order of 21.1.3
removal. Hose Clamp
0680
5. After operating the machine for 30

minutes, check that no replenisher is
leaking from the hose connections.
21-3
21.1.4 Replenisher Cartridge 21.1.5 Replenisher Cartridge 5. Loosen the lower three screws and
Setting Section Upper/ Section Removal/Re- remove the upper two screws, then
remove the replenisher cartridge
Lower Sensor (D742/ installation section.
D743) Replacement
Removal Screws (2) (Remove)
Removal Section
1. Remove:
1. Remove:
• replenishing section cover
• replenishing section cover (see subsection 21.1.1).
(see subsection 21.1.1). • replenisher tank section cover
• replenisher tank section cover (see subsection 21.2.1).
2. Remove the sensor bracket by removing the two screws.
Screws (3) (Loosen)

EZ294
6. Loosen the hose clamp and

disconnect the overflow hose.
Overflow Hose
Sensor Bracket Screws (2)
Sensor Bracket Screws (2) EZ290
EZ290
3. Disconnect the connectors (D741 and
3. Disconnect the connector from the M740).
sensor.

Sensor (D742)
Hose Clamp
EZ295
Re-installation

order of removal.
NOTE: • Connect the hose securely (see

subsection 21.1.3).
Sensor (D743) Connector • Install the replenisher cartridge
Connector (M740) Connector (D741) setting section with it is in upper
EZ291
position.
EZ292
Installation
21 Install the sensor in the reverse order of
4. Remove the six screws securing the
opening nozzle section.
removal.
21.1.4
21.1.5
Screws (6) Opening Nozzle Section

EZ293
21-4
21.1.6 Replenisher Cartridge 21.1.7 Replenisher Cartridge 21.1.8 Replenisher Cartridge

Setting Sensor (D741) Opening Motor (M740) Opening Gear
Replacement Replacement Replacement
Removal Removal Removal
1. Remove the replenisher cartridge 1. Remove the replenisher cartridge 1. Remove the replenisher cartridge
section (see subsection 21.1.5). section (see subsection 21.1.5). section (see subsection 21.1.5).
2. Remove the sensor bracket by 2. Remove the motor bracket by 2. Remove the two E-rings and the
removing the screw. removing the four screws. cartridge bracket.
Motor Bracket E-rings (2)

Sensor Bracket Screws (4)
Screw
EZ296
Cartridge Bracket
3. Disconnect the connector from the EZ298 EZ300
sensor.
3. Remove the motor by removing the 3. Remove the E-ring and the gear.
4. Release the locking tabs and remove two screws.
the sensor from the bracket. Gear E-ring
4. Loosen the hex. socket head set
Sensor (D741) screw and remove the gear from the
motor shaft.
Gear Screws (2)
EZ301
Installation
Connector Install the gear in the reverse order of
EZ297 removal.
Hex. Socket Head Motor (M740)
Set Screw
Installation
EZ299

Installation
removal.
removal. 21
21.1.6
21.1.7
21.1.8
21-5
21.1.9 Replenisher Box Door

Lock Manual Releasing
1. Move the sorter to its storage position.
2. Remove the screw securing left of the

replenishment section top cover.
3. Insert the rod with 3mm outside

diameter or less through the screw
hole to release the lock and open the
door.
Screw
Red(3mm O.D. or less)
Replenisher Box Door

EZ1653
4. Re-tighten the screw.
5. Move the sorter in place.
21
21.1.9
21-6
21.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System
21.2.1 Replenisher Tank Installation 4. Shut off the inlet and outlet hoses with
Section Cover Removal/ the two pinch cocks, loosen the clamp
Install the filter in the reverse order of and disconnect the hoses.
Re-installation removal.
Outlet Hose
Removal NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see Pinch Cocks (2)
subsection 21.1.3).
21.2.3 Replenisher Pump
2. Open the dryer rack. (PU741 to PU744)
Replacement
the replenisher tank section cover.
Removal
Replenisher Tank Section Cover
Clamp Inlet Hose
2. Remove the two screws securing the EZ283
replenisher pump bracket and pull out

the bracket. 5. Remove the screw securing the
grounding wire.
6. P1-R, P2-RA and P2-RB: Remove the

pump by removing the screw.
PS-R: Remove the pump by removing
the two screws.
Pump
Screws (4)
EZ788
Re-installation
Screws (2) Replenisher Pump Bracket
EZ257
removal.

disconnect the pump connectors
21.2.2 Replenisher Filter (PU741 to PU744). Screw(s) Screw
Inspection/Replacement (2: PS-R Only) Grounding Wire
Pump Connectors (PU741 to PU744)
EZ284
Removal
Installation
cover (see subsection 21.1.1). Installation is essentially in the reverse
order of removal.
2. Shut off the filter inlet and outlet hoses
with the pinch cocks. NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see
subsection 21.1.3).
3. Loosen the two hose clamps and
remove the filter from the hoses.
Outlet Hose Inlet Hose Harness Duct Cover 21

Clamps (2) EZ282
21.2.1
21.2.2
21.2.3
Pinch P2-RA Filter PS-R Filter

Cocks (2)
P1-R Filter P2-RB Filter
EZ280
21-7
21.2.4 Replenisher Pump Valve NOTE: • Apply water between the valve 3. Shut off the upper and lower hoses of
Replacement body and the diaphragm before the sensor case with the pinch cocks.
installing the valves.
Removal Water sensor.
Sensor
Screws (2)
2. Remove the two screws and pull out Valve Body
Diaphragm
EZ2290
• Use a new valve identified by the Pinch Cocks (2)

same color label as the label on
EZ313
the pump body.
Screws (2) Replenisher Pump Bracket Installation

Label Color Pump
EZ257 No label P1-R
Yellow P2-RA and P2-RB
removal.
3. Shut off the replenisher pump inlet White PS-R
and outlet hoses with the pinch cocks
and loosen the two joint nuts. • Note the installation direction of
the valve and tighten the joint 21.2.6 P2-RA and P2-RB Tank
Outlet Hose Pinch Cocks (2) nut securely. Replacement
• After installation, perform
“Replenisher Pump Output
Removal
Measurement/Setup” on menu
461.
1. Remove:
• replenishing section cover (see

21.2.5 Replenisher Upper/ subsection 21.1.1).
Lower Level Sensor • replenisher tank section cover (see
subsection 21.2.1).
(FS740 to FS743/FS745
to FS748) Replacement 2. Drain P2-RA or P2-RB replenisher to
Joint Nuts (2) Inlet Hose be replaced.
Removal
EZ285
3. Remove the two screws and the tank
1. Remove the replenisher tank section holding bracket.
4. Remove the valves. cover (see subsection 21.2.1).
Tank Holding Bracket Screws (2)
Label 2. Remove the harness duct cover and
Valve
disconnect the sensor connector.
Label
21 Valve
21.2.4
21.2.5
21.2.6
EZ286
Sensor Connector Harness Duct Cover
Installation EZ312
EZ316
order of removal.
21-8
4. Loosen the two clamps and 21.2.7 PS-R Tank Replacement 5. Loosen the two screws and remove
disconnect the two hoses from the the cartridge washing valve bracket.
bottom of the tank. Removal
1. Remove: inlet hose from the washing valve
bracket.
• replenisher tank section cover
(see subsection 21.2.1). Inlet Hose

disconnect the four connectors (S740
to S743).
Harness Duct Cover Screws (2)

Clamps (2) Hoses (2)
Valve Bracket
EZ317
Clamp
5. Loosen the two clamps, disconnect
EZ322
the overflow and inlet hoses and
remove the tank.
7. Remove the tank holding bracket by
Inlet Hose
Overflow Hose
disconnect the two breather hoses
and level from the tank.
Connectors (S740 to S743)
EZ306 Tank Holding Bracket Screws (2)
3. Remove the five screws securing the

replenisher level sensor bracket.

breather hose from the tank.
Clamps (2)
Breather Hose
EZ318
Installation Clamps (2) Breather Hoses (2)

EZ320
order of removal.
9. Loosen the two clamps, disconnect
the two hoses from the bottom of the
tank and remove the tank.
subsection 21.1.3).
Clamp PS-R Replenisher Tank
Replenisher Level
Screws (5) Sensor Bracket
EZ319
Clamps (2)
21
21.2.7
Hoses (2)
EZ321
Installation

order of removal.

subsection 21.1.3).
21-9
21.2.8 P1-R Tank Replacement 5. Loosen the two screws and remove
the cartridge washing valve bracket.
Removal
1. Remove: inlet hose from the washing valve
bracket.
• replenisher tank section cover
Inlet Hose

disconnect the four connectors (S740
to S743).
Harness Duct Cover Screws (2)

Valve Bracket
Clamp
EZ322
7. Remove the tank holding bracket by

8. Loosen the three clamps and

disconnect the three breather hoses
from the tank.
EZ306 Screws (2) Tank Holding Bracket


breather hose from the tank.
Breather Hose
Clamps (3) Level Hoses (3)

EZ323
9. Loosen the five clamps, disconnect

the five hoses from the side and
bottom of the tank and remove the
Clamp tank.
Replenisher Level
Screws (5) Sensor Bracket
EZ319
Hoses (5)
Clamps (5)
21
21.2.8
EZ324
Installation

order of removal.

subsection 21.1.3).
.
21-10
21.3 Auto Washing and P1-R Stirring System
21.3.1 Auto Washing Pump 6. Remove the two screws and the auto 3. Remove the two screws and the auto
(PU740) Replacement washing pump. washing valve unit.
Auto Washing Valve Unit

Removal

2. Remove the two screws and pull out

Screws (2)
Auto Washing Pump (PU740)

EZ289
Screws (2)
EZ304
Installation
4. Loosen the five clamps and
Installation is essentially in the reverse disconnect the hoses from the valve
order of removal. unit.
NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see Hoses (5)

Screws (2) Replenisher Pump Bracket subsection 21.1.3).
EZ257
3. Remove the harness duct cover and 21.3.2 P1 to PS4 Front Side
disconnect the pump connector Rack Auto Washing
(PU740). Valve (S720/S722/S724/
Connector (PU740) S726) Replacement
Removal

Clamps (5)
EZ305

disconnect the four connectors (S720,
Installation
S722, S724 and S726).
Harness Duct Cover order of removal.

Harness Duct Cover subsection 21.1.3).
EZ287
4. Shut off the inlet and outlet hoses of

the auto washing pump with the pinch
cocks.

hose from the pump.
Connectors (S720, S722, S724 and S726)
Hose Hoses Pinch Cocks (3) EZ303
21
21.3.1
21.3.2
Clamp
EZ288
21-11
21.3 Auto Washing and P1-R Stirring System
21.3.3 P1 to PS4 Rear Side Installation 21.3.5 P1-R Stirring One-way

Rack Auto Washing Valve Replacement
Valve (S721/S723/S725/ order of removal.
S727) Replacement Removal
Removal 1. Remove the replenisher tank section
subsection 21.1.3).
1. Remove the processor rear cover
(see subsection 19.2.1). 2. Loosen the joint and joint nut and
21.3.4 P1-R, P2-RA and P2-RB remove the valve from the case.
2. Remove the harness duct cover and Cartridge Washing Valve
disconnect the four connectors (S721, (S740 to S742)/P1-R
Joint
S723, S725 and S727). Stirring Valve (S743)
Connectors (S721, S723, S725 and S727)
Replacement
Gasket
Removal
Joint
1. Remove the replenisher tank section Nut
Valve
2. Remove the harness duct cover and Valve
disconnect the four connectors (S740 Case
to S743).
EZ311
Harness Duct Cover
Installation
Harness Duct Cover
E Z308
Install the valve in the reverse order of
removal.
the auto washing valve bracket.

EZ306

the valve unit.
Screws (2) Auto Washing Valve 4. Loosen the five clamps and
Bracket disconnect the five hoses from the
EZ309
auto valve unit.
Hoses (5) Valve Unit

4. Loosen the five clamps and
disconnect the five hoses from the
auto washing valve unit.
5. Remove the two screws and the auto

washing valve unit from the bracket.
21 Auto Washing Valve Unit
21.3.3
21.3.4
21.3.5
Clamps (5) Screws (2)
EZ307
Installation
Hoses (5) Installation is essentially in the reverse

Clamps (5) Bracket order of removal.
Screws (2)
EZ310
subsection 21.1.3).
21-12
22. DRYER SECTION
Parts Location .................................................................................................. 22-2
22.1 Dryer Rack Section ......................................................................................... 22-3

22.1.1 Dryer Section Front Cover Removal/Re-installation ....................................... 22-3
22.1.2 Dryer Rack Cover Removal/Re-installation .................................................... 22-3
22.1.3 Dryer Section Temperature Sensor (TS760) Replacement ............................ 22-3
22.1.4 Dryer Rack Removal/Re-installation ............................................................... 22-3
22.1.5 Dryer Belt/Roller Replacement ....................................................................... 22-4
22.1.6 Dryer Section Front Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D781)
Replacement ............................................................................................. 22-5
22.1.7 Dryer Rack Section Duct Removal/Re-installation ......................................... 22-6
22.1.8 Dryer Rack Exit Nip Roller Replacement ........................................................ 22-6
22.1.9 Dryer Duct Wing Plate Removal/Re-installation ............................................. 22-6
22.2 Dryer Heater/Dryer Fan ................................................................................. 22-7

22.2.1 Dryer Side Cover Removal/Re-installation ..................................................... 22-7
22.2.2 Dryer Rear Cover Removal/Re-installation ..................................................... 22-7
22.2.3 Dryer Heater (H760)/Dryer Heater Safety Thermostat ................................... 22-7
22.2.4 Dryer Fan (F760) Replacement ...................................................................... 22-8
22.2.5 Dryer Fan Duct Removal/Re-installation ........................................................ 22-8
22.2.6 Dryer Section Bottom Plate Removal/Re-installation ..................................... 22-8
22
22-1
Parts Location
Dryer Duct Wing Plates
Dryer Rack
Dryer Heater (H760)
Dryer Fan (F760)
Air Filter Duct Dryer Air Filter
EZ1038
22
22-2
22.1 Dryer Rack Section
22.1.1 Dryer Section Front Re-installation 22.1.4 Dryer Rack Removal/Re-

Cover Removal/Re- installation
installation removal.
Removal
Removal
1. Remove the dryer rack cover (see
1. Move the sorter to its storage position. 22.1.3 Dryer Section subsection 22.1.2).
Temperature Sensor
2. Loosen the three screws and remove (TS760) Replacement 2. Release the lock and open the dryer
the dryer front cover. rack.
Removal Dryer Rack
1. Remove:
• replenisher tank section cover (see

subsection 21.2.1).
• dryer section front cover (see
Screws (3) subsection 22.1.1).
2. Disconnect the connector (TS760)

and open the clamp.
Connector (TS760)
Dryer Section Front Cover Lock

EZ789 EZ790
Re-installation 3. Remove the dryer rack.

removal. Clamp
22.1.2 Dryer Rack Cover EZ336
screw.
Removal
Sensor (TS760)
and built-in circuit breaker and the

(see subsection 22.1.1). Dryer Rack
EZ791
dryer section top cover. Re-installation
4. Remove the dryer rack cover by Re-install the dryer rack in the reverse
removing the four screws. order of removal.
Screws (2) (Loosen) Screw
EZ337
Installation
Install the sensor in the reverse roder of

22
removal.
22.1.1
22.1.2
22.1.3
22.1.4
Screws (4) Dryer Rack Cover

EZ787
22-3
22.1.5 Dryer Belt/Roller 5. Unhook the spring and remove the 9. Remove the E-ring (E6) and spacer.
Replacement lock lever shaft.
6. Remove the coil spring, E-ring (E6),

Removal bearing and then the entrance
opposite roller.
1. Remove the dryer rack Gear
Entrance Opposite Roller
2. Unhook the two auto tension springs Lock Lever Shaft

and remove the tension roller. Bearing
Tension Roller Spacer
E-ring (E6)
E-ring (E5)
EZ1981
10. Withdraw the upper roller shaft and

E-ring (E6) remove the upper belt roller and plain
Spring bearing.
Coil Spring 11. Remove the dryer belt.

EZ1979
NOTE: Withdraw the roller shaft while
aligning its pin with the
Auto Tension Springs (2) 7. Withdraw the lower roller shaft and
grooves in the roller and the
remove the lower belt roller and plain
EZ1976 rack.
bearing.
3. Remove the E-ring (E5) and then the Dryer Belt
NOTE: Withdraw the roller shaft while
lock lever stop.
aligning its pin with the
grooves in the roller and the
Lock Lever Stop
rack.
Plain Bearing
Upper Belt Roller
Plain Bearing
Upper Roller Shaft
Pin Pin
EZ1982
Lower Roller Shaft

E-ring (E6)
12. Remove the double sems screw
Lower Belt Roller securing the front of the middle roller,
EZ1977
pan head screw, lock washer and
EZ1980
plain washer from the rear and then
4. Remove the two E-ring (E6), coil
the middle roller.
spring and ring collar. 8. Remove the E-ring (E5) and gear from
the upper roller shaft.
Double Sems Screw
Bearing Middle Roller
E-ring (E6)(2)
22
(Rear)
22.1.5
(Front)
Plain Washer
Lock Washer
Ring Collar Pan Head
Coil Spring
Screw
EZ1978
EZ1983
22-4
Installation • Make sure the rack side hooks 22.1.6 Dryer Section Front
of the auto tension springs face Cover Detecting
Installation is essentially in the reverse the same direction.
order of removal.
Interlock Switch (D781)
Rack Side Hooks
Replacement
NOTE: • Use the pan head screw, lock (Face Same Direction)
washer and plain washer to Removal
secure the rear of the middle
roller and the double sems 1. Remove the print exit section lower
Auto Tension
screw to the front. cover (see subsection 23.2.1).
Springs (2)
• Face the stepped edge surface
of the dryer belt to the inside. 2. Remove the switch bracket by
• Face the dot marks on the dryer removing the screw.
belt to the rear (gear side).
Screw
Dryer Belt
Stepped Edge
Surface EZ1986
• After installation, turn the dryer

belt one turn to align its stepped
edges with the shoulders of the
rollers. Switch Bracket
EZ415
Dot Marks (Rear)
EZ1984
switch.
• Face the flanges of the ring
4. Remove the spring and E-ring, then
collars to the outsides and install
remove the switch from the bracket.
the auto tension springs so that
their hooks face same direction. Switch (D781) E-ring
Tension Roller
EZ1987 Spring Connector

EZ416
Ring Collars (2)
Installation
Auto Tension Spring Hooks (2)
(Face Same Direction) Install the switch in the reverse order of
removal.
EZ1985
22
22.1.6
22-5
22.1.7 Dryer Rack Section Duct 3. Remove the E-ring, bearing and
Removal/Re-installation spring, then remove the nip roller.
Removal
1. Remove the dryer rack (see

subsection 22.1.4).
2. Remove the E-ring, then remove the

rack lock shaft.
3. Remove the duct by removing the ten Nip Roller

screws.
Spring
Screws (10) Duct Bearing
E-ring
EZ353
Installation
Install the roller in the reverse order of

removal.
22.1.9 Dryer Duct Wing Plate

E-ring Rack Lock Shaft
Removal
EZ351
1. Remove the dryer rack section duct

Re-installation (see subsection 22.1.7).
Re-install the duct in the reverse order of
2. Remove the upper two screws and
removal.
loosen the lower two screws, then
remove the wing plates.
22.1.8 Dryer Rack Exit Nip Screws (2) (Remove)

Roller Replacement
Removal
1. Remove the dryer rack section duct

2. Remove the E-ring, gear, bearing and

spring.
Wing Plates Screws (2) (Loosen)

EZ354
22
Spring Re-installation
22.1.7
Bearing
22.1.8 Re-install the wing plates in the reverse
Gear
22.1.9 E-ring order of removal.
EZ352
22-6
22.2 Dryer Heater/Dryer Fan
22.2.1 Dryer Side Cover 22.2.2 Dryer Rear Cover 3. Remove the dryer heater bracket by
Removal/Re-installation Removal/Re-installation removing the four screws.
Dryer Heater Bracket

Removal Removal
1. Remove the replenisher tank section 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY,
cover (see subsection 21.2.1). and the built-in circuit breaker and the
2. Open the dryer rack.
2. Loosen the six screws and remove
3. Remove the dryer side cover by the dryer rear cover.
loosening the three screws and
removing the one screw.
Dryer Rear
Screws (3) (Loosen) Cover
Screws (4)
EZ339
4. Remove the two screws and

disconnect the two wires, then remove
the safety thermostat.
Screws (2)
Wires (2)
Screws (6)
EZ794
Re-installation
Dryer Side Cover Re-install the cover in the reverse order of

Screw (Remove) removal.
EZ792
Re-installation Safety Thermostat (D760)

22.2.3 Dryer Heater (H760)/
EZ340
Re-install the cover in the reverse order of Dryer Heater Safety
removal. Thermostat Installation
Removal Install the heater in the reverse order of
removal.
1. Remove:
• dryer side cover (see subsection

22.2.1).
• dryer rear cover (see subsection
22.2.2).
2. Disconnect the connectors (D760 and

H760).
22
22.2.1
22.2.2
Connector (D760) 22.2.3
Connector (H760)
EZ338
22-7
22.2.4 Dryer Fan (F760) Installation 22.2.6 Dryer Section Bottom

Replacement Plate Removal/Re-
order of removal.
installation
Removal
NOTE: Align the hooks on the fan bracket Removal
1. Remove the replenisher tank section
with the square holes in the frame
cover (see subsection 21.2.1). 1. Remove:
as shown.
2. Remove the harness duct cover and • dryer fan duct (see subsection
disconnect the connector (F760). 22.2.5).
• processor drive motor bracket
Connector (F760)
2. Remove the dryer air filer.
3. Remove the dryer air filter duct by

Hooks (2)
4. Remove the dryer fan entry duct by

Dryer Fan
Dryer Fan Entry Duct
EZ349
Harness Duct Cover

EZ347 22.2.5 Dryer Fan Duct
3. Remove the dryer fan by removing the
four screws.
Removal
Dryer Fan (F760)
1. Remove:
• replenisher tank section cover Dryer Air Filter

Duct
22.2.2). EZ356
• dryer duct wing plates

(see subsection 22.1.9). 5. Disconnect the air breather hose of
the PS-R tank from the dryer section
2. Remove the screw securing the bottom plate.
grounding wire.
6. Remove the three screws securing the
Screws (4) 3. Remove the fan duct by removing the dryer section bottom plate.
two screws.
EZ348 Screws (3) Dryer Section
Bottom Plate
Fan Duct
4. Remove the capacitor by removing
the screw.

the four screws.
Fan Bracket
Screws (2)
22 PS-R Tank Air Breather Hose
EZ358
22.2.4
22.2.5
22.2.6 Screws (4) Screw Grounding Wire
EZ355
Capacitor Screw Re-installation

EZ350
Re-install the fan duct in the reverse order
of removal.
22-8
7. Remove the dryer entry rack section

cover by removing the two screws.
8. Remove the dryer section bottom

plate by removing the five screws.
Screws (2) Dryer Entry Rack

Section Cover
Screws (5)
Dryer Section
Bottom Plate
EZ357
Re-installation

order of removal.
NOTE: Apply silicon caulking compound

to the silicon gasket between the
tank and the joint of the bottom
plate.
22
22.2.6
22-9
23. PRINT EXIT SECTION/SORTER
Parts Location ................................................................................................ 23-3
23.1 Dryer Exit Unit ................................................................................................ 23-4

23.1.1 Dryer Exit Unit Removal/Re-installation ........................................................ 23-4
23.1.2 Dryer Section Exit Front-line, Middle-line and Rear-line Paper Sensor
(D771 to D773) Replacement .................................................................. 23-4
23.1.3 Feeding Path Switching Solenoid (S770) Replacement ............................... 23-4
23.1.4 Entry Feed Belt Replacement ....................................................................... 23-5
23.1.5 Entry Feed Belt Tension Adjustment ............................................................. 23-5
23.1.6 Large Size Side Feed Belt Replacement ...................................................... 23-5
23.1.7 Large Size Side Feed Belt Tension Adjustment ............................................ 23-5
23.1.8 Upper Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation ................................................. 23-5
23.1.9 Entry Roller Replacement ............................................................................. 23-6
23.1.10 Large Size Side Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation .................................. 23-7
23.1.11 Large Size Side Feed Roller Replacement ................................................... 23-7
23.1.12 High-speed Roller Replacement ................................................................... 23-8
23.2 Large Size Print Exit Unit ............................................................................ 23-9

23.2.1 Print Exit Lower Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................................... 23-9
23.2.2 Large Size Print Exit Cover Removal/Re-installation .................................... 23-9
23.2.3 Large Size Print Exit Unit Removal/Re-installation ....................................... 23-9
23.2.4 Large Size Exit Roller /Belt Replacement ..................................................... 23-9
23.2.5 Large Size Exit Gear Replacement .............................................................. 23-10
23.3 Dryer Section Drive Unit .............................................................................. 23-11

23.3.1 Dryer Section Top Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................................ 23-11
23.3.2 Dryer Section Drive Unit Removal/Re-installation ........................................ 23-11
23.3.3 Dryer Section Drive Motor (M770) /Gear Replacement ................................ 23-11
23.3.4 Dryer Section Drive Gear Replacement ....................................................... 23-12
23.4 Print Exit Unit .................................................................................................. 23-13

23.4.1 Print Exit Unit Removal/Re-installation ......................................................... 23-13
23.4.2 Print Exit Upper Belt/Roller Replacement ..................................................... 23-13
23.4.3 Print Exit Belt Tension Adjustment ................................................................ 23-14
23.5 Sorter SU1100Y ............................................................................................ 23-15

23.5.1 Sorter SU1100Y Removal/Re-installation ..................................................... 23-15
23.5.2 Sorter Circuit Board Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ........................ 23-15 23
23.5.3 Sorter Drive Motor Section Cover Removal/Re-installation .......................... 23-15
23.5.4 Tray Stop Position Sensor (D774) Replacement ........................................... 23-16
23.5.5 Sorter Tray Stop Position Adjustment ........................................................... 23-16
23.5.6 SWA20 Circuit Board (D776) Replacement .................................................. 23-16
23.5.7 Sorter Drive Motor (M771) Replacement ...................................................... 23-17
23-1
23.5.8 Full (Before Last 2 Order) (D775A)/Full (Complete)(D775B)
Sensor Replacement ............................................................................... 23-17
23.5.9 Tray Replacement ......................................................................................... 23-17
23.5.10 Sorter Chain Tension Adjustment ................................................................. 23-18
23
23-2
Parts Location
Print Exit Unit Dryer Section Drive Unit Dryer Exit Unit
Large Size
Print Exit Unit
Sorter SU1100Y
Large Size Tray
EZ1039
23
23-3
23.1 Dryer Exit Unit
23.1.1 Dryer Exit Unit Removal/ 3. Release the locking tabs and remove 4. Remove the solenoid by removing the
Re-installation the sensor from the bracket. two screws.
4. Disconnect the connector from the Solenoid (S770)

Removal sensor.
1. Remove the dryer section front cover D773 D772 D771
2. Pull out the dryer exit unit. Sensor
3. Remove the four screws, then remove

the dryer exit unit.
NOTE: Take careful not to drop the

unit.
Screws (2)
Screws (4)
EZ1182
Locking Tabs Installation

EZ1366
Install the sensor in the reverse order of <Solenoid Adjustment>

removal.
1 Loosen the locknut and adjust the
distance between the joint and the
Dryer Exit Unit solenoid to 15mm as shown.
23.1.3 Feeding Path Switching
EZ365 Solenoid (S770) 2. Apply thread locking agent to the
Replacement threads and tighten the locknut
Re-installation securely.
Re-install the dryer exit unit in the reverse Removal
Thread Locking Agent:
order of removal.
1. Remove the dryer exit unit LOCTITE 242 or equivalent
3. Temporarily install the solenoid using
23.1.2 Dryer Section Exit Front- 2. Disconnect the connector (S770). the two M3x8 screws.
line, Middle-line and
3. Unhook the coil spring. NOTE: Do not use the screws longer
Rear-line Paper Sensor than 8mm, or the solenoid
(D771 to D773) may short circuit.
Connector (S770)
Replacement
Solenoid
Removal
1. Pull out the dryer exit unit. Locknut

LOCK
Joint
Coil Spring
EZ1181 EZ1183
23
Sensor Bracket
23.1.1 Screws (2)
23.1.2
EZ374
23.1.3
23-4
4. Adjust the solenoid position so that 23.1.5 Entry Feed Belt Tension Installation
the height from the feed path Adjustment
switching guide to the upper guide is Installation is essentially in the sreverse
7mm ± 0.5mm and tighten the two order of removal.
1. Remove the dryer exit unit
screws.
NOTE: Adjust belt tension after
Upper Guide installation (see subsection
23.1.7).
belt tensioner.
3. Adjust belt tension by moving the belt

tensioner so that the belt is just apart 23.1.7 Large Size Side Feed
form the other run while pressing it Belt Tension Adjustment
with force of 500 g as shown.
Tension Gauge Belt Screws (2) (see subsection 23.1.1).

Feed Path Switching Guide belt tensioner.
EZ1884
3. Adjust belt tension by moving the belt
tensioner so that the belt is just apart
5. Connect the connector (S770) and
form the other run while pressing it
install the spring.
with force of 500 g as shown.
6. Reinstall the removed parts.
Tension Gauge
IMPORTANT:
Wait more than 30 minutes to dry thread Belt
locking agent. Belt Tensioner
EZ371
4. Secure the belt tensioner by

23.1.4 Entry Feed Belt
tightening the two screws.
Replacement
5. Re-install the dryer exit unit.
Removal
Belt Tensioner Screws (2)
(see subsection 23.1.1). 23.1.6 Large Size Side Feed EZ373
Belt Replacement
4. Secure the belt tensioner by
tightening the two screws.
belt tensionner. Removal
5. Re-install the dryer exit unit.
3. Remove the belt from the pulleys. 1. Remove the dryer exit unit
2. Loosen the two screws securing the 23.1.8 Upper Guide Plate
belt tensioner. Removal/Re-installation
3. Remove the belt from the pulleys.
Removal
Belt Tensioner
Screws (2) (see subsection 23.1.1).

Belt Tensionner
Screws (2)
EZ370
Installation
23
23.1.4
order of removal. 23.1.5
Belt 23.1.6
NOTE: Adjust belt tension after 23.1.7
EZ372
installation (see subsection 23.1.8
23.1.5). Sensor Bracket
Screws (2)
EZ374
23-5
3. Remove the two coil springs and the 23.1.9 Entry Roller 6. Remove the three E-rings, three
entry nip roller. Replacement bearings and screws securing the
roller shaft, then remove the four roller
4. Loosen the four screws securing the shafts.
slide rail bracket.
Removal
Roller Shafts (4)
Entry Nip Roller 1. Remove the entry feed belt
Slide Rail Bracket
Screws (2) 2. Remove the E-ring, drive joints, coil

spring and plain washer.
Plain Washer
Coil Spring Screw
Coil Springs (2) Bearings (3)

EZ375 E-rings (3)
EZ380
5. Remove the guide plate by removing
the six screws.
Screws (6) Guide Plate six rollers and five spacers from the
roller shaft.
Spacers (5)
Drive Joints Rollers (6)
E-ring
E-ring
EZ377
3. Remove the three E-rings, three gears

and two pulleys.
Pulleys (2)
Yellow Paint Marks Roller Shaft
D-cut End
EZ381
EZ376
Installation
Re-installation
Install the guide plate in the reverse order
order of removal.
of removal.
NOTE: • Face the yellow paint marks
(one-way clutches) on the rollers
E-rings (3) Gears (3)
toward the D-cut end of the roller
EZ378 shaft.
• After installation, wipe clean the
4. Remove the three E-rings and roller surfaces using a cloth
bearings. moistened with alcohol.
• Face the round dogs on the
5. Remove the screw securing the roller drive joint out as shown.
shaft.
23
23.1.9
Screw
Bearings (3) E-rings (3) Round Dogs
EZ379 EZ1367
23-6
23.1.10 Large Size Side Guide 3. Remove the five E-rings, then remove 6. Remove the E-ring, then remove the
Plate Removal/Re- the five pulleys and gear. six rollers and five spacers from the
roller shaft.
installation
Spacers (5)
Removal Rollers (6)
1. Remove the dryer exit unit E-ring


slide rail bracket.
3. Remove the guide plate by removing Gear

the four screws.
E-rings (5) Yellow Paint Marks Roller Shaft
Slide Rail Bracket Screws (4) Pulleys (5)
D-cut End
EZ384
EZ381
4. Remove the five E-rings and five

Installation
bearings.
Bearings (5) E-rings (5) Installation is essentially in the reverse

order of removal.
NOTE: • Face the yellow paint marks

(one-way clutches) on the rollers
Screws (2) toward the D-cut end of the roller
(Loosen) shaft.
• After installation, wipe clean the
Guide Plate roller surfaces using a cloth
EZ382 moistened with alcohol.
• Face the round dogs on the
Re-installation drive joint out as shown.
Install the guide plate in the reverse order EZ385

of removal.
5. Remove the five E-rings and five
bearings, then remove the five roller
23.1.11 Large Size Side Feed shafts.
Roller Replacement Roller Shafts (5)
Removal
1. Remove:
• large size side feed belt (see

subsection 23.1.6). Round Dogs
• upper guide plate (see subsection EZ1367
23.1.8).
• large size side guide plate (see
Bearings (5)
E-rings (5)
drive joints, coil spring and plain
washer. EZ386
Drive Joints
E-ring
23
23.1.10
23.1.11
Coil Spring Plain Washer

EZ383
23-7
23.1.12 High-speed Roller

Replacement
Removal

2. Remove the coil spring, two E-rings,

gears and bearings.
Bearings (2)
Coil Spring
E-rings (2)
Gears (2)
EZ387
3. Remove the coil spring, two E-rings,

and bearings from the opposite side,
then remove the two rollers.
Rollers (2)
E-rings (2)
Bearings (2)
Coil Springs
EZ388
Installation

order of removal.
NOTE: After installation, wipe clean the

roller surfaces using a cloth
moistened with alcohol.
23
23.1.12
23-8
23.2 Large Size Print Exit Unit
23.2.1 Print Exit Lower Cover 4. Remove the six screws, then remove 23.2.4 Large Size Exit Roller /
Removal/Re-installation the large size print exit cover. Belt Replacement
Large Size Print Exit Cover
Removal Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 1. Remove the large size print exit unit
and the built-in circuit breaker and the (see subsection 23.2.3).
2. Remove the print exit lower cover by guide.
3. Remove the roller guide plate by
Roller Guide Plate
Screws (6)
EZ796
Re-installation

removal.
Screws (4) Print Exit Lower Cover Screws (3) (Loosen)
EZ798
23.2.3 Large Size Print Exit Screws (2) (Remove)
Re-installation Unit Removal/Re- EZ390
installation
Re-install the lower cover in the reverse 4. Remove the three E-rings and
order of removal. bearings.
Removal
1. Remove the large size print exit cover

23.2.2 Large Size Print Exit (see subsection 23.2.2).
Cover Removal/Re-
installation 2. Pull out the dryer exit unit.

Removal the two screws, then remove the large
size print exit unit.
1. Remove the print exit lower cover
(see subsection 23.2.1). Large Size Print Exit Unit
2. Remove the large side print tray. Bearings (3) E-rings (3)
3. Remove the dryer entry rack cover. EZ391
Large Size Print Tray 5. Remove the three E-rings and

bearings from the opposite side.
Screws (2) (Loosen) Screws (2) (Remove)

EZ389
Re-installation

removal. Bearings (3) 23
E-rings (3) 23.2.1
EZ392 23.2.2
Dryer Entry Rack Cover 23.2.3
EZ795
23.2.4
23-9
23.2 Large Size Print Exit Unit
6. Remove the three rollers and four 23.2.5 Large Size Exit Gear
blets. Replacement
Rollers (3)
Removal
1. Remove the large size print exit unit

2. Remove the drive gear by removing

the screw.
Belts (4) 3. Remove the two E-rings, then remove

the two idler gears.
EZ393
E-rings (2)
7. Remove the E-ring, then remove the Idler Gears (2)
gear and pin from the rubber roller
shaft.
Rubber Roller Shaft
E-ring
Gear
Screw
Drive Gear
Pin
EZ395
EZ394 Installation
Installation Install the gears in the reverse order of

removal.
order of removal.
NOTE: • Install the belts so that their

luster surfaces are outside.
• Assemble the unit on a level
surface to prevent it from
distortion.
Level Surface
EZ1368
23 • After installation, wipe clean the

roller using a cloth moistened
with alcohol.
23.2.5
23-10
23.3 Dryer Section Drive Unit
23.3.1 Dryer Section Top Cover 23.3.2 Dryer Section Drive Unit 23.3.3 Dryer Section Drive
Removal/Re-installation Removal/Re-installation Motor (M770) /Gear
Replacement
Removal Removal
Removal
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 1. Remove:
and the built-in circuit breaker and the 1. Remove the dryer section drive unit
main power supply OFF. • dryer section top cover (see subsection 23.3.2).
2. Remove the dryer section front cover • dryer rear cover (see subsection 2. Open the two harness clamps.
(see subsection 22.1.1). 22.2.2).
3. Loosen the three screws and remove 2. Pull out the dryer exit unit. removing the four screws.
the three screws, then remove the
dryer section top cover by lifting it up. 3. Open the harness clamp. Motor Bracket Screws (4)
Dryer Section Top Cover 4. Disconnect the five connectors

Screws (3) (Remove) (HPF1, HPF2, SORT1, SORT2 and
M770).
Clamp
Harness Clamps (2)

EZ398
Screws (3) (Loosen) 4. Remove the motor from the bracket

EZ799
Connectors (5)
EZ396 NOTE: The grounding wire is
Re-installation
tightened together with the
5. Remove the four screws, then remove screw as shown.
the dryer section drive unit.
removal. Motor (M770)
Dryer Section Drive Unit
Screws (2)
Grounding Wire
EZ399
Screws (4)
EZ397 5. Remove the E-ring and the gear from
the bracket.
Re-installation
Bracket E-ring
Re-install the drive unit in the reverse
order of removal.
23
23.3.1
23.3.2
Gear 23.3.3
EZ1655
Installation

removal.
23-11
23.3 Dryer Section Drive Unit
23.3.4 Dryer Section Drive Installation

Screws (2)
Gear Replacement
order of removal.
Removal
NOTE: After installation, make sure the
1. Remove the dryer section drive unit
plug-in connector moves freely.
2. Remove the E-ring, joint, gear, spacer

and coil spring in the order listed. 23.3.5 Plug-in Connector
E-ring EZ403 Replacement
Joint
7. Remove the bevel gear and two Removal
Gear bearings.
1. Remove the dryer section drive unit
Bearings (2) (see subsection 23.3.2).
2. Open the three harness clamps.
Spacer
Spring
EZ400
Bevel Gear Shaft
3. Remove the four E-rings and gears.
EZ1656
4. Remove the idler gear by removing

8. Remove the E-ring and the exit unit
the screw. Clamps (3)
drive gear.
EZ1659
Screw E-rings (4)
9. Remove the gear bracket side plate by
3. Remove the plug-in connector by
E-ring Screws (4) Plug-in Connector
Gear (6)
Idler Gear
EZ401
Gear Bracket
5. Remove the motor bracket (see Exit Unit Drive Gear Screws (2)
Side Plate
EZ1657
6. Remove the gear bracket by removing Installation

10. Remove the bevel gear/exit unit drive
the six screws.
shaft and bearing from the gear
Install the connector in the reverse order
Screws (6) bracket.
of removal.
Bearing
23
23.3.4
23.3.5
Gear Bracket Bevel Gear/

Exit Unit Drive Shaft
EZ402
EZ1658
23-12
23.4 Print Exit Unit
23.4.1 Print Exit Unit Removal/ 4. Remove four E-rings and bearings, 8. Remove the E-ring and the belt drive
Re-installation then remove the two rollers and four gear.
belts.
Belt Drive Gear
Removal Bearings (4) Rollers (2)
1. Remove:

22.2.2).
• dryer section top cover (see
subsection 23.3.1).

the three screws, then remove the
print exit unit.
E-ring
Screws (2) (Loosen) EZ408
Print Exit Unit E-rings (4)
9. Remove the two E-rings and bearings,
EZ411
then remove the roller.
belt tensioners, then remove the two
stay, then remove the stay and the
coil springs.
belt.
Belt Tensioner
Screws (2)
Coil Spring Roller
Screws (3) (Remove)

EZ405
Re-installation
Re-install the unit in the reverse order of Coil Spring

Screws (2)
removal.
Bearings (2)
E-rings (2)
Screws (2) Belt Tensioner
EZ409
23.4.2 Print Exit Upper Belt/ EZ406
Roller Replacement Installation

6. Remove the two E-rings and bearings,
then remove the roller shaft.
Removal Installation is essentially in the reverse
7. Remove the stay by removing the two
order of removal.
screws.
1. Remove the print exit unit
(see subsection 23.4.1). Screws (2) E-rings (2) NOTE: • Install the lower belts so that
their luster surfaces face out.
2. Remove the guide by removing the • Make sure the belts are
two screws. positioned in place.
• Adjust belt tension (see
3. Remove the E-ring and bearing, then subsection 23.4.3).
remove the exit side roller shaft.
Screws (2) Bearing
Stay Roller Shaft Bearings (2)

EZ407 23
23.4.1
23.4.2
E-ring
Guide Exit Side Roller Shaft

EZ410
23-13
23.4 Print Exit Unit
23.4.3 Print Exit Belt Tension

Adjustment
1. Remove the print exit unit


belt tensioners.
Screws (2)
Screws (2)
EZ412
3. Turn the drive gear several turns.
NOTE: The roller is positioned in the

groove in the upper belt as
shown.
Roller/Groove
Drive Gear
EZ413
4. Secure the belt tensioenrs by

tightening the four screws.
Screws (2)
Screws (2)
EZ414
23 5. Re-install the print exit unit

23.4.3
23-14
23.5 Sorter SU1100Y
23.5.1 Sorter SU1100Y 23.5.2 Sorter Circuit Board 23.5.3 Sorter Drive Motor
Removal/Re-installation Section Cover Removal/ Section Cover Removal/
Re-installation Re-installation
Removal
Removal Removal
and the built-in circuit breaker and the 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY,
main power supply OFF. and the built-in circuit breaker and the and the built-in circuit breaker and the
main power supply OFF. main power supply OFF.
(see subsection 22.1.1). 2. Remove the sorter circuit board 2. Remove the sorter drive motor section
section cover by removing the three cover by removing the three screws.
3. Disconnect the sorter cable from the screws.
dryer section. Sorter Drive Motor Section Cover
Sorter Circuit Board Section Cover
Sorter Cable
EZ802
4. Remove the three screws securing the Screws (3)

lower sorter hinge, then remove the
Screws (3) EZ428
sorter by lifting up it from the upper
EZ427
hinge.
Re-installation
Screws (3)
Re-installation
Re-install the cover in the reverse order of removal.
removal.
Sorter SU1100Y
EZ803
Re-installation
Re-install the sorter in the reverse order of

removal.
23
23.5.1
23.5.2
23.5.3
23-15
23.5 Sorter SU1100Y
23.5.4 Tray Stop Position 23.5.5 Sorter Tray Stop 23.5.6 SWA20 Circuit Board
Sensor (D774) Position Adjustment (D776) Replacement
Replacement
1. Remove the sorter circuit board Removal
Removal section cover (see subsection 23.5.2).
1. Remove the sorter circuit board
1. Remove the sorter circuit board 2. Loosen the screw securing the plate section cover (see subsection 23.5.2).
section cover (see subsection 23.5.2). and adjust the top tray position so that
its tip is 50 mm from the lower edge of 2. Disconnect the four connectors from
2. Remove the sensor bracket by the cover as shown by turning the the circuit board.
removing the screw. plate.
NOTE: Turn the plate clockwise to the two screws.
lower the tray stop position.
Turn the plate SWA20 Circuit Board
counterclockwise to raise the
tray stop position.
3. Secure the plate by tightening the

screw.
Screw
To raise
Sensor Bracket Screw Tray

EZ429
To lower

sensor.
Screws (2)
the sensor from the bracket. EZ432
Locking Tabs Installation
Cover Install the circuit board in the reverse

EZ431 order of removal.
4. Re-install the sorter circuit board

section cover.
Sensor (D774)
EZ430
Installation

removal.
23
23.5.4
23.5.5
23.5.6
23-16
23.5 Sorter SU1100Y
23.5.7 Sorter Drive Motor 23.5.8 Full (Before Last 2 4. Disconnect the connector from the
(M771) Replacement Order) (D775A)/Full sensor.
(Complete)(D775B) 5. Release the locking tabs and remove
Removal Sensor Replacement the sensor from the bracket.
1. Remove the sorter drive motor section Removal Sensor (D775A) Connector
2. Disconnect the connector (M771). and the built-in circuit breaker and the
3. Remove the motor by removing the Locking Tabs
two screws. 2. Remove the sensor cover by
removing the two flat countersunk
Screws (2)
head screws.
Flat Countersunk Head Screws (2)
Sensor (D775B)
EZ437
Installation

Motor
removal.
(M771)
23.5.9 Tray Replacement

Connector (M771)
EZ433 Removal
4. Loosen the two hex. socket head set Sensor Cover 1. Move the sorter to its storage position.
screws and remove the bevel gear. EZ435
2. Remove the tray by removing the two
5. Remove the motor bracket by screws.
removing the two screws. removing the two screws.
Screws (2)
Hex. Socket
Head Set
Screws (2)
Motor (M771)
Tray
EZ438
Motor Bracket Bevel Gear
EZ434 Installation
Sensor Bracket
Installation EZ436 Install the tray in the reverse order of
removal.
removal.
23
23.5.7
23.5.8
23.5.9
23-17
23.5 Sorter SU1100Y
23.5.10 Sorter Chain Tension

Adjustment
1. Remove:
• sorter circuit board section cover

• sorter drive motor section cover
2. Loosen the lock nuts and turn the

adjusting nuts so that the distance
from the bolt tip to the adjusting nut is
7 mm.
Bolt tip-to-adjusting
nut distance: 7 mm
Parallelism: 0 to 0.4 mm
Adjusting Nut
7 mm
Lock Nut
EZ439
3. Tighten the lock nuts.
4. Re-install the sorter circuit board

section cover and sorter drive motor
section cover.
23
23.5.10
23-18
24. PROCESSOR ELECTRICAL SECTION
Parts Location .................................................................................................. 24-2
24.1 Processor Control Section ............................................................................ 24-3

24.1.1 Processor Control Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ............................ 24-3
24.1.2 PAC20 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................. 24-3
24.1.3 Processor Control Section Cooling Fan (F792) Replacement ........................ 24-3
24.1.4 CTP20 Circuit Board Replacement ................................................................. 24-3
24.1.5 Circuit Protector (CB15) Replacement ........................................................... 24-4
24.1.6 Transformer Replacement .............................................................................. 24-4
24.2 Processor Electrical Section ........................................................................ 24-5

24.2.1 Processor Electrical Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ......................... 24-5
24.2.2 Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement ............................................................. 24-5
24.2.3 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement ........................................... 24-5
24.2.4 Relay (K1, K2 and K3) Replacement .............................................................. 24-5
24.2.5 SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement ............................................................... 24-6
24.2.6 Electrical Box Disassembly/Re-assembly ....................................................... 24-6
24.2.7 Circuit Protector (CB1 to CB14) Replacement ............................................... 24-6
24.2.8 Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3) Replacement ......................................................... 24-7
24
24-1
Parts Location
Processor Exhaust Fans 1 and 2

(F790 and F791)
SSR1 to SSR3 Processor Drive Motor Driver
Circuit Board
Relays (K1 to K3)
Noise Filters
(NF1 to NF3)
Terminal Block
(TB2)
Processor Control Section
Cooling Fan (F792)
Circuit Breaker
(NFB1) CTP20 Circuit Board
Input Terminal Block Circuit Protector (CB15)

(TB1) Leakage Breakers PAC20 Transformer (T1)
(NFB2 to NFB4) Circuit Board
Circuit Protectors
(CB1 to CB14)
EZ1036
24
24-2
24.1 Processor Control Section
24.1.1 Processor Control Installation 24.1.4 CTP20 Circuit Board

Section Cover Removal/ Replacement
Re-installation order of removal.
NOTE: • Always replace the CTP20
Removal Circuit Board as an assembly.
• Do not try to replace the lithium
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, 24.1.3 Processor Control battery for data backup.
and the built-in circuit breaker and the Section Cooling Fan Incorrect battery replacement
main power supply OFF. (F792) Replacement may cause explosion.
• Return the old CTP20 circuit
2. Loosen the two screws and remove board replaced to the factory of
Removal FUJIFILM.
the processor control section cover.
1. Remove the processor control section Removal
Screws (2)
1. Remove the processor control section
2. Open the two clamps and disconnect cooling fan (see subsection 24.1.3).
the connector (CTP6) from the CTP20
circuit board. 2. Disconnect all connectors from the
CTP20 circuit board.
3. Remove the two screws, the fan and
guard. 3. Remove the CTP20 circuit board from
the six circuit board spacers.
Fan/Guard Screws (2) Clamps (2)
Processor Control Section Cover

EZ801
Re-installation
Re-install the processor control section

cover in the reverse order of rmoval.
Connector (CTP6)
24.1.2 PAC20 Circuit Board
EZ273
Replacement CTP20 Circuit Board
EZ275
Installation
Removal
Installation is essentially in the reverse Installation
1. Remove the processor control section order of removal.
cover (see subsection 24.1.1). Installation is essentially in the reverse
NOTE: Install the fan so that its arrow order of removal.
2. Disconnect all connectors from the mark points to the outside of the
PAC20 circuit board. processor. NOTE: Make sure the jumper plug JP2 is
Arrow in “BACK UP”.
3. Remove the PAC20 circuit board from
JP2
the ten circuit board spacers.

Outside
EZ274
EZ1369
24
24.1.1
24.1.2
24.1.3
PAC20 Circuit Board 24.1.4
EZ272
24-3
24.1 Processor Control Section
24.1.5 Circuit Protector (CB15) 4. Remove the transformer by removing

Replacement the two screws.
Transformer (T1)
Removal

2. Disconnect the connectors from the

circuit protector.

the circuit protector from the bracket.
Circuit Protector
(CB15) Screws (2)
EZ332
Installation
Locking
Install the transformer in the reverse order
Tabs of removal.
NOTE: Connect the black wire T1-AC (L)

to appropriate input voltage
Connectors (2) terminal.
EZ330
Installation
White Wire
T1-AC (N)
Install the circuit protector in the reverse
order of removal. Black Wire
T1-AC (L)
24.1.6 Transformer
Replacement
Removal

EZ1073
grounding wire.
3. Disconnect the four wires (T1-AC(L),

T1-AC(N), T1-100 and T1-0) from the
terminal block (T1).
T1 T1-AC (L)
T1-AC (N)
T1-100
24 T1-0
EZ331
24.1.5
24.1.6
24-4
24.2 Processor Electrical Section
24.2.1 Processor Electrical 24.2.2 Circuit Breaker (NFB1) 24.2.3 Leakage Breaker (NFB2
Section Cover Removal/ Replacement to NFB4) Replacement
Re-installation
Removal Removal
Removal
1. Remove the replenisher tank section 1. Remove the processor electrical
1. Turn the power switch to STANDBY, cover (see subsection 21.2.1). section cover (see subsection 24.2.1).
main power supply OFF. 2. Remove the circuit breaker bracket by 2. Remove the black covers and
removing the six screws. disconnect all wires from the bleaker
! WARNING by removing the four screws.
The main power supply MUST be Screws (6)
switched OFF. 3. Remove the leakage breaker by
Even if the power switch is at removing the two screws.
STANDBY and the built-in circuit
Screws (4)
breaker is turned OFF, electricity will Leakage Breaker (NFB2)
still be supplied, so the power supply Wires
area can cause electric shocks and
short circuit.

the processor electrical section cover.
Screws (4) Breaker Bracket

EZ333
3. Disconnect all wires from the circuit

breaker by removing the eight screws.
Screws (2) NFB3 NFB4
Wires Screws (8)
Black Covers (2)
EZ335
Installation
Install the leakage breaker in the reverse

order of removal.
24.2.4 Relay (K1, K2 and K3)

Processor Electrical Section Cover
Circuit Breaker Replacement
EZ793
(NFB1)
Re-installation EZ334 Removal
Re-install the processor electrical section Installation 1. Remove the processor electrical
cover in the reverse order of removal. section cover (see subsection 24.2.1).
Install the circuit breaker in the reverse
order of removal. 2. Disconnect all wires from the relay.
3. Remove the relay from the relay

bracket by releasing the locking tabs.
24
Relay (K1) Relay (K2) 24.2.1
Relay (K3) 24.2.2
EZ420 24.2.3
24.2.4
24-5
4. Remove the relay bracket by removing 24.2.6 Electrical Box 5. Remove the six screws and open the
the two screws. Disassembly/Re- electrical box.
Screws (2) assembly Electrical Box
Disassembly
1. Remove:
• replenisher tank section cover (see
subsection 21.2.1).
• processor electrical section cover

Relay Bracket
Replenisher Level Sensor Bracket
EZ421
Installation
Screws (6)
Install the relay in the reverse order of EZ419
removal.
Re-assembly
Re-assemble the electrical box in the

24.2.5 SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) reverse order of disassembly.
Replacement
Removal 24.2.7 Circuit Protector (CB1 to

Screws (5)
1. Remove the relay (K1) for SSR1 EZ417 CB14) Replacement
replacement, relay (K2) for SSR2 and
relay (K3) for SSR3. 3. Remove the four screws securing the Removal
electrical box, then pull out the box.
2. Disconnect all wires from the SSR by 1. Disassemble the electrical box (see
removing the four screws. 4. Remove the screws securing the subsection 24.2.6).
grounding wire.
3. Remove the SSR by removing the two 2. Disconnect the wires from the circuit
screws. protector.
SSR1 Screws (2) SSR3 3. Release the locking tabs and remove
the circuit protector.
Screw
Wires (2)
Grounding Wire
Screws Securing Box (4)
EZ418
Locking Tabs
Screws (4) SSR2
EZ423 Circuit Protector
EZ422
Installation
Installation
Install the SSR in the reverse order of
removal. Install the circuit protector in the reverse
order of removal.
24
24.2.5
24.2.6
24.2.7
24-6
24.2.8 Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3) Installation

Replacement
Install the noise filter in the reverse order
of removal.
Removal
1. Disassemble the electrical box (see

subsection 24.2.6).
2. Open the ten clamps.
Clamps (10)
EZ424
3. Disconnect wires 1 and 0 from the

relays (K1, K2 and K3).
Wires 0 and 1
Relay (K1)
Relay (K2)
Relay (K3)
EZ425
4. Disconnect all wires from the

terminals of the noise filter by
removing the five nuts.
5. Remove the noise filter by removing

the two screws.
NF1
Noise Filter
24
24.2.8
Nuts (5)
NF2 Screws (2)
NF3
EZ426
24-7
25. INDEX
25
25-1
Index
Index
0 [MENU] Item ........................................................... 3.3.1 Back Printing Section Guide Plate Removal/
1 [LANGUAGE] Item ................................................. 3.3.2 Re-installation .................................................... 15.2.13
2 [CHECK] Item ......................................................... 3.3.3 Balance Filter Bracket Removal/Re-installation ...... 12.2.2
3 [SELECT FUNC.] Item ........................................... 3.3.4 Balance Filter Drive Motor (M202) Replacement .... 12.2.4
4 [PRINT COND.] Item .............................................. 3.3.5 Balance Filter Home Position Sensor (D202)
5 [SPECIAL PRINT] Item .......................................... 3.3.6 Replacement ........................................................ 12.2.3
6 [SYSTEM] Item ...................................................... 3.3.7 Balance Filter/Drive Gear Replacement .................. 12.2.5
7 [INSTALLATION] Item ............................................ 3.3.8 Ball Screw Replacement ......................................... 13.1.8
15-inch Monitor Color Adjustment ........................... 11.1.8 Border Adjustment ...................................................... 15.5
17-inch Monitor Color Adjustment ........................... 11.1.9 Bottom Cover Removal/Re-installation (NC135Y) .... 11.2.16
135/120 Mirror Box Sensor (D204/D205) Bottom Cover Removal/Re-installation (NC240Y) .... 11.3.12
Replacement ...................................................... 12.2.10
Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (44) .......................... 9.5
Adjustment Jig .............................................................. 2.4 Carrier Focus Position Adjustment (43C) .................. 9.4.3
Air Duct Removal/Re-installation ............................ 16.2.1 Carrier Inclination Display (43D) ............................... 9.4.4
Air Filter Replacement ............................................. 16.2.3 Carrier Pitch Correction......................................... 11.2.40
Air Flow Sensor Filter Replacement Cartridge Holder Locking Release Method ........... 11.3.34
(SP2000: #2903036 and after) ........................... 13.1.13 Cartridge Motor (M444) Replacement ................... 11.3.31
Ambient Temperature Sensor (THA1-2) Cartridge Sensor (D456) Replacement ................. 11.3.27
Replacement ........................................................ 16.3.7 Caution Label Locations on Printer/Paper
Ambient Temperature Sensor (THA20) Processor ............................................................... 1.2.2
Replacement ...................................................... 15.2.10 Caution Label Locations on Scanner/
Anti-static Brush Replacement ................................ 17.1.2 Image Processor .................................................... 1.2.1
AOM Driver (AOM-R, AOM-G and AOM-B) CCD Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement .................. 13.1.9
Replacement ........................................................ 18.1.5 CCD Cooling Fan Bracket Removal/
AOM Driver Cooling Fan (F591, F592 and F593) Re-installation ...................................................... 13.1.2
Replacement ........................................................ 18.1.6 CCD Data Display (43E) ........................................... 9.4.5
Auto Cleaning Control ............................................... 5.4.9 CCD Unit Removal/Re-installation .......................... 13.1.6
Auto Cleaning Output Measurement ....................... 5.4.10 CCD Unit Shatter/Gear Replacement ................... 13.1.14
Auto Film Carrier .......................................................... 5.1 CCD Unit(E-1130/E-1131) ......................................... 7.3.3
Auto Film Carrier Inspection ...................................... 6.3.5 CCD20 Circuit Board (CCD Unit) ............................ 4.1.11
Auto Film Carrier NC135Y ......................................... 11.2 CD-ROM Drive Inspection ....................................... 6.3.30
Auto Film Carrier NC135Y Configuration .................. 4.1.3 CDS20 Circuit Board ............................................... 4.1.12
Auto Film Carrier NC240Y ......................................... 11.3 Certification and Identification Label Locations on
Auto Film Carrier NC240Y Configuration .................. 4.1.4 Printer/Paper Processor ......................................... 1.4.2
Auto Film Carrier Speed Control Clutch Functions ... 4.1.5 Certification and Identification Label Locations on
Auto Intermittent Operation Control .......................... 5.4.8 Scanner/Image Processor ...................................... 1.4.1
Auto Loading ............................................................. 5.2.5 Certification and Identification Labels .......................... 1.4
Auto Opening Control .............................................. 5.4.15 Check Tape Sensor (D411) Replacement ............. 11.2.23
Auto Replenishment Control(at installation) ............ 5.4.23 Circuit Board Configurations and Functions ............. 4.1.7
Auto Rewinding ......................................................... 5.2.6 Circuit Board Main Functions
Auto Washing and P1-R Stirring System ................... 21.3 (Printer Electrical Equipment Section) ................... 4.5.2
Auto Washing Pump (PU740) Replacement ........... 21.3.1 Circuit Board Main Functions (Processor Section) ... 4.6.9
Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement
B Laser(B-SHG) Data (45F) ...................................... 9.6.7 (Scanner Electrical Section) ................................. 14.1.3
Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment ............... 15.4.1 Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement
Back Printer Head or JNE20 Circuit Board (Processor Electrical Section) .............................. 24.2.2
Replacement ........................................................ 15.4.2 Circuit Protector (CB1 to CB14) Replacement ........ 24.2.7
Back Printer Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement ........ 15.4.5 Circuit Protector (CB15) Replacement .................... 24.1.5
Back Printer Sensor (D544) Replacement .............. 15.4.3 Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP16) Replacement ...... 14.1.6
Back Printer Test (45N) ........................................... 9.6.14 Circulation Pump (PU710 to PU715)
25 Back Printer Unit Removal/Re-installation .............. 15.4.4 Replacement ........................................................ 20.2.7
Back Printing ............................................................. 5.2.8 Cleaning/Dilution ..................................................... 5.4.17
Back Printing Section ................................................. 15.4 Clear Error Log (41E) ................................................ 9.2.1
Clearing All Operation Data (45R) ........................... 9.6.17
25-2
Index
Clearing Selected Operation Data (46D) .................. 9.7.4 Distribution Operation Abnormality .......................... 7.3.12
Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (45Q) ..... 9.6.16 Distribution Section ................................................... 2.5.7
COM Port Setting (47A) ............................................ 9.8.1 DISTRIBUTION SECTION ............................................ 17
Command (48C) ........................................................ 9.9.3 Distribution Section (Outline) .................................... 4.4.1
Confirmation ................................................................... A. Distribution Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ............... 4.4
Conjugate Length Variable Belt Replacement ........ 13.1.4 Distribution Section Door Removal/
Conjugate Length Variable Home Position (D102)/ Re-installation .................................................... 17.1.12
Upper Position (D103)/Lower Position (D104) Distribution Section Door Sensor Interlock Switch
Sensor Replacement .......................................... 13.1.11 (D584A and D584B) Replacement ..................... 17.1.13
Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M101) Distribution Section Feed Motor (M570)
Replacement ........................................................ 13.1.5 Replacement ........................................................ 17.2.1
Control Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing ...... 18.1.4 Distribution Section Slide Shaft Lubrication ............ 6.3.13
Cool-down Operation ................................................ 5.4.4 Distribution Section Suction Cup Inspection ........... 6.3.12
Cooling Air Flow Sensor (D351) Replacement ...... 13.1.12 Distribution Sucker Air Pump (PU570)/
Crossover Rack Disassembly/Re-assembly ........... 19.1.1 Vibration Isolation Rubber Replacement ............ 17.1.14
Crossover Racks/Processing Racks .......................... 19.1 Distribution Unit .......................................................... 17.1
CTB20 Circuit Board (Outline) ................................ 4.1.10 Distribution Unit Replacement ............................... 17.1.16
CTB20 Circuit Board (Trouble Shooting) .................. 7.3.4 Distribution Up/Down Motor (M572)
CTB20 Circuit Board Replacement ......................... 14.2.3 Replacement ...................................................... 17.1.10
CTL20 Circuit Board .................................................. 4.5.6 Distribution Up/Down Operation Abnormality .......... 7.3.11
CTL20 Circuit Board Block Diagram ......................... 4.5.4 Door Open/Close Sensor (D441) Replacement .... 11.3.28
CTL20 Circuit Board Replacement ....................... 18.1.17 Drive Chain Replacement ....................................... 19.2.5
CTP20 Circuit Board ............................................... 4.6.11 Drive Section Cover Removal/Re-installation
CTP20 Circuit Board Replacement ......................... 24.1.4 (NC135Y) ........................................................... 11.2.13
Cutter Abnormality ..................................................... 7.3.6 Drive Section Cover Removal/Re-installation
Cutter Angle Adjustment ....................................... 15.1.15 (NC240Y) ........................................................... 11.3.35
Cutter Inspection ....................................................... 6.3.8 Dryer Belt/Roller Replacement................................ 22.1.5
Cutter Position Adjustment ...................................... 15.5.4 Dryer Duct Wing Plate Removal/Re-installation ...... 22.1.9
Cutter Sequence ....................................................... 5.2.3 Dryer Entrance Rack Cover Detecting Interlock
Cutter Top and Bottom Dead Center Adjustment ... 15.1.14 Switch (D791) Replacement ................................ 19.1.7
Cutter Unit Replacement ....................................... 15.1.11 Dryer Entrance Rack Disassembly/Re-assembly ... 19.1.6
CYB20 Circuit Board (NC135Y) .............................. 4.1.18 Dryer Entrance Rack Drive Gear Lubrication .......... 6.3.21
CYB20 Circuit Board Replacement ....................... 11.2.19 Dryer Entrance Rack Drive Gear Replacement ...... 19.2.8
CYC20 Circuit Board (NC240Y) .............................. 4.1.19 Dryer Exit Unit ............................................................ 23.1
CYC20 Circuit Board Replacement ....................... 11.3.16 Dryer Exit Unit Diagnostics ..................................... 7.3.24
Dryer Exit Unit Removal/Re-installation .................. 23.1.1
Data Download (45U) .............................................. 9.6.19 Dryer Exit Unit Roller and Guide Cleaning .............. 6.3.23
Data Saving (45T) ................................................... 9.6.18 Dryer Fan (F760) Replacement .............................. 22.2.4
DC Power Supply Replacement ............................ 14.1.13 Dryer Fan Duct Removal/Re-installation ................. 22.2.5
DC Power Supply Unit Exhaust Fan (F595) Dryer Heater (H760)/Dryer Heater Safety
Replacement ...................................................... 18.1.13 Thermostat ........................................................... 22.2.3
DC Power Supply Unit Replacement .................... 18.1.14 Dryer Heater/Dryer Fan.............................................. 22.2
DC24V Power Supply Replacement ....................... 14.1.9 Dryer Rack Cleaning ............................................... 6.3.16
DC24V Voltage Adjustment ................................... 14.1.10 Dryer Rack Cover Removal/Re-installation ............. 22.1.2
Densitometer ................................................................ 5.5 Dryer Rack Exit Nip Roller Replacement ................ 22.1.8
Densitometer AD100 ................................................. 5.5.1 Dryer Rack Removal/Re-installation ....................... 22.1.4
Densitometer AD200 ................................................. 5.5.2 Dryer Rack Section .................................................... 22.1
DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I) ................... 9.2.4 Dryer Rack Section Duct Removal/Re-installation ... 22.1.7
Display LED (L400) Replacement ......................... 11.2.31 Dryer Rear Cover Removal/Re-installation ............. 22.2.2
Display LED (L440) Replacement ......................... 11.3.15 DRYER SECTION ......................................................... 22
Distribution .............................................................. 5.2.11 Dryer Section Bottom Plate Removal/
Distribution Feed Section ........................................... 17.2 Re-installation ...................................................... 22.2.6
25
Distribution Home Position Sensor (D574) Dryer Section Configuration ...................................... 4.6.5
Replacement ........................................................ 17.1.8 Dryer Section Cool-down Control ............................ 5.4.30
Distribution Motor (M571) Replacement ................. 17.1.7 Dryer Section Drive Gear Lubrication ..................... 6.3.22
25-3
Index
Dryer Section Drive Gear Replacement .................. 23.3.4 Exposure Section Configuration ............................... 4.3.1
Dryer Section Drive Motor (M770) / Exposure Section Cooling Fan (F585 and F586)
Gear Replacement ............................................... 23.3.3 Replacement ........................................................ 16.1.6
Dryer Section Drive Unit ............................................. 23.3 Exposure Section Drive Pulley Bracket Removal/
Dryer Section Drive Unit Removal/Re-installation ... 23.3.2 Re-installation .................................................... 16.3.19
Dryer Section Exit Front-line, Middle-line and Exposure Section Drive Steel Belt Replacement ... 16.3.20
Rear-line Paper Sensor (D771 to D773) Exposure Section Entrance or Pre-Exposure Paper
Replacement ........................................................ 23.1.2 Sensor LED (D561L or D562L) Replacement ...... 16.3.5
Dryer Section Front Cover Detecting Interlock Exposure Section Entrance Paper Sensor (D561P)
Switch (D781) Replacement ................................ 22.1.6 Replacement ........................................................ 16.3.2
Dryer Section Front Cover Removal/ Exposure Section Exhaust Fan (F596)
Re-installation ...................................................... 22.1.1 Replacement ........................................................ 16.1.7
Dryer Section Heat-up Control ................................ 5.4.26 Exposure Section Feed Unit ...................................... 16.3
Dryer Section Pre-heat Control ............................... 5.4.28 Exposure Section Feed Unit Paper Sensor (D560)
Dryer Section Pre-heat Drive Temperature Replacement ........................................................ 16.3.4
Adjustment ........................................................... 5.4.29 Exposure Section Feed Unit Removal/
Dryer Section Temperature Adjustment .................. 5.4.27 Re-installation ...................................................... 16.3.9
Dryer Section Temperature Sensor (TS760) Exposure Section Front Cover Detecting Interlock
Replacement ........................................................ 22.1.3 Switch (D585A and D585B) Replacement ........... 16.1.5
Dryer Section Top Cover Removal/Re-installation ... 23.3.1 Exposure Section Front Cover Removal/
Dryer Side Cover Removal/Re-installation .............. 22.2.1 Re-installation ...................................................... 16.1.3
Dryer Temperature Abnormality .............................. 7.3.16 Exposure Section Front Inner Cover Removal/
Dummy Head Replacement .................................... 11.3.9 Re-installation ...................................................... 16.1.4
Dust Removal Roller Replacement ....................... 11.2.11 Exposure Section Nip Motor (M565)
Replacement ...................................................... 16.3.18
Electrical Box Disassembly/Re-assembly ............... 24.2.6 Exposure Section Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F565)
Electrical Equipment Block Diagram ......................... 4.1.8 Replacement ........................................................ 16.3.8
Electrical Equipment Configurations ......................... 4.1.6 Exposure Section Nip Release Sensor (D566)
Electrical Equipment Section Configurations ............ 4.5.1 Replacement ........................................................ 16.3.6
Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan
(F306/F307) Replacement ................................... 14.2.1 Feed Belt Replacement ........................................... 17.2.8
Electrical Equipment Section Exhaust Fan Bracket Feed Completion ....................................................... 5.3.6
Removal/Re-installation ....................................... 14.2.2 Feed Entrance Guide Plate Height Adjustment ...... 15.5.7
Electrical Equipment/Control Section ......................... 14.2 Feed Motor Bracket Removal/Re-installation .......... 17.2.4
End Process .............................................................. 5.3.2 Feed Roller Replacement ..................................... 15.2.12
Entrance Nip Roller Replacement ......................... 16.3.23 Feed Start ................................................................. 5.3.3
Entrance Roller Replacement ............................... 16.3.24 Feed Stop Sensor (D444) Replacement ............... 11.3.22
Entry Feed Belt Replacement ................................. 23.1.4 Feeding Path Switching Solenoid (S770)
Entry Feed Belt Tension Adjustment ....................... 23.1.5 Replacement ........................................................ 23.1.3
Entry Roller Replacement ....................................... 23.1.9 Film Carrier ............................................................... 7.3.2
Error Display Control ............................................... 5.4.20 Film Carrier Ball Catch Replacement ...................... 11.1.7
Error Indication Rule .................................................... 7.1 Film Carrier ID Setup/Delete (44P) ......................... 9.5.11
Error Restore Control .............................................. 5.4.21 Film Carrier NC135Y ............................................... 10.1.2
Explorer (48B) ........................................................... 9.9.2 Film Carrier NC240Y ............................................... 10.1.3
Exposure Completion/RLD Exposure Stop ............... 5.3.5 Film Cooling Air Compressor (PU351) /
Exposure Preparation ............................................... 5.3.4 Vibration Isolation Rubber Replacement .............. 14.2.9
Exposure Roller/Guide Replacement .................... 16.3.22 Film Cooling Air Compressor Unit Removal/
EXPOSURE SECTION ................................................. 16 Re-installation ...................................................... 14.2.7
Exposure Section (Operaton Sequences) ................... 5.3 Film Cooling Air Filter Replacement ........................ 6.3.28
Exposure Section (Required Adjustments after Parts Film Cooling Air Nozzle Replacement ..................... 13.2.6
Replacement) ......................................................... 2.5.6 Film Cooling Air Tank Replacement ........................ 14.2.8
25 Exposure Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) .................. 4.3 Film Entrance Roller Replacement ....................... 11.2.12
Exposure Section Anti-dust Pressure Fan 1, 2 or 3 Film Feed Motor (M400) Replacement ................. 11.2.33
(F620, F621 or F622) Replacement ..................... 16.2.2 Film Feed Motor (M440) Replacement ................. 11.3.36
Exposure Section Cam Replacement ................... 16.3.21
25-4
Index
Film Feed Motor Driver Circuit Board Heater Cooling Fan (F710 to F713) Replacement ... 20.2.4
Replacement ...................................................... 11.2.32 High-speed Roller Replacement ........................... 23.1.12
Film Feed Motor Driver Circuit Board Hose Connection ......................................... 20.2.3, 21.1.3
Replacement ...................................................... 11.3.20
Film Feed Roller/Belt Replacement ...................... 11.3.18 I/O CHECK .................................................................... 10
Film Feed Roller/Drive Belt Replacement ............. 11.2.29 I/O Check (43A) ........................................................ 9.4.1
Film Leading End Sensor (D401) Replacement ... 11.2.20 I/O Parts Diagram ...................................................... 10.1
Film Leading End Sensor LED (D400) Image Correction Setup (42C) .................................. 9.3.1
Replacement ........................................................ 11.2.2 Image Data Transfer ................................................. 4.1.9
Film Mask Diffusion Plate Replacement Image Processing Circuit Board Box Cooling Fan
(NC135Y) ........................................................... 11.2.15 (F304/F305) Replacement ................................... 14.2.4
Film Mask Diffusion Plate Replacement Image Processing Circuit Board Box Removal/
(NC240Y) ........................................................... 11.3.21 Re-installation ...................................................... 14.2.6
Film Mask Drive Motor (M403) Replacement .......... 11.2.7 Image Processing Circuit Board CDS20/GFM20/
Film Mask Home Position Sensor (D409) GIP20/GLO20/GIS20/GMB20 (GMC20)
Film Nip Roller Replacement .................................. 11.2.9 Initialization ............................................................... 5.2.1
Film Retainer Replacement (NC135Y) .................. 11.2.10 Input Check of Processing Solution Heater Safety
Film Retainer Replacement (NC240Y) .................... 11.3.4 Thermostat (D710 to D713) ................................. 20.2.2
Film Winding Unit Disassembly/Re-assembly ....... 11.3.24 Input Check of Processing Solution Level Sensor
Film Winding Unit Removal/Re-installation ........... 11.3.23 (FS700 to FS705) ................................................. 20.1.1
Filter Replacement .................................................. 12.2.6 Input Power Supply Section Parts and
Filter Unit Removal/Re-installation .......................... 12.2.1 Circuit Functions .................................................... 4.6.8
Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (42D) ........ 9.3.2 Input Power Supply Unit Removal/Re-installation ... 14.1.2
First IR Filter Replacement ..................................... 12.1.3 Input Unit (Scanner and Image Processor SP1500/
Floppy Disk Drive Inspection ................................... 6.3.29 SP2000) .................................................................... 2.1
FMA20 Circuit Board Installation Information Display (44C) ....................... 9.5.3
(1394 Communication Circuit Board) ..................... 4.5.8 Installation Information Setup (41F) .......................... 9.2.2
FMA20 Circuit Board Replacement ....................... 18.1.11 Installation Information Setup (44D) .......................... 9.5.4
FMB20 Circuit Board (Memory Circuit Board) ........... 4.5.9 Intermittent Process ................................................ 5.4.24
FMB20 Circuit Board Extension .............................. 18.1.9 IPI Sensor (D445) Replacement ........................... 11.3.14
FMB20 Circuit Board Replacement ....................... 18.1.10
FMC20 Circuit Board Jamming in Distribution Section ................................ 7.3.5
(Memory Control Circuit Board) ........................... 4.5.10
FMC20 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/ Lamp Power Supply Replacement ........................ 14.1.11
Re-installation ...................................................... 18.1.8 Lamp Socket Replacement ..................................... 12.1.2
FMC20 Circuit Board Replacement ...................... 18.1.12 Lamp Voltage Adjustment ..................................... 14.1.12
Focus Calibration (43K) .......................................... 9.4.10 Large Size Exit Gear Replacement ......................... 23.2.5
Front Up/Down Section Height Adjustment ............. 17.2.6 Large Size Exit Roller /Belt Replacement ............... 23.2.4
Front Up/Down Section Removal/Re-installation .... 17.2.5 Large Size Print Border Adjustment Procedure ...... 15.5.2
Full (Before Last 2 Order) (D775A)/ Large Size Print Exit Cover Removal/
Full (Complete)(D775B) Sensor Replacement ..... 23.5.8 Re-installation ...................................................... 23.2.2
Full Keyboard Replacement .................................... 11.1.4 Large Size Print Exit Unit ........................................... 23.2
Large Size Print Exit Unit Belt and
G Laser(G-SHG) Data (45E) ..................................... 9.6.6 Roller Cleaning ..................................................... 6.3.24
GFM20 Circuit Board .............................................. 4.1.14 Large Size Print Exit Unit Removal/
GIP20 Circuit Board ................................................ 4.1.15 Re-installation ...................................................... 23.2.3
GIS20 Circuit Board ................................................ 4.1.17 Large Size Side Feed Belt Replacement ................ 23.1.6
GLO20 Circuit Board ............................................... 4.1.16 Large Size Side Feed Belt Tension Adjustment ...... 23.1.7
GMB20/GMC20 Circuit Board ................................. 4.1.13 Large Size Side Feed Roller Replacement ........... 23.1.11
Large Size Side Guide Plate Removal/
Handling Precautions ................................................ 2.3.1 Re-installation .................................................... 23.1.10
25
Heat-up Operation ..................................................... 5.4.1 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (45J) ...... 9.6.10
Heater Cooling Fan ................................................... 5.4.5 Laser Caution Label Locations on Printer ................. 1.2.3
Heater Cooling Fan (F710 to F713) Cleaning ......... 6.3.17 Laser Exposure Check (45C) .................................... 9.6.4
25-5
Index
Laser History Display (45K) .................................... 9.6.11 Magazine Table Stainless Plate Position
Laser Radiation Safety ....................................... 1.1, 1.1.1 Adjustment ........................................................... 15.5.5
Laser Unit ................................................................... 16.2 Magnetic Head Replacement ................................ 11.3.10
Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement ........................... 6.3.11 Main Control Unit Replacement ............................ 14.2.10
Laser Unit Configuration ........................................... 4.3.2 Main Control Unit Section Cover and
Laser Unit Removal/Re-installation ......................... 16.2.4 Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Re-installation ..... 14.1.1
Laser Warning Label ................................................. 1.1.2 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/
LDD20 Circuit board ................................................ 4.5.11 Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (45H) ......... 9.6.9
LDD20 Circuit Board Replacement ......................... 18.1.7 MAIN SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE INFORMATION ..... 2
Leading End Positioning Fork Position Sensor Maintenance and Inspection Procedures ..................... 6.3
(D564) Replacement .......................................... 16.3.14 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS ............................ 6
Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement .... 24.2.3 MAINTENANCE MENU .................................................. 9
Lens Drive Motor (M102) Replacement .................. 13.2.4 Maintenance Schedule ................................................ 6.1
Lens Home Position Sensor (D105) MENU TABLE ................................................................. 3
Replacement ........................................................ 13.2.3 Menu Table ................................................................... 3.1
Lens Registration (43G) ............................................ 9.4.7 Message Icon ............................................................ 7.1.2
Lens Section .............................................................. 13.2 Message Number ...................................................... 7.1.1
Lens Temperature Sensor (D106) Replacement ..... 13.2.1 MESSAGES .................................................................... 7
Lens Unit Replacement ........................................... 13.2.5 Messages ..................................................................... 7.2
Light Source Aperture Belt Replacement ................ 12.2.9 MFC10Y I/O Check (44G) ......................................... 9.5.7
Light Source Aperture Home Position/ MFC10Y Machine Data Setup (44S) ....................... 9.5.14
Standby Sensor (D201/D203) Replacement ........ 12.2.7 MFC10Y Working Information (44L) ....................... 9.5.10
Light Source Aperture Motor (M201) Middle or Lower Side Door Section Paper Sensor
Replacement ........................................................ 12.2.8 (D541 or D552) Replacement .............................. 15.2.9
Light Source Filter Section ......................................... 12.2 Middle Side Door Turn, Middle Side Door, Lower Side
LIGHT SOURCE SECTION .......................................... 12 Door Turn or Lower Side Door Section Feed Motor
Light Source Section (Required Adjustments after (M540, M541, M550 or M551) Replacement ..... 15.2.11
Parts Replacement) ............................................... 2.5.2 Monitor and Keyboard ................................................ 11.1
Light Source Section Cover Interlock Switch ............ 7.3.1 Monitor Replacement .............................................. 11.1.1
Light Source Section Detecting Interlock Switch Monitoring Processing Solution Level ....................... 5.4.6
(D301) Replacement ............................................ 12.1.5 Monitoring Start Timing ............................................. 5.1.6
Light Source Section Exhaust Fan (F303) Mouse Cleaning ........................................................ 6.3.3
Replacement ........................................................ 12.1.7 Mouse Replacement ............................................... 11.1.5
Light Source Section Suction Fan (F302) MTP Sensor 1 (D454)/TAP Sensor (D455)
Replacement ........................................................ 12.1.6 Replacement ...................................................... 11.3.13
Light Source/Scanner Section Configurations .......... 4.1.1 MTP Sensor 1 LED (D447)/TAP Sensor LED
Lower Dust Removal Roller Replacement ............ 11.2.22 (D448) Replacement ............................................ 11.3.2
Lower Dust Removal Roller/Dummy Head MTP Sensor 2 (D453) Replacement ..................... 11.3.25
Opposite Roller Replacement ............................ 11.3.19 MTP Sensor 2 LED (D457) Replacement ............... 11.3.7
Lower or Middle Side Door Sensor Interlock
Switch (D581A/D581B or D582A/D582B) NC135Y I/O Check (44E) .......................................... 9.5.5
Replacement ........................................................ 15.2.4 NC135Y Initialization ................................................. 5.1.4
Lowering Home Position Sensor (D575) NC135Y Machine Data Setup (44Q) ....................... 9.5.12
Replacement ........................................................ 17.1.6 NC135Y Scanning Operation .................................... 5.1.5
NC135Y Sensor Calibration (44A) ............................ 9.5.1
Magazine ID Sensor Position Adjustment ............... 15.5.6 NC135Y Working Information (44J) .......................... 9.5.8
Magazine Paper End Sensor Shading Plate NC240 Strip Film Processing .................................... 5.1.3
Replacement ...................................................... 15.1.18 NC240Y Cartridge Processing .................................. 5.1.2
Magazine Section Door Sensor Interlock Switch NC240Y I/O Check (44F) .......................................... 9.5.6
(D580) Replacement ............................................ 15.1.1 NC240Y Initialization ................................................. 5.1.1
Magazine Setting Lever Assembly Removal/ NC240Y Machine Data Setup (44R) ....................... 9.5.13
25 Re-installation ...................................................... 15.1.2 NC240Y Sensor Calibration (44B) ............................ 9.5.2
Magazine Setting Lever/Gear Replacement ........... 15.1.3 NC240Y Working Information (44K) .......................... 9.5.9
Magazine Table Sliding Gear Replacement ............ 15.1.4 ND Dust Check (43B) ................................................ 9.4.2
ND Filter Density Measurement (43N) .................... 9.4.11
25-6
Index
Nest Section Cover Removal/Re-installation ........ 11.3.26 Paper Feed Section Front Cover Removal/
Nest Section Unit Replacement ............................ 11.3.30 Re-installation ...................................................... 15.2.1
New Installation ............................................................ 8.4 Paper Feed Section Idler Gear Lubrication ............. 6.3.10
Nip Home Position Sensor (D407) Paper Feed Section Roller Cleaning ......................... 6.3.9
Replacement ...................................................... 11.2.17 Paper Jamming in Processor .................................. 7.3.13
Nip Roller Adjustment .................................................... C. Paper Magazine Angle Adjustment ....................... 15.1.16
Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3) Replacement .................. 24.2.8 Paper Magazine Cleaning ......................................... 6.3.6
Noise Filter (NF1) Replacement .............................. 14.1.4 Paper Magazine Nip Roller Replacement ............. 15.1.19
Noise Filter Replacement ...................................... 14.2.11 Paper Magazine Section Cooling Fan (F594)
Normal Operation Drive Control ................................ 5.4.7 Replacement ...................................................... 15.1.17
Normal Warm-up Operation ...................................... 5.4.2 Paper Magazine Table Ball Catch Replacement ... 15.1.20
Paper Magazine Table Slider Lubrication .................. 6.3.7
Operating Panel Replacement ................................ 16.1.8 Paper Release Roller Replacement ........................ 17.1.3
Operation Keyboard/KYA20 Circuit Board PAPER SUPPLY SECTION .......................................... 15
Replacement ........................................................ 11.1.3 Paper Supply Section ................................................ 15.1
Operation Panel Menu Flow ......................................... 3.3 Paper Supply Section (Required Adjustments after
OPERATION SECTION ................................................ 11 Parts Replacement) ............................................... 2.5.5
Operation Section Section (Required Adjustments after Paper Supply Section Configuration ......................... 4.2.1
Parts Replacement) ............................................... 2.5.1 Paper Supply Section Feed Roller Configuration ..... 4.2.2
OPERATION SEQUENCES ............................................ 5 Paper Width Guide Abnormality ................................ 7.3.9
Operational Procedure ................................................. 9.1 Paper Width Guide Adjustment ............................. 16.3.25
Optical and Filter Configurations ............................... 4.1.2 Paper Width Guide Drive Belt Replacement ......... 16.3.13
Optical Axis Adjustment (43H) ................................... 9.4.8 Paper Width Guide Home Position Sensor (D563)
Optical Magnification Calibration (43J) ..................... 9.4.9 Replacement ...................................................... 16.3.12
Optional Adjustment (47) .............................................. 9.8 Paper Width Guide Motor (M563) Replacement ... 16.3.10
Other Size Print Border Adjustment Procedure ...... 15.5.3 Paper Width Guide Motor Bracket Removal/
OUTLINE ......................................................................... 4 Re-installation .................................................... 16.3.11
Output Unit (Laser Printer/Paper Processor PDC20 Circuit Board ................................................. 4.5.7
LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ............................................. 2.2 PDC20 Circuit Board Replacement ....................... 18.1.16
Perforation Sensor (D405) Replacement .............. 11.2.18
P1 and P2 Solution Level Sensor Cleaning ............ 6.3.14 Perforation Sensor LED (D404) Replacement ........ 11.2.8
P1 to PS4 Front Side Rack Auto Washing Valve Piping Diagram for Solution Circulation System ....... 4.6.2
(S720/S722/S724/S726) Replacement ................ 21.3.2 Plug-in Connector for Film Carrier Replacement .... 11.1.6
P1 to PS4 Rear Side Rack Auto Washing Valve Plug-in Connector Replacement (NC135Y) .......... 11.2.38
(S721/S723/S725/S727) Replacement ................ 21.3.3 Plug-in Connector Replacement (NC240Y) .......... 11.3.41
P1-R Replenishment Control .................................. 5.4.13 Plug-in Connector Replacement (Dryer Section) .... 23.3.5
P1-R Stirring One-way Valve Replacement ............ 21.3.5 Positioning Fork Abnormality ................................... 7.3.10
P1-R Stirring Valve/Replenishment Cartridge Power Source System Diagram ................................ 4.5.5
Washing Valve Diagnostics .................................. 7.3.20 Power Supply Restore Control ................................ 5.4.19
P1-R Tank Replacement ......................................... 21.2.8 Power Supply Section ................................................ 14.1
P1-R, P2-RA and P2-RB Cartridge Washing Valve Power Switch Replacement .................................... 18.1.2
(S740 to S742)/P1-R Stirring Valve (S743) Pre-exposure Feed Motor (M560) Replacement ... 16.3.15
Replacement ........................................................ 21.3.4 Pre-exposure Paper Sensor (D562P)
P2-RA and P2-RB Tank Replacement .................... 21.2.6 Replacement ........................................................ 16.3.3
P2-RA/P2-RB Replenishment Control .................... 5.4.14 Pre-heat Operation.................................................... 5.4.3
PAC20 Circuit Board ............................................... 4.6.12 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S)
PAC20 Circuit Board Replacement ......................... 24.1.2 for LP1500SC ......................................................... 2.3.4
Paint (48A) ................................................................ 9.9.1 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S)
Paper Condition Setup (42J) ..................................... 9.3.3 for LP2000SC ......................................................... 2.3.5
Paper Condition Setup Table(LUT) Copy (45L) ...... 9.6.12 Pressure Cover Hook Replacement ...................... 11.2.30
Paper Drawing .......................................................... 5.2.7 Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor (D406)
Paper End Process ................................................. 5.2.13 Replacement ...................................................... 11.2.21
25
Paper Feed .................................................................. 5.2 Pressure Cover Open/Close Sensor (D446)
Paper Feed Section ................................................... 15.2 Replacement ...................................................... 11.3.17
Pressure Cover Removal/Re-installation .............. 11.2.14
25-7
Index
Print Condition Setup and Check (42) ......................... 9.3 Processing Solution Heater Safety Thermostat
Print Exit Belt Tension Adjustment .......................... 23.4.3 (D710 to D713) Replacement .............................. 20.2.5
Print Exit Lower Cover Removal/Re-installation ..... 23.2.1 Processing Solution Heater/Circulation Pump Section
Print Exit Section/Sorter .......................................... 2.5.10 ................................................................................ 20.2
PRINT EXIT SECTION/SORTER .................................. 23 Processing Solution Level Sensor (FS700 to FS705)
Print Exit Unit ............................................................. 23.4 Replacement ........................................................ 20.1.2
Print Exit Unit Belt Cleaning .................................... 6.3.25 Processing Solution Preparation .................................. 2.3
Print Exit Unit Removal/Re-installation ................... 23.4.1 PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT
Print Exit Upper Belt/Roller Replacement ............... 23.4.2 SYSTEM .................................................................... 21
Print Feeding Section/Sorter Configurations ............. 4.6.6 Processing Solution Replenishment System ............. 21.2
Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (45) ........................... 9.6 Processing Solution Replenishment System
PRINTER CONTROL SECTION ................................... 18 (Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement) .... 2.5.9
Printer Control Section ............................................... 18.1 Processing Solution Tank Level Lowering ............... 7.3.17
Printer Control Section (Required Adjustments after Processing Solution Temperature Abnormality ....... 7.3.15
Parts Replacement) ............................................... 2.5.8 Processing Solution Temperature Sensor
Printer Control Section Cooling Exhaust Fan (TS700 to TS703) Replacement ........................... 20.1.3
(F582, F583 and F584) Replacement ................ 18.1.15 Processor ..................................................................... 5.4
Printer Control Section Cooling Suction Fan Processor Adjustment/Maintenence (46) ..................... 9.7
(F587 and F588) Replacement ............................ 18.1.3 Processor Control Section ......................................... 24.1
Printer Control Section Cover Removal/ Processor Control Section Cooling Fan (F792)
Re-installation ...................................................... 18.1.1 Replacement ........................................................ 24.1.3
Printer Electrical Equipment Block Diagram ............. 4.5.3 Processor Control Section Cover Removal/
Printer Electrical Equipment Section Re-installation ...................................................... 24.1.1
(LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ............................................ 4.5 Processor Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D790)
Printer Function Select (45B) .................................... 9.6.3 Replacement ........................................................ 19.1.8
Printer I/O Check (45A) ............................................. 9.6.2 Processor Drive Chain and Sprocket Lubrication ... 6.3.19
Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment (45M) ............. 9.6.13 Processor Drive Gear Replacement ....................... 19.2.6
Printer Operation Data Display (45P) ...................... 9.6.15 Processor Drive Motor (M700) Replacement .......... 19.2.4
Printer Section ......................................................... 10.1.4 Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/
Printer Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ...................... 4.2 Re-installation ...................................................... 19.2.3
Printer Side Cover Removal/Re-installation ............ 15.2.2 Processor Drive Motor Driver Circuit Board
Printer Top Cover Removal/Re-installation ............. 16.1.1 Replacement ........................................................ 19.2.2
Printer Top Cover/Exposure Section Cooling Fans .... 16.1 Processor Drive System ............................................. 19.2
Printer Top Inner Cover Removal/Re-installation .... 16.1.2 Processor Electrical Equipment Block Diagram ...... 4.6.10
Printer Upper Side Cover Removal/ Processor Electrical Equipment Section
Re-installation ...................................................... 15.2.3 Configuration .......................................................... 4.6.7
Printer/Processor Operation Panel Menu Table ........... 3.2 PROCESSOR ELECTRICAL SECTION ....................... 24
Printing Function Inspection .................................... 6.3.31 Processor Electrical Section ...................................... 24.2
Procedure following the Replacement of the Processor Electrical Section Cover Removal/
Main Control Unit ...................................................... 8.6 Re-installation ...................................................... 24.2.1
Processing Chemical (CP-48S) Processor Entrance 1, 2 and 3 Sensor
Handling Precautions ................................................ 1.3 (D571P, D572P and D573P) Replacement .......... 17.2.2
Processing Rack Drive Shaft Removal/ Processor Entrance 1, 2 and 3 Sensor LED
Re-installation ...................................................... 19.1.4 (D571L, D572L and D573L) Replacement ........... 17.2.3
Processing Rack Entrance Side Lower Turn Roller Processor Entrance Unit ........................................... 4.4.2
Replacement ........................................................ 6.3.32 Processor Entry Feed Belt Replacement .............. 17.2.10
Processing Rack Helical Gear Lubrication .............. 6.3.20 Processor Entry Unit Gearbox Disassembly/
Processing Rack Middle Guide Replacement ......... 19.1.5 Re-assembly ...................................................... 17.2.12
Processing Rack Roller Replacement ..................... 19.1.3 Processor Entry Unit Gearbox Removal/
Processing Rack Upper Guide Disassembly/ Re-installation .................................................... 17.2.11
Re-assembly ........................................................ 19.1.2 Processor Entry Unit Removal/Re-installation ........ 17.2.9
25 Processing Section Configuration ............................. 4.6.1 Processor Exhaust Fan 1 and 2 (F790 and F791)
PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM .. 20 Replacement ........................................................ 19.2.7
Processing Solution Heater (H710 to H713) Processor Front Cover Removal/Re-installation ..... 20.2.1
Replacement ........................................................ 20.2.6 Processor I/O Check (46A) ....................................... 9.7.1
25-8
Index
Processor Operating Condition Setup (46B) ............. 9.7.2 Replenisher Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS740 to
Processor Operation Data Display (46C) .................. 9.7.3 FS743/FS745 to FS748)Replacement ................. 21.2.5
Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E) ............... 9.7.5 Replenishing Section Cover Removal/
Processor Rear Cover Removal/Re-installation ...... 19.2.1 Re-installation ...................................................... 21.1.1
Processor Roller Inspection .................................... 6.3.15 Replenishment Cartridge Box Malfunction .............. 7.3.14
PROCESSOR SECTION .............................................. 19 Replenishment Cartridge Opening Malfunction ...... 7.3.23
Processor Section (I/O Parts Diagram) ................... 10.1.5 Replenishment Initialization Control ........................ 5.4.12
Processor Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ................. 4.6 Replenishment Level Sensor Diagnostics .............. 7.3.21
PS Tank Solution Replacement ............................... 6.3.27 Replenishment Pump Control ................................. 5.4.11
PS-R Tank Replacement ......................................... 21.2.7 Replenishment Pump Diagnostics .......................... 7.3.18
Pulley Shaft 1 Replacement .................................. 11.3.37 Replenishment/Auto-washing Piping System ........... 4.6.3
Pulley Shaft 2 Replacement .................................. 11.3.38 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement .......... 2.5
Pulley Shaft 3 Replacement .................................. 11.3.39 Required Chemicals (CP-48S) When Replacing
Pump Output Measurement .................................... 5.4.22 Solutions ................................................................ 2.3.3
PWR20 Circuit Board Replacement ........................ 14.1.7 Return Action after Replenishment System Error ... 7.3.22
Reversion ..................................................................... 8.5
R Laser(R-LD) Data (45D) ........................................ 9.6.5
R, G and B Coaxial Cable Inspection ....................... 6.3.4 SAFETY .......................................................................... 1
Rack Auto Cleaning System Diagnostics ................ 7.3.19 Safety Indication ........................................................... 1.2
Read Head (MRH90) Circuit Board Replacement ... 11.3.6 Safety Thermostat (ST201) Replacement ............... 12.1.4
Reduction Belt Replacement (NC135Y) ................ 11.2.37 Scan Timing Sensor (D403) Replacement ............ 11.2.24
Reduction Belt Replacement (NC240Y) ................ 11.3.40 Scan Timing/Check Tape Sensor LED (D402/D410)
Reduction Pulley Shaft 1 Replacement ................ 11.2.34 Replacement ........................................................ 11.2.3
Reduction Pulley Shaft 2 Replacement ................ 11.2.35 Scanner (SP1500/SP2000) .............................. 4.1, 10.1.1
Reduction Pulley Shaft 3 Replacement ................ 11.2.36 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (43) ........................ 9.4
Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table ................. 6.2 SCANNER ELECTRICAL SECTION ............................ 14
Reinstallation ................................................................ 8.3 Scanner Electrical Section (Required Adjustments
Relay (K1, K2 and K3) Replacement ...................... 24.2.4 after Parts Replacement) ....................................... 2.5.4
Relay (K1/K2)/SSR1 Replacement ......................... 14.1.8 SCANNER SECTION .................................................... 13
Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing ...... 21.1.9 Scanner Section ......................................................... 13.1
Replenisher Cartridge Cap Cleaning Control .......... 5.4.18 Scanner Section (Required Adjustments after Parts
Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement) ......................................................... 2.5.3
Replacement ........................................................ 21.1.8 Scanner Section Cover Removal/Re-installation .... 13.1.3
Replenisher Cartridge Opening Mechanism ............. 4.6.4 Scanner Section Nip Abnormality ............................. 7.3.8
Replenisher Cartridge Opening Motor (M740) Scanner Section Top Cover Removal/
Replacement ........................................................ 21.1.7 Re-installation ...................................................... 13.1.1
Replenisher Cartridge Section ................................... 21.1 Scanning Lamp Section ............................................. 12.1
Replenisher Cartridge Section Removal/ Scanning Lamp Unit Removal/Re-installation ......... 12.1.1
Re-installation ...................................................... 21.1.5 Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position
Replenisher Cartridge Setting Section Upper/Lower Parameter Setup (45G) .......................................... 9.6.8
Sensor (D742/D743) Replacement ...................... 21.1.4 Shading Plate Removal/Re-installation ................... 15.2.6
Replenisher Cartridge Setting Sensor (D741) Shipping Information Reference (41G) ..................... 9.2.3
Replacement ........................................................ 21.1.6 Shut-down Process ................................................... 5.2.2
Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning ..... 6.3.1 Shutter Home Position Sensor (D107)
Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch Replacement ........................................................ 13.1.7
(D744) Replacement ............................................ 21.1.2 Simple Upgrade ........................................................... 8.1
Replenisher Filter Inspection/Replacement ............ 21.2.2 Slider Lower Cover Removal/Re-installation ........... 17.1.5
Replenisher Level Adjustment ................................ 5.4.16 Small Size Print Border Adjustment Procedure ...... 15.5.1
Replenisher Pump (PU741 to PU744) Soft Nip ................................................................... 5.2.10
Replacement ........................................................ 21.2.3 Soft Nip Cam Drive Belt Replacement .................. 11.2.28
Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement ................... 21.2.4 Soft Nip Drive Belt Replacement ........................... 11.2.25
Replenisher Pump Valves/PS-R Pump Bellows Soft Nip Drive Motor (M401) Replacement ........... 11.2.26
25
Replacement ........................................................ 6.3.18 Soft Nip Drive Section Removal/Re-installation .... 11.2.27
Replenisher Tank Section Cover Removal/ SOFTWARE INSTALLATION .......................................... 8
Re-installation ...................................................... 21.2.1
25-9
Index
Solenoid Valve (S570 and S571) Replacement ...... 17.1.9 Upper Guide (Pressure Cover)/
Solution Hose and Clamp Inspection ...................... 6.3.26 Nip Roller Adjustment ......................................... 11.2.39
Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure ................ 2.3.2 Upper Guide Plate Removal/Re-installation ............ 23.1.8
Sorter Chain Tension Adjustment .......................... 23.5.10 Upper Guide Roller Replacement ........................... 11.3.3
Sorter Circuit Board Section Cover Removal/ Upper or Lower Cutter Home Position Sensor
Re-installation ...................................................... 23.5.2 (Close)(D508 or D528) Replacement ................... 15.1.9
Sorter Drive Motor (M771) Replacement ................ 23.5.7 Upper or Lower Cutter Home Position Sensor
Sorter Drive Motor Section Cover Removal/ (Open)(D507 or D527) Replacement ................. 15.1.10
Re-installation ...................................................... 23.5.3 Upper or Lower Cutter Motor (M500 or M520)
Sorter SU1100Y ......................................................... 23.5 Replacement ...................................................... 15.1.12
Sorter SU1100Y Removal/Re-installation ............... 23.5.1 Upper or Lower Feed Entrance Guide Plate
Sorter Tray Stop Position Adjustment ..................... 23.5.5 Removal/Re-installation ....................................... 15.2.7
Special Operations (48) ............................................... 9.9 Upper or Lower Feed Guide Plate Removal/
Spectral Calibration (43P) ....................................... 9.4.12 Re-installation ...................................................... 15.2.8
Speed Adjustment ..................................................... 5.2.9 Upper or Lower Magazine ID Sensor
Speed Adjustment Section ......................................... 15.3 (D500 to D504 or D520 to D524) Replacement ... 15.1.7
Speed Adjustment Section Guide Plate Removal/ Upper or Lower Magazine ID Sensor Cover
Re-installation ...................................................... 15.3.4 Removal/Re-installation ....................................... 15.1.6
Speed Adjustment Section Nip Roller Upper or Lower Paper End Sensor (D505 or D525)
Splice ...................................................................... 5.2.12 Upper or Lower Paper Splice Sensor
Spool Motor (M442) Replacement ........................ 11.3.32 (D506 or D526) Replacement ............................ 15.1.13
Sprocket Bracket Assembly Replacement .............. 19.2.9 Upper or Lower Paper Supply Motor
SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement ....................... 24.2.5 (M501 or M521)/Belt Replacement ...................... 15.1.8
SSR Replacement ................................................. 17.1.15 Upper Side Door Section Nip Abnormality ................ 7.3.7
Start Switch Replacement ..................................... 14.2.12 Upper Side Door Section Nip Release Motor (M545)
Start-up Initialization .................................................. 5.3.1 or Upper Side Door Section Feed Motor (M542)
Sub-scanning Belt Replacement ............................. 16.3.1 Replacement ........................................................ 15.3.1
Sub-scanning Motor (M561) Driver Circuit Board Upper Side Door Section Nip Release Sensor
Replacement ...................................................... 16.3.16 (D547) Replacement ............................................ 15.3.2
Sub-scanning Motor (M561) Replacement ........... 16.3.17 Upper Side Door Sensor Interlock Switch
Sub-tanks ................................................................... 20.1 (D583A/D583B) Replacement .............................. 15.2.5
Suction Cup Replacement ...................................... 17.1.1 User Identification ..................................................... 9.1.1
Suction Unit Removal/Re-installation ...................... 17.1.4
SWA20 Circuit Board (D776) Replacement ............ 23.5.6 Variable Aperture Lens Bracket Removal/
System Operation Setup and Check (41) .................... 9.2 Re-installation ...................................................... 13.2.2
Variable Film Mask Removal/Re-installation ........... 11.2.6
Table Left Cover Removal/Re-installation ............... 11.1.2 Variable Film Mask Timing Inspection ..................... 11.2.5
Table Right Cover (Scanner Section Rear Cover) VEI/Chucking Sensor (D442/D443)
Removal/Re-installation ..................................... 13.1.10 Replacement ...................................................... 11.3.29
Test Pattern Printing (453) ........................................ 9.6.1
Torque Limiter Replacement ................................. 11.3.33 Waste Solution Hose Replacement ........................ 20.3.1
Transformer Replacement .......................... 14.1.5, 24.1.6 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS749)
Tray Replacement ................................................... 23.5.9 Replacement ........................................................ 20.3.2
Tray Stop Position Sensor (D774) Replacement .... 23.5.4 Waste Solution Process .......................................... 5.4.25
Trouble Shooting .......................................................... 7.3 Waste Solution System .............................................. 20.3
Waste Solution Tank Replacement ......................... 20.3.3
Up/Down Drive Belt/Timing Belt Replacement ...... 17.1.11 Width Guide Position Setting .................................... 5.2.4
Update .......................................................................... 8.2 Winding Upper Nip Roller Replacement ............... 11.3.11
Upper Cover Removal/Re-installation (NC135Y) .... 11.2.1 Working Information (43F) ........................................ 9.4.6
Upper Cover Removal/Re-installation (NC240Y) .... 11.3.1 Write Head (MWH01) Circuit Board Replacement ... 11.3.5
25 Upper Dust Removal Roller Replacement .............. 11.3.8
Upper Feed Belt and Holding Belt Replacement .... 17.2.7 X-#### Actions .......................................................... 7.1.3
Upper Guide (Pressure Cover) Adjustment .................... B.
Zoom Lens and ND Filter Cleaning ........................... 6.3.2
25-10
FAX ; 81-3-5484-0454
E-mail ; td@eigi.tokyo.fujifilm.co.jp
Request for Feedback

Fujifilm’s Technical Division Photo Products Marketing would be most grateful if you would take copies of this
form, one for each manual being used, then complete and send them to us by FAX or E-mail.
Your opinions will contribute greatly to an accurate assessment of the overall quality of each manual.
All questions can be answered by ticking [✓] the appropriate box(es), but in addition to these answers, please
provide us with your written comments in the lined spaces following each block of questions.
< Questionnaire >

Title : FRONTIER 350/370 SERVICE MANUAL
Manual Title and Reference Number Third Edition
Reference Number : PP3-C878C
Your Name and Company Nane :

Company :
E-mail Address :
Your E-mail Address and FAX Number
FAX Number :
Question 1 • How would you rate this equipment-related manual overall?

(1) Very thorough (2) Good
(3) Slightly substandard (4) Substandard
• If you have ticked (3) or (4), please give us your reasons.
Question 2 • Have you found any technical errors, errors in spelling, or missing words in this manual?
Yes No
• If you have ticked (Yes), please let us know what these errors and missing words are.
Question 3 • How would you rate the writing (language, choice of words/phrases, etc.) and the illustrations/
diagrams, etc.?
(1) Clear and easy to follow (2) Should be simplified
(3) Difficult to follow
(1)’ [Illustrations, etc.] Of adequate size
(2)’ [Illustrations, etc.] Too small
(3)’ [Illustrations, etc.] Difficult to follow
• If you have ticked (2), (3) or (3)’, please give us your reasons.
Additional
Comments/
Requests
Please return this questionnaire to FAX No. : Tokyo 81-3-5484-0454,

or to this address E-mail address : td@eigi.tokyo.fujifilm.co.jp
FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD.
26-30, Nishiazabu 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 106-8620, Japan.
Ref.No.PP3-C878E3 TD-03.05-FG (LF) Printed in Japan

PP3 C878e3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PP3 C878e3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

Precautions Generally Applying to All Servicing Operations

Service Manual Appropriations

2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service

3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore

4. FUJIFILM’s prior consent is required in regard to the following.

K Manual copying in whole or in part.

1. SAFETY ................................................................................................................................................ 1-1

1.1 Laser Radiation Safety ................................................................................................................ 1-2

2. MAIN SPECIFICATION AND SERVICE INFORMATION .................................................... 2-1

3. MENU TABLE ..................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Menu Table .................................................................................................................................. 3-2

3.3.6 5 [SPECIAL PRINT] Item .................................................................................................... 3-12

4. OUTLINE .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Scanner (SP1500/SP2000) ......................................................................................................... 4-3

4.6 Processor Section (LP1500SC/LP2000SC) ................................................................................. 4-46

5. OPERATION SEQUENCES ........................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Auto Film Carrier ......................................................................................................................... 5-3

5.4.3 Pre-heat Operation ............................................................................................................. 5-57

6. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS ........................................................................................ 6-1

6.1 Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................................................ 6-2

6.3.11 Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement ....................................................................................... 6-9

7. MESSAGES ......................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Error Indication Rule .................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.3.17 Processing Solution Tank Level Lowering .......................................................................... 7-89

8. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Simple Upgrade ........................................................................................................................... 8-2

9. MAINTENANCE MENU .................................................................................................................. 9-1

9.1 Operational Procedure ................................................................................................................ 9-3

9.5.3 Installation Information Display (44C) ................................................................................. 9-17

10. I/O CHECK ......................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.1 I/O Parts Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 10-2

11. OPERATION SECTION .................................................................................................................. 11-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 11-3

11.2.25 Soft Nip Drive Belt Replacement ........................................................................................ 11-13

11.3.28 Door Open/Close Sensor (D441) Replacement ................................................................. 11-32

12. LIGHT SOURCE SECTION ........................................................................................................... 12-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 12-2

13. SCANNER SECTION ...................................................................................................................... 13-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 13-2

13.1.6 CCD Unit Removal/Re-installation .................................................................................... 13-4

14. SCANNER ELECTRICAL SECTION ......................................................................................... 14-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 14-2

14.2.11 Noise Filter Replacement .................................................................................................. 14-12

15. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ......................................................................................................... 15-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 15-3

15.3.3 Speed Adjustment Section Nip Roller Replacement .......................................................... 15-18

16. EXPOSURE SECTION .................................................................................................................. 16-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 16-2

16.3.10 Paper Width Guide Motor (M563) Replacement ................................................................ 16-11

17. DISTRIBUTION SECTION ............................................................................................................. 17-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 17-2

17.2.10 Processor Entry Feed Belt Replacement ........................................................................... 17-15

18. PRINTER CONTROL SECTION .................................................................................................. 18-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 18-2

19. PROCESSOR SECTION ................................................................................................................ 19-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 19-2

20. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM ......................................................... 20-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 20-2

21. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM .................................................. 21-1

Parts Location .............................................................................................................................. 21-2

21.3.3 P1 to PS4 Rear Side Rack Auto Washing Valve